Global Detection

Global Detection
Electronic and
electromechanical sensors
Catalogue
2006/2007
Flexibility Ingenuity Simplicity
b Interchangeable b Auto-adapts to its b Cost effective
modular functions, environment, "plug & “optimum” offers that
to better meet the play" make selection easy for
requirements for b Application functions, most typical applications
extensions control, communication b Products that are
b Software and and diagnostics easy to understand for
accessories common to embedded in the users, electricians and
multiple product families products automation specialists
b User-friendly b User-friendly intuitive
This international site allows you to access all the operation either directly programming
Telemecanique products in just 2 clicks via on the product or
comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct remotely
links to:
b Complete library: technical documents, catalogs,
certificates, FAQs, brochures...
b Selection guides from the e-catalog.
b Product discovery sites and their Flash
animations.
You will also find illustrated overviews, news to

which you can subscribe, a discussion forum, the Compactness
list of country contacts... b High functionality in a
To live automation solutions every day! minimum of space
b Freedom in Openness
implementation b Compliance with field
bus, connection, and
software standards
b Enabling
decentralised or remote
surveillance via the web
with Transparent Ready
products
Telemecanique,
catalogues for p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
Global Detection
Electronic and
Electromechanical sensors
Catalogue
2006/2007
Electronic and
electromechanical sensors
N° 821410
MKTED206101EN
Detection Automatisation Operator dialog Motion and Drives

Global Detection Modicon Momentum Automation and relay Control and signalling Motion control Lexium 05
Electronic and distributed I/O and control functions components N° 808610 -
electromechanical sensors N° 807861 - MKTED205061EN N° 70455 - N° 805911 - MKTED205021EN DIA7ED2050910EN
N° 821410 - MKTED206101EN MKTED204011EN
Photo-electric sensors
Plug-in relays
Control and signalling units
Cam switches

Proximity sensors Automation platform Electronic timers Beacons and indicator banks Motion control Lexium 15
Capacitive proximity sensors Modicon Quantum and Control relays Control and pendant stations N° 816811 -
Ultrasonic sensors Unity - Concept Proworx Counters Controllers DIA2ED2060506EN
Limit switches software Smart relays Front panels, mounting kits
Pressure switches N° 802621 - Emergency stops Servodrives and Servomotors
Rotary encoders MKTED204071EN Software Foot switches Motion control modules
Radio frequency identification PLCs and safety controllers Modicon Premium and
Machine cabling accessories programming software
Modicon Quantum
Automation platform
Modicon Premium and
Human/Machine interfaces
N° 821230 - MKTED206071EN

Unity - PL7 software Soft starters and variable
N° 802625 - Operator interface terminals, speed drives
MKTED204072EN industrial PCs, Web servers, N° 802660- MKTED204091EN
HMI and SCADA PC-based
software Software
Software for drives and motors
Software
Operator terminal software Motor control programming
software
Not all products shown in this catalogue are available in every country.
Check individual country’s web site or Sales Office for product availability.
See on: www.schneider-electric.com
Simply Smart !
p p p p p p p p all Automation & Control functions
Motor control Machine safety Interfaces & I/O AS-Interface Networks &
communication
This catalogue contains

This catalogue contains
Motor starter solutions

Automation and Control
function products relating to Interfaces, I/O splitter boxes
Automation and Control
function products relating to

Control and protection Safety and power supplies the AS-Interface cabling Ethernet TCP/IP and
components N° 70263 - system Web tecnologies
N° 814711 - MKTED203113EN
MKTED205103EN Transparent Ready
Safety solutions using Plug-in relays N° 809201 -

MKTED205102EN
Contactors Preventa Analog converters AS-Interface cabling system
Circuit-breakers, fuse carriers N° 816630 - MKTED206051EN Discrete interfaces N° 804961 - MKTED204121EN Embedded Web services
Thermal relays Pre-wired interfaces
Combinations, motor Safety PLCs IP67 Splitter boxes IP20/IP67 interfaces, cables, Ethernet communication
controllers Safety controllers repeaters, addressing and services
Safety modules Connectors adjustment terminals
Mounting solutions Safety monitors and interfaces Cable ends, terminal blocks Connecting Ethernet devices
Motor starter mounting kits on As-Interface Control stations, keypads,
Switches, light curtains, mats

beacons & indicator banks Transparent Ready partners
IP 20 distributed inputs/ Master modules for PLCs

Power supplies Emergency stops, control outputs Advantys STB
stations, enabling switches, N° 820670 - AS-Interface power supplies CANopen
foot switches, beacons & MKTED206061EN in machines & installations
indicator banks
Modules for automation island
Motor controllers, enclosures, N° 813350 - MKTED205101EN
variable speed drives
Interfaces, I/O splitter boxes Network interface,
Switch disconnectors, CANopen implementations
and power supplies power distribution, digital I/O,
thermal-magnetic motor circuit Software
N° 70263 - analogs and application-
breakers, enclosed D.O.L. Software to design and install Telemecanique devices
MKTED203113EN specific
starters AS-Interface system, safety
monitors and controllers on Infrastructure, wiring system
Switch mode power supplies Software
Software AS-Interface programming
Safety mat configuration STB configuration software software CANopen partners
Filtered rectified power
software
supplies and transformers
General Detection of data 0
Introduction
Detection
A vital function
The detection function is vital because it is the first link in the chain of information for an industrial process. In an
automatic system, sensors collect information regarding:
b all the events that are required to control it, so that they can be taken into account by the control systems, using
an established program;
b the progress of the various stages of the process when this program is executed.
Detect
Process Control
ESC DEL MOD ENT
Dialogue
Information chain for an industrial process
The various detection functions

Detection requirements are extremely varied. The most basic needs are:
b monitoring presence, absence or position of an object,
b verifying passing, travel or blockage of objects,
b counting.
These requirements are generally met using discrete devices, as in typical applications for detecting parts in
production lines or handling activities, as well as for detecting people and vehicles.
There are other more specific requirements, such as the detection of:
b pressure (or level) of gas or liquid,
b shape,
b position (angular, linear),
b tags, with reading and writing of coded information.
In addition to these, there are numerous requirements mainly relating to the environment. Depending on their
location, the sensors have to be resistant to:
b moisture or immersion (e.g. watertight reinforced seal),
b corrosion (chemical industries or even food and beverage installations),
b extreme temperature fluctuations (e.g. tropical regions),
b all types of dirt (outside or inside machinery),
b and even vandalism...
In order to meet all these requirements, Telemecanique has designed all sorts of sensors that feature various
technologies.
4
General Detection of data 0
Introduction
Detection (continued)
The various sensor technologies
For its sensors Telemecanique use a number of different physical measuring principles, the most important being:
b mechanical (pressure, force) for electromechanical limit switches,
b electromagnetism (field, force) for magnetic sensors, inductive proximity sensors,
b light (power or deflection) for photo-electric sensors,
b capacitance for capacitive proximity sensors,
b acoustic (wave travel time) for ultrasonic sensors,
b fluid (pressure) for pressure switches.
These principles offer advantages and limitations for each type of sensor, for example: some are rugged but have
to be in contact with the part being detected, others can be located in aggressive environments but can only be
used with metal parts.
Additional sensor functions

Various functions have been developed to make sensors easier to use, self-teach mode being one. With this
teach function, the effective detection range of the device can be defined simply by pressing a button, for
example: learning the ultra-precise (± 6 mm for ultrasonic sensors) minimum and maximum ranges (suppression
of foreground and background), and environment recognition for photo-electric sensors.
Selection guide for the various technologies

Object detected Detection distance Environment Technology Transfer and output Advantages
Non deformable parts On contact, 0 to 400 mm All types Mechanical Electromechanical Intuitive, high power
(using lever) contact volt-free contact
Positive contact
Metal parts 60 mm All types Inductive Solid-state Robust, watertight,

Digital virtually immune to
or analogue interference
Magnets 100 mm All types Magnetic Reed contact Detection through all
non ferrous materials
All parts 300 mm Dust free Photo-electric Solid-state Long range

Fluid free Digital Detection of all types of
or analogue objects
60 mm Dry Capacitive Solid-state Detection through all

Digital non conductive
or analogue materials
15 m Without considerable Ultrasonic Solid-state Robust

“noise” (shock waves) Digital Detection of transparent
Vapour free or analogue materials and powders
Electronic tag, books, parts, A few metres Sensitive to metal Radio frequency Numerical data Read/write tag,
packages, etc. traceability
5
6
General contents 0
Global Detection
Electronic and electromechanical
sensors
1 – Photo-electric sensors
Osiris® Universal, Optimum and Application series (1)
2 – Inductive Proximity sensors

Osiprox® Universal, Optimum and Application series (1)
3 – Capacitive proximity sensors
4 – Ultrasonic sensors
Osisonic® Universal, Optimum and Application series (1)
5 – Limit switches
Osiswitch® Universal, Optimum and Application series (1)
6 – Sensors for pressure control
7 – Rotary encoders
8 – RFID - radio frequency identification
9 – Machine cabling accessories
10 – Appendices
(1) Select the sensor according to your specific requirements
«Universal» series «Optimum» series «Application» series

Multi-purpose products Designed for essential and Offer functions specifically
providing multiple functions repetitive functions for specialist needs, thus
providing the ideal solution
for more complex
applications
7
Contents 0
1 - Photo-electric sensors
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 1/2
b Osiconcept®: Offering Simplicity through Innovation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/10

1 b General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/12
Osiris® Universal, Osiconcept®

b Design 18, metal or plastic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/24
b Miniature design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/30
b Compact design, 50 x 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/34
b Compact design, 30 x 92 x 77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/38
Osiris® Optimum
b Design 18
v Plastic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/26

v Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/28
b Miniature design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/32
b Compact design, 50 x 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/36
b Compact design, 30 x 92 x 77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/40
Osiris® Universal and Optimum

b Fibre design, amplifiers with teach mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/42
b Fibre optic light guides for Osiris® Universal and Optimum amplifiers . . page 1/44
Osiris® other formats, general use

b Compact design
v Solid-state output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/54

v 1 NC/NO relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/58
Osiris® Application
b d.c. supply. Solid-state output with stability LED and alarm output . . . . page 1/60
b a.c. or d.c. supply. 1 C/O time delay relay output with stability LED. . . . page 1/62
Osiris® Application, assembly series

b Metal case, cylindrical, threaded M8 x 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/64
b Dynamic detection of passage of objects, counting parts. . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/66
1/0
Osiris® Application, packaging series
b For detection of transparent materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/68
b For detection of transparent materials, with teach mode and automatic

1
compensation for accumulation of dirt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/70
b Thru-beam system for detection of water and aqueous liquids . . . . . . . page 1/72
b For detection of labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/74
b For colour detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/76
b For detection of contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/80
b Colour mark readers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/82
b Luminescence sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/84
Osiris® Application, materials handling series

b With adjustable background suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/86
b With analogue output signal 4…20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/88
b With analogue output signal 4…20 mA and 0…10 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/90
b Thru-beam system with high “excess gain” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/92
b Laser transmission. Plastic case, cylindrical, M18 x 1 threaded . . . . . . page 1/94
b Optical fork type with integral amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/96
Osiris® Application, tertiary sector series

b For flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/98
b With integral buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/100
Osiris® Application, food and beverage processing

series
b Design 18, metal, stainless steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/102
b Stainless steel case M18 x 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/104
Osiris® Application AC/DC

b Design 18, two-wire, a.c. or d.c. supply, solid-state output with
adjustable sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/108
Osiris® Universel, Optimum and Application

b Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/110
b General, curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/116
b Substitution table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/128
1/1
Selection guide 1
Photo-electric sensors 1
Osiris® Universal
Format Design 18
1 Osiconcept
Dimensions (w x h x d) in mm Ø 18, threaded M18 x 1

L: 62…92 (1)
Case Plastic Metal
Maximum Without accessory (diffuse with 0.12 0.12

sensing background suppression)
distance (m) Without accessory (diffuse) 0.40 0.40
related to
With reflector (polarised reflex) 3 3
system
With reflector (reflex) – –
With thru-beam accessory (thru-beam) 20 20
Degree of protection IP 65 IP 65
IP 67 IP 67
Supply c p p
a – –
z – –
Output Solid-state (PNP or NPN) (1) Solid-state (PNP or NPN) (1)
NO or NC (programmable) NO or NC (programmable)
Connection Pre-cabled p p
Connector p p
Screw terminals – –
Type reference XUB 0A XUB 0B
1/24 1/24
(1) Depending on model.
1/2
Selection guide 1
Osiris® Universal
Miniature design Compact design, 50 x 50 Compact design Fibre optic design

4-digit display
Osiconcept Osiconcept Osiconcept Teach mode
1
Pre-cabled: 12 x 34 x 20 18 x 50 x 50 30 x 92 x 77 10 x 40 x 65 (amplifier)
M8 connector: 12 x 45 x 20
Plastic Plastic (amplifier)
0.10 0.28 1.3 –
0.55 1.2 3 0.006…0.070 (2)

4 5.7 15 –
– – – –
14 35 60 0.050…1.5 (2)
IP 65 IP 65 IP 65 IP 65 (amplifier)
IP 67 IP 67 IP 64 (fibres)
p p p p
– – – –
– p p –
Solid-state (PNP or NPN) (1) Solid-state (PNP and NPN) Solid-state (PNP and NPN) Solid-state (PNP or NPN) (1)
NO or NC (programmable) or 1 NC/NO relay (1) or 1 NC/NO relay (1) NO or NC (programmable)
NO or NC (programmable) NO or NC (programmable)
p p – p
p p p p
– – p –
XUM 0A XUK 0A XUX 0A XUD A2
1/30 1/34 1/38 1/42 and 1/44

(2) Depending on fibres.
1/3
Selection guide 1
Osiris® Optimum
Format Design 18
Dimensions (w x h x d) in mm Ø 18, threaded M18 x 1

L: 46…92 (1)
Case Plastic Metal
Maximum Without accessory (diffuse with – –

sensing background suppression)
distance (m) Without accessory (diffuse) 0.15 or 0…0.8 (2) 0.15 or 0…0.8 (2)
related to
With reflector (polarised reflex) 3 3
system
With reflector (reflex) 5.5 5.5
With thru-beam accessory (thru-beam) 20 20
IP 67 IP 67
Supply c p p
a – –
z – –
Output Solid-state (PNP or NPN) (1) Solid-state (PNP or NPN) (1)

NO or NC (1) NO or NC (1)
Connection Pre-cabled p p
Connector p p
Screw terminals – –
Type reference XUB pA XUB pB
Page 1/26 1/28

(2) Adjustable model.
1/4
Selection guide 1
Osiris® Optimum
Miniature design Compact design, 50 x 50 Compact design Fibre optic design

Teach mode
12 x 34 x 27 18 x 50 x 50 30 x 92 x 77 10 x 40 x 65 (amplifier)
Plastic Plastic (amplifier)
– – – –
0…0.15 or 0…0.6 (1) (2) 1.5 3 0.006…0.095 (3)
3 8 15 –
6 10 20 –
12 45 60 0.050…2 (3)
IP 65 IP 65 IP 65 IP 65 (amplifier)
IP 67 IP 67 IP 64 (fibres)
p p p p
– – – –
– p p –
Solid-state (PNP or NPN) (1) Solid-state (PNP or NPN) Solid-state (PNP or NPN) Solid-state (PNP or NPN) (1)
NO or NC (1) or 1 NC/NO relay (1) or 1 NC/NO relay (1) NO or NC (programmable)
NO or NC (1) NO or NC (1)
p p – p
p p p p
– – p –
XUM pA XUK pA XUX pA XUD A1
1/32 1/36 1/40 1/42 and 1/44

(2) Adjustable model.
1/5
Selection guide 1
Recommended applications Other formats Assembly
1 General use Diameter 8 metal range Detection and counting of

objects being fed to or
exiting a machine
Robustness and savings in

space on machine
Format Compact design Design 8 Frame design
Dimensions (w x h x d) in mm 18 x 70 x 35 Ø 8, threaded 15 x 50 x 108

M8 x 1 15 x 86 x 131
L: 40 25 x 230 x 205/265/335
Case Plastic Metal
Sensing Diffuse with background suppression – – –

distance (m)
related to Diffuse 0.7 0.05 –
system
Polarised reflex 4 (with Ø 80 mm reflector) – –
Reflex 6 (with Ø 80 mm reflector) – –

Thru-beam 8 2 0.03-0.06-0.12-0.18-0.25 (1)
Degree of protection IP 67 IP 65 (1) IP 65

IP 67 (1)
Supply c p p p
a p – –
z – – –
Output Solid-state Solid-state (PNP or NPN)
Connection Pre-cabled p p –
Connector p p p
Screw terminals – – –
Type reference XUL XUA XUV F
Page 1/54 1/64 1/66

1/6
Selection guide 1
Packaging
Detection of any transparent

object
Detection of
water and
aqueous
For detection For detection of colours,
of labels sorting
Colour mark readers Luminescence sensors
1
liquids
Bottle, flask, containers, film, Level in Specifically for Recognises colours for sorting Detection of reference marks, Detection of invisible
etc. opaque flasks packaging or checking parts contrasting colours and reference marks, markings,
etc. machines markings on packaging, adhesives, varnishes, etc.
printing, labelling machines, Sensitive to the bluing agents
etc. generally present in inks,
adhesives, varnishes, etc.
Design 18 Compact Compact Fork design Compact Compact Compact Compact Design 18 Compact
design, design design design or fibre design design design
50 x 50 design
Ø 18, threaded 18 x 50 x 50 13 x 47 x 23 20 x 90 x 26 50 x 50 x 25 30 x 80 x 57 50 x 50 x 15 30 x 87 x 63 Ø 18, 31 x 81 x 58
M18 x 1 25 x 92 x 54 31 x 81 x 58 threaded
L: 64, 78 or 92 M18 x 1
(2) L: 82
Plastic or Plastic Plastic Metal Plastic Metal Plastic Metal Metal
stainless steel
(2)
– – – – – – – – – –
– – – – 0.020 0.040…0.060 0.019 0.009 0.02 0.009

0.040…0.250
(1)
0...1,4 (with – – – – – – – – –
reflector)
– 1.5 – – – – – – –
– – 50 0.002 – – – – – –
IP 65 IP 65 IP 65 IP 65 IP 65 IP 65 (2) IP 65 IP 67 IP 67 IP 67
IP 67 IP 67 (2)
p p p p p p p p p p
– – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – –
Solid-state (PNP or NPN) Solid-state (PNP or NPN) Solid-state Solid-state

(PNP) (PNP or NPN)
p p p – – p – – – –
p p – p p – p p p p
– – – – – – – – – –
XUB T XUK T XUM W XUV K XUK C XUR C XUK R XUR K XU5 M XUR U
1/68 1/70 1/72 1/74 1/76 1/78 1/80 1/82 1/84 1/84
1/7
Selection guide (continued) 1
Recommended applications Materials handling
1 Diffuse with
background
Diffuse with analogue
output
Thru-beam
with high
Thru-beam
laser for very
Fork type
suppression excess gain long sensing

distances
(100 m)
High Measurement, servo control, Detection of Transtorage, Sensing of

precision, position control, eccentricity objects in storage, flags in lifts
detection of monitoring, concentricity difficult travelling and
any dark or monitoring, etc. environments cranes, transtorers.
shiny object, (smoke, dust, implement- Integrated
including mist, etc.). ation of long amplifier
small sized Measuring distance
opacity parallel beam
barriers
(up to 20 m)
Format Compact Design 18 Compact Design 18 Fork design

design, design
50 x 50
Dimensions (w x h x d) in mm 18 x 50 x 50 Ø 18, threaded 27 x 85 x 61 Ø 18, threaded Ø 18, threaded 14 x 58 x 68
M18 x 1 M18 x 1 M18 x 1
L: 82 L: 82 L: 76
Case Plastic Metal Plastic Metal Plastic
Sensing Diffuse with background suppression 1 – – – – –

distance (m) Diffuse – 0.05…0.4 0.20…0.80 – – –
related to
Polarised reflex – – – – – –
system
Reflex – – – – – –
Thru-beam – – – 50 100 0.03
Degree of protection IP 65 IP 67 IP 67 IP 67 IP 67 IP 54
Supply c p p p p p p
a – – – – – –
z – – – – – –
Output Solid-state Analogue (PNP) Solid-state Solid-state (PNP and NPN)

(PNP or NPN) (PNP)
+ analogue
Connection Pre-cabled p – – – – p
Connector p p – p p –
Screw terminals – – p – – –
Type reference XUK 8 XU5 M XUJ XU2 M XU2 XUV
Page 1/86 1/88 1/90 1/92 1/94 1/96
1/8
Selection guide 1
Building, tertiary sectors Food and beverage processing Ø 18 AC/DC Accessories Safety
With stability
LED.
Monitoring of
movement, relay
Monitoring of
movement with
STAINLESS STEEL cylindrical
sensor
2-wire a.c. or d.c. Reflectors, fixing
supply clamps, mounting
Surveillance
using
1
With alarm output audible (grade 304 CU) and adjustment single-beam light
output (for signalling accessories, curtains (1)
XUC pAK only) (buzzer), relay converters, etc.
output
For use in vicinity of food or
beverage processing machines
Compact design Compact design Design 18 Design 18 Accessories Design 18

light curtains
45 x 95 x 44 18 x 70 x 45 27 x 85 x 61 Ø 18, threaded Ø 18, threaded Ø 18, threaded – Ø 18, threaded

M18 x 1 M18 x 1 M18 x 1 M18 x 1
L: 64...92 L: 62...88 L: 82...110 L: 63…95 (2)
Plastic Plastic Stainless steel Stainless steel Metal – Metal or plastic
1.2 – – 0.12 – 0.12 – –

– – – 0.3 0.10 0.4 – –
6 – – 2 2 2 – –
– 6 6 – 4 – – –
50 – – 15 15 15 – 8 or 50 (2)
IP 67 IP 67 IP 40 IP 67, IP 69K IP 67 IP 67 – IP 67 (XU2 S)
p – – p p – – p (XU2 S)
– – – – – – – –
p p p – – p – p (XPS CE)
Solid-state PNP or 1 C/O relay 1 N/O relay Solid-state (PNP Solid-state (PNP Solid-state – Solid-state
NPN (XUC pAK) and NPN) and NPN)
1 C/O relay
(XUC pAR)
p p – p p p – p (XU2 S)
p – – p p p – p (XU2 S)
– – p – – – – p (XPS CE)
XUC XUL XUJ B XUB 0Sp XUp N18 XUp M18 XUZ XU2 S +
XPS CE
1/60 1/98 1/100 1/102 1/104 1/108 1/110 Refer to our
“Safety solutions”
catalogue
(1) Preventa XPS-CE safety module + 1 to 4 thru-beam pairs of photo-electric sensors XU2 S.
1/9
General 1
Osiris®
Osiconcept®: Offering Simplicity through Innovation
Principle
1 In proposing the Osiconcept technology, Telemecanique brand offers simplicity

through innovation.
b With Osiconcept, a single product meets all optical detection needs.

Indeed, at the press of the “Teach mode” pushbutton, the product automatically takes
up an optimum configuration to meet the application’s requirements.
1 Max. sensing 1 Direct detection of the object.
distance
2 Direct detection with background suppression.
3 Reflector detection (reflector accessory).
4 Optical receiver detection (transmitter accessory for thru-beam use).
2
b But Osiconcept also means:
vincreased performance:
sensing distance guaranteed and optimized for each application,
Max. sensing
distance v simplified use:
intuitive setting-up and reduced, simpler maintenance,
v lower costs:
the number of references has been divided by 10 to simplify selection and
3 procurement and significantly decrease storage costs,
v guaranteed maximum productivity.
Max. sensing
distance
Max. sensing
distance
Straightforward N/O or N/C output

No object
b Irrespective of the detection mode used (diffuse, reflex, thru-beam, etc), the
output signals become either N/O or N/C (1).
NO
NC b Osiconcept means immediate, intuitive setting-up accessible to all.
(1) The product is delivered in N/O configuration. N/O or N/C is selected by simply pressing the
Object present Teach mode button.
NO
NC
Mounting accessories
Telemecanique brand proposes a complete, inexpensive range of mounting and

protection accessories (conventional or 3D brackets and clamps) providing solutions
to all setting-up and adjustment problems.
1/10
Presentation 1
Osiris®
Design Cylindrical 18 Miniature Compact 50 x 50 Compact
Dimensions (l x h x d) in mm M18 x 64 12 x 34 x 20 18 x 50 x 50 30 x 92 x 77
Maximum Without accessory with background 0.12 0.10 0.28 1.3
sensing distance suppression
in m Without accessory 0.4 0.55 1.2 3
With polarised reflector 3 4 5.7 15
With thru-beam accessory 20 14 35 60
Supply c Solid-state output b b b b
z Relay output – – b b
Connection Pre-cabled b b b –
Connector b b b b
Screw terminals – – – b
Sensor type XUB 0 XUM 0 XUK 0 XUX 0
Page 1/24 1/30 1/34 1/38
Sensing distances (see table above) Sensing distance without accessory with background suppression
b Without accessory, the Osiconcept cell detects objects irrespective of their colour
or background.
b A clean environment is recommended.
400 mm
Sensing distance without accessory

b Beyond the sensing distance with background suppression, the same Osiconcept
cell without accessory detects objects but may be influenced by the backgrounds
and colour of the objects to be detected.
400 mm
Sensing distance with polarised reflector

b By installing a reflector opposite, the same Osiconcept cell detects objects
irrespective of their shininess and colour.
b The reflector diameter must be smaller than the diameter of the object to be
detected.
b The larger the area of the reflector the longer the sensing distance.
Example: with a XUZ C50 reflector, the beam will be 50 x 50 mm.
Depending on reflector
Sensing distance with thru-beam transmitter accessory

b After setting-up and connecting a thru-beam transmitter accessory opposite, the
same Osiconcept cell detects objects irrespective of their shininess, colour or
background.
b The detection distance is a maximum.
b The cell and the thru-beam transmitter must be carefully aligned.
b Good resistance to contamination and dust.
20 mm
1/11
General 1
Standards and certifications Recommendation

Parameters related to the environment The sensors detailed in this catalogue are designed for use in standard industrial applications
1 relating to presence detection.

These sensors do not incorporate the required redundant electrical circuit enabling their usage
in safety applications.
˚C % For safety applications, please refer to our “Safety solutions using Preventa” catalogue.
Relative humidity
Temperature
75 100
50 80 Quality control
Our photo-electric sensors are subject to special precautions in order to guarantee their
25 60 reliability in the most arduous industrial environments.
b Qualification
0 20 v The product characteristics stated in this catalogue are subject to a qualification procedure
carried out in our laboratories.
- 25 0 v In particular, the products are subjected to climatic cycle tests for 3000 hours whilst
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 powered-up to verify their ability to maintain their characteristics over time.
- 25° + 55 °C cycle, 85% RH b Production
v The electrical characteristics and sensing distances at both ambient temperature and extreme
temperatures are 100% checked.
Temperature °C v Products are randomly selected during the course of production and subjected to monitoring
Humidity as % tests relating to all their characteristics.
b Customer returns
v If, in spite of all these precautions, defective products are returned to us, they are subject to
systematic analysis and corrective actions are implemented to eliminate the risks of the fault
recurring.
Immunity to ambient light

b Osiris photo-electric sensors use the pulsed light principle. This provides a high degree of
immunity to spurious light that conforms to standard IEC 60947-5-2.
Resistance to electromagnetic interference

The photo-electric sensors are tested in accordance with the recommendations of the
standard IEC 60947-5-2
b Electrostatic discharges IEC/EN 61000-4-2
z 15 kV version, level 4
c 8 kV version, level 3
b Radiated electromagnetic fields (electromagnetic IEC/EN 61000-4-3

waves) 10 V/metre, level 3
b Fast transients in salvos (motor start/stop interference) IEC/EN 61000-4-4

2 kV, level 4
b Impulse voltages, lightning IEC 60947-5-2

z 2.5 kV version
c 1 kV version
Mechanical shock resistance

The sensors are tested in accordance with standard IEC 60068-2-27,
30 gn, duration 11 ms.
Vibration resistance
The sensors are tested in accordance with standard IEC 60068-2-6,
7 gn, amplitude ± 1.5 mm, f = 10…55 Hz.
Resistance to chemicals in the environment

b Owing to the very wide range of chemicals encountered in industry, it is very difficult to give
general guidelines common to all sensors.
b To ensure lasting efficient operation, it is essential that any chemicals coming into contact with
the sensors will not affect their casing and, in doing so, prevent their reliable operation (please
refer to the characteristics pages for the various sensors).
In all cases, the materials selected (see product characteristics) provide satisfactory
compatibility in most industrial environments (for further information, please consult your
Regional Sales Office).
1/12
General (continued) 1
Principle of optical detection Composition of a photo-electric sensor

A photo-electric sensor basically comprises a light beam transmitter (light-emitting diode) and a
light-sensitive receiver (photo-transistor).
A light-emitting diode is an electronic semi-conductor component that emits light when an electric
1
current flows through it. This light can be visible or invisible, depending on the transmission
wavelength.
Detection occurs when an object enters the transmitted light beam and, in so doing, affects the
intensity of the light at the receiver. As the light intensity at the receiver decreases a point is
1 2 3 4 reached whereby the output of the sensor changes state.
1 Light beam transmitter

2 Light beam receiver
3 Signal processing stage
4 Output stage
Light spectrum
10 A Depending on the model and application requirements, the transmission beam is either non
1 nm 400 nm 750 nm 3 µm visible infrared (most common case) or ultraviolet (detection of luminescent materials). It may
1 2 3 4 5 also be visible red or green (colour mark reading etc.) and laser red (long sensing distance and
short focal length).
100 200 300 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
Modulation
The advantage of LEDs is their very fast response. To render the system insensitive to ambient
light, the current flowing through the LED is modulated so as to produce a pulsed light
transmission.
1 X rays, 2 Ultraviolet, 3 Visible light, Only the pulsed signal will be used by the photo-transistor and processed to control the load.
4 Near infrared, 5 Far infrared
Detection systems Thru-beam system or Osiconcept with thru-beam accessory

b Advantages
v Long sensing distance (up to 60 m).
v Very precise detection, high repeat accuracy.
v Detection not affected by colour of object.
v Good resistance to difficult environments (dust, grime, etc.).
b Drawbacks
v 2 units to be wired.
v The object to be detected must be opaque.
v Precise alignment required, which can be difficult since the sensor transmits in the infrared
range (invisible).
b Operating precautions
v When several sensors are used, care must be taken to ensure that no sensor is disrupted by
another sensor (e.g. alternate mounting of transmitter/receiver etc.).
Advantages of Osiconcept with thru-beam accessory

b Easy alignment
v The sensor transmits in the visible red range during the alignment phase.
v 3 LEDs providing setting-up assistance.
Polarised reflex system or Osiconcept with reflector accessory

b Advantages
v Medium sensing distance (up to 15 m).
v Precise detection.
v Only one unit to be wired.
v Detection not affected by colour of object.
v Visible red beam transmission.
b Drawbacks
v Precise alignment required.
v The object to be detected must be opaque and larger than the reflector.
v When several sensors are used, they must be aligned in such a manner that no sensor is
disrupted by another sensor.
v For short distance detection use a reflector with large trihedrons, type XUZ C24.
v For long distance detection use a reflector XUZ C50 or XUZ C80.
v To increase the sensing distance use reflector XUZ C100.
v If reflective tape is used, use rolls of tape XUZ B11 or XUZ B15 which are specially adapted
for polarised reflex systems.
Advantages of Osiconcept with reflector accessory

b Easy alignment
v 3 LEDs providing setting-up assistance.
v The anti-interference function enables 2 sensors to be used without specific alignment
precautions.
b Semi-transparent objects can be detected by using the Osiconcept object teach mode.
1/13
Detection systems (continued) Diffuse system or Osiconcept

b Advantage
1 v Only one unit to be wired.
b Drawbacks
v Short sensing distance.
v Sensitivity to object or background colour differences.
v Object sighting line difficult since the sensor transmits in the infrared range (invisible).
b Advantages of Osiconcept
v Easy alignment:
- the sensor transmits in the visible red range during the alignment phase,
- 3 LEDs providing setting-up assistance,
- the anti-interference function enables 2 sensors to be used without specific alignment
precautions.
v Refined detection
The position of the object can be detected using the teach mode.
Diffuse, with or without background suppression, system or Osiconcept

b Advantages
v Only one unit to be wired.
v Detection not affected by colour of object or background.
b Drawbacks
v Short sensing distance.
v Object sighting line difficult since the sensor transmits in the infrared range (invisible).
v Detection can be affected by the object’s direction of movement. To overcome this
phenomenon (the hat effect), it is recommended that the sensor is mounted so that the object
simultaneously breaks the beam of both lenses.
v Easy alignment:
- the sensor transmits in the visible red range during the alignment phase,
- 3 LEDs providing setting-up assistance,
- the anti-interference function enables 2 sensors to be used without specific alignment
precautions,
- the hat effect is minimised using the background teach mode.
v Refined detection
The position of the object can be detected using the teach mode.
Specific systems Fibre optics

b The fibre acts as a light conductor. Light rays entering the fibre at a certain angle are conveyed
to the required location, with minimum loss.
b Separate amplifier.
v Size kept to minimum.
v This system enables detection of very small objects (approximately 1 mm).
v And, detection is very precise.
Plastic fibres
v The core of the fibre is flexible plastic (PMMA). In general, there is only a single fibre of
1 2 diameter 0.25 to 1 mm, depending on the model.
v Fibres are used with amplifiers transmitting red light.
v Minimum bend radius:
- 10 mm for fibres with 0.25 mm diameter core,
- 25 mm for fibres with 1 mm diameter core.
b Advantages: fibres can be cut to the required length.
1 Core
2 Sheath
Glass fibres
v The core of the fibre is silica. For maximum flexibility, each fibre comprises numerous strands
that are approximately 50 µ in diameter.
v Fibres are used with amplifiers transmitting infrared or red light.
v Minimum bend radius:
- 10 mm with plastic sheath,
- 90 mm with stainless steel sheath.
b Advantages
v Fibres suitable for use at high temperatures (250 °C).
v Fibres with stainless steel sheath provide protection against mechanical impact and crushing.
1/14
Detection curves Thru-beam system

b The zone indicates the positioning tolerance of the receiver.
1
R
2
b The zone represents the usable sensing zone of the system. Any opaque object
entering this zone breaks the beam and causes the sensor’s output to change state.
1
T R T 1 Ideal detection
2 Acceptable detection
T = transmitter
R = receiver
d y Sn d y Sn
Polarised reflex system

1 2 b The zone indicates the positioning tolerance of the reflector.
T/R T/R b The zone represents the usable sensing zone of the system. Any opaque object
entering this zone breaks the beam and causes the sensor’s output to change state.
1 Ideal detection
2 Acceptable detection
T = transmitter
Sn Sn R = receiver
Diffuse, with or without background suppression, system

b The zone represents the sensor’s sensitivity zone.
All of this zone is usable: any object that is adequately reflective entering this zone, in the
direction of the arrow, will cause the sensor’s output to change state. The black line corresponds
T/R to a light colour surface and the blue line to a darker colour surface.
b A test using the object to be detected will determine the zone of sensitivity in relation to its
reflection coefficient.
90% white object
18% grey object
Sn For specific aspects of diffuse systems see page 1/14.
Object 20 x 20 cm T = transmitter
R = receiver
Excess gain Operating margin

To ensure correct operation of a sensor in spite of environmental constraints, the sensors feature
gain
an operating margin.
500 This margin can be expressed in terms of excess gain, which is the ratio:
Excess gain = Signal level received / Signal required for switching.
100 For all Osiris sensors

50 b The nominal sensing distance Sn is defined as the sensing distance with an excess gain
of 2, i.e. the sensing distance for which the sensor receives twice as much light energy as it
10
strictly needs to switch it.
b The maximum sensing distance is defined as the sensing distance with an excess gain of
5
1. It corresponds to the maximum detection value.
2
1 The use of the sensor at the nominal sensing distance ensures the sensor’s correct operation in
0,1 0,2 0,5 1 2 5 10 15 30 D (m) normal operating conditions.
Sn Smax.
In extreme conditions, refer to the following setting-up recommendations:
- clean environment: work at nominal sensing distance Sn,
- slightly polluted environment: work at sensing distance Sn/2,
- moderately polluted environment: work at sensing distance Sn/4,
- heavily polluted environment: preferably use Osiconcept sensors with thru-beam accessory
(or the thru-beam system) with a sensing distance Sn/10.
Optical alignment aid

A red LED assists setting-up by illuminating when optimum alignment of the sensor is achieved.
1,2 1 Signal level
1 1
0,8 2 Red LED, on , off
3 Green LED, on , off
4 Optimum alignment
2
3
4
1/15
Outputs 2-wire technique a or z

BN / b Specific aspects
1 BU
These sensors are wired in series with the load to be switched.
As a consequence, they are subject to:
v A residual current in the open state (current flowing through the sensor in the “open” state),
/ v A voltage drop in the closed state (voltage drop across the sensor’s terminals in the “closed”
state).
b Advantages
v Only 2 wires to be connected. They can be wired in series in the same way as mechanical
limit switches.
v For use on 2-wire c, they can be connected to either positive (PNP) or negative (NPN) logic
PLC inputs.
v No risk of incorrect connections.
v Check the possible effects of residual current and voltage drop on the actuator or input
connected.
v These sensors do not incorporate overload or short-circuit protection and therefore, it is
essential to connect a 0.4 A “quick-blow” fuse in series with the load.
3-wire technique c
BN + BN + b Specific aspects
PNP NPN v These sensors comprise 2 wires for the d.c. supply and a 3rd wire for the output signal.
BK BK v PNP type: switching the positive side to the load.
BU – BU – v NPN type: switching the negative side to the load.
b Advantages
v No residual current, low voltage drop.
BN + BN +
PNP NPN
BK BK
BU – BU –
5-wire technique a or z, relay output

b Specific aspects
BK
v Sensors incorporating output relay. The supply and output circuits are electrically separate.
OG v PNP type: switching the positive side to the load.
RD
BN v NPN type: switching the negative side to the load.
BU
b Advantages
v a or c supply with a wide voltage range.
v High breaking capacity (approximately 3 A).
v Direct control of a simple automation system.
v Availability of a NO (normally open) contact and a NC (normally closed) contact.
v The sensor/relay contact galvanic isolation is 1500 to 2500 V, depending on the model.
v Low switching frequency. Check that it is suitable for the application.
v Limited service life of relay. Check that it is suitable for the application.
Analogue technique
b Specific aspects
1 2
+ + There are two output configurations:
3 4 3 5 v Voltage output: the output voltage varies in proportion to the distance between the sensor and
the object to be detected.
Vs v Current output: the output current varies in proportion to the distance between the sensor and
6 6 the object to be detected.
mA
D 1 – D 1 – b Advantage
v Availability of a physical item of data proportional to the distance between the sensor and the
object to be detected.
v Refer to the detailed descriptions of the sensor to assess the relative influence of the colour
of the object to be detected.
1 Voltage output
2 Current output
1/16
Outputs (continued) Output functions

In the past, the output functions of photo-electric sensors were always governed by the “light/
dark” principle, i.e. the output would be activated on light being received for light switching and
the output would be activated on light not being received for dark switching.
1
This called for fastidious programming specific to each detection mode.
Now, the output functions of the Osiris range of photo-electric sensors are in phase with
the language of the automation system engineer, i.e. NO (normally open) or NC (normally
closed).
b Advantages
v NO output (or NO programming for Osiconcept sensors): irrespective of the detection mode,
the output of the sensor is activated when the object to be detected is present.
v NC output (or NC programming for Osiconcept sensors): irrespective of the detection mode,
the output of the sensor is activated when the object to be detected is not present.
v By default, the output is NO programmed, i.e. the output of the sensor is activated when the
object to be detected is present.
v By pressing the teach button, the output can programmed to NC, i.e. the output of the sensor
is activated when the object to be detected is not present.
System NO output or Yellow NC output or Yellow

NO LED NC LED
programming programming
Object present
Diffuse Activated On Not activated Off
Diffuse with Activated On Not activated Off

background
suppression
Reflex Activated On Not activated Off
Polarised Activated On Not activated Off

reflex
Thru-beam Activated On Not activated Off
Time delay on beam make

Yes
No No object present
t
Diffuse Not activated Off Activated On
On
NO
Off
Output
t
Diffuse with Not activated Off Activated On
NC On background
Off suppression
Time delay on beam break

Reflex Not activated Off Activated On
Yes
No t
On Polarised Not activated Off Activated On
NO
Off reflex
Output
t
NC On
Off Thru-beam Not activated Off Activated On
Monostable
Yes
Output signal time delay
No
t t b Certain sensor models (XUK, XUX and XUD) incorporate a time delay output.
On b These time delays enable simple automation systems to be established.
NO b There are three types of time delay:
Off t v Time delay on beam make (ON delay).
Output
t
v Time delay on beam break (OFF delay).
On
NC v Monostable (one shot).
Off
1/17
Connections All our sensors are available either in pre-cabled version (except XUX; screw terminal with cable
gland version) or connector version.
The connectors used are:
1 M12 (4-pin) M8 (4-pin) 1/2" 20UNF (3-pin)
1
WH
4 3
BN
BU
BK
1 2 2 3
1 b Types of connection
1 Factory fitted moulded cable: good protection against splashing liquids.
2 Connector: easy installation and maintenance.
3 Screw terminals: flexibility, cable runs to required length.
b Wiring advice
v Length of cable: no limitation up to 200 m or up to a line capacitance of < 0.1 µF
(characteristics of sensors remain unaffected). In this case, it is important to take into account
the voltage drop on the line.
v Separation of control and power circuit wiring: the sensors are immune to electrical
interference encountered in normal industrial conditions. Where extreme conditions of electrical
2 “noise” could occur (motors etc.), it is advisable to protect against transients in the normal way:
- suppress interference at source and filter the power supply,
- separate power and control wiring from each other,
- ensure the HF equipotentiality of the site,
- limit the length of cable,
- connect the sensor with supply switched off.
v Dust and damp protection of connections: the level of dust and damp protection depends on
how carefully the cable glands or connectors are tightened. To efficiently protect the sensors
from dust and damp, select the correct diameter cable for the cable gland used.
Cable gland Diameter of cable

Minimum Maximum
9P 6 8
11P 8 10
13P 10 12
3 ISO 16 7 10
ISO 20 10 12
Complementary functions Diagnostics, beam break test
A test input enables the transmitted beam to be broken in order to verify that the output of the
sensor changes state.
BN + BN +
Fault diagnostics regarding correct operation of the sensor can therefore be carried out.
VI VI
1 Beam made
2 Beam broken
BU – BU – VI: test input for breaking transmitted beam.
1 2
BK Synchronisation inputs (inhibition function)

The synchronisation input determines the operation of the sensor, i.e. activates it or inhibits it,
depending on whether a signal is present on the input.
Complex detection may, for example, depend on the presence of the object to be detected.
3 Application example: verification of presence of stopper in a bottle
Using the synchronisation input of the amplifier makes it possible to verify the presence of a
1 stopper in a bottle and also, to feed this information to a PLC in the form S = no stopper present.
This is achieved by two detections: “presence of bottle” (synchronisation sensor 2) and “absence
GR of stopper” (optical sensing head 3).
Advantages
v Very fast processing speed (not related to cycle time of PLC).
v Saves use of a PLC input.
v This delocalised function can be used in an autonomous way, without a PLC, to directly
control an actuator for removal of the defective product.
BK
1 Amplifier, type XUV (PNP)
2 Diffuse system photo-electric sensor (PNP/NO),
detection of bottle presence/absence
3 Convergent optical head XUV N02428,
detection of stopper presence/absence
BK: output signal wires from the amplifier and the sensor
GR: synchronisation input wire of the amplifier
2
Verification of correct operation

In the event of dirty lenses (reflectors), an excessively polluted atmosphere or a slight
disturbance of optical alignment (mechanical impact on support), the level of light energy
received by the sensor will decrease until it ceases to operate.
To overcome this problem, all our products incorporate:
- a red alarm LED,
- an alarm output, for connection in the automation system, to warn the operator that the
operation of the sensor is stable but close to its limits (applies to sensors XUM, XUK, XUX, XUD).
1/18
Specific aspects of electronic sensors Terminology

Ir Residual current (Ir)
mA v The residual current (Ir) corresponds to the current flowing through the sensor when in the
“open” state.
1
v Characteristic of 2-wire type sensors.
XU
Voltage drop (Ud)

Ud v The voltage drop (Ud) corresponds to the voltage drop at the sensor’s terminals when in the
V “closed” state (value measured at nominal current rating of sensor).
v Characteristic of 2-wire type sensors.
XU
First-up delay
1 The first-up delay corresponds to the time (t) between the connection of the power supply to the
2 sensor and its fully operational state.
1 Supply voltage U on
3 2 Sensor operational at state 1
t
3 Sensor at state 0
Delays
v Response time (Ra): the time delay between the object to be detected entering the sensor’s
operating zone and the subsequent change of output state. This parameter limits the speed and
size of the object.
Ra Rr v Recovery time (Rr): the time delay between an object to be detected leaving the sensor’s
operating zone and the subsequent change of output state. This parameter limits the interval
between successive objects.
Power supplies
Sensors for a.c. circuits (a and z models)
Check that the voltage limits of the sensor are compatible with the nominal voltage of the a.c.
supply used.
Sensors for d.c. circuits (c models)

b d.c. source: check that the voltage limits of the sensor and the acceptable level of ripple are
compatible with the supply used.
b a.c. source (comprising transformer, rectifier, smoothing capacitor): the supply voltage must
be within the operating limits specified for the sensor.
v Where the voltage is derived from a single-phase a.c. supply, the voltage must be rectified
and smoothed to ensure that:
- the peak voltage of the d.c. supply is lower than the maximum voltage rating of the sensor.
Peak voltage = nominal voltage x 2
- the minimum voltage of the supply is greater than the minimum voltage rating of the sensor,
given that:
∆V = (I x t) / C
∆V = max. ripple: 10% (V),
I = anticipated load current (mA),
t = period of 1 cycle (10 ms full-wave rectified for a 50 Hz supply frequency),
C = capacitance (µF).
v As a general rule, use a transformer with a lower secondary voltage (Ue) than the required
d.c. voltage (U).
Example: a 18 V to obtain c 24 V, a 36 V to obtain c 48 V. Fit a smoothing capacitor of

400 µF minimum per sensor, or 2000 µF minimum per Ampere required.
1/19
Setting-up precautions Connection in series

2-wire type sensors
1 b The following points should be taken into account:
v Series wiring is only possible using sensors with wide voltage limits.
Based on the assumption that each sensor has the same residual current value, each sensor, in
the open state, will share the supply voltage, i.e.
U supply
U sensor = .
n sensors
U sensor and U supply must remain within the sensor’s voltage limits.
v If only one sensor in the circuit is in the open state, it will be supplied at a voltage almost equal
to the supply voltage.
v When in the closed state, a small voltage drop is present across each sensor. The resultant
loss of voltage at the load will be the sum of the individual voltage drops and therefore, the load
voltage should be selected accordingly.
3-wire type sensors

Sensor 3 This connection method is not recommended.
b Correct operation of the sensors cannot be assured and, if this method is used, tests should
be made before installation.
b The following points should be taken into account:
Sensor 2 v The first sensor carries the load current in addition to the no-load current consumption values
of the other sensors connected in series. For certain models, this connection method is not
possible unless a current limiting resistor is used.
Sensor 1 v When in the closed state, a small voltage drop is present across each sensor. The load should
therefore be selected accordingly.
v As sensor 1 closes, sensor 2 does not operate until a certain time (t) has elapsed
(corresponding to the first-up delay) and likewise for the following sensors in the sequence.
v The use of “flywheel” diodes is recommended when an inductive load is being switched.
U Wiring sensors to devices with mechanical contact

2 and 3-wire type sensors
v When the mechanical contact is open, the sensor is not supplied.
v When the contact closes, the sensor does not operate until a certain time (t) has elapsed
(corresponding to the first-up delay).
b In scheme 1, as the external contact opens, the voltage transient caused by the breaking of
1 2 3 the inductive load will appear inside the sensor and, if greater than the recommended max.
insulation voltage, may cause a “flashover” within the sensor.
v The return path of this voltage will be back to one line of the supply, through the sensor, and
should “flashover” occur anywhere on the printed circuit board, severe damage could occur.
v It is therefore recommended to use schemes 2 or 3.
Connection in parallel
2-wire type sensors
This connection method is not recommended.
b Should one of the sensors be in the closed state, the sensor in parallel will be “shorted-out”
and no longer supplied. As the first sensor passes into the open state, the second sensor will
become energised and will be subject to its first-up delay.
b This configuration is only permissible where the sensors will be working alternately.
b This method of connection can lead to irreversible damage of the units.
3-wire type sensors

b No specific restrictions. The use of “flywheel” diodes is recommended when an inductive load
(relay) is being switched.
Wiring sensors to devices with mechanical contact

b No specific restrictions.
v For these sensors, the supply and output circuits are electrically separate.
v The sensor/relay contact galvanic isolation is 1500 to 2500 V, depending on the model.
v The maximum voltage, depending on the model, across each contact is a 250 V.
1/20
Setting-up precautions (continued) a.c. supply

b 2-wire type sensors cannot be connected directly to an a.c. supply.
v This would result in immediate destruction of the sensor and considerable danger to the user.
v An appropriate load (refer to the instruction sheet supplied with the sensor) must always be
1
connected in series with the sensor.
Capacitive load (C > 0.1 µF)

b On power-up, it is necessary to limit (by resistor) the charging current of the capacitive load C.
v The voltage drop in the sensor can also be taken into account by subtracting it from the supply
–R voltage for the calculation of R.
U (supply)
–C R=
I max. (sensor)
Load comprising an incandescent lamp

b If the load comprises an incandescent lamp, the cold state resistance can be 10 times lower
than the hot state resistance. This can cause very high current levels on switching. Fit a pre-heat
resistor in parallel with the sensor.
U2
R= x 10 , U = supply voltage and P = lamp power
P
1/21
Fast troubleshooting guide

Problem Possible causes Remedy
1 The sensor’s output will not change state when an object
enters the operating zone
On an Osiconcept sensor:
setting-up error (detection mode
b Use the detection mode display option. After a RESET,
follow the environment teach mode procedure.
programming)
Output stage faulty or complete b Check that the sensor is compatible with the supply
failure of the sensor (in either case, being used.
the sensor must be replaced), or the b Check the load current characteristics:
short-circuit protection has tripped. v if load current I ≥ maximum switching capacity, an
auxiliary relay, of the CAD N type for example, should be
interposed between the sensor and the load.
v if I ≤ maximum switching capacity, check for wiring
faults (short-circuit).
b In all cases, a 0.4 A “quick-blow” fuse should be fitted
in series with the sensor.
Wiring error b Check that the wiring conforms to the wiring shown on
the sensor label or instruction sheet.
Supply fault b Check that the sensor is compatible with the supply (a
or c).
b Check that the supply voltage is within the voltage limits
of the sensor. Remember that with a rectified, smoothed
supply,
(U peak = U nominal x 2 with a ripple voltage of ≤ 10%).
With a reflex system: b The reflex system must operate in conjunction with a
incorrect use or poor state of reflector. Adhere to the operating distances and check the
reflector alignment between the sensor and the reflector.
b Replace the reflector if it has been damaged.
b Clean the reflector and sensor lenses.
Influence of ambient light b Make sure that the sensor is not dazzled by stray light
(neon, sun, oven, etc.).
b Fit a lens hood or turn the sensor.
False or erratic operation, with or without the presence of On an Osiconcept sensor: b Use the detection mode display option. After a RESET,
an object in the operating zone setting-up error (detection mode follow the environment teach mode procedure.
programming)
Influence of background or surface b Refer to the instruction sheet supplied with the sensor.
condition of the object to be detected For sensors with adjustable sensitivity, reduce or increase
(stray reflections) the sensing distance.
Operating distance poorly defined b Apply the correction coefficients.

for the reflector or object to be b Realign the system.
detected b Clean the sensor lenses and reflector, or, if damaged,
replace it.
Influence of immediate environment b Check the cleanliness of the lenses and reflector.
b Fit a lens hood, where required.
Influence of transient interference b Ensure that any d.c. supplies, when derived from
on the supply lines rectified a.c., are correctly smoothed (C > 400 µF).
b Separate a.c. power cables from low-level d.c. cables
(c 24 V low level).
b Where very long distances are involved, use suitable
cable: screened and twisted pairs of the correct cross-
sectional area.
Equipment prone to emitting b Position the sensors as far away as possible from any
electromagnetic interference sources of interference.
Response time of the sensor too b Check the suitability of the sensor for the position or
slow for the particular object being shape of the object to be detected.
detected b If necessary, select a sensor with a higher switching
frequency.
Influence of high temperature b Eliminate sources of radiated heat or protect the sensor
casing with a heat shield.
b Realign, having adjusted the temperature around the
fixing support.
Influence of ambient light b Make sure that the sensor is not disrupted by a
intermittent source of light (flashing light, rotating mirror
beacon, hinged mirror, reflective door, etc.).
b Fit a lens hood or turn the sensor.
1/22
Fast troubleshooting guide (continued)

No detection following a period of service Vibration, shock b Realign the system
b Replace the support or protect the sensor.
1
Deterioration of relay contact b On an inductive load, use an RC suppressor connected
in parallel with the load.
b To eliminate contact contamination, the minimum
current recommended is 15 mA.
b Relay output models are not recommended for fast
counting of objects since their service life is too short. Use
models with a solid-state output.
Dusty atmosphere b Clean the lenses and reflector with a soft cloth.
Note:
b Sensors with a test input enable automatic verification of their correct operation.
b Sensors with an alarm output enable the operator to be informed, for preventive maintenance purposes, that the operating limits of sensors have been reached
(dirty etc.).
1/23
References 1
Osiris® Universal, Osiconcept® (1)

Design 18, metal or plastic
Three-wire, d.c. supply, solid-state output
Ø 18 metal
550055
Pre-cabled (2)
1 Sensing
distance (Sn) (3)
Function Output Line of sight Reference Weight
kg
m
0…15 N/O or N/C, PNP Along case axis XUB 0BPSNL2 0.105
XUB 0pppNL2 depending on using 90° to case axis XUB 0BPSWL2 (5) 0.110
whether Osiconcept
NPN Along case axis XUB 0BNSNL2 0.105
accessories programming
550001
are used 90° to case axis XUB 0BNSWL2 (5) 0.110

M12 connector
0…15 N/O or N/C, PNP Along case axis XUB 0BPSNM12 0.055
depending on using 90° to case axis XUB 0BPSWM12 (5) 0.060
whether Osiconcept
NPN Along case axis XUB 0BNSNM12 0.055
XUB 0pppWL2 are used 90° to case axis XUB 0BNSWM12 (5) 0.060
Accessories
Description Connec- Line of sight Reference Weight
550002
tion kg
Thru-beam accessories Pre-cabled Along case axis XUB 0BKSNL2T 0.105
(transmitter) (2) 90° to case axis XUB 0BKSWL2T (5) 0.110
M12 Along case axis XUB 0BKSNM12T 0.055
connector 90° to case axis XUB 0BKSWM12T (5) 0.060
Reflector 50 x 50 mm – – XUZ C50 0.020
XUB 0pppNM12
Ø 18 plastic
Pre-cabled (2)
550000
Sensing Function Output Line of sight Reference Weight

distance (Sn) (3) kg
m
0…15 N/O or N/C, PNP Along case axis XUB 0APSNL2 0.095
depending on using 90° to case axis XUB 0APSWL2 (5) 0.100
whether Osiconcept
NPN Along case axis XUB 0ANSNL2 0.095
are used 90° to case axis XUB 0ANSWL2 (5) 0.100
XUB 0pppWM12 M12 connector
0…15 N/O or N/C, PNP Along case axis XUB 0APSNM12 0.045
depending on using 90° to case axis XUB 0APSWM12 (5) 0.050
whether Osiconcept
NPN Along case axis XUB 0ANSNM12 0.045
are used 90° to case axis XUB 0ANSWM12 (5) 0.050
805799
Accessories
Description Connec- Line of sight Reference Weight
tion kg
520312
Thru-beam accessories Pre-cabled Along case axis XUB 0AKSNL2T 0.095

(transmitter) (2) 90° to case axis XUB 0AKSWL2T (5) 0.100
M12 Along case axis XUB 0AKSNM12T 0.045
connector 90° to case axis XUB 0AKSWM12T (5) 0.050
XUZ C50
550003
Fixing accessories (4)

Description Reference Weight
kg
3D fixing kit for use on M12 rod for XUB or XUZ C50 XUZ B2003 0.170
M12 rod XUZ 2001 0.050
Support for M12 rod XUZ 2003 0.150
Stainless steel mounting bracket XUZ A118 0.045
Plastic mounting bracket adjustable with ball-joint XUZ A218 0.035
XUZ B2003 (1) For further information on Osiconcept, see page 1/10.
(2) For a 5 m long cable, replace L2 with L5.
For example, XUB 0BPSNL2 becomes XUB 0BPSNL5.
(3) For further information, see page 1/25.
805817

(5) For line of sight 90° to case axis versions, see the sensing distances on page 1/25.
XUZ 2001
XUZ A118
520984
805818
XUZ A218 XUZ 2003
1/24
Characteristics, Photo-electric sensors 1
schemes, Osiris® Universal, Osiconcept® (1)

Design 18, metal or plastic
curves, Three-wire, d.c. supply, solid-state output
dimensions 1
Characteristics
Sensor type XUB 0ppppM12, XUB 0ppppM12T XUB 0ppppL2, XUB 0ppppL2T
Product certifications
Connection Connector
UL, CSA, e
M12 –
1
Pre-cabled – Length 2 m
Sensing distance Line of sight Line of sight Accessory
nominal Sn / maximum along case axis 90° to case axis
(excess gain = 2) (excess gain = 1) m 0.12 / 0.12 0.11 / 0.11 Without (diffuse system with adjustable
background suppression)
m 0.3 / 0.4 0.2 / 0.3 Without (diffuse system)
m 2/3 1.5 / 2 With reflector (polarised reflex)
m 15 / 20 10 / 14 With thru-beam accessory (thru-beam)
Type of transmission Infrared, except for polarised reflex (red)
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 65, IP 67, double insulation i
Storage temperature range °C - 40…+ 70
Operating temperature range °C - 25…+ 55
Materials Case: nickel plated brass for XUB 0B or PBT for XUB 0A; Lens: PMMA; Cable: PvR
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 7 gn, amplitude ± 1.5 mm (f = 10 to 55 Hz)
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 30 gn, duration 11 ms
Indicator lights Output state Yellow LED (transmission present for XUB 0ppppppT)
Supply on Green LED
Instability Red LED (except for XUB 0ppppppT)
Rated supply voltage V c 12…24 with protection against reverse polarity
Voltage limits (including ripple) V c 10…36
Current consumption, no-load mA 35 (20 for XUB 0ppppppT)
Switching capacity mA ≤ 100 with overload and short-circuit protection
Voltage drop, closed state V 1.5
Maximum switching frequency Hz 250
Delays First-up ms < 200
Response ms <2
Recovery ms <2
Connections
M12 connector Pre-cabled PNP NPN Thru-beam accessory
4 3 3 (-)
1 (+) (-) BU (Blue)
BN/1 + BN/1 + 1/BN
PNP BK/4 NPN 2/VI
4 OUT/Output (+) BN (Brown) BK/4
3/BU
1 2 2 Beam break OUT/Output BK (Black)
input (2) Beam break input (2) BU/3 – BU/3 – 2/VI input:
VI (Violet) - not connected: beam made
See connection on page 9/44. - connected to –: beam broken
Detection curves (Line of sight along case axis)

With thru-beam accessory (thru-beam) Without accessory Without accessory (diffuse With reflector
(diffuse system) system with adjustable (polarised reflex)
6
15 4
Ø 12 mm
2
10 15 20 m 40 12 cm 3m
-2
8 2
-15 -4
-6 2
30 cm 12 cm
Object: 10 x 10 cm, 1: white 90 %, 2 grey 18 % With reflector XUZ C50

Variation of usable sensing distance Su (without accessory, with adjustable background suppression)
Teach mode at minimum Teach mode at maximum
B A-B : object reflection B
coefficient
Black 6 %
Grey 18 %
White 90 %
Sensing range
Non sensing zone
A 1 8 10 (matt surfaces) A 1 9 12 17 S (cm)
S (cm)
Dimensions
XUB
Pre-cabled (mm) Plug-in connector (mm)
a b a b
b Ø 18 line of sight along case axis 64 (3) 44 78 (2) 44
a Ø 18 line of sight to case axis 78 44 92 44
(1) For further information on Osiconcept, see page 1/10.
(2) Beam break input on thru-beam transmitter only.
(3) For XUB 0ppppppT, 64 becomes 62 mm and 78 becomes 76 mm.
1/25
References 1
Osiris® Optimum
Design 18, plastic
Connector
1
550009
distance (Sn) kg
m
Diffuse system
0.1 N/O PNP Along case axis XUB 4APANM12 0.040
90° to case axis XUB 4APAWM12 0.040
NPN Along case axis XUB 4ANANM12 0.040
XUB pAppNM12 90° to case axis XUB 4ANAWM12 0.040
N/C PNP Along case axis XUB 4APBNM12 0.040
90° to case axis XUB 4APBWM12 0.040
550010
NPN Along case axis XUB 4ANBNM12 0.040

90° to case axis XUB 4ANBWM12 0.040
Diffuse system with adjustable sensitivity
0.6 N/O PNP Along case axis XUB 5APANM12 0.045
XUB pAppNL2
90° to case axis XUB 5ANAWM12 0.050
520983

2 N/O PNP Along case axis XUB 9APANM12 0.040
XUB pAppWM12 NPN Along case axis XUB 9ANANM12 0.040
520982

Reflector – – – XUZ C50 0.020
50 x 50 mm
Reflex system
XUB pAppWL2
4 N/O PNP Along case axis XUB 1APANM12 0.040
805799
520312

XUZ C50 Reflector – – – XUZ C50 0.020
50 x 50 mm
Thru-beam system
550003
Transmitter – – Along case axis XUB 2AKSNM12T 0.040

15 90° to case axis XUB 2AKSWM12T 0.040
Receiver N/O PNP Along case axis XUB 2APANM12R 0.040
15 90° to case axis XUB 2APAWM12R 0.040
NPN Along case axis XUB 2ANANM12R 0.040
90° to case axis XUB 2ANAWM12R 0.040
N/C PNP Along case axis XUB 2APBNM12R 0.040
XUZ 2001 90° to case axis XUB 2APBWM12R 0.040
XUZ B2003
NPN Along case axis XUB 2ANBNM12R 0.040
90° to case axis XUB 2ANBWM12R 0.040
520984

805817

kg
M12 rod XUZ 2001 0.050
XUZ 2003 Support for M12 rod XUZ 2003 0.150
XUZ A118
805817
Plastic mounting bracket with adjustable ball-joint XUZ A218 0.035

Pre-cabled
For a pre-cabled sensor, replace M12 with L2 for a 2 m cable, or with L5 for a 5 m cable.
Example: XUB 1APANM12 becomes XUB 1APANL2 for a 2 m cable and XUB 1APANL5 for a
5 m cable.
XUZ A218
1/26
schemes, Osiris® Optimum

Design 18, plastic
dimensions 1
Characteristics
Sensor type XUB 1, XUB 2, XUB 4, XUB 5, XUB 9 XUB 1, XUB 2, XUB 4, XUB 5, XUB 9
UL, CSA, e
M12 –
1
Pre-cabled – Length: 2 m
Sensing distance m 0.1 / 0.15 diffuse system
nominal Sn / maximum m 0.6 / 0.8 diffuse system with adjustable sensitivity
(excess gain = 2) (excess gain = 1)
m 2 / 3 polarised reflex
m 4 / 5.5 reflex
m 15 / 20 thru-beam
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 65, IP 67 double insulation i

Materials Case PBT
Lens PMMA
Cable – PvR
Indicator lights Output state Yellow LED (except for XUB 2ppppppT)
Supply on Green LED (only for XUB 2ppppppT)
Current consumption, no-load mA 35
Switching capacity mA y 100 mA with overload and short-circuit protection

Response ms <1
Recovery ms <1
Connections
M12 connector Pre-cabled PNP NPN Transmitter
3 (-) (-) BU (Blue)
4 3
1 (+) (+) BN (Brown) BN/1 + BN/1 + 1/BN
4 OUT/Output (OUT/Output) BK (Black) PNP BK/4 (NO/NC) NPN 2/VI
2 Beam break Beam break input (1) BK/4 (NO/NC) 3/BU
1 2
input (1) VI (Violet)
BU/3 – BU/3 –
2/VI input:
See connection on page 9/44 - not connected: beam made
- connected to –: beam broken
Detection curves
Thru-beam system Diffuse system Diffuse system with Reflex system Polarised reflex system
adjustable sensitivity
Ø of beam
cm cm cm cm cm
10 6
15 4
Ø 12 mm 4 E/R 2
15 80
m 5 cm cm 4 m 2 3 m
10 15 -4 2 -2 0,2
-15 -4
-10
10 cm 60 cm -6
Object 10 x 10 cm; 1 White 90 %; 2 Grey 18 % With reflector XUZ C50 With reflector XUZ C50
Dimensions
XUB

a b a b
b
Ø 18 line of sight along case axis 46 (2) 28 60 (1) 28
a
Ø 18 line of sight 90° to case axis 62 28 76 28
Ø 18 line of sight along case axis XUB 5 62 44 76 44
Ø 18 line of sight 90° to case axis XUB 5 78 44 92 44
(2) For XUB 9pppppp (polarised reflex) 46 becomes 48 mm and 60 becomes 62 mm.
1/27
References 1
Osiris® Optimum
Design 18, metal
Connector
550009
1 distance (Sn)
m
kg
Diffuse system
0.1 N/O PNP Along case axis XUB 4BPANM12 0.050
90° to case axis XUB 4BPAWM12 0.050
XUB pBppNM12 NPN Along case axis XUB 4BNANM12 0.050
90° to case axis XUB 4BNAWM12 0.050
N/C PNP Along case axis XUB 4BPBNM12 0.050
520983
90° to case axis XUB 4BPBWM12 0.050

NPN Along case axis XUB 4BNBNM12 0.050
90° to case axis XUB 4BNBWM12 0.050
Diffuse system with adjustable sensitivity
0.6 N/O PNP Along case axis XUB 5BPANM12 0.055
XUB pBppNL2 90° to case axis XUB 5BPAWM12 0.060
NPN Along case axis XUB 5BNANM12 0.055
520983

2 N/O PNP Along case axis XUB 9BPANM12 0.050
XUB pBppWM12 90° to case axis XUB 9BPAWM12 0.050
520982

50 x 50 mm
XUB pBppWL2 Reflex system
4 N/O PNP Along case axis XUB 1BPANM12 0.050
90° to case axis XUB 1BPAWM12 0.050
520312
805799

XUZ C50
50 x 50 mm
Thru-beam system
550003
Transmitter – – Along case axis XUB 2BKSNM12T 0.050

15 90° to case axis XUB 2BKSWM12T 0.050
Receiver N/O PNP Along case axis XUB 2BPANM12R 0.050
15 90° to case axis XUB 2BPAWM12R 0.050
NPN Along case axis XUB 2BNANM12R 0.050
90° to case axis XUB 2BNAWM12R 0.050
N/C PNP Along case axis XUB 2BPBNM12R 0.050
XUZ 2001 90° to case axis XUB 2BPBWM12R 0.050
XUZ B2003
NPN Along case axis XUB 2BNBNM12R 0.050
90° to case axis XUB 2BNBWM12R 0.050
520984

805817

kg
M12 rod XUZ 2001 0.050
XUZ A118 XUZ 2003 Support for M12 rod XUZ 2003 0.150
805817

Pre-cabled
For a pre-cabled sensor, replace M12 with L2 for a 2 m cable, or with L5 for a 5 m cable.
Example: XUB 1BPANM12 becomes XUB 1BPANL2 for a 2 m cable and XUB 1BPANL5 for a
5 m cable.
XUZ A218
1/28

Design 18, metal
dimensions 1
Characteristics
Sensor type XUB 1, XUB 2, XUB 4, XUB 5, XUB 9 XUB 1, XUB 2, XUB 4, XUB 5, XUB 9
UL,CSA, e
M12 –
1
Sensing distance m 0.1 / 0.15 diffuse system
nominal Sn / maximum m 0.6 / 0.8 diffuse system with adjustable sensitivity
m 4 / 5.5 reflex
m 15 / 20 thru-beam
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 65, IP 67 double insulation i

Materials Case Nickel plated brass
Lens PMMA
Cable – PvR
Indicator lights Output state Yellow LED (except for XUB 2ppppppT)
Supply on Green LED (only for XUB 2ppppppT)


Response ms <1
Recovery ms <1
Connections
M12 connector Pre-cabled PNP NPN Transmitter
3 (-) (-) BU (Blue)
4 3
1 (+) (+) BN (Brown) BN/1 + BN/1 + 1/BN
4 OUT/Output (OUT/Output)BK (Black) PNP BK/4 (NO/NC) NPN 2/VI
2 Beam break Beam break input (1) BK/4 (NO/NC) 3/BU
1 2
input (1) VI (Violet)
BU/3 – BU/3 –
2/VI input:
See connection on page 9/44 - not connected: beam made
Detection curves
Thru-beam system Diffuse system Diffuse system with Reflex system Polarised reflex system
Ø of beam
cm cm cm cm cm
6
10
4
15 Ø 12 mm E/R 2
4
15 80
m 5 cm cm 4 m 2 3 m
10 15 -4 -2 0,2
2
-15 -4
-10 -6
10 cm 60 cm
Object 10 x 10 cm; 1 White 90 %; 2 Grey 18 % With reflector XUZ C50 With reflector XUZ C50
Dimensions
XUB

a b a b
b
Ø 18 line of sight along case axis 46 (2) 28 60 (1) 28
a
Ø 18 line of sight 90° to case axis 62 28 76 28
Ø 18 line of sight along case axis XUB 5 62 44 76 44
Ø 18 line of sight 90° to case axis XUB 5 78 44 92 44
(1) Beam break input on thru-beam transmitter only;
(2) For XUB 9pppppp (polarised reflex) 46 becomes 48 mm and 60 becomes 62 mm.
1/29
References, Photo-electric sensors 1
dimensions 1
Osiris® Universal, Osiconcept® (1)
Miniature design
Miniature design, d.c. supply

501542_1
501543_1
Sensing Function Output Connection Reference (2) Weight
1 distance (Sn)
m
(pre-cabled or
connector)
kg
0…10 N/O or N/C PNP Pre-cabled XUM 0APSAL2 0.050

depending on using Osiconcept (L = 2 m) (2)
whether programming M8 connector XUM 0APSAM8 0.035
accessories are
used
NPN Pre-cabled XUM 0ANSAL2 0.050
XUM 0ApppL2 XUM 0ApppM8 (L = 2 m) (2)
M8 connector XUM 0ANSAM8 0.035
805799
Accessories
Description Connection Reference Weight
(pre-cabled or kg
connector)
Thru-beam accessories Pre-cabled XUM 0AKSAL2T 0.050
XUZ C50 (transmitter) (L = 2 m) (2)
520312
M8 connector XUM 0AKSAM8T 0.035
Reflector – XUZ C50 0.020

550014
50 x 50 mm

XUZ M2003 kg
3D fixing kit XUZ M2003 0.140
for use on M12 rod for XUM or XUZ C50
3D fixing kit XUZ M2004 0.155
for use on M12 rod and with protective cover for XUM
562213
M12 rod XUZ 2001 0.050
Mounting bracket XUZ A50 0.015
XUZ M2004
XUZ 2001

520960
520984
Example: XUM 0APSAL2 becomes XUM 0APSAL5.

XUZ 2003
XUZ A50
Dimensions
XUM 0ApppL2 XUM 0ApppM8
Indexation of the elbowed connector
2,8 Ø3 2,8 Ø3
6
6
34
25,5
34
25,5
45
12
20 20 12
1/30
schemes, Osiris® Universal, Osiconcept®(1)

Miniature design
curves 1
Characteristics
Sensor type XUM pppppM8 XUM pppppL2
UL, CSA, e
M8 –
1
Sensing distance m 0.10 / 0.10 without accessory (diffuse system with background suppression)
nominal Sn / maximum m 0.4 / 0.55 without accessory (diffuse system)
m 3 / 4 with reflector (polarised reflex)
m 10 / 14 with thru-beam accessory (thru-beam)
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 65, IP 67 IP 65, IP 67 double insulation i
Materials Case PBT
Lens PMMA
Cable – PvR
Indicator lights Output state Yellow LED (transmission present for XUM 0ppppppT)
Supply on Green LED
Instability Red LED (except for XUM 0ppppppT)
Current consumption, no-load mA 35 (20 for XUM 0ppppppT)
Switching capacity mA y 100 with overload and short-circuit protection
Alarm output mA 50
Response ms <2
Recovery ms <2
Connections
M8 Connector Pre-cabled PNP NPN Thru-beam accessory
3 (-) (-) BU (Blue) Transmitter
2 4
1 (+) (+) BN (Brown)
BN/1 + BN/1 +
PNP NPN 1/BN
4 OUT/Output OUT/Output BK (Black) BK/4 WH/2 BK/4 WH/2
1 3 2/VI
2 alarm or beam Alarm/WH (White) 3/BU
break input (1) Beam break input BU/3 – BU/3 –
VI (Violet) (1) 2/VI input:
See connection on page 9/44. - not connected: beam made
Detection curves
With thru-beam accessory Without accessory Without accessory With reflector
(thru-beam) (diffuse system) (diffuse system with (polarised reflex)
adjustable background
suppression)
cm
cm
cm 6
10 2 cm
Ø 10 mm 4
1 30 2
14 m 55 cm 10 cm 3 4 m
10 -2
-1 1
1 10 -4
-10 -2
-6 Sn 3m
Sn 10 m Sn 40 cm
Object: 10 x 10 cm, 1: white 90 %, 2: grey 18 %

Teach mode at minimum. Teach mode at maximum.
B B A-B: object reflection coefficient

Black 6 %
Grey 18 %
White 90 %
Sensing range
Non sensing zone (matt surfaces)
A 1 4,7 6 S (cm) A 1 8 15 S (cm)
5 11
1/31
References 1
Osiris® Optimum
Miniature design
Sensing Function Output Connection (pre- Reference Weight

550023
distance (Sn) cabled or connector) kg

m (1)
1 Diffuse system
With adjustable sensitivity for short sensing distance
0.1 N/O PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XUM 6APANL2 0.080
M8 connector XUM 6APANM8 0.030
XUM pAppp L2
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XUM 6ANANL2 0.080
M8 connector XUM 6ANANM8 0.030
N/C PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XUM 6APBNL2 0.080
M8 connector XUM 6APBNM8 0.030
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XUM 6ANBNL2 0.080
550024
M8 connector XUM 6ANBNM8 0.030
With adjustable sensitivity for long sensing distance

0.4 N/O PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XUM 5APANL2 0.080
XUM pApppM8
805799

2 N/O PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XUM 9APANL2 0.080
XUZ C50
Reflector 50 x 50 mm (2) – – XUZ C50 0.020
520312
Reflex system
550014
4 N/O PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XUM 1APANL2 0.080

XUZ M2003 M8 connector XUM 1APBNM8 0.030
Thru-beam system
Transmitter Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XUM 2AKSNL2T 0.080
540180
8 M8 connector XUM 2AKSNM8T 0.030

Receiver N/O PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XUM 2APANL2R 0.080
8 M8 connector XUM 2APANM8R 0.030
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XUM 2ANANL2R 0.080
M8 connector XUM 2ANANM8R 0.030
XUZ M2004 XUZ 2001 N/C PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XUM 2APBNL2R 0.080
M8 connector XUM 2APBNM8R 0.030
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XUM 2ANBNL2R 0.080
M8 connector XUM 2ANBNM8R 0.030
520960
520984
Description Reference (2) Weight

kg
3D fixing kit for use on M12 rod for XUM or XUZ C50 XUZ M2003 0.140
3D fixing kit for use on M12 rod and with protective cover for XUM XUZ M2004 0.205
XUZ A50 XUZ 2003 M12 rod XUZ 2001 0.050
For example, XUM 6APANL2 becomes XUM 6APANL5.
1/32

Miniature design
dimensions 1
Characteristics
Sensor type XUM pppppM8 XUM pppppL2
UL, CSA, e
M8 –
1
Sensing distance m 0.1 / 0.15 diffuse system with adjustable sensitivity for short sensing distance
nominal Sn / maximum m 0.4 / 0.6 diffuse system with adjustable sensitivity for long sensing distance
m 4 / 6 reflex
m 8 / 12 thru-beam
Type of transmission Infrared, (except XUM 9pppp (red)
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 65, IP 67 IP 65, IP 67, double insulation i
Materials Case PBT
Lens PMMA
Cable – PVC
Indicator lights Output state Yellow LED (except for XUM 2ppppppT)
Supply on Green LED (for XUM 2ppppppT)
Instability Red LED (except for XUM 2ppppppT)
Rated supply voltage V c 12...24 with protection against reverse polarity
Current consumption, no-load mA 35 (50 for XUM 2)
Voltage drop, closed state V y 1.5
Maximum switching frequency Hz 500 (400 for XUM 2)
Delays First-up ms 30
Response ms 1
Recovery ms 1
Connections
M8 connector Pre-cabled PNP NPN Transmitter c
2 4 3 (-) (-) BU (Blue)
1 (+) (+) BN (Brown) BN/1 + BN/1 +
PNP BK/4 (NO,NC) NPN 1/BN
1 3 4 OUT/Output OUT/Output BK (Black) BK/4 (NO,NC) 2/VI
2 Beam break input Beam break input (1) 3/BU
(1) VI (Violet) BU/3 – BU/3 –
2/VI input:
See connection on page 9/44. - not connected: beam made
Detection curves
Thru-beam system Diffuse system Polarised reflex system
Long sensing distance Short sensing distance With reflector XUZ C50
cm
1
cm 2 1 cm cm
8 2 2 2 6
1 1 4
10 2
60 cm 15 cm 3m
8 12 m -2 0,2 2
-1 10 20 -1
2,5 -4
-8 -2 -2 -6
Sn 8m Sn 40 cm Sn 10 cm Sn 2m
Object: 10 x 10 cm, 1: white 90 %, 2: grey 18 %

Reflex system Dimensions
With reflector XUZ C50 XUMpppppL2 XUMpppppM8
Indexation of the elbowed
cm 27 connector
6 27
4 3,5 3
2 3,5 Ø3 12
4
6m
-2 0,2
4
4
-4
-6
Sn 4m
3,5
34
25,5
34
8
17,5
11,5
Ø3
(1) Beam break input on thru-beam transmitter only
1/33
dimensions 1
Osiris® Universal, Osiconcept®(1)
Compact design 50 x 50
Five-wire, a.c. or d.c. supply, 1 NC/NO relay output
References
d.c. supply
805167
805166
1 Sensing distance (Sn) Function

m
Output Connection Reference
(pre-cabled
Weight
kg
or connector)
0…30 N/O or N/C, PNP/NPN Pre-cabled XUK 0AKSAL2 0.175
depending on whether using (L = 2 m) (2)
accessories are used Osiconcept M12 XUK 0AKSAM12 0.090
programming connector
XUK 0AKSAL2 XUK 0AKSAM12
Accessories
805799
(pre-cabled kg
or connector)
Thru-beam accessories Pre-cabled XUK 0AKSAL2T 0.140
(transmitter) (L = 2 m) (2)
M12 XUK 0AKSAM12T 0.090
connector
Reflector 50 x 50 mm – XUZ C50 0.020
XUZ C50
d.c. or a.c. supply
550028
Sensing distance (Sn) Function Output Connection Reference Weight

520312
m (pre-cabled kg
or connector)
0…30 N/O or N/C, Time Pre-cabled XUK 0ARCTL2 0.175
depending on whether using delay (L = 2 m) (2)
accessories are used Osiconcept relay
programming
Accessories
XUZ K2003 (pre-cabled kg
or connector)
Thru-beam accessory Pre-cabled XUK 0ARCTL2T 0.140
531142
(transmitter) (L = 2 m) (2)
Reflector 50 x 50 mm – XUZ C50 0.020

kg
3D fixing kit XUZ K2003 0.170
for use on M12 rod for XUK or XUZ C50
3D fixing kit XUZ K2004 0.270
XUZ K2004 XUZ 2001 for use on M12 rod and with protective cover for XUK
M12 rod XUZ 2001 0.050
550030

520984

(2) For a 5 m long cable, replace L2 with L5, and for a 10 m long cable, replace L2 with L10.
Example: XUK 0AKSAL2 becomes XUK 0AKSAL5 with a 5 m long cable.
XUZ 2003
XUZ A51
Dimensions
XUK 0ApppL2 XUK 0ApppM12
75
50
40 18 2xØ4,5
82
76
20
20
50
40
20
20
Ø4,5
1/34
schemes, Osiris® Universal, Osiconcept®(1)

Compact design 50 x 50
curves 1

Characteristics
Sensor type XUK pppppM12 XUK pppppL2
Connection
UL, CSA, e
M12 connector Pre-cabled L: 2 m
1
Sensing distance m 0.28 / 0.28 without accessory (diffuse system with adjustable background suppression)
nominal Sn / maximum m 0.8 / 1.2 without accessory (diffuse system)
m 4 / 5.7 with reflector (polarised reflex)
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 65, double insulation i
Materials Case PBT
Lens PMMA
Cable – PvR
Indicator lights Output state Yellow LED (transmission present for XUK 0ppppppT)
Supply on Green LED
Instability Red LED (except for XUK 0ppppppT)
Alarm output mA y 50 mA with overload and short-circuit protection
Rated supply voltage PNP/NPN V 12…24 c with protection against reverse polarity
Relay output V – 24…240 a or 12…240 c
Voltage limits (including ripple) PNP/NPN V 10…36 c
Relay output V – 20…264 a or 10…264 c
Current consumption, no-load PNP/NPN mA y 35; 20 for XUK 0AKppppT
Power consumption Relay output W – 3 a or c
Switching capacity PNP/NPN mA y 100 mA with overload and short-circuit protection
Relay output A – 3 a or c
Time delay Relay output s 0…10 on-delay, off-delay or monostable
Maximum switching frequency PNP/NPN Hz 250
Relay output Hz – 20
Delays First-up ms < 300 (PNP/NPN); < 200 (relay output)
Response ms < 2 (PNP/NPN); < 25 (relay output)
Recovery ms < 2 (PNP/NPN); < 25 (relay output)
Connections
M12 connector Pre-cabled PNP Thru-beam accessory c
3 (-) (-) BU (Blue) Transmitter
4 3
1 (+) (+) BN (Brown)
BN/1 +
PNP 1/BN
4 OUT/Output OUT/Output BK (Black) BK/4 WH/2
2/VI 2/VI input:
2 Alarm or beam Alarm/WH (White) 3/BU - not connected: beam made
1 2 –
break input (1) Beam break input (1) BU/3 - connected to –: beam broken
VI (Violet)
Pre-cabled, relay output NPN Thru-beam accessory a Relay output
See connection on page 9/44.
(z) BU (Blue) Transmitter
(1) Beam break input on thru-beam BN/1 +
(z) BN (Brown)
transmitter only. NPN
Relay common/GY (Grey) BK/4 WH/2
N/O BK (Black)
N/C WH (White) BU/3 –
Detection curves
With thru-beam accessory (thru-beam) Without accessory Without accessory (diffuse With reflector (polarised
(diffuse system) system with background reflex)
suppression)
1
2
3 40 120 cm 3 28 cm 5,7
30 35
4
80 cm 28 cm 4
S 30
Object 10 x 10 cm; 1 White 90 %; 2 Grey 18 % With reflector XUZ C50
Teach mode at minimum Teach mode at maximum A-B: object reflection coefficient
B B Black 6 %
Grey 18 %
White 90 %
Sensing range
A 1 8,1 8,5 10 S (cm) A 3 23 28 38 S (cm)
1/35
References 1
Osiris® Optimum
Compact design, 50 x 50
Sensing Function Output Connection Reference Weight

distance (Sn)
m kg
1 Diffuse system with adjustable sensitivity
523273
d.c. supply
1 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XUK 5APANL2 0.190
M12 connector XUK 5APANM12 0.070
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XUK 5ANANL2 0.190
M12 connector XUK 5ANANM12 0.070
NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XUK 5APBNL2 0.190
XUK pApppL2 M12 connector XUK 5APBNM12 0.070
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XUK 5ANBNL2 0.190
M12 connector XUK 5ANBNM12 0.070
d.c. or a.c. supply
523272
1 NO + NC Relay Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XUK 5ARCNL2 0.190

d.c. supply
5 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XUK 9APANL2 0.190
XUK pApppM12 M12 connector XUK 9ANANM12 0.070
M12 connector XUK 9APBNM12 0.070
805799

d.c. or a.c. supply
Reflex system
d.c. supply
XUZ C50 7 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XUK 1APANL2 0.070
M12 connector XUK 1ANANM12 0.070
M12 connector XUK 1APBNM12 0.070
d.c. or a.c. supply
Thru-beam system
XUZ K2003 d.c. supply
Transmitter – – Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XUK 2AKSNL2T 0.190
30 – – M12 connector XUK 2AKSNM12T 0.070
Receiver NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XUK 2APANL2R 0.140
30 M12 connector XUK 2APANM12R 0.075
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XUK 2ANANL2R 0.140
M12 connector XUK 2ANANM12R 0.075
NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XUK 2APBNL2R 0.140
M12 connector XUK 2APBNM12R 0.075
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XUK 2ANBNL2R 0.140
M12 connector XUK 2ANBNM12R 0.075
d.c. or a.c. supply
Transmitter 30 – – Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XUK 2ARCNL2T 0.140
XUZ K2004 XUZ 2001
Receiver 30 NO + NC Relay Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XUK 2ARCNL2R 0.070
kg
3D fixing kit for use on M12 rod, for XUK or XUZ C50 XUZ K2003 0.170
3D fixing kit for use on M12 rod, with protective cover for XUK XUZ K2004 0.270
M12 rod XUZ 2001 0.050
XUZ 2003
Fixing bracket XUZ A51 0.050
(1) For a 5 m long cable replace L2 by L5; for a 10 m long cable, replace L2 by L10.
Example: XUK 5APANL2 becomes XUK 5APANL5 or XUK 5APANL10.
XUZ A51 (2) For further information, see page 1/110.
1/36

curves, Five-wire, a.c. or d.c. supply, 1 NC/NO relay output
dimensions 1
Characteristics
Sensor type XUK pppppM12 XUK pppppL2
Connection
UL, CSA, e
M12 connector Pre-cabled, length: 2 m
1
Sensing distance m PNP/NPN or relay output 1 / 1.5 diffuse
nominal Sn / maximum m PNP/NPN or relay output 5 / 8 polarised reflex
m PNP/NPN or relay output 7 / 10 reflex
m PNP/NPN or relay output 30 / 45 thru-beam
Storage temperature °C - 40…+ 70
Operating temperature °C - 25…+ 55
Materials Case PBT
Lens PMMA
Cable – PVC
Indicator lights Output state Yellow LED (except for XUK 2ppppppT)
Supply on Green LED (for XUK 2ppppppT)
Rated supply voltage PNP/NPN V 12…24 with protection against reverse polarity
Relay output V – z 24…240
Voltage limits (including ripple) PNP/NPN V c 10…36
Relay output V – z 20…264
Current consumption, no-load PNP/NPN mA y 35
Power consumption Relay output W – z 2
Switching capacity PNP/NPN mA y 100 with overload and short-circuit protection
Relay output A – z 3
Wiring schemes
M12 connector Pre-cabled, PNP/NPN PNP Transmitter c
4 3 3 (-) (-) BU (Blue)
1 (+) (+) BN (Brown)
BN/1 + 1 BN
PNP BK/4 (NO,NC) 2 VI Input 2/VI:
4 OUT/Output OUT/Output BK (Black)
3 BU - not connected: beam made
1 2 2 Beam break input Beam break input (1) - connected to –: beam broken
(1) VI (Violet) BU/3 –
Pre-cabled, relay output NPN Transmitter z Relay output
See connection on page 9/44. (z) BU (Blue), BN
BN/1 +
(z) BN (Brown) NPN BK
BK/4 (NO,NC) GY
Relay common/GY (Grey) WH
(1) Beam break input on NO BK (Black) BU
thru-beam transmitter only. NC WH (White) BU/3 –
Detection curves
Thru-beam system Polarised reflex system Reflex system
With reflector XUZ C50 With reflector XUZ C50
Diffuse system Dimensions

XUKpppppL2 XUKpppppM12
66 Possible orientation of elbowed connector
0,8
84
76
0,5 1,5
20
Object: 10 x 10 cm,
20
1: white 90%, 2: grey 18% 7 4 6,5
1/37
dimensions 1
Osiris® Universal, Osiconcept®(1)
Compact design
562266
562267
References
d.c. supply
1 Sensing
distance (Sn)
Function Output Connection (pre-
cabled or connector)
Reference Weight
kg
m
0…40 N/O or N/C PNP/NPN Screw terminals – ISO XUX 0AKSAT16 0.200
depending on using 16 cable gland (3)
whether Osiconcept M12 connector XUX 0AKSAM12 0.200
are used
Accessories
Description Connection (pre- Reference Weight
XUX 0ARCTT16 XUX 0AKSAM12 cabled or connector) kg
Thru-beam accessories Screw terminals – ISO XUX 0AKSAT16T 0.200
562073
562068
(transmitter) 16 cable gland (3)

M12 connector XUX 0AKSAM12T 0.200

d.c. or a.c. supply
Sensing Function Output Connection (pre- Reference Weight
XUZ C50 m
XUZ X2003 0…40 N/O or N/C Time delay Screw terminals – ISO XUX 0ARCTT16 0.200
depending on using relay 16 cable gland (3)
562069
whether Osiconcept
are used
Accessories
Description Connection (pre- Reference Weight
cabled or connector) kg
Thru-beam accessory Screw terminals – ISO XUX 0ARCTT16T 0.200
(transmitter) 16 cable gland (3)
XUZ X2004 Reflector 50 x 50 mm XUZ C50 0.020

562072

kg
3D fixing kit XUZ X2003 0.220
for use on M12 rod for XUX or XUZ C50
3D fixing kit XUZ X2004 0.420
for use on M12 rod and with protective cover for XUX
M12 rod XUZ 2001 0.050
XUZ 2001 Support for M12 rod XUZ 2003 0.150

XUZ X2000
562070
Mounting bracket XUZ X2000 0.120

562074
Adaptor for ISO 16 - 1/2" NPT XUZ X2001 0.050
Adaptor for ISO 16 - ISO 20 XUZ X2002 0.050
XUZ X2001 XUZ 2003 (1) For further information on Osiconcept, see page 1/10.
(3) For Ø 7 to 10 mm cable.
Dimensions
XUX pppppT16 XUX pppppM12
(rear view)
(1) (1)
87
92
92
(3) (3)
104
104
73
127
114
(2) (2)
30 M12
30 22
37 21
37 30,5
50 30,5
50
71
71
(1) Elongated hole Ø 5.5 x 7 77
77 (2) Elongated hole Ø 5.5 x 9 87
100 (3) Holes Ø 5.5
1/38
schemes, Osiris® Universal, Osiconcept®

Compact design
curves 1

Characteristics
Sensor type XUX pppppM12 XUX pppppT16
Connection
UL, CSA, e
M12 connector Screw terminals, ISO 16 cable entry gland
1
Sensing distance m 1.3 / 1.3 without accessory (diffuse system with background suppression)
nominal Sn / maximum m 2 / 3 without accessory (diffuse system)
m 11 / 15 with reflector (polarised reflex)
Materials Case PBT
Lens PMMA
Indicator lights Output state Yellow LED (transmission present for XUX 0pppppppT)
Supply on Green LED
Instability Red LED except for XUX 0pppppppT)
Rated supply voltage PNP/NPN V 12…24 c with protection against reverse polarity
Relay output V – 24…240 a or c
Voltage limits PNP/NPN V 10…36 c
(including ripple) Relay output V – 20…264 a or c
Current consumption, no-load PNP/NPN mA y 35 (20 for XUX 0pppppppT)
Alarm output mA y 100 mA with overload and short-circuit protection
Switching capacity PNP/NPN mA y 100 mA with overload and short-circuit protection
Relay output A – 500,000 operating cycles
3 A: cos ϕ = 1/0.5 A: cos ϕ = 0.4
Maximum switching PNP/NPN Hz 240
frequency Relay output Hz – 20
Time delays Relay output s – 0.02…15 on-delay, off-delay or
monostable
Connections
M12 connector Relay output z PNP / NPN c Transmitter c Transmitter z
Terminals M12 Terminals M12 Terminals Terminals
4 3 1 z 1 p 1 + 1 p 1 + 1 z
2 z 3 p 2 - 3 p 2 - 2 z
1 2 3 N/O 4 p 3 Output 2 p 3 Beam broken input (1)
See connection on page 9/44. 4 Relay common 2 p 4 Alarm (1) Input not connected: beam made.
5 N/C Input connected to –: beam broken
Maximum permissible conductor section: 1 x 1.5 mm2 or 1 x 0.75 mm2 with adaptor
Detection curves
With thru-beam accessory (thru-beam) Without accessory (diffuse Without accessory (diffuse With reflector (polarised
system) system with adjustable reflex)
cm cm cm
80 2 15
40 10
1
20 Ø 8 mm
20 40 60 1 2 3m 11 15 m
-20 1,5
1 0,05
-40 2,6 -10
-80 2
40 -15
Sn < 2 m Sn 11 m
Object: 10 x 10 cm, 1: white 90 %, 2: grey 18 % With reflector XUZ C50

Variation of usable sensing distance Su (without accessory with adjustable background suppression)
Teach mode at minimum Teach mode at maximum
B B A-B: object reflection coefficient
Black 6 %
Grey 18 %
White 90 %
Sensing range
A 0,07 0,4 0,45 A 0,01 1,3 1,5 S (m)

S (m)
0,41 1,35
1/39
References 1
Osiris® Optimum
Compact design
Sensing dist. (Sn) Function Output Connection Reference Weight

m kg
562268
1 Diffuse system (1)

d.c. supply
2.1 NO PNP Screw terminals (3) XUX 5APANT16 0.200
M12 connector XUX 5APANM12 0.200
NPN Screw terminals (3) XUX 5ANANT16 0.200
M12 connector XUX 5ANANM12 0.200
NC PNP Screw terminals (3) XUX 5APBNT16 0.200
M12 connector XUX 5APBNM12 0.200
NPN Screw terminals (3) XUX 5ANBNT16 0.200
M12 connector XUX 5ANBNM12 0.200
a.c. or d.c. supply
XUX pApppT16 2.1 NO + NC Relay Screw terminals (3) XUX 5ARCNT16 0.200
Polarised reflex system (1)
d.c. supply
562269
11 NO PNP Screw terminals (3) XUX 9APANT16 0.200

562073

a.c. or d.c. supply
11 NO + NC Relay Screw terminals (3) XUX 9ARCNT16 0.200
XUX pApppM12 XUZ C50 Reflex system (1)

d.c. supply
14 NO PNP Screw terminals (3) XUX 1APANT16 0.200
562068

562071

a.c. or d.c. supply
14 NO + NC Relay Screw terminals (3) XUX 1ARCNT16 0.200
XUZ X2003
Thru-beam system (1)
562069
d.c. supply
Transmitter Screw terminals (3) XUX 0AKSAT16T 0.200
40 M12 connector XUX 0AKSAM12T 0.200
Receiver NO PNP Screw terminals (3) XUX 2APANT16R 0.200
40 M12 connector XUX 2APANM12R 0.200
NPN Screw terminals (3) XUX 2ANANT16R 0.200
M12 connector XUX 2ANANM12R 0.200
NC PNP Screw terminals (3) XUX 2APBNT16R 0.200
M12 connector XUX 2APBNM12R 0.200
XUZ X2004 XUZ 2001 NPN Screw terminals (3) XUX 2ANBNT16R 0.200
M12 connector XUX 2ANBNM12R 0.200
a.c. or d.c. supply
Transmitter Screw terminals (3) XUX 0ARCTT16T 0.200
562072
40
Receiver NO + NC Relay Screw terminals (3) XUX 2ARCNT16R 0.200
40
562070

kg
3D fixing kit for use on M12 rod, for XUX or XUZ C50 XUZ X2003 0.220
3D fixing kit for use on M12 rod, with protective cover XUX XUZ X2004 0.420
M12 rod XUZ 2001 0.050
XUZ X2000 XUZ 2003
Fixing bracket XUZ X2000 0.120
(1) With adjustable sensitivity.
(3) Screw terminals with ISO 16 cable gland for cable Ø 7 to 10 mm.
1/40
connections, Osiris® Optimum

Compact design
curves, Five-wire, a.c. or d.c. supply, 1 NC/NO relay output
dimensions 1
Characteristics
Sensor type XUX pppppM12 XUX pANpNT16, pAPpNT16 XUX pARCpT16
Connection
UL, CSA, e
M12 connector Screw terminals - ISO 16 cable gland
1
Sensing distance m 2.1 / 3 for diffuse with adjustable sensitivity
nominal Sn / maximum m 11 / 15 for polarised reflex with adjustable sensitivity
m 14 / 20 for reflex with adjustable sensitivity
m 40 / 60 for thru-beam with adjustable sensitivity
Materials Case PBT
Lens PMMA
Indicator lights Output state Yellow LED (transmission present for XUX 0pppppppT c)
Supply on Green LED
Rated supply voltage PNP/NPN V 12…24 with protection against reverse polarity
Voltage limits (including ripple) PNP/NPN V 10…36 c
Current consumption, no-load PNP/NPN mA y 35, (20 for XUX 0pppppppT)
Switching capacity PNP/NPN mA y 100 with overload and short-circuit protection
Relay output A – 500 000 operating cycles
3 A: cos ϕ = 1/0.5 A: cos ϕ = 0.4
Connections
M12 connector Relay output z PNP / NPN c Transmitter c Transmitter z
Terminals M12 Terminals M12 Terminals Terminals
4 3 1 z 1 p 1 + 1 p 1 + 1 z
2 z 3 p 2 - 3 p 2 - 2 z
1 2 3 NO 4 p 3 Output 2 p 3 Beam break input (1)
4 Relay common (1) Input not connected: beam made.
See connection on page 9/44. 5 NC Input connected to – : beam broken.
Maximum permissible conductor c.s.a.: 1 x 1.5 mm2 or 1 x 0.75 mm2 with cable end.
Detection curves
Thru-beam system Diffuse system Reflex system Polarised reflex system
cm cm cm cm
80 6 15 15
4 10 10
40
20 Ø 8 mm 2 5 5
0,7 2,10 3m 20 m 10 15m
20 40 60 m -2 8
13
5
-20 -5 0,05 -5 0,05
-4
-40 0,05 -10 -10
-6
-80 Sn 2,1 m -15 -15
Sn 40 m Sn 14 m Sn 11 m
Object 10 x 10 cm; 1 White 90%; 2 Grey 18% With reflector XUZ C50 With reflector XUZ C50
Dimensions
XUX pppppT16 XUX pppppM12
(1) (1)
87
92
(3)
92
(3)
104
104
73
127
114
(2) (2)
30 M12
30 22
37 21
37 30,5 Possible orientation of elbowed connector
50 30,5 (rear view)
50
71
71
(1) Elongated hole Ø 5.5 x 7 77
77 (2) Elongated hole Ø 5.5 x 9 87
100 (3) Ø 5.5 hole
1/41
References 1
Osiris® Universal and Optimum

Fibre design, amplifiers
Teach mode
Universal amplifiers (with fine adjustment and 4-digit screen)

1 distance (Sn)
m
(pre-cabled or
connector)
kg
561584
Depending on NO/NC PNP Pre-cabled XUD A2PSML2 0.040

+
fibre used Programmable

switching M8 connector XUD A2PSMM8 0.040
NPN Pre-cabled XUD A2NSML2 0.040
M8 connector XUD A2NSMM8 0.040
XUD A2
Optimum amplifiers
distance (Sn) (pre-cabled or kg
m connector)
561785
Depending on NO/NC PNP Pre-cabled XUD A1PSML2 0.040

fibre used Programmable
switching M8 connector XUD A1PSMM8 0.040
NPN Pre-cabled XUD A1NSML2 0.040
M8 connector XUD A1NSMM8 0.040
XUD A1
1/42
schemes, Osiris® Universal and Optimum

Fibre design, amplifiers
dimensions 1

Teach mode
Characteristics
Sensor type XUD A1ppSMM8, XUD A1ppSML2,
XUD A2ppSMM8
e, cULus
XUD A2ppSML2
1
Connection Connector M8 –
Pre-cabled – Length 2 m
Sensing distance (Sn) Depending on fibre used, see page 1/44 and sensing distance divided by 2 for XUD
A2 configured for rapid frequency
Adjustable sensitivity Teach mode on XUD A1,
Teach mode and fine adjustable by +/- key and 4-digit screen on XUD A2
Type of transmission Red
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 529 IP 65 with Ø 2 mm fibre (IP 64 with Ø 1 mm fibre)


Indicator lights Output state Yellow LED
Instability Red LED for XUD A1
Stability Green LED for XUD A2
Signal level By 7-segment / 4 digit display for XUD A2
Voltage limits (including ripple) V c 10.8…26.4
Current consumption, no-load mA y 50

Alarm output mA y 50 mA for XUD A2 with overload and short-circuit protection
Protection against mutual interferences Yes for XUD A2
Voltage drop, closed state V y 2 for XUD ApPpppp, y 1 for XUD ApNppppp
Maximum switching frequency kHz 1 kHz for XUD A1, 1 or 5 kHz configurable for XUD A2
Output time delay ms 0 or 40 on recovery for XUD A2

Response ms < 0.5 (0.1 for XUD A2 in rapid frequency mode)
Recovery ms < 0.5 (0.1 for XUD A2 in rapid frequency mode)
XUD A2 connections
M8 connector Pre-cabled PNP NPN
2 4 1(+) BN Brown (+) BN/1 + BN/1 +

3 (-) BU Blue (-) PNP NPN
BK/4 WH/2 BK/4 WH/2
1 3 4 (OUT/output) BK Black (output)
2 (alarm) WH White (alarm)
BU/3 – BU/3 –
(WH only on XUD A2)
XUD A1 connections
2 4
1(+) BN Brown (+) BN/1 + BN/1 +
3 (-) BU Blue (-) PNP NPN
1 3 BK/4 BK/4
4 (OUT/output) BK Black (Output)
2
BU/3 – BU/3 –
See connection on page 9/44
Dimensions
XUD Ap XUD A1
ALM OUT
SET
40
XUD A2
OUT
- SET + 1234 H T S
65 10
1/43
Dimensions, Photo-electric sensors 1
references, Fibre optic light guides for Osiris® Universal and

characteristics, Optimum amplifiers
“PLASTIC” fibres with end fittings, thru-beam system
curves 1
1
R
R = minimum bend radius

Fibre of ext. Ø 2.2 mm, R = 25 mm
Fibre of ext. Ø 1 mm, R = 10 mm
XUF N2S01Lp, R = 4 mm
M2,6 Ø1,5 M2,6
12 3
12 3
x0,45 x0,45
15 5 90
M4 M4
x0,7 x0,7
M4
x0,7
Ø2,2 Ø2,2 Ø2,2
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) With fibre L = 2 m 200 mm (1) 180 mm 150 mm (1)
With lens 1500 mm (2) – 1000 mm (2)
Application, features General use Materials handling, cyclic
movements
References (complete assembly - 2 fibres)

With standard end fittings L=2m XUF N12301 – XUF N10302
L = 10 m XUF N12301L10 – –
With 90 mm flexible end fittings, L = 2 m – XUF N12311 –
Weight (kg) 0.030 (L = 2 m) 0.030 0.070
Characteristics
Fibre (view on sensing face)
Core (Ø mm) 1xØ1 1xØ1 1xØ1

Trimmable to required length Yes Yes Yes
(trimmer XUF Z11 included)
Ambient air temperature For operation: - 25…+ 60 °C. For storage: - 40…+ 80 °C
Vibration resistance 7 gn, amplitude ± 1.5 mm (f = 10…55 Hz), conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
Shock resistance 30 gn, duration 11 ms, conforming to IEC 60068-2-27
Degree of protection IP 64 conforming to IEC 60529 and IP 641 conforming to NF C 20-010
Materials Fibres: PMMA; sheath: PE
Detection curves
XUF NpppppL10 XUF N12301, N12311 XUF N10302
Percentage reduction in sensing distance
related to length of fibre
100%
mm mm
50%
200
150
Sn ≤ 200 mm
150 mm
100 100
0%
2m 5m 10 m
Length of fibre
Sn
cm 6 3 -3 -6 cm 6 3 -3 -6
Ø of Ø of
beam beam
(1) Can be used with 90° mirror XUF Z02, see page 1/51.
(2) With lens accessory XUF Z01, see page 1/51.
References of amplifiers: Accessories:

page 1/42 page 1/51
1/44

“PLASTIC” fibres with end fittings, thru-beam system
curves 1
M2,6 Ø0,8 M2,6 M2,6
20
12 3
12 3
12 3
x0,45 x0,45 M8 x0,45
90
M3 M4 M4
x1,25
x0,5 x0,7 x0,7
15
M3
x0,5
Ø1 Ø1 Ø2,2 Ø2,2
50 mm (1) 30 mm 300 mm (1) 2500 mm 100 mm (1)

1000 mm (2) – 2000 mm (2) – 750 mm (2)
Accurate positioning Long sensing distance fibres Fibres with integral lens Flexible fibres for cyclic
Resistant to accumulation of movements, areas with
dirt restricted access
XUF N35301 – XUF N2P01L2 XUF N2L01L2 XUF N2S01L2

– – XUF N2P01L10 XUF N2L01L10 XUF N2S01L10
– XUF N35311 – – –
0.045 0.045 0.058 (L = 2 m) 0.060 (L = 2 m) 0.062 (L = 2 m)
1 x Ø 0.5 1 x Ø 0.5 1 x Ø 1.5 1xØ1 1xØ1

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
For operation: - 25…+ 60 °C. For storage: - 40…+ 80 °C

7 gn, amplitude ± 1.5 mm (f = 10…55 Hz), conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
30 gn, duration 11 ms, conforming to IEC 60068-2-27
IP 64 conforming to IEC 60529 and IP 641 conforming to NF C 20-010
Fibres: PMMA; sheath: PE
XUF N35301 XUF N35311 XUF N2P01L2 XUF N2L01L2 XUF N2S01L2
mm
mm 2500
2000 mm
mm mm
300
200
700
100
25 15
cm 6 3 -3 6 cm 6 3 -3 6 cm 6 3 -3 -6 cm 9 6 3 -3 -6 -9 cm 6 3 -3 -6
Ø of Ø of Ø of Ø of Ø of
beam beam beam beam beam
1/45

Optimum amplifiers
characteristics, “PLASTIC” fibres with end fittings, diffuse system
curves 1
Ø2,2 Ø2,2 Ø2,2
1
R
M6
M6 x0,75
15
R = minimum bend radius x0,75
15
Fibre of ext. Ø 2.2 mm, R = 25 mm M6 M6
x0,75
5
Fibre of ext. Ø 1 mm, R = 10 mm x0,75
15
90 3,5 15
3
XUF N5S01Lp, R = 4 mm
90
M6
3
x0,75
Ø2,5
15
8
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 70 mm 60 mm 60 mm 20 mm 20 mm
Application, features General use Positioning Cyclic movements
References
With standard end L = 2 m XUF N05321 – XUF N05323 XUF N15322 –
fittings L = 10 m XUF N05321L10 – – – –
With 90 mm flexible end fittings, L = 2 m – XUF N05331 – – XUF N15332
Weight (kg) 0.030 (L = 2 m) 0.030 0.060 0.070 0.070
Characteristics
Core (Ø mm) 2xØ1 2xØ1 1 x Ø 1 + 16 x Ø 0.265 2 x Ø 1 2xØ1

Trimmable to Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
required length
(trimmer XUF Z11
included)

Detection curves (object 10 x 10 cm, white 90%)

XUF NpppppL10 XUF N05321 XUF N05331, XUF N05323 XUF N15322, N15332
Percentage reduction in sensing distance
related to length of fibre mm mm
100%
70
50 50
50%
mm
20 20
10
0 2m 5m 10 m mm 9 6 3 mm 6 3 -3 -6
mm 9 6 3 -3 -6 -9 -3 -6 -9
Length of fibre
Ø of Ø of
beam beam
Ø of
beam

page 1/42 page 1/51
1/46

Optimum amplifiers
characteristics, “PLASTIC” fibres with end fittings, diffuse system
curves 1
Ø1
1
M4
x0,7 M4
3 12
15
13
x0,7 3 12
3
12
90
M4
M3 x0,7
3 12
x0,5 M2,6
15
x0,45
15
18 mm 18 mm 6 mm 15 mm 95 mm 55 mm
Positioning Positioning Areas with restricted Positioning Long sensing distance Flexible fibres for cyclic
access fibres movements, areas with
restricted access
XUF N01321 – XUF N04331 XUF N02323 XUF N5P01L2 XUF N5S01L2
– – – – XUF N5P01L10 XUF N5S01L10
– XUF N01331 – – – –
0.045 0.045 0.045 0.040 0.058 (L = 2 m) 0.062 (L = 2 m)
2 x Ø 0.5 2 x Ø 0.5 2 x Ø 0.265 1 x Ø 0.5 + 4 x Ø 0.25 2 x Ø 1.5 2xØ1

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
For operation: - 25…+ 60 °C. For storage: - 40…+ 80 °C

7 gn, amplitude ± 1.5 mm (f = 10…55 Hz), 7 gn, amplitude ± 1.5 mm (f = 10…55 Hz), conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
conforming to IEC 60068-2-27
30 gn, duration 11 ms, conforming to IEC 60068-2-27
IP 64 conforming to IEC 60529 and IP 641 conforming to NF C 20-010
Fibres: PMMA; sheath: PE
XUF N01321, N01331 XUF N04331 XUF N02323 XUF N5P01L2 XUF N5S01L2
mm
90
mm
70
15
mm 50
mm 50
mm
15
7,5 20 20
10 3
mm 6 3 -3 -6 mm 6 3 -3 -6 mm 6 3 -3 -6 mm 9 6 3 -3 -6 -9 mm 6 3 -3 -6
Ø of Ø of Ø of Ø of Ø of
beam beam beam beam beam
1/47
references, Fibre optic light guides for Osiris® “Full colour”

characteristics 1
amplifiers
“PLASTIC” fibres with end fittings, diffuse system
30 34 30
1
R
9,2
11,6
11,6
4
5
(2) 6 (2) 7 (2) 7
R = 40 mm
(1) (1) (1)
2000
2000
2000
(3) (3) (3)
15 9,8
15 9,8
15 9,8
29,7
30,7
30,7
10
15
14,5 20
30
16
(1) Fibre reference ring for transmitter.

(2) Transmitter.
(3) 2 elongated holes Ø 3.2 x 6.7 for M3 screws
Maximum tightening torque: 0.3 N.m.
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 10 mm 20 mm 30 mm
with fibre L = 2 m
Application, features Focused fibres, specially suited to Osiris “Full colour” sensors XUR C4pPML2
References
With specific end fittings L=2m XUF N5L01L2 XUF N5L02L2 XUF N5L03L2
for detection of colours
Weight (kg) 0.030 0.030 0.030
Characteristics
Core (Ø mm) Transmitter: 1 x Ø 1 Transmitter: 1 x Ø 1.5 Transmitter: 1 x Ø 1.5

Receiver: 1 x Ø 1.5 Receiver: 1 x Ø 1.5 Receiver: 1 x Ø 1.5
Trimmable to required length No No No
Spot diameter 2.5 mm 5 mm 8 mm
Materials Fibres: PMMA; sheath: PE. Head: PA 66, lens PC
References of amplifiers:
page 1/42
1/48

“GLASS” fibres with end fittings, thru-beam and diffuse
curves 1
systems
M6
32,5
R

Metal sheath, R = 90 mm
M4
970
M2,6
M2,6
M4
25
970
System Thru-beam Diffuse

Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 200 mm (1)
with fibre L = 1 m 1500 mm (2) 70 mm
Application High temperatures
References (complete assembly - 2 fibres for thru-beam system)

With standard end fittings L=1m XUF S2020 XUF S0520
Weight (kg) 0.070 0.075
Characteristics
Core (Ø mm) 1xØ1 2xØ1

Ambient air temperature For operation and storage: - 40…+ 180 °C
Materials Fibres: glass; sheath: metal
Detection curves
XUF S2020 XUF S0520
mm
mm
200
70
50
100
cm 6 3 -3 -6 cm 2 1 -1 -2
Ø of Ø of
beam beam
(1) Can be used with 90° mirror XUF Z02, see page 1/51.
(2) With lens accessory XUF Z01, see page 1/51.

page 1/42 page 1/51
1/49

Optimum amplifiers
characteristics, “PLASTIC” fibres without end fittings, thru-beam system
curves 1
1
R

Fibre of ext. Ø 2.2 mm, R = 25 mm
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) L = 2 m See detection curves below (1)

Application General use
References
Fibre without end fitting XUF Z910 XUF Z920 XUF Z911 XUF Z921
Weight (kg) 0.020 0.040 0.040 0.080
Characteristics
Fibre
Core (Ø mm) 1xØ1 1 x Ø 1.4

Length 10 m 20 m 10 m 20 m
Trimmable to required length Yes Yes
(trimmer XUF Z11 included)
Detection curves
XUF Z911, Z921 XUF Z910, Z920 XUF Z911, Z921
XUF Z910, Z920
Sensing distance (thru-beam system)

300 mm
250 mm
mm mm
200 mm
1 200
150 mm 300
120 mm
100 mm
2
50 mm 100 150
0 mm
4 m 10 m 20 m 30 m 40 m
Total length
cm 6 3 -3 -6 cm 8 4 -4 -8
1 XUF Z911, Z921
2 XUF Z910, Z920
Total length = sum of the 2 strands Ø of Ø of
used to constitute a thru-beam system beam beam
(1) It is possible to increase the sensing distance of fibres without end fittings by using fixing clamps with lens (XUF Z03, Z04 or Z05), see page 1/51.

page 1/42 page 1/51
1/50
References 1
Fibre optic light guides for Osiris® Universal and

Optimum amplifiers
Accessories
Accessories for fibres with threaded end fittings

Description For use with Reference Weight
XUF Z02
90° mirror Fibre optic light guides XUF Z02
kg
0.005
1
(set of 2) XUF N1p30p,
XUF N35301 and
XUF S2020 (thru-beam
XUF Z01 system)
XUF N2p01Lpp
Lenses for increasing sensing distance Fibre optic light guides XUF Z01 0.005
(set of 2) XUF N1p30p,
XUF N35301 and
XUF S2020 (thru-beam
XUF Z06
system)
Focusing lens for high precision Fibre optic light guides XUF Z06 0.001
detection. Detection of 0.5 mm objects XUF N02323
at a distance of 7 mm. Also enables (diffuse system)
detection of objects against a background
(1)
Accessories for plastic fibres without end fittings

Description Mounting For use with Reference Weight
XUF Z13, XUF Z03 plane kg
Fixing clamps Axial Plastic fibre optic light XUF Z13 0.002
(set of 2) guides XUF Z
Frontal Plastic fibre optic light XUF Z14 0.002

guides XUF Z
Lateral Plastic fibre optic light XUF Z15 0.002

guides XUF Z
XUF Z14, XUF Z04
Fixing clamps with Axial Plastic fibre optic light XUF Z03 0.002
lens (set of 2) guides XUF Z
Frontal Plastic fibre optic light XUF Z04 0.002

guides XUF Z
Lateral Plastic fibre optic light XUF Z05 0.002

XUF Z15, XUF Z05 guides XUF Z
Protection accessories
kg
Protective tubing Plastic fibre optic light XUF Z210 0.040
Length 1 m guides with M4
threaded end fittings
Plastic fibre optic light XUF Z310 0.065

guides with M6
threaded end fittings
Other accessories
Description Sold in Unit reference Weight
lots of kg
Fibre trimmer 1 XUF Z11 0.006
XUF Zp10
Plastic end adaptor for connecting 2 XUF Z08 0.002

Ø 1 mm fibres to amplifiers XUD A
(1) Characteristics obtained when the fibre is fully screwed into the lens (screwing depth = 4 mm).
XUF Z11 XUF Z08
References of fibre optics:

pages 1/44 to 1/50
1/51
Curves 1

Optimum amplifiers
Accessories
Detection curves for plastic fibre optic light guides with fixing clamps
Sensing distance of fibres XUF Z9ppp fitted with fixing clamps XUF Zpp
1 Fibre type Clamp type
XUF Z13 XUF Z14, Z15 XUF Z03 XUF Z04, Z05 Without clamp
XUF Z910, Z920 (2 fibres L = 2 m) Sn 150 mm 100 mm 800 mm 600 mm 200 mm
XUF Z911, Z921 (2 fibres L = 2 m) Sn 220 mm 150 mm 1200 mm 900 mm 300 mm
Other fibre lengths:
5 m fibres: reduce the sensing distance by a factor of 0.7.
Detection curves with lens Detection curves without lens

Fixing clamp XUF Z03, Z04 or Z05 Fixing clamp XUF Z03, Z04 or Z05 Fixing clamp XUF Z13, Z14 or Z15 Fixing clamp XUF Z13, Z14 or Z15
+ fibre XUF Z910 or Z920 + fibre XUF Z911 or Z921 + fibre XUF Z910 or Z920 + fibre XUF Z911 or Z921
mm mm mm mm
Sn
Sn
Sn
Sn
cm 2 -2 cm 4 -4 cm 6 -6 cm 6 -6
Ø of Ø of Ø of Ø of
beam beam beam beam

pages 1/44 to 1/50
1/52
Dimensions 1

Optimum amplifiers
Accessories
Dimensions
XUF Z01 XUF Z210 XUF Z06
M8x1 M4 M4 1
across flats
7
M2,6
3 11 4
15 1000 20
10 22
XUF Z02 XUF Z310
M10x1 M6
across flats
10
M2,6
6,5
9,2
15 1000 20
XUF Z03, XUF Z13 XUF Z04, XUF Z14 XUF Z05, XUF Z15
2,75
2,75
2,75
6 (1) 3,05 6 3,05 6 3,05

(1)
9,5
9,5
9,5
15
(1)
15
15
6
6
7,5 12,5 7,5 12,5 7,5 12,5

2,75
2,75
2,75
6 3,05 (1) 6 3,05 6
(1)
9,5
9,5
9,5
15
(1)
15
15
6
6
7,5 12,5 7,5 12,5 7,5 12,5
(1) Light beam window.

pages 1/44 to 1/50
1/53
characteristics 1
Osiris® Other formats, general use
Compact design
3-wire d.c., solid-state output
Compact design
Pre-cabled and connector versions
1
1 2 3
System Thru-beam 1 Reflex 2 Polarised reflex 2 Diffuse 3
Type of transmission Infrared Red Infrared

Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 8m 6m 4m 0.7 m
(with Ø 80 mm (with Ø 80 mm
reflector) reflector)
References
3-wire, Light or dark Connection Pre-cabled XUL H083534 XUL H06353 XUL H043539 XUL H703535
PNP programmable Connector XUL H083534D XUL H06353D XUL H043539D XUL H703535D
switching
3-wire, Light or dark Connection Pre-cabled XUL J083534 XUL J06353 XUL J043539 XUL J703535
NPN programmable Connector XUL J083534D XUL J06353D XUL J043539D XUL J703535D
switching
Transmitter Connection Pre-cabled XUL K0830 –
Connector XUL K0830D –
Weight (kg) Connection Pre-cabled 0.195
Connector 0.135
Characteristics
Product certifications e. Special H7 version: UL, CSA
Ambient air temperature For operation - 25…+ 55 °C
For storage - 40…+ 70 °C
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 7 gn, amplitude ± 2 mm (f = 10...55 Hz)
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 67
Conforming to NF C 20-010 IP 671
Connection Pre-cabled Diameter 6 mm, length 2 m (1)
Wire c.s.a.: 4 x 0.34 mm2 (2 x 0.34 mm2 for thru-beam transmitter)
Connector M12
Materials Case ABS
Lenses PMMA
Cable PVC
Rated supply voltage c 12…24 V with protection against inversion of the 3 wires
Voltage limits c 10…30 V (including ripple)
Switching capacity (sealed) y 200 mA with overload and short-circuit protection
Voltage drop, closed state y 1.5 V
Current consumption, no-load y 35 mA
Maximum switching frequency 250 Hz
Delays First-up y 15 ms
Response y 2 ms
Recovery y 2 ms
Function table Thru-beam and reflex systems Diffuse system
No object present Object present No object present Object present
in the beam in the beam in the beam in the beam
Output state (PNP or NPN) Light switching function
indicator
(illuminated when sensor output
is ON) Dark switching function
(1) For a sensor with a 5 m long cable add L05 to the end of the reference, for a 10 m long cable
add L10 to the end of the reference.
Example: sensor XUL H083534 with 5 m cable becomes XUL H083534L05.
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/54
characteristics 1
Compact design
2-wire a.c. or d.c., solid-state output
Compact design
1
1 2
System Reflex 1 Polarised reflex 1 Diffuse 2

Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 6m 4m 0.7 m
(with Ø 80 mm reflector) (with Ø 80 mm reflector)
References
2-wire Light switching Connection Pre-cabled XUL A06021 XUL A040219 XUL A700115
Connector XUL A06021K XUL A040219K XUL A700115K
Dark switching Connection Pre-cabled XUL A06011 XUL A040119 XUL A700215
Connector XUL A06011K XUL A040119K XUL A700215K
Weight (kg) Connection Pre-cabled 0.195
Connector 0.135
Characteristics
Connection Pre-cabled Diameter 6 mm, length 2 m (1), wire c.s.a.: 2 x 0.34 mm2
Connector 1/2 20 UNF
Materials Case ABS/PC
Lenses PMMA
Cable PVC
Rated supply voltage a or c 24…240 V
Voltage limits a or c 20…264 V
Switching capacity (2) a 12 or c 12 (resistive load): 0.5 A/240 V
Sealed Maximum a 140 (inductive load): 0.3 A/240 V
c 13 (inductive load): 0.1 A/240 V; 0.2 A/110 V; 0.5 A/48 V
Minimum 5 mA
Inrush 3000 mA
Voltage drop, closed state y 3 V (I = 0.1…0.5 A); y 5.5 V (I = 10 mA); y 10 V (I = 5 mA)
Residual current, open state y 1.7 mA (on a); y 1.5 mA (on c)
Response y 20 ms
Recovery y 20 ms
Function table Reflex system Diffuse system
Output state indicator Light switching function
is ON)
Dark switching function
Example: sensor XUL A06021 with 5 m cable becomes XUL A06021L05.
(2) These sensors do not incorporate overload or short-circuit protection and therefore, it is
strongly advised to connect a 0.63 A “quick-blow” fuse in series with the load, see page 1/56.
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/55
Curves, Photo-electric sensors 1
dimensions 1
a.c. and d.c. supply
Solid-state output
Detection curves
Thru-beam system Reflex system Diffuse system
1 Ø of beam
cm
Ø of beam
cm
Ø of beam
mm
10 10
10 8
5 6
5 Ø 16 mm 4
2
0,2 4 6 m
m -5 -2 0,1 0,3 0,7 m
-5 -4
-10 -6
-10 (1) -8
Sn 8m -10 Sn 0,7 m
(2)
(1) Polarised Object 20 x 20 cm
White 90%
(2) Infrared
Excess gain curves (ambient temperature: + 25 °C)

Thru-beam system Reflex system
gain gain
500
50
30
1
25
100
50 15
10
7
10
2
5 3
With reflector XUZ C80
1 Infrared
1 2 Polarised
1
0,1 0,2 0,4 0,8 2 3 5 8 10 13 0,7 1,5 4 68 20
0,6 1 4 6 9 D (m) 1 2 10 30 D (m)
Diffuse system
gain
Min.
10
ON OFF
Potentiometer adjustment
7 (OFF) (ON)
5
4
1/2
3
2 2 1
Object 20 x 20 cm
Object 20 x 20 cm 1 White 90%
White 90% Max. 2 grey 18%
1
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 D (cm) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 D (cm)
Dimensions
35 (2) 18 (3) 17
(5)
7
(1)
R (6)
11
(6)
30
39
28
E
70
80
(5)
4,5
28 (4)
54,5
12,5
14
12
20,6 45
30
(1) Optical axis (4) Front fixing (Ø 3 screws and inserts included)
(2) Sensitivity potentiometer (diffuse model) (5) 1 elongated hole Ø 4.1 x 10 and 1 x Ø 4.1
(3) Output LED indicator (6) 1 elongated hole Ø 3.1 x 10 and 1 x Ø 3.1
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/56
Schemes 1

a.c. and d.c. supply
Solid-state output
Wiring schemes
Wiring schemes (3-wire c)
Transmitter Light switching programmed (no object present)
Thru-beam receiver & reflex Diffuse
Dark switching programmed (no object present)
Thru-beam receiver & reflex Diffuse
1
PNP output PNP output PNP output PNP output
OG/2 OG/2
BN/1 BN/1 BN/1 BN/1 BN/1
BU/3 BK/4 BK/4 BK/4 BK/4

BU/3 BU/3 BU/3 BU/3
OG/2 OG/2
NPN output NPN output NPN output NPN output

OG/2 OG/2
BN/1 BN/1 BN/1 BN/1
BK/4 BK/4 BK/4 BK/4
BU/3 BU/3 BU/3 BU/3
OG/2 OG/2
Connector scheme (sensor connector pin view)
1 ( +)
Programming 2 4 Output
3 ( –)
Wiring schemes (2-wire a or c)

Light switching (no object present) Dark switching (no object present)
Reflex Diffuse Reflex Diffuse
BN/2 BN/2 BN/2 BN/2
BU/3 BU/3 BU/3 BU/3
Attention: it is essential to connect a load in series with the sensor

Solid-state output (reflex and diffuse system)
2 3
1/57
characteristics 1
Compact design
5-wire a.c. or d.c., 1 NC/NO relay output
Compact design
1
1 2
System Thru-beam 1 Reflex 2 Polarised reflex 2 Diffuse with

background
suppression 2
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 8m 6m 4m 0.25 m (fixed sensing

(with Ø 80 mm (with Ø 80 mm distance)
References
5-wire Light switching XUL M080314 XUL M06031 XUL M040319 XUL M300318
Transmitter XUL M0600 –
Weight (kg) 0.195
Characteristics
Connection Pre-cabled: diameter 6 mm, length 2 m (1), wire c.s.a.: 5 x 0.34 mm2 (2 x 0.34 mm2 for
thru-beam transmitter)
Materials Case ABS
Lenses PMMA
Cable PVC
Maximum switching capacity 2000 mA (cos ϕ = 1), 500mA (cos ϕ = 0.4) for a contact life of 0.5 million operating cycles
at an operating rate of 1 operating cycle per second, at 250 V
Maximum voltage on output relay contacts 250 V
Current consumption, no-load Transmitter: y 5 mA y 40 mA (2)
Receiver: y 40 mA (2)
Response y 25 ms
Recovery y 25 ms
Function table Thru-beam and reflex systems Diffuse system

Output state of relay contact Light switching function BN BN BN
BN RD RD RD
indicator RD
OG OG OG
OG
(illuminated when relay energised)
Relay energised Relay de-energised Relay de-energised Relay energised
Example: sensor XUL M080314 with 5 m cable becomes XUL M080314L05.
(2) No-load current consumption at 220 V: y 25 mA
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/58
dimensions, Osiris® Other formats, general use

Compact design
schemes 1
5-wire a.c. or d.c., 1 NC/NO relay output
Detection curves
Thru-beam system Reflex system a or c Diffuse system with background
Ø of beam Ø of beam
suppression
Ø of beam
1
cm cm mm
10 10 2 1
10 8
5 6
5 Ø 16 mm 4
2
0,2 4 6 m
m -5 -2 0,1 0,2 0,25 m
-5 -4
-10 -6
-10 (1) -8
-10 Sn 0,25 m
(2)
(1) Polarised Object 20 x 20 cm

(2) Infrared 1 white 90%
2 black 6%
Excess gain curves (ambient temperature: + 25 °C) Variation of usable sensing distance Su
Thru-beam system Reflex system a or c Diffuse system with background
suppression
gain gain gain
B
500 50
30
1
25
100
15
50
10
7
2 A 0,05 0,10
10 0,20 0,35 S (m)
3 0,25
5
A-B: Object reflection coefficient
Black 6%
1 1
0,7 1,5 4 68 20 Grey 18%
0,1 0,2 0,4 0,8 2 3 5 8 10 13
0,6 1 4 6 9 D (m) 1 2 10 30 D (m) White 90%
With reflector XUZ C80 Sensing range
1 Polarised Non sensing zone
2 Infrared (Matt surfaces)
Dimensions
18
45 45 (2) 17
(5)
7
(1)
R (6)
11
(6)
30
39
28
E
70
80
(5)
4,5
28 (3)
12,5
54,5
14
12
20,6
45
30
20,6
30
(1) Optical axis (4) 1 elongated hole Ø 4.1 x 10 and 1 x Ø 4.1

(2) Output LED indicator (5) 1 elongated hole Ø 3.1 x 10 and 1 x Ø 3.1
(3) Front fixing (Ø 3 screws and inserts included)
Wiring schemes
Wiring schemes (5-wire, a or c)
1 NC/NO output Light switching (object present) Light switching (no object present)
Transmitter Thru-beam receiver and reflex Diffuse
BN BK BK
OG OG
BU RD RD
BN BN
BU BU
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/59
characteristics 1
d.c. supply. Solid-state output
With stability LED and alarm output (1)
Compact design
1 2 3
System Thru-beam 1 Polarised reflex 2 Diffuse with adjustable

background suppression 3
Type of transmission Infra-red Red Infra-red
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) / maximum 50 m / 60 m 6m/9m 1.2 m / 1.2 m
(with 50 x 50 mm reflector)
References of sensors
Pre-cabled versions
3-wire, Light or dark programmable XUC 2AKSAL2 (2) XUC 9AKSAL2 (3) XUC 8AKSNL2
PNP or NPN programmable switching
Weight (kg) 0.520 0.280 0.260
Plug-in connector versions
3-wire, Light or dark programmable XUC 2AKSAM12 (2) XUC 9AKSAM12 (3) XUC 8AKSNM12
PNP or NPN programmable switching
Weight (kg) 0.400 0.220 0.200
Characteristics
Product certifications e, UL, CSA
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 7 gn (f = 10…55 Hz)
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 67 (IP 30 with cover open). NEMA 3, 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 12, 13
Materials Case: PC, lenses: PMMA, cable: PvR
Connection Pre-cabled Diameter 6 mm cable, length 2 m (4), wire c.s.a.: 5 x 0.34 mm2
Connector M12 male connector, 4-pin (suitable female connectors, including pre-wired versions, see
page 9/44)
Rated supply voltage c 12…24 V with protection against reverse polarity
Current consumption, no-load Thru-beam (transmitter and receiver): y 50 mA, reflex and diffuse: 35 mA
Delays First-up: y 15 ms; response: y 1 ms; recovery: y 1 ms
Function table Function Thru-beam and reflex systems Diffuse system

Output state (PNP or NPN) indicator: yellow LED Light
(illuminated when detector output is ON) switching
Dark
switching
(1) Alarm output only applicable to thru-beam and reflex system sensors.
(2) Reference for both transmitter and receiver for thru-beam system sensors.
(3) 50 x 50 mm reflector included with reflex system sensors.
(4) Sensors available with 5 m cable. To order, change the reference suffix L2 to L5.
Example: Transmitter + receiver XUC 2AKSAL2 with 2 m cable becomes XUC 2AKSAL5 with 5 m cable.
Description
1 Yellow LED, output
1 2 Light on PNP
2 Red LED, stability
3 Sensing distance adjustment potentiometer
4 Light/dark switching programming switch
4 5
5 PNP/NPN programming switch
3 Dark on NPN
1/60
dimensions, Osiris® Application

schemes 1
With stability LED and alarm output
Curves
Detection curves
Thru-beam system
Ø of beam (cm)
Reflex system
Ø of beam (cm)
Diffuse system
Ø of beam (cm)
1
60
10
2 1
8
Ø16 mm 5
4
60 m 6 9 m 1,30 m
0,2 -4
-5
-8
-10 Sn ≤ 1,10 m
-60 Sn ≤ 50 m Sn ≤ 6 m Sn ≤ 1,30 m
Object 20 x 20 cm 1 White 90% 2 Black 6%
Excess gain curves (ambient temperature: + 25 °C) Variation of usable sensing distance
Thru-beam system Reflex system Diffuse system with adjustable
background suppression
gain gain B
000
40
000 30
20
100 10
A 0,05 1,10 1,50 S (m)
5 1,30
10 A-B: Object reflection coefficient
Black 6% Sensing range
1 1
Grey 18% Non sensing zone
1 2 5 10 50 100 D (m) 0,1 0,2 0,4 1 2 4 6 10 D (m) White 90%
Dimensions
XUC pAKSpLp XUC pAKSpM12 Side view, cover hinged open
44 45 150
3,7
44 45 ˚
3,7
80
100
95,1
108
95,1
43,5
(1)
43,5
(1)
23 23
20
20
5,5
18
5,5
18
(2) (2)
1/2" NPSM
35 34 35 (3) 34
(1) 2 elongated holes Ø 5.5 x 11 for fixing by front face (M5 screws included) (3) M12 connector.
(2) M30 x 1.5 threaded boss (and 1/2" NPSM inside for XUC pAKSpLp), for direct mounting. Max. tightening torque: 25 N.m. Tightening torque ≤ 2 N.m.
Transmitter Thru-beam receiver & reflex Diffuse Thru-beam receiver & reflex Diffuse
PNP output PNP output PNP output PNP output
BN/1 + BN/1 + BN/1 + BN/1 + BN/1 +
BU/3 BU/3 BU/3 BU/3
NPN output NPN output NPN output NPN output
BN/1 + BN/1 + BN/1 + BN/1 +
BK/4 BK/4 BK/4 BK/4
BU/3 BU/3 BU/3 BU/3
Alarm output, alarm signal and verification of correct operation (for thru-beam and reflex systems only)
PNP NPN
Red Output 1,15
BN/1 + BN/1 + LED 1
signal 0,85
WH/2 LED off
WH/2 t t
Alarm
BU/3 BU/3 signal Red LED LED on
State 0: output off
Optimum
State 1: output on alignment +
t = 160 ms
Beam break test (for thru-beam transmitter only) Cable connections and connector schemes (see connections, page 9/44)
Beam made Beam broken XUC pAKSpLp XUC pAKSpM12
(–) BU (Blue) Thru-beam transmitter Thru-beam receiver, reflex
BN/1 BN/1 (+) BN (Brown) and diffuse
(OUT) BK (Black) 4 3 ( ) 4 3 ( )
VI/2 VI/2 Output
Alarm WH (White)
BU/3 BU/3
Test VI (Violet)
Alarm output
(+) 1 2 Test input (+) 1 2 (except diffuse)
1/61
characteristics 1
a.c. or d.c. supply. 1 C/O time delay relay output
With stability LED
Compact design
1 2 3
System Thru-beam 1 Polarised reflex 2 Diffuse with adjustable

background suppression 3
Type of transmission Infra-red Red Infra-red
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) / maximum 50 m / 60 m 6m/9m 1.2 m / 1.2 m
(with 50 x 50 mm reflector)
References of sensors
Pre-cabled versions
5-wire Light or dark programmable XUC 2ARCTL2 (1) XUC 9ARCTL2 (2) XUC 8ARCTL2
switching
Weight (kg) 0.520 0.280 0.260
Plug-in connector versions
5-wire Light or dark programmable XUC 2ARCTU78 (1) XUC 9ARCTU78 (2) XUC 8ARCTU78
switching
Weight (kg) 0.400 0.220 0.200
Characteristics
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 67 (IP 30 with cover open). NEMA 3, 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 12, 13
Materials Case: PC, lenses: PMMA, cable: PvR
Connection Pre-cabled Diameter 6 mm cable, length 2 m (3), wire c.s.a.: 5 x 0.34 mm2
Connector 7/8" 16UN male connector, 5-pin (suitable female pre-wired connectors XZ CP1764Lp) (4)
Rated supply voltage z 24…240 V
Voltage limits z 20…264 V
Switching capacity 3 A (cos ϕ = 1) for a contact life of 0.5 million operating cycles at an operating rate of 1 operating
cycle per second, at 250 V
Maximum voltage on output relay contacts a 250 V
Power consumption 2W
Electrical durability > 5 x 105 operating cycles (cos ϕ = 1)
Time delay Monostable, on-delay or off-delay (programmable). 2 adjustable ranges, covering 0 to 15 seconds
Delays First-up: ≤ 60 ms; response: ≤ 25 ms; recovery: ≤ 25 ms
Function table Function Thru-beam and reflex systems Diffuse system
Output state of relay contact indicator: yellow Light BK BK BK BK
GY GY GY GY
LED (illuminated when relay energised) switching WH WH WH WH
Relay energised Relay de-energised Relay de-energised Relay energised
Dark BK BK BK BK GY
GY GY GY
switching WH WH WH WH
Relay de-energised Relay energised Relay energised Relay de-energised
(3) Sensors available with 5 m cable. To order, change the reference suffix L2 to L5.
Example: Transmitter + receiver XUC 2ARCTL2 with 2 m cable becomes XUC 2ARCTL5 with 5 m cable.
(4) To complete the reference for a pre-wired female connector with a 2 m, 5 m or 10 m cable, replace the p by 2, 5 or 10 respectively. Example, pre-wired connector
with 2 m cable: XZ CP1764L2.
Description
T1 T2 LEDs Potentiometers Switches
Light on 0…2 s T1 T2
1 Yellow LED, 3 Sensing distance 6 Light/dark switching programming
1 2 output adjustment 7 T1 setting range
2 Red LED, 4 T1 time delay 8 T2 setting range
6 7 8 9 stability adjustment 9 Normal time delay (on-delay or off-
4 5 Dark on 0…15 s T2 5 T2 time delay delay) or monostable
3 T1
adjustment
1/62
1/82
dimensions, Osiris® Application

a.c. or d.c. supply. 1 C/O time delay relay output
schemes 1
With stability LED
Curves
Detection curves
Thru-beam system Reflex system Diffuse system 1
Ø of beam (cm) Ø of beam (cm) Ø of beam (cm)
60
2 1
10
8
Ø16 mm 5 4
60 m 6 9 m 1,30 m
0,2 -4
-5
-8
-10 Sn ≤ 1,10 m
-60 Sn ≤ 50 m Sn ≤ 6 m Sn ≤ 1,30 m
Object 20 x 20 cm 1 White 90% 2 Black 6%

Excess gain curves (ambient temperature: + 25 °C) Variation of usable sensing distance
Thru-beam system Reflex system Diffuse system with adjustable
background suppression
gain gain
B
000
40
000 30
20
100 10
A 0,05 1,10 1,50 S (m)
5 1,30
10 A-B: Object reflection coefficient
1 1 Grey 18% Non sensing zone
1 2 5 10 50 100 D (m) 0,1 0,2 0,4 1 2 4 6 10 D (m)
White 90%
Dimensions
XUC pARCTLp XUC pARCTU78 Side view, cover hinged open
44 45 44 45 150
3,7
3,7 ˚
80
100
95,1
91,5
108
43,5
(1)
43,5
(1)
23 23
20
20
5,5
18
5,5
18
(2)
(2)
1/2" NPSM
35 34 35 (3) 34
(1) 2 elongated holes Ø 5.5 x 11 for fixing by front face (M5 screws included) (3) 7/8" connector.
(2) M30 x 1.5 threaded boss (and 1/2" NPSM inside for XUC pARCTLp), for direct mounting. Max. tightening torque: 25 N.m. Tightening torque ≤ 3 N.m.
Wiring schemes (5-wire z)
Transmitter Thru-beam receiver & reflex Diffuse Thru-beam receiver & reflex Diffuse
BN/4 BN/4 BN/4 BN/4 BN/4
WH/5 WH/5 WH/5 WH/5
GY/3 GY/3 GY/3 GY/3
BU/2 BU/2 BU/2 BU/2
Verification of correct operation Cable connections Connector schemes

Thru-beam & reflex systems XUC pARCTLp XUC pARCTU78
Output 1,15 z BU (Blue) Thru-beam transmitter Thru-beam receiver, reflex
signal 1 z BN (Brown) and diffuse
0,85 LED off
Relay common GY (Grey) 3 3 Relay common
NO contact BK (Black)
Red LED LED on NC contact WH (White) 4 2 4 2
Optimum
alignment + 5 1 NC 5 1 NO
Time delay
Normal time delay Monostable time delay
T1 = time delay on trip “On-delay” T1 = period of tripped condition “Period on”
T2 = time delay on reset “Off-delay” T2 = monostable period
Time delay adjustment T1 = T2 = 0 T1 ≠ 0, T2 ≠ 0 T1 = 0, T2 ≠ 0 T1 ≠ 0, T2 ≠ 0
Receiver state Beam intact
Beam broken
T1 T2 T1 T2 T2 T2 T1 T2 T1 T2
Light switching Relay “ON”
Relay “OFF”
T2 T1 T2 T1 T
T2 T2 T1 T2 T1 T2
Dark switching Relay “ON”
Relay “OFF”
1/63
1/83
characteristics 1
Metal case, cylindrical, threaded M8 x 1
Design 8
501337_1
501335_1
501336_1
501335_1
Connection Pre-cabled b – b –
Connector – b – b
System Thru-beam Thru-beam Diffuse Diffuse

Type of transmission Infrared Infrared Infrared Infrared
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 2m 2m 0.05 m 0.05 m

References
3-wire, PNP NO function XUA H0214 XUA H0214S XUA H0515 XUA H0515S
NC function XUA H0224 XUA H0224S XUA H0525 XUA H0525S
3-wire, NPN NO function XUA J0214 XUA J0214S XUA J0515 XUA J0515S
NC function XUA J0224 XUA J0224S XUA J0525 XUA J0525S
Transmitter XUA H0203 XUA H0203S – –

Weight (kg) 0.050 0.015 0.50 0.015
Characteristics
Product certifications e, C ULUS
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 7 gn, amplitude ± 1 mm (f = 10…55 Hz)
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 67 - IP 65 IP 65 IP 67 - IP 65 IP 65
Connection Pre-cabled Ø 3.5 mm, length 2 m, wire c.s.a.: 3 x 0.14 mm²

Connector M8 male, 3-pin (suitable female connectors, see page 30210/2)

Pre-cabled PvR – PvR –
Lenses PMMA
Voltage limits (including ripple) c 10…30 V
Voltage drop, closed state y1V
Current consumption, no-load Transmitter y 15 mA

Receiver y 10 mA
Diffuse y 25 mA
Maximum switching frequency 2000 Hz 1000 Hz
Response and recovery y 0.25 ms y 0.5 ms
Function table Function Diffuse or thru-beam system

No object present in the beam Object present in the beam
Output state (PNP or NPN) NO
indicator: yellow LED
NC
is ON)
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/64
dimensions, Osiris® Application, assembly series

Metal case, cylindrical, threaded M8 x 1
schemes 1
Curves
Detection curves
Thru-beam system Diffuse system 1
Object 5 x 5 cm; 1 White 90%; 2 Grey 18%
15
10 1 2 1
5 0,5
m 5 cm
2 3
-5 -0,5
-10 -1
-15
Excess gain curves (ambient temperature: ± 25 °C)

Thru-beam system Diffuse system
Variation of sensing distance Sn
Gain Gain
500 40 100
300 20 80
15 60
100 10
9 40
50
C Side of square object
20 White
3 Grey
10 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
5 C (cm)
1
0,1 0,4 0,8 2 5 8 10
0,2 0,6 1 4 6 9 Detection differential (H) when object approaches from the front:
1 D (cm) H y 25% of Sn
0,1 0,2 0,5 1 2 3 6 10
0,3 0,8 5 D (m)
Object 5 x 5 cm, White 90%
Dimensions
XUA XUA pppppS M8 connector
4
1 3
M8x1 (1) (1) 1+

3-
4 18 13 4 M8x1 21 13 4 OUT or test
48 47
(1) LED, 4 viewing ports at 90° (1) LED, 4 viewing ports at 90° Note: fixing nut tightening See connection on
torque: < 2 N.m page 30210/2
XUA
Transmitter PNP NPN
BN/1 BN/1 + BN/1 +

BK/4
BU/3 BK/4
– –
BU/3 BU/3
VI/4 Test
Beam break test

For thru-beam transmitter XUA H0203 only For thru-beam transmitter XUA H0203S only
BN + BN +
+ +
VI VI 1 1
4 4
3 3
BU – BU – – –
Beam made Beam broken Beam made Beam broken
LED on (steady light) LED flashing LED on (steady light) LED flashing
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/65
characteristics 1
Dynamic detection of passage of objects, counting parts (1)
System Thru-beam
Type of transmission Infrared
Passageway dimensions 30 x 30 mm 60 x 60 mm 200 x 120 mm 200 x 180 mm 200 x 250 mm
References
3-wire, PNP and NPN Output function ON or OFF on XUV F30M8 XUV F60M8 XUV F120M12 XUV F180M12 XUV F250M12
passage of object, programmable
Weight (kg) 0.080 0.140 1.060 1.200 1.320
Characteristics
Product certifications e, cULus
Ambient air temperature For operation: 0…+ 60 °C. For storage: - 20…+ 80 °C
Vibration resistance 25 gn, amplitude ± 2 mm (f = 10…55 Hz), conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
Connection M8 connector (suitable M12 connector (suitable female connectors, including
female connectors, including pre-wired versions, see page 9/44)
pre-wired versions, see page
9/44)
Materials Case: painted aluminium; lenses: polycarbonate
Immunity to ambient light Sunlight: 4000 lux max., incandescent light: 400 lux max.
Minimum size of object detected Ø 2 mm Ø 4 mm
Passing speed of object Min.: 10 cm/s, max.: 15 m/s Min.: 10 cm/s, max.: 15 m/s (Ø 4 mm object)
(Ø 2 mm object)
Rated supply voltage c 24 V with protection against reverse polarity
Voltage drop, closed state <2V
Current consumption, no-load y 120 mA y 400 mA
Delays First-up: y 100 ms; response: < 1 ms; recovery: < 1 ms
Time delay Off-delay (reset): adjustable between 0 and 5 seconds
Function table Function Thru-beam system

No object present Passage of object
in the beam through the beam
Output state (PNP or NPN) indicator: Output OFF
green LED on passage
(illuminated when sensor output is ON) of object
Output ON
on passage
of object
(1) Sensors XUV F are suitable for detecting the passage of all types of objects (both metal and plastic, of any shape and colour) providing the flow is dynamic.
Applications: counting parts, flow control of injection machine parts, etc.
1/66
Presentation, Photo-electric sensors 1
dimensions, Osiris® Application, assembly series

Dynamic detection of passage of objects, counting parts
schemes 1
Presentation
XUV F30M8 XUV F60M8 XUV Fpp0M12
1 1
1 Sensitivity adjustment potentiometer.
2 Time delay adjustment potentiometer.
1
2 2
3 3 Indicators:
1 Green LED: output
Red LED: alarm
2
3 Notes:
- in the event of a supply malfunction, the red LED
3
flashes,
- in the event of a short-circuit on the output, both
the red and green LEDs flash.
Dimensions
XUV F30M8 XUV Fpp0M12
108 85 50
30 16 15
(2)
(1)
36
11,6
50
3,5
a1
M8 22
222,5
XUV F60M8
230
200
131
60 16 15
(2) (1)
70
(2) (1)
86
11,6
22
3,5
60 25 25
a
M8 22
M12
XUV a a1
F120M12 205 120
F180M12 265 180
F250M12 335 250
(1) Transmitting face.
(2) Reception face.
Wiring schemes
Wiring schemes (3-wire c) Connector scheme (sensor connector pin view)
Output ON on passage of object programmed (1) Output ON on passage of object programmed (1)
PNP output NPN output XUV Fp0M8 XUV Fpp0M12
1 Alarm Output 1 (+)
+ 1 +
2 4
4 4 Alarm 2 4 Output
1 (+) 3 (–)
2 2
3 (–)
3 – 3 – See connection on page 9/44.
Note: the alarm (2) triggers in the event of an object stopping within the beam.
(1) To program the sensor for output OFF on passage of object, connect contact 3 to (+) and contact 1 to (–).
1/67
References 1

For detection of transparent materials
Design 18, plastic or stainless steel
Three-wire d.c., solid-state output
Ø 18 plastic, coaxial polarised reflex with teach mode

524072
Sensing distance Function Line of Output Reference Weight

1 (Sn)
m
sight
kg
Pre-cabled (1)
0…1.4 NO or NC, by Along case PNP XUB TAPSNL2 0.110
With reflector programming axis NPN XUB TANSNL2 0.110
XUB TpppNL2 XUZ C50
0…0.8 NO or NC, by 90° to case PNP XUB TAPSWL2 0.113
With reflector programming axis NPN XUB TANSWL2 0.113
524074
XUZ C50
M12 connector
0…1.4 NO or NC, by Along case PNP XUB TAPSNM12 0.045
With reflector programming axis NPN XUB TANSNM12 0.045
XUZ C50
XUB TpppWL2 0...0.8 NO or NC, by 90° to case PNP XUB TAPSWM12 0.048
With reflector programming axis NPN XUB TANSWM12 0.048
XUZ C50
524073
Ø 18 stainless steel, coaxial polarised reflex with teach mode

Sensing distance Function Line of Output Reference Weight
(Sn) sight
m kg
Pre-cabled (1)
XUB TpppNM12 0…1.4 NO or NC, by Along case PNP XUB TSPSNL2 0.135
With reflector programming axis NPN XUB TSNSNL2 0.135
XUZ C50
0...0.8 NO or NC, by 90° to case PNP XUB TSPSWL2 0.138
524038
With reflector programming axis NPN XUB TSNSWL2 0.138

XUZ C50
M12 connector
0…1.4 NO or NC, by Along case PNP XUB TSPSNM12 0.070
With reflector programming axis NPN XUB TSNSNM12 0.070
XUZ C50
XUB TpppWM12 0...0.8 NO or NC, by 90° to case PNP XUB TSPSWM12 0.073
With reflector programming axis NPN XUB TSNSWM12 0.073
XUZ C50
805800
805799
Accessories for XUB Tpppppp (2)

Description Dimensions Reference Weight
XUZ C24 kg
Universal reflector 50 x 50 mm XUZ C50 0.020
(without blind zone)
Reflector 24 x 21 mm XUZ C24 0.007
520312
XUZ C50 for sensing distances less than 0.45 m

kg
550003
3D fixing kit for use on M12 rod for XUB T or XUZ C50 XUZ B2003 0.170
M12 rod XUZ 2001 0.050
Stainless steel fixing bracket XUZ A118 0.045
Plastic fixing bracket with adjustable ball-joint XUZ A218 0.035
(1) For a 5 m long cable, replace L2 by L5.
Example: XUB TAPSNL2 becomes XUB TAPSNL5.
XUZ B2003 (3) For further information, see page 1/110.
805817
XUZ 2001
XUZ A118
520984
805818
XUZ A218 XUZ 2003
1/68
schemes, Osiris® Application, packaging series

For detection of transparent materials
curves, Design 18, plastic or stainless steel
dimensions 1
Three-wire d.c., solid-state output
Characteristics
Sensor type XUB TppppM12 XUB TppppL2
UL, CSA, e
M12 –
1
Nominal sensing distance Sn Line of sight along case axis m 0 to 1.4 with reflector XUZ C50
0 to 0.45 with reflector XUZ C24
Line of sight 90° to case axis m 0 to 0.8 with reflector XUZ C50
0 to 0.45 with reflector XUZ C24
Beam divergence 1.5° (Ø 37 mm spot at 1.4 m)
Blind zone 0
Preferred approach direction Any
Type of transmission Coaxial polarised red
Temperature Storage °C - 40…+ 70
Operation °C 0…+ 55
Materials Case XUB TAppppp: plastic, PBT
XUB TSppppp: stainless steel (grade 304Cu)
Lens PMMA
Cable PvR
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 7 gn, amplitude ± 1 mm (f = 10 to 55 Hz)
Supply on Green LED
Stability Red LED
Switching capacity per output mA ≤ 100 with overload and short-circuit protection
Voltage drop, closed state V ≤ 1.5
Response and recovery µs < 500
Wiring schemes
3 (-) (-) BU (Blue)
4 3
1 (+) (+) BN (Brown)
BN/1 + BN/1 +
PNP BK/4 NPN
4 OUT/Output OUT/Output BK (Black) BK/4
1 2 2 Not connected
BU/3 – BU/3 –
Detection curves Dimensions

With reflector XUZ C50 XUB Tpppp
Line of sight along case axis Line of sight 90° to case axis Pre-cabled Plug-in connector
(mm) (mm)
4 4 a b a b
2 2 b Ø 18, line of sight 64 44 78 44
a along case axis
-2 -2 Ø 18, line of sight 78 44 92 44
-4 -4 90° to case axis
Sn y 1,4 m Sn y 0,8 m
Setting-up Application examples

Recommended distances and application restraints
(1) (1)
(1) No blind zone. Detection of transparent bottles. Detection of plastic film.
1/69
characteristics 1
For detection of transparent materials, with teach mode and
automatic compensation for accumulation of dirt (1)
Solid-state output
Compact design
System Reflex
Type of transmission Red
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 1.5 m (with 50 x 50 mm reflector)
References
3-wire, PNP or NPN Light or dark programmable XUK T1KSML2 (2) XUK T1KSMM12 (2)
switching
Weight (kg) 0.280 0.120
Characteristics

Materials Case PC
Lenses PMMA
Cable PVC
Connection Pre-cabled, diameter 6 mm, length 2 m, M12 male connector, adjustable to 2 positions
wire c.s.a.: 4 x 0.34 mm2 (suitable female connectors, including pre-
wired versions, see page 9/44)
Switching capacity (sealed) ≤ 100 mA with overload and short-circuit protection
Voltage drop, closed state ≤2V
Current consumption, no-load ≤ 35 mA
Delays First-up ≤ 80 ms
Response ≤ 0.3 ms
Recovery ≤ 0.3 ms
Time delay Monostable, on-delay or off-delay (programmable) adjustable from 0.1 to 5 seconds
Function table Function Reflex system

No object present Object present
in the beam in the beam
Output state (PNP or NPN) indicator: yellow LED Light switching
(illuminated when sensor output is ON)
Dark switching
(1) Sensor memorises, in teach mode, the environmental conditions in which the object is to be detected and adapts to any variations.
(2) 50 x 50 mm reflector included with the sensor.
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/70
schemes, Osiris® Application, packaging series

For detection of transparent materials, with teach mode and
operation 1
automatic compensation for accumulation of dirt

Solid-state output
Dimensions
XUK T1KSML2 Bracket fixing XUK T1KSMM12 with cover raised
50
Fixing bracket mounting according to position of connector
65
1
40 (1) 12 (2)
7
2 x Ø4,5
18
40,5
58
34
40
50
60
40
82
80
15
Ø6
20
35
13
29,5
5
10O
58 18 22 12 (3)
29,5
(1) Cover locking tongue (2) 1 elongated hole Ø 6 x 12
(3) 1 elongated hole Ø 6 x 13
Light switching programmed (no object present) Dark switching programmed (no object present) Alarm output
PNP output programmed NPN output programmed PNP output programmed NPN output programmed PNP programmed
BN/1 + BN/1 + BN/1 + BN/1 + BN/1 +
BK/4 BK/4 BK/4 WH/2
– BK/4 – –
– –
BU/3 BU/3 BU/3 BU/3 BU/3
NPN programmed
BN/1 +
WH/2
–
BU/3
Connection
Cable connections Connector scheme
XUK T1KSML2 XUK T1KSMM12
(–) BU (Blue) (–)
4 3
(+) BN (Brown)
Output
(OUT) BK (Black) signal
Alarm WH (White) 1 2
(+) Alarm output
Functions
6 Switches LEDs
1 1 Light/dark switching programming 6 Yellow LED: output and teach mode aid
2 Time delay activated or deactivated 7 Red LED: alignment aid and alarm indicator
1
2
2 3 Normal time delay or monostable
3 3 4 Normal time delay “On-delay” or “Off-delay” Potentiometer and button
4
5 4 5 PNP or NPN output T Time delay adjustment
8 Teach mode button
5
7 T 8
Time delays
Switch positions No time delay Normal time delay (T) Normal time delay (T) Monostable time delay (T)
Time delay on trip “On-delay” Time delay on reset “Off-
delay”
= light or dark
switching function
(see below)
or or or or
Receiver state
Light switching Beam intact
Beam broken
T T T T T T T
Dark switching Output “ON”

Output “OFF”
T T T T T T T
Output “ON”
Output “OFF”
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/71
characteristics 1
Thru-beam system for detection of water
and aqueous liquids
Miniature design
System Thru-beam
Type of transmission Infrared (transmission frequency = 1450 nm)
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 50 m (use between 10 and 20 cm, see applications)
References
3-wire, PNP and NPN XUM W1KSNL2 (1)
NO or NC programmable function
Weight (kg) 0.155
Characteristics
Product certifications e
Connection Pre-cabled, diameter 4 mm, length 2 m, wire c.s.a.: 2 x 0.2 mm2 (transmitter) or 4 x 0.2 mm2
(receiver)
Materials Case: PBT, lenses: polycarbonate, cable: PUR
Rated supply voltage c 10.8…26.4 V with protection against reverse polarity
Solid-state digital output Switching capacity (sealed) y 100 mA with overload and short-circuit protection
Voltage drop, closed state y2V
Maximum switching frequency 1 kHz
Delays First-up: y 50 ms; response: y 0.5 ms; recovery: y 0.5 ms
Current consumption, no-load y 45 mA (transmitter + receiver)
Indicator lights Transmitter Green LED, supply on

Receiver Yellow LED: solid-state output (LED on, output on)
Green LED: stability (see diagram on page 1/73)
(2) Application examples: detection of the level of aqueous liquids in any transparent or “almost” opaque container, and any product containing water molecules
(adhesives, ice creams, damp fabrics, etc.).
d
d d
s
Osiri
d
d = 10 cm d = 20 cm d = 5 cm d = 10 cm
Transparent containers Almost opaque containers
1/72
dimensions, Osiris® Application, packaging series

Thru-beam system for detection of water
schemes 1
and aqueous liquids
Detection principle Transmission curves
Absorption level (%)

0
2
3
2
20
Beam intensity 1
40
60
The wavelength of the transmitted beam corresponds to the

maximum absorption frequency of water molecules. 80
100
500 1000 1500 1700
1100 1450
Transmission wavelength (nm)
1 Transmission curve of a standard photo-electric sensor

2 Transmission curve of sensor XUM W1KSNL2
3 Curve of water absorption against incident beam wavelength
Excess gain curve Stability curve Functions
Gain Signal 10
level
4 2
10
5
1,25
1
2 0,75 1 2 3 4
103
500 LEDs
1 Yellow LED, output
200 Output On 2 Green LED, stability
Yellow LED Off
100 Potentiometer
Stability On
50 Green LED Off 3 Sensitivity adjustment
Switch
20
10
4 NO/NC programming
NO: detection of object
5 NC: detection of object absence
2
1
0,1 0,2 0,5 1 2 5 10 20 50 100
D (m)
Dimensions
Bracket fixing
15
10
41 5,6 (1) 13 (2) 3,2
1,5
11,5
M3
2
23
20
32
(3)
10
(4)
2,5
16 20 32 3
(1) Output LED.

(2) Output LED and stability LED.
(3) 2 holes Ø 3.2.
(4) Locknut plate.

Transmitter BK Receiver. PNP output BN (+)
WH Receiver. NPN output BU (-)
/
WH
1/73
characteristics 1
For detection of labels (1)
Fork design
System Thru-beam
Type of transmission Infrared Red/green
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 2 mm
References
3-wire, PNP and NPN Light or dark programmable XUV K0252S XUV K0252VS
switching (2)
Weight (kg) 0.085
Characteristics
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Amplitude ± 1.5 mm up to 55 Hz, 7 gn (f = 10…55 Hz)
Connection M8 connector (suitable female connectors, see page 9/44)
Materials Case: zinc alloy; lens: glass
Output clamping resistor 10 kΩ
Delays First-up: y 30 ms; response: < 100 µs; recovery: < 100 µs

Sensor ready Green LED
Read error Red LED

No label present in the beam Label present in the beam
Output state (PNP or NPN) indicator: yellow LED Light switching
Dark switching
(1) Applications: the infrared transmission beam sensor XUV K0252S is suitable for the detection of all types of opaque legends; the red/green transmission sensor
XUV K0252VS is suitable for the detection of all types of legends of different colours.
(2) This sensor is adjustable using teach mode: the light or dark switching function is selected when performing the first stage of teaching for setting-up the sensor
(see programming using teach mode, page 1/75).
1/74

For detection of labels
schemes 1
Presentation Programming using teach mode

b place the label to be detected in the beam of the optical fork. Press the SET button
1 mm and hold down until the green LED 2 goes out,
b when the green LED 2 flashes, the detector has “learnt” the label. Following this,
1
place the item to which the label is affixed in the beam of the optical fork. Press the
SET button and hold down until the green LED 2 goes out,
b when the green LED 2 illuminates as a steady light teaching is completed and the
2 sensor is ready for operation.
1 1 Yellow LED, output state indicator

2 Dual colour green/red LED, Ready/Error
3 Teach mode programming SET button
3 4 Locking screw
Dimensions
NPN output 2 4 PNP output
1 3
+ –
1/75
characteristics 1
For colour detection (1)
System Diffuse
Type of transmission White LED (400-700 nm)
Type of colour processing RGB
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 20 mm (Operational distance, see curve on page 1/77)
References
3-wire, PNP + 1 synchro input Light switching XUK C1PSMM12
3-wire, NPN + 1 synchro input Light switching XUK C1NSMM12
Weight (kg) 0.085
Characteristics
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Amplitude ± 0.5 mm, f = 10...55 Hz for each axis
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 30 gn, duration 11 ms, 6 shocks on each axis
Connection M12, 8-pin, male connector; direction adjustable through 90°
Materials Case ABS
Lenses Glass (window tilted, anti-reflective glass)
Spot diameter At 20 mm: Ø 4 mm
Adjustment Teach mode Teaching using SET (adjustment) and SEL (Selection) buttons
Operating mode C (colour) or C+I (colour + intensity), independent for each channel
Tolerance level Selectable tolerance for varying shades of colour from TOL 0 to TOL 9
Auxiliary functions External synchronisation, locking
Indicator lights and display Display 4-digit
Output active 3 green LEDs: output 1, 2 or 3
Output state “OUT” Yellow LED if one output (1, 2 or 3) activated
Rated supply voltage c 12…24 V
Switching capacity (sealed) ≤ 100 mA with protection against reverse polarity, overload and short-circuit
Maximum switching frequency 1.5 kHz
Delay 335 µs for response and recovery
Time delay Selectable (5, 10, 20, 30 or 40 ms)
Function table for each channel (3 channels) Colour recognised by sensor Colour not recognised by sensor
Light switching function
Output state (PNP or NPN) indicator
(1) Applications: Osiris ® “Full colour” is a colour sensor that can recognise up to 3 colours. It can be used to sort objects by colour or to monitor colours, and is
insensitive to surface finishes (matt or reflective), as well as ambient lighting. The sensor is suitable for use in many industrial sectors, such as packaging
machines, printing machines, etc.
1/76

schemes 1
For colour detection

Presentation
Description Detection zone and spot size Detection curve
12 3 %
1
Object reflection
99 White
a 90 Yellow light
123 72
OUT
54
SET SEL
36
Dark blue
5 4 18 Black
1 Output LED a (mm) Ø (mm)

0 5 15 25 35
2 OUT1, OUT2 and OUT3 LEDs XUK C1pSMM12 20 4 Detection distance (mm)
3 Display (green, 4-digit) Detection distance related to reflection coefficient
4 SEL button (adjustment) of object
5 SET button
Diagram Accessories
SYNC passive = Vdc, SYNC active = 0 V Description Diameter Length Reference Weight
Passive mm m kg
SYNC
Active
Pre-wired M12, 8-pin, 6.5 3 XSZ MCR03 0.230
connectors, screened
cable (1) 10 XSZ MCR10 0.715
ON
Output
OFF Fixing bracket – – XUZ K2000 0.040
335 µs 170 µs (2 screws, 2 nuts and 2
max. max. washers included)
Dimensions
XUK C1pSMM12 Fixing bracket XUZ K2000
50 26,5 20
42 25 16,5 2 9
5
2xØx4,1
2
Øx5,1
42
50
50
8
Øx4,3
31,65
18x45
2xØx4,4 Øx5,3
11,5 5,5 30˚ 2 10˚
16
M12
66 15
Connections
Pre-wired connector XSZ MCRpp scheme Wiring schemes
Sensor connector pin view PNP output + synchro input NPN output + synchro input
Output 3
5 Output 2 2 + 2 +
6 4 8 3
3 4
– Output 1
7 3 4 5
5 8
1 2
+
8 7 – 7 –
Synchro
Pin N° Type Colour (2)

1 – WH (white)
2 c 10...30 V BN (brown)
3 Output 1 TAN (tan)
4 Output 2 YE (yellow)
5 Output 3 GY (grey)
6 – PK (pink)
7 0V VT (violet)
8 Synchro RD (red)
– Screening TR (transparent)
(1) The use of screened cable is recommended in order ensure correct operation of the sensor, especially in environments subject to electromagnetic interference.
(2) With pre-wired connector XSZ MCRpp.
1/77
characteristics 1
For colour detection (1)
Compact design and fibre design
System Diffuse Thru-beam or diffuse depending on fibre optics

selected
Type of transmission Red, blue and green
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 40…60 mm 4…250 mm depending on fibre optics

(see page 1/79)
References
3-wire PNP Light switching XUR C3PPML2 XUR C4PPML2
3-wire NPN Light switching XUR C3NPML2 XUR C4NPML2
Weight (kg) 0.260 0.190
Characteristics
Ambient air temperature Operation - 10…+ 50 °C
Storage - 30…+ 70 °C
Ambient humidity 35…85 % RH (without condensation)
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Amplitude ± 0.75 mm, f = 10…55 Hz, 2 hours on the 3 axes
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 50 gn, 5 shocks on the 3 axes
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 67 IP 65
Connection Pre-cabled: diameter 5.4 mm, length 2 m, wire c.s.a.: 7 x 0.2 mm²
Materials Case Aluminium
Lenses Glass –
Cable Vinyl rubber sleeve
Cover Polyacrylate
Spot diameter At 40 mm: 4 mm Depending on fibre optics: 2.5…8 mm
At 50 mm: 6 mm (see page 1/79)
At 60 mm: 8 mm
Immunity to ambient light Sunlight 10,000 Lux max.
Halogen light 3000 Lux max.
Voltage drop, closed state ≤ 1.5 V
Switching time Programmable by switch: 0.8 ms, 1.5 ms or 6 ms
Maximum switching frequency 1.2 kHz
Time delay Programable by switch: 40 ms on falling edge
Function table per channel (3 channels) Colour recognised Colour not recognised
Function light switching by detector by detector
Output state (PNP or NPN) indicator
(illuminated when detector output is ON)
(1) Applications: Osiris ® “Full colour” is a colour detector that can recognise up to 3 colours. It can be used to sort objects by colour or to monitor colours, and is
insensitive to surface finishes (matt or gloss), as well as ambient lighting. The detector is suitable for use in many industrial sectors, such as packaging lines,
print shops, etc.
1/78
Presentation, Photo-electric detectors 1

For colour detection
mounting, d.c. supply. Solid-state output
schemes 1
Presentation
1 Operational status LED 4 C or C + I selector 7 Output time delay selector (T-ON/T-OFF)
2 Teach mode button, for
memorising reference colours
v Mode “C “: this mode, is used for the
detection of different coloured objectifs.
v Output time delay, internal synchronisation
mode
1
3 Reference colours and operating v Mode “C + I“: in this mode, the detector is Object
OUT mode selector insensitive to varying surface finishes of the detected
1 v Selection of reference colours object to be detected.
Output ON
A B C (SET) 5 Synchronisation mode selector OFF
v Selection of operating mode: v Internal synchronisation mode (INT): 40 ms 40 ms
SET 2 - TOLERANCE mode (positions in this mode, colour detection is performed
1…5): 5 positions allow selection of continually. v Output time delay, external
TOLERANCE
2 3 4
the tolerance level to be applied to v External synchronisation mode (EXT): synchronisation mode
C+I
the shading of the colour to be in this mode, colour detection is Object
1 5 4
3 detected. synchronised with an external signal. detected
A
S C - RUN mode (position S): this mode Object Ext. synchro
C B enables sorting by colour.
RUN SET detected signal
FAST T-ON Ext, synchro Output ON
EXT (40ms)
signal OFF 40ms 40ms
N 7
5 Output ON R R R
INT T-OFF OFF R = response time
SLOW
Same colour
6 6 Response time mode selector
v Fast mode (F), normal mode (N) slow Different colour
mode (S).
Dimensions
XUR C3pPML2 XUR C4pPML2
Mounting on rail
7 50 5 82,4 5 25 (2) 16
42 (1) 30
5
(3)
44
22
37
68
80
25
(1)
(1) Mounting on rail
(2) Fibre optic clamp (4) 15
(3) 1 elongated hole Ø 4.4 x 5.4
(4) 2 elongated holes Ø 4.4 x 6.4
7
(1) 2 holes for M5 screws, depth 10 mm

Mounting
Installation precautions Suitable fibre optics. For further information, see pages 1/44 to 1/48.
b To obtain optimal Type of System Reference Sensing Diameter of spot (mm)
detection of the colours, fibre distance
it is recommended that (mm)
the detector be Focused Diffuse XUF N5L01L2 10 Ø 2,5
positioned such that the
15 XUF N5L02L2 20 Ø5
˚ transmitted light beams
strike the object at an XUF N5L03L2 30 Ø8
angle of 15° from its Standard Diffuse XUF N05321 5 –
Figure 1 Figure 2 vertical axis (figure 1). XUF S0520 4 –
b The direction of travel
XUF N02323 + XUF Z06 7 Ø 0,5
of the object must be as
shown in figure 2. This Thru- XUF N12301 + XUF Z01 250 –
provides detection that beam (1) XUF S2020 + XUF Z01 150 –
is less sensitive to (1) Detection of colour by transparency
15 variations in the angle of
˚
detection. Cable connections
BN (brown) + Supply (12…24 V)
Figure 1 Figure 2 BU (blue) -
PK (pink) SET signal (remote activation of teach mode to memorise reference
colours)
VI (violet) EXT signal (external synchronisation)
BK (black) Output A
WH (white) Output B
GR (grey) Output C
Wiring schemes
PNP NPN
BN BN
+ BK +
PK WH
VI GY
BK PK
WH VI
GY
BU BU
– –
1/79
characteristics 1
Colour mark readers (detection of contrast) (1)
System Diffuse
Type of transmission White LED (400-700 nm)
References
Description Reference
3-wire, PNP or NPN PNP output XUK R1PSMM12
NPN output XUK R1NSMM12
Weight (kg) 0.045
Characteristics
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Amplitude ± 0.5 mm, f = 10...55 Hz for each axis
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 30 gn, duration 11 ms, 6 shocks on each axis
Connection M12, 4-pin, male connector; direction adjustable through 90°
Materials Case ABS
Lenses Glass (window tilted, anti-reflective glass)
Spot diameter At 19 mm: Ø 3.5 mm
Resolution 0.5 mm
Depth of field ± 2 mm
Adjustment Teach mode using button or remotely using “remote” wire
Indicator lights Output Yellow LED
Stability Green LED: Ready
Flashing green/red: error
Switching capacity (sealed) ≤ 100 mA with protection against reverse polarity, overload and short-circuit
Maximum linear speed of mark 2.5 m/s for 1 mm wide mark
Delay 100 µs for response and/or recovery
Time delay Time delay function Minimum time output active: 20 ms
Auxiliary functions Remote teaching via “remote” wire; teach mode button locking
Operating mode Standard teaching: output activated on dark mark
(1) Applications: detection of contrasting colours on reflective, matt or embossed surfaces. Colour mark and index mark reading function on automated packaging
and filling systems and on labelling, heat sealing, thermo-forming and printing machines, etc.
1/80

schemes 1
Colour mark readers (detection of contrast)

Presentation
Description Detection zone and spot size Detection curve
1 2 3
1
% of signal
%
100
a 80
SET
60
40
20
1 Output LED
0 10 20 30 40
2 Dual colour stability LED Detection distance (mm)
3 SET button
a (mm) Ø (mm)
XUK R1pSMM12 19 3.5
Fixing accessory
kg
Fixing bracket XUZ K2000 0.040
(2 screws, 2 nuts and 2 washers included)
Dimensions
XUK R1pSMM12 Fixing bracket XUZ K2000
50 26,5 20
42 15 16,5 2 9
5
2xØx4,1
2
Øx5,1
50
42
50
8
Øx4,3
29,5
18x45
2xØx4,4 Øx5,3
11 6 30˚ 2 10˚
16
M12
66 Ø15
Connections
Connector scheme Wiring schemes
Sensor connector pin view Automatic light or dark switching selection depending on chronological order of
teaching for the mark and the background.
1 ( +) PNP output NPN output
Adjust- 2 4
ment Output 1 + 1 +
input
3 ( –) 2
2
4 4
3 – 3 –
Pin N° Type Colour
1 c 10...30 V Brown
2 Adjustment input (1) White
3 0V Blue
4 Output Black
(1) Connecting the “Remote” adjustment input to + Vdc is
equivalent to pressing the SET button.
1/81
characteristics 1
Colour mark readers (1)
Compact design
System Diffuse
Type of transmission (line of sight along case axis or at 90° Red or green, manually switched Red or green, automatically selected when
depending on position of lens) using teach mode
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 9 mm (7 mm with XUR Z02 or 18 mm with XUR Z01) (2)
Sensitivity adjustment By 20-turn potentiometer Automatic when using teach mode
References
3-wire, PNP or NPN Light or dark programmable XUR K0955D XUR K1KSMM12
programmable switching (3)
Weight (kg) 0.550
Characteristics
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 7 gn, amplitude ± 0.6 mm (f = 10…55 Hz)
Connection M12 connector M12 connector, can be set at 3 positions
(suitable female connectors, including pre-wired versions, see page 9/44)
Materials Case: zinc alloy; lenses: glass
Spot dimensions At 9 mm: 1.5 x 5 mm (with lens XUR Z0p see table on page 1/83)
Minimum detectable width of mark 0.5 mm
Maximum vertical inclination of reader 20°
Maximum linear speed of mark 10 m/s (for 1 mm wide mark)
Voltage drop, closed state y 1.2 V (NPN); y 2.2 V (PNP) y 1 V (NPN); y 2 V (PNP)
Delays First-up: y 100 ms; response: y 50 µs; recovery: y 50 µs
Time delay “OFF delay”: 20 ms, activated/deactivated by internal link (XUR K0955D) or by internal switch
(XUR K1KSMM12)
Analogue output – c 0…5.5 V (voltage proportional to light
reflected by the object)
Function table Function Detection of dark mark on light Detection of light mark on dark
background background
No mark present Mark present No mark present Mark present
Output state (PNP or NPN) indicator: Light switching
red LED
Dark switching
(1) Applications: detection of contrasting colours on reflective, matt or embossed surfaces. Colour mark and index mark reading function on automated packaging
and filling systems and on labelling, heat sealing, thermo-forming and printing machines, etc.
(2) Lenses for reduction or magnification of spot (see page 1/111 and spot size table on page 1/83).
(3) Programmable light or dark switching using switch for XUR K0955D, automatically programmed (in teach mode) depending on chronological order of teaching
for the mark and the background for XUR K1KSMM12.
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/82

Colour mark readers
schemes 1
XUR K0995D, XUR K1KSMM12

Detection zone and spot size Detection curve Vertical inclination
(mm)
% of signal 1
110
100
a
90
2 1
80
b
70
c 60
50
40
3
30
XUR a b c
20
Kppppppp 9 5 1.5 1 XUR Kpppppppp An angle of 5 to 10° from vertical is
10 recommended for reflective or
Kppppppp + XUR Z01 18 7 2 2 XUR Kppppppp + XUR Z02
0 transparent surfaces.
Kppppppp + XUR Z02 7 4 1 3 XUR Kppppppp + XUR Z01
0 5 10 15 20 25 Maximum vertical inclination: 20°.
Lenses XUR Z0p, see page 1/110 Distance (mm)
Dimensions
XUR K0995D XUR K1KSMM12
62,5 21
58,5 21 39,8 8,5 M12x1

24
M12
15
8 x M5x5
28
28
28
28
95
81,2
87
27,5
75
8xM5x6
36,6
41,5
36,5
14,1
5,9 42,2
4,3
15,5 24 30
4
58 31

XUR K0995D XUR K1KSMM12
Light switching function Automatic light or dark switching selection depending on chronological order of
PNP output NPN output teaching for the mark and the background
1 + 1 + PNP output NPN output
4
4 1 + 1 +
– 2 2
3 – 3
2 2 R 4
4 0…5,5 V R 0…5,5 V
3 – 3 –
Dark switching function R = 2.2 kΩ
PNP output NPN output
1 + 1 +
4
4
3 – 3 –
2 2
Connector Functions Connector Functions

scheme scheme
(sensor connector 1 Light/dark switching (sensor connector 1 Green LED, sensor in teach
pin view) selector pin view) mode
1 (+)
2 Threshold adjustment 2 Red LED, output state
1 3 Transmission colour 1 ( +) 3 Teach mode button for mark
2 4 selector switch cap 1 4 Teach mode button for
2 2 4 2
L
D
UT 4 4 Output state LED background
OUTP
5 Adjustment aid LEDs 3
3 (–) 3 ( –)
4
See connection on 3 PNP/NPN programming See connection on PNP/NPN programming
page 9/44 5 and time delay by internal links page 9/44 and time delay by internal
switches
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/83
characteristics 1
Luminescence sensors (1)
Design 18 and compact design
System Diffuse
Type of transmission Ultraviolet (370 nm)
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 20 mm for colour mark reading, 9 mm (7 mm with XUR Z02 or 18 mm with
0...80 mm in diffuse mode XUR Z01) (2)
Sensitivity adjustment By potentiometer Automatic when using teach mode
References
3-wire, PNP Light switching (3) XU5 M18U1D –
3-wire, PNP or NPN programmable Light or dark programmable – XUR U1KSMM12
switching (4)
Weight (kg) 0.075 0.550
Characteristics
Product certifications e, CSA, UL e
Ambient air temperature For operation - 25…+ 55 °C - 10…+ 55 °C
For storage - 40…+ 70 °C - 40…+ 70 °C
Vibration resistance Conforming to 7 gn, amplitude ± 0.6 mm (f = 10…55 Hz)
IEC 60068-2-6
Shock resistance Conforming to 30 gn, duration 11 ms
IEC 60068-2-27
Connection M12 connector M12 connector, can be set at 3 positions
Materials Case Nickel plated brass Zinc alloy
Lenses PMMA Glass
Spot dimensions At 20 mm: Ø 3 x 1 mm At 9 mm: Ø 5 mm
(with lens XUR Z0p see table on page 1/85)
Auxiliary functions External synchronisation, locking
Indicator lights Output state Green LED Red LED
Teach mode – Green LED
Switching capacity (sealed) y 100 mA y 200 mA
with protection against reverse polarity, overload and short-circuit
Voltage drop, closed state y 1.5 V (PNP) y 1 V (NPN); y 2 V (PNP)
Current consumption, no-load y 20 mA y 80 mA
Maximum switching frequency 1 kHz 2 kHz
Delays First-up ≤ 100 ms ≤ 100 ms
Response ≤ 500 µs ≤ 250 µs
Recovery ≤ 500 µs ≤ 250 µs
Time delay “OFF delay”: 20 ms, activated/deactivated by Internal switch
cabling method
Analogue output – c 0…7 V (voltage proportional to light
reflected by the object)
(1) Applications: detection of invisible reference marks, markings, glues or varnishes containing bluing agents.
(2) Lenses for reduction or magnification of spot (see page 1/111 and spot size table on page 1/85).
(3) Output activated when a blued mark on a non blued background is present.
(4) Automatically programmed light or dark switching (in teach mode) depending on chronological order of teaching for the mark and the background.
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/84

Luminescence sensors (1)
schemes 1
Curves
XU5 M18U1D XUR U1KSMM12
Detection curves Detection zone and spot size (mm) Detection curve
% of signal
1
cm
3 110
100
a 90
2 1
8 cm 80
2
70
60
3
50
40
3
Object 5 x 5 cm, white 90%
Spot size at 20 mm: oval, Ø 3 x 1 mm 30
XUR a Ø 20
Vertical inclination U1KSMM12 9 5
10
An angle of 5 to 10° from U1KSMM12 + XUR Z01 18 7 0
vertical is recommended U1KSMM12 + XUR Z01 7 2.5 0 5 10 15 20 25
for reflective or transparent Lenses XUR Z0p, see page 1/110 distance (mm)
surfaces 1 XUR U1KSMM12

Maximum vertical 2 XUR U1KSMM12 + XUR Z02
inclination: 20° 3 XUR U1KSMM12 + XUR Z01
Dimensions
XU5 M18U1D XUR U1KSMM12
4
M18x1 (1) (2) 81,2 15 31
8,5
21
42,2
58
24
8xM5x6
39,8
55 24 4,3 14,1 27,5 28 M12x1
82
95
36,6 28
5,9
(1) Potentiometer.
(2) Green LED.
Fixing nut tightening torque: 15 N.m.
Wiring schemes
XU5 M18U1D
Connector scheme Wiring schemes (3-wire c)
(Sensor connector pin view) PNP output
1 ( +) Without output signal time delay With output signal time delay (20 ms)
Time delay (1) 2 4 Output See connection on 1 + 1 +

page 9/44 4 4
3 ( –) 3 – 3 –
2 2
(1) “OFF delay” of output signal:
- no time delay: connect contact 2 to (+)
- 20 ms delay: connect contact 2 to (-)
XUR U1KSMM12
Function Connector scheme Wiring schemes (3-wire c)
(Sensor connector pin view) Automatic light or dark switching selection
depending on chronological order of
teaching for the mark and the background
1 1 ( +) NPN output
2 Analogue Solid-state
output 2 4 1 +
3 output 2
4 3 ( –) 4 R 0…7 V
3 –
PNP output
1 Green LED, sensor in teach mode. 1 +
2 Red LED, output state. 2
3 Teach mode button for mark. 4
R
0…7 V
4 Teach mode button for background. 3 –
PNP/NPN programming and time delay by internal R = 2.2 kΩ
switches.
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/85
characteristics 1
With adjustable background suppression
Mechanical display of setting
Compact design
System Diffuse with adjustable background suppression, long sensing distance with high
accuracy
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 1m
References
3-wire, PNP or NPN NO or NC programmable XUK 8AKSNL2 XUK 8AKSNM12
programmable function
Weight (kg) 0.190 0.070
Characteristics
Ambient air temperature For operation: - 25…+ 55 °C.

For storage: - 30…+ 70 °C
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 65 (IP 30 with cover open).

NEMA 4X indoor use, 12 and 13 double insulation
Materials Case: PC, lenses: PMMA, cable: PVC
Connection (1) Pre-cabled, diameter 6 mm, length 2 m, M12 male connector, 4-pin, can be set at 2
wire c.s.a.: 5 x 0.34 mm2 positions (suitable female connectors, including
pre-wired versions, see page 9/44)
Current consumption, no-load 35 mA
Function table Function Diffuse system

Output state (PNP or NPN) indicator: NO
yellow LED
NC
(1) For a 5 m long cable replace L2 by L10.
1/86
dimensions, Osiris® Application, materials handling series

With adjustable background suppression
schemes 1
Mechanical display of setting

Detection curves
Variation of usable sensing distance Su
Adjustment at 10 cm
B
Adjustment at 1 m
B
A-B: Object reflection coefficient
1
Grey 18% Non sensing zone
(Matt surfaces)
White 90%
A 5 10,5 S (cm) A5 91 104 S (cm)

10 100
Sensing distance adjustment Relative difference in sensing distances according

to object colour
Sensing distance (cm)
1000 %
20
1
2 18
100 3 16
14
12
10
10
1 6
2,5 2 1,5 1 0,5 0
4
Max.
Number of turns on potentiometer

Min.
FAR NEAR 0
0 20 40 60 80 100
Sensing distance (cm)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting indicator position (mm)
1 White 90% 1 White 90%
2 Grey 18% 2 Grey 18%
3 Black 6% 3 Black 6%
Dimensions
XUK 8AKSNL2 Bracket fixing XUK 8AKSNM12 with cover raised
50 65
40 (1) 12 (2)
7
18
40,5
40
50
34
60
58
15
40
82
Ø6
80
20
35
13
29,5
5
10O
18 22 12 (3)
58
(1) Cover locking tongue.
29,5
(2) 1 elongated hole Ø 6 x 12.

(3) 1 elongated hole Ø 6 x 13.
Functions Wiring schemes (3-wire c) Cable connections
NO/NC programming XUK 8AKSNL2
PNP output (-) BU (Blue)
(+) BN (Brown)
1
(OUT) BK (Black)
2
FAR NEAR
Connector scheme
Switches NPN output XUK 8AKSNM12
1 NO/NC programming
2 PNP or NPN output 4 3
LED
3 Yellow LED, output NO: detection of object presence 1
Potentiometer NC: detection of object absence
4 Sensing distance adjustment See connection on page 9/44.
Setting indicator
5 Potentiometer setting indication
1/87
characteristics 1
With analogue output signal 4…20 mA (1)
d.c. supply
Design 18
System Diffuse
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 5…40 cm
References
3-wire, PNP XU5 M18AB20D
Weight (kg) 0.075
Characteristics
Product certifications e, CSA, UL

Connection M12 male connector, 4-pin

Materials Case: nickel plated brass, lens: PMAA
Output current Maximum 20 mA
Minimum 4 mA
Output current drift in relation to temperature < 10% between - 25 and + 55 °C, < 5% between 0 and + 40 °C
Output current drift in relation to supply < 3%
Maximum switching frequency 20 Hz (for an output current variation of 10 mA)
Delays First-up: y 50 ms
Indicator light The brightness of the green LED is proportional to the output current
Ie = 20 mA: indicator light at maximum intensity
Ie = 4 mA: indicator light at minimum intensity
(1) Applications: position control, monitoring concentricity or eccentricity, closed loop regulation, monitoring displacement, etc.
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/88

With analogue output signal 4…20 mA
schemes 1
d.c. supply
Output signal (related to distance of object)

Potentiometer set at maximum Potentiometer set at minimum
Is (mA) Is (mA)
1
25 25
20 20
2 1
15 15
2 1
10 10
5 5
4 4
1 1
0 10 20 30 40 50 0 10 20 30 40 50
D (cm) D (cm)
1 White 90% object 1 White 90% object

2 Grey 15% object 2 Grey 15% object
Dimensions
4
M18x1 (1) (2)
55 24
82
95
(1) Potentiometer.
(2) Green LED.
Fixing nut tightening torque: 15 N.m.
Connector tightening torque: 2 N.m.
Wiring schemes Connector scheme

Diffuse system Sensor connector pin view
Output current
1 + 1 ( +)
2 Analogue 2 4
Ie = 4…20 mA output
R
mA 3 ( –)
D
3 –
Load characteristics (R)

The output current varies between 4 and 20 mA, depending on the distance of the object and therefore, the load must be less than 800 Ω for a 24 V supply and
less than 300 Ω for a 12 V supply.
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/89
characteristics 1
With analogue output signal 4…20 mA and 0…10 V (1)
Compact design
System Diffuse
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 20…80 cm
References
3-wire PNP XUJ K803538
Weight (kg) 0.200

Characteristics


Connection Screw terminals, maximum capacity: 2 x 1.5 mm2 or 1 x 2.5 mm2
Materials Case: PEI (2)
Output current Maximum 20 mA

Minimum 4 mA
Output voltage (Vs) c 0…10 V
Output voltage drift < 10% between - 25 and + 60 °C

in relation to temperature
Output voltage drift < 10%
in relation to object colour
Maximum switching frequency 10 Hz (for an output voltage variation of 1 V)
Indicator light The brightness of the LED is proportional to the output voltage
(1) Applications: position control, monitoring concentricity or eccentricity, closed loop regulation,
monitoring displacement, etc.
(2) PEI: high quality synthetic resin providing excellent withstand to mechanical shocks, vibration
and the effects of external agents frequently encountered in industry: alcohol, salts,
petroleum, oils, greases, washing agents (diluted sodium carbonate 4%, nitric acid 2%),
formaldehyde vapour, splashing lactic acid, etc.
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/90

With analogue output signal 4…20 mA and 0…10 V (1)
schemes, d.c. supply. Solid-state output
connections 1
Curves
Output signal (related to distance of object). Test performed with 20 x 20 cm, white 90% object
Output current Output voltage 1
mA V
20 10
± 10 %
± 10 %
0 0
2 15 20 40 60 80 D (cm) 2 15 20 40 60 80 D (cm)
Forbidden zone
Dimensions
XUJ K803538
2,6 61
1,35
(1) 27,2
R
13
T
85
98,85
(2)
30 (4)
62,5
30
30,5
17
(3)
10˚ 10˚ 1010
10 20 9 32,6
83,6
(1) LED.
(2) 11P cable gland.
(3) 1 elongated hole Ø 4.2 x 14.
(4) Front fixing (Ø 4 screws and inserts included).
Wiring schemes
Diffuse system
Output current Output voltage
+ +
3 5 3
4
Vs
6 6
mA
D 1 D 1 –
–
Load characteristics
b Output current: the output current varies between 4 and 20 mA depending on the distance of the object and therefore, the load must be less than 1 kΩ.
b Output voltage: since the minimum rated output current of the sensor is 10 mA, the load must always have a resistive value of more than 1 kΩ.
Terminal connections
1 ( –)
2
3 ( +)
4 Voltage output
5 Current output
6 (–)
Terminals 1 and 6 connected internally.
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/91
characteristics 1
Osiris® Application, mechanical handling series
Thru-beam system with high “excess gain” (1)
Solid-state output and analogue output 4…20 mA
Design 18
System Thru-beam
Type of transmission Infra-red
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) / max. 50 m / 70 m (transmitter + receiver)

References
3-wire, PNP N/C (object detection)+ XU2 M18AP20D (2)
analogue output
Weight (kg) 0.155
Characteristics

Connection M12 male connector, 4-pin (suitable female extension cables and connectors, see page 9/44)
Lenses PMMA

Discrete solid state output Switching capacity ≤ 100 mA with overload and short-circuit protection
(sealed)
Maximum switching 30 Hz
frequency
Delays first-up ≤ 50 ms
Delays response ≤ 15 ms
Delays recovery ≤ 15 ms
Analogue output Output current 4…20 mA

Drift < 5 % for temperature between 0 and + 40 °C
Delay ≤ 15 ms
Current consumption, no-load ≤ 55 mA (transmitter + receiver)

Indicator lights Transmitter Green LED illuminated = supply on
Yellow LED illuminated = beam transmission
Receiver Yellow LED illuminated = solid state output ON = object detected within beam
Green LED : luminosity of the LED is proportional to the output current :
- for I = 20 mA, object slightly opaque, light intensity at maximum,
- for I = 4 mA, object completely opaque, light intensity at minimum.
(1) Applications : detection of objects in spite of a difficult environment (smoke, dust, mist, etc.)
detection of objects inside packaging, etc.
Example of values
Object : 80 g white sheets of paper. Transmitter/receiver distance = 10 cm
Number of sheets 1 11 27 31
Analogue output current (mA) 17,3 12 6 5
(2) Reference for both transmitter and receiver for thru-beam system.
(3) Accessories see page 1/110.
1/92
curves, Osiris® Application, mechanical handling series

Thru-beam system with high “excess gain”
schemes, Solid-state output and analogue output 4…20 mA
operation 1
Dimensions Curves
Detection curve
4
M18x1 (2) (1)
Thru-beam system 1
Ø of beam
cm
55 24
82
95
(1) LEDs
(2) Potentiometer (only applicable to receiver) Excess gain curve (ambient temperature : + 25 °C)
Fixing nut tightening torque : 15 N.m Thru-beam system
Connector tightening torque : 2 N.m 5
Wiring schemes 3
2
Receiver
105
8
1 + 5
2 Ie = 4…20 mA 3
mA 2
Ie = 0…100 mA
4
4
R 10
3 8
– 5
3
R max. < 800 Ω (Ue = 24 V), < 300 Ω (Ue = 12 V) 2
103
Beam break test (only applicable to transmitter) 800
Beam made Beam broken 500
+ + 300
1 1 200
2 2 100
80
3 3 50
– – 30
20
Connector schemes 10
8
Detector connector pin view 5
Transmitter Receiver 3
1 ( +) 1 ( +) 2
Test 2 4 Analogue 2 4 Solid 1

output state 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,5 1 2 3 5 10 20 30 50 100
output D (m)
3 ( –) 3 ( –)
Depending on connector page 9/44.

Operation, settings
Type, opacity of the object Analogue output curve Switching level of discrete solid
state PNP output
Potentiometer Potentiometer
set at minimum set at maximum
Degree of opacity of object Output current
mA
25
20
18
15
10
5
4
0 %
0 0,1 99,4 99,5 99,6 99,7 99,8 99,9 99,95 100 0 1 0 1
Degree of opacity of object
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/93
characteristics 1
Laser transmission. Plastic case, cylindrical, M18 x 1
threaded
Design 18
System Thru-beam
Type of transmission Red laser
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 100 m
References
3-wire, PNP Light or dark programmable switching XU2 P18PP340DL (transmitter + receiver)
Weight (kg) 0.045
Characteristics
Transmission characteristics Red laser, wavelength = 635 nm
Transmission power Power < 1 mW, class 2 conforming to IEC 825-1

Vibration resistance 7 gn, amplitude ± 1.5 mm (f = 10…55 Hz) conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
Degree of protection IP 67 conforming to IEC 60529
Connection M12 connector (suitable female connectors, including pre-wired versions, see page 9/44)
Materials Case: PC/ABS; lenses: PMMA
Switching capacity y 100 mA with overload and short-circuit protection
Current consumption, no-load y 50 mA (transmitter + receiver)
Delays First-up: y 15 ms
Response: y 1 ms
Recovery: y 1 ms
Indicator lights Output state Yellow LED, on receiver only
Supply on Green LED, on transmitter only
Stability Red LED, on receiver only

Output state (PNP) indicator: Light switching
yellow LED
Dark switching
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/94

Laser transmission. Plastic case, cylindrical, M18 x 1
schemes 1
threaded
Detection curve (set to infinity) Excess gain curve (ambient temperature: + 25 °C)
10 500
1
m 100
-10 50
10
5
3
1
1 2 3 5 10 20 30 50 100 200 D (m)
Adjustment
Minimum size of the
object to be detected
(mm)
12
10
2
1
0,5
0,1
0,1 0,3 1 2 10 20 100 (m)
1 Focusing point
The adjustment of the focusing point enables the detection of objects down to a size of 0.5 mm.
To adjust the focusing point, slacken the fixing screws 1 and rotate the serrated sleeve 2 located on the face of the sensor. Re-tighten fixing
screws.
Note: saddle clamp XUZ A218 with ball-joint and, in particular, bracket XUZ A318 with precise micrometric adjustment and locking by 6 screws, are specially suited
for mounting the sensor and adjusting beam alignment when the sensing range is several tens of metres (see page 1/110).
Dimensions Operating precautions
Transmitter Receiver
4 4
(2) (1)
Laser
class II
32 M18x1 24 34 M18x1 24
63 54
76 67
(1) Yellow and red LED on receiver, green LED on transmitter. Class II laser, conforming to IEC 825-1.
(2) Adjustment potentiometer. Do not stare into the beam.
Note: fixing nut tightening torque: < 4 N.m.
Light switching programmed (no object Dark switching programmed (no object
present) present)
Transmitter Receiver (PNP output) Receiver (PNP output)
1 2 1 +
3
1 +
4 –
4 – 3
2 3 2
Connector scheme (solid-state output) Verification of correct operation

Sensor connector pin view
Transmitter Receiver
1,5
Signal 1
1 (+ ) 1 (+ ) level 0,7
LED off
2 4 2 4
Test Program- Output Red LED LED on
ming
3 ( –) 3 (–)
– Optimum +
alignment
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/95
characteristics 1
Osiris® Application, mechanical handling series
Optical fork type with integral amplifier
Fork design
System Thru-beam
References
3-wire, PNP Dark switching XUV H0312
3-wire, NPN Dark switching XUV J0312
Weight (kg) 0.130

Characteristics
Vibration resistance Conforming to Amplitude ± 1 mm at up to 42 Hz, 7 gn (f = 10…42 Hz)

IEC 60068-2-6
IEC 60068-2-27
Connection Pre-cabled, diameter 5 mm, length 2 m, wire c.s.a. : 3 x 0,34 mm2

Materials Case PC/ABS
Lens PMMA
Cable PvR


Response 500 µs
Recovery 500 µs
Function table Thru-beam system

Dark switching No object present in the beam Object present in the beam
Output state (PNP or NPN) red LED
(illuminated when detector output is ON)
1/96
dimensions, Osiris® Application, mechanical handling series

Optical fork type with integral amplifier
schemes 1
Detection curve
Dimensions
(1) Optical axis

(2) Red LED
(3) Diffuser
Maximum tightening torque of fixing screws : 3 N.m

Dark switching (no object present)
PNP output NPN output
BN BN +
BK BK
BU –
BU
1/97
characteristics 1
For flow control
a.c. or d.c. supply
1 C/O relay output
Compact design
System Reflex
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 6 m (with 50 x 50 mm reflector)
References
5-wire Light switching XUL M06031H60 (supplied as kit comprising: sensor, fixing bracket, 50 x 50 mm reflector and
mounting instructions)
Weight (kg) 0.300
Characteristics

Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 67 (Indoor use)
Connection Pre-cabled: diameter 6 mm, length 2 m, wire c.s.a.: 5 x 0.34 mm2
Materials Case: ABS; lens: PMMA; cable: PVC
Switching capacity 2000 mA (cos ϕ =1), 500 mA (cos ϕ = 0.4) for a contact life of 0.5 million operating cycles
Maximum voltage on output relay contacts a 250 V
Current consumption, no-load y 40 mA (1)

Output state of relay contact indicator Light switching
(illuminated when relay energised) BN BN
RD
RD
OG OG
Relay energised Relay de-energised
(1) No-load current consumption at a 220 V: y 25 mA.
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/98
dimensions, Osiris® Application, tertiary sector series

For flow control
schemes 1
a.c. or d.c. supply

1 C/O relay output
Contents of kit XUL M06031H60 Detection curve Excess gain curve (ambient temperature: + 25 °C)
Reflex system a or c Reflex system a or c
-
-
reflex system photo-electric sensor,
fixing bracket,
Ø of beam cm Gain 1
- 50 x 50 mm reflector, 10
- mounting instructions.
5
0,2 6 m
-5
-10
Dimensions
Bracket fixing
18
45 45 (1)
10O
10 O 18
11
(3)
10 O
7
70
(4)
80
28
30
39
(4)
28 (2)
54,5
(3) O
10
4,5
14
12,5
12
10O
20,6
10O 45
30
20,6
30
(1) LED.
(3) 1 elongated hole Ø 4.1 x 10 and 1 x Ø 4.1.
(4) 1 elongated hole Ø 3.1 x 10 and 1 x Ø 3.1.
Wiring scheme (5-wire a or c) Mounting precautions

1 C/O relay output Rigid fixing Outdoor mounting
Light switching (object present)
BK
OG
RD
BN
BU
Fix securely for trouble free Use protective covers and mount on thermal insulators to
detection. avoid frost or condensation forming on the optical parts.
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/99
characteristics 1
With integral buzzer
a.c. or d.c. supply
1 N/O relay output
Compact design
System Reflex
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 6 m (with Ø 80 mm reflector)
Cable gland N° 9 plastic, mounted in base
References
Dark switching XUJ B06031H60 (supplied as kit comprising: sensor, fixing bracket, Ø 80 mm reflector and
mounting instructions)
Weight (kg) 0.330
Characteristics

Connection Screw terminals, maximum capacity: 1 x 1.5 mm2
Materials Case: PEI (1)
Rated supply voltage a 24…240 V or c 24…48 V
Voltage limits a 20…264 V or c 20…60 V (including ripple)
Switching capacity 2000 mA (cos ϕ =1), 500 mA (cos ϕ = 0.4) for a contact life of 1 million operating cycles
Maximum voltage on output relay contacts a 250 V or c 30 V
Time delay Adjustable from 0.3 to 3 seconds

Output state of relay contacts indicator: Dark switching
yellow LED 5 4 5 4
(illuminated when relay energised)
Relay yellow Relay yellow
de-energised energised
(1) PEI: high quality synthetic resin providing excellent withstand to mechanical shocks, vibration and the effects of external agents frequently encountered in industry:
alcohol, salts, petroleum, oils, greases, washing agents (diluted sodium carbonate 4%, nitric acid 2%), formaldehyde vapour, splashing lactic acid, etc.
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/100
dimensions, Osiris® Application, tertiary sector series

With integral buzzer
schemes 1
a.c. or d.c. supply

1 N/O relay output
Detection curve Contents of kit XUJ B06031H60

Reflex system
Ø of beam
-
-
reflex system photo-electric sensor,
fixing bracket,
1
cm - Ø 80 mm reflector,
6 - mounting instructions.
4
2
0
-2 8 m
-4
-6
Excess gain curve (ambient temperature: + 25 °C)

Infrared reflex system
Gain
1000
500
100
50
10
5
1
0,1 0,2 0,4 1 2 4 6 10
D (m)
Dimensions
XUJ B06031H60 Face view Bracket fixing
2,6 66 27,2 12,8

6,5
(4) (6)
(8)
24
62,5
13
(7)
25 25
12 14
85
25
96
30 (5)
62,5
16
10 10 25
10
28
(1)
12 (2) 14 (3) 12,7 12,8
57 55,2
(1) N° 9 plastic cable gland. (7) 2 elongated holes Ø 6.5 x 16.5.

(2) 2 elongated holes Ø 6.5 x 10. (8) 1 elongated hole Ø 6.5 x 30.5.
(3) 1 elongated hole Ø 6.5 x 24.
(4) 8 elongated holes Ø 4.2 x 10.
(6) Yellow LED.
Wiring schemes (a or c) Terminal connections

Dark switching
Object present 1 N/O relay output
2 /+ 1 A1 ( /–)
4 2 A2 ( /+)
5 3
1 /– 4 a 250 V, 100 VA max.
5 c 30 V, 2 A max.
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/101
References 1
Osiris® Application, Osiconcept® (1),

food and beverage processing series
Design 18, metal, stainless steel
Ø 18 stainless steel
550055
Pre-cabled (2)
1 Sensing distance
(Sn) (3)
Function Output Line of
sight
Reference Weight
m kg
0…15 NO or NC, PNP Along case XUB 0SPSNL2 0.105
XUB 0pppNL2 depending on using axis
whether accessories Osiconcept 90° to case XUB 0SPSWL2 (5) 0.110
are used programming axis
550001
NPN Along case XUB 0SNSNL2 0.105

axis
90° to case XUB 0SNSWL2 (5) 0.110
axis
XUB 0pppWL2 M12 connector

0…15 NO or NC, PNP Along case XUB 0SPSNM12 0.055
depending on using axis
whether accessories Osiconcept
550002
90° to case XUB 0SPSWM12 (5) 0.060

are used programming axis
NPN Along case XUB 0SNSNM12 0.055
axis
90° to case XUB 0SNSWM12 (5) 0.060
axis
XUB 0pppNM12 Accessories

Description Connect- Line of Reference Weight
ion sight kg
550000
Thru-beam accessories Pre-cabledAlong case XUB 0SKSNL2T 0.105

(transmitter) (2) axis
90° to case XUB 0SKSWL2T (5) 0.110
axis
M12 Along case XUB 0SKSNM12T 0.055
connector axis
90° to case XUB 0SKSWM12T (5) 0.060
XUB 0pppWM12 axis
805799

kg
Plastic fixing bracket with adjustable ball-joint XUZ A218 0.035

XUZ C50
805818
Plastic fixing clamp, 24.1 mm centres XUZ B2005 0.007

805817
with locking screw

(2) For a 5 m long cable, replace L2 by L5.
XUZ A218 Example: XUB 0SPSNL2 becomes XUB 0SPSNL5.
XUZ A118
(5) For line of sight 90° to case axis versions, see sensing distances on page 1/25.
503663
XUZ B2005
1/102
schemes, Osiris® Application, Osiconcept® (1),

curves, food and beverage processing series
Design 18, metal, stainless steel
dimensions 1
Characteristics
Sensor type XUB 0ppppM12, XUB 0ppppM12T XUB 0ppppL2, XUB 0ppppL2T
UL, CSA, e
M12 –
1
Sensing distance Line of sight Line of sight Accessory
nominal Sn / maximum along case axis 90° to case axis
(excess gain = 2) (excess gain = 1) m 0.12 / 0.12 0.11 / 0.11 Without (diffuse with background
suppression)
m 0.3 / 0.4 0.2 / 0.3 Without (diffuse)
m 2/3 1.5 / 2 With reflector (polarised reflex)
m 15 / 20 10 / 14 With thru-beam accessory (thru-beam)
Degree of protection IP 65, IP 67 conforming to IEC 60529; IP69 K to DIN 40050; double insulation i
Materials Case: stainless steel, grade 304CU; Lens: PMMA; Cable: PvR
Indicator lights Output state Yellow LED (transmission present for XUB 0ppppppT)
Supply on Green LED
Stability Red LED (except for XUB 0ppppppT)
Current consumption, no-load mA 35 (20 for XUB 0ppppppT)
Response ms <2
Recovery ms <2
Connections
M12 connector Pre-cabled PNP NPN Thru-beam accessory
3 (-) (-) BU (Blue)
4 3
1 (+) (+) BN (Brown)
BN/1 + BN/1 + 1/BN
PNP BK/4 NPN 2/VI
4 OUT/Output OUT/Output BK (Black) BK/4
3/BU
1 2 2 Beam break Beam break input (2)
input (2) VI (Violet) BU/3 – BU/3 – Input 2/VI:
- not connected: beam made
See connection on page 9/44. - connected to –: beam broken
Detection curves (line of sight along case axis)

With thru-beam accessory (thru-beam) Without accessory Without accessory (diffuse With reflector
(diffuse) with bckgrnd. suppression) (polarised reflex)
6
15 4
Ø 12 mm
2
10 15 20 m 40 12 cm 3m
8 -2
-15 2
-4
-6 2
30 cm 12 cm
Object: 10 x 10 cm, 1: white 90%, 2: grey18% With reflector XUZ C50

Teach mode at minimum. Teach mode at maximum.
B A-B: object reflection B
coefficient
Black 6%
Grey 18%
White 90%
Sensing range
Non sensing zone
A (matt surfaces) A
1 8 10 S (cm) 1 9 12 17 S (cm)
Dimensions
XUB
Ø 18 a b a b
b Line of sight along case axis 64 (3) 44 78 (2) 44
a Line of sight 90° to case axis 78 44 92 44
(3) For XUB 0ppppppT, 64 becomes 62 mm and 78 becomes 76 mm.
1/103
characteristics 1
Osiris Application, food and beverage
®
processing series
Stainless steel case M18 x 1
Design 18
1 2 3
1
System Thru-beam 1 Reflex 2 Polarised reflex 2 Diffuse 3
Type of transmission Infrared Infrared Red Infrared
Sensing Nominal, Sn (excess gain = 2) 15 m 4m 2m 0.10 m

distance
Maximum (excess gain = 1) 20 m 5.5 m (with 50 x 50 mm 3 m (with 50 x 50 mm 0.15 m
References of pre-cabled versions (1)

3-wire, PNP Line of sight along case XU2 N18PP341 (2) XU1 N18PP341 (3) XU9 N18PP341 (3) XU5 N18PP341
NO or NC programmable axis
Line of sight 90° to case XU2 N18PP341W (2) XU1 N18PP341W (3) XU9 N18PP341W (3) XU5 N18PP341W
axis
3-wire, NPN Line of sight along case XU2 N18NP341 (2) XU1 N18NP341 (3) XU9 N18NP341 (3) XU5 N18NP341
Line of sight 90° to case XU2 N18NP341W (2) XU1 N18NP341W (3) XU9 N18NP341W (3) XU5 N18NP341W
axis
Weight (kg) 0.270 0.155 0.155 0.135
References of plug-in connector versions

3-wire, PNP Line of sight along case XU2 N18PP341D (2) XU1 N18PP341D (3) XU9 N18PP341D (3) XU5 N18PP341D
Line of sight 90° to case XU2 N18PP341WD (2) XU1 N18PP341WD (3) XU9 N18PP341WD (3) XU5 N18PP341WD
axis
3-wire, NPN Line of sight along case XU2 N18NP341D (2) XU1 N18NP341D (3) XU9 N18NP341D (3) XU5 N18NP341D
Line of sight 90° to case XU2 N18NP341WD (2) XU1 N18NP341WD (3) XU9 N18NP341WD (3) XU5 N18NP341WD
axis
Weight (kg) 0.130 0.085 0.085 0.065
(1) Sensors available with 5 m cable: To order, add the suffix L5 to the reference selected from above.
Example: sensor XU1 N18PP341 with 5 m cable becomes XU1 N18PP341L5.
References of fixing accessories

kg
Plastic fixing bracket XUZ A218 0.035
Set of 2 stainless steel nuts XSZ E318 0.020
Set of 2 plastic nuts XSZ E218 0.004
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/104
curves 1
®
processing series
Characteristics
Ambient air temperature
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
Operation: - 25...+ 55 °C. Storage: - 40...+ 70 °C
25 gn, amplitude ± 1.5 mm (f = 10…55 Hz)
1
Connection Pre-cabled Pre-cabled, diameter 4.2 mm, length 2 m (3), wire c.s.a.: 4 x 0.34 mm2
Connector M12 male connector, 4-pin (suitable female connectors, including pre-wired versions, see
page 9/44)
Materials Case Food and beverage processing stainless steel, grade 304 Cu
Lenses PMMA
Cable PvR
Current consumption, no-load ≤ 30 mA (reflex and diffuse), ≤ 50 mA (thru-beam)
Delays First-up ≤ 15 ms
Response ≤ 1 ms
Recovery ≤ 1 ms
Indicator lights Supply on Green LED, on transmitter only
Output state Yellow LED, on receiver only
(1) Sensors available with 5 m cable: To order, add the suffix L5 to the reference selected from above.
Example: sensor XU1 N18PP341 with 5 m cable becomes XU1 N18PP341L5.
Curves
Detection curves
Thru-beam system Reflex system Polarised reflex system Diffuse system
with reflector XUZ C50 with reflector XUZ C50
Ø of beam Ø of beam Ø of beam Ø of beam
cm cm cm cm
6 T/R 1,4
15 10
T R 4 1
Ø 12 mm T/R 4 T/R 2 2 1
10 15 m 4 m 2 3 m 15 cm
-4 2 -2 0,2
-15 -4 -1
-10
-6 -1,4
Object 10 x 10 cm
1 White 90 % 2 Grey 18 %
Excess gain curves (ambient temperature: + 25 °C)
Thru-beam system Reflex system with reflector XUZ C50
Gain Gain
100 100
80
50
20
30
20 10
10
8
5 1
3
2
1 0,1
1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20 30 50 0,1 0,2 0,5 1 45 10
D (m) D (m)
Polarised reflex system with reflector XUZ C50 Diffuse system
Gain Gain
10
50
30
20
15
1 10
7
5
3
2
0,1 1 Object 10 x 10 cm
0,1 0,5 1 2 3 5 0,1 0,2 0,5 1 2 5 10 20 60 White 90 %
D (m) D (cm)
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/105
Dimensions 1

®
processing series
Dimensions
XUp N18pp341 XUp N18pp341W
1 4 4
M18x1 (1) M18x1 (1)
50 24 50 24
62 (2) 78
XUp N18pp341D XUp N18pp341WD
4 4
M18x1 (1) M18x1 (1)
50 24 50 24
62 62
72 88
(1) LED
(2) 64 for XU9 N18pp341
Fixing nut tightening torque: < 15 N.m
Connector tightening torque: 2 N.m
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/106
Schemes 1

®
processing series
Connections
M12 connector scheme Cable connections
4 3 3 (–) (–) BU (Blue)

1
1 (+) (+) BN (Brown)
1 2
4 OUT/Output (OUT/Output) BK (Black)
2 Prog (or beam break input (Prog) OG (Orange)
for thru-beam transmitter only) (Beam break input) VI (Violet) on thru-beam transmitter only

Wiring schemes - diffuse
PNP NO PNP NC NPN NO NPN NC Transmitter
OG/2 OG/2
BN/1 BN/1 BN/1 BN/1 1/BN
BK/4 BK/4 2/VI
BK/4 BK/4 3/BU
BU/3 BU/3 BU/3 BU/3
OG/2 OG/2
Wiring schemes - reflex and thru-beam

PNP NO PNP NC NPN NO NPN NC
OG/2 OG/2
BN/1 BN/1 BN/1 BN/1
BK/4 BK/4
BK/4 BK/4
BU/3 BU/3 BU/3 BU/3
OG/2 OG/2
Beam break input on thru-beam transmitter only

Beam made Beam broken
BN/1 + BN/1 +
VI/2 VI/2
BU/3 – BU/3 –
Accessories:
page 1/110
1/107
References 1
Design 18
Two-wire, a.c. (1) or d.c. supply, solid-state output with
Diffuse system with adjustable background suppression

Sensing Function Line of sight Connection (pre- Reference Weight
1 distance (Sn)
m
cabled or connector) kg
0.12 N/O Along case axis Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (2) XU8 M18MA230 0.150
1/2" 20-UNF XU8 M18MA230K 0.075
90° to case axis Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (2) XU8 M18MA230W 0.150
1/2" 20-UNF XU8 M18MA230WK 0.075
N/C Along case axis Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (2) XU8 M18MB230 0.150
1/2" 20-UNF XU8 M18MB230K 0.075
90° to case axis Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (2) XU8 M18MB230W 0.150
XU5 M18Mp230W 1/2" 20-UNF XU8 M18MB230WK 0.075
XU8 M18Mp230W
Diffuse system
m
0.40 N/O Along case axis Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (2) XU5 M18MA230 0.150
1/2" 20-UNF XU5 M18MA230K 0.075
1/2" 20-UNF XU5 M18MA230WK 0.075
1/2" 20-UNF XU5 M18MB230K 0.075
1/2" 20-UNF XU5 M18MB230WK 0.075
XU9 M18Mp230 Polarised reflex system (3)

m
2 N/O Along case axis Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (2) XU9 M18MA230 0.170
1/2" 20-UNF XU9 M18MA230K 0.090
1/2" 20-UNF XU9 M18MA230WK 0.090
1/2" 20-UNF XU9 M18MB230K 0.095
XU2 M18Mp230
1/2" 20-UNF XU9 M18MB230WK 0.090
Thru-beam system (4)

m
15 N/O Along case axis Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (2) XU2 M18MA230 0.285
1/2" 20-UNF XU2 M18MA230K 0.155
1/2" 20-UNF XU2 M18MA230WK 0.155
1/2" 20-UNF XU2 M18MB230K 0.155
1/2" 20-UNF XU2 M18MB230WK 0.155
XUZ B2003
kg
3D fixing kit XUZ B2003 0.170
for use on M12 rod for XUp M18 or XUZ C50
M12 rod XUZ 2001 0.050
XUZ A118 Support for M12 rod XUZ 2003 0.150

XUZ 2001

(1) As these sensors do not have overload and short-circuit protection, it is essential to connect a
0.4 A quick-blow fuse in series with the load.
(2) For a 5 m long cable, add L5.
Example: XU2 M18MA230 becomes XU2 M18MA230L5.
(3) 50 x 50 m reflector XUZ C50 included with polarised reflex system.
(4) Including both transmitter and receiver for thru-beam system sensors.
XUZ A218 XUZ 2003 (5) For further information, see page 1/110.
1/108
schemes, Osiris® Application

Design 18
curves, Two-wire, a.c. or d.c. supply, solid-state output with
dimensions 1
Characteristics
Sensor type XU2 M, XU5 M, XU8 M, XU9 M XU2 M, XU5 M, XU8 M, XU9 MpppppppK
UL, CSA, e
– 1/2" 20-UNF
1
Pre-cabled L: 2 m –
Sensing distance m 0.12 / 0.12 diffuse system with background suppression
nominal Sn / maximum m 0.4 / 0.6 diffuse system
m 15 / 20 thru-beam
Type of transmission Infrared, except XU9 (red)
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 67, double insulation i IP 67
Materials Case: nickel plated brass; Lens: PMMA; Cable: PvR

Instability Red LED (for reflex and thru-beam only)
Rated supply voltage V a/c 24…240
Voltage limits (including ripple) V a/c 20…264
Residual current, open state mA < 1.5
Switching capacity mA 10…200 (1)
Voltage drop, closed state V 6
Response ms < 20
Recovery ms < 20
(1) As these sensors do not have overload and short-circuit protection, it is essential to connect a
0.4 A quick-blow fuse in series with the load.
Connections
Connector Pre-cabled 2-wire a or c Transmitter
1/2" 20-UNF 1 t (z) BU (Blue)
1 2z (z) BN (Brown) /2 2
3z
/3 3
2 3 1 1
t on models with connector t on models with connector
Detection curves
Thru-beam system Polarised reflex system Diffuse system Diffuse system with adjustable background
suppression
Ø of beam Ø of beam Ø of beam Ø of beam
cm cm cm cm
6
15 4 1 1
2
20 m 1 2 3 m 0,3 60 cm 12 cm
10 15 -2 0,2
-15 -4 -1 -1
-6
2
With reflector XUZ C50 Object 10 x 10 cm; 1 White 90 %; 2 Grey 18 %

Variation of usable sensing distance S
Potentiometer set to min Potentiometer set to max A-B : object reflection coefficient
B B
Black 6 %
Grey 18 %
White 90 %
Sensing range
A 0,01 0,07 0,1 S (m) A 0,01 0,11 0,15 S (m)

0,08 0,12
Dimensions
XUp
b a b a b
a Ø 18 line of sight along case axis 82 55 95 55
Ø 18 line of sight to case axis 97 55 110 55
1/109
References 1
Osiris®
Accessories
3D fixing kit (1)

1 sensor type
Ball-joint mounted fixing XUB or XUZ C50 XUZ B2003
kg
0.170
bracket for mounting on M12 XUM or XUZ C50 XUZ M2003 0.140
rod
XUK or XUZ C50 XUZ K2003 0.170
XUX or XUZ C50 XUZ X2003 0.220
XUZ B2003 XUZ M2003 XUZ K2003 Ball-joint mounted fixing XUM XUZ M2004 0.155
bracket with protective XUK XUZ K2004 0.270
cover for mounting on M12
XUX XUZ X2004 0.420
rod
Support for M12 rod – XUZ 2003 0.150
M12 rod – XUZ 2001 0.050
(adjustment possible over
complete height)
XUZ X2003 XUZ M2004 XUZ K2004 (1) To obtain a 3D fixing kit, order:
- rod support XUZ 2003
- M12 rod XUZ 2001
- ball-joint mounted fixing bracket XUZ p200p
XUZ 2001 XUZ 200

XUZ X2004
XUZ 2003
XUZ 2003 XUZ 2001 3D fixing kit example
Fixing accessories
sensor type kg
Stainless steel fixing XUB XUZ A118 0.045
bracket
Metal fixing brackets XUM XUZ A50 0.025
XUZ A118 XUZ A50 XUZ A51 XUK XUZ A51 0.050
XUX XUZ X2000 0.065
XUL XUL Z41 0.050
XUJ XUZ A41 0.050
XUJ B XUZ A49 0.120
Plastic fixing bracket XUp (Ø 18 mm) XUZ A218 0.035
with adjustable ball-joint
Precision fixing bracket XU2 (Ø 18 mm) XUZ A318 0.170
with micrometric adjustment with laser transmission
XUZ X2000 XUL Z41 XUZ A41 Plastic fixing clamps XUA (Ø 8 mm) XSA Z108 0.007
with locking screw XSZ B108 0.006
XUp (Ø 18 mm) With lug XSA Z118 0.020
With indexing pin XSZ B118 0.010
With 24.1 mm ctrs. XUZ B2005 0.007
Glass fibre optics XUF S0810 XSA Z145 0.005
Fibre optics XUF S2510 XSA Z155 0.005
Fibre optics XUF S0210 XSA Z185 0.005
Set of 2 plastic nuts XUp (Ø 18 mm) XSA Z318 0.004
XUZ A49 XUZ A218 XUZ A318
Set of 2 metal nuts XUp (Ø 18 mm) XSZ E118 0.015
Set of 2 stainless steel XUp (Ø 18 mm) XSZ E318 0.015

nuts
XSA Z1pp XSZ B1pp XUZ B2005
1/110
References (continued) 1
Osiris®
Accessories
Reflectors
Description Dimensions Length Reference Weight
Standard reflectors
(mm)
Ø 16
(m)
– XUZ C16
kg
0.002
1
Ø 21 – XUZ C21 0.002
Ø 31 – XUZ C31 0.005
Ø 39 – XUZ C39 0.008
Ø 80 – XUZ C80 0.029
XUZ Cpp XUZ C50 XUZ C24 Universal reflector 50 x 50 – XUZ C50 0.020
(without blind zone)
Reflector for short sensing 24 x 21 – XUZ C24 0.007
distances
Reflector for long sensing 100 x 100 – XUZ C100 0.062
distances
Standard reflective adhesive Width: 22 1 XUZ B01 0.015
tape (1) Thickness: 0.4 5 XUZ B05 0.075
Reflective adhesive Width: 22 1 XUZ B11 0.020

tape (1) Thickness: 0.4 5 XUZ B15 0.085
(specifically for polarised reflex
systems and Osiconcept)
XUZ C100 XUZ B0p

Protective covers
kg
Protective covers Sensors XUX and XUJ XUZ D25 0.920
Reflectors XUZ C80 or XUZ D15 0.270
XUZ C24
Potentiometer protective Sensors XUJ XUJ Z01 0.015
cover
XUZ D15
Cabling accessories
XUZ D25 XUJ Z01 Description Reference Weight
kg
Adaptor, ISO 16 - 1/2" NPT XUZ X2001 0.050
Adaptor, ISO 16 - ISO 20 XUZ X2002 0.050
XUZ X2001 Lenses

kg
Lens for Sensors XUR XUR Z01 0.010
spot enlargement
Lens accessory for Sensors XUR XUR Z02 0.015
spot reduction
XUR Z01 XUR Z02

Spare parts
Description For use with Sold in Unit reference Weight
lots of kg
Plastic end adaptor Amplifiers 2 XUF Z08 0.002
for connecting Ø 1 mm fibres XUD A
Transparent covers Sensors XUV – XUV Z02 0.003
XUF Z08
Protection fuses
Description For use with Sold in Unit reference Weight
XUV Z02 lots of kg
Cartridge fuse Sensors without 10 XUZ E04 0.001
5 x 20 short-circuit
0.4 A “quick-blow” protection
Fuse terminal block Cartridge fuses 50 AB1 FU10135U 0.040
XUZ E0p
(1) Suitable for use at maximum ambient temperature of + 50 °C.
1/111
Dimensions 1
Osiris®
Accessories
XUZ B2003 XUZ 2001 XUZ 2003

Ball-joint mounted fixing bracket for XUB or XUZ C50 M12 rod Support for M12 rod
1
36 22,9
M4 5,7
40
1,9
12
19
55
33
132
40
67
126
53
19 M12
50
23
76,5
40
36
19
XUZ M2003 XUZ M2004
Ball-joint mounted fixing bracket for XUM (1) or XUZ C50 Ball-joint mounted fixing bracket with protective cover for XUM (1)
38 40,5 21
29
45 19,5 13
M4 M3 21
12,5
13,5
49
25
25
33
42
M3
XUZ K2003 XUZ K2004

Ball-joint mounted fixing bracket for XUK (1) or XUZ C50 Ball-joint mounted fixing bracket with protective cover for XUK (1)
60
M4
45
28 40,5 33
63
17,5
28
27
20
40
60
33
59,5
40
20
25,8
40
20
20
56,5
40
30,6
XUZ X2003 XUZ X2004

Ball-joint mounted fixing bracket for XUX (1) or XUZ C50 Ball-joint mounted fixing bracket with protective cover for XUX (1)
73
23,1 52,5 36 40,5 41,5
52
38
100
73
33
60
99
73
M5
4,5
51 23,5 18
50 49,5
(1) Accessory fixing screws included.
1/112
Mounting 1
Osiris®
Accessories
XUZ B2003 + XUZ 2001 + XUZ 2003 XUZ 2001 + XUZ 2003
3D fixing kit for XUB or reflector XUZ C50 M12 rod + rod support
XUZ M2003 + XUZ 2001 XUZ M2004 + XUZ 2001

3D fixing kit for XUM or reflector XUZ C50 3D fixing kit with protective cover for XUM
XUZ K2003 + XUZ 2001 XUZ K2004 + XUZ 2001 + XUZ 2003
3D fixing kit for XUK or reflector XUZ C50 3D fixing kit with protective cover for XUK
Mounting example
XUZ X2003 + XUZ 2001 XUZ X2004 + XUZ 2001

3D fixing kit for XUX or reflector XUZ C50 3D fixing kit with protective cover for XUX
1/113
Dimensions 1
Osiris®
Accessories
XUZ A118 XUZ A218 XUZ A50

Fixing bracket XUB Fixing bracket with adjustable ball-joint Fixing bracket XUM (2)
1 2,5 50
for XUp (Ø 18)
10 45 10 3
4,5
35
5 25,5
41
25
28 = =
55
5
15 5˚
3x4 15 8,2 x 3,2
1 8 24 8
4
6,5
= =
16,5
19,5
=
18
6,5
10
7,5
3,2
27
=
6,5 20 8,3
XUZ A51 XUZ X2000

Fixing bracket for XUK (2) Fixing bracket for XUX (2)
40 3 6 58 3
3
R ¯5,5
64
20
40
34
60
40
18
3
R
28
10˚ 6 22
6 10 30
6
R
52
12
12
64
16,5
5 13 15 18 7 6 x 12
6 x 13
48,5
12,8
58
6,5 14 7
12±0,1 24
XUZ A318 XSZ B108, XSZ B118

Fixing bracket with micrometric adjustment for XU2 (Ø 18) with Fixing clamps for XUA and XUp (Ø 18)
laser transmission
38,3
30
=
35
45
55
64
b1
b
b2
=
34
3,5
= = 9,5 (1) a1
3
59 39 a
44 4 22,3 8
15
3
XCZ a a1 b b1 b2 Ø
B108 21.1 14.5 14.2 12.8 7.5 8
6,5
9,5 8 24 8 9,5 B118 26 15.7 22.3 20.1 11.5 18

(1) 2 elongated holes Ø 4 x 8.
XUZ B2005 XSA Z1pp
Fixing clamps with 24.1 mm centres for XUp (Ø 18) Fixing clamps for XUA, XUp (Ø 18), XUF
b1
b
2,5
f
d
d1
20
d2 d3
13,2
== = =
16 30,7 c G G1
24,1 a
Ø3 = = Ø3
XSA a b b1 c d Ød1 Ød2 Ød3 f G G1
Z108 23.5 14.2 16.7 10 8 8.1 2 4 10.5 16 5
Z118 41 30 33 17 18 18.1 3.9 6 24 30 7
Z145 23.5 14.2 16.7 10 8 4.7 2 4 10.5 16 5
Z155 23.5 14.2 16.7 10 8 5.7 2 4 10.5 16 5
(2) Accessory fixing screws included. Z185 23.5 14.2 16.7 10 8 8.6 2 4 10.5 16 5
1/114
Dimensions (continued) 1
Osiris®
Accessories
XUZ D15 XUZ D25

Protective cover for XUZ C80 or XUZ C24 Protective cover for XUX or XUJ
48
1
16
=
101,5
(1)
88
72
133,5
149
=
66
80 73
22
16
16
91
83,4 44 = =
128 135 44
XUZ Cpp XUZ C50 XUZ M2003 + XUZ 2001 + XUZ 2003 +
XUZ C50
Mounting example
35
4xR5
d
c
51
69
47
60
XUZ Ø c d
C16 21 5.5 17
C21 25.5 6 20.5
C31 35 7.5 30.5
C39 46 6.5 37 3,5 (1)
8 51,5

XUZ C24 XUZ C100 XUZ X2001
9 96 1/2" NPT
27
M16
45
21
33
11,3 11
100
96
32
4 24
7,5 = = 9,5 100
29
XUZ C80 XUZ X2002
4,5 M20
26
M16
11,3 11
31
7,5
1/115
Curves 1
Osiris® Universal
XUB 0 Osiconcept® with line of sight along case axis
Sensing distance and excess gain

Background suppression mode
1
Background distance (1)

a 17 cm
0.01…0.12 m max. 13,5 cm
1 cm 12 17 cm
b 10
1 cm 8 cm 10 cm
Without accessory
5 cm
Background 5 cm 8 10 cm 12 cm
Maximum distance of object to be detected (1)
a: with background teaching at maximum Example: teaching against a background located at

recommended distance. 13.5 cm enables detection of an object at 1 to 10 cm.
b: with background teaching at minimum
recommended distance. (2) From white 90% to black 6%.
Diffuse mode
Gain
(1) 500
0…0.4 m max.
0 13 30 40 cm
100 1
(2) 50
0 13 18 cm 20 2
Without accessory 10
3
(3) 5
0,3 cm 8 11 cm
EG = 21
0,1 cm 0,5 1 5 10 50 100 cm
(1) White 90%. (2) Grey 18%. (3) Black 6%. Sn = 30 cm Distance
1 White object
Object teaching zone 2 Grey object
3 Black object
In diffuse mode, teaching of the position of the object to be detected, located between 0 and 12 cm,
automatically configures the product to “background suppression” mode. This provides a constant usable
sensing distance, whatever the colour of the object.
Polarised reflex mode

Gain
XUZ C50
100
0.003…5 m max. 3 mm 2m 3m
50
XUZ C24
3
10
With reflector 3 mm 0,9 m 1,3 m
XUZ C100 5
1
EG = 2
5 mm 4m 5m
2
1
0,1 m 0,5 1 5 10 m
Sn = 2 m Distance
1 With reflector XUZ C50

Thru-beam mode
Gain
1000
0…20 m max. 500
0 15 20 m
100
50
With thru-beam accessory

10
5
EG = 2
1
1m 5 10 50 m
Sn = 15 m Distance
Nominal sensing distance. EG ≥ 2.

Maximum sensing distance. The maximum sensing distances indicated are average values.
EG: Excess gain, operational reserve.
1/116
Curves 1
Osiris® Universal
XUB 0 Osiconcept® with line of sight 90° to case axis

1

15 cm
a
13,5 cm
0.01…0.11 m max.
0 cm 11 15 c
b
7,5
0 cm 8 cm 10 cm
Without accessory
0 cm
0 cm 6 10 11 cm
Background

recommended distance. 13.5 cm enables detection of an object at 0 to 10 cm.
Diffuse mode
Gain
0…0.3 m max. (1) 500
0 10 20 30 cm
100
(2) 50
10 14 cm 20
0 1
6 10
5
(3) 3 2
Without accessory EG = 2
0,3 cm 6,5 8 cm 1
1 cm 5 10 50 100 cm
(1) White 90%. (2) Grey 18%. (3) Black 6%. Sn = 20 cm Distance
1 White object
3 Black object
XUZ C50 Gain
100
0…4 m max. 0 cm 1,5 m 2 m 50
XUZ C24
3
10
3 cm 0,8 m 1,2 m
XUZ C100 5 1
With reflector 2
0 cm 3m 4m EG = 21
0,1 m 0,5 1 5 10 m
Sn = 1,5 m Distance

Thru-beam mode
Gain
0…14 m max. 1000
500
0 10 14 m
100
50
10
With thru-beam accessory 5
EG = 21
1m 5 50 m
Sn = 10 m Distance

1/117
Curves 1
Osiris® Optimum
XUB ppppp with line of sight along or at 90° to case axis

Diffuse sensor XUB 4ppppppp with line of sight along case axis
1 Gain
0.001…0.15 m max. (1)
100
0,1 cm 10 15 cm 50
1
(2)
10 2
0,3 cm 5 7 cm
5
3
EG = 2
(3)
1
0,6 cm 3 4 cm 0,1 cm 0,5 1 5 50 cm
Sn = 10 cm Distance
1 White object
(1) White 90%. (2) Grey 18%. (3) Black 6%.
2 Grey object
3 Black object
Diffuse sensor XUB 4ppppppp with line of sight 90° to case axis
Gain
0…0.15 m max. (1)
100
0 cm 10 15 cm 50
1
(2)
10
0,1 cm 5 7 cm
5 2
EG = 2
(3) 3
1
0,3 cm 2 4 cm 0,1 cm 0,5 1 5 50 cm
Sn = 10 cm Distance
1 White object
(1) White 90%. (2) Grey 18%. (3) Black 6%.
2 Grey object
3 Black object
Diffuse sensor XUB 5ppppppp with line of sight along or at 90° to case axis
(1)
Gain
0.001…0.8 m max. a
b (4) 500
0,1 cm 60 80 cm
(2) 100
1
a 50
2
b (4)
0,2 cm 25 38 cm 10 3
5
(3)
a EG = 2
1
b (4) 0,1 cm 0,5 1 5 10 50 100 cm
0,4 cm 15 21 cm Sn = 60 cm
Distance
(1) White 90%. (2) Grey 18%. (3) Black 6%. 1 White object
(4) No detection. 2 Grey object
3 Black object


a: Potentiometer set at maximum.
b: Potentiometer set at minimum.
1/118
Curves 1
Osiris® Optimum
XUB ppppp with line of sight along or at 90° to case axis

Polarised reflex sensor XUB 9ppppppp with line of sight along or at 90° to case axis
XUZ C50 Gain

1
100
0.003…5 m max.
5 mm 2m 3m 50
XUZ C24 3
With reflector 10 1
3 mm 1 m 1,5 m 5
EG = 2
2
XUZ C100
1
0,1 m 0,5 1 5 10 m
Sn = 2 m Distance
5 mm 4m 5m
Reflex sensor XUB 1ppppppp with line of sight along or at 90° to case axis
XUZ C50 Gain
500
0.003…9 m max. 5 mm 4m 5,5 m
100
3
XUZ C24 50
With reflector 2 1
10
3 mm 2 m 2,5 m
5
EG = 2
XUZ C100 1
0,1 m 0,5 1 5 10 m
Sn = 4 m Distance
5 mm 7m 9m
Thru-beam sensor XUB 2ppppppp with line of sight along or at 90° to case axis
Gain
0…20 m max. 1000
500
0m 15 20 m
100
50
10
5
EG = 2
1
1m 5 10 50 m
Sn = 15 m Distance

1/119
Curves 1
Osiris® Universal
XUX 0 Osiconcept®

1

1,5 m
a
0.01…1.3 m max. 1m
0 cm 1,3 1,5 m
b 50
40
6 cm 38 cm 40 cm
20
Without accessory
10 cm
10 cm 20 38 90 1 m 1,3 m
Background

recommended distance. 1 m enables detection of an object at 0 to 90 cm.
Diffuse mode
Gain
(1) 1000
0…3 m max. 0 1,3 2 3m

1
100
(2)
0 1 1,3 m 2
10 3
Without accessory
(3)
1,5 cm 0,6 0,8 m 1
1 cm 10 cm 1m 10 m
Distance
(1) White 90%. (2) Grey 18%. (3) Black 6%.
1 White object
3 Black object
In diffuse mode, teaching of the position of the object to be detected, located between 0 and 1.3 m,

XUZ C50
Gain
50
3
0.05…35 m max. 5 cm 11 m 15 m
XUZ C24 20 1
10
3 cm 5m 6m 5
XUZ C100 2
With reflector EG = 2
5 cm 25 m 35 m
10 cm 50 1 m 5 10 15 20 40 m
Sn = 11 m
Thru-beam mode
Gain
10 000
0 40 60 m
0…60 m max. 1000
100
10
EG = 2
5 cm 10 50 1m 5 10 100 m
Sn = 40 m

1/120
Curves 1
Osiris® Optimum
XUX pAppp

Diffuse sensor XUX 5Apppppp
(1)
Gain 1
a 200
1
0…3 m max. b 100
50 2
18 cm 55 cm 2,1 m 3m
(2) 3
a 10
b (4)
5
0 1 m 1,3 m
EG = 2
(3)
a 1
3 cm 5 10 50 1m 3 5m
b (4) Sn = 2,1 m
0 0,6 m 0,8 m
1 White object
(1) White 90%. (2) Grey 18%. (3) Black 6%. 2 Grey object
(4) No detection. 3 Black object
Polarised reflex sensor XUX 9Apppppp
XUZ C50 Gain

a 30
20
b
0.05…30 m max. 5 cm
1,2 3,7 4,8 11 m 15 m 10
3
XUZ C24 1
a 5
2
b
With reflector 3 cm 4,4 5,7 m
EG = 2
1,1 1,9 2,5 m
XUZ C100 1
a 50 cm 1 m 5m 15 20 30 m
Sn = 11 m
b
5 cm 1 With reflector XUZ C50
65 cm 7,5 m 10 m 20 m 26 m 2 With reflector XUZ C24
Reflex sensor XUX 1Apppppp
XUZ C50 Gain
50
a
b
0.05…35 m max. 5 cm
20
1,4 5,1 7 m 14 m 20 m 3
10
XUZ C24 1
a 5
b 2
3 cm EG = 2
With reflector
0,45 2,1 3 m 5,2 7,1 m
XUZ C100
a 0,2 0,5 1 m 5 7 10 20 40 m
Sn = 15 m
b
5 cm 1 With reflector XUZ C50
60 cm 9 12 m 25 m 35 m 2 With reflector XUZ C24
Thru-beam sensor XUX 2Apppppp
Gain
a 10 000
0…60 m max. b
0 3,6 5,5 m 40 m 60 m 1000
100
50

5
EG = 2
1
70 cm 1 m 5 10 40 60 100 m

1/121
Curves 1
Osiris® Universal
XUM 0 Osiconcept®

1

a cm
15
0…0.10 m max. 15 cm
0 cm 10 cm
b 10
0 cm 5 cm 6 cm
Without accessory 5
Background
0
0 4 5 7 10 cm

recommended distance. 10 cm enables detection of an object at 1 to 7 cm.
Diffuse mode
Gain
(1) 100
0…0.55 m max. 0 1
10 40 50 55 cm 50
(2)
0 18 25 cm
2
10
(3)
0 10 15 cm 5
Without accessory 3
EG = 2
(1) White 90%. (2) Grey 18%. (3) Black 6%.

1
Object teaching zone 1 cm 5 10 50 100 cm
Sn = 40 cm Distance
1 White object
2 Grey object
3 Black object
Nominal sensing distance. EG u 2.

1/122
Curves (continued) 1
Osiris® Universal
XUM 0 Osiconcept®
Sensing distance and excess gain (continued)

XUZ C50 Gain
50
1
0.02…6.5 m max.
2 cm 3m 4m
XUZ C24 3
10
1 cm 1,4 m 1,6 m 2
5
XUZ C100
With reflector
EG = 2
2 cm 4,8 m 6,5 m 1
1
1 cm 5 0,1 m 0,5 1 m 5 m 10 m
Sn = 3 m Distance

Thru-beam mode
Gain
1000
0…14 m 10 14 m
500
0
max.
100
50
10
5
EG = 2
1
1m 5 Sn = 10 m 20 m
Distance

1/123
Curves 1
Osiris® Optimum
XUM pAppp

Diffuse short range sensor with adjustable sensitivity XUM 6Appp
1 (1) Gain
a 10
0.02…0.15 m max. b (4)
0 10 15 cm
(2) 5
a
1
b (4)
1 cm 8 12 cm 2
Without accessory
(3) EG = 2 3
a
b (4)
2 cm 9 cm
1
1 cm 5 30 cm
Sn = 10 cm Distance
(1) White 90%. 1 White object

(2) Grey 18%. 2 Grey object
(3) Black 6%.
3 Black object
(4) No detection.
Diffuse long range sensor with adjustable sensitivity XUM 5Appp
(1) Gain
a 10
0.005…0.6 m max. b (4)
0,5 cm 40 60 cm
1
(2) 5
a 2
b (4) 3
0,5 cm 30 45 cm
Without accessory (3) EG = 2
a
b (4)
1 cm 20 30 cm
1
1 cm 5 10 cm 50 100 cm
Sn = 40 cm Distance
(1) White 90%. 1 White object

(2) Grey 18%. 2 Grey object
(3) Black 6%.
3 Black object
(4) No detection.


1/124
Curves (continued) 1
Osiris® Optimum
XUM pAppp
Sensing distance and excess gain (continued)

Polarised reflex sensor XUM 9Appp
XUZ C50 Gain

1
10
0.02…4 m max.
2 cm 2m 3m
5
3
XUZ C24
2 cm 1,3 1,6 m
EG = 2
With reflector
XUZ C100
2 1
2 cm 3m 4m 1
0,1 m 0,5 1 m 5 10 m
Sn = 2 m Distance

Reflex sensor XUM 1Appp
XUZ C50 Gain

100
0.003…8.5 m
max. 5 mm 4m 6m
3
50
XUZ C24 2
10
3 mm 2,1 2,5 m
1
With reflector 5
XUZ C100
EG = 2
5 mm 7m 8,5 m
1
0,1 m 0,5 1m 5 10 m
Sn = 4 m Distance

Thru-beam sensor XUM 2Appp
Gain
1000
0…12 m 500
0 8m 12 m
max.
100
50
10
5
EG = 2
1
1m 5 10 m 20 m
Sn = 8 m Distance

1/125
Curves 1
Osiris® Universal
XUK 0 Osiconcept®

1 cm

38
a
0…28 cm max. 30
0 cm 28 38 cm
b 20
0 cm 8 cm 10 cm
10
0
Without accessory 0 8 10 20 22 28 cm
Background
recommended distance. 30 cm enables detection of an object at 0 to 22 cm.
Diffuse mode
Gain
(1) 20
0…1.2 m max.
10
0 0,8 1m 1,2 m
5
(2) 3
2
0 0,4 0,55 m 1
1
0,5
(3) 0,3 2
0,2
3
1,5 cm 0,3 m 0,1
Without accessory 1 cm 5 10 50 100 200 cm
Distance
(1) White 90%. (2) Grey 18%. (3) Black 6%. 1 White object
2 Grey object
Object teaching zone
3 Black object
In diffuse mode, teaching of the position of the object to be detected, located between 0 and 0.3 m,
XUZ C50 Gain
50
0.02…11 m max.
2 cm 4m 5,7 m 20
XUZ C24 10
2 3
5
0,5 cm 2 m
1,7
XUZ C100 EG = 2
With reflector 1 1
2 cm 9m 11 m 10 cm 30 50 0,1 m 5 1m 2 5 10 20 m
Sn = 4 m

Thru-beam mode
Gain
1000
500
0…45 m 0 30 m 45 m
max. 100
50
10
5
EG = 2
1
1 5 10 m 50 100 m
Sn = 30 m

1/126
Curves 1
Osiris® Optimum
XUK pAppp

Diffuse sensor XUK 5Appp
(1)
Gain
5
1
0…1.5 m max. a
4
b (4) 1
0 1m 1,5 m 3
(2) 2
a
EG = 2 3
b (4)
0 0,5 m 0,8 m
(3)
a 1
Without accessory
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,5 2m
b (4) Sn = 1 m
0 0,3 m 0,5 m
1 White object
(1) White 90%. (2) Grey 18%. (3) Black 6%. 2 Grey object
(4) No detection. 3 Black object
Polarised reflex sensor XUK 9Appp
Gain
XUZ C50
0.10…13 m max. 20
c
d 10
10 cm 4 5 6 7,5 m
XUZ C24 5
c
1 2 3
d EG = 2
5 cm 1,4 2 3m
1
With reflector XUZ C100 10 cm 20 30 50 1m 10 20 m
c Sn = 5 m
d
1 With reflector C50
5 cm 8m 10 m 13 m 2 With reflector C24
Reflex sensor XUK 1Appp
Gain
XUZ C50
a 100
0.05…25 m max. 50
b
5 cm 7 m 9 11 m 15 m
XUZ C24 10
c
5
d
1 2 3
3 cm 3 4 5,5 m EG = 2
With reflector
XUZ C100 1
10 cm 20 50 1 m 5 10 m 20 50 m
c Sn = 4 m
d
5 cm 15 m 20 m 25 m 2 With reflector C24
19 m
Thru-beam sensor XUK 2Appp
Gain
1000
c
0…45 m
max. d
100
0 20 m 30 m 45 m
50
10
5
EG = 2
1
10 cm 50 1 m 5 10 m 50 100 m
Sn = 30 m

a: Potentiometer set at maximum. c: XUK pAPpppp or XUK pANpppp, DC solid-state output version.
b: Potentiometer set at minimum. d: XUK pARpppp, AC/DC relay output version.
1/127
Substitution table Photo-electric sensors 1 1
Sensors with closest

functionalities 0
Old sensor New Osiris sensor Old sensor New Osiris sensor Old sensor New Osiris sensor
1 Diameter 18 mm sensors
XU1B18NP340 XUB0ANSNL2+XUZC50 (1)
XU2B18NP340D XUB0ANSNM12
+XUB0AKSNM12T
XU2N18PP340WD XUB2BPAWM12R
+XUB2BKAWM12T (4)
XU2B18PP340 XUB0APSNL2 XUB2BPBWM12R
XU1B18NP340D XUB0ANSNM12+XUZC50 (1) +XUB0AKSNL2T +XUB2BKAWM12T (5)
XU1B18PP340 XUB0APSNL2+XUZC50 (1) XU2B18PP340D XUB0APSNM12 XU2N18PP340WL5 XUB2BPAWL5R
+XUB0AKSNM12T +XUB2BKSWL5T (4)
XU1B18PP340D XUB0APSNM12+XUZC50 (1)
XU2M18NP340 XUB0BNSNL2 XUB2BPBWL5R
XU1N18NP340 XUB1BNANL2+XUZC50 (2)
+XUB0BKSNL2T (6) +XUB2BKSWL5T (5)
XUB1BNBNL2+XUZC50 (3)
XU2M18NP340D XUB0BNSNM12 XU2P18NP340 XUB2ANANL2R
XU1N18NP340D XUB1BNANM12+XUZC50 (2) +XUB0BKSNM12T (6) +XUB2AKSNL2T (2)
XUB1BNBNM12+XUZC50 (3) XU2M18NP340WD XUB2BNAWM12R XUB2ANBNL2R

+XUB2BKSWM12T (2) (6) +XUB2AKSNL2T (3)
XU1N18NP340L5 XUB1BNANL5+XUZC50 (2)
XUB2BNBWM12R XU2P18NP340D XUB2ANANM12R
XUB1BNBNL5+XUZC50 (3) +XUB2BKSWM12T (3) (6) +XUB2AKSNM12T (2)
XU1N18NP340W XUB1BNAWL2+XUZC50 (2) XU2M18PP340 XUB0BPSNL2 XUB2ANBNM12R
+XUB0BKSNL2T (6) +XUB2AKSNM12T (3)
XUB1BNBWL2+XUZC50 (3)
XU2M18PP340D XUB0BPSNM12 XU2P18NP340W XUB2ANAWL2R
XU1N18NP340WD XUB1BNAWM12+XUZC50 (2)
+XUB0BKSNM12T (6) +XUB2AKSWL2T (2)
XUB1BNBWM12+XUZC50 (3)
XU2M18PP340L10 XUB0BPSNM12 XUB2ANBWL2R
XU1N18PP340 XUB1BPANL2+XUZC50 (4) +XUB0BKSNM12T +XUB2AKSWL2T (3)
+XZCP1141L10 (6) (7)
XUB1BPBNL2+XUZC50 (5) XU2P18NP340WD XUB2ANAWM12R
XU2M18PP340L5 XUB0BPSNL5 +XUB2AKSWM12T (2)
XU1N18PP340D XUB1BPANM12+XUZC50 (4) +XUB0BKSNL5T (6)
XUB2ANBWM12R
XUB1BPBNM12+XUZC50 (5) XU2M18PP340W XUB2BPAWL2R +XUB2AKSWM12T (3)
+XUB2BKSWL2T (4) (6)
XU1N18PP340L5 XUB1BPANL5+XUZC50 (4) XU2P18PP340 XUB2APANL2R
XUB2BPBWL2R +XUB2AKSNL2T (4)
XUB1BPBNL5+XUZC50 (5)
+XUB2BKSWL2T (5) (6)
XUB2APBNL2R
XU1N18PP340W XUB1BPAWL2+XUZC50 (4)
XU2M18PP340WD XUB2BPAWM12R +XUB2AKSNL2T (5)
XUB1BPBWL2+XUZC50 (5) +XUB2BKSWM12T (4) (6)
XU2P18PP340D XUB2APANM12R
XU1N18PP340WD XUB1BPAWM12+XUZC50 (4) XUB2BPBWM12R +XUB2AKSNM12T (4)
+XUB2BKSWM12T (5) (6)
XUB1BPBWM12+XUZC50 (5) XUB2APBNM12R
XU2M18PP340WL5 XUB2BPAWL5R +XUB2AKSNM12T (5)
XU1N18PP340WL5 XUB1BPAWL5+XUZC50 (4) +XUB2BKSWL5T (4) (6)
XU2P18PP340L10 XUB0APSNM12
XUB1BPBWL5+XUZC50 (5) XUB2BPBWL5R +XUB0AKSNM12T
+XUB2BKSWL5T (5) (6) +XZCP1141L10 (6) (7)
XU1P18NP340 XUB1ANANL2+XUZC50 (2)
XU2N18NP340 XUB2BNANL2R XU2P18PP340L5 XUB2APANL5R
XUB1ANBNL2+XUZC50 (3)
+XUB2BKSNL2T (2) +XUB2AKSNL5T (4)
XU1P18NP340D XUB1ANANM12+XUZC50 (2)
XUB2BNBNL2R XUB2APBNL5R
XUB1ANBNM12+XUZC50 (3) +XUB2BKSNL2T (3) +XUB2AKSNL5T (5)
XU1P18NP340L5 XUB1ANANL5+XUZC50 (2) XU2N18NP340D XUB2BNANM12R XU2P18PP340W XUB2APAWL2R

+XUB2BKSNM12T (2) +XUB2AKSWL2T (4)
XUB1ANBNL5+XUZC50 (3)
XUB2BNBNM12R XUB2APBWL2R
XU1P18NP340W XUB1ANAWL2+XUZC50 (2) +XUB2BKSNM12T (3) +XUB2AKSWL2T (5)
XUB1ANBWL2+XUZC50 (3) XU2N18NP340WD XUB2BNAWM12R XU2P18PP340WD XUB2APAWM12R
+XUB2BKSWM12T (2) +XUB2AKSWM12T (4)
XU1P18NP340WD XUB1ANAWM12+XUZC50 (2)
XUB2BNBWM12R XUB2APBWM12R
XUB1ANBWM12+XUZC50 (3)
+XUB2BKSWM12T (3) +XUB2AKSWM12T (5)
XU1P18PP340 XUB1APANL2+XUZC50 (4)
XU2N18PP340 XUB2BPANL2R XU5B18NP340 XUB0ANSNL2 (8)
XUB1APBNL2+XUZC50 (5) +XUB2BKSNL2T (4)
XU5B18NP340D XUB0ANSNM12 (8)
XU1P18PP340D XUB1APANM12+XUZC50 (4) XUB2BPBNL2R
+XUB2BKSNL2T (5) XU5B18PP340 XUB0APSNL2 (8)
XUB1APBNM12+XUZC50 (5)
XU2N18PP340D XUB2BPANM12R XU5B18PP340D XUB0APSNM12 (8)
XU1P18PP340L5 XUB1APANL5+XUZC50 (4) +XUB2BKSNM12T (4) XU5B18PP340L5 XUB0APSNL5 (8)
XUB1APBNL5+XUZC50 (5) XUB2BPBNM12R XU5M18NP340 XUB0BNSNL2 (8)
+XUB2BKSNM12T (5)
XU1P18PP340W XUB1APAWL2+XUZC50 (4)
XU5M18NP340D XUB0BNSNM12 (8)
XU2N18PP340L5 XUB2BPANL5R
XUB1APBWL2+XUZC50 (5)
+XUB2BKSNL5T (4) XU5M18NP340L5 XUB0BNSNL5 (8)
XU1P18PP340WD XUB1APAWM12+XUZC50 (4)
XUB2BPBNL5R XU5M18NP340W XUB5BNAWL2 (2)
XUB1APBWM12+XUZC50 (5) +XUB2BKSNL5T (5)
XUB5BNBWL2 (3)
XU1P18PP340WL5 XUB1APAWL5+XUZC50 (4) XU2N18PP340W XUB2BPAWL2R
+XUB2BKSWL2T (4) XU5M18NP340WL5 XUB5BNAWL5 (2)
XUB1APBWL5+XUZC50 (5)
XUB2BPBWL2R XUB5BNBWL5 (3)
XU2B18NP340 XUB0ANSNL2 +XUB2BKSWL2T (5) XU5M18PP340 XUB0BPSNL2 (8)
+XUB0AKSNL2T
XU5M18PP340D XUB0BPSNM12 (8)
Note: XUZC50 is a 50 x 50 mm reflector, XUZA5p and XUZX2000 are metal fixing brackets and XUZX2001 is an M16 to 1/2" NPT adaptor (see pages 1/110 and 1/111).
(1) Sn = 2 m instead of 4 m. (6) M18 threaded length = 44 mm instead of 50/55 mm. (8) Sn = 0.3 m instead of 0.4 m. For a sensing distance Sn
(2) Sensor output NO, NPN connection. (7) For a cable length = 10 m, the use of an M12 connector greater than 0.3 m, see references XUB5pppppp on page
(3) Sensor output NC, NPN connection. version sensor combined with an XZCP1141L10 jumper cable 1/26.
(4) Sensor output NO, PNP connection. (M12 with 10 m cable) is recommended.
(5) Sensor output NC, PNP connection.
1/128

functionalities 0
Diameter 18 mm sensors (continued)

XU5M18PP340L5 XUB0BPSNL5 (8)
XU5P18PP340W XUB4APAWL2 (4)
XUB4APBWL2 (5)
XU9P18NP340
XU9P18NP340D
XUB0ANSNL2+XUZC50 (6)
XUB0ANSNM12+XUZC50 (6)
1
XU5M18PP340W XUB5BPAWL2 (4) XU5P18PP340WD XUB4APAWM12 (4) XU9P18NP340L5 XUB0ANSNL5+XUZC50 (6)
XUB5BPBWL2 (5) XUB4APBWM12 (5) XU9P18NP340W XUB0ANSWL2+XUZC50 (6)
XU5M18PP340WD XUB5BPAWM12 (4) XU5P18PP340WL5 XUB4APAWL5 (4) XU9P18NP340WD XUB0ANSWM12+XUZC50 (6)
XUB5BPBWM12 (5) XUB4APBWL5 (5) XU9P18PP340 XUB0APSNL2+XUZC50 (6)
XU5M18PP340WL5 XUB5BPAWL5 (4) XU8B18NP340 XUB0ANSNL2 XU9P18PP340D XUB0APSNM12+XUZC50 (6)
XUB5BPBWL5 (5) XU8B18NP340D XUB0ANSNM12 XU9P18PP340W XUB0APSWL2+XUZC50 (6)
XU5N18NP340 XUB4BNANL2 (2) XU8B18PP340 XUB0APSNL2 XU9P18PP340WD XUB0APSWM12+XUZC50 (6)
XUB4BNBNL2 (3) XU8B18PP340D XUB0APSNM12 XU9P18PP340WL5 XUB0APSWL5+XUZC50 (6)
XU5N18NP340D XUB4BNANM12 (2) XU8B18PP340L10 XUB0APSNM12

+XZCP1141L10 (7)
XUB4BNBNM12 (3) Amplifiers for fibre optics
XU8M18NP340 XUB0BNSNL2 (6)
XU5N18NP340L5 XUB4BNANL5 (2) XUDH003537 XUDA1PSML2
XU8M18NP340D XUB0BNSNM12 (6)
XUB4BNBNL5 (3) XUDH003537S XUDA1PSMM8
XU8M18NP340L5 XUB0BNSNL5 (6)
XU5N18NP340W XUB4BNAWL2 (2) XUDH003937 XUDA2PSML2
XU8M18NP340W XUB0BNSWL2 (6)
XUB4BNBWL2 (3) XUDH003937S XUDA2PSMM8
XU8M18NP340WD XUB0BNSWM12 (6)
XU5N18NP340WD XUB4BNAWM12 (2) XUDJ003537 XUDA1NSML2
XU8M18PP340 XUB0BPSNL2 (6)
XUB4BNBWM12 (3) XUDJ003537S XUDA1NSMM8
XU8M18PP340D XUB0BPSNM12 (6)
XU5N18NP340WL5 XUB4BNANL5 (2) XUDJ003937 XUDA2NSML2
XU8M18PP340L5 XUB0BPSNL5 (6)
XUB4BNBNL5 (3) XUDJ003937S XUDA2NSMM8
XU8M18PP340W XUB0BPSWL2 (6)
XU5N18PP340 XUB4BPANL2 (4)
XU8M18PP340WD XUB0BPSWM12 (6)
XUB4BPBNL2 (5) Compact design sensors type XUE
XU9B18NP340 XUB0ANSNL2+XUZC50
XU5N18PP340D XUB4BPANM12 (4) XUEF010315 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000 (10)
XU9B18NP340D XUB0ANSNM12+XUZC50
XUB4BPBNM12 (5) XUEF010315H7 XUX0ARCTT16
XU9B18PP340 XUB0APSNL2+XUZC50 +XUZX2000+XUZX2001
XU5N18PP340L5 XUB4BPANL5 (4)
XU9B18PP340D XUB0APSNM12+XUZC50 XUEF080319 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
XUB4BPBNL5 (5)
XU9B18PP340L5 XUB0APSNL5+XUZC50 +XUZC50 (10)
XU5N18PP340W XUB4BPAWL2 (4)
XU9M18NP340 XUB0BNSNL2+XUZC50 (6) XUEF080319H4 XUX0ARCTT16 +XUZX2000
XUB4BPBWL2 (5) +XUZX2001+XUZC50
XU9M18NP340D XUB0BNSNM12+XUZC50 (6)
XU5N18PP340WD XUB4BPAWM12 (4) XUEF10031 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
XU9M18NP340L5 XUB0BNSNL5+XUZC50 (6) +XUZC50 (10) (11)
XUB4BPBWM12 (5)
XU9M18NP340W XUB9BNAWL2+XUZC50 (2) (9) XUEF10031H7 XUX0ARCTT16 +XUZX2000
XU5N18PP340WL5 XUB4BPANL5 (4) +XUZX2001+XUZC50 (11)
XUB9BNBWL2+XUZC50 (3) (9)
XUB4BPBNL5 (5) XUEF300314 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000 (10)
XU9M18PP340 XUB0BPSNL2+XUZC50 (6) (12)
XU5P18NP340 XUB4ANANL2 (2)
XU9M18PP340D XUB0BPSNM12+XUZC50 (6) XUEF300314H7 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
XUB4ANBNL2 (3)
XU9M18PP340L5 XUB0BPSNL5+XUZC50 (6) +XUZX2001 (12)
XU5P18NP340D XUB4ANANM12 (2)
XU9M18PP340W XUB9BPAWL2+XUZC50 (4) (9) XUEH017535 XUX0AKSAT16+XUZX2000 (10)
XUB4ANBNM12 (3) (13)
XUB9BPBWL2+XUZC50 (5) (9)
XU5P18NP340L5 XUB4ANANL5 (2) XUEH017535H7 XUX0AKSAT16+XUZX2000
XU9M18PP340WD XUB9BPAWM12+XUZC50 (4) (9) +XUZX2001 (13)
XUB4ANBNL5 (3)
XUB9BPBWM12+XUZC50 (5) (9) XUEH10753 XUX0AKSAT16+XUZX2000 (10)
XU5P18NP340W XUB4ANAWL2 (2) (13)
XU9M18PP340WL5 XUB9BPAWL5+XUZC50 (4) (9)
XUB4ANBWL2 (3) XUEH10753H7 XUX0AKSAT16+XUZX2000
XUB9BPBWL5+XUZC50 (5) (9) +XUZX2001 (13)
XU5P18NP340WD XUB4ANAWM12 (2)
XU9N18NP340 XUB0BNSNL2+XUZC50 (6) XUEH3000 XUX0ARCTT16T+XUZX2000
XUB4ANBWM12 (3)
XU9N18NP340D XUB0BNSNM12+XUZC50 (6) (10) (12)
XU5P18PP340 XUB4APANL2 (2)
XU9N18NP340L5 XUB0BNSNL5+XUZC50 (6) XUEH3000H7 XUX0ARCTT16T+XUZX2000
XUB4APBNL2 (3) +XUZX2001 (12)
XU9N18NP340W XUB0BNSWL2+XUZC50 (6)
XU5P18PP340D XUB4APANM12 (2) XUEH307534 XUX0AKSAT16+XUZX2000
XU9N18NP340WD XUB0BNSWM12+XUZC50 (6) (10) (12) (13)
XUB4APBNM12 (3)
XU9N18PP340 XUB0BPSNL2+XUZC50 (6) XUEH307534H7 XUX0AKSAT16+XUZX2000
XU5P18PP340L10 XUB4APANM12 +XUZX2001 (12) (13)
+XZCP1141L10 (4) (7) XU9N18PP340D XUB0BPSNM12+XUZC50 (6)
XUEH753538 XUX0AKSAT16+XUZX2000
XUB4APBNM12 XU9N18PP340L5 XUB0BPSNL5+XUZC50 (6) (10) (13) (14)
+XZCP1141L10 (5) (7)
XU9N18PP340W XUB0BPSWL2+XUZC50 (6) XUEH753538H4 XUX0AKSAT16+XUZX2000
XU5P18PP340L5 XUB4APANL5 (4) +XUZX2001 (13) (14)
XU9N18PP340WD XUB0BPSWM12+XUZC50 (6)
XUB4APBNL5 (5) XUET010315 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000 (10)
XU9N18PP340WL5 XUB0BPSWL5+XUZC50 (6)
(15)
(2) Sensor output NO, PNP connection. cable (M12 with 10 m cable) is recommended. (12) Sn = 40 m instead of 50 m.
(3) Sensor output NC, NPN connection. (8) Sn = 0.3 m instead of 0.4 m. For a sensing distance Sn greater (13) Output current switching capacity = 100 mA instead of
(4) Sensor output NO, PNP connection. than 0.3 m, see references XUB5pppppp on page 1/26. 200 mA
(5) Sensor output NC, PNP connection. (9) M18 threaded length = 28 mm instead of 55 mm. (14) Sn = 1.30 m instead of 2 m.
(6) M18 threaded length = 44 mm instead of 50/55 mm. (10) Sensor with M16 threaded cable entry instead of Pg 13.5. (15) Time delay relay output 0.02...15 s instead of
(7) For a cable length = 10 m, the use of an M12 connector (11) Sn = 11 m instead of 15 m. 0.03…60 s.
version sensor combined with an XZCP1141L10 jumper
1/129

functionalities 0
1 Compact design sensors type XUE (continued)

XUET010315H7 XUX0ARCTT16 +XUZX2000
XUJLM0619H7 XUX9ARCNT16+XUZX2000
+XUZX2001 +XUZC50
XUJM700318D1
XUJM700318D2
XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
+XUZX2001 (15) XUJLM0619P9 XUX9ARCNT16+XUZX2000
+XUZC50 (17) XUJM700318H7 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
XUET080319 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000 +XUZX2001
+XUZC50 (10) (15) XUJLM0811 XUX1ARCNT16+XUZX2000
+XUZC50 (16) XUJM700318P9 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000 (17)
XUJLM0811H7 XUX1ARCNT16+XUZX2000 XUJT06031 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
+XUZX2001+XUZC50 (15)
+XUZX2001 +XUZC50 +XUZC50 (16)
XUET10031 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
XUJLM0811P9 XUX1ARCNT16+XUZX2000 XUJT060319 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
+XUZC50 (10) (11) (15)
+XUZC50 (17) +XUZC50 (16)
XUJLM1503 XUX0ARCTT16T+XUZX2000 XUJT060319D1 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
+XUZX2001+XUZC50 (11) (15)
(16) +XUZC50
XUET300314 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000 (10)
XUJLM1503H7 XUX0ARCTT16T+XUZX2000 XUJT060319D2 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
(12) (15)
+XUZX2001 +XUZC50
XUET300314H7 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
XUJLM1503P9 XUX0ARCTT16T + XUZX2000 XUJT060319H7 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
+XUZX2001 (12) (15)
(17) +XUZC50+XUZX2001
XUJLM1514 XUX2ARCNT16R+XUZX2000 XUJT060319P9 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000

Compact design sensors type XUJ +XUZC50 (17)
(16)
XUJK06353 XUX0AKSAT16+XUZX2000 XUJT06031D1 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
+XUZC50 (13) (16) XUJLM1514H7 XUX2ARCNT16R+XUZX2000
+XUZX2001 +XUZC50
XUJK063539 XUX0AKSAT16+XUZX2000 XUJT06031D2 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
+XUZC50 (13) (16) XUJLM1514P9 XUX2ARCNT16R+XUZX2000
(17) +XUZC50
XUJK063539D1 XUX0AKSAM12+XUZX2000 XUJT06031H7 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
+XUZC50(13) XUJM06031 XUX1ARCNT16+XUZX2000
+XUZC50 (16) +XUZC50+XUZX2001
XUJK063539D2 XUX0AKSAM12+XUZX2000 XUJT06031P9 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
+XUZC50 (13) XUJM060319 XUX9ARCNT16+XUZX2000
+XUZC50 (16) +XUZC50 (17)
XUJK063539H7 XUX0AKSAT16+XUZX2000 XUJT100314 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000 (16)
+XUZC50 +XUZX2001 (13) XUJM060319D1 XUX9ARCNT16+XUZX2000
+XUZC50 XUJT100314D1 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
XUJK063539P9 XUX0AKSAT16+XUZX2000
+XUZC50 (13) (17) XUJM060319D2 XUX9ARCNT16+XUZX2000 XUJT100314D2 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
+XUZC50
XUJK06353D1 XUX0AKSAM12+XUZX2000 XUJT100314H7 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
+XUZC50 (13) XUJM060319H7 XUX9ARCNT16+XUZX2000 +XUZX2001
+XUZX2001+XUZC50
XUJK06353D2 XUX0AKSAM12+XUZX2000 XUJT100314P9 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000 (17)
+XUZC50 (13) XUJM060319P9 XUX9ARCNT16+XUZX2000
+XUZC50 (17) XUJT120318 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000 (16)
XUJK06353H7 XUX0AKSAT16+XUZX2000
+XUZC50 +XUZX2001 (13) XUJM06031D1 XUX1ARCNT16+XUZX2000 XUJT120318D1 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
+XUZC50
XUJK06353P9 XUX0AKSAT16+XUZX2000 XUJT120318D2 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
+XUZC50 (13) (17) XUJM06031D2 XUX1ARCNT16+XUZX2000
+XUZC50 XUJT120318H7 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
XUJK103534 XUX0AKSAT16+XUZX2000 +XUZX2001
(13) (16) XUJM06031H7 XUX1ARCNT16+XUZX2000
+XUZX2001 + XUZC50 XUJT120318P9 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000 (17)
XUJK103534D1 XUX0AKSAM12+XUZX2000 (13) XUJT700318 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000 (16)
XUJM06031P9 XUX1ARCNT16+XUZX2000
XUJK103534D2 XUX0AKSAM12+XUZX2000 (13) +XUZC50 (17) XUJT700318D1 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
XUJK103534H7 XUX0AKSAT16+XUZX2000 XUJM1000 XUX0AKSAT16T+XUZX2000 (16) XUJT700318D2 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
+XUZX2001 (13)
XUJM1000D1 XUX0AKSAM12T+XUZX2000 XUJT700318H7 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
XUJK103534P9 XUX0AKSAT16+XUZX2000 +XUZX2001
(13) (17) XUJM1000D2 XUX0AKSAM12T+XUZX2000
XUJM1000H7 XUX0AKSAT16T+XUZX2000 XUJT700318P9 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000 (17)
XUJK123538 XUX0AKSAT16+XUZX2000
(13) (16) +XUZX2001
XUJM1000P9 XUX0AKSAT16T+XUZX2000 (17) Compact design sensors type XUK
XUJK123538D1 XUX0AKSAM12+XUZX2000 (13)
XUJM100314 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000 (16) XUK1ARCTL10 XUK1ARCNL10+XUZA51
+XUZC50
XUJK123538H7 XUX0AKSAT16+XUZX2000 XUJM100314D1 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000
XUK1ARCTL2 XUK1ARCNL2+XUZA51
+XUZX2001 (13) XUJM100314D2 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000 +XUZC50
XUJK123538P9 XUX0AKSAT16+XUZX2000 XUJM100314H7 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000 XUK2AKSAL10 XUK2APANL10R
(13) (17) +XUZX2001 +XUK0AKSNL10T
XUJK703538 XUX0AKSAT16+XUZX2000 +2 x XUZA51 (4)
XUJM100314P9 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000 (17)
(13) (16)
XUK2APBNL10R
XUJM120318 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000 (16)
XUJK703538D1 XUX0AKSAM12+XUZX2000 (13) +XUK0AKSNL10T
XUJM120318D1 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000 +2 x XUZA51 (5)
XUJM120318D2 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000 XUK2ANANL10R
XUJK703538H7 XUX0AKSAT16+XUZX2000 +XUK0AKSNL10T
+XUZX2001 (13) XUJM120318H7 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000 +2 x XUZA51 (2)
+XUZX2001
XUJK703538P9 XUX0AKSAT16+XUZX2000 XUK2ANBNL10R
(13) (17) XUJM120318P9 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000 (17) +XUK0AKSNL10T
+2 x XUZA51 (3)
XUJLM0619 XUX9ARCNT16+XUZX2000 XUJM700318 XUX0ARCTT16+XUZX2000 (16)
+XUZC50 (16)
(2) Sensor output NO, PNP connection. (11) Sn = 11 m instead of 15 m. (15) Time delay relay output 0.02...15 s instead of
(3) Sensor output NC, NPN connection. (12) Sn = 40 m instead of 50 m. 0.03...60 s.
(4) Sensor output NO, PNP connection. (13) Output current switching capacity = 100 mA instead of (16) Sensor with M16 threaded cable entry instead of Pg 11.
(5) Sensor output NC, PNP connection. 200 mA. (17) Sensor with M16 threaded cable entry instead of Pg 9.
(10) Sensor with M16 threaded cable entry instead of Pg 13.5.
1/130

functionalities 0
Compact design sensors type XUK (continued)

XUK2AKSAL2 XUK2APANL2R
XUK9AKSAM12 XUK9APANM12+XUZA51
+XUZC50 (4)
XUMLH0451L10 XUM1APANL10+XUZA50 (4)
XUM1APBNL10+XUZA50 (5)
1
+XUK0AKSNL2T XUK9APBNM12+XUZA51
+XUZC50 (5) XUMLH0451S XUM1APANM8+XUZA50 (4)
+2 x XUZA51 (4)
XUK9ANANM12+XUZA51 XUM1APBNM8+XUZA50 (5)
XUK2APBNL2R
+XUK0AKSNL2T +XUZC50 (2) XUMLH0451T10 XUM1APANL2+XUZA50 (4)
+2 x XUZA51 (5)
XUK9ANBNM12+XUZA51 XUM1APBNL2+XUZA50 (5)
XUK2ANANL2R +XUZC50 (3)
+XUK0AKSNL2T XUMLH0803 XUM2AKSNL2T+XUZA50
XUK9ARCTL10 XUK9ARCNL10+XUZA51
+2 x XUZA51 (2)
+XUZC50 XUMLH0803S XUM2AKSNM8T+XUZA50
XUK2ANBNL2R
XUK9ARCTL2 XUK9ARCNL2+XUZA51 XUMLH0854 XUM2APANL2R+XUZA50 (4)
+XUK0AKSNL2T
+XUZC50
+2 x XUZA51 (3) XUM2APBNL2R+XUZA50 (5)
XUK2AKSAM12 XUK2APANM12R XUMLH0854S XUM2APANM8R+XUZA50 (4)
+XUK0AKSNM12T Compact design sensors type XUL
+2 x XUZA51 (4) XUM2APBNM8R+XUZA50 (5)
XULH153538 XUK0AKSAL2+XUZA51 (13)
XUK2APBNM12R XUMLH1055 XUM6APANL2+XUZA50 (4)
XULH153538D XUK0AKSAM12+XUZA51 (13)
+XUK0AKSNM12T
+2 x XUZA51 (5) XULH153538H7 XUK0AKSAM12+XUZA51 (13)
XUMLH1055S XUM6APANM8+XUZA50 (4)
XUK2ANANM12R XULH153538L05 XUK0AKSAL5+XUZA51 (13)
+XUK0AKSNM12T XUM6APBNM8+XUZA50 (5)
+2 x XUZA51 (2) XULH153538L10 XUK0AKSAL10+XUZA51 (13)
XUMLH4055 XUM5APANL2+XUZA50 (4)
XUK2ANBNM12R XULH303538 XUK0AKSAL2+XUZA51 (13)
+XUK0AKSNM12T XUM5APBNL2+XUZA50 (5)
XULH303538D XUK0AKSAM12+XUZA51 (13)
+2 x XUZA51 (3)
XULH303538DH7 XUK0AKSAM12+XUZA51 (13)
XUK2ARCTL10 XUK0ARCTL10
XUM5APBNM8+XUZA50 (5)
+XUK0ARCTL10T XULH303538L05 XUK0AKSAL5+XUZA51 (13)
+2 x XUZA51 XUMLH4055T10 XUM5APANL2+XUZA50 (4)
XULH303538L10 XUK0AKSAL10+XUZA51(13)
XUK2ARCTL2 XUK0ARCTL2 XUM5APBNL2+XUZA50 (5)
+XUK0ARCTL2T XULJ153538 XUK0AKSAL2+XUZA51 (13)
+2 x XUZA51 XUMLJ0259 XUM9ANANL2+XUZA50 (2)
XULJ153538D XUK0AKSAM12+XUZA51 (13)
XUK5AKSAL10 XUK5APANL10+XUZA51 (4) XUM9ANBNL2+XUZA50 (3)
XULJ153538H7 XUK0AKSAM12+XUZA51 (13)
XUK5APBNL10+XUZA51 (5) XUMLJ0259S XUM9ANANM8+XUZA50 (2)
XULJ153538L05 XUK0AKSAL5+XUZA51 (13)
XUK5ANANL10+XUZA51 (2) XUM9ANBNM8+XUZA50 (3)
XULJ303538 XUK0AKSAL2+XUZA51 (13)
XUK5ANBNL10+XUZA51 (3) XUMLJ0451 XUM1ANANL2+XUZA50 (2)
XULJ303538D XUK0AKSAM12+XUZA51 (13)
XUK5AKSAL2 XUK5APANL2+XUZA51 (4) XUM1ANBNL2+XUZA50 (3)
XULJ303538L05 XUK0AKSAL5+XUZA51 (13)
XUK5APBNL2+XUZA51 (5) XUMLJ0451S XUM1ANANM8+XUZA50 (2)
XUK5ANANL2+XUZA51 (2) Compact design sensors type XUM XUM1ANBNM8+XUZA50 (3)
XUK5ANBNL2+XUZA51 (3) XUMH023539 XUM0APSAL2+XUZA50 XUMLJ0854 XUM2ANANL2R+XUZA50 (2)
XUK5AKSAM12 XUK5APANM12+XUZA51 (4) XUMH023539L10 XUM0APSAL10+XUZA50 XUM2ANBNL2R+XUZA50 (3)
XUK5APBNM12+XUZA51 (5) XUMH03353 XUM0APSAL2+XUZA50 XUMLJ0854S XUM2ANANM8R+XUZA50 (2)
XUK5ANANM12+XUZA51 (2) XUMH03353L10 XUM0APSAL10+XUZA50 XUM2ANBNM8R+XUZA50 (3)
XUK5ANBNM12+XUZA51 (3) XUMH07301 XUM0AKSAL2T+XUZA50 XUMLJ1055 XUM6ANANL2+XUZA50 (2)
XUK5ARCTL10 XUK5ARCNL10+XUZA51 XUMH07301L10 XUM0AKSAL10T+XUZA50 XUM6ANBNL2+XUZA50 (3)
XUK5ARCTL2 XUK5ARCNL2+XUZA51 XUMH073534 XUM0APSAL2+XUZA50 XUMLJ1055S XUM6ANANM8+XUZA50 (2)
XUK9AKSAL10 XUK9APANL10+XUZA51 XUMH073534L10 XUM0APSAL10+XUZA50 XUM6ANBNM8+XUZA50 (3)

+XUZC50 (4)
XUMH103535 XUM0APSAL2+XUZA50 XUMLJ4055 XUM5ANANL2+XUZA50 (2)
XUK9APBNL10+XUZA51
XUMH703535 XUM0APSAL2+XUZA50 (20) XUM5ANBNL2+XUZA50 (3)
+XUZC50 (5)
XUMJ023539 XUM0ANSAL2+XUZA50 XUMLJ4055S XUM5ANANM8+XUZA50 (2)
XUK9ANANL10+XUZA51
+XUZC50 (2) XUMJ03353 XUM0ANSAL2+XUZA50 XUM5ANBNM8+XUZA50 (3)
XUK9ANBNL10+XUZA51 XUMJ073534 XUM0ANSAL2+XUZA50
+XUZC50 (3)
XUMJ103535 XUM0ANSAL2+XUZA50
XUK9AKSAL2 XUK9APANL2+XUZA51
+XUZC50 (4) XUMJ703535 XUM0ANSAL2+XUZA50 (20)
XUK9APBNL2+XUZA51 XUMLH0259 XUM9APANL2+XUZA50 (4)

+XUZC50 (5)
XUK9ANANL2+XUZA51
+XUZC50 (2)
XUM9APBNM8+XUZA50 (5)
XUK9ANBNL2+XUZA51
+XUZC50 (3) XUMLH0451 XUM1APANL2+XUZA50 (4)
(2) Sensor output NO, PNP connection. (4) Sensor output NO, PNP connection. (13) Output current switching capacity = 100 mA instead of
(3) Sensor output NC, NPN connection. (5) Sensor output NC, PNP connection. 200 mA.
(20) Sn = 0.4 m instead of 0.7 m.
1/131
Contents 0
2 - Inductive proximity sensors
Selection guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 2/2
b General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/10
b Osiconcept®: Offering Simplicity through Innovation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/20
Osiprox® Universal, Osiconcept®

b Cylindrical
2 v Flush mountable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/22

v Non flush mountable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/26
v Flat, flush mountable and non flush mountable,
forms E, C and D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/30
Osiprox® Optimum
b Flat, flush mountable, forms J and F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/32
b Flat, flush mountable, forms E, C and D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/34
b Cylindrical, flush mountable, increased range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/36
b Cylindrical, flush mountable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/38
Osiprox® Technology
b Plastic, cylindrical, non flush mountable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/42
b Basic
v Plastic, cylindrical, non flush mountable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/44
v Metal, cylindrical, flush and non flush mountable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/46
b Miniature, cylindrical, flush and non flush mountable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/50
b Multivoltage with short-circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/52
b With 2 complementary outputs
v Solid-state outputs NO + NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/54

v Solid-state outputs PNP + NPN, NO/NC programmable . . . . . . . . . . page 2/56
Osiprox® Application
b Osiconcept® application for detection of passage of objects for machine tools
conveyor system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/58
b For rotation monitoring and detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/60
b For rotation monitoring and detection with teach mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/62
b With analogue output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/64
b Fixed sensing distance detection for ferrous and non ferrous materials . . page 2/72
b Selective detection of ferrous materials and non ferrous materials . . . . page 2/76
b For assembly, packaging and light handling
v Plastic case, 12 x 26 x 40 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/78

v Plastic case, form C, plug-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/82
v Plastic case, form C, cubic 40, multi-position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/86
v Flat sensor, increased range, 300 mA switching capacity,
form D, DIN rail mounting, solid-state output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/88
b For welding machine applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/90
2/0
Osiprox® Application (continued)
b Food and beverage processing series
v Cylindrical, stainless steel, non flush mountable

- Three-wire, d.c. supply, solid-state output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/94
- Two-wire, d.c. supply, solid-state output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/96
v Cylindrical, plastic, non flush mountable
- Three-wire, d.c. supply, solid-state output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/98
- Two-wire, a.c. or d.c. supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/100 2
Osiprox® Universal, Optimum and Application
b Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/102
b Detection curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/106
b Substitution table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/108
2/1
Selection guide 2
Proximity sensors 2
Inductive proximity sensors

Osiprox® Universal
Case Cylindrical
Ø8 Ø 12 Ø 18 Ø 30 Ø 12 Ø 18 Ø 30
Standard range Increased range
Flush mountability Flush mountable Non flush mountable
Dimensions (w x h x d) in mm M8 x 50 M12 x 50 M18 x 60 M30 x 60 M12 x 55 M18 x 60 M30 x 62.5
Case Nickel plated brass Nickel plated brass
Sensing distance Sn (mm) 2.5 4 8 15 7 12 22
Connection Pre-cabled p p p p p
Connector p p p p p
Remote connector – – – – –
Supply c 3-wire p p (1) p (1) p (1) p
z 2-wire – p (1) p (1) p (1) p
Type reference XS6 08B1 XS6 12 XS6 18 XS6 30 XS6 12B4 XS6 18B4 XS6 30B4
B1/B1M B1/B1M B1/B1M
Page(s) 2/22 2/22 and 2/24 2/26 and 2/28
2/2
Selection guide 2
Proximity sensors 2

Osiprox® Universal
Flat
Form E Form C Form D
Osiconcept Osiconcept Osiconcept
Flush mountable and non flush mountable
26 x 26 x 13 40 x 40 x 15 80 x 80 x 26
Plastic, PBT
15 25 60
XS8 E XS8 C XS8 D
2/30
2/3
Selection guide 2
Proximity sensors 2

Osiprox® Optimum
Case Flat
Form J Form F Form E Form C Form D
Flush mountability Flush mountable
Dimensions (w x h x d) in mm 8 x 22 x 8 15 x 32 x 8 26 x 26 x 13 40 x 40 x 15 80 x 80 x 26
Case Plastic, PBT Plastic, PBT
Sensing distance Sn (mm) 2.5 5 10 15 40
Connection Pre-cabled p p p p p
Connector – – p p p
Remote connector p p p p p
Supply c 3-wire p p p p p
c 2-wire p p p p p
Type reference XS7 J XS7 F XS7 E XS7 C XS7 D
Page 2/32 2/32 2/34 2/34
2/4
Selection guide 2
Proximity sensors 2

Osiprox® Optimum
Cylindrical
Increased range Standard range
Ø6 Ø8 Ø 12 Ø 18 Ø 30 Ø8 Ø 12 Ø 18 Ø 30
Flush mountable Flush mountable
M8 x 33 M8 x 33 M12 x 33 M18 x 36,5 M30 x 40.6 M8 x 33 M12 x 33 M18 x 36.5 M30 x 40.6
Nickel plated brass Nickel plated brass
2.5 2.5 4 10 20 1.5 2 5 10
p p p p p p p p p
p p p p p p p p p
– – – – – – – – –
p p p p p p p p p
– – – – – p p p p
XS1 XS1 XS1 XS1 XS1 XS5 08B1p XS5 12B1p XS5 18B1p XS5 30B1p
L06pp349p N08pp349p N12pp349p N18pp349p N30pp349p
2/36 2/38 and 2/40
2/5
Selection guide 2
Proximity sensors 2

Application series: sensors for specific tasks Plastic case sensors Basic sensors Miniature sensors
Developed in accordance with the needs expressed by Food and beverage Standard machines, clean Assembly machines for small
our customers, these sensors provide a complete processing, chemical industry, environment parts
solution for specific application functions: marine sector
rotation monitoring, selective detection, analogue
control, etc.
Form Cylindrical Threaded: M8, M12, M18, M30 Plain: Ø 6.5 Plain: Ø 4, Ø 6.5
Threaded: M8, M12, M18, M30 Threaded: M5
Block, dimensions (w x h x d) – – –
in mm
Case Plastic Nickel plated brass or plastic (1) Brass or stainless steel (1)
Sensing distance Flush mountable in metal sensors – 1.5...10 (1) 1...2.5 (1)
Sn (mm)
Non flush mountable in metal 2.5... 15 (1) 4...15 (1) 2.5
sensors
Degree of protection IP 67 or IP 68 IP 67 IP 67
Connection Pre-cabled p p p
Connector – p –
Remote connector p –
Supply c p p p
a p p –
z – – –
Type reference XS4 P XS1ppBLp XS1 L
XS2 ppBLp XS1 N
XS2 L
Page(s) 2/42 2/44 2/50
2/46
2/6
Selection guide 2
Proximity sensors 2

Multivoltage sensors with short-circuit Sensors with 2 complementary outputs

protection
Solid-state outputs Solid-state outputs
NO + NC PNP + NPN,
NO/NC programmable
Simple machines or installations not having a low voltage Assembly machines, conveyor systems, materials handling, robotics
DC supply
Threaded: M12, M18, M30 Plain: Ø 6.5 Threaded: M12, M18, M30
Threaded: M8, M12, M18, M30
– – –
Nickel plated brass Nickel plated brass or stainless steel or plastic (1) Nickel plated brass or plastic (1)
2...10 1.5...10 2...10
4...15 2.5...15 4...15
IP 67 or IP 68 (1)
p p p
p p p
– – –
p p p
– – p
p – –
XS1 M XS1ppppC410 XS1 MppKP340
XS2 M XS2ppppC410 XS2 MppKP340
XS4 PppKP340
2/52 2/54 2/56
2/7
Proximity sensors 2

Application series: sensors for specific tasks Osiprox Application

Osiconcept Sensors for rotation monitoring Sensors with analogue output
Application
Developed in accordance with the needs expressed by Detection of Detection of underspeed, shaft Position, displacement and
our customers, these sensors provide a complete passage of overload and slowing down of deformation control/monitoring
solution for specific application functions: objects for conveyor belts
rotation monitoring, selective detection, analogue machine tools,
control, etc. conveyor
systems
2
Form Cylindrical M12 (L = 54), Threaded: M30 – Threaded: M12, –

M18 (L = 67), M18, M30
M30 (L = 71)
Block, dimensions (w x h x d) – – 26 x 26 x 13 – 32 x 15 x 8
in mm 40 x 40 x 15 26 x 26 x 13
40 x 40 x 15
80 x 80 x 26
Case Nickel plated Metal, cylindrical PBT block Metal or plastic, PBT block
brass cylindrical
Sensing distance Flush mountable in metal sensors 5...18 (1) 10 10…15 (1) 0.2…10 (1) 5…40 (1)
(Sn) in mm
Non flush mountable in metal – 10 10…15 (1) 0.4…60 (1) 5…40 (1)
sensors
Degree of protection – IP 67 IP 67 IP 67 IP 67 or
IP 68 (1)
Supply c p p p p p
a – – – – p
z – p p – –
Connection Pre-cabled – p – p p
Connector – – p – p
Remote connector p – – – –
Type reference XS6 12B2 XSA V XS9 p11R XS1 MppAB1 XS9 ppppA
XS6 18 B2 XS4 PppAB1
XS6 30 B2
Page(s) 2/58 2/61 2/63 2/65 2/69, 2/71
2/8
Selection guide 2
Proximity sensors 2

Detection of metal objects: inductive sensors

Factor 1 (Fe/Nfe) sensors Selective Sensors for assembly applications Sensors for Sensors for food and beverage
sensors welding processing applications
Form G Form C Form cubic Forme D machine Cylindrical, Cylindrical,
40 increased applications stainless steel plastic
range
Detection of ferrous and non Selective Applications for assembly machines, Detection Detection of stainless steel and ferrous
ferrous materials without detection of conveyor and materials handling systems applications materials in food/beverage processing
variation of sensing distance ferrous on welding and pharmaceutical environments
materials machines
only or non
ferrous
materials
2
only
Threaded: Threaded: – – – – Threaded: Plain: Ø 18 Threaded: M12,

M18, M30 M18 M12, M18, Threaded: M12, M18, M30
M30. M18, M30
Ø12, Ø18
40 x 117 x 41 – 12 x 40 x 26 40 x 117 x 41 40 x 40 x 40 80 x 80 x 40 – – –
Metal, Metal, Plastic Metal, Stainless steel, Plastic, PPS

cylindrical, or cylindrical, cylindrical, grade 316 L
plastic, form form A threaded,
C, turret head Teflon coated
5, 10 or 15 (1) 5, 6 or 10 (1) 2 15 to 20 15 50 2, 3, 5,10 (1) – –
– – 4 20 to 40 20 42 4, 10 (1) 7...22 (1) 7...22 (1)
IP 67 or IP 68 IP 67 or IP 68 IP 67 IP 67 IP 67 (connector version)
(1) (1) IP 68 (pre-cabled version)
IP 69K conforming to DIN 40050
p p p p p p p p p
– – p p – – – – p (1)
– – p p p – – – –
p p p p p – – p p
p p p p p p p p p
p – p p p – – – –
XS1 M XS7 C40 XS1 M18PA XS7 G XS7 C XS7 T XS7 D XSp M XS2 ppSA XS2 ppAA
XS8 G XS8 C XS8 T XSL C
2/72 2/74 2/76 2/78 2/82 2/86 2/88 2/90 2/96 and 2/94 2/98 and 2/100
2/9
General 2
Inductive proximity sensors 2
Recommendations
The sensors detailed in this catalogue are designed for use in standard industrial applications
relating to presence detection.
These sensors do not incorporate the required redundant electrical circuit enabling their usage
in safety applications.
For safety applications, please refer to our “Safety solutions using Preventa” catalogue.
Standards and certifications Quality control
Parameters related to the environment
Our inductive proximity sensors are subject to special precautions in order to guarantee
2 ˚C
75
%
100
their reliability in the most arduous industrial environments.
b Qualification
Temperature
70 Relative humidity v The product characteristics stated in this catalogue are subject to a qualification procedure
carried out in our laboratories.
50 80
v In particular, the products are subjected to climatic cycle tests for 3000 hours whilst
powered-up to verify their ability to maintain their characteristics over time.
25 60 b Production
v The electrical characteristics and sensing distances at both ambient temperature and extreme
0 20 temperatures are 100% checked.
v Products are randomly selected during the course of production and subjected to monitoring
- 25 0 tests relating to all their qualified characteristics.
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 b Customer returns
- 25 + 70 °C cycle, 95% RH If, in spite of all these precautions, defective products are returned to us, they are subject to
systematic analysis and corrective actions are implemented to eliminate the risks of the fault
recurring.
Temperature °C Conformity to standards
Humidity as %
All Telemecanique brand inductive proximity sensors conform to and are tested in
accordance with the recommendations of standard IEC 60947-5-2.
Mechanical shock resistance
The sensors are tested in accordance with standard IEC 60068-2-27, 50 gn, duration 11 ms.
Vibration resistance
The sensors are tested in accordance with standard IEC 60068-2-6, amplitude ± 2 mm,
f = 10…55 Hz, 25 gn at 55 Hz.
Resistance to the environment
b Please refer to the characteristics pages for the various sensors.
b IP 67: protection against the effects of immersion.
Test conforming to IEC 60529: sensor immersed for 30 minutes in 1 m of water.
No deterioration in either operating or insulation characteristics is permitted.
b IP 68: protection against prolonged immersion.
Sensor immersed for 336 hours in 40 metres of water at 50 °C.
Telemecanique sensors with an IP 68 degree of protection are ideal for use in the most arduous
conditions, such as machine tools, automatic car washers.
b Electrostatic discharges a and z versions: level 4 immunity (15 kV).
IEC 61000-4-2
b Radiated electromagnetic fields c, a and z versions: level 2 (3 V/m) or level 3
(electromagnetic waves) (10 V/m) immunity. IEC 61000-4-3
b Fast transients c version: level 3 immunity (1 kV).
(motor start/stop interference) a and z versions: level 4 immunity (2 kV) except
Ø 8 mm model (level 2). IEC 61000-4-4
b Impulse voltage c, a and z versions: level 3 immunity (2.5 kV)
except Ø 8 mm and smaller models (level 1 kV).
IEC 60947-5-2
b Owing to the very wide range of chemicals encountered in industry, it is very difficult to give
general guidelines common to all sensors.
b To ensure lasting efficient operation, it is essential that any chemicals coming into contact with
the sensors will not affect their casing and, in doing so, prevent their reliable operation.
b Cylindrical and flat plastic case sensors offer excellent overall resistance to:
v chemical products such as salts, aliphatic and aromatic oils, petroleum, acids and diluted
bases. For alcohols, ketones and phenols, preliminary tests should be made relating to the
nature and concentration of the liquid.
v food and beverage industry products such as animal or vegetable based products (vegetable
oils, animal fat, fruit juice, dairy proteins, etc.).
In all cases, the materials selected (see product characteristics) provide satisfactory
compatibility in most industrial environments (for further information, please consult your
Regional Sales Office).
Insulation Class 2 devices i
Electrical insulation conforming to standards IEC 61140 and NF C 20-030 relating to means of
protection against electric shock.
2/10
General 2
Principle of inductive detection Operating principle

b An inductive proximity sensor is solely for the detection of metal objects.
1 Oscillator It basically comprises an oscillator whose windings constitute the sensing face.
2 Output driver An alternating magnetic field is generated in front of these windings.
3 Output stage
1 2 3
Composition of an inductive proximity sensor
b When a metal object is placed within the magnetic field generated by the sensor, the resulting
currents induced form an additional load and the oscillations cease. 2
This causes the output driver to operate and, depending on the sensor type, a normally open
(NO) or normally closed (NC) output signal is produced.
Detection of a metal object

Inductive proximity detection
b Inductive proximity sensors enable the detection, without physical contact, of metal objects.
b Their range of applications is very extensive and includes:
v monitoring the position of machine parts (cams, end stops, etc.),
v counting the presence of metal objects, etc.
Advantages of inductive detection

b No physical contact with the object to be detected, thus avoiding wear and enabling detection
of fragile objects, freshly painted objects, etc.
b High operating rates. Fast response.
b Excellent resistance to industrial environments (robust products, fully encapsulated in resin).
b Solid-state technology: no moving parts, therefore service life of sensor not related to number
of operating cycles.
Osiconcept
b Osiconcept sensors are suitable for all metal environments (flush mountable or non flush
mountable) since they ensure a maximum sensing distance, even if there is a metal background.
Precise detection of the position of the object can be obtained using the teach mode. For further
information, see pages 2/20 and 2/21.
LED indicator Output LED

NO output NC output All Telemecanique brand inductive proximity sensors incorporate an output state LED indicator.
Osiconcept sensors are fitted with a green LED that indicates “Power on” and also assists the
LED
user during setting-up (teach mode).
No object
present
Output
state
LED
Object
present Output
state
Mounting sensors on a metal support Sensors suitable for flush mounting in metal
3 Sn b No side clearance required.

b All models using the Osiconcept system are flush mountable in metal without reducing the
sensing distance and also enable the detection of an object against a metal background. For
further information, see pages 2/20 and 2/21.
Metal
Metal
Object to be detected
Sensors not suitable for flush mounting in metal

b Side clearance required.
3 Sn
Sensing distance greater than that for a standard flush mountable model.
b The Osiconcept system eliminates the side clearance requirement. For further information,
see pages 2/20 and 2/21.
2 Sn
Metal
Metal
2/11
General 2
Mounting sensors on a metal support Mounting using fixing clamp
b Standard flush mountable models: e = 0, h = 0

b Standard non flush mountable models:
v Ø 6.5 / 8 / 12 mm: e = 0, h = 0,
Non ferrous or v Ø 18 mm: if h = 0, e u 5; e = 0, h u 3,
plastic material Ø 30 mm: if h = 0, e u 8; e = 0, h u 4.
b Osiconcept models: e = 0, h = 0
h (mm)
2 e (mm)
Mounting distance between sensors Standard sensors

e If 2 standard sensors are mounted too close to each other they are likely to lock in the “detection
state” due to interference between their respective oscillating frequencies.
To avoid this condition, minimum mounting distances stated for the sensors should be adhered
to or, alternatively, sensors with staggered oscillating frequencies should be used.
e
Mounting side by side Mounting face to face

e u 2 Sn e u 10 Sn
Staggered frequency sensors
For applications where the minimum recommended mounting distances for standard sensors
cannot be achieved, it is possible to overcome this restraint by using staggered frequency
sensors. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
In this case, a staggered frequency sensor is mounted adjacent to or opposite each standard
sensor.
Tightening torque for cylindrical type Maximum tightening torque for the various sensor case
sensors materials
Brass Brass Stainless steel Plastic
Diameter Short case model Form A model Form A model All models
of sensor XS5 ppB1 XS6 ppB1 XS1 pp XS4 Ppp
(mm) XS6 ppB2 XS2 pp
XSA Vp
Ø5 1.6 N.m 1.6 N.m 2 N.m –
Ø8 5 N.m 5 N.m 9 N.m 1 N.m
Ø 12 6 N.m 15 N.m 30 N.m 2 N.m
Ø 18 15 N.m 35 N.m 50 N.m 5 N.m
Ø 30 40 N.m 50 N.m 100 N.m 20 N.m
2/12
General 2
Sensing distance Definitions

In order to ensure that customers can make reliable product comparisons and selection, the
Standard metal target
standard IEC 60947-5-2 defines various sensing distances, such as:
b Nominal sensing distance (Sn)
Output ON Output OFF The rated operating distance for which the sensor is designed. It does not take into account any
variations (manufacturing tolerances, temperature, voltage).
Su max. + H
Su max. b Real sensing distance (Sr)
The real sensing distance is measured at the rated voltage (Un) and the rated ambient
Sr max. + H
Sr max. temperature (Tn).
It must be between 90% and 110% of the nominal sensing distance (Sn): 0.9 Sn ≤ Sr ≤ 1.1 Sn.
Sn + H H = differential travel b Usable sensing distance (Su)
Sn
Sr min. + H
The usable sensing distance is measured at the limits of the permissible variations in the ambient
temperature (Ta) and the supply voltage (Ub). It must be between 90% and 110% of the real
2
Sr min.
sensing distance: 0.9 Sr ≤ Su ≤ 1.1 Sr.
Su min. + H b Assured sensing distance (Sa).
Su min.
Sa This is the operating zone of the sensor. The assured operating distance is between 0 and 81%
= of the nominal sensing distance (Sn): 0 ≤ Sa ≤ 0.9 x 0.9 x Sn
Assured
detection
Sensing face
;;
The standard IEC 60947-5-2 defines the standard metal target as a square mild steel (Fe 360)
plate, 1 mm thick.
The side dimension of the plate is either equal to the diameter of the circle engraved on the
sensing face of the sensor or 3 times the nominal sensing distance (Sn).
Assured
operating
distance Sn
0.81 Sn
Terminology Differential travel

The differential travel (H), or hysteresis, is the distance between the pick-up point, as the
PE PR standard metal target moves towards the sensor, and the drop-out point, as it moves away.
This hysteresis is essential for the stable operation of the sensor.
Frontal approach
Sensing
distance H
Repeat accuracy
PE = pick-up point, the target is detected
PR = drop-out point, the target is no longer detected The repeat accuracy (R) is the repeatability of the sensing distance between successive
operations. Readings are taken over a period of time whilst the sensor is subjected to voltage
and temperature variations: 8 hours, 10 to 30 °C, Un ± 5%.
It is expressed as a percentage of Sr.
Detection zone and precision adjustment zone

Sensing range: Sr b By using sensitivity adjustment in teach mode, Osiconcept proximity sensors enable the
position of an object to be detected as it approaches from the front or side.
Object detection The teach mode can be used when the object is located in the zone known as the “precision
zone adjustment zone”. When the object approaches from the front, the detection zone of the object
Example of stored
position ranges from the stored position down to zero.
Precision
adjustment zone
Operating zone
1 b The operating zone relates to the area in front of the sensing face in which the detection of a
2
metal object is certain.
The values stated in the characteristics relating to the various types of sensor are for steel
objects of a size equal to the sensing face of the sensor.
For objects of a different nature (smaller than the sensing face of the sensor, other metals, etc.),
1 Detection threshold curves it is necessary to apply a correction coefficient.
2 “Object detected” LED
2/13
General 2
Correction coefficients to apply to the Assured operating distance of a sensor

assured operating distance
In practice, most objects to be detected are generally made of steel and are of a size equal to,
or greater, than the sensing face of the sensor.
For the calculation of the assured operating distance for different operating conditions, one must
take into account the correction coefficients that influence it.
The curves indicated are purely representative of typical curves. They are only given as a guide
to the approximate usable sensing distance of a proximity sensor for a given application.
2 Influence of ambient temperature
1,1 Apply a correction coefficient Kθ, determined from the curve shown opposite.
0,9
Temperature °C
-25 0 20 50 70
Km Material of object to be detected
1
Apply a correction coefficient Km, determined from the diagram shown opposite.
0,5
The fixed sensing distance models for ferrous/non ferrous (Fe/NFe) materials enable the
detection of different objects at a fixed distance, irrespective of the type of material.
magn. type type A37 UZ33 AU4G Cu
316 304
Stainless steel Steel Brass Alu. Copper Iron Lead Bronze
Km 1 Special case of a very thin object made of a non ferrous material.

0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
Thickness
0,1 0,3 0,5 1,5
0,2 0,4 1 of object
(mm)
Typical curve for a copper object used with a Ø 18 mm
cylindrical sensor
Kd 1 Size of object to be detected

0,9
0,8 Apply a correction coefficient Kd, determined from the curve shown opposite.
0,7 When calculating the sensing distance for the selection of a sensor, make the assumption that
0,6
0,5 Kd = 1.
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
Sn 2 Sn 3 Sn 4 Sn
Typical curve for a steel object used with a Ø 18 mm
cylindrical sensor
Variation of supply voltage
In all cases, apply the correction coefficient Kt = 0.9.
Calculation examples Correction of the sensing distance of a sensor

Sensor with nominal sensing distance Sn = 15 mm.
Ambient temperature variation 0 to + 20 °C.
Object material and size: steel, 30 x 30 x 1 mm thick.
The assured operating distance Sa is determined using the formula:
Sa = Sn x Kq x Km x Kd x Kt = 15 x 0.98 x 1 x 0.95 x 0.9
i.e. Sa = 12.5 mm.
Selecting a sensor for a given application

Application characteristics:
- object material and size: iron (Km = 0.9), 30 x 30 mm,
- temperature: 0 to 20 °C (Kθ = 0.98),
- object detection distance: 3 mm ± 1.5 mm, i.e. Sa max. = 4.5 mm,
- assume Kd = 1.
Sa 4.5
A sensor must be selected for which Sn u Kq x Km x Kd x Kt = 0.98 x 0.9 x 1 x 0.9
i.e. Sn u 5.7 mm
2/14
General 2
Specific aspects of electronic sensors Terminology

Ir b Residual current (Ir)
MA v The residual current (Ir) corresponds to the current flowing through the sensor when in the
“open” state.
v Characteristic of 2-wire type proximity sensors.
XS
b Voltage drop (Ud)
Ud v The voltage drop (Ud) corresponds to the voltage drop at the sensor’s terminals when in the
V “closed” state (value measured at nominal current rating of sensor).
XS
b First-up delay
2
1 v The first-up delay corresponds to the time (t) between the connection of the power supply to
the sensor and its fully operational state.
2 1 Supply voltage U on
2 Sensor operational at state 1
3 3 Sensor at state 0
t
b Delays
Object to v Response time (Ra): the time delay between the object to be detected entering the sensor’s
be detected operating zone and the subsequent change of output state. This parameter limits the speed and
size of the object.
Sensor Ra Rr v Recovery time (Rr): the time delay between an object to be detected leaving the sensor’s
output
operating zone and the subsequent change of output state. This parameter limits the interval
between successive objects.
Power supply Sensors for a.c. circuits (a and z models)

Check that the voltage limits of the sensor are compatible with the nominal voltage of the a.c.
supply used.
Sensors for d.c. circuits

b d.c. source: check that the voltage limits of the sensor and the acceptable level of ripple are
compatible with the supply used.
b a.c. source (comprising transformer, rectifier, smoothing capacitor): the supply voltage must
be within the operating limits specified for the sensor.
Where the voltage is derived from a single-phase a.c. supply, the voltage must be rectified and
smoothed to ensure that:
- the peak voltage of the d.c. supply is lower than the maximum voltage rating of the sensor.
Peak voltage = nominal voltage x 2
- the minimum voltage of the supply is greater than the minimum voltage rating of the sensor,
given that:
∆V = (I x t) / C,
∆V = max. ripple: 10% (V),
As a general rule, use a transformer with a lower secondary voltage (Ue) than the required d.c.
voltage (U).
Example:
a 18 V to obtain c 24 V,
a 36 V to obtain c 48 V.
Outputs Output signal (contact logic)

b Normally open (NO)
Corresponds to a sensor whose output changes to the closed state when an object is present in
the operating zone.
b Normally closed (NC)

Corresponds to a sensor whose output changes to the open state when an object is present in the
operating zone.
b Complementary outputs (NO + NC)

Corresponds to a sensor with a normally closed output and a normally open output.
2/15
General 2
Outputs (continued) 2-wire type c, non polarised NO or NC output

BN
b Specific aspects
These sensors are wired in series with the load to be switched.
BU As a consequence, they are subject to:
v a residual current in the open state (current flowing through the sensor in the “open” state),
v a voltage drop in the closed state (voltage drop across the sensor’s terminals in the “closed”
BN state).
BU b Advantages
v Only 2 leads to be wired: these sensors can be wired in series in the same way as mechanical
limit switches,
2 BN
BU
v They can be connected to either positive (PNP) or negative (NPN) logic PLC inputs,
v No risk of incorrect connections.
v Check the possible effects of residual current and voltage drop on the actuator or input
connected,
v For sensors that do not have overload and short-circuit protection (a.c. or a.c./d.c. symbol), it
is essential to connect a 0.4 A “quick-blow” fuse in series with the load.
3-wire type c, NO or NC output, PNP or NPN

+ + b Specific aspects
BN BN v These sensors comprise 2 wires for the d.c. supply and a 3rd wire for the output signal,
PNP NPN
v PNP type: switching the positive side to the load,
BK v NPN type: switching the negative side to the load.
BK
BU – BU – b Advantages
v Protection against supply reverse polarity,
v Protection against overload and short-circuit,
v No residual current, low voltage drop.
4-wire type, complementary outputs

c, NO and NC outputs, PNP or NPN
+ + b Advantages
BN BN v Protection against supply reverse polarity (+/-).
BK (NO) v Protection against overload and short-circuit.
PNP NPN
WH (NC) BK (NO)
WH (NC)
BU – BU –
4-wire type, multifunction, programmable

c, NO or NC output, PNP or NPN
b Advantages
BN (NO), BU (NC) + BN (NO), BU (NC) + v Protection against supply reverse polarity (+/-).
WH v Protection against overload and short-circuit.
PNP NPN
BK WH
BK
– –
BU (NO), BN (NC) BU (NO), BN (NC)
Specific output signals, analogue type
+ + b These sensors convert the approach of a metal object towards the sensing face into an output
current variation which is proportional to the distance between the object and the sensing face.
b Two models available:
- 0...10 V (0...10 mA) output for 3-wire connection,
S I – S I - 4-20 mA output for 2-wire connection.
–
2-wire connection 3-wire connection
2/16
General 2
Features of the various models Types of case

b Cylindrical case
v Fast installation and setting-up.
v Pre-cabled and connector versions.
v Small size facilitates mounting in locations with restricted access.
v Interchangeability, provided by indexed fixing clamp: when assembled, becomes similar to
a block type sensor.
. b Flat case
v Reduced size (sensor volume divided by 8).
v Fast installation by mounting on clip-on brackets.
v Precision detection using Osiconcept teach mode.
XSp E
XS7 J
XS7 F
XSp C
XSp D
Electrical connection Connection methods

1 Pre-cabled: factory fitted moulded cable, good protection against splashing liquids (IP 68).
1 Example: machine tool.
2 Connector: easy installation and maintenance (IP 67).
3 Remote connector: easy installation and maintenance (IP 68 at sensor level and IP 67 at
remote connector level).
Wiring advice
b Length of cable
2
v No limitation up to 200 m or up to a line capacitance of < 100 nF (characteristics of sensor
remain unaffected).
v In this case, it is important to take into account the voltage drop on the line.
b Separation of control and power circuit wiring

v The sensors are immune to electrical interference encountered in normal industrial conditions.
v Where extreme conditions of electrical “noise” could occur (large motors, spot welders, etc.),
it is advisable to protect against transients in the normal way:
3 - suppress interference at source,
- smooth the supply,
- limit the length of cable.
b Connect the sensor with supply switched off.
2/17
General 2
Setting-up precautions Connection in series

2-wire type sensors
v Series wiring is only possible using sensors with wide voltage limits.
Based on the assumption that each sensor has the same residual current value, each sensor, in
the open state, will share the supply voltage, i.e.
U supply
U sensor = .
n sensors
U sensor and U supply must remain within the sensor’s voltage limits.
v If only one sensor in the circuit is in the open state, it will be supplied at a voltage almost equal
2 to the supply voltage.
v When in the closed state, a small voltage drop is present across each sensor. The resultant
loss of voltage at the load will be the sum of the individual voltage drops and therefore, the load
3-wire type sensors

b Correct operation of the sensors cannot be assured and, if this method is used, tests should
be made before installation.
The following points should be taken into account:
v Sensor 1 carries the load current in addition to the no-load current consumption values of the
other sensors connected in series. For certain models, this connection method is not possible
unless a current limiting resistor is used.
v When in the closed state, a small voltage drop is present across each sensor. The load should
therefore be selected accordingly.
v As sensor 1 closes, sensor 2 does not operate until a certain time (t) has elapsed
v The use of “flywheel” diodes is recommended when an inductive load is being switched.
Sensors and devices in series with an external mechanical contact

v When the contact closes, the sensor does not operate until a certain time (t) has elapsed
2-wire type sensors
b Should one of the sensors be in the closed state, the sensor in parallel will be “shorted-out”
and no longer supplied.
As the first sensor passes into the open state, the second sensor will become energised and will
be subject to its first-up delay.
b This configuration is only permissible where the sensors will be working alternately.
b This method of connection can lead to irreversible damage of the units.
3-wire type sensors

b No specific restrictions. The use of “flywheel” diodes is recommended when an inductive load
a.c. supply
b 2-wire type sensors cannot be connected directly to an a.c. supply.
v This would result in immediate destruction of the sensor and considerable danger to the user.
v An appropriate load (refer to the instruction sheet supplied with the sensor) must always be
connected in series with the sensor.

b On power-up, it is necessary to limit (by resistor) the charging current of the capacitive load C.
v The voltage drop in the sensor can also be taken into account by subtracting it from the supply
R voltage for the calculation of R.
U (supply)
C R=
I max. (sensor)

than the hot state resistance. This can cause very high current levels on switching. Fit a pre-heat
resistor in parallel with the sensor.
U2
P
2/18
General 2
Fast troubleshooting guide

The sensor’s output will not change state when a metal On an Osiconcept sensor: b After a RESET, follow the environment teach mode
object enters the detection zone setting-up or programming error. procedure. Refer to instruction sheet supplied with sensor.
Output stage faulty or complete b Check that the sensor is compatible with the supply
failure of the sensor or the being used.
short-circuit protection has tripped. b Check the load current characteristics:
v if load current I ≥ maximum switching capacity, an
auxiliary relay, of the CAD N type for example, should be
interposed between the sensor and the load,
v if I ≤ maximum switching capacity, check for wiring
2
faults (short-circuit).
b In all cases, a 0.4 A “quick-blow” fuse should be fitted
in series with the sensor.
Wiring error b Check that the wiring conforms to the wiring shown on
the sensor label or instruction sheet.
Supply fault b Check that the sensor is compatible with the supply (a
or c).
b Check that the supply voltage is within the voltage limits
of the sensor. Remember that with a rectified, smoothed
supply,
U peak = U nominal x 2 with a ripple voltage ≤ 10%.
False or erratic operation, with or without the presence of On an Osiconcept sensor: b After a RESET, follow the environment teach mode
a metal object in the detection zone setting-up or programming error. procedure. Refer to instruction sheet supplied with sensor.
Influence of background or metal b Refer to the instruction sheet supplied with the sensor.
environment For sensors with adjustable sensitivity, reduce the sensing
distance.
Operating distance poorly defined b Apply the correction coefficients.

for the object to be detected b Realign the system or run the teach mode again.
Influence of transient interference b Ensure that any d.c. supplies, when derived from
on the supply lines rectified a.c., are correctly smoothed (C > 400 µF).
b Separate a.c. power cables from low-level d.c. cables
(24 V low level).
b Where very long distances are involved, use suitable
cable: screened and twisted pairs of the correct
cross-sectional area.
Equipment prone to emitting b Position the sensors as far away as possible from any
electromagnetic interference sources of interference.
Response time of the sensor too b Check the suitability of the sensor for the position or
slow for the particular object being size of the object to be detected.
detected b If necessary, select a sensor with a higher switching
frequency.
Influence of high temperature b Eliminate sources of radiated heat or protect the sensor
casing with a heat shield.
b Realign, having adjusted the temperature around the
fixing support.
No detection following a period of service Vibration, shock b Realign the system.

b Replace the support or protect the sensor.
2/19
General 2
Osiprox®
Operating principle
In proposing the Osiconcept technology, Telemecanique brand offers simplicity

through innovation.
GR
b With Osiconcept, a single product meets all metal object detection needs.
By simply pressing the “Teach mode” pushbutton, the product automatically takes up
an optimum configuration for all detection, flush mountability and environment
Max. sensing distance requirements.
2 b Other advantages of Osiconcept:
vIncreased performance:
GR - sensing distance guaranteed and optimized irrespective of the mounting
configuration, the object, the environment or the background,
- suitable for all metal environments.
vSimplified use provided by:

Max. sensing distance - the Osiconcept technology associated with the availability of the flattest, most
compact sensors on the market ensuring that the sensor is fully built into the
machine, thereby limiting risks of mechanical damage,
- mechanical adjustments being eliminated through the use of the teach mode.
GR
v Lower costs due to:
- adjustment times and complex supports being eliminated,
- the elimination of flush mountable and non flush mountable versions which
halves the number of references,
- much easier and much quicker product selection.
Max. sensing
distance
Precision position detection
All Osiconcept inductive proximity sensors benefit from ultra precise adjustment
which is very quick irrespective of the metal environment.
b Precision side approach detection makes it possible to accurately define the

position at which the object will be detected as it passes the sensor.
Due to the Osiconcept technology, the desired detection position can be stored in
Sn Sn Sn memory by simply pressing the teach button.
Precision side approach detection
b Precision frontal approach detection makes it possible to accurately define the
position at which the object will be detected as it approaches the sensor.
Due to the Osiconcept technology, the desired detection position can be stored in
memory by simply pressing the teach button.
Sn Sn Sn
Precision frontal approach detection
Telemecanique brand proposes a complete, inexpensive range of mounting

accessories (clamps, plates, brackets, etc.) providing solutions to all setting-up
problems.
b Fixing kits enable quick installation or replacement of Osiconcept sensors.
b No adjustment is required. Simple clipping-in enables the sensor to be fixed in

position and ready for operation.
2/20
Presentation 2
Osiprox®
Block type
Dimensions (mm) 26 x 26 x 13 40 x 40 x 15 80 x 80 x 26
Sensing distance Flush mounted use 0...10 0...15 0...40
(mm) Non flush mounted 0...15 0...25 0...60
use
Sensor type XS8 E1A1 XS8 C1A1 XS8 D1A1
Page 2/30
XS8 E1A1
XS8 C1A1
2
XS8 D1A1
Cylindrical type
Dimensions (mm) 12 18 30
Sensing distance Flush mounted use 0...3.4 0...6 0...11
(mm) Non flush mounted 0...5 0...9 0...18
use
Sensor type XS6 12B2 XS6 18B2 XS6 30B2
Page 2/58
XS6 12B2
XS6 18B2
XS6 30B2
2/21
References 2
Osiprox® Universal
Cylindrical, flush mountable
Ø 8, threaded M8 x 1
801267

distance (Sn)
mm kg
2.5 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS6 08B1PAL2 0.035
M12 connector XS6 08B1PAM12 0.015
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS6 08B1NAL2 0.035
XS6 ppB1ppL2 M12 connector XS6 08B1NAM12 0.015
2 NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS6

M12 connector XS6
08B1PBL2
08B1PBM12
0.035
0.015
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS6 08B1NBL2 0.035
M12 connector XS6 08B1NBM12 0.015

distance (Sn)
mm kg
4 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS6 12B1PAL2 0.075
801268
M12 connector XS6 12B1NAM12 0.020
NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS6 12B1PBL2 0.075

M12 connector XS6 12B1PBM12 0.020
XS6 ppB1ppM12
distance (Sn)
mm kg

Ø 30, threaded M30 x 1.5

distance (Sn)
mm kg

Accessories (2)
kg
Fixing clamps Ø8 XSZ B108 0.006
825994
Ø 12 XSZ B112 0.006

Ø 18 XSZ B118 0.010
Ø 30 XSZ B130 0.020
XSZ Bppp Example: XS6 08B1PAL2 becomes XS6 08B1PAL5 with a 5 m long cable.
2/22
Characteristics, Inductive proximity sensors 2
schemes, Osiprox® Universal

setting-up, Three-wire, d.c. supply, solid-state output
dimensions 2
Characteristics
Sensor type XS6 ppB1ppM12 XS6 ppB1ppL2
Product certifications UL, CSA, e
Operating zone Ø8 mm 0…2
Ø 12 mm 0…3.2
Ø 18 mm 0…6.4
Ø 30 mm 0…12
Differential travel % 1…15 of real sensing distance (Sr)

2
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 67 IP 68 double insulation i (except Ø 8:
IP 67)
Materials Case Nickel plated brass except XS6 08: stainless steel grade 303
Pre-cabled – PvR 3 x 0.34 mm2 (except XS6 08:
3 x 0.11 mm 2)
Output state indication LED (yellow), 4 viewing ports at 90° LED (yellow), annular
Voltage drop, closed state V ≤2
Current consumption, no-load mA ≤ 10
Maximum switching XS6 08B1pppp, XS6 12B1pppp Hz 2500

frequency XS6 18B1pppp Hz 1000
XS6 30B1pppp Hz 500
Delays First-up ms ≤ 10
Response ms ≤ 0.2 for Ø8 and Ø12, ≤ 0.3 for Ø18, ≤ 0.6 for Ø30
Recovery ms ≤ 0.2 for Ø8 and Ø12, ≤ 0.7 for Ø18, ≤ 1.4 for Ø30
Wiring scheme
Connector Pre-cabled PNP NPN
M12
4 3 BU : Blue
BN/1 + BN/1 +
PNP BK/4 (NO) NPN
BN : Brown BK/2 (NC) BK/4 (NO)
BK : Black BK/2 (NC)
1 2 BU/3 – BU/3 –
Setting-up
Minimum mounting distances (mm)
e e
Side by side Face to face Facing a metal object

Ø8 e≥5 e ≥ 30 e≥8
Ø 12 e≥8 e ≥ 50 e ≥ 12
Ø 18 e ≥ 16 e ≥ 100 e ≥ 25
Ø 30 e ≥ 30 e ≥ 180 e ≥ 45
Dimensions
XS6
(1)
Pre-cabled (mm) Connector (mm)
XS6 a b a b
Ø8 50 42 61 40
b
Ø 12 50 42 61 42
a Ø 18 60 51 72.2 51
(1) LED Ø 30 60 51 72.2 51
2/23
References 2
Osiprox® Universal
Two-wire, a.c. or d.c. supply (1)

801277
Sensing distance Function Connection Reference Weight

(Sn)
mm kg
4 NO Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS6 12B1MAL2 0.075
(2)
Connector XS6 12B1MAU20 0.025
1/2" - 20UNF
XS6 ppB1MpL2 NC Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS6 12B1MBL2 0.075
(2)
2 Connector
1/2" - 20UNF
XS6 12B1MBU20 0.025
801278

(Sn)
mm kg
XS6 ppB1MpU20
(2)
1/2" - 20UNF
NC Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS6 18B1MBL2 0.120
(2)
Connector XS6 18B1MBU20 0.060
1/2" - 20UNF

(Sn)
mm kg
(2)
1/2" - 20UNF
(2)
Connector XS6 30B1MBU20 0.145
825994
1/2" - 20UNF
Accessories (3)
XSZ B1pp
kg
Fixing clamps Ø 12 XSZ B112 0.006
Ø 18 XSZ B118 0.010
Ø 30 XSZ B130 0.020
(1) Available in Ø8 plastic with double insulation, see page 2/42.
Example: XS6 12B1MAL2 becomes XS6 12B1MAL5 with a 5 m long cable.
2/24

setting-up, Two-wire, a.c. or d.c. supply
dimensions 2
Characteristics
Sensor type XS6 ppB1MpU20 XS6 ppB1MpL2
Connection Connector 1/2" - 20 UNF –
Operating zone Ø 12 mm 0…3.2
Ø 18 mm 0…6.4
Ø 30 mm 0…12
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 67 IP 68 double insulation i 2
Pre-cabled – PvR 2 x 0.34 mm2
Output state indication LED (yellow): 4 viewing ports at 90° LED (yellow): annular
Rated supply voltage V a or c 24…240 (a 50/60 Hz)
Voltage limits (including ripple) V a or c 20…264
Switching capacity XS6 12B1Mppp mA 5…200 (1)

XS6 18B1Mppp, XS6 30B1Mppp mA a 5…300 or c 5…200 (1)
Voltage drop, closed state V ≤ 5.5
Residual current, open state mA ≤ 0.8
Maximum switching XS6 12B2ppp,XS6 18B1Mppp Hz a 25 or c 1000
frequency XS6 30B1Mppp Hz a 25 or c 500
Delays First-up ms ≤ 20 for XS6 12B1Mppp, ≤ 25 for XS6 18B1Mppp and XS6 30B1Mppp
Response ms ≤ 0.5
Recovery ms ≤ 0.2 for XS6 12B1Mppp, ≤ 0.5 for XS6 18B1Mppp, ≤ 2 for XS6 30B1Mppp
(1) It is essential to connect a 0.4 A quick-blow fuse in series with the load
Wiring scheme
Connector Pre-cabled 2-wire a or c
1/2" - 20 UNF BU: Blue N/O or N/C output
1 BN: Brown
+/- : 2 BN/2
t :1
+/- : 3
2 3 BU/3
/1
See connection t: on connector models only
on page 9/45.
Setting-up
e e
e

Ø 12 e≥8 e ≥ 50 e ≥ 12
Ø 18 e ≥ 16 e ≥ 90 e ≥ 25
Ø 30 e ≥ 30 e ≥ 180 e ≥ 45
Dimensions
XS6
(1)
b
a
(1) LED
XS6 a b a b
Ø 12 50 42 61 42
Ø 18 60 51 72.2 51
Ø 30 60 51 72.2 51
2/25
References 2
Osiprox® Universal
Cylindrical, non flush mountable

DF532016
Sensing dist. Function Output Connection Reference Weight

(Sn) mm kg
7 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS6 12B4PAL2 0.075
(1)
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS6 12B4NAL2 0.075

XS6 ppB4ppL2 (1)
2
NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS6 12B4PBL2 0.075
(1)
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS6 12B4NBL2 0.075

(1)
DF534464

(Sn) mm kg
(1)
XS6 ppB4ppM12

(1)

(1)
DF52381

(1)

(Sn) mm kg
XS6 ppB4ppM12
(1)

(1)
825994

(1)
XSZ Bppp
(1)
Accessories (2)
kg
Ø 18 XSZ B118 0.010
Ø 30 XSZ B130 0.020
(1) For a 5 m long cable replace L2 by L5; for a 10 m long cable replace L2 by L10.
Example: XS6 12B4PAL2 becomes XS6 12B4PAL5 with a 5 m long cable.
2/26

dimensions 2
Characteristics
Sensor type XS6 ppB4ppM12 XS6 ppB4ppL2
Product certifications/approvals UL, CSA, e
Ø 18 mm 0…9.6
Ø 30 mm 0…17.6
Differential travel % 1...15 of real sensing distance (Sr)
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 67 IP 68, double insulation i 2
Cable – PvR, 3 x 0.34 mm2
Output state indication Yellow LED: 4 viewing ports at 90° Yellow LED: annular
Voltage drop, closed state V y2
Maximum switching XS6 12B4pppp Hz 2500

frequency XS6 18B4pppp Hz 1000
XS6 30B4pppp Hz 500
Delays First-up ms y 10
Response ms y 0.2 Ø12, y 0.3 Ø18, y 0.6 Ø30
Recovery ms y 0.2 Ø12, y 0.7 Ø18, y 1.4 Ø30
Wiring schemes
M12
4 3 BU: Blue
BN/1 + BN/1 +
PNP BK/4 (NO) NPN
BN: Brown BK/2 (NC) BK/4 (NO)
BK: Black BK/2 (NC)
1 2 BU/3 – BU/3 –
Setting-up
3 Sn
e e
e
Metal
Metal

Ø 12 e u 48 e u 84 e u 21
Ø 18 e u 72 e u 144 e u 36
Ø 30 e u 120 e u 264 e u 66
Dimensions
XS6
(1)
XS6 a b a b c
c Ø 12 55 41.5 65.5 41.5 5
b
Ø 18 60 43.5 71.5 43.5 8
a Ø 30 62.5 41 74 41 13
(1) LED
2/27
References 2
Osiprox® Universal
Two-wire, a.c. or d.c. supply
822109

(Sn) mm kg
(1)
1/2" - 20UNF XS6 18B4MAU20 0.060
XS6 ppB4MpL2 connector
(1)
1/2" - 20UNF XS6 18B4MBU20 0.060
2 connector

523381

(Sn) mm kg
(1)
1/2" - 20UNF XS6 30B4MAU20 0.145
connector
(1)
1/2" - 20UNF XS6 30B4MBU20 0.145
XS6 ppB4MpU20
connector
Accessories (2)
825994

kg
XSZ B1pp
Ø 30 XSZ B130 0.020
Example: XS6 18B4MAL2 becomes XS6 18B4MAL5 with a 5 m long cable.
2/28

dimensions 2
Characteristics
Sensor type XS6 ppB4MpU20 XS6 ppB4MpL2
Connection Connector 1/2" - 20UNF –

Ø 30 mm 0...17.6
Degree of protection
Storage temperature
Conforming to IEC 60529
°C
IP 67
- 40…+ 85
IP 68, double insulation i 2
Cable – PvR, 2 x 0.34 mm2
Switching capacity mA a 5…300 or c 5…200 (1)

Residual current, open state mA y 0.8
Maximum switching XS6 18B4Mppp Hz a 25 or c 1000
frequency XS6 30B4Mppp Hz a 25 or c 300
Delays First-up ms y 30 XS6 18B4Mppp and XS6 30B4Mppp
Response ms y 0.5
Recovery ms y 0.5 XS6 18B4Mppp, y 2 XS6 30B4Mppp
(1) It is essential to connect a 0.4 A “quick-blow” fuse in series with the load.
Wiring schemes
1/2" - 20UNF BU: Blue NO output
1 BN: Brown
AC/DC : 2 BN/2
t :1
AC/DC : 3
2 3 BU/3
/1
See connection on page 9/45 t: on connector models only
Setting-up
3 Sn
e e
e

Metal
Metal
Ø 18 e u 72 e u 144 e u 36
Ø 30 e u 120 e u 264 e u 66
Dimensions
XS6
(1)
c
b
a
(1) LED
XS6 a b a b c
Ø 18 60 43.5 71.5 43.5 8
Ø 30 62.5 41 74 41 13
2/29
References 2
Osiprox® Universal, Osiconcept® (1)

Flat, flush mountable and non flush mountable, forms E, C and D
Flat, form E, 26 x 26 x 13 mm (2)

DF564224
DF564225

(Sn) mm kg
Three-wire c with overload and short-circuit protection
15 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS8 E1A1PAL2 0.075
M8 connector XS8 E1A1PAM8 0.040
Remote M12 connector XS8 E1A1PAL01M12 0.040
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS8 E1A1NAL2 0.075
XS8 E1A1ppL2 M8 connector XS8 E1A1NAM8 0.040
2 Remote M12 connector XS8 E1A1NAL01M12 0.040
DF564226
NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS8 E1A1PBL2 0.075

M8 connector XS8 E1A1PBM8 0.040
XS8 p1A1 ppL01M12 Remote M12 connector XS8 E1A1PBL01M12 0.040
XS8 p1A1 ppL01U20 NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS8 E1A1NBL2 0.075
M8 connector XS8 E1A1NBM8 0.040
Remote M12 connector XS8 E1A1NBL01M12 0.040
XS8 E1A1 ppM8
Two-wire a or c unprotected (4)
15 NO – Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS8 E1A1MAL2 0.070
DF564227
DF564228
Remote 1/2" - 20 UNF connec. XS8 E1A1MAL01U20 0.040

NC – Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS8 E1A1MBL2 0.070
Remote 1/2" - 20 UNF connec. XS8 E1A1MBL01U20 0.040
Flat, form C, 40 x 40 x 15 mm (2)
(Sn) mm kg
25 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS8 C1A1PAL2 0.095
M8 connector XS8 C1A1PAM8 0.060
Remote M12 connector XS8 C1A1PAL01M12 0.060
XS8 C1A1ppM8 NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS8 C1A1NAL2 0.095
XS8 C1A1ppL2 M8 connector XS8 C1A1NAM8 0.060
Remote M12 connector XS8 C1A1NAL01M12 0.060
NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS8 C1A1PBL2 0.095
DF564229
M8 connector XS8 C1A1PBM8 0.060

Remote M12 connector XS8 C1A1PBL01M12 0.060
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS8 C1A1NBL2 0.095
DF564221
M8 connector XS8 C1A1NBM8 0.060

Remote M12 connector XS8 C1A1NBL01M12 0.060
25 NO – Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS8 C1A1MAL2 0.090
Remote 1/2" - 20 UNF connec. XS8 C1A1MAL01U20 0.060
NC – Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS8 C1A1MBL2 0.090
Remote 1/2" - 20 UNF connec. XS8 C1A1MBL01U20 0.060
Flat, form D, 80 x 80 x 26 mm (2)
(Sn) mm kg
XS8 D1A1ppM12 60 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS8 D1A1PAL2 (5) 0.390
M12 connector XS8 D1A1PAM12 (5) 0.340
XS8 D1A1ppL2
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS8 D1A1NAL2 (5) 0.390
M12 connector XS8 D1A1NAM12 (5) 0.340
PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS8 D1A1PBL2 (5)
DF564222
NC 0.390
M12 connector XS8 D1A1PBM12 (5) 0.340
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS8 D1A1NBL2 (5) 0.390
DF564221
M12 connector XS8 D1A1NBM12 (5) 0.340

60 NO – Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS8 D1A1MAL2 (5) 0.390
1/2" - 20 UNF connector XS8 D1A1MAU20 (5) 0.340
NC – Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS8 D1A1MBL2 (5) 0.390
1/2" - 20 UNF connector XS8 D1A1MBU20 (5) 0.340
(1) For further information on Osiconcept® , see page 2/20
(2) For accessories, see page 2/102.
(4) It is essential to connect a 0.4 A quick-blow fuse in series with the load.
(5) For clipping onto 35 mm omega rail or 80 x 80 x 40 mm format, add DIN to the end of the
reference. Example: XS8 D1A1PAL2 DIN.
XS8 D1A1ppM12DIN
XS8 D1A1ppL2DIN
2/30
schemes, Osiprox® Universal, Osiconcept® (1)

Flat, flush mountable and non flush mountable, forms E, C and D
dimensions 2
Characteristics
Sensor types XS8 EpppppM8, XS8 EpppppL01M12, XS8 EpppppL2,
XS8 CpppppM8, XS8 EpppppL01U20, XS8 CpppppL2,
XS8 DpppppM12, XS8 CpppppL01M12, XS8 DpppppL2
XS8 DpppppU20 XS8 CpppppL01U20
Connection Connector M8 except 0.15 m flying lead with remote connec. –
XS8 ppppppM12: M12 XS8 ppppppL01M12: M12,
XS8 ppppppU20: 1/2" 20UNF XS8 ppppppL01U20: 1/2" 20UNF
Pre-cabled – – Length: 2 m
Sensing distance and
adjustment zone
XS8 E Nominal sensing dist. Sn mm 0…15 non flush mounted configuration / 0…10 flush mounted configuration 2
Fine adjustment zone mm 5…15 non flush mounted configuration / 5…10 flush mounted configuration
XS8 C Nominal sensing dist. Sn mm 0…25 non flush mounted configuration / 0…15 flush mounted configuration
XS8 D Nominal sensing dist. Sn mm 0…60 non flush mounted configuration / 0…40 flush mounted configuration
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 67 double insulation i (except for M8 connector: IP 67) IP 68 i
Storage temperature range °C - 40….+ 85
Operating temperature range °C - 25….+ 70
Materials Case PBT
Pre-cabled – PvR 3 x 0.34 mm2 c and PvR 2 x 0.34 mm2 z
Indicator Output state Yellow LED
Supply on and teach mode Green LED
Rated 3-wire V 12…24 with protection against reverse polarity
supply voltage 2-wire V a or c 24…240 (a 50/60 Hz)
Voltage limits 3-wire V 10…36
(including ripple) 2-wire V a or c 20…264
Current consumption, no-load 3-wire mA y 10
Residual current, open state 2-wire mA y 1.5
Switching capacity 3-wire mA y 100 XS8 E, y 200 XS8 C and XS8 D, with overload and short-circuit protection
2-wire mA 5…200 z XS8 E, 5…300 a XS8 C and XS8 D, 5…200 c XS8 C and XS8 D.
Voltage drop, closed state 3-wire V y2
2-wire V y 5.5
Maximum switching frequency Hz 2000 XS8 E, 1000 XS8 C, 150 XS8 D
Delays First-up ms y 10 XS8 E, XS8 C and XS8 D (3-wire), y 10 XS8 E and XS8 C, y 15 XS8 D (2-wire)
Response ms y 0.3
Recovery ms y 0.8 XS8 E and XS8 C, y 6 XS8 D
Wiring scheme
Connector Pre-cabled PNP/M12 or M8 NPN/M12 or M8 2-wire 1/2" - 20 UNF
M8 M12 1/2" - 20 UNF BU: Blue
1 BN: Brown
BN/1 + BN/1 + BN/2
4 4 3 PNP BK/4 (NO) NPN
BK: Black BK/2 (NC) BK/4 (NO)
1 3 BK/2 (NC)
– – BU/3
1 2 2 3 See connection BU/3 BU/3
on page 9/45. For M8 connector, NO and NC output on terminal 4.
Setting-up Dimensions
Minimum mounting distances (mm) XS8 C/D/E XS8 C/D XS8 E
Side by side eu XS8 E XS8 C XS8 D C B
Flush 40 60 200 D E (1)
e mounted
Non flush 150 125 600
B
(1)
mounted
F(3)
B
Face to face eu XS8 E XS8 C XS8 D

E
Flush 80 120 400
B
e mounted
A
F(3)
Non flush 300 250 Not recom-
mounted mended
(1) LED
G
Facing a metal object eu XS8 E XS8 C XS8 D (2) Teach mode button
(2) H
10 15 40 (3) For CHC type screws
Sensor A (cable) A (connector) B C D E F G H
e XS8 E 14 11 26 13 8,8 20 3,5 6.8 6.6
XS8 C 14 11 40 15 9,8 33 4,5 8.3 13.6
XS8 D 23 18 80 26 16 65 5,5 8.5 37.8
XS8 DppDIN 23 18 80 40 30 65 5.1 22.5 37.8
(1) For further information on Osiconcept ® , see page 2/20
2/31
References 2
Osiprox® Optimum
Flat, flush mountable, forms J and F
Two-wire, d.c. supply
Flat, form J, 8 x 22 x 8 mm (1) (2)

501549_1
Three-wire c
distance (Sn)
mm kg
2.5 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS7 J1A1PAL2 0.060
0.15 m flying lead with XS7 J1A1PAL01M8 0.040
M8 connector
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS7 J1A1NAL2 0.060
2 XS7 J1A1ppL2 0.15 m flying lead with XS7 J1A1NAL01M 8

M8 connector
0.040
NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS7 J1A1PBL2 0.060

0.15 m flying lead with XS7 J1A1PBL01M8 0.040
M8 connector
521029
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS7 J1A1NBL2 0.060

0.15 m flying lead with XS7 J1A1NBL01M8 0.040
M8 connector
Two-wire c
distance (Sn)
mm kg
2.5 NO Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS7 J1A1DAL2 0.050
0.15 m flying lead with XS7 J1A1DAL01M8 0.035
M8 connector
NC Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS7 J1A1DBL2 0.050
0.15 m flying lead with XS7 J1A1DBL01M8 0.035
XS7 J1A1ppL01M8 M8 connector
Flat, form F, 15 x 32 x 8 mm (1)
Three-wire c
distance (Sn)
521029
mm kg
5 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS7 F1A1PAL2 0.065
0.15 m flying lead with XS7 F1A1PAL01M8 0.045
M8 connector
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS7 F1A1NAL2 0.065
0.15 m flying lead with XS7 F1A1NAL01M8 0.045
M8 connector
NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS7 F1A1PBL2 0.065
0.15 m flying lead with XS7 F1A1PBL01M8 0.045
M8 connector
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS7 F1A1NBL2 0.065
XS7 F1A1ppL2
0.15 m flying lead with XS7 F1A1NBL01M8 0.045
M8 connector
Two-wire c
521030
distance (Sn)
mm kg
5 NO Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS7 F1A1DAL2 0.055
0.15 m flying lead with XS7 F1A1DAL01M8 0.045
M8 connector
NC Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (3) XS7 F1A1DBL2 0.055
0.15 m flying lead with XS7 F1A1DBL01M8 0.045
M8 connector
(2) Sensors XS7 J include a basic fixing clamp with screw.
(3) For a 5 m long cable, replace L2 with L5, and for a 10 m long cable, replace L2 with L10. For
example XS7 J1A1PAL2 becomes XS7 J1A1PAL5 with a 5 m long cable.
XS7 F1A1ppL01M8
2/32
schemes, Osiprox® Optimum

Flat, flush mountable, forms J and F
setting-up, Two-wire, d.c. supply
dimensions 2
Characteristics
Sensor type XS7 JpppppL01M8 XS7 FpppppL01M8 XS7 JppppppL2, XS7 FppppppL2
Product certifications e UL, CSA, e
Connection Connector 0.15 m flying lead with M8 connector –
Operating zone XS7 J mm 0…2
XS7 F mm 0…4
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 67 (XS7 J), IP 68 (XS7 F)
Storage temperature range °C - 40….+ 85 2
Materials Case PBT
Pre-cabled PvR 3 x 0.11 mm2 or 2 x 0.11 mm2 (XS7 F : 2 or 3 x 0,34 mm2)
Output state indication Yellow LED
Switching capacity 3-wire mA 100 with overload and short-circuit protection
2-wire mA 1.5...100 with overload and short-circuit protection
2-wire V y4
Maximum switching frequency 3-wire kHz 2
2-wire kHz 4 for XS7 J, 5 for XS7 F
Delays First-up ms Three-wire: 5
ms Two-wire: 10 XS7 J, 5 XS7 F
Response ms Three-wire: 0.1
ms Two-wire: 0.5 XS7 J, 5 XS7 F
Recovery ms Three-wire: 0.1
ms Two-wire: 1 XS7 J, 5 XS7 F
Wiring scheme
Connector Pre-cabled PNP, NO or NC NPN, NO or NC 2-wire, NO
M8
BN/1 BN/1 +/-
4 BU: Blue BN/3
BN: Brown PNP BK/4 NPN
1 3 BK: Black BK/4 NO
BU/3 BU/3
BU/4 -/+
See connection
2-wire, N/C
on page 9/45.
BN/1
NC
BU/4
Setting-up
e e e

XS7 J e≥1 e≥6 e ≥ 7.5
XS7 F e≥1 e ≥ 12 e ≥ 15
Dimensions
XS7 F XS7 J
15
8 9 (1) 8
4 (1)
8
16
32
22
Ø3,5 (2)
Ø3,5
(1) LED
(2) For CHC type screws
2/33
References 2
Osiprox® Optimum
Flat, flush mountable, forms E, C and D
Sensing dis- Func- Output Connection Reference Weight

tance (Sn) mm tion kg
DF564230
DF564232
Flat, form E, 26 x 26 x 13 mm (1)

Three-wire c
10 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (4) XS7 E1A1PAL2 0.075
M8 connector XS7 E1A1PAM8 0.040
Remote M12 connector XS7 E1A1PAL01M12 0.040
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (4) XS7 E1A1NAL2 0.075
XS7 E1A1ppL2 M8 connector XS7 E1A1NAM8 0.075
2 Remote M12 connector XS7 E1A1NAL01M12 0.040
DF564231
NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (4) XS7 E1A1PBL2 0.075

M8 connector XS7 E1A1PBM8 0.040
XS7 p1A1pL0pM12 Remote M12 connector XS7 E1A1PBL01M12 0.040
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (4) XS7 E1A1NBL2 0.075
M8 connector XS7 E1A1NBM8 0.040
Remote M12 connector XS7 E1A1NBL01M12 0.040
XS7 E1A1ppM8
Two-wire c
10 NO Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (4) XS7 E1A1DAL2 0.070
DF564233
DF564234
M8 connector XS7 E1A1DAM8 0.040

Remote M12 connector XS7 E1A1DAL01M12 0.040
NO Remote M12 connector XS7 E1A1CAL01M12 0.040
terminals 1 and 4 (2) Remote M12 connector (3) XS7 E1A1CAL08M12 0.065
NC Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (4) XS7 E1A1DBL2 0.070
M8 connector XS7 E1A1DBM8 0.040
Remote M12 connector XS7 E1A1DBL01M12 0.040
Flat, form C, 40 x 40 x 15 mm (1)
Three-wire c
XS7 C1A1ppM8 15 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (4) XS7 C1A1PAL2 0.095
XS7 C1A1ppL2 M8 connector XS7 C1A1PAM8 0.060
Remote M12 connector XS7 C1A1PAL01M12 0.060
562089
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (4) XS7 C1A1NAL2 0.095

M8 connector XS7 C1A1NAM8 0.060
Remote M12 connector XS7 C1A1NAL01M12 0.060
DF564235
NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (4) XS7 C1A1PBL2 0.095

M8 connector XS7 C1A1PBM8 0.060
Remote M12 connector XS7 C1A1PBL01M12 0.060
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (4) XS7 C1A1NBL2 0.095
M8 connector XS7 C1A1NBM8 0.060
Remote M12 connector XS7 C1A1NBL01M12 0.060
Two-wire c
15 NO Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (4) XS7 C1A1DAL2 0.090
M8 connector XS7 C1A1DAM8 0.060
Remote M12 connector XS7 C1A1DAL01M12 0.060
NO Remote M12 connector XS7 C1A1CAL01M12 0.060
XS7 D1A1ppM12 terminals 1 and 4 (2) Remote M12 connector (3) XS7 C1A1CAL08M12 0.090
NC Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (4) XS7 C1A1DBL2 0.090
XS7 D1A1ppL2
M8 connector XS7 C1A1DBM8 0.060
DF564237
Remote M12 connector XS7 C1A1DBL01M12 0.060

Flat, form D, 80 x 80 x 26 mm (1)
Three-wire c
DF564236
40 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (4) XS7 D1A1PAL2 (5) 0,340

M12 connector XS7 D1A1PAM12 (5) 0,290
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (4) XS7 D1A1NAL2 (5) 0,340
M12 connector XS7 D1A1NAM12 (5) 0,290
NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (4) XS7 D1A1PBL2 (5) 0,340
M12 connector XS7 D1A1PBM12 (5) 0,290
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (4) XS7 D1A1NBL2 (5) 0,340
M12 connector XS7 D1A1NBM12 (5) 0,290
Two-wire c
40 NO Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (4) XS7 D1A1DAL2 (5) 0,340
M12 connector XS7 D1A1DAM12 (5) 0,290
XS7 D1A1ppM12DIN NO terminals 1 and 4 (2) M12 connector XS7 D1A1CAM12 (5) 0,290
NC Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (4) XS7 D1A1DBL2 (5) 0,340
XS7 D1A1ppL2DIN
M12 connector XS7 D1A1DBM12 (5) 0,290
(1) For accessories, see page 2/102. (4) For a 5 m long cable, replace L2 with L5, and for a 10 m long cable, replace L2 with L10. Example:
(2) The NO output is connected to terminals 1 and 4 of the M12 XS7 J1A1PAL2 becomes XS7 J1A1PAL5 with a 5 m long cable.
connector. (5) For clipping onto 35 mm omega rail or 80 x 80 x 40 mm format, add DIN to the end of the
(3) 0.8 m flying lead with remote connector. reference. Example: XS7 D1A1PAL2 becomes XS7 D1A1PAL2DIN.
2/34

Flat, flush mountable, forms E, C and D
dimensions 2
Characteristics
Sensor type XS7 EpppppM8, XS7 EpppppL01M12, XS7 EpppppL2,
XS7 CpppppM8, XS7 CpppppL01M12 XS7 CpppppL2,
XS7 DpppppM12 XS7 DpppppL2
Connection Connector M8 except 0.15 m flying lead with remote connec., –
M12 on XS7 DpppppM12 M12 for XS7 pppppL01M12
Pre-cabled – – Length: 2
Operating zone XS7 E mm 0…8
XS7 C
XS7 D
mm
mm
0…12
0…32
2
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 67 double insulation i (except for M8 connector: IP 67) IP 68 i
Storage temperature range °C - 40….+ 85
Materials Case PBT
Pre-cabled – PvR 3 x 0.34 mm2 or 2 x 0.34 mm 2
Rated supply voltage V 12…24 with protection against reverse polarity
Voltage limits (including ripple) V 10…36
Switching capacity 3-wire mA y 100 with overload and short-circuit protection
2-wire mA 1.5...100 with overload and short-circuit protection
2-wire V y4
Maximum switching frequency XS7 E, XS7 C kHz 1
XS7 D Hz 100
Delays First-up 3-wire ms 10 for XS7 E and XS7 C, 30 for XS7 D
2-wire ms 5 for XS7 E and XS7 D, 10 for XS7 D
Response 3-wire ms 2 for XS7 E and XS7 C, 5 for XS7 D
2-wire ms 0.3 for XS7 E and XS7 D, 10 for XS7 D
Recovery 3-wire ms 6 for XS7 E, 5 XS7 C, 35 for XS7 D
2-wire ms 0.7 for XS7 E and XS7 D, 10 for XS7 D
Wiring scheme
Connector Pre-cabled PNP/M12 or M8 2-wire, NO / M12 or M8 2-wire, NC / M12 or M8
M12 M8 BU: Blue
+/- BN/1
4 3 4
BN: Brown BN/1 + BN/3
BK: Black PNP BK/4 (NO)
1 3 BK/2 (NC) NO NC
BU/2 (M12)
BU/3 – BU/4 -/+ BU/4 (M8)
1 2
See connection on page 9/45 NPN/M12 or M8 2-wire, NO/M12 XS7 ppppCAppp
BN/1 + BN/1 +/-

NPN
BK/4 (NO)
BK/2 (NC) NO For M8 connector, NO and
BU/3 – BU/4 -/+ NC output on terminal 4.
Minimum mounting distances (mm) XS7 C/D/E XS7 C/D XS7 E
Side by side eu XS7 E XS7 C XS7 D C B (1)
4 5 40 D E
(1)
e
B
E F (2)
B
Face to face eu XS7 E XS7 C XS7 D
E
B
72 110 300 E
e
B
A
Facing a metal object eu XS7 E XS7 C XS7 D F (2) (1) LED

30 45 120 (2) For CHC type screws
Sensor A (cable) A (connector) B C D E F
e
XS7 E 14 11 26 13 8,8 20 3.5
XS7 C 14 11 40 15 9,8 33 4.5
XS7 D 23 18 80 26 16 65 5.5
XS7 DppDIN 23 18 80 40 30 65 5.1
2/35
References 2
Osiprox® Optimum
Cylindrical, flush mountable, increased range

distance Sn kg
(mm)
Ø 6 plain
2.5 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS1 L06PA349 0.025
801120
M8 connector XS1 L06PA349S 0.010

M12 connector XS1 L06PA349D 0.015
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS1 L06NA349 0.025
M8 connector XS1 L06NA349S 0.010
2 NC PNP
M12 connector
Pre-cabled (L =
XS1 L06NA349D
2 m) (1) XS1 L06PB349
0.015
0.025
XS1 L06pA349 M8 connector XS1 L06PB349S 0.010
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS1 L06NB349 0.025
M8 connector XS1 L06NB349S 0.010
2.5 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS1 N08PA349 0.035
M8 connector XS1 N08PA349S 0.015
M12 connector XS1 N08PA349D 0.020
801231
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS1 N08NA349 0.035

M8 connector XS1 N08NA349S 0.015
M12 connector XS1 N08NA349D 0.020
NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS1 N08PB349 0.035
M8 connector XS1 N08PB349S 0.015
M12 connector XS1 N08PB349D 0.020
XS1 Npppp349
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS1 N08NB349 0.035
M8 connector XS1 N08NB349S 0.015
M12 connector XS1 N08NB349D 0.020

4 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS1 N12PA349 0.070
801167


XS1 N08pp349S M12 connector XS1 N18PA349D 0.040

801232

XS1 Npppp349D
Accessories
mm kg
Ø 12 XSZ B112 0.006
Ø 18 XSZ B118 0.010
Ø 30 XSZ B130 0.020
XSZ B1pp (1) For further information, see page 2/102.
2/36

Cylindrical, flush mountable, increased range
dimensions 2
Characteristics
Sensor type XS1 ppppp349D XS1 ppppp349S XS1 ppppp349
Connection M12 connector M8 connector Pre-cabled, length: 2 m
Operating zone Ø 6.5 and Ø 8 mm 0…2
Ø 12 mm 0…3.2
Ø 18 mm 0…8
Ø 30 mm 0…16
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 67 IP 68, double insulation
(except Ø 6.5 and Ø 8: IP 67)
2
Cable – PvR 3 x 0.34 mm2 except
Ø 6.5 and Ø 8: 3 x 0.11 mm2
Vibration resistance Conforming to 25 gn, amplitude ± 2 mm (f = 10 to 55 Hz)
IEC 60068-2-6
IEC 60068-2-27
Output state indication Yellow LED, 4 viewing ports at 90° Yellow LED, annular
Maximum switching frequency Ø 6.5, Ø 8 and Ø 12 Hz 2500
Ø 18 Hz 1000
Ø 30 Hz 500
Delays First-up ms y5
Response ms y 0.2 for Ø 8 and Ø 12, y 0.3 for Ø 18, y 0.6 for Ø 30
Recovery ms y 0.2 for Ø 8 and Ø 12, y 0.7 for Ø 18, y 1.4 for Ø 30
Wiring schemes
Connector Pre-cabled PNP 3-wire NPN 3-wire
M8 M12 BU: Blue
4 4 3
BN: Brown BN/1 + BN/1 +
BK: Black PNP BK/4 (NO) NPN
1 3 BK/2 (NC) BK/4 (NO)
BK/2 (NC)
1 2 BU/3 – BU/3 –

Setting-up
Sensor Side by side Face to face Facing a metal object Mounted in a metal support
Ø 6.5 eu5 e u 30 e u 7.5 d d u 10 h u 1.6
Ø8 eu5 e u 30 e u 7.5 d u 10 h u 1.6
e e
h
Ø 12 eu8 e u 48 e u 12 d u 14 h u 2.4
e
Ø 18 e u 20 e u 96 e u 30 d u 28 h u 3.6
Ø 30 e u 40 e u 240 e u 60 d u 50 h u 6
Dimensions
Flush mountable in metal
Sensor Pre-cabled M8 connector M12 connector
a b a b a b
Ø 6.5 33 30 42 34 45 24
b Ø8 33 25 42 26 45 23
a Ø 12 33 25 – – 48 29
Ø 18 36.5 28 – – 48.6 28
Ø 30 40.6 32 – – 52.7 32
2/37
References 2
Osiprox® Optimum
801267
distance (Sn)
mm kg
1.5 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS5 08B1PAL2 0.035
XS5 ppB1ppL2
2 NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS5

M8 connector XS5
08B1PBL2
08B1PBM8
0.035
0.025

distance (Sn)
801268
mm kg
XS5 ppB1ppM12 NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS5 12B1PBL2 0.075


distance (Sn)
mm kg


distance (Sn)
mm kg

Accessories (2)
kg
825994
Ø 12 XSZ B112 0.006

Ø 18 XSZ B118 0.010
Ø 30 XSZ B130 0.020
XSZ B1 pp Example: XS5 08B1PAL2 becomes XS5 08B1PAL5 with a 5 m long cable.
2/38

dimensions 2
Characteristics
Sensor type XS5 ppB1ppM8, XS5 ppB1ppM12 XS5 ppB1ppL2
Connection Connector M8 on Ø 8, M12 on Ø 12, Ø 18 and Ø 30 –
Operating zone Ø8 mm 0…1.2
Ø 12 mm 0…1.6
Ø 18 mm 0…4
Ø 30 mm 0…8
Differential travel % 1…15 of real sensing distance (Sr) 2
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 67 IP 68 i (except Ø 8: IP 67)
Pre-cabled – PvR 3 x 0.34 mm2 (except XS5 08:
3 x 0.11 mm2)
Output state indication LED (yellow): 4 viewing ports at 90° LED (yellow): annular
Maximum switching XS5 08B1pppp, XS5 12B1pppp kHz 5
frequency XS5 18B1pppp kHz 2
XS5 30B1pppp kHz 1
Response ms ≤ 0.1 for XS5 08B1pppp and XS5 12B1pppp, ≤ 0.15 for XS5 18B1pppp,
≤ 0.3 for XS5 30B1pppp
Recovery ms ≤ 0.1 for XS5 08B1pppp and XS5 12B1pppp, ≤ 0.35 for XS5 18B1pppp,
≤ 0.7 for XS5 30B1pppp
Wiring scheme
M8 M12
4
BU: Blue BN/1 + BN/1 +
4 3 BN: Brown PNP BK/4 (NO) NPN
BK/2 (NC) BK/4 (NO)
1 3 BK: Black BK/2 (NC)
BU/3 – BU/3 –
1 2
See connection For M8 connector, NO and NC output on terminal 4.
on page 9/45.
Setting-up
e e

Ø8 e≥3 e ≥ 18 e ≥ 4.5
Ø 12 e≥4 e ≥ 24 e≥6
Ø 18 e ≥ 10 e ≥ 60 e ≥ 15
Ø 30 e ≥ 20 e ≥ 120 e ≥ 30
Dimensions
XS5
(1) Pre-cabled Connector

XS5 a b a b
Ø8 33 25 42 26
Ø 12 33 25 48 29
b Ø 18 36.5 28 48.6 28
a Ø 30 40.6 32 52.7 32
(1) LED
2/39
References 2
Osiprox® Optimum
801267
(Sn) mm kg
1.5 NO Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS5 08B1DAL2 0.035
(1)
M12 connector XS5 08B1DAM12 0.025
XS5 ppB1DpL2 NO M12 connector XS5 08B1CAM12 0.025

terminals 1 and 4
(2) Remote M12 XS5 08B1CAL08M12 0.050
2 connector (3)
NC Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS5 08B1DBL2 0.035
(1)
M12 connector XS5 08B1DBM12 0.025

(Sn) mm kg
2 NO Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS5 12B1DAL2 0.075
(1)
801268
NO M12 connector XS5 12B1CAM12 0.035

terminals 1 and 4
(2) Remote M12 XS5 12B1CAL08M12 0.060
connector (3)
XS5 ppB1DpM12 NC Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS5 12B1DBL2 0.075
(1)

(Sn) mm kg
(1)

terminals 1 and 4
(2) Remote M12 XS5 18B1CAL08M12 0.085
connector (3)
(1)

(Sn) mm kg
825994
(1)

XSZ B1pp terminals 1 and 4
(2) Remote M12 XS5 30B1CAL08M12 0.170
connector (3)
(1)
Accessories (4)
kg
Ø 12 XSZ B112 0.006
Ø 18 XSZ B118 0.010
Ø 30 XSZ B130 0.020
Example: XS5 08B1DAL2 becomes XS5 08B1DAL5 with a 5 m long cable.
(2) The NO output is connected to terminals 1 and 4 of the M12 connector.
(3) 0.8 m flying lead with M12 connector.
2/40

dimensions 2
Characteristics
Sensor type XS5 ppB1ppM12 XS5 ppB1CAL08M12 XS5 ppB1DpL2
Connection Connector M12 0.80 m flying lead with M12 –
connector
Operating zone Ø8 mm 0…1.2
Ø 12 mm 0…1.6
Ø 18 mm 0…4
Ø 30 mm 0…8 2
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 67 i IP 68 (except Ø 8: IP 67)
Materials Case Nickel plated brass (except XS5 08: stainless steel, grade 303)
Cable – PvR 2 x 0.34 mm2 (except XS5 08: 2 x 0.11 mm2)

Rated supply voltage V c 12…48
Switching capacity mA 1.5…100 with overload and short-circuit protection
Residual current, open state mA ≤ 0.5
Maximum switching XS5 08B1Dppp, XS5 12B1Dppp Hz 4000
frequency XS5 18B1Dppp Hz 3000
XS5 30B1Dppp Hz 2000
Response ms ≤ 0.2 XS5 08B1pppp and XS5 12B1pppp,
≤ 0.15 XS5 18B1pppp,
≤ 0.3 XS5 30B1pppp
Recovery ms ≤ 0.2 (except XS5 30B1pppp: ≤ 0.3)
Wiring schemes
Connector Pre-cabled 2-wire c non polarised 2-wire c non polarised
M12 NO output NC output
4 3 BU: Blue XS5 ppB1DAppp XS5 ppB1CAppp XS5 ppB1DBppp
BN: Brown
BN/3 BN/1 BN/1
1 2
See connection on page 9/45 NO NO NC
BU/4 BU/4 BU/2
Setting-up
e e

Ø8 e≥3 e ≥ 18 e ≥ 4.5
Ø 12 e≥4 e ≥ 24 e≥6
Ø 18 e ≥ 10 e ≥ 60 e ≥ 15
Ø 30 e ≥ 20 e ≥ 120 e ≥ 30
Dimensions
XS5
(1) Pre-cabled (mm) Connector (mm)

a b a b
Ø8 50 42 61 40
Ø 12 50 42 61 42
b
Ø 18 52.5 44 64.6 44
a
Ø 30 50 42 62.2 41
(1) LED
2/41
References 2
Plastic, cylindrical, non flush mountable

Sn (mm) kg
801231
Three-wire c 12-24 V
2.5 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L =2 m) (1) (2) XS4 P08PA340 0.025
NPN Pre-cabled (L =2 m) (1) (2) XS4 P08NA340 0.025
NC PNP Pre-cabled (L =2 m) (1) (2) XS4 P08PB340 0.025
NPN Pre-cabled (L =2 m) (1) (2) XS4 P08NB340 0.025
XS4 Ppppp340
XS4 Ppppp370 Three-wire c 12-48 V
2 XS4 Ppppp230 2.5 NO PNP

NPN
Pre-cabled (L
Pre-cabled (L
=2
=2
m) (1)
m)
XS4
XS4
P08PA370
P08NA370
0.030
0.030
NC PNP Pre-cabled (L =2 m) XS4 P08PB370 0.030
NPN Pre-cabled (L =2 m) XS4 P08NB370 0.030
Two-wire a or c 24-240 V
2.5 NO Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS4 P08MA230 0.030
1/2"-20UNF connector XS4 P08MA230K 0.020
NC Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS4 P08MB230 0.030
801232
1/2"-20UNF connector XS4 P08MB230K 0.020

4 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L =2 m) (1) (3) XS4 P12PA340 0.060
XS4 Ppppp340D NC PNP Pre-cabled (L =2 m) (1) (3) XS4 P12PB340 0.060
XS4 Ppppp370D NPN Pre-cabled (L =2 m) (1) (3) XS4 P12NB340 0.060
XS4 Ppppp230D Three-wire c 12-48 V
NPN Pre-cabled (L =2 m) (3) XS4 P12NB370 0.065
4 NO Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS4 P12MA230 0.065
801167

XS4 Ppppp340S NPN Pre-cabled (L =2 m) (1) (3) XS4 P18NB340 0.090
NPN Pre-cabled (L =2 m) (1) (3) XS4 P30NB340 0.120
NC PNP Pre-cabled (L =2 m) (3) XS4 P30PB370 0.140
Two-wire a or c
(1) For a 5 m long cable, add L1 to the reference and for a 10 m long cable, add L2. Example: XS4 P08PA340 becomes XS4 P08PA340L1 with a 5 m long cable.
(2) For an M8 connector, add S to the reference. Example: XS4 P08PA340 becomes XS4 P08PA340S with an M8 connector.
(3) For an M12 connector, add D to the reference. Example: XS4 P12PA370 becomes XS4 P12PA370D with an M12 connector.
2/42
schemes, Osiprox® Technology

Plastic, cylindrical, non flush mountable
dimensions 2
Characteristics
Sensor type XS4 Ppppp340p XS4 Ppppp370p XS4 PppMp230p
Connection Pre-cabled Length: 2 m
Connector M8 on Ø 8 1/2"-20UNF
M12 on Ø 12, Ø 18 and Ø 30
Operating zone Ø 6.5 and Ø 8 mm 0…2
Ø 12 mm 0…3.2
Ø 18 mm 0…6.4
Differential travel
Ø 30 mm
%
0…12
1...15 of real sensing distance (Sr)
2
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 68, double insulation i for pre-cabled version (except Ø 8: IP 67)
IP 67 for connector version
Materials Case PPS
Cable PvR 3 x 0.34 mm2 except Ø 6.5 and 8: 3 x 0.11 mm2 PvR 2 x 0.34 mm2
except Ø 8: 2 x 0.11 mm2
IEC 60068-2-6
IEC 60068-2-27
Output state indication Yellow LED: annular on pre-cabled version
Yellow LED: 4 viewing ports at 90° on connector version
Rated supply voltage V c 12…24 with protection c 12…48 with protection a or c 24…240
against reverse polarity against reverse polarity (50/60 Hz)
Voltage limits (including ripple) V c 10…36 c 10…58 a or c 20…264
Switching capacity mA y 200 with overload and short-circuit protection 5…100 for Ø 8,
5…200 for Ø 12,
5…200 c and 5…300 a
for Ø 18 and 30
Voltage drop, closed state V y2 y 5.5
Residual current, open state mA – y 0.6
Current consumption, no-load mA y 10 –
Maximum switching frequency Ø 6.5, Ø 8 and Ø 12 Hz 5000 c 3000, a 25
Ø 18 Hz 2000 c 2000, a 25
Ø 30 Hz 1000 c 1000, a 25
Delays First-up ms y 10 y 40
Response ms y 0.1 for Ø 8 and Ø 12, y 0.15 for Ø 18, y 0.3 for Ø 30 y 0.2
Recovery ms y 0.1 for Ø 8 and Ø 12, y 0.35 for Ø 18, y 0.7 for Ø 30 y 0.2 for Ø 8, Ø 12 and Ø 18,
y 0.4 for Ø 30
Wiring schemes
Connector Pre-cabled PNP NPN 2-wire a or c
M8 M12 BU: Blue
4 4 3 BN: Brown
BN/1 + BN/1 + BN/2
PNP BK/4 (NO) NPN
BK: Black BK/4 (NO)
1 3 BK/2 (NC)
BK/2 (NC)
BU/3 BU/3
1 2 BU/3
1/2"-20UNF For M8 connector, NO and NC outputs on terminal 4
z: 2
z: 3
2 3
Setting-up
Side by side Face to face Facing a metal object Mounted in a metal support
Ø8 e u 10 e u 30 e u 7.5 d d u 24 h u 5
Ø 12 e u 16 e e u 48 e e u 12 d u 36 h u 8
h
Ø 18 e e u 16 e u 96 e u 24 d u 54 h u16
Ø 30 e u 60 e u 180 e u 45 d u 90 h u 30
Dimensions
3-wire c 12-24 V 3-wire c 12-48 V or
2-wire a/c 24-240 V
Pre-cabled (mm) Connector (mm) Pre-cabled (mm) Connector (mm)
XS4 P a b a b a b a b
Ø8 33 26 42 26 50 40 61 40
b Ø 12 33 26 48 27 50 42 61 42
a Ø 18 33.5 26 48 29 60 51.5 70 51.5
Ø 30 40.5 33 50 34 60 51.5 70 51.5
2/43
References 2
Basic, plastic, cylindrical, non flush mountable

distance Sn
(mm) kg
Three-wire c 12-24 V, non flush mountable
801231
2.5 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L =2 m) (1) XS2 08ALPAL2 0.030

NPN Pre-cabled (L =2 m) (1) XS2 08ALNAL2 0.030
NC PNP Pre-cabled (L =2 m) (1) XS2 08ALPBL2 0.003
NPN Pre-cabled (L =2 m) (1) XS2 08ALNBL2 0.030
2 XS2 ppAL ppL2

4 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (2) XS2 12ALPAL2 0.065
M12 connector XS2 12ALPAM12 0.010
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (2) XS2 12ALNAL2 0.065
M12 connector XS2 12ALNAM12 0.010
NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (2) XS2 12ALPBL2 0.065
M12 connector XS2 12ALPBM12 0.010
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (2) XS2 12ALNBL2 0.065
M12 connector XS2 12ALNBM12 0.010
801232

XS2 ppAL ppM12 M12 connector XS2 18ALPBM12 0.025
M12 connector XS2 30ALPBM12 0.065
Accessories (3)
kg
825994

Ø 12 XSZ B112 0.006
Ø 18 XSZ B118 0.010
XSZ B1 pp Ø 30 XSZ B130 0.020
Example: XS2 08ALPAL2 becomes XS2 08ALPAL5 with a 5 m long cable.
Example: XS2 18ALPAL2 becomes XS2 18ALPAL5 with a 5 m long cable.
Characteristics: Schemes: Dimensions:

page 2/45 page 2/45 page 2/45
2/44

Basic, plastic, cylindrical, non flush mountable
dimensions 2
Characteristics
Sensor type XS2 ppALPpL2 XS2 ppALPpM12
XS2 ppALNpL2 XS2 ppALNpM12
Connection Pre-cabled Length: 2 m –
Connector – M12
Operating zone (1) Ø8 mm 0…2
Ø 12 mm 0…3.2
Ø 18 mm 0…6.4
Differential travel
Ø 30 mm
%
0…12
1...15 of real sensing distance (Sr)
2
Materials Case PPS
Cable PVC 3 x 0.34 mm2 except –
Ø 8: 3 x 0.11 mm2
IEC 60068-2-6
IEC 60068-2-27
Output state indication Yellow LED, on rear Yellow LED: 4 viewing ports at 90°
Switching capacity mA y 100 (except Ø 8: y 50) with overload and short-circuit protection
Maximum switching frequency Ø8 Hz 3000
Ø 12 Hz 1000
Ø 18 Hz 250
Ø 30 Hz 60
Delays First-up ms y 5 (except Ø 30 y 10)
Response ms y 0.5 for Ø 8, Ø 12, y 1 for Ø 18, y 2 for Ø 30
Recovery ms y 1 for Ø 8, y 0.5 for Ø 12, y 2 for Ø 18, y 6 for Ø 30
(1) Detection curves, see page 2/106.
Wiring schemes
M12 BU: Blue
BN: Brown
BN/1 + BN/1 +
4 3 PNP BK/4 (NO) NPN
BK/2 (NC)
BU/3 – BU/3 –
1 2

Setting-up
d
e e
h
Sensors Side by side Face to face Facing a metal object Mounted in a metal support
Ø8 XS2 08AL e > 10 e > 30 e > 7.5 d > 24 h > 5
Ø 12 XS2 12AL e > 16 e > 48 e > 12 d > 36 h > 8
Ø 18 XS2 18AL e > 16 e > 96 e > 24 d > 54 h > 16
Ø 30 XS2 30AL e > 60 e > 180 e > 45 d > 90 h > 30
Dimensions
Non flush mountable in metal
Sensors Pre-cabled (mm) Connector (mm)
a b a b
Ø8 XS2 08AL 49 40 – –
b
Ø 12 XS2 12AL 49 42 61 42
a Ø 18 XS2 18AL 58.8 51.5 70.3 51.5
Ø 30 XS2 30AL 58.8 51.5 70.3 51.5
References:
page 2/44
2/45
References 2
Basic, cylindrical, metal, flush and non flush mountable
Two-wire, a.c. supply

801120
distance Sn
(mm) kg
Ø 6.5, plain
Three-wire c 12-24 V, flush mountable
1.5 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L =2 m) (1) XS1 06BLPAL2 0.030
XS1 06BL ppL2 NPN Pre-cabled (L =2 m) (1) XS1 06BLNAL2 0.030
NC PNP Pre-cabled (L =2 m) (1) XS1 06BLPBL2 0.030
NPN Pre-cabled (L =2 m) (1) XS1 06BLNBL2 0.030
2 Ø 8, threaded M8 x 1
801167
1.5 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS1 08BLPAL2 0.035

M8 connector XS1 08BLPAM8 0.008
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS1 08BLNAL2 0.035
M8 connector XS1 08BLNAM8 0.008
XS1 08BL ppM8 M12 connector XS1 08BLNAM12 0.015
NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS1 08BLPBL2 0.035
M8 connector XS1 08BLPBM8 0.008
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS1 08BLNBL2 0.035
M8 connector XS1 08BLNBM8 0.008
801220
2.5 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS2 08BLPAL2 0.035

XS2 08BL ppL2 M12 connector XS2 08BLNAM12 0.015
801214
2 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (2) XS1 12BLPAL2 0.070

XS1 12BL ppL2
Two-wire a 24-240 V, flush mountable
2 NO Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (2) XS1 12BLFAL2 0.075

801225

XS2 12BL ppM12 M12 connector XS2 12BLPBM12 0.015
Example: XS1 06BLPAL2 becomes XS1 06BLPAL5 with a 5 m long cable.

2/46

distance Sn
(mm) kg
821938

XS1 18BLppM12
NC PNP Pre-cabled (L =
M12 connector
2 m) (1) XS1 18BLPBL2
XS1 18BLPBM12
0.105
0.035
2
821936

XS1 18BLpppL2 NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS2 18BLPBL2 0.105
822115

XS1 30BLppL2 M12 connector XS1 30BLPBM12 0.075
822116

XS2 30BLppL2 M12 connector XS2 30BLPBM12 0.085
Accessories (2)
825994
kg
Fixing clamps Ø 6.5 XSZ B165 0.005
Ø8 XSZ B108 0.006
Ø 12 XSZ B112 0.006
XSZ B1 pp Ø 18 XSZ B118 0.010
Ø 30 XSZ B130 0.020

2/47
schemes 2
Characteristics
Sensor type XS1 ppBLPpL2 XS1 ppBLPpMp XS2 ppBLPpL2 XS2 ppBLPpMp XS1 ppBLFAL2
XS1 ppBLNpL2 XS1 ppBLNpMp XS2 ppBLNpL2 XS2 ppBLNpMp
Connection Pre-cabled Length 2 m – Length 2 m – Length 2 m
Connector – M8 on Ø 8 – M8 on Ø 8 –
M12 on Ø 8, M12 on Ø 8,
Ø 12, Ø 18 and Ø 12, Ø 18 and
Ø 30 Ø 30
Operating zone (1) Ø 6.5 mm 0…1.2 – –
2 Ø8 mm 0…1.2 0…2 –
Ø 12 mm 0…1.6 0…3.2 0…1.6
Ø 18 mm 0…4 0…6.4 0…4
Ø 30 mm 0…8 0…12 0…8
Cable PVC – PVC – PVC
3 x 0.34 mm2 3 x 0.34 mm2 2 x 0.34 mm2
except Ø 6.5 except Ø 6.5
and 8: and 8:
3 x 0.11 mm2 3 x 0.11 mm2
IEC 60068-2-6
IEC 60068-2-27
Output state indication Yellow LED, Yellow LED: Yellow LED, Yellow LED: Yellow LED,
on rear 4 viewing ports on rear 4 viewing ports on rear
at 90° at 90°
Rated supply voltage V c 12…24 with protection against reverse polarity a 24…240
Voltage limits (including ripple) V c 10…36 a 20…264
Switching capacity mA y 100 (except Ø 6.5 and 8: y 50) with overload and short-circuit 5…300 (5…200
protection for Ø 12) (2)
Voltage drop, closed state V y2 y 4.5 (y 7 for
Ø 12)
Current consumption, no-load mA y 10 –
Residual current, open state mA – ≤ 1.5
Maximum switching frequency Ø 6.5, Ø 8 Hz 3000 –
Ø 12 Hz 2000 1000 25
Ø 18 Hz 2000 250 25
Ø 30 Hz 200 60 25
Delays First-up ms y 5 (except Ø 30 y 10) y 40
Response ms y 0.5 for Ø 8, Ø 12, y 1 for Ø 18, y 2 for Ø 30 y 10
Recovery ms y 1 for Ø 8, y 0.5 for Ø 12, y 2 for Ø 18, y 6 for Ø 30 y 15
(1) Detection curves, see page 2/106.
(2) These sensors do not incorporate overload or short-circuit protection and therefore, it is essential to connect a 0.4 A “quick-blow” fuse in series with the load,
see page 2/102.
Wiring schemes
Connector Pre-cabled PNP NPN 2-wire a
M8 M12 BU: Blue
4 4 3 BN: Brown
BN/1 + BN/1 + BN
PNP BK/4 (NO) NPN
1 3
BK/2 (NC)
– BU
1 2 BU/3 BU/3 –
References: Dimensions:
pages 2/46 and 2/47 page 2/49
2/48
Setting-up, Inductive proximity sensors 2
dimensions 2
Setting-up
d
e
e
e
h
Sensors Side by side Face to face Facing a metal object Mounted in a metal support
Ø 6.5 flush XS1 06 e u3 e u 18 e u 4.5 d u 6,5 h u 0
mountable
Ø 8 flush XS1 08 e u3 e u 18 e u 4.5 du8 hu0 2
mountable
Ø 8 non flush XS2 08 e u 10 e u 30 e u 7.5 d u 24 hu5
mountable
Ø 12 flush XS1 12 e u4 e u 24 eu6 d u 12 hu0
mountable
Ø 12 non flush XS2 12 e u 16 e u 48 e u 12 d u 36 hu8
mountable
Ø 18 flush XS1 18 e u 10 e u 60 e u 15 d u 18 hu0
mountable
Ø 18 non flush XS2 18 e u 16 e u 96 e u 24 d u 54 h u 16
mountable
Ø 30 flush XS1 30 e u 20 e u 120 e u 30 d u 30 hu0
mountable
Ø 30 non flush XS2 30 e u 60 e u 180 e u 45 d u 90 h u 30
mountable
Dimensions
Sensors Pre-cabled M8 connector M12 connector
(mm) (mm) (mm)
a b a b a b
Ø 6.5 XS1 06 42 – – – – –
Ø8 XS1 08 42 39.4 52.2 41.3 61.4 39
c Ø 12 XS1 12 41.3 38.7 – – 53 39
b
Ø 18 XS1 18 51.3 48.4 – – 64 48.5
a Ø 30 XS1 30 51.3 48.4 – – 64 48.5

Sensors Pre-cabled M8 connector M12 connector
(mm) (mm) (mm)
a b a b c a b c
Ø8 XS2 08 42 35.8 52.2 37.7 4 61.4 35.4 4
Ø 12 XS2 12 41.3 34.1 – – – 52.6 34 5
Ø 18 XS2 18 50.6 40.4 – – – 63.4 40.5 8
Ø 30 XS2 30 50.6 35.4 – – – 63.4 35.5 13
References: Characteristics: Schemes:

pages 2/46 and 2/47 page 2/48 page 2/48
2/49
References 2
Miniature, cylindrical, flush and non flush mountable
Ø 4 plain (1)
801308

distance (Sn) (2)
mm kg
Brass case, flush mountable
1 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS1 L04PA310 0.025
XS1 L04pp310
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS1 L04NA310 0.025
801316
2 NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m)
M8 connector
XS1 L04PB310
XS1 L04PB310S
0.025
0.010
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS1 L04NB310 0.025
XS1 N05pp310 Stainless steel case, flush mountable

0.8 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS1 L04PA311 0.025
801315

Ø 5, threaded M5 x 0.5 (1)

distance (Sn) (2)
XS1 N05pp311S mm kg
1 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS1 N05PA310 0.030
801309
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS1 N05NA310 0.030

NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS1 N05PB310 0.030
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS1 N05NB310 0.030
Stainless steel case, flush mountable

0.8 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS1 N05PA311 0.030
XS1 L04pp310S
M8 connector XS1 N05PA311S 0.015
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS1 N05NA311 0.030
M8 connector XS1 N05NA311S 0.015
801131
Ø 6.5 plain (1)

distance (Sn) (2)
mm kg
XSp L06pp340 Stainless steel case, flush mountable
801132

M12 connector XS1 L06NA340D 0.015
NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS1 L06PB340 0.025
M8 connector XS1 L06PB340S 0.010
XSp L06pp340S
XSp L06pp349S NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS1 L06NB340 0.025
Stainless steel case, non flush mountable

801141

M12 connector XS2 L06NA340D 0.015
XSp L06pp340D
(2) For a 5 m long cable add L1 to the reference, for 10 m long cable add L2 to the reference.
Example: XS1 L04PA310 becomes XS1 L04PA310L1 with a 5 m long cable.
2/50

Miniature, cylindrical, flush and non flush mountable
dimensions 2
Characteristics
Sensor type XS1 ppppppppS; XS1 ppppppppD; XS1 ppppppp; XS2 L06pA340
XS2 L06pA340p
Connection Connector M8 on XS1 ppppppppS and –
M12 on XS1 ppppppppD
Operating zone (1) Ø4 mm 0…0.8 (brass), 0…0.6 (stainless steel)
Ø5 mm 0…0.8 (brass), 0…0.6 (stainless steel)
Ø 6.5 flush mountable
Ø 6.5 non flush mountable
mm 0…1.2 (stainless steel)
mm 0…2 (stainless steel)
2
Materials Case Nickel plated brass or stainless steel grade 303
Pre-cabled PvR, 3 x 0.11 mm2 or 4 x 0.08 mm2
Rated supply voltage V c 5…24 for XS1 L04pppppp and XS1 N05pppppp
c 12…24 for XSp L06pppppp
Voltage limits (including ripple) V c 5…30 for XS1 L04pppppp and XS1 N05pppppp
c 10…38 for XSp L06pppppp
Switching capacity 3-wire PNP/NPN mA y 100 with overload and short-circuit protection
y 200 for XSp L06 with overload and short-circuit protection
Maximum switching frequency kHz 5
Response ms y 0.1
Recovery ms y 0.1
(1) Detection curves, see page 2/106
Wiring schemes
Connector Pre-cabled PNP 3-wire NPN 3-wire
M8 M12 BU : Blue
4 BN : Brown
BN/1 + BN/1 +
4 3 PNP BK/4 (NO) NPN
BK : Black BK/2 (NC) BK/4 (NO)
1 3
WH: White BK/2 (NC)
BU/3 – BU/3 –
1 2
See connection on page 9/45 For M8 connector, NO and NC outputs on terminal 4.
Setting-up
Sensor Side by side Face to face Facing a metal object
Ø4 eu 2 e u 12 eu3 d2 d1 u 4, h u 0 –
d1
x
Ø5 eu 2 e u 12 eu3 d1 u 5, h u 0 –
Ø 6.5 eu 3 e e u 18 e e u 4.5 d1 u 3, h u 0 –
h
Ø 6.5, XS2 L06pA340p e eu 5 e u 30 e u 7.5 d1 u 10, h u 1.6 d2 u 6.5, x u 1.3
Tightening torque
Stainless steel: 2.2 N.m
Brass: 1.6 N.m
Dimensions
Sensor Pre-cabled M8 connector M12 connector
a b c a b c a b c
Ø4 29 29 – 41 24 – – – –
Ø5 29 29 – 41 24 – – – –
c
b Ø 6.5 33 30 – 42 34 – 45 24 –
Ø 6.5, XS2 L06pA340p 33 27 3 46 35 3 49 25 3
a
2/51
References 2
Cylindrical, flush mountable and non flush mountable
Two-wire, a.c. or d.c. supply, short-circuit protection
Sensing Function Connection Reference Weight

distance Sn kg
(mm)
Flush mountable
822102
2 NO Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS1 M12MA250 0.075

1/2"-20UNF connector XS1 M12MA250K 0.025
NC Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS1 M12MB250 0.075
2 1/2"-20UNF connector XS1 M12MB250K 0.025
XS1 Mpppp250
Non flush mountable

DF532016

Flush mountable
XS2 Mpppp250 NC Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS1 M18MB250 0.120

1/2"-20UNF connector XS1 M18MB250K 0.060
Non flush mountable

825982


XS1 Mpppp250K Flush mountable
10 NO Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS1 M30MA250 0205
NC Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS1 M30MB250 0205

801225
Non flush mountable

15 NO Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS2 M30MA250 0205
XS2 Mpppp250K NC Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS2 M30MB250 0205

Accessories (2)
mm kg
825994

Ø 18 XSZ B118 0.010
Ø 30 XSZ B130 0.020
(1) For a 5 m long cable, add L1 to the reference and for a 10 m long cable, add L2 to the
reference. Example: XS1 M18MA250 becomes XS1 M18MA250L1 with a 5 m long cable.
XSZ B1pp (2) For further information, see page 2/102.
2/52

Cylindrical, flush mountable and non flush mountable
setting-up, Two-wire, a.c. or d.c. supply, short-circuit protection
dimensions 2
Characteristics
Sensor type XSp MppMp250K XSp MppMp250
Connection 1/2"-20UNF connector Pre-cabled, length: 2 m
Operating zone Ø 12 flush mountable mm 0…1.6
Ø 12 non flush mountable mm 0…3.2
Ø 18 flush mountable mm 0…4
Ø 30 non flush mountable mm 0…12 2
Cable – PvR 2 x 0.34 mm2
IEC 60068-2-6
IEC 60068-2-27
Indicators Output state Red LED, 4 viewing ports at 90° Red LED
Supply on Green LED: 4 viewing ports at 90° (only Green LED (only on Ø 18 and Ø 30)
on Ø 18 and Ø 30)
Rated supply voltage V a 24…240 (50/60 Hz) or c 24…210
Switching capacity mA a 5…300 or c 5…200 (except Ø 12: a or c 5…200) with overload and short-circuit
protection
Current consumption, no-load mA –
Maximum switching frequency Ø 12 Hz a 25 or c 4000
Ø 18 Hz a 25 or c 2000
Ø 30 flush mountable Hz a 25 or c 2000
Ø 30 non flush mountable Hz a 25 or c 1000
Response ms y 0.2 for Ø 12, y 2 for Ø 18 and Ø 30
Recovery ms y 0.2 for Ø 12, y 4 for Ø 18, y 5 for Ø 30 flush mountable, y 10 for Ø 30 non flush
mountable
Wiring schemes
1/2"-20UNF connector Pre-cabled 2-wire a or c
1 BU: Blue NO or NC output
+/- : 2 BN: Brown BN/2
t :1
2 3 +/- : 3
BU/3
/1
See connection on page 9/45. t: on connector models only.
Setting-up
Ø 12 flush mountable eu4 e u 24 eu6 d d u 12 h u 0
Ø 12 non flush mountable e u 16 e u 48 e u 12 d u 36 h u 8
e e
h
Ø 18 flush mountable e u 10 e u 60 e u 15 d u 18 h u 0
e
Ø 30 flush mountable e u 20 e u 120 e u 30 d u 30 h u 0
Dimensions
Flush mountable in metal Non flush mountable in metal
Sensor Pre-cabled Connector Pre-cabled Connector
a b a b a b a b c
Ø 12 55 47 66 48 54.6 42 65.6 42 5
c
b Ø 18 60 51 72 51 60 44 72 44 8
a Ø 30 60 51 72 51 62.6 41 74.7 41 13
2/53
References 2
Cylindrical, metal and plastic, flush mountable and non
flush mountable
Four-wire, d.c. supply, solid-state NO + NC output

distance Sn kg
(mm)
Ø 6.5 plain
801120
Stainless steel case, flush mountable

1.5 NO + NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS1 L06PC410 0.025
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS1 L06NC410 0.025
2 XS1 L06pC410 Stainless steel case, flush mountable
1.5 NO + NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS1 M08PC410 0.035
M12 connector XS1 M08PC410D 0.025
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS1 M08NC410 0.035
M12 connector XS1 M08NC410D 0.025
801231
Stainless steel case, non flush mountable

2.5 NO + NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS2 M08PC410 0.035
M12 connector XS2 M08PC410D 0.025
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS2 M08NC410 0.035
M12 connector XS2 M08NC410D 0.025
XS1 ppppC410 Ø 12, threaded M12 x 1

2 NO + NC PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS1 N12PC410 0.070
M12 connector XS1 N12PC410D 0.020
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS1 N12NC410 0.070
M12 connector XS1 N12NC410D 0.020
Brass case, non flush mountable (2)
801233

XS2 ppppC410
801232

XS1 NpppC410D
DF532015

XS2 NpppC410D
Accessories (3)
825994
mm kg
Ø 12 XSZ B112 0.006
Ø 18 XSZ B118 0.010
XSZ B1pp Ø 30 XSZ B130 0.020
reference. Example: XS1 N12PC410 becomes XS1 N12PC410L1 with a 5 m long cable.
(2) For a sensor with a plastic case, non flush mountable, replace 2N by 4P in the reference.
Example: XS2 N12PC410 becomes XS4 P12PC410 with a plastic case.
2/54

Cylindrical, metal and plastic, flush mountable and non
setting-up, flush mountable
dimensions 2
Four-wire, d.c. supply, solid-state NO + NC output
Characteristics
Sensor type XSp ppppC410D XSp ppppC410
Connection M12 connector Pre-cabled, length: 2 m
Operating zone Ø 6.5 and Ø 8 flush mtble. mm 0…1.2
Ø 8 non flush mountable mm 0…2
Ø 12 flush mountable mm 0…1.6
Ø 18 non flush mountable mm 0…6.4 2
Ø 30 non flush mountable mm 0…12
(except Ø 6.5 and Ø 8: IP 67)
Materials Case Nickel plated brass for XS1 N and XS2 N
Stainless steel, grade 303, for XS1 L06, XS1 M08 and XS2 M08
Plastic, PPS, for XS4 P
Cable – PvR 4 x 0.34 mm2 except Ø 6.5 and Ø 8:
4 x 0.08 mm2
IEC 60068-2-6
IEC 60068-2-27
Maximum switching frequency Ø 6.5, Ø 8 and Ø 12 Hz 5000
Ø 18 Hz 2000
Ø 30 Hz 1000
Response ms y 0.1 for Ø 8 and Ø 12, y 0.15 for Ø 18, y 0.3 for Ø 30
Recovery ms y 0.1 for Ø 8 and Ø 12, y 0.35 for Ø 18, y 0.7 for Ø 30
Wiring schemes
M12 connector Pre-cabled PNP 4-wire NPN 4-wire
4 3 BU: Blue
BN: Brown BN/1 + BN/1 +
BK/4 (NO) NPN
BK: Black PNP
WH/2 (NC) BK/4 (NO)
1 2 WH: White
WH/2 (NC)
See connection on page 9/45. BU/3 – BU/3 –
Setting-up
Ø 6.5 flush mountable XS1 L06 eu3 e u 18 e u 4.5 d d u 6.5 h u 0
Ø 8 flush mountable XS1 M08 eu3 e u 18 e u 4.5 du8hu0
e e
h
Ø 8 non flush mountable XS2 M08 e u 10 e u 30 e u 7.5 d u 24 h u 5

e
Ø 12 flush mountable XS1 N12 eu4 e u 24 eu6 d u 12 h u 0
Ø 12 non flush mtble XS1 N12 or XS4 P12 e u 16 e u 48 e u 12 d u 36 h u 8
Ø 18 flush mountable XS1 N18 e u 10 e u 60 e u 15 d u 18 h u 0
Ø 30 flush mountable XS1 N30 e u 20 e u 120 e u 30 d u 30 h u 0
Dimensions
a b a b a b a b c
Ø 6.5 metal 50 47 – – – – – – –
c
b Ø 8 metal 50 42 61 42 50 36 61 36 4
a Ø 12 metal 33 25 48 29 37.6 25 52.6 29 5
Ø 12 plastic – – – – 33 25 48 29 0
Ø 18 metal 36.5 28 48.6 28 36.5 20 48.6 20 8
Ø 18 plastic – – – – 33.5 26 48 29 0
Ø 30 metal 40.6 32 52.7 32 40.5 19 52.6 19 13
Ø 30 plastic – – – – 40.5 33 50 34 0
2/55
References 2
Cylindrical, metal and plastic, flush and non flush mountable
Four-wire, d.c. supply, solid-state PNP + NPN
NO/NC programmable output

distance Sn kg
(mm)
Metal case, flush mountable
822102
2 NO/NC PNP + NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS1 M12KP340 0.075

programmable (1)
M12 connector XS1 M12KP340D 0.025
2 Metal case, non flush mountable

XS1 MppKP340 programmable (1)
XS4 PppKP340
Plastic case, non flush mountable

4 NO/NC PNP + NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS4 P12KP340 0.075
programmable (1)
DF532016
M12 connector XS4 P12KP340D 0.025

XS2 MppKP340 programmable (1)
Metal case, non flush mountable

programmable (1)
825982

8 NO/NC PNP + NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS4 P18KP340 0.120
programmable (1)
XS1 MppKP340D
XS4 PppKP340D
10 NO/NC PNP + NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS1 M30KP340 0205
programmable (1)
801225
Metal case, non flush mountable

15 NO/NC PNP + NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS2 M30KP340 0205
programmable (1)
XS2 MppKP340D
15 NO/NC PNP + NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS4 P30KP340 0205
programmable (1)
Accessories (2)
825994

mm kg
Ø 18 XSZ B118 0.010
XSZ B1pp
Ø 30 XSZ B130 0.020
reference. Example: XS1 M12KP340 becomes XS1 M12KP340L1 with a 5 m long cable.
2/56

Cylindrical, metal and plastic, flush and non flush mountable
setting-up, Four-wire, d.c. supply, solid-state PNP + NPN
dimensions 2
NO/NC programmable output
Characteristics
Sensor type XSp MppKP340D XSp MppKP340
Connection M12 connector Pre-cabled, length: 2 m
Operating zone Ø 12 flush mountable mm 0…1.6
Ø 30 non flush mountable mm 0…12 2
Materials Case Nickel plated brass for XS1 M and XS2 M, PPS for XS4 P
Cable – PvR 4 x 0.34 mm2
IEC 60068-2-6
IEC 60068-2-27
Maximum switching frequency Ø 12 Hz 5000
Ø 18 Hz 2000
Ø 30 flush mountable Hz 1000
Ø 30 non flush mountable Hz 1000
Response ms y 0.1 for Ø 12, y 0.15 for Ø 18, y 0.3 for Ø 30
Recovery ms y 0.1 for Ø 12, y 0.35 for Ø 18, y 0.7 for Ø 30
Wiring schemes
M12 connector Pre-cabled PNP + NPN
BU: Blue 4-wire programmable, NO or NC output
BN: Brown NO NC
4 3 BK: Black BN/1 BU/3
WH: White + +
WH/2
1 2 BK/4 WH/2
– BK/4 –
BU/3 BN/1
Setting-up
Ø 12 flush mountable XS1 M12 eu4 e u 24 eu6 d d u 12 h u 0
Ø 12 non flush mountable XS2 M12 e u 16 e u 48 e u 12 d u 36 h u 8
e e
and XS4 P12
h
Ø 18 flush mountable XS1 M18 e e u 10 e u 60 e u 15 d u 18 h u 0

and XS4 P18
Ø 30 flush mountable XS1 M30 e u 20 e u 120 e u 30 d u 30 h u 0
and XS4 P30
Dimensions
a b a b a b a b c
Ø 12 metal 50 42 61 42 54.6 42 65.6 42 5
c
b Ø 12 plastic – – – – 50 42 61 42 0
a Ø 18 metal 60 51 72 51 60 44 72 44 8
Ø 18 plastic – – – – 60 51 70 51 0
Ø 30 metal 60 51 72 51 62.6 41 74.7 41 13
Ø 30 plastic – – – – 60 51 70 51 0
2/57
References 2
Osiprox® Universal, Osiconcept® (1)

Cylindrical, flush mountable or non flush mountable

distance (Sn)
520030
mm kg
5 NO PNP 0.15 m flying lead with XS6 12B2PAL01M12 0.100
M12 connector
NPN 0.15 m flying lead with XS6 12B2NAL01M12 0.100
M12 connector
NC PNP 0.15 m flying lead with XS6 12B2PBL01M12 0.100

2 NPN
M12 connector
0.15 m flying lead with XS6 12B2NBL01M12 0.100
M12 connector
XS6 ppB2ppL01M12

distance (Sn)
mm kg
M12 connector
M12 connector

M12 connector
520031
NPN 0.15 m flying lead with XS6 18B2NBL01M12 0.140

M12 connector

distance (Sn)
mm kg
M12 connector
M12 connector

XSZ BPM12 M12 connector
NPN 0.15 m flying lead with XS6 30B2NBL01M12 0.220
M12 connector
Accessories (2)
825994

kg
Remote control fixing clamp XSZ BPM12 0.015
XSZ Bppp Sensor fixing clamps Ø 12 XSZ B112 0.006

Ø 18 XSZ B118 0.010
Ø 30 XSZ B130 0.020
(1) For further information on Osiconcept® , see page 2/20.

2/58
schemes, Osiprox® Universal, Osiconcept® (1)

Cylindrical, flush mountable or non flush mountable
dimensions 2
Characteristics
Sensor type XS6 ppB2ppL01M12
Connection Connector 0.15 m flying lead with M12 connector
Sensing distance and Ø 12 Nominal sensing mm 0…5 non flush mounted configuration / 0…3.4 flush mounted configuration
adjustment zone distance Sn
Fine adjustment zone mm 1.7…5 non flush mounted configuration / 1.7…3.4 flush mounted configuration
Ø 18 Nominal sensing mm 0…9 non flush mounted configuration / 0…6 flush mounted configuration
distance Sn
Ø 30
Fine adjustment zone
Nominal sensing
mm
mm
3…9 non flush mounted configuration / 3…6 flush mounted configuration
0…18 non flush mounted configuration / 0…11 flush mounted configuration
2
distance Sn
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 67 i
Remote control PBT
Pre-cabled PvR - Ø 4.2 mm
Supply on and teach mode Green LED
Response ms ≤ 0.3
Recovery ms ≤ 0.7
(1) For further information on Osiconcept® , see page 2/20.
Wiring scheme
Connector PNP NPN
M12
4 3 1 + 1 +
PNP 4(NO) NPN
2(NC) 4(NO)
2(NC)
1 2 3 – 3 –
Setting-up
e
e
e

flush non flush flush non flush
mounted mounted mounted mounted
Ø 12 e ≥ 14 50 e ≥ 50 100 e ≥ 3.4
Ø 18 e ≥ 28 100 e ≥ 100 200 e≥6
Ø 30 e ≥ 48 180 e ≥ 180 360 e ≥ 11
Dimensions
XS6
(2) (1)
20
62 b c
M12
a (1)LED
(2)Teach mode button
Connector (mm)
a b c
Ø 12 54.6 42 5
Ø 18 60 44 8
Ø 30 62.6 41 13
2/59
Functions, Inductive proximity sensors 2
principle, Osiprox® Application

Sensors for rotation monitoring, slip detection, shaft
setting-up 2
overload detection
Cylindrical type
Example: Functions
Coupling breakage monitoring
These self-contained rotation speed monitoring sensors have the special feature of
822138
incorporating, in the same case, the pulse sensing and processing electronics as well as the
output switching amplifier that are required to establish an integrated rotation monitoring device.
The unit provides an economical solution for detecting slip, belt breakage, drive shaft shear and
overloading, etc., in the following applications: conveyor belts, bucket elevators, Archemedian
screws, grinders, crushers, pumps, centrifugal driers, mixers, etc.
Operating principle
2 The output signal of this type of sensor is processed by an impulse comparator incorporated in
the sensor. The impulse frequency Fc generated by the moving part to be monitored is compared
to the frequency Fr preset on the sensor. The output switching circuit of the sensor is in the
closed state for Fc > Fr and the open state for Fc < Fr.
822145
- + Sensors XSA-V are particularly suitable for the detection of underspeed: when the speed of the
moving part Fc falls below a preset threshold Fr, this causes the output circuit of the sensor to
(1)
switch off.
(2)
Note: following power-up, the operational status of the sensor is subject to a delay of 9 seconds
in order for the moving part being monitored to run-up to its nominal speed. During this time, the
output of the sensor remains in the closed state.
b
a
Adjustment of frequency threshold
(3) c b Adjustment of sensor’s frequency threshold: using potentiometer, 15 turns approximately.
b To increase the frequency threshold: turn the adjustment screw clockwise (+).
b b To decrease the frequency threshold: turn the adjustment screw anti-clockwise (–).
Potentiometer Diameter of sensor

Non metallic material LED a b c
Metal target M30 4…6 mm 30 mm 60 mm
Potentiometer adjustment curves (for XSA V1p801, 2-wire a or c sensors)

Low speed version (6…150 impulses/minute) High speed version (120…3000 impulses/minute)
15 15
Number of turns
Number of turns
12 12
9 9
6 6
3 3
0 0
0,1 1 2,5 Hertz 2 10 50 Hertz
6 60 150 Imp/min 120 600 3000 Imp/min
10 1 0,4 Revs/s 0,5 0,1 0,02 Revs/s
Setting-up
Side by side Face to face
e ≥ 20 e ≥ 120
Facing a metal object Mounted in a metal support
d
e
h
e ≥ 30 d ≥ 30, h ≥ 0
Fixing nut tightening torque: < 50 N.m
2/60
References, Inductive proximity sensors 2
characteristics, Osiprox® Application

Sensors for rotation monitoring, slip detection, shaft
dimensions, overload detection
schemes 2
Cylindrical type
b
a
Lengths (mm): a = 81
a = Overall
b = Threaded section
b = 57
Ø = M30 2
DC DC AC/DC AC/DC
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm
Adjustable frequency range 6…150 impulses/min 120…3000 impulses/min 6…150 impulses/min 120…3000 impulses/min
References
3-wire c PNP / NC XSA V11373 XSA V12373 – –
2-wire c or a / NC – – XSA V11801 XSA V12801
Weight (kg) 0.300
Characteristics
Connection Pre-cabled, 3 x 0.34 mm², length 2 m (1) Pre-cabled, 2 x 0.34 mm², length 2 m (1)
Degree of protection IP 67
conforming to IEC 60529
Operating zone 0…8 mm
Repeat accuracy 3% of Sr
Differential travel 3…15% of Fr
Operating temperature - 25…+ 70 °C
Output state indication Red LED
Rated supply voltage c 12…48 V with protection against reverse polarity a 24…240 V (50/60 Hz) or c 24…210 V
Voltage limits c 10…58 V a or c 20…264 V
(including ripple)
Switching capacity ≤ 200 mA with overload and short-circuit protection a 5…350 mA or c 5…200 mA (2)
Voltage drop, closed state ≤ 1.8 V ≤ 5.7 V
Residual current, open state – ≤ 1.5 mA
Current consumption, no-load ≤ 15 mA –
Maximum switching 6 000 impulses/min (for XSA V11ppp); 48 000 impulses/min (for XSA V12ppp)
frequency
“Run-up” delay following 9 seconds ± 20% + 1/Fr (3)
power-up
Wiring schemes
3-wire c 2-wire a or c
XSA V1p373 XSA V1p801
BN
+
BN
PNP BK BU
BU
–
(1) For a 5 m long cable add L05 to the reference, for a 10 m long cable add L10 to the reference.
Example: XSA V11373 becomes XSA V11373L05 with a 5 m long cable.
(2) These sensors do not incorporate overload or short-circuit protection and therefore, it is essential to connect a 0.4 A “quick-
blow” fuse in series with the load, see page 2/102.
(3) For a sensor without a “run-up” delay following power-up, replace XSA V1 in the reference by XSA V0.
Example: XSA V11801 becomes XSA V01801 without a “run-up” delay. For a reduced “run-up” delay of 3 s, replace XSA V1
in the reference by XSA V3.
Accessories:
page 2/102
2/61
Principle, Inductive proximity sensors 2
adjustment, Osiprox® Application

Sensors for rotation monitoring, slip detection, and shaft
setting-up, overload detection with teach mode
dimensions 2
Operating principle and applications

b These inductive proximity sensors are designed for monitoring rotational speed or
the speed of the flow of objects to be monitored or protected.
They operate on the principle of comparing a speed threshold preset by the operator
against the instantaneous measurement of the speed of the moving object to be
protected.
b They provide a simple, economical solution to the problems of detecting slip, belt
breakage, coupling and overloading, etc.
2 b They are commonly used in grinder/crusher, mixer, pump, centrifugal driver,
conveyor belt, bucket elevator, Archimedian screw, etc. type applications.
Installation and setting-up

Output LED Setting-up and positioning the sensor
b In the positioning phase, the XS9 sensor can operate as a standard inductive
Teach mode LED sensor (Telemecanique patent pending).
Operation in inductive mode enables validation of reliable detection of all the moving
Reference objects to be monitored.
speed
Supply b Through this system, the positioning is thus made 100 % reliable and able to be
Teach mode button checked at any time without modifying the sensor’s adjustment.
Speed adjustment in teach mode

u3s b The normal or reference speed of the moving object (1) to be monitored is adjusted
by simply pressing the teach mode button (2) and is then validated by the display
Slow flash LED.
v If in doubt, the sensor can be reset at any time to the factory settings.
(1) To allow the moving object to reach its normal speed (machine inertia), the sensor holds its
output closed for 9 seconds.
(2) The sensor’s default drop-out underspeed corresponds to the preset speed - 30 %.
u7s Example: if the preset speed is 1000 rpm, the sensor drops out at underspeed when the speed
of the moving object drops below 1000 - (1000 x 0.3) = 700 rpm.
- 20 %, - 11 % and - 6 % threshold can be obtained by pressing the teach mode button.
Minimum mounting distances (mm) XS9 E, XS9 C
e e C B
D E F (1)
Type Side by side Face to face

B
20
XS9 E e ≥ 40 e ≥ 80
XS9 C e ≥ 60 e ≥ 120 M12; 1/2 UNF
F(1)
E
B
E
B
62
A

Type A B C D E F
XS9 E 14 26 13 8.8 20 3.5
XS9 C 14 40 15 9.8 33 4.5
2/62

Sensors for rotation monitoring, slip detection, and shaft
schemes, overload detection with teach mode
accessories 2

PBT case

Adjustable frequency range 6…6000 impulses/min
References
3-wire PNP / NC XS9 E11RPBL01M12 XS9 C11RPBL01M12 – –
2-wire c or a / NC – – XS9 E11RMBL01U20 XS9 C11RMBL01U20
Weight (kg) 0.040 0.060 0.040 0.060
Characteristics
Connection 0.15 m flying lead with M12 connector 0.15 m flying lead with 1/2" - 20 UNF connector
Operating zone 0…8 mm 0…12 mm 0…8 mm 0…12 mm
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 67 double insulation i
Storage temperature range - 40…+ 85 °C
Operating temperature range - 25…+ 70 °C
Supply on Green LED
Rated supply voltage c 12…24 V a or c 24…240 V (50/60 Hz)
Voltage limits (including ripple) c 10…36 V a or c 20…264 V
Switching capacity y 100 mA (1) y 200 mA (1) a or c 5…100 mA c 5…200 mA,
(2) a 5…300 mA(2)
Voltage drop, closed state y2V y 5.5 V
Residual current, open state y 100 mA y 1.5 mA
Current consumption, no-load y 10 mA –
Maximum switching frequency 48 000 impulses/min
Power on "run-up" delay 9 seconds + 1/Fr
(1) With overload and short-circuit protection.
(2) It is essential to connect a 0.4 A quick-blow fuse in series with the load.
Wiring scheme
Connector 3-wire c 2-wire a or c
M12 1/2" UNF XS9 p11RPBL01M12 XS9 p11RMBL01U20
1
4 3 2
1 2 2 3 3

Accessory (1)
kg
Remote control fixing clamp XSZ BPM12 0.015
XSZ BPM12
2/63

Sensors with analogue output signal 0...10 V (1) or
curves, 4…20 mA
schemes 2
Functions
Example: These analogue output proximity sensors are solid-state sensors designed for
Sorting parts monitoring displacement. They are not measuring sensors.
They are suitable for use in numerous sectors, particularly for applications involving:
- deformation and displacement monitoring,
- vibration amplitude and frequency monitoring,
- control of dimensional tolerances,
- position control,
- concentricity or eccentricity monitoring.
2 Operating principle
The operating principle of the sensor is that of a damped oscillator. The degree of damping will depend on the distance of an object from the
sensing face. The sensor will sense the distance and produce an output current with a value directly proportional to this distance.
Output curves 4...20 mA, 2-wire connection

XS1 M12AB120 XS1 M18AB120 XS1 M30AB120
Sn = 0.2…2 mm Ø 12 mm Sn = 0.5…5 mm Ø 18 mm Sn = 1…10 mm Ø 30 mm
22 22 22
20 20 20
18 18 18
16 16 16
14 14 14
12 2 2
10 10 10
8 8 8
Is (mA)
Is (mA)
Is (mA)
6 6 6
4 4 4
2 2 2
0 0 0
0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,8 2 2,2 2,4 2,6 0 0,5 1 1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5 6 6,5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Sensor - object distance (mm) Sensor - object distance (mm) Sensor - object distance (mm)
XS4 P12AB120 XS4 P18AB120 XS4 P30AB120

Sn = 0.4…4 mm Ø 12 mm Sn = 0.8…8 mm Ø 18 mm Sn = 1.5…15 mm Ø 30 mm
22 22 22
20 20 20
18 18 18
16 16 16
14 14 14
12 12 2
10 10 10
8 8 8
Is (mA)
Is (mA)
Is (mA)
6 6 6
4 4 4
2 2 2
0 0 0
0 0,4 0,8 1,2 1,6 2 2,4 2,8 3,2 3,6 4 4,4 4,8 5,2 0 0,8 1,6 2,4 3,2 4 4,8 5,6 6,4 7,2 8 8,2 8,4 9,2 0 1,5 3 4,5 6 7,5 9 10,5 12 13,5 15 16,5 18 19,5
Output curves 0...10 V, 3-wire connection

XS4 P12AB120 XS4 P12AB120 XS4 P12AB120
Sn = 0.4…4 mm Ø 12 mm Sn = 0.4…4 mm Ø 12 mm Sn = 0.4…4 mm Ø 12 mm
11 11 11
10 10 10
9 9 9
8 8 8
7 7 7
6 6 6
5 5 5
4 4 4
Is (mA)
Is (mA)
Is (mA)
3 3 3
2 2 2
1 1 1
0 0 0
0 0,4 0,8 1,2 1,6 2 2,4 2,8 3,2 3,6 4 4,4 4,8 5,2 0 0,8 1,6 2,4 3,2 4 4,8 5,6 6,4 7,2 8 8,8 9,6 10,4 0 1,5 3 4,5 6 7,5 9 10,5 12 13,5 15 16,5 18 19,5
Wiring schemes
2-wire connection 3-wire connection
BN/1 BN/1
+ +
mA mA BK/4
BK/4 Is Output voltage
Output current
R R Us = R.Is
BU/3 BU/3
- -
Is
Output current
Load impedance Output current Load impedance Output voltage Load impedance
value value value
12 V 4…20 mA R y 8.2 Ω 24 V 0…10 mA R y 1500 Ω 0…10 V R = 1000 Ω
24 V 4…20 mA R y 470 Ω 48 V 0…10 mA R y 3300 Ω 0…10 V R = 1000 Ω
Ensure a minimum of 10 V between the + and the - (terminal 3) Ensure a minimum of 5 V between the + and the sensor output (terminal 4).
of the sensor.
(1) Voltage range only obtained with a load impedance of 1000 Ω.
References: Characteristics:
pages 2/65 to 2/67 pages 2/65 to 2/67
2/64

setting-up 2
4…20 mA
Sensor Flush mountable in metal Non flush mountable in metal
b
a
Lengths (mm):
a = Overall
a = 50
b = 42
a = 50
b = 42
a = 50
b = 42
2
Metal case Plastic case Plastic case
References
3-wire c Output 0…10 V (2) – – XS4 P12AB110
2-wire c Output 4…20 mA (2) XS1 M12AB120 XS4 P12AB120 –
Weight (kg) 0.075 0.065 0.065
Characteristics
Connection Pre-cabled, PvR, 3 x 0.34 mm2, length 2 m
Operating zone 0.2…2 mm 0.4…4 mm 0.4…4 mm
Repeat accuracy ± 3%
Linearity error ± 2 mA ±1V
Ambient air temperature For operation: - 25…+ 70 °C
Rated supply voltage c 12...24 V c 12...24 V c 24…48 V
Voltage limits (including ripple) c 10…38 V c 10…38 V c 15…58 V
Output current drift ≤ 10%

Ambient temperature: - 25…+ 70 °C
Maximum operating rate 1500 Hz

(2) Output current range Is, see page 2/64.
Setting-up
Minimum mounting distances (mm) Side by side Face to face Facing a metal object Mounted in a metal support
d
e e
h
XS1 M12AB120 flush mountable e≥4 e ≥ 24 e≥6 d ≥ 12, h ≥ 0

XS4 P12AB110 non flush mountable e ≥ 16 e ≥ 48 e ≥ 12 d ≥ 36, h ≥ 8
Fixing nut tightening torque < 6 N.m (metal case), < 2 N.m (plastic case)
Other versions Please consult your Regional Sales office.
Accessories: Schemes:
page 2/102 page 2/64
2/65

setting-up (continued) 2
4…20 mA
b c
a
Lengths (mm):
2 a = Overall
a = 52.5
b = 44
a = 40.6
b = 26
a = 40.6
b = 26
c = For non flush mountable sensors c=0 c=8 c=8
References
Weight (kg) 0.120 0.080 0.080
Characteristics
Operating zone 0.5…5 mm 0.8…8 mm 0.8…8 mm


Setting-up
d
e e
h
XS1 M18AB120 flush mountable e ≥ 10 e ≥ 60 e ≥ 15 d ≥ 18, h ≥ 0

2/66

setting-up (continued) 2
4…20 mA
b c
a
Lengths (mm):
a = Overall a = 50 a = 52.6 a = 52.6
2
b = Threaded section b = 42 b = 32 b = 32
c = For non flush mountable sensors c=0 c = 13 c = 13
References
Weight (kg) 0.200 0.100 0.100
Characteristics
Operating zone 1…10 mm 1.5…15 mm 1.5…15 mm


Setting-up
d
e e
h
XS1 M30AB120 flush mountable e ≥ 20 e ≥ 120 e ≥ 30 d ≥ 30, h ≥ 0

2/67

Sensors with analogue output signal 0…10 V (1)
curves,
schemes 2
Functions
These analogue output proximity sensors are solid-state sensors designed for
monitoring displacement. They are not measuring sensors.
They are suitable for use in numerous sectors, particularly for applications
involving:
v deformation and displacement monitoring,
v vibration amplitude and frequency monitoring,
v control of dimensional tolerances,
2 v position control,
v concentricity or eccentricity monitoring.
Operating principle
The operating principle of the sensor is that of a damped oscillator. The degree of
damping will depend on the distance of an object from the sensing face. The sensor
will sense the distance and produce an output current with a value directly
proportional to this distance.
Output curves 0…10 V, 3-wire connection

XS9 F XS9 E
Sn = 1…5 mm Sn = 1…10 mm
Us (V)
Us (V)
11 11
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
0 0
0 1 2,5 5 6 0 1 5 10 12
Sensor - object distance (mm) Sensor - object distance (mm)
XS9 C XS9 D
Sn = 2…15 mm Sn = 5…40 mm
Us (V)
Us (V)
11 11
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
0 0
0 2 8 15 18 0 5 20 40 45
Wiring schemes
Connector Pre-cabled 3-wire connection
M8 M12 BN: Brown
4 BU: Blue BN/1
4 3
BK: Black +
mA BK/4
1 3 Is
Output voltage
R
1 2 BU/3 Us = R.Is
—
Output Load impedance Output Load impedance

current value voltage value
24 V 0…10 mA R y 1400 Ω 0…10 V R = 1000 Ω
Note: ensure a minimum of 5 V between the + (terminal 1) and the sensor output (terminal 4).
2/68

Sensors with analogue output signal 0…10 V (1)
dimensions,
setting-up 2

PBT case
2
References
3-wire c Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (2) XS9 F111A1L2 XS9 E111A1L2 XS9 C111A1L2 XS9 D111A1L2
0…10 V Connector XS9 F111A1L01M8 XS9 E111A1L01M12 XS9 C111A1L01M12 XS9 D111A1M12
Weight (kg) Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (2) 0.060 0.075 0.095 0.340
Connector 0.040 0.055 0.075 0.320
Characteristics
Connection Pre-cabled PvR, 3 x 0.34 mm2, length 2 m for XS9 p111ApL2
Connector 0.15 m flying lead with 0.15 m flying lead with M12 connector M12
M8 connector
Degree of protection Pre-cabled IP 68 IP 68, double insulation i
Conforming to IEC 60529 Connector IP 67 IP 67, double insulation i
Storage temperature - 40…+ 85 °C
Materials PBT case
Output state indication No
Rated supply voltage c 24 V
Linearity error ±1V
Current consumption, no-load y 4 mA with overload and short-circuit protection
Maximum operating frequency 2000 Hz 1000 Hz 100 Hz
Output current drift y 10% (throughout the operating temperature range)
Dimensions
XS9 F XS9 E/C/D XS9 C/D XS9 E
C B
15
8 9 D E F (2)
B
32
F (2)
B
E
B
A

Type A (L2) A (M12) B C D E F
XS9 E 14 – 26 13 8.8 20 3.5
XS9 C 14 – 40 15 9.8 33 4.5
XS9 D 23 14 80 26 16 65 5.5
Setting-up (Minimum mounting distances (mm))
Type Side by side Face to face Facing a metal object
XS9 F e≥ 15 e≥ 36 e ≥ 15
XS9 E e e≥ 30 e e≥ 72 e e ≥ 30
XS9 C e≥ 45 e≥ 110 e ≥ 45
XS9 D e≥ 120 e≥ 300 e ≥ 120
(2) For a 5 m long cable replace L2 by L5, for a 10 m long cable replace L2 by L10.
Example: XS9 C111A1L2 becomes XS9 C111A1L5 with a 5 m long cable.
Accessories:
page 2/102
2/69

Sensors with analogue output signal 4…20 mA
curves,
schemes 2
Functions
These analogue output proximity sensors are solid-state sensors designed for
monitoring displacement. They are not measuring sensors.
They are suitable for use in numerous sectors, particularly for applications
involving:
v deformation and displacement monitoring,
v vibration amplitude and frequency monitoring,
v control of dimensional tolerances,
2 v position control,
v concentricity or eccentricity monitoring.
Operating principle
The operating principle of the sensor is that of a damped oscillator. The degree of
damping will depend on the distance of an object from the sensing face. The sensor
will sense the distance and produce an output current with a value directly
proportional to this distance.
Output curves 4…20 mA, 2-wire connection

XS9 F XS9 E
Sn = 1…5 mm Sn = 1…10 mm
Is (mA)
Is (mA)
22 22
20 20
18 18
16 16
14 14
12 12
10 10
8 8
6 6
4 4
2 2
0 0
0 1 2,5 5 6 0 1 5 10 13
XS9 C XS9 D
Sn = 2…15 mm Sn = 5…40 mm
Is (mA)
Is (mA)
22 22
20 20
18 18
16 16
14 14
12 12
10 10
8 8
6 6
4 4
2 2
0 0
0 2 8 15 18 0 5 20 40 45
Wiring schemes
Connector Pre-cabled 2-wire connection
M8 M12 BN: Brown
4 BU: Blue BN/1
4 3
BK: Black +
mA
1 3 BK/4 Output current
1 2 BU/3 R
–
See connection on page 9/45. Is
Output Load impedance

current value
12 V 4…20 mA R y 8.2 Ω
24 V 4…20 mA R y 470 Ω
Note: ensure a minimum of 10 V between the + (terminal 1) and - (terminal 3) of the sensor.
2/70

Sensors with analogue output signal 4…20 mA
dimensions,
setting-up 2

PBT case
2
References
2-wire c Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) (1) XS9 F111A2L2 XS9 E111A2L2 XS9 C111A2L2 XS9 D111A2L2
4…20 mA Connector XS9 F111A2L01M8 XS9 E111A2L01M12 XS9 C111A2L01M12 XS9 D111A2M12
Weight (kg) Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) 0.060 0.075 0.095 0.340
Connector 0.040 0.055 0.075 0.320
Characteristics
Connection Pre-cabled PvR, 3 x 0.34 mm2, length 2 m for XS9 p111ApL2
Connector 0.15 m flying lead with 0.15 m flying lead with M12 connector M12
M8 connector
Degree of protection Pre-cabled IP 68 IP 68, double insulation i
conforming to IEC 60529 Connector IP 67 IP 67, double insulation i
Storage temperature - 40…+ 85 °C
Materials PBT case
Output state indication No
Linearity error ± 2 mA
Current consumption, no-load y 4 mA with overload and short-circuit protection
Maximum operating frequency 2000 Hz 1000 Hz 100 Hz
Output current drift y 10% (throughout the operating temperature range)
Dimensions
XS9 F XS9 E/C/D XS9 C/D XS9 E
15 C B
8 9 D E F (1)
B
32
F (1)
B
E
B
A

Type A (L2) A (M12) B C D E F
XS9 E 14 – 26 13 8.8 20 3.5
XS9 C 14 – 40 15 9.8 33 4.5
XS9 D 23 14 80 26 16 65 5.5
Setting-up (Minimum mounting distances (mm))
Type Side by side Face to face Facing a metal object
XS9 F e≥ 15 e≥ 36 e ≥ 15
XS9 E e e≥ 30 e e≥ 72 e e ≥ 30
XS9 C e≥ 45 e≥ 110 e ≥ 45
XS9 D e≥ 120 e≥ 300 e ≥ 120
(1) For a 5 m long cable replace L2 by L5, for a 10 m long cable replace L2 by L10.
Example: XS9 F111A2L2 becomes XS9 F111A2L5 with a 5 m long cable.
Accessories:
page 2/102
2/71

Detection at fixed sensing distance. Factor 1 (Fe/Nfe)
dimensions, sensors (1). For ferrous and non ferrous materials
schemes 2
Solid-state output
Sensors flush mountable in metal
b
a
2 Lengths (mm): a = 60 a = 70
a = Overall b = 51.5 b = 51.5
b = Threaded section Ø = M18 x 1 Ø = M18 x 1
Brass case Brass case
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 5 mm 5 mm
References
4-wire c PNP/PNP programmable XS1 M18KPM40 XS1 M18KPM40D
NO/NC
Weight (kg) 0.120 0.060
Characteristics
Connection Pre-cabled, PvR 4 x 0.34 mm2, length 2 m (2) M12 connector
Differential travel 1…15% of Sr
Operating temperature 0…+ 50 °C
Output state indication Yellow LED, annular Yellow LED, 4 viewing ports at 90°
Switching capacity 0...200 mA with overload and short-circuit protection
Response y 0.3 ms
Recovery y 0.7 ms
Wiring schemes
M12 connector Pre-cabled 4-wire c, PNP/NPN programmable, NO or NC output
NO NC
4 3 BN: brown BN/1 BU/3

BU: blue
WH/2
+ +
BK: black
BK/4 WH/2
1 2 WH: white
- BK/4 -
BU/3 BN/1

(1) The variation in sensing distance between ferrous and non ferrous materials is typically less than 5%.
(2) Sensors available with other cable lengths: please consult your Regional Sales office.
Accessories:
page 2/102
2/72

Detection at fixed sensing distance. Factor 1 (Fe/Nfe)
setting-up 2
sensors (1). For ferrous and non ferrous materials

Solid-state output
a = 60 a = 70 2
b = 51.5 b = 51.5
Ø = M30 x 1.5 Ø = M12 x 1
Stainless steel case Stainless steel case
10 mm 10 mm
XS1 M30KPM40 XS1 M30KPM40LD
0.205 0.145
e, UL, CSA
Pre-cabled, PvR 4 x 0.34 mm2, length 2 m (2) M12 connector on 0.8 m flying lead
IP 68 IP 67
0…8 mm
3% of Sr
1…15% of Sr
0…+ 50 °C
Yellow LED, annular
c 12…24 V with protection against reverse polarity
c 10…38 V
0…200 mA with overload and short-circuit protection
y 2.6 V
y 15 mA
1000 Hz
y 5 ms
y 0.3 ms
y 0.7 ms
Setting-up
Minimum mounting distances (mm) Side by side Face to face Facing a metal object Mounted in a metal
support
e e
h
XS1 M18 flush mountable e u 10 e u 60 e u 15 d u 18, h u 0

XS1 M30 flush mountable e u 20 e u 120 e u 30 d u 30, h u 0
Fixing nut tightening torque: XS1 M18: < 35 N.m, XS1 M30: < 100 N.m
(1) The variation in sensing distance between ferrous and non ferrous materials is typically less than 5%.
(2) Sensors available with other cable lengths: please consult your Regional Sales office.
2/73
characteristics 2
Fixed sensing distance detection, Factor 1 (Fe/Nfe)
Solid-state output
Sensor Flush mountable in metal
2
References
4-wire c PNP/NPN/NO/NC XS7 C40KPM40
programmable
Weight (kg) 0.220
Characteristics
Operating temperature 0…+ 50 °C
Connection Screw terminals, clamping capacity: 4 x 0.34 mm2 (2)
Switching capacity 0…200 mA with overload and short-circuit protection
Response y 0.3 ms
Recovery y 0.7 ms
(1) The variation in sensing distance between ferrous and non ferrous materials is typically less
than 5%.
(2) Cable gland not included with sensor. For suitable 13P cable gland (XSZ PE13),
see page 2/102.
2/74
Dimensions, Inductive proximity sensors 2
setting-up, Osiprox® Application

Fixed sensing distance detection, Factor 1 (Fe/Nfe)
schemes 2

Solid-state output
Dimensions
XS7 C40KPM40
40
20
40
(3)
2
25
117
60
(1)
(2)
16 = 30 =
24 40
41
(1) Output LED.

(2) 1 tapped entry for 13P cable gland.
Setting-up
e e e

Sensor flush mountable in metal XS7 C40KPM40 e u 40 e u 120 e u 45
Tightening torque of cover fixing screws and clamp screws: < 1.2 N.m
Wiring schemes
PNP/NPN
4-wire c programmable, NO or NC output
NO output NC output
1 3
2
+ +
4 2
– 4 –
3 1
2/75

Selective detection of ferrous materials
schemes, Selective detection of non ferrous materials
dimensions 2
Cylindrical type, solid-state output
Flush mountable
Stainless steel case
2 Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 5 mm
References
3-wire, ferrous version PNP NO XS1 M18PAS40
Insensitive to non ferrous materials
3-wire, non ferrous version PNP NO XS1 M18PAS20
Insensitive to ferrous materials
Weight (kg) 0.120
Characteristics
Connection Pre-cabled (PvR) 3 x 0.34 mm2, length 2 m (1)
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 IP 68
Output state indication Yellow LED, annular


Residual current, open state –
Response y 0.3 ms
Recovery y 0.7 ms
(1) Sensors available pre-cabled with other cable lengths: please consult your Regional Sales
Office
Wiring scheme Dimensions
3-wire c PNP XS1 M
BN/1
+ a (mm) b (mm)
PNP 60 51.5
BK/4
b
–
BU/3 a
Setting-up
d
e e
h
Side by side Face to face Facing a metal object Mounted in a metal

support
XS1 M18 e ≥ 10 e ≥ 60 e ≥ 15 d ≥ 18, h ≥ 0 (ferrous metal)
d ≥ 18, h ≥ 5 (non ferrous
metal)
Accessories:
pages 2/102
2/76

Selective detection of ferrous materials
schemes, Selective detection of non ferrous materials
dimensions (continued) 2
Cylindrical type, solid-state output
Flush mountable
Stainless steel case

2
References
3-wire, ferrous version PNP NO XS1 M18PAS40D
Insensitive to non ferrous materials
3-wire, non ferrous version PNP NO XS1 M18PAS20D
Insensitive to ferrous materials
Weight (kg) 0.060
Characteristics
Connection M12 connector
Output state indication Yellow LED, 4 viewing ports at 90°


Residual current, open state –
Response y 0.3 ms
Recovery y 0.7 ms
Wiring scheme Dimensions
M12 connector 3-wire c PNP XS1 M
BN/1
4 3
+ a (mm) b (mm)
PNP 70 51.5
BK/4
1 2 b
–
BU/3 a
Setting-up
d
e e
h

support
XS1 M18 e ≥ 10 e ≥ 60 e ≥ 15 d ≥ 18, h ≥ 0 (ferrous metal)
d ≥ 18, h ≥ 5 (non ferrous
metal)
Accessories:
pages 2/102
2/77
characteristics 2
For assembly, packaging and light handling
Plastic case: 12 x 26 x 40 mm
dc supply, solid-state output
2 Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 2 mm 4 mm
References
3-wire c PNP NO XS7 G12PA140 – XS7 G12PA140S XS8 G12PA140 – XS8 G12PA140S
NPN NO XS7 G12NA140 – XS7 G12NA140S XS8 G12NA140 – XS8 G12NA140S
4-wire c PNP NO + NC – XS7 G12PC440 – – XS8 G12PC440 –

(complementary outputs)
NPN NO + NC – XS7 G12NC440 – – XS8 G12NC440 –
Weight (kg) 0.100 0.100 0.030 0.100 0.100 0.030

Characteristics
Product certifications CSA, UL, e
Connection Pre-cabled 3 x 0.34 mm2, 4 x 0.34 mm2, – 3 x 0.34 mm 2, 4 x 0.34 mm2, –

length 2 m (1) length 2 m (1) length 2 m (1) length 2 m (1)
Connector – – M8 – – M8
Operating zone 0…1.6 mm 0…3.2 mm
Repeat accuracy ≤ 10 % of Sr
Differential travel 3...20 % of Sr
Storage temperature -40…+85 °C
range
Operating temperature range -25…+70 °C
Materials Case: PBT, cable: PVC
Vibration resistance 25 gn, amplitude ± 2 mm (f = 10 to 55 Hz)
Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
Shock resistance 50 gn, duration 11 ms
Output state indication Yellow LED, on top of case
Rated supply voltage c 12…24 V c 12…48 V c 12…24 V c 12…24 V c 12…48 V c 12…24 V

Voltage limits (including ripple) c 10…30 V c 10…58 V c 10…30 V c 10…30 V c 10…58 V c 10…30 V
Switching capacity 0…100 mA (2) 0…200 mA (2) 0…100 mA (2) 0…100 mA (2) 0…200 mA (2) 0…100 mA (2)
Voltage drop, closed state y 1.8 V y 2.6 V y 1.8 V y 1.8 V y 2.6 V y 1.8 mA
Maximum switching frequency y 2 kHz y 1 kHz

Response y 0.5 ms
Recovery y 1 ms
(1) Sensors available pre-cabled with other cable lengths:

Length of cable Suffix to be added to references stated above for 2 m Weight increase
pre-cabled sensors
5m L1 0.120 kg
10 m L2 0.320 kg
Example: sensor XS7 G12PA140 with 5 m cable becomes XS7 G12PA140L1.
(2) With overload and short-circuit protection
2/78

connections 2
dc supply, solid-state output
Dimensions
XSp G12pA140, XSp G12pC440
Rear view
26
4 18 4 12
4
(3)
10
(1)
16
40
2
30
32
(2)
4
(1) 1 elongated hole 3.1 x 5.1.

(2) Pre-cabled L = 2 m.
(3) 2 holes M3 x 5.
XSp G12pA140S
Rear view
26
4 18 4 12
(2)
4
10
(1)
16
40
30
32
45
4
M8
31
(1) 1 elongated hole 3.1 x 5.1
(2) 2 holes M3 x 5
Setting-up
e e e
Side by side Face to face Facing a metal object and mounting in a metal support
XS7 G flush mountable eu0 e u 15 eu6
XS8 G non flush mountable e u 10 e u 60 e u 12
Wiring scheme
3-wire c , NO output 4-wire c , NO + NC output
BN/1 BN/1 BN BN
BK(NO)
PNP BK/4 NPN PNP NPN
WH(NC) BK(NO)
BK/4
WH(NC)
BU/3 BU/3 BU BU
Connector
M8
4
1 3
2/79
characteristics 2
a.c. or d.c. supply
2 Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 2 mm 4 mm
References
2-wire c or a NO XS7 G12MA230 XS8 G12MA230
NC XS7 G12MB230 XS8 G12MB230
Weight (kg) 0.100 0.100

Characteristics
Product certifications CSA, UL, e
Connection Pre-cabled 2 x 0.34 mm2, length 2 m (1)
Differential travel 3...20 % of Sr
Storage temperature range - 40…+ 85 °C
Materials Case: PBT, cable: PVC
Vibration resistance 25 gn, amplitude ± 2 mm (f = 10 to 55 Hz)
Shock resistance 50 gn, duration 11 ms
Output state indication Yellow LED, on top of case
Rated supply voltage a 24…240 V (50/60 Hz) or c 24…210 V

Voltage limits (including ripple) a or c 20…264 V
Switching capacity 5…200 mA (2)

Residual current, open state y 0.8 mA / 24 V, 1.5 mA / 120 V

Maximum switching frequency a 25 Hz or c 250 Hz
Response y 1 ms
Recovery y 2 ms
(1) Sensors available pre-cabled with other cable lengths:

Length of cable Suffix to be added to references stated above Weight increase
for 2 m pre-cabled sensors
5m L1 0.120 kg
10 m L2 0.320 kg
Example: sensor XS7 G12MA230 with 5 m cable becomes XS7 G12MA230L1.
(2) As these sensors do not incorporate overload or short-circuit protection, it is essential to
connect a 0.4 A quick-blow fuse in series with the load.
2/80

connections 2
a.c. or d.c. supply
Dimensions
XSp G12Mp230
Rear view
26
4 18 4 12
4
(3)
10
(1)
16
40
2
30
32
(2)
4
(1) 1 elongated hole 3.1 x 5.1.

(2) Pre-cabled L = 2 m.
(3) 2 holes M3 x 5.
Setting-up
e e e
Side by side Face to face Facing a metal object and mounting in a metal support
XS7 G flush mountable eu0 e u 15 eu6
XS8 G non flush mountable e u 10 e u 60 e u 12
Wiring scheme
2-wire a or c , NO or NC output
BN
BU
2/81
characteristics 2
Plastic case, form C, plug-in
5 position turret head
d.c. supply
2
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 15 mm Increased range 15 mm 20 mm Increased range 20 mm
model 20 mm model 40 mm
References
4-wire c PNP NO + NC XS7 C40PC440 XS7 C40PC449 – XS8 C40PC440 XS8 C40PC449 –
(complementary outputs)
NPN NO + NC XS7 C40NC440 XS7 C40NC449 – XS8 C40NC440 XS8 C40NC449 –
2-wire c NO – – XS7 C40DA210 – – XS8 C40DA210

(non polarised)
NO or NC – – XS7 C40DP210 – – XS8 C40DP210
programmable
Weight (kg) 0.220 0.220 0.220 0.220 0.220 0.220
Characteristics
Connection Screw terminals, clamping capacity: 2 or 4 x 1.5 mm2 (1)
Operating zone 0…12 mm 0…16 mm 0…12 mm 0…16 mm 0…32 mm 0…16 mm
Repeat accuracy ≤ 3% of real sensing distance (Sr)

Differential travel 3…20% of real sensing distance (Sr)
Status indication Output Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED
Supply on Green LED – Green LED –
Current consumption, no-load y 10 mA – y 10 mA –
Switching capacity 0…200 mA 1.5…100 mA 0…200 mA 1.5…100 mA

With overload and short-circuit protection
Residual current, open state – y 0.5 mA – y 0.5 mA
Voltage drop, closed state y2V y4V y2V y4V
Maximum switching frequency 1000 Hz 1500 Hz 1000 Hz 500 Hz 800 Hz
Delays First-up y 5 ms y 5 ms y 5 ms y 5 ms y 5 ms
Response y 0.3 ms y 2 ms y 0.3 ms < 1 ms y 2 ms
Recovery y 0.7 ms y 5 ms y 0.7 ms < 1 ms y 7 ms
(1) Cable gland not included with sensor. For suitable 13P cable gland (XSZ PE13), see page 2/102.
2/82

schemes 2

d.c. supply
Dimensions
XS7 C40Dp210, XS8 C40Dp210 XS7 C40pC44p, XS8 C40pC44p
40 40
20
20
40
40
(3) (4)
2
25
25
117
117
60
60
(1) (2) (1)
(2) (3)
16 = 30 = 16 = 30 =
24 40 24 40
41 41
(1) Output LED. (1) Output LED.

(2) 1 tapped entry for 13P cable gland. (2) Supply LED.
(3) 2 elongated holes Ø 5.3 x 7. (3) 1 tapped entry for 13P cable gland.
Setting-up
e e e

Sensors flush XS7 e u 40 e u 120 e u 45
mountable in metal XS7 increased range model e u 80 e u 240 e u 60
Sensors non flush XS8 e u 80 e u 160 e u 60
mountable in metal XS8 increased range model e u 160 e u 320 e u 120
Wiring schemes
2-wire c (non polarised), NO or NC output 4-wire c, NO + NC output
depending on position of link
+ +
1 1
5 +/– 4 (NO)
PNP NPN
2 (NC) 4 (NO)
6 –/+ 2 (NC)
3 3
– –
NO NO
NC NC
2/83
characteristics 2
a.c. or d.c. supply
2
AC AC/DC AC AC/DC
References
2-wire a NO or NC programmable XS7 C40FP260 – XS8 C40FP260 –
2-wire a or c NO or NC programmable – XS7 C40MP230 – XS8 C40MP230

universal model
Weight (kg) 0.220 0.220 0.220 0.220
Characteristics

Connection Screw terminals, clamping capacity: 2 x 1.5 mm2 (1)
Operating zone 0…12 mm 0…16 mm
Repeat accuracy ≤ 3% of real sensing distance (Sr)

Differential travel 3...20% of real sensing distance (Sr)
Rated supply voltage a 24…240 V, a 24…240 V, a 24…240 V, a 24…240 V,

with protection against reverse polarity 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz or 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz or
c 24…210 V c 24…210 V
Voltage limits (including ripple) a 20…264 V a or c 20…264 V a 20…264 V a or c 20…264 V
Current consumption, no-load –
Switching capacity 5…500 mA (2) a 5…300 mA or 5…500 mA (2) a 5…300 mA or

(2 A inrush) c 5…200 mA (2) (2 A inrush) c 5…200 mA (2)
Residual current, open state y 1.5 mA 0.8 mA on 24 V y 1.5 mA 0.8 mA on 24 V
1.5 mA on 120 V 1.5 mA on 120 V
Maximum switching frequency 25 Hz a 25 Hz, c 50 Hz 25 Hz a 25 Hz, c 50 Hz

Response y 30 ms
Recovery y 20 ms
(1) Cable gland not included with sensor. For suitable 13P cable gland (XSZ PE13),
see page 2/102.
(2) These sensors do not incorporate overload or short-circuit protection and therefore, it is
essential to connect a “quick-blow” fuse in series with the load, see page 2/102.
2/84

schemes 2

a.c. or d.c. supply
Dimensions
XS7 C40FP260, XS7 C40MP230, XS8 C40FP260, XS8 C40MP230
40
20
40
(3)
2
25
117
60
(1)
(2)
16 = 30 =
24 40
41
(1) Output LED.

(2) 1 tapped entry for 13P cable gland.
Setting-up
e e e

XS7 flush mountable e u 40 e u 120 e u 45
XS8 non flush mountable e u 80 e u 160 e u 60
Wiring schemes
2-wire a programmable, NO or NC output 2-wire a or c programmable, NO or NC output depending on position of link
depending on position of link
5 5
6 6
NO NO
NC NC
2/85
characteristics 2
Plastic case, form C, cubic 40, multi-position
d.c. supply
References
2-wire c NO XS7 T4DA210 – XS7 T4DA214LD – XS7 T4DA214LD01 – –
(non polarised)
4-wire c PNP NO + NC – XS7 T4PC440 – XS7 T4PC440LD – XS8 T4PC440 XS8 T4PC440LD
(complementary
outputs) NPN NO + NC – XS7 T4NC440 – XS7 T4NC440LD – XS8 T4NC440 XS8 T4NC440LD
Weight (kg) 0.265 0.265 0.220 0.220 0.200 0.265 0.220

Characteristics
Conforming to IEC 60529
Connection Pre-cabled 2 x 0.5 mm2 4 x 0.34 mm2 – 4 x 0.34 mm2 –

length 2 m (1) length 2 m (1) length 2 m (1)
Remote M12 – Cable: length 0.8 m Cable: length 0.15 m – Cable:
connector length 0.8 m
Operating zone 0…12 mm 0…16 mm
Repeat accuracy ≤ 3 % of real sensing distance (Sr)
Differential travel 3…20 % of real sensing distance (Sr)
Supply/output state indication Yellow LED, rear mounted

Current consumption, no-load – y 10 mA – y 10 mA – y 10 mA
Switching capacity 1.5…100 mA 0…200 mA 1.5…100 mA 0…200 mA 1.5…100 mA 0…200 mA
With overload and short-circuit protection
Residual current, open state y 0.7 mA y 0.1 mA y 0.7 mA y 0.1 mA y 0.7 mA y 0.1 mA
Voltage drop, closed state y 5.2 V y2V y 5.2 V y2V y 5.2 V y2V
Maximum switching frequency 150 Hz 1000 Hz 150 Hz 1000 Hz 150 Hz 1000 Hz

Delays First-up y 5 ms y 7 ms y 5 ms y 7 ms y 5 ms y 7 ms
Response y 2 ms y 0.3 ms y 2 ms y 0.3 ms y 2 ms y 0.3 ms
Recovery y 5 ms y 0.7 ms y 5 ms y 0.7 ms y 5 ms y 0.7 ms
(1) Sensors pre-cabled with other cable lengths :

Length of cable Suffix to be added to references stated above for 2 m pre-cabled sensors Weight increase
5m L1 0.120 kg
10 m L2 0.320 kg
Example: sensor XS7 T4DA210 with 5 m cable becomes XS7 T4DA210L1
Other versions Inductive proximity sensors specifically designed for other operating temperatures. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
2/86

Plastic case, form C, cubic 40, multi-position
schemes 2
d.c. supply
Dimensions
XSp T4ppppp, XSp T4pppppLD, XS7 T4pppppLD01
Plate mounted Bracket mounted
40 40 40 40
43
40
40
44
(1) (1)
55
25
24
53 = =
31 = =
45 30
30
55
(1) LED.
Alternative positions of head
M3 x 6 CHC screw M3 x 6 CHC screw
0 0 0 0
M3 x 6 CHC screw M3 x 6 CHC screw
Setting-up
e e e

Flush mountable in metal XS7 T, 2-wire e u 40 e u 120 e u 45
XS7 T, 4-wire e u 40 e u 120 e u 45
Non flush mountable in XS8 T, 4-wire e u 60 e u 160 e u 60
metal
Wiring schemes
Connector Pre-cabled 2-wire c, NO output 4-wire c, NO + NC output
4 3 BU : Blue BN/1 BN/1 +

BN/1 BK/4 (NO)
BN : Brown PNP NPN
BK : Black WH/2 (NC) BK/4 (NO)
1 2 WH : White BU/4 WH/2 (NC)
–
BU/3 BU/3
2/87
characteristics 2
Flat sensor, flush mountable, increased range,
300 mA switching capacity
Form D, DIN rail mounting, solid-state output
Sensor Flush mountable in metal
Dimensions (mm) 80 x 80 x 40
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) 50 mm (not flush mounted: 42 mm)
References
2-wire c (non polarised) NO XS7 D1A3CAM12DIN
Weight (kg) 0.374

Characteristics
Product certifications e, CSA, UL: pending
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 67 double insulation i
Temperature Operation - 25…+ 70 °C
Operating zone 0…40 mm (not flush mounted: 0…35 mm)
Residual current, open state y 0.5 mA
Switching capacity 1.5…300 mA with overload and short-circuit protection
Response y 2 ms
Recovery y 5 ms
2/88

Flat sensor, flush mountable, increased range,
schemes 2
300 mA switching capacity

Form D, DIN rail mounting, solid-state output
Dimensions
XS7 D1A3CAM12DIN
40 80
30 65 (1)
65 2
80
18
5,1 (2)
(1) Output LED

Setting-up
Face to face Side by side Back to back Facing a metal object
e e e
e
Flush mounted 450 140 90 150

Not flush mounted 450 180 180 150
Flush/non flush conditions Wiring schemes

In A37 steel 2-wire NO/M12 XS7 D1A3CAM12DIN
4 3 BN/1 +/-
NO
d > 10 mm
1 2 BK/4 -/+
Sn Su Sn Su
42 mm 35 mm 50 mm 40 mm
2/89

Sensors for welding machine applications (1)
dimensions, Cylindrical type. Metal case, Teflon coated steel, threaded
schemes 2
Sensors flush mountable in metal
b c
a
2
Lengths (mm): a = 60 a = 60
a = Overall b = 40 b = 40
b = Threaded section Ø = M12 x 1 Ø = M18 x 1
c = For non flush mountable sensors
Teflon front face Teflon front face

References
3-wire c PNP, NO XS1 M12PAW01D XS1 M18PAW01D
Weight (kg) 0.025 0.060
Characteristics
Operating zone 0…1.6 mm 0…4 mm
Output state indication Yellow LED, 4 viewing ports at 90°
Switching capacity 0...250 mA with overload and short-circuit protection
Immunity to electromagnetic fields y 140 mT
Delays First-up y 10 ms y 10 ms
Response y 0.1 ms y 0.2 ms
Recovery y 0.4 ms y 0.6 ms
Wiring schemes
M12 connector 3-wire c, PNP, NO output
4 3 1 +
PNP 4 (NO)
1 2
3 –

(1) Sensors particularly resistant to welding machine electromagnetic fields.
Accessories:
page 2/102
2/90

Sensors for welding machine applications (1)
setting-up 2
Cylindrical type. Metal case, Teflon coated steel, threaded
Sensors non flush mountable in metal
2
a = 60 a = 60
b = 40 b = 36
Ø = M30 x 1.5 c=4
Ø = M12 x 1
Teflon front face Teflon front face

10 mm 4 mm
XS1 M30PAW01D XS2 M12PAW01D
0.145 0.025
e, UL, CSA
M12 connector
IP 67
0…8 mm 0…3.2 mm
3% of Sr
1…20% of Sr
- 25…+ 70 °C
Yellow LED, 4 viewing ports at 90°
c 12…24 V with protection against reverse polarity
c 10…36 V
0…250 mA with overload and short-circuit protection
y 2.5 V
y 15 mA
y 140 mT
250 Hz 1000 Hz
y 10 ms y 10 ms
y 0.7 ms y 0.2 ms
y 5 ms y 0.4 ms
Setting-up
Minimum mounting distances (mm) Side by side Face to face Facing a metal object Mounted in a metal
support
e e
h
XS1 M12 flush mountable eu0 eu7 e u6 d u 12, h u0

XS1 M18 flush mountable eu0 e u 16 e u9 d u 18, h u0
XS1 M30 flush mountable eu0 e u 20 e u 20 d u 30, h u0
XS2 M12 non flush mountable e u 15 eu9 e u 11 d u 36, h u8
Fixing nut tightening torque: XS1 M12, XS2 M12: < 15 N.m, XS1 M18: < 35 N.m, XS1 M30: < 50 N.m
2/91
characteristics, Application series

Sensors for welding machine applications
dimensions, schemes, 2
Cylindrical type. Metal case, plain, with shoulder
c
d
b
a
2 Lengths (mm) :
a = Overall
Ø = 12
a = 55
b = To shoulder b = 50
c = Removal c = 9 (threaded)
d = Ø shoulder d = 15 hexagonal
References
2-wire c 1-4 NO XSL C1401393L1 XSL C1401393L3 XSL C1401393L4
(non polarised)
Supply to terminals
Weight (kg) 0.050 0.065 0.050
Characteristics
Connection Remote M12 connector, Remote M12 connector, Remote M12 connector,
length of cable: 1.2 m length of cable: 0.8 m length of cable: 0.15 m
Operating zone 0…2.4 mm
Differential travel 1…15 % of Sr
Output state indication LED (yellow), annular
Switching capacity 1.5…100 mA with overload and short-circuit protection
Residual current, open state ≤ 0.5 mA
Current consumption, no load –
Delays First-up : ≤ 5 ms ; response : 0.5 ms ; recovery : ≤ 0.5 ms
Wiring schemes
2-wire c , non polarised, NO output
BN/1 +/–
BK/4 –/+
2/92
2
2
Ø = 18
a = 40
Ø = 18
a = 45
2
b = 35 b = 35
c = 0 (PPS front face) c = 20 (Teflon front face and case)
d = Ø 22 d = Ø 22
6.3 mm 10 mm 10 mm
XSL C1401392L1 XSL C1401405L3 XSL C1401405L4
0.100 0.065 0.050
Remote M12 connector, Remote M12 connector, Remote M12 connector,

length of cable: 1.2 m length of cable: 0.8 m length of cable: 0.15 m
IP 67
0…5 mm 0…8 mm
3 % of Sr
1…15 % of Sr
- 25…+ 70 °C
LED (yellow), annular
c 12…48 V
c 10…58 V
1.5…100 mA with overload and short-circuit protection
≤4V
≤ 0.5 mA
–
100 Hz
First-up : ≤ 10 ms ; response : ≤ 10 ms ; recovery : ≤ 2 ms
Setting up
support
e d
e e
h
XSL C Ø 12 (flush e ≥ 10 e ≥ 60 e ≥ 15 d = 12, h = 0

mountable)
Ø 18 (non flush e ≥ 16 e ≥ 96 e ≥ 24 d = 54, h = 16
mountable)
2/93
References 2
Osiprox® Application, food and beverage

processing series
Cylindrical, stainless steel, non flush mountable
DF532016

(Sn) mm kg
7 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS2 12SAPAL2 0.075
(1)
M12 connector XS2 12SAPAM12 0.035
XS2 ppSAppL2
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS2 12SANAL2 0.075
(1)
DF532015
M12 connector XS2 12SANAM12 0.035

2
(Sn) mm kg
XS2 ppSAppM12 12 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS2 18SAPAL2 0.120
(1)
534440

(1)
Ø 18, plain
XS2 L2SAppL2 Sensing dist. Function Output Connection Reference Weight
(Sn) mm kg
12 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS2 L2SAPAL2 0.120
822116
(1)
M12 connector XS2 L2SAPAM12 0.060
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS2 L2SANAL2 0.120

(1)
M12 connector XS2 L2SANAM12 0.060
XS2 30SAppL2 Ø 30, threaded M30 x 1.5

(Sn) mm kg
503663
22 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS2 30SAPAL2 0.205

(1)
XUZ B2005
(1)
523363
Accessories (2)
kg
Plastic fixing clamp, Ø 18 sensor, XUZ B2005 0.007
24.1 mm centres, with locking screw plain case
XSZ BS12 Stainless steel fixing bracket Ø 12 sensor XSZ BS12 0.060
Ø 18 sensor XUZ A118 0.045
Ø 30 sensor XSZ BS30 0.080
805817
Connecting cables
Description Type Cable length Reference Weight
m kg
XUZ A118
Pre-wired M12 connectors Straight 2 XZC PA1141L2 0.090
Female, 4-pin, 5 XZC PA1141L5 0.210
stainless steel clamping ring
10 XZC PA1141L10 0.410
503663
Elbowed 2 XZC PA1241L2 0.090

5 XZC PA1241L5 0.210
10 XZC PA1241L10 0.410
M12 jumper cable Straight 2 XZC RA151140A2 0.095

Male, 3-pin, 5 XZC RA151140A5 0.200
stainless steel clamping ring
XSZ BS30 Example: XS2 12SAPAL2 becomes XS2 12SAPAL5 with a 5 m long cable.
2/94
schemes, Osiprox® Application, food and beverage

setting-up, processing series
dimensions 2
Characteristics
Sensor type XS2 ppSAppM12 XS2 ppSAppL2
Ø 18 mm 0…9.6
Ø 30 mm 0…17.6
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 67 IP 68, double insulation i 2
DIN 40050 IP 69 K
Storage temperature °C - 40…+ 85 (1)
Materials Case Stainless steel, grade 316 L
Cable – Non-poisonous PVC, 3 x 0.34 mm2
Maximum switching XS2 12SApppp Hz 2500
frequency XS2 18SApppp and XS2 L2pppp Hz 1000
XS2 30SApppp Hz 500
(1) + 100 °C for cleaning and sterilization phases whilst not in service.
Wiring schemes
M12
4 3 BU: Blue
BN/1 + BN/1 +
PNP BK/4 (NO) NPN
BN: Brown BK/4 (NO)
BK: Black
1 2 BU/3 – BU/3 –
Setting-up
3 Sn
e e
e
Metal
Metal

Ø 12 e u 48 e u 84 e u 21
Ø 18 e u 72 e u 144 e u 36
Ø 30 e u 120 e u 264 e u 66
Dimensions
XS2 XSZ BS12 XUZ A118 XSZ BS30
(1) 2,5 Ø18,2 Ø 44,45
3,18
7,9
35
c
b
28 = = 7,92 28,6
a 5,6 11,1
25,4 50 38,10 Ø32,54
(1) LED 2,3 22,4 2,36 6,35
Ø12,5 15
1
16,5

6,5
60,33
=
30,2
XS2 a b a b c
10
Ø 12 54.5 38 61 37 5
=
Ø 18 60 40 70 42 8
6,5 20
Ø 30 62.5 41 70 36 13
Ø : 2 elongated holes Ø 7.14 x 29.36
2/95
References 2

processing series
523361

(Sn) mm kg
12 NO Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS2 18SAMAL2 0.120
(1)
XS2 18SAMpL2 1/2" - 20UNF XS2 18SAMAU20 0.060

connector
2 Ø 30, threaded M30 x 1.5

523362
Sensing distance Function Connection Weight

(Sn) mm kg
22 NO Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS2 30SAMAL2 0.205
(1)
1/2" - 20UNF XS2 30SAMAU20 0.145

XS2 18SAMpU20 connector
Connecting cables (2)

523218

m kg
Pre-wired Straight 5 XZC PA1865L5 0.210
connectors
1/2" - 20UNF 3-pin 10 XZC PA1865L10 0.410
female, stainless
steel clamping ring
XS2 30SAMpL2
10 XZC PA1965L10 0.485
Accessories
805817

kg
Stainless steel fixing bracket Ø 18 sensor XUZ A118 0.045
Ø 30 sensor XSZ BS30 0.080

XUZ A118
Example: XS2 18SAMAL2 becomes XS2 18SAMAL5 with a 5 m long cable.
523364
XSZ BS30
2/96

dimensions 2
Characteristics
Sensor type XS2 ppSAMpU20 XS2 ppSAMpL2
Ø 30 mm 0...17.6
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 67 IP 68, double insulation i
DIN 40050 IP 69 K 2
Storage temperature °C - 40…+ 85 (1)
Materials Case Stainless steel, grade 316 L
Cable – Non-poisonous PVC, 2 x 0.34 mm2
Maximum switching XS2 18SAMppp Hz a 25 or c 1000
frequency XS2 30SAMppp Hz a 25 or c 300
Response ms y 0.5
Recovery ms y 0.5 XS2 18SAMppp, y 2 XS2 30SAMppp
(1) + 100 °C for cleaning and sterilization phases whilst not in service.
Wiring schemes
1 BN: Brown
AC/DC : 2 BN/2
t :1
AC/DC : 3
2 3 BU/3
/1
See connection on page 9/45. t: on connector models only
Setting-up
3 Sn
e e
e
Metal
Metal

Object to be detected Ø 18 e u 72 e u 144 e u 36
Ø 30 e u 120 e u 264 e u 66
Dimensions
XS2 XSZ A118 XSZ BS30
(1)
2,5 50 Ø18,2
c
3,18
35
b
a Ø
28 = = 7,92 28,6
(1) LED 38,10 44,45
Pre-cabled (mm) Connector (mm) 2,36 6,35
XS2 a b a b c 15
Ø 18 60 40 72 44 8 1
Ø 30 62.5 41 74 40 13
6,5
60,33
16,5
=
10
Ø32,54
=
6,5 20
Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 7.14 x 29.36
2/97
References 2

processing series
Cylindrical, plastic, non flush mountable

DF535159

(Sn) mm kg
7 NO PNP Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS2 12AAPAL2 0.065
(1)
M12 connector XS2 12AAPAM12 0.030
NPN Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS2 12AANAL2 0.065

XS2 ppAAppL2 (1)
M12 connector XS2 12AANAM12 0.030
2
801167
(Sn) mm kg
(1)

XS2 ppAAppM12 (1)

(Sn) mm kg
DF535161

(1)

(1)
XS2 30AAppL2
Accessories (2)
kg
825994
Ø 18 XSZ B118 0.010
Ø 30 XSZ B130 0.020
XSZ Bppp
Connecting cables
m kg
Pre-wired M12 connectors Straight 2 XZC PA1141L2 0.090
Female, 4-pin,
stainless steel clamping ring 5 XZC PA1141L5 0.190
10 XZC PA1141L10 0.370
5 XZC PA1241L5 0.190
10 XZC PA1241L10 0.370
M12 jumper cable Straight 2 XZC RA151140A2 0.090

Male, 3-pin,
stainless steel clamping ring 5 XZC RA151140A5 0.190
Example: XS2 12AAPAL2 becomes XS2 12AAPAL5 with a 5 m long cable.
2/98

dimensions 2
Characteristics
Sensor type XS2 ppAAppM12 XS2 ppAAppL2
Ø 18 mm 0…9.6
Ø 30 mm 0…17.6
Differential travel
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529
% 1...15 of real sensing distance (Sr)
IP 67 IP 68, double insulation i
2
DIN 40050 IP 69 K
Materials Case PPS
Cable – PvR and 3 x 0.34 mm2
Output state indication Yellow LED: annular

Rated supply voltage V c 12…48 for T - 25…+ 70 °C
V c 12…24 for T + 70…+ 85 °C
Voltage limits V c 10…58 for T - 25…+ 70 °C
(including ripple) V c 10…36 for T + 70…+ 85 °C
Maximum switching XS2 12AApppp Hz 2500

frequency XS2 18AApppp Hz 1000
XS2 30AApppp Hz 500
Wiring schemes
M12
4 3 BU: Blue
BN/1 + BN/1 +
PNP BK/4 (NO) NPN
BN: Brown BK/4 (NO)
BK: Black
1 2 BU/3 – BU/3 –
Setting-up
3 Sn
e e
e
Metal
Metal

Ø 12 e u 48 e u 84 e u 21
Ø 18 e u 72 e u 144 e u 36
Ø 30 e u 120 e u 264 e u 66
Dimensions
XS2

b XS2 a b a b
a Ø 12 50 42 61 43
Ø 18 60 51 70 52
Ø 30 60 51 70 52
2/99
References 2

processing series
535156

(Sn) mm kg
12 NO Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS2 18AAMAL2 0.100
(1)
XS2 ppAAMpL2 1/2" - 20UNF XS2 18AAMAU20 0.040

connector
2 Ø 30, threaded M30 x 1.5

523382

(Sn) mm kg
22 NO Pre-cabled (L = 2 m) XS2 30AAMAL2 0.140
(1)
1/2" - 20UNF XS2 30AAMAU20 0.080

XS2 ppAAMpU20 connector
Accessories (2)
535158
kg
Ø 30 XSZ B130 0.020
XS2 30AAMpL2
Connecting cables
m kg
Pre-wired Straight 5 XZC PA1865L5 0.180
connectors
1/2" - 20UNF 3-pin
female, stainless 10 XZC PA1865L10 0.350
steel 316 L
825994
clamping ring
XSZ B1pp
10 XZC PA1965L10 0.350
Example: XS2 18AAMAL2 becomes XS2 18AAMAL5 with a 5 m long cable.
2/100

Cylindrical, plastic case, non flush mountable
dimensions 2
Characteristics
Sensor type XS2 ppAAMpU20 XS2 ppAAMpL2

Ø 30 mm 0...17.6
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529
DIN 40050
IP 67
IP 69K
IP 68, double insulation i 2
Materials Case PPS
Cable – PvR and 2 x 0.34 mm2
Output state indication Yellow LED: annular

Maximum switching XS2 18AAMppp Hz a 25 or c 1000
frequency XS2 30AAMppp Hz a 25 or c 300
Response ms y 0.5
Recovery ms y 0.5 XS2 18AAMppp, y 2 XS2 30AAMppp
Wiring schemes
1 BN: Brown
AC/DC : 2 BN/2
t :1
AC/DC : 3
2 3 BU/3
/1
See connection on t: on connector models only
page 9/45.
Setting-up
3 Sn
e e
e
Metal
Metal

Ø 18 e u 72 e u 144 e u 36
Object to be detected Ø 30 e u 120 e u 264 e u 66
Dimensions
XS2
(1)
b
a
(1) LED
XS2 a b a b
Ø 18 60 51 70 52
Ø 30 60 51 70 52
2/101
References 2
Osiprox®
Accessories
Mounting and fixing accessories
561454
520691
Description For use with sensors Unit reference Weight

Type Diameter (mm) kg
“Clip” mounting plate XSp J – XSZ BJ00 0.003
Mounting possible without XSp F – XSZ BF00 0.005
XSZ Bp00 “clip” on tapped holes
XSp E – XSZ BE00 0.025
XSp C – XSZ BC00 0.060
“Clip” 90° mounting XSp J – XSZ BJ90 0.003
XSZ Bp90 bracket XSp F – XSZ BF90 0.005
2 Mounting possible without
“clip” on tapped holes
XSp E – XSZ BE90 0.025
520694

520695
Replacement bracket XSp E – XSZ BE10 0.060

Replaced: XS7 T2,
XS8 T2, XSE
Replaced: XS7 T4,
XS7 C40, XS8 T4,
XS8 C40 and XSC
XSp D (for XSD) (1) – XSZ BD10 0.065
Fixing clamp for XS9, XS6pppB2 – XSZ BPM12 0.015
XSZ BC10 XSZ BE10 remote control
Fixing clamps XS1 4 (smooth) XSZ B104 0.005
5 (M5 x 0.5) XSZ B105 0.005
562271
562270
XS1, XS2 6.5 (smooth) XSZ B165 0.005

XS1, XS2, XS4, XS5, 8 (M8 x 1) XSZ B108 0.006
XS6
XS1, XS2, XS4, XS5, 12 (M12 x 1) XSZ B112 0.006
XS6, XT1, XT4 18 (M18 x 1) XSZ B118 0.010
30 (M30 x 1.5) XSZ B130 0.020
XSZ BD10
XT1, XT4 32 (smooth) XUZ B32 0.050
Set of 2 fixing nuts, metal XS1 5 (M5 x 0.5) XSZ E105 0.010
nickel chromed XS1, XS2, XS5, XS6 8 (M8 x 1) XSZ E108 0.015
XSZ BPM12 XS1, XS2, XT1, XS5, 12 (M12 x 1) XSZ E112 0.015
825994
XS6 18 (M18 x 1) XSZ E118 0.020

30 (M30 x 1.5) XSZ E130 0.050
Set of 2 fixing nuts, XS1, XS2, XS5, XS6 8 (M8 x 1) XSZ E308 0.015
stainless steel XS1, XS2, XT1, XS5, 12 (M12 x 1) XSZ E312 0.015
XSZ B1pp XS6 18 (M18 x 1) XSZ E318 0.020
825995
30 (M30 x 1.5) XSZ E330 0.050

Set of 2 fixing nuts, XS4 8 (M8 x 1) XSZ E208 0.002
825996
plastic 12 (M12 x 1) XSZ E212 0.003

XS4, XT4 18 (M18 x 1) XSZ E218 0.004
XSZ P1pp 30 (M30 x 1.5) XSZ E230 0.005
XSZ A0pp Adaptor collar Ø 20 XSp, XTp 18 (M18 x 1) XSZ A020 0.005
Ø 34 XSp, XTp 30 (M30 x 1.5) XSZ A034 0.005
Protection accessories
Cable sleeve adaptor XSp, XTp 12 (M12 x 1) XSZ P112 0.005
(CNOMO type) 18 (M18 x 1) XSZ P118 0.005
30 (M30 x 1.5) XSZ P130 0.010
825997
Outer cover (IP 68) XT7 C – XSC Z01 0.100

Thread adaptor XSp, XTp 30 (M30 x 1.5) XTA Z30 0.035
No. 13 plastic cable gland Clamping capacity Ø 9 to 12 mm XSZ PE13 0.010
Protective cover M12 universal connectors XSZ F10 0.020
Sold in lots of 50
Mounting parts
Thread inserts for rear XSpE M3 XSZ VF03 0.002
fixing XSpC M4 XSZ VF04 0.005
XSpD M5 XSZ VF05 0.006
XSC Z01
Fuses (for unprotected 2-wire c/a sensors)
Description Type Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight
kg
821980
Cartridge fuses 0.4 A “quick-blow” 10 XUZ E04 0.001

5 x 20 0.63 A “quick-blow” 10 XUZ E06 0.001
520935
0.8 A “quick-blow” 10 XUZ E08 0.001

Fuse terminal block for XUZ E0p 50 AB1 FU10135U 0.040
(1) Depth adjustment block for converting from 80 x 80 x 26 mm format to 80 x 80 x 40 mm format.
XSZ F10 XTA Z30
Also enables clipping onto 35 mm “omega” rail.
2/102
Dimensions 2
Osiprox®
Accessories
XSZ BJ00 XSZ BF00
5,1 12 M3 7 6,1 20 M3
M3 9,9
19 M3
27,5
8
15
5,5 22,5
34,5
2
XSZ BE00 XSZ BC00
11,9 M3 10 M5 16 (1)
27,4
17
6
30
42
10
5,5 (1)
48,5
4,5 77,2
12
(1) 2 M3 x 12 screws supplied. (1) 4 M4 x 14 screws supplied.
XSZ BJ90 XSZ BF90
10,5 34,5
8 22,5 15 32
4
14
16
4,5
5,1 12 M3 18,5 6,1 20 M3
M3 M3
M3
XSZ BE90 XSZ BC90
30,8 16 (1)
23,9 (1)
27,4
17
30
10
6
42
10 M3 29,4
36,9 M5 44,3
44,4
(1) 2 M3 x 12 screws supplied. (1) 4 M4 x 14 screws supplied.
2/103
Osiprox®
Accessories
XSZ BE10 XSZ BC10
M5
M3 35
42,5
30
41
2
25 39 2,8 42
41
55
XSZ BD10 (for mounting on XSp Dpppp) XSZ BPM12
M5 65 Ø2
9 13,3
12,5
11 1,5 18
83,7
65
80
26
14 80
XSZ-B104, B105 XSZ-B108, B112, B118, B130, B165
15 38,3 XSZ a a1 b b1 b2 Ø
B108 19.9 14.5 14 12.5 7.5 8
B112 21.9 14.5 16 15.5 8.5 12
6,7
8
b1
b
4
B118 26 15.7 22.3 20.1 11.5 18

b2
3 B130 39 21.7 35.5 31 18.5 30

3,5 B165 19.9 14.5 14 12.5 7.5 6.5
8,5 (1)
a1 (1) 2 elongated holes Ø 4 x 8 mm.
12,3
= 9 = a
4 22 8
XSZ Ø
B104 4
B105 5
Note: for saddle clamps XSZ B118 and XSZ B130, see
setting-up recommendations page 2/17.
2/104
Osiprox®
Accessories
XSZ B32 XSZ A0pp
(2)
(2)
a 20
40
25(1)
a1
= = = 50 =
15 60 2
XSZ a a1
(1) Maximum value A020 Ø18 Ø20
(2) 2 holes Ø 5.5 A034 Ø30 Ø34
Clamp supplied with two M5 screws, HM head
XSZ P112, P118, P130 XSC Z01
XSZ h Ø d1 Ø d2 (1)
P112 7 12 16.8
P118 6.2 18 23
P130 6.2 30 34.4
49
34
22
h
134 = =
147 69
48 60
8 12,5 7 12,5 8
=
XTA Z30
50,8 9,4 44,4

60
25,4
33,3
1,5 M30 x 1,5

31
2
=
1" 1/2 12UNF (1) No. 13 plastic cable gland
2/105
Detection curves 2
Cylindrical type proximity sensors

sensing distance (mm) Sensor (mm) Standard steel target (mm) Operating zone (mm)
Ø4 5x5x1 0…0.8
Ø5 5x5x1 0…0.8
3 2 3 Ø 6.5 8x8x1 0…1.2
Ø8 8x8x1 0…1.2
2 2 Ø 12 12 x 12 x 1 0…1.6
pick-up points
2 1 1 1 drop-out points (object approaching from the side)
1 Ø 4 (plain) XS1 and Ø 5 (M5 x 0.5) XS1
2 Ø 6.5 (plain) XS1 and Ø 8 (M8 x 1) XS5
0,5 3 Ø 12 (M12 x 1) XS5
mm 6 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 6 mm
15 Ø 18 18 x 18 x 1 0…4
Ø 30 30 x 30 x 1 0…8
pick-up points
2 2 drop-out points (object approaching from the side)
10
1 Ø 18 (M18 x 1) XS5
8 2 Ø 30 (M30 x 1.5) XS5
1 5 1
2,5
mm15 10 7,5 5 2,5 0 2,5 5 7,5 10 15mm

Sensor (mm) Standard steel target (mm) Operating zone (mm)
sensing distance (mm)
4 Ø 12 12 x 12 x 1 0…3.2
1 1 pick-up points
drop-out points (object approaching from the side)
1 Ø 12 (M12 x 1) XS4
1
0,5
mm 6 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 6 mm
15 Ø 18 24 x 24 x 1 0…6.4
2 2
Ø 30 45 x 45 x 1 0…12
pick-up points
10
1 Ø 18 (M18 x 1), XS4
1 1 2 Ø 30 (M30 x 1.5), XS4
8
2,5
mm15 10 7,5 5 2,5 0 2,5 5 7,5 10 15mm

Cylindrical type proximity sensors with increased sensing range
sensing distance (mm)
Sensor (mm) Standard steel target (mm) Operating zone (mm)
4 Ø 6.5 8x8x1 0…2
pick-up points
3 1 Ø 6.5 (plain) XS1 L06pp349
1 1
2
0,5
mm 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 mm
2/106
Detection curves (continued) 2
Flat type proximity sensors

3 XS7 J1A1D 5x5x1 0...2
pick-up points
2,5
2
1,5
1
2
0,5
mm -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 mm
6 XS7 F1A1D 5x5x1 0...4
5
pick-up points
4
mm -8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8 mm

12 XS7 E1A1D 8x8x1 0...8
10
XS7 E1A1C 8x8x1 0...8
pick-up points
8 drop-out points (object approaching from the side)
mm-10 -5 0 5 10 mm
XS7 C1A1D 18 x 18 x 1 0...12
16
XS7 C1A1C 18 x 18 x 1 0...12
14
pick-up points
10
8
6
4
2
mm -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 mm
XS7 D1A1D 30 x 30 x 1 0...32
45 XS7 D1A1C 30 x 30 x 1 0...32
40
pick-up points
30
25
20
15
10
5
mm -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40mm
2/107
Substitution table Inductive proximity sensors 2 2

functionalities 0
Old sensor New Osiprox sensor Old sensor New Osiprox sensor Old sensor New Osiprox sensor
Cylindrical type, d.c. supply

Diameter 6.5 mm XS1N08PA340L2 XS508B1PAL10 Diameter 12 mm
XS1L06NA140 XS106BLNAL2 XS1N08PA340LD XS508B1PAM8 (3) XS1D12NA140 XS112BLNAL2
XS1L06PA140 XS106BLPAL2 XS1N08PA340S XS508B1PAM8 XS1D12NA140D XS112BLNAM12

XS1N08PB340 XS508B1PBL2 XS1D12PA140 XS112BLPAL2
Diameter 8 mm XS1N08PB340D XS508B1PBM8 (3) XS1D12PA140D XS112BLPAM12
2 XS1D08NA140
XS1D08NA140D
XS108BLNAL2
XS108BLNAM12
XS1N08PB340L1
XS1N08PB340L2
XS508B1PBL5
XS508B1PBL10
XS1D12PA140L1 XS112BLPAL5
XS1D08PA140 XS108BLPAL2 XS1N08PB340S XS508B1PBM8 XS2D12NA140 XS212BLNAL2
XS1D08PA140D XS108BLPAM12 XS2D12NA140D XS212BLNAM12
XS1D08PA140L1 XS108BLPAL5 XS2M08NA340 XS608B1NAL2 XS2D12NA140L1 XS212BLNAL5

XS2N08NA340 XS1N08NA349 XS2D12PA140 XS212BLPAL2
XS1M08DA210 XS508B1DAL2 XS2N08NA340D XS1N08NA349D XS2D12PA140D XS212BLPAM12
XS1M08DA210D XS508B1DAM12 XS2N08NA340L1 XS1N08NA349L1 XS2D12PA140L1 XS212BLPAL5
XS1M08DA210L1 XS508B1DAL5 XS2N08NA340L2 XS1N08NA349L2
XS1M08DA210L2 XS508B1DAL10 XS2N08NA340S XS1N08NA349S XS1M12DA210 XS512B1DAL2
XS1M08DA210LD XS508B1DAM12 (1) XS2N08NB340 XS1N08NB349 XS1M12DA210D XS512B1DAM12
XS1M08DA214D XS508B1CAM12 XS2N08NB340D XS1N08NB349D XS1M12DA210L1 XS512B1DAL5
XS1M08DA214LD XS508B1CAL08M12 XS2N08NB340S XS1N08NB349S XS1M12DA210L2 XS512B1DAL10
XS1M08DB210 XS508B1DBL2 XS1M12DA210LD XS512B1DAM12 (1)
XS1M08DB210D XS508B1DBM12 XS2N08PA340 XS1N08PA349 XS1M12DA214D XS512B1CAM12
XS1M08DB210L1 XS508B1DBL5 XS2N08PA340D XS1N08PA349D XS1M12DA214LD XS512B1CAL08M12
XS1M08DB210LD XS508B1DBM12 (1) XS2N08PA340L1 XS1N08PA349L1 XS1M12DB210 XS512B1DBL2

XS2N08PA340L2 XS1N08PA349L2 XS1M12DB210D XS512B1DBM12
XS1M08NA370 XS608B1NAL2 XS2N08PA340S XS1N08PA349S XS1M12DB210L1 XS512B1DBL5
XS1M08NA370D XS608B1NAM12 XS2N08PB340 XS1N08PB349 XS1M12DB210L2 XS512B1DBL10
XS1M08NA370L1 XS608B1NAL5 XS2N08PB340D XS1N08PB349D XS1M12DB210LD XS512B1DBM12 (1)
XS1M08NB370 XS608B1NBL2 XS2N08PB340S XS1N08PB349S
XS1M08NB370D XS608B1NBM12 XS1M12NA370 XS612B1NAL2

XS3P08NA340 XS508B1NAL2 (4) XS1M12NA370D XS612B1NAM12
XS1M08PA370 XS608B1PAL2 XS3P08NA340D XS508B1NAM8 (3)(4) XS1M12NA370L1 XS612B1NAL5
XS1M08PA370D XS608B1PAM12 XS3P08NA340L1 XS508B1NAL5 (4) XS1M12NA370L2 XS612B1NAL10
XS1M08PA370L1 XS608B1PAL5 XS3P08NA370 XS608B1NAL2 (4) XS1M12NA370S XS612B1NAM12 (2)
XS1M08PA370L2 XS608B1PAL10 XS3P08NA370L1 XS608B1NAL5 (4) XS1M12NB370 XS612B1NBL2
XS1M08PA370LD XS608B1PAM12 (1) XS1M12NB370D XS612B1NBM12
XS1M08PA370S XS608B1PAM12 (2) XS3P08PA340 XS508B1PAL2 (4)
XS1M08PB370 XS608B1PBL2 XS3P08PA340D XS508B1PAM8 (3) (4) XS1M12PA370 XS612B1PAL2
XS1M08PB370D XS608B1PBM12 XS3P08PA340L1 XS508B1PAL5 (4) XS1M12PA370D XS612B1PAM12
XS1M08PB370L1 XS608B1PBL5 XS3P08PA370 XS608B1PAL2 (4) XS1M12PA370L1 XS612B1PAL5
XS1M08PB370L2 XS608B1PBL10 XS3P08PA370L1 XS608B1PAL5 (4) XS1M12PA370L2 XS612B1PAL10

XS1M12PA370LD XS612B1PAM12 (1)
XS1N08NA340 XS508B1NAL2 XS1M12PB370 XS612B1PBL2
XS1N08NA340D XS508B1NAM8 (3) XS1M12PB370D XS612B1PBM12
XS1N08NA340L1 XS508B1NAL5 XS1M12PB370L1 XS612B1PBL5
XS1N08NA340L2 XS508B1NAL10 XS1M12PB370L2 XS612B1PBL10
XS1N08NA340S XS508B1NAM8 XS1M12PB370LD XS612B1PAM12 (1)
XS1N08NB340 XS508B1NBL2
XS1N08NB340D XS508B1NBM8 (3) XS1N12NA340 XS512B1NAL2
XS1N08NB340S XS508B1NBM8 XS1N12NA340D XS512B1NAM12

XS1N12NA340L1 XS512B1NAL5
XS1N08PA340 XS508B1PAL2 XS1N12NA340L2 XS512B1NAL10
XS1N08PA340D XS508B1PAM8 (3) XS1N12NB340 XS512B1NBL2
XS1N08PA340L1 XS508B1PAL5 XS1N12NB340D XS512B1NBM12
(1) For the new sensor an integral M12 connector replaces the M12 connector on a 0.80 m flying lead.
(2) For the new sensor an M12 connector replaces the M8 connector.
(4) For the new Osiprox® sensor the metal case replaces the plastic case.
2/108

functionalities 0
Cylindrical type, d.c. supply (continued)

Diameter 12 mm XS3P12PA340L1 XS512B1PAL5 (4) XS1N18NA340L2 XS518B1NAL10 (6)
XS1N12PA340 XS512B1PAL2 XS3P12PA370 XS612B1PAL2 (4) XS1N18NB340 XS518B1NBL2
XS1N12PA340D XS512B1PAM12 XS3P12PA370L1 XS612B1PAL5 (4) XS1N18NB340D XS518B1NBM12
XS1N12PA340L1 XS512B1PAL5 XS1N18NB340L2 XS518B1NBL10
XS1N12PA340L2 XS512B1PAL10 Diameter 18 mm
XS1N12PA340LD
XS1N12PA340S
XS512B1PAM12 (1)
XS512B1PAM12 (2)
XS1D18NA140
XS1D18NA140D
XS118BLNAL2
XS118BLNAM12
XS1N18PA340
XS1N18PA340D
XS518B1PAL2
XS518B1PAM12
2
XS1N12PB340 XS512B1PBL2 XS1D18NA140L1 XS118BLNAL5 XS1N18PA340L1 XS518B1PAL5
XS1N12PB340D XS512B1PBM12 XS1D18PA140 XS118BLPAL2 XS1N18PA340L2 XS518B1PAL10
XS1N12PB340L1 XS512B1PBL5 XS1D18PA140D XS118BLPAM12 XS1N18PB340 XS518B1PBL2

XS1D18PA140L1 XS118BLPAL5 XS1N18PB340D XS518B1PBM12
XS2M12NA370 XS612B1NAL2 XS1N18PB340L2 XS518B1PBL10
XS2M12NA370D XS612B1NAM12 XS2D18NA140 XS218BLNAL2
XS2M12NA370L1 XS612B1NAL5 XS2D18NA140D XS218BLNAM12 XS2M18NA370 XS618B1NAL2
XS2M12NA370L2 XS612B1NAL10 XS2D18PA140 XS218BLPAL2 XS2M18NA370D XS618B1NAM12
XS2M12NB370 XS612B1NBL2 XS2D18PA140D XS218BLPAM12 XS2M18NA370L1 XS618B1NAL5
XS2M12NB370D XS612B1NBM12 XS2D18PA140L1 XS218BLPAL5 XS2M18NA370L2 XS618B1NAL10

XS2M18NB370 XS618B1NBL2
XS2M12PA370 XS612B1PAL2 XS1M18DA210 XS518B1DAL2 XS2M18NB370D XS618B1NBM12
XS2M12PA370D XS612B1PAM12 XS1M18DA210D XS518B1DAM12 XS2M18NB370L1 XS618B1NBL5
XS2M12PA370L1 XS612B1PAL5 XS1M18DA210L1 XS518B1DAL5 XS2M18NB370L2 XS618B1NBL10
XS2M12PA370L2 XS612B1PAL10 XS1M18DA210L2 XS518B1DAL10
XS2M12PB370 XS612B1PBL2 XS1M18DA210LD XS518B1DAM12 (1) XS2M18PA370 XS618B1PAL2
XS2M12PB370D XS612B1PBM12 XS1M18DA214D XS518B1CAM12 XS2M18PA370D XS618B1PAM12
XS2M12PB370L1 XS612B1PBL5 XS1M18DA214LD XS518B1CAL08M12 XS2M18PA370L1 XS618B1PAL5
XS2M12PB370S XS612B1PBM12 (2) XS1M18DB210 XS518B1DBL2 XS2M18PA370L2 XS618B1PAL10

XS1M18DB210D XS518B1DBM12 XS2M18PB370 XS618B1PBL2
XS2N12NA340 XS1N12NA349 XS1M18DB210LD XS518B1DBM12 (1) XS2M18PB370D XS618B1PBM12
XS2N12NA340D XS1N12NA349D XS2M18PB370L1 XS618B1PBL5
XS2N12NA340L1 XS1N12NA349L1 XS1M18NA370 XS618B1NAL2 XS2M18PB370L2 XS618B1PBL10
XS2N12NA340L2 XS1N12NA349L2 XS1M18NA370D XS618B1NAM12
XS2N12NB340 XS1N12NB349 XS1M18NA370L1 XS618B1NAL5 XS2N18NA340 XS1N18NA349 (8)
XS2N12NB340D XS1N12NB349D XS1M18NA370L2 XS618B1NAL10 XS2N18NA340D XS1N18NA349D (8)

XS1M18NB370 XS618B1NBL2 XS2N18NA340L1 XS1N18NA349L1 (8)
XS2N12PA340 XS1N12PA349 XS1M18NB370D XS618B1NBM12 XS2N18NA340L2 XS1N18NA349L2 (8)
XS2N12PA340D XS1N12PA349D XS1M18NB370L1 XS618B1NBL5 XS2N18NB340 XS1N18NB349 (8)
XS2N12PA340L1 XS1N12PA349L1 XS1M18NB370L2 XS618B1NBL10 XS2N18NB340D XS1N18NB349D (8)
XS2N12PA340L2 XS1N12PA349L2
XS2N12PB340 XS1N12PB349 XS1M18PA370 XS618B1PAL2 XS2N18PA340 XS1N18PA349 (8)
XS2N12PB340D XS1N12PB349D XS1M18PA370D XS618B1PAM12 XS2N18PA340D XS1N18PA349D (8)
XS2N12PB340L1 XS1N12PB349L1 XS1M18PA370L1 XS618B1PAL5 XS2N18PA340L1 XS1N18PA349L1 (8)

XS1M18PA370L2 XS618B1PAL10 XS2N18PA340L2 XS1N18PA349L2 (8)
XS3P12NA340 XS512B1NAL2 (4) XS1M18PA370LD XS618B1PAM12 (1) XS2N18PB340 XS1N18PB349 (8)
XS3P12NA340D XS512B1NAM12 (4) XS1M18PB370 XS618B1PBL2 XS2N18PB340D XS1N18PB349D (8)
XS3P12NA340L1 XS512B1NAL5 (4) XS1M18PB370D XS618B1PBM12
XS3P12NA370 XS612B1NAL2 (4) XS1M18PB370L1 XS618B1PBL5 XS3P18NA340 XS518B1NAL2 (4)
XS3P12NA370L1 XS612B1NAL5 (4) XS1M18PB370L2 XS618B1PBL10 XS3P18NA340D XS518B1NAM12 (4)

XS3P18NA340L1 XS518B1NAL5 (4)
XS3P12PA340 XS512B1PAL2 (4) XS1N18NA340 XS518B1NAL2 XS3P18NA370 XS618B1NAL2 (4)
XS3P12PA340D XS512B1PAM12 (4) XS1N18NA340D XS518B1NAM12 XS3P18NA370L1 XS618B1NAL5 (4)

XS1N18NA340L1 XS518B1NAL5
(6) For the new Osiprox® sensor the length of the product is different.
(8) For the new sensor, Sn = 10 mm instead of 8 mm.
2/109

functionalities 0
Cylindrical type, d.c. supply (continued)

Diameter 18 mm XS1N30NA340 XS530B1NAL2 XS3P30NA370 XS630B1NAL2 (4)
XS3P18PA340 XS518B1PAL2 (4) XS1N30NA340D XS530B1NAM12 XS3P30NA370L1 XS630B1NAL5 (4)
XS3P18PA340D XS518B1PAM12 (4) XS1N30NA340L1 XS530B1NAL5
XS3P18PA340L1 XS518B1PAL5 (4) XS3P30PA340 XS530B1PAL2 (4)
XS3P18PA370 XS618B1PAL2 (4) XS1N30NA340L2 XS530B1NAL10 XS3P30PA340D XS530B1PAM12 (4)
2 XS3P18PA370L1
XS3P18PA370L2
XS618B1PAL5 (4)
XS618B1PAL10 (4)
XS1N30NB340
XS1N30NB340D
XS530B1NBL2
XS530B1NBM12
XS3P30PA340L1
XS3P30PA340L2
XS530B1PAL5 (4)
XS530B1PAL10 (4)
XS3P30PA370 XS630B1PAL2 (4)
Diameter 30 mm XS1N30PA340 XS530B1PAL2 XS3P30PA370L1 XS630B1PAL5 (4)
XS1D30NA140 XS130BLNAL2 XS1N30PA340D XS530B1PAM12 XS3P30PA370L2 XS630B1PAL10 (4)
XS1D30NA140D XS130BLNAM12 XS1N30PA340L1 XS530B1PAL5
XS1D30PA140 XS130BLPAL2 XS1N30PA340L2 XS530B1PAL10
XS1D30PA140D XS130BLPAM12 XS1N30PB340 XS530B1PBL2
XS1D30PA140L1 XS130BLPAL5 XS1N30PB340D XS530B1PBM12
XS2D30NA140 XS230BLNAL2
XS2D30NA140D XS230BLNAM12 XS2M30NA370 XS630B1NAL2
XS2D30PA140 XS230BLPAL2 XS2M30NA370D XS630B1NAM12
XS2D30PA140D XS230BLPAM12 XS2M30NA370L1 XS630B1NAL5

XS2M30NA370L2 XS630B1NAL10
XS1M30DA210 XS530B1DAL2 XS2M30NB370 XS630B1NBL2
XS1M30DA210D XS530B1DAM12 XS2M30NB370D XS630B1NBM12
XS1M30DA210L1 XS530B1DAL5 XS2M30NB370L1 XS630B1NBL5
XS1M30DA210L2 XS530B1DAL10 XS2M30NB370L2 XS630B1NBL10
XS1M30DA210LD XS530B1DAM12 (1)

XS1M30DA214D XS530B1CAM12 XS2M30PA370 XS630B1PAL2
XS1M30DA214LD XS530B1CAL08M12 XS2M30PA370D XS630B1PAM12
XS1M30DB210 XS530B1DBL2 XS2M30PA370L1 XS630B1PAL5
XS1M30DB210D XS530B1DBM12 XS2M30PA370L2 XS630B1PAL10
XS1M30DB210LD XS530B1DBM12 (1)

XS2M30PB370 XS630B1PBL2
XS1M30NA370 XS630B1NAL2 XS2M30PB370D XS630B1PBM12
XS1M30NA370D XS630B1NAM12 XS2M30PB370L1 XS630B1PBL5
XS1M30NA370L1 XS630B1NAL5 XS2M30PB370L2 XS630B1PBL10
XS1M30NA370L2 XS630B1NAL10
XS1M30NB370 XS630B1NBL2 XS2N30NA340 XS1N30NA349 (9)
XS1M30NB370D XS630B1NBM12 XS2N30NA340D XS1N30NA349D (9)
XS1M30NB370L1 XS630B1NBL5 XS2N30NA340L1 XS1N30NA349L1 (9)
XS1M30NB370L2 XS630B1NBL10 XS2N30NA340L2 XS1N30NA349L2 (9)

XS2N30NB340 XS1N30NB349 (9)
XS1M30PA349D XS630B1PAM12 (5) XS2N30NB340D XS1N30NB349D (9)
XS1M30PA370 XS630B1PAL2
XS1M30PA370D XS630B1PAM12 XS2N30PA340 XS1N30PA349 (9)
XS1M30PA370L1 XS630B1PAL5 XS2N30PA340D XS1N30PA349D (9)
XS1M30PA370L2 XS630B1PAL10 XS2N30PA340L1 XS1N30PA349L1 (9)
XS1M30PA370LD XS630B1PAM12 (1) XS2N30PA340L2 XS1N30PA349L2 (9)
XS1M30PB370 XS630B1PBL2 XS2N30PB340 XS1N30PB349 (9)
XS1M30PB370D XS630B1PBM12 XS2N30PB340D XS1N30PB349D (9)
XS1M30PB370L1 XS630B1PBL5
XS1M30PB370L2 XS630B1PBL10 XS3P30NA340 XS530B1NAL2 (4)
XS3P30NA340D XS530B1NAM12 (4)
XS3P30NA340L1 XS530B1NAL5 (4)
2/110

functionalities 0
Cylindrical type, a.c. supply

Diameter 12 mm Diameter 18 mm Diameter 30 mm
XS1M12FA264 XS112BLFAL2 XS1M18FA264 XS118BLFAL2 XS1M30FA264 XS130BLFAL2
XS1M12FA264L2 XS112BLFAL10
XS1M18MA230 XS618B1MAL2 XS1M30MA230 XS630B1MAL2
XS1M12MA230 XS612B1MAL2 XS1M18MA230K XS618B1MAU20 XS1M30MA230K XS630B1MAU20
XS1M12MA230K
XS1M12MA230L1
XS612B1MAU20
XS612B1MAL5
XS1M18MA230L1
XS1M18MA230L2
XS618B1MAL5
XS618B1MAL10
XS1M30MA230L1
XS1M30MA230L2
XS630B1MAL5
XS630B1MAL10
2
XS1M12MA230L2 XS612B1MAL10 XS1M18MA239 XS618B1MAL2 (7) XS1M30MA239 XS630B1MAL2 (5)
XS1M12MA239 XS612B1MAL2 XS1M18MA239K XS618B1MAU20 (7) XS1M30MB230 XS630B1MBL2
XS1M12MA239K XS612B1MAU20 XS1M18MB230 XS618B1MBL2 XS1M30MB230K XS630B1MBU20
XS1M12MB230 XS612B1MBL2 XS1M18MB230K XS618B1MBU20 XS1M30MB230L1 XS630B1MBL5
XS1M12MB230K XS612B1MBU20 XS1M18MB230L1 XS618B1MBL5 XS1M30MB230L2 XS630B1MBL10
XS1M12MB230L1 XS612B1MBL5 XS1M18MB230L2 XS618B1MBL10
XS1M12MB230L2 XS612B1MBL10 XS2M30MA230 XS630B1MAL2

XS2M18MA230 XS618B1MAL2 XS2M30MA230K XS630B1MAU20
XS2M12MA230 XS612B1MAL2 XS2M18MA230K XS618B1MAU20 XS2M30MA230L1 XS630B1MAL5
XS2M12MA230K XS612B1MAU20 XS2M18MA230L1 XS618B1MAL5 XS2M30MA230L2 XS630B1MAL10
XS2M12MA230L1 XS612B1MAL5 XS2M18MA230L2 XS618B1MAL10 XS2M30MB230 XS630B1MBL2
XS2M12MA230L2 XS612B1MAL10 XS2M18MB230 XS618B1MBL2 XS2M30MB230K XS630B1MBU20
XS2M12MB230 XS612B1MBL2 XS2M18MB230K XS618B1MBU20 XS2M30MB230L1 XS630B1MBL5
XS2M12MB230K XS612B1MBU20 XS2M18MB230L1 XS618B1MBL5 XS2M30MB230L2 XS630B1MBL10
XS2M12MB230L1 XS612B1MBL5 XS2M18MB230L2 XS618B1MBL10
XS2M12MB230L2 XS612B1MBL10 XS3P30MA230 XS630B1MAL2 (4)

XS3P18MA230 XS618B1MAL2 (4) XS3P30MA230K XS630B1MAU20 (4)
XS3P12MA230 XS612B1MAL2 (4) XS3P18MA230K XS618B1MAU20 (4) XS3P30MA230L1 XS630B1MAL5 (4)
XS3P12MA230K XS612B1MAU20 (4) XS3P18MA230L1 XS618B1MAL5 (4) XS3P30MA230L2 XS630B1MAL10 (4)
XS3P12MA230L1 XS612B1MAL5 (4) XS3P18MA230L2 XS618B1MAL10 (4) XS3P30MB230 XS630B1MBL2 (4)
XS3P12MA230L2 XS612B1MAL10 (4) XS3P18MB230 XS618B1MBL2 (4) XS3P30MB230K XS630B1MBU20 (4)
XS3P12MB230 XS612B1MBL2 (4) XS3P18MB230A XS618B1MBU20 (4) XS3P30MB230L1 XS630B1MBL5 (4)
XS3P12MB230K XS612B1MBU20 (4) XS3P18MB230K XS618B1MBU20 (4)
XS3P12MB230L1 XS612B1MBL5 (4) XS3P18MB230L1 XS618B1MBL5 (4)
2/111
3/0
Contents 0
3 - Capacitive proximity sensors
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/2
b General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/4
Capacitive proximity sensors

b For detection of insulated materials
v Cylindrical type. Metal case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/8

v Block type, form C. Plastic case, plug-in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/12
b For detection of conductive materials
v Cylindrical type. Plastic case, d.c. or a.c. supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/10
3/1
Selection guide 3
Capacitive proximity sensors 3
Osiprox®
Detection of insulated or conductive materials
Applications: detection of any object irrespective of Detection of insulated materials:

material or conductivity, for example: metals, minerals, presence, passage of paper, cardboard, glass, etc.
wood, plastic, glass, cardboard, fluids, etc.
3
Form Cylindrical Threaded: M12, M18, M30
Plain: Ø 32
Block, dimensions (w x h x d) –
in mm
Case Metal
Sensing distance Flush mountable in metal sensors 2, 5, 10 or 15 (1)

(Sn) in mm
Non flush mountable in metal –
sensors
Degree of protection IP 63 or IP 67 (1)
Supply c p
a p
z –
Connection Pre-cabled p
Connector –
Screw terminals –
Type reference XT1
Pages 3/8 and 3/9
3/2
Selection guide 3
Osiprox®
Detection of insulated or conductive materials
Detection of conductive materials Detection of insulated materials:

Liquid level control presence, passage of paper, cardboard, glass, etc.
3
Threaded: M18, M30 –
Plain: Ø 32
– 40 x 117 x 41
Plastic Block type, form C

Plastic, turret head
– 15
8, 15 or 20 (1) –
IP 63 or IP 67 (1) IP 67
p p
p p
– –
p p
– –
– p
XT4 XT7
3/10 and 3/11 3/12 and 3/13
3/3
General 3
Presentation Advantages
b No physical contact with the object to be detected.
b High operating rates.
b Solid-state product, no moving parts (service life not related to number of operating cycles).
b Detection of any object irrespective of material or conductivity, for example: metals, minerals,
wood, plastic, glass, cardboard, leather, ceramic, fluids, etc.
Operating principle
Electrical field A capacitive proximity sensor basically comprises an oscillator whose capacitor is formed by 2
electrodes placed in front of the sensor.
Electrode
In open air (εr = 1), the capacitor capacitance is C0.

εr is the dielectric constant, which depends on the object material.
All materials where εr > 2 will be detected.
3
Air εr = 1
C = C0
Object εr > 2 When an object of any material (εr > 2) passes the sensing face of the sensor, it modifies the
coupling capacitance (C1).
This variation in capacitance (C1>C0) instigates the starting of the oscillator.
This in turn causes the output driver to operate and provides an output signal.
C = C1
Types of sensor Sensors flush mountable in support

(a) Metal case cylindrical sensors and plastic case block sensors.
For detection of insulated materials (wood, plastic, cardboard, glass, etc.).
These sensors are recommended for:
b comparatively short detection distances,
b applications requiring flush mounting of the sensor,
b detection of a non conductive material through a non conductive partition (for example:
detection of glass in a cardboard box).
Front face
(b) Contamination
(a): compensation field (suppression of external
contamination)
(b): main electrical field
Main electrode
Compensation electrode
Earth electrode
Sensors non flush mountable in support

Plastic case cylindrical sensors.
For detection of conductive materials (metal, water, liquids, etc.).
These sensors are recommended for:
b detection of conductive object materials at considerable distances,
b detection of a conductive material through an insulated partition,

Front face
Earth b detection of a non conductive material on or in front of an earthed metal part.
(a)
(a): electrical field
Main electrode
3/4
Terminology Nominal sensing distance Sn

Similar to that defined for inductive proximity sensors, the nominal sensing distance being
calculated using a standard mild steel square target, 1 mm thick.
The side dimension of the square plate is equal to that of sensor sensing face.
Sensitivity of the sensor

Ø 18 or Ø 30 mm cylindrical type and block type sensors incorporate a 20-turn sensitivity
adjustment potentiometer. This enables the sensitivity of the sensor to be adjusted to suit the
P type of object to be detected.
+ The sensors are factory preset for nominal sensitivity.
Depending on the application, adjustment of the sensitivity could be necessary as follows:

- increasing the sensitivity for objects which have a weak influence
(low dielectric constant, εr), for example: paper, cardboard, glass, plastic,
- decreasing the sensitivity for objects which have a strong influence
(high dielectric constant, εr), for example: metals, liquids.
P: sensitivity adjustment
potentiometer
Telemecanique capacitive proximity sensors incorporate compensation electrodes so as to
eliminate the effects of varying environmental conditions (humidity, pollution). 3
However, in the event of severe variations in the ambient conditions, do not increase the
sensitivity of the sensor such that it is set to its maximum operating limits.
An increase in sensitivity causes an increase in the switching hysteresis.
Operating distances
The operating distance of the sensor is related to the dielectric constant (εr) of the object material
to be detected.
The higher the value of εr, the easier the detection of the object will be.
The assured sensing distance depends on the object material: Sa = Sn x Fc

Sa = assured sensing distance,
Sn = nominal sensing distance of the sensor,
Fc = correction coefficient related to the object material.
Example: sensor XT1 M30PA372 used to detect a rubber object.

Sn = 10 mm, Fc = 0.3.
Assured sensing distance Sa = 10 x 0.3 = 3 mm.
The list below indicates the dielectric constant values of the most common object materials,
together with their correction factors (Fc) for the nominal sensing distance of the sensor.
Material εr Fc Material εr Fc
Acetone 20 0.8 Petrol 2.2 0.2
Air 1 0 Plexiglass 3.2 0.3
Alcohol 24 0.85 Polyester resin 2.8…8 0.2…0.6
Ammonia 15…25 0.75…0.85 Polystyrene 3 0.3
Cement (powder) 4 0.35 Porcelain 5…7 0.4…0.5
Cereals 3…5 0.3…0.4 Powdered milk 3.5...4 0.3...0.4
Ethylene glycol 38 0.95 Rubber 2.5…3 0.3
Epoxy resin 4 0.36 Salt 6 0.5
Flour 2.5…3 0.2…0.3 Sand 3...5 0.3...0.4
Glass 3...10 0.3...0.7 Sugar 3 0.3
Marble 6...7 0.5...0.6 Teflon 2 0.2
Mica 6…7 0.5…0.6 Vaseline 2...3 0.2...0.3
Nylon 4…5 0.3…0.4 Water 80 1
Oil 2.2 0.2 Wood (damp) 10…30 0.7…0.9
Paper 2…4 0.2…0.3 Wood (dry) 2…7 0.2…0.6
Paraffin 2…2.5 0.2
3/5
Environment
b Electromagnetic interference
The sensors undergo electromagnetic interference testing in accordance with the
recommendations of standard IEC 60947-5-2 (electrostatic discharges, radiated
electromagnetic fields, fast transients, impulse voltages).
b Thermal influences
It is advisable to remain within the values stated on the characteristic pages so as to avoid
sensing distance drift and possible incorrect operation of the sensor.
b Chemical agents
To ensure a long service life, it is essential that any chemicals coming into contact with the case
of the sensor are non corrosive.
b Mechanical shock
The sensors are tested in accordance with standard IEC 60068-2-27, 50 gn, duration 11 ms.
3
b Vibration
The sensors are tested in accordance with standard IEC-60068-2-6, amplitude ± 2 mm, F = 10
to 55 Hz, 25 gn at 55 Hz.
b Earthing
Earthing of an object that has a high conductivity increases the sensing distance.
Mounting precautions
In order to avoid mutual interference between sensors, it is recommended that the minimum
mounting distances stated for “Setting-up” are adhered to.
b Flush mountable cylindrical models

are suitable for applications where the head of the sensor needs to be flush with the support
surface.
Flush mountable model
b Non flush mountable cylindrical models

require an area of free space around the head of the sensor.
Non flush mountable model
Additional information relating to outputs

Refer to corresponding pages relating to inductive proximity sensors for:
b Terminology.
b Details and specific aspects of 2-wire and 3-wire type connection.
b Connecting several sensors in series or parallel.
3/6
Application example:
“Bottle filling”
b Bottle arrival
Bottles are fed on a conveyor for filling.
The sensors 1 (for insulated object materials) and 2 (for conductive object materials) are in an
unoperated state.
b Bottle filling
3
As soon as the bottle enters the detection zone of sensor 1, the filling operation commences.
Sensor 2 remains in the unoperated state.
b Filling complete
Sensor 2 detects that the required level has been reached and stops further filling.
3/7
References, Capacitive proximity sensors 3
characteristics, For detection of insulated materials

Cylindrical type. Metal case
dimensions, d.c. or a.c. supply
schemes, adjustment 3
Sensors flush mountable in support
b
a
Lengths (mm): a = 50 a = 60 a = 60
a = Overall b = 42 b = 51.5 b = 51.5
b = Threaded or plain section Ø = M12 x 1 Ø = M18 x 1 Ø = M18 x 1
DC DC AC
References
3 3-wire c PNP NO XT1 M12PA372 XT1 M18PA372 –
NC XT1 M12PB372 XT1 M18PB372 –
NPN NO XT1 M12NA372 XT1 M18NA372 –
2-wire a NO – – XT1 M18FA262
NC – – XT1 M18FB262
Weight (kg) 0.065 0.120 0.120

Characteristics
Connection Pre-cabled, 3 x 0.34 mm2, length = 2 m Pre-cabled, 2 x 0.34 mm2,
length = 2 m
Repeat accuracy y 0.1 of Sr
Differential travel y 0.2 of Sr
Operating temperature 0…+ 50 °C with 60% relative - 25…+ 70 °C
humidity
Rated supply voltage c 12…24 V a 24…240 V (50/60 Hz)
Voltage limits (including ripple) c 10…38 V a 20…264 V (50/60 Hz)
Switching capacity 0…300 mA with overload and short-circuit protection 5…300 mA (1)

Residual current, open state – 1.5 mA / 120 V
Response y 5 ms y 50 ms
Recovery y 5 ms y 50 ms
Wiring schemes, sensitivity adjustment
3-wire c, NO or NC output Sensitivity adjustment (not available on sensors XT1 M12ppppp)
XT1 MppPp372 XT1 MppNA372
1 Adjustment
BN/1 + BN/1 + potentiometer
PNP BK/4 (NO) NPN – + 2 Adjustment using
BK/2 (NC) BK/4 (NO)
suitable screwdriver
BU/3 – BU/3 –
2-wire a, NO or NC output
XT1 MppFp262 XT1 L32Fp262
1 2
BN BN
BU BU
GR/YW
(1) These sensors do not incorporate overload or short-circuit protection and therefore, it is essential to connect a 0.4 A “quick-blow” fuse in series with the load
(see page 2/102).
Accessories:
page 2/102
3/8
characteristics, For detection of insulated materials

Cylindrical type. Metal case
setting-up 3
d.c. or a.c. supply
a = 60 a = 60 a = 80
b = 51.5 b = 51.5 b = 60
Ø = M30 x 1.5 Ø = M30 x 1.5 Ø = 32 plain
DC AC AC
10 mm 10 mm 15 mm
XT1 M30PA372 – –
3
XT1 M30PB372 – –
XT1 M30NA372 – –
– XT1 M30FA262 XT1 L32FA262
– XT1 M30FB262 XT1 L32FB262
0.205 0.205 0.300
Pre-cabled, 3 x 0.34 mm2, length = 2 m Pre-cabled, 2 x 0.34 mm2, length = 2 m Pre-cabled, 3 x 0.34 mm2, length = 2 m
IP 67 IP 63
0…7.2 mm 0…10.8 mm
e
y 0.1 of Sr
y 0.2 of Sr
- 25…+ 70 °C
Yellow LED
c 12…24 V a 24…240 V (50/60 Hz) a 110…220 V (50/60 Hz)
c 10…38 V a 20…264 V (50/60 Hz) a 90…250 V (50/60 Hz)
0…300 mA with overload and short-circuit 5...300 mA (1) 15…250 mA (Ue = 110 V) (1)
protection 15…150 mA (Ue = 220 V) (1)
y2V y 5.5 V y9V
– y 1.5 mA / 120 V y 7 mA
y 10 mA – –
100 Hz 25 Hz 10 Hz
y 30 ms y 300 ms y 300 ms
y 5 ms y 50 ms y 50 ms
Setting-up
Minimum mounting distances (mm) Side by side Face to face Facing a metal object Mounted in support
d d
x
e e
h
XT1 M12 flush mountable eu0 e u 15 e u 15 d u 12, h u 0, x = 0

XT1 L32 flush mountable eu0 e u 100 e u 100 d u 32, h u 0, x u 2
Fixing nut tightening torque: XT1 M12: y 10 N.m, XT1 M18: y 25 N.m, XT1 M30: y 40 N.m
(see page 2/102).
3/9
characteristics, For detection of conductive materials

Cylindrical type. Plastic case
dimensions, d.c. or a.c. supply
schemes, adjustment 3
Sensors non flush mountable in support
b
a
Lengths (mm): a = 60 a = 60
a = Overall b = 51.5 b = 51.5
b = Threaded or plain section Ø = M18 x 1 Ø = M18 x 1
DC AC
References
3 3-wire c PNP NO XT4 P18PA372 –
NPN NO XT4 P18NA372 –
2-wire a NO – XT4 P18FA262
NC – –
Weight (kg) 0.100 0.100

Characteristics
Connection Pre-cabled, 3 x 0.34 mm2, length = 2 m Pre-cabled, 2 x 0.34 mm 2, length = 2 m
Voltage limits (including ripple) c 10…38 V a 24…264 V (50/60 Hz)
Switching capacity 0…300 mA with overload and short-circuit 5…300 mA (1)
protection
Residual current, open state – 1.5 mA / 120 V
Wiring schemes, sensitivity adjustment
3-wire c, NO output Sensitivity adjustment
XT4 PppPA372A XT4 PppNA372
1 Adjustment potentiometer
BN/1 + BN/1 + 2 Adjustment using suitable
PNP BK/4 (NO) NPN – + screwdriver
BK/4 (NO)
BU/3 – BU/3 –
2-wire a, NO or NC output
XT4 PppFp262, XT4 L32Fp262 1 2
BN
BU
(see page 2/102).
Accessories:
page 2/102
3/10
characteristics, For detection of conductive materials

Cylindrical type. Plastic case
setting-up 3
d.c. or a.c. supply
a = 60 a = 60 a = 80
b = 51.5 b = 51.5 b = 60
Ø = M30 x 1.5 Ø = M30 x 1.5 Ø = 32 plain
DC AC AC
15 mm 15 mm 20 mm
XT4 P30PA372 – –
3
XT4 P30NA372 – –
– XT4 P30FA262 XT4 L32FA262
– XT4 P30FB262 XT4 L32FB262
0.140 0.140 0.300
Pre-cabled, 3 x 0.34 mm2, length = 2 m Pre-cabled, 2 x 0.34 mm2, length = 2 m Pre-cabled, 2 x 0.34 mm2, length = 2 m
IP 67 IP 63
0…10.8 mm 0…14.4 mm
e
y 0.1 of Sr
y 0.2 of Sr
- 25…+ 70 °C
Yellow LED
c 12…24 V a 24…240 V (50/60 Hz) a 110…220 V (50/60 Hz)
c 10…38 V a 20…264 V (50/60 Hz) a 90…250 V (50/60 Hz)
0…300 mA with overload and short-circuit 5...300 mA (1) 15…250 mA (Ue = 110 V) (1)
protection 15…150 mA (Ue = 220 V) (1)
y2V y 5.5 V y9V
– y 1.5 mA / 120 V y 7 mA
y 10 mA – –
100 Hz 25 Hz 10 Hz
y 30 ms y 300 ms y 300 ms
Setting-up
Minimum mounting distances (mm) Side by side Face to face Facing a metal object Mounted in support
e e
h
XT4 P18 non flush mountable e u 40 e u 50 e u 80 d u 54, h u 15

XT4 P30 non flush mountable e u 60 e u 80 e u 100 d u 90, h u 20
XT4 L32 non flush mountable e u 60 e u 100 e u 100 d u 96, h u 25
Fixing nut tightening torque: XT4 P18: y 4 N.m, XT4 P30: y 10 N.m
(see page 2/102).
3/11
characteristics 3
For detection of insulated materials
Block type, form C. Plastic case, plug-in. Turret head
d.c. or a.c. supply
Sensors flush mountable in support
References
3-wire c PNP NO + NC XT7 C40PC440 –
3 NPN NO + NC XT7 C40NC440 –
2-wire a NO or NC – XT7 C40FP262

programmable
Weight (kg) 0.220 0.220
Characteristics
Connection Screw terminals, clamping capacity Screw terminals, clamping capacity
4 x 1.5 mm2 (1) 3 x 1.5 mm 2 (1)
Output state/supply indication Yellow LED: output + green LED: supply Yellow LED: output
Voltage limits (including ripple) c 10…58 V a 20…264 V
Switching capacity 0…200 mA with overload and short-circuit 5…350 mA (2 A inrush) (2)
protection
Residual current, open state – y 1.5 mA
(1) Cable gland not included with sensor. For suitable n° 13 plastic cable gland (XSZ PE13), see page 2/102.
(2) These sensors do not incorporate overload or short-circuit protection and therefore, it is essential to connect a “quick-blow” fuse in series with the load (see page
2/102).
3/12
Dimensions, Capacitive proximity sensors 3
setting-up, For detection of insulated materials

Block type, form C. Plastic case, plug-in. Turret head
schemes 3
d.c. or a.c. supply
Dimensions
XT7 C40ppppp
40
20
40
(4)
25
117
60
(2) (1)
3
(3)
16 = 30 =
24 40
41
(1) Output LED.

(2) Supply LED (depending on model).
(3) 1 tapped entry for n° 13 plastic cable gland.
Setting-up
Minimum mounting distances (mm) Side by side Face to face Flush mounting
e e Sensitivity adjustment
potentiometer
XT7 flush mountable e u 40 e u 120 To avoid interference by the

immediate surroundings, it may
be necessary to reduce the
sensitivity when flush mounting
the sensor.
Wiring schemes
3-wire c 2-wire a programmable
NO + NC output NO or NC output, depending on position of link
5
+ + NO NO
1 1
2 4
PNP NC NPN NO 6
NO NC
4 2 NC NC
3 3 7
– –
3/13
4/0
Contents 0
4 - Ultrasonic sensors
b General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/4
Osisonic®, Optimum, Universal and application

b Cylindrical sensors, plastic case
v Osisonic®, Optimum and Universal - Solid-state

digital output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/10
v Osisonic®, Application - Analogue output signal
0...10 V or 4-20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/14
b Flat form sensors, plastic case
v Osisonic®, Optimum and Universal - Solid-state digital output . . . . . page 4/18
4/1
Selection guide 4
Ultrasonic sensors 4
Osisonic®, Optimum and Universal
Applications Cylindrical sensors - Solid-state digital output

Detection of any object without physical contact,
irrespective of:
- material (metal, plastic, wood, cardboard, etc.),
- nature (solid, liquid, powder, etc.),
- colour,
- degree of transparency.
Dimensions (mm) Ø 12 Ø 18 Ø 30
4
Sensing distance Sn 5 cm 10 cm 15 cm 50 cm 1m 8m
(adjustable) (adjustable) (adjustable)
Assured sensing distance (mm) 6.4...51, 6.4...102, 25...152, Adjustable using teach mode
fixed fixed fixed
Type of output PNP/NPN NPN PNP/NPN NPN PNP/NPN NPN
or PNP or PNP or NPN or PNP
or PNP
Degree of protection IP 67 IP 67 IP 67 IP 67 IP 65 IP 65
Function NO NO NO NO NO NO + NC
or NO + NC
Connector p p p p p p
Power supply c 12...24 V with protection against reverse polarity
Sensor type XX5 12Ap XX5 18Ap XX6 30Ap
Pages 4/10 to 4/13
4/2
4
4
Cylindrical sensors - Analogue output Flat form sensors - Solid-state digital output
Ø 30 7.6 x 19 x 33 16 x 30 x 74 18 x 33 x 60 + Ø 18
4
1m 8m 1m 8m 10 cm 25 cm 50 cm (adjustable)
(adjustable) (adjustable) (adjustable) (adjustable)
Adjustable using teach mode 6.4...102, fixed 51...254, fixed Adjustable using teach mode
4-20 mA 0-10 V NPN or PNP NPN or PNP NPN or PNP
IP 65 IP 67
_ NO
p p Connector on flying lead p p
c 15...24 V with protection against reverse polarity c 12...24 V with protection against reverse polarity
XX9 30Ap XX7 F1A2 XX7 K1A2 XX7 V1A1
4/14 to 4/17 4/18 to 4/21
4/3
General 4
Osisonic®
Quality, standards and certifications Quality control

The Osisonic ultrasonic sensors are subjected to special precautions in order to
guarantee their reliability in the most arduous industrial environments.
b Qualification
A qualification procedure on the characteristics of Osisonic ultrasonic sensors is carried out in
our laboratories.
b Production
v The electrical characteristics, sensing distances at the ambient temperature and operating
temperatures are 100% verified.
v Sensors are randomly selected during the course of production and subjected to monitoring
tests on all qualified characteristics.
b Customer returns
Defective ultrasonic sensors are subjected to systematic analysis and corrective actions are
implemented to eliminate recurrence of the fault.
Conformity to standards
The Osisonic ultrasonic sensors conform to the standards IEC 60947-5-2.
Standards and characteristics: refer to page 4/11.

To ensure lasting efficient operation, it is essential that any chemicals coming into contact with
4 the ultrasonic sensors will not affect their casing and, in doing so, prevent their reliable operation.
Due to the materials used, Osisonic ultrasonic sensors are very resistant to:
b chemical agents:
v salts, aliphatic and aromatic oils,
v petroleum, diluted bases and acids.
Depending on their nature and concentration, tests should be carried out beforehand for the
following chemical agents:
v alcohols, ketones and phenols.
b food and beverage industry products:

v vegetable oils, animal fats,
v fruit juices,
v milk proteins, etc.
Resistance to the environment

b IP 65: protection against water jets.
Test according to IEC 60529: the device is subjected to water sprayed from a Ø 6,3 mm
nozzle, at a flow rate of 12,5 litres/min for 3 min at a distance of 3 m.
b IP 67: protection against the effects of immersion.

Tested in accordance with IEC 60529: sensor immersed for 30 minutes in 1 m of water.
4/4
Osisonic®
Recommendations
The ultrasonic sensors are designed for use in standard industrial applications involving
presence detection.
Since these sensors do not incorporate a redundant electrical circuit, they are not suitable for
use in safety applications.
For safety applications, please refer to our "Safety solutions using Preventa" catalogue.
Principle of ultrasonic detection Presentation

Ultrasonic sensors enable detection, without contact, of any object irrespective of its:
b material (metal, plastic, wood, cardboard, etc.),
b nature (solid, liquid, powder, etc.),
b colour,
b degree of transparency.
They are used in industrial applications for detecting, for example:

b the position of machine parts,
b the presence of the windscreen during automobile assembly,
b the flow of objects on a conveyor system: glass bottles, cardboard packages, cakes, etc.,
b the level
- of different colour paints in pots,
- of plastic pellets in injection moulding machine feeders.
The ultrasonic sensors are simple to install due to their integral connector and availability of
cabling and fixing accessories.
4
Operating principle
The principle of ultrasonic detection is based on measuring the time taken between transmission
of an ultrasonic wave (pressure wave) and reception of its echo (return of transmitted wave).
1
Osisonic ultrasonic sensors are of the cylindrical type. They comprise:

1 high voltage generator
2 piezoelectric transducer (transmitter and receiver)
4 3 signal processing stage
3 4 output stage
2
Excited by the high voltage generator 1, the transducer (transmitter-receiver) 2 generates a
pulsed ultrasonic wave (200 to 500 kHz depending on the product) which travels through the
ambient air at the speed of sound. When the wave strikes an object, it reflects (echo) and travels
back towards the transducer. A micro controller 3 analyses the signal received and measures
the time interval between the transmitted signal and the echo. By comparison with the preset or
learnt times, it determines and controls the output states 4.
Target The output stage 4 controls a solid-state switch (PNP or NPN transistor) corresponding to a NO
or NC contact (detection of object).
Advantages of ultrasonic detection

b No physical contact with the object to be detected, therefore, no wear and detection possible
of fragile or freshly painted objects, etc.
b Detection of any material, irrespective of colour, at the same distance, without adjustment or
correction factor.
b Teach mode function, by simply pressing a button, for defining the effective sensing range.
Teach of the minimum and maximum sensing distances (very precise foreground and
background suppression, ± 6 mm).
b Very good resistance to industrial environments (robust products entirely encapsulated in
resin).
b Solid-state units: no moving parts in the sensor, therefore, service life independent of the
number of operating cycles.
4/5
Osisonic®
Terminology Definitions
The terms listed below are defined by the standard IEC 60947-5-2:
b Nominal sensing distance (Sn)

Blind Conventional value for indicating the sensing distance. It does not take into account
zone Sensing range (Sd) manufacturing tolerances nor variations caused by external conditions such as voltage and
Overall Standard temperature.
beam angle metal
target b Sensing range (Sd)
Zone in which the sensor is sensitive to objects.
Reference axis
b Minimum sensing distance
Lower limit of the specified sensing range.
Assured operating
Minimum distance (Sa) Sn b Maximum sensing distance
sensing distance Upper limit of the specified sensing range.
Maximum
sensing distance
b Assured operating distance (Sa)
This corresponds to the operating zone of the sensor (activation of outputs), and is included in
the sensing range.
Its limits are fixed:
- at the factory for fixed sensing distance sensors,
- when setting-up within the application for sensors with teach mode.
b Blind zone
Zone between the sensing face of the sensor and the minimum sensing distance in which no
object can be reliably detected.
Avoid any passing of objects in this blind zone during operation of the sensor. This could lead to
4 instability of the output states.
PR PE b Differential travel
The differential travel (H) or hysteresis is the distance between the pick-up point as the standard
metal target moves towards the sensor and the drop-out point as it moves away from the sensor.
Frontal approach
Sensing H
b Repeat accuracy
distance The repeat accuracy (R) is the precision of reproduction between two successive measurements
PR = drop-out point of the sensing distance, made in identical conditions.
PE = pick-up point
b Overall beam angle
Solid angle around the reference axis of an ultrasonic proximity sensor.
b Standard target
The standard IEC 60947-5-2 defines the standard target as a square metal plate, 1 mm thick with
rolled finish, placed perpendicularly to the reference axis.
Its side dimension depends on the sensing range:
Sensing range (mm) Size of target (mm)

< 300 10 x 10
300 < d < 800 20 x 20
> 800 100 x 100
b Voltage drop (Ud)

Ud The voltage drop (Ud) corresponds to the voltage at the terminals of the sensor when in the
V closed state (value measured at the nominal current of the sensor).
b First-up delay
1 Time required to ensure operation of the sensor’s output signal following power-up.
Supply 1 Power-up
2
2 Output signal state (0 or 1)
Sensor
output t
1 2
b Response time
Object to be v Response time (Ra): time taken between the instant the object to be detected enters the
detected active zone and the changing of the output signal state. This time limits the passing speed of
the target in relation to its dimensions.
Sensor Ra Rr v Recovery time (Rr): time taken between the object being detected leaving the active zone
output and the changing of the output signal state. This time limits the interval between 2 objects.
4/6
Osisonic®
Digital outputs LED indicators

NO output NC output The majority of Osisonic ultrasonic sensors incorporate light-emitting diode output state
indicators.
LED
b Ø 12 sensor, sensitivity 50 mm
No object v Green LED (power on)
present Output v Yellow LED (object present).
state
b Ø 12 sensor, sensitivity 100 mm
LED v Green LED (power on)
v Yellow LED (object present).
Object
Output b Ø 18 sensor, sensitivity 500 mm
present
state
v Yellow (object present) and green (power on) LED + user assistance when adjusting the
detection zone.
b Ø 30 sensor, sensitivity 1 to 8 m
v Multicolour LED for assisting the user when adjusting the detection zone
v Yellow LED (object present).
b Ø 30 sensor, sensitivity 1 to 8 m with analogue output

v Multicolour LED for assisting the user when adjusting the detection distance
v Yellow LED (object present, with luminosity increasing as output signal increases).
b Parallelepiped format sensor

v XX7 F: Dual colour yellow (object present) and green (power on) LED
v XX7 V: Dual colour yellow (object present) and green (power on) LED + user assistance
when adjusting the detection zone
v XX7 K: Yellow (object present) and green (power on) LED. 4
Sensors with digital switching
Contact logic output
b Normally open (NO)
the operating zone.
NO contact NC contact b Normally closed (NC)
the operating zone.
4-wire technique c
NO output/ PNP and NPN NO + NC output/ NPN NO + NC output/ PNP
+ + +
NPN NO NPN NC NPN NC
PNP NO NO NO
– – –
These sensors comprise 2 wires for the supply and 1 wire for each output signal.
3-wire technique c
NO output / NPN NO output / PNP
+ +
NPN PNP
– –
These sensors comprise 2 wires for the supply and 1 wire for the output signal.
PNP type: switching the positive side to the load
NPN type: switching the negative side to the load
Sensors with analogue output

Operation
Detection limits (adjustable) The characteristic feature of these sensors is the output which delivers a signal (either current
or voltage) that is proportional to the distance of the object being detected. Within the detection
Object limits, which are adjustable using teach mode, the value of the output signal increases as the
Blind zone object moves away.
When an object is detected, an LED indicator (D) illuminates and its luminosity increases in
relation to the value of the output signal.
Advantages
D
b Visual information available relating to the sensor / object distance.
10 V / 20 mA
b Protection against reverse polarity.
0 V / 4 mA Output b Protection against overloads and short-circuits.
b No residual current, low voltage drop.
4/7
Osisonic®
Power supply d.c. source

Check that the voltage limits of the sensor and the acceptable level of ripple, are compatible with
the supply used.
a.c. source (comprising transformer, rectifier, smoothing capacitor)

The supply voltage must be within the operating limits specified for the sensor.
Where the voltage is derived from a single phase a.c. supply, the voltage must be rectified and
smoothed to ensure that:
b the peak voltage of the d.c. supply is lower than the maximum voltage rating of the sensor.
Peak voltage = nominal voltage x √2
b the minimum voltage of the d.c. supply is greater than the minimum voltage rating of the
sensor, given that:
∆V = (I x t) / C
∆V = maximum ripple: 10 % (V),
As a general rule, use a transformer with a lower secondary voltage (Ue) than the required
d.c. voltage (U).
Example:
a 18 V to obtain c 24 V.
Setting-up precautions Mounting

4 Mounting distance between ultrasonic sensors
If 2 standard sensors are mounted too close to each other, the wave transmitted by one sensor
e
is likely to interfere with the other and result in erratic operation.
In order to avoid this, it is necessary to adhere to the minimum distances between sensors.
Mounting side by side Mounting face to face

e u Sn e u 4 Sn max.
Maximum tightening torque

Cylindrical Diameter Tightening Flat form Screw Tightening
sensor mm torque sensors torque
XX5 12p Ø 12 0,7 N.m XX7 Fp M3 0,7 N.m
XX5 18p Ø 18 1 N.m XX7 Kp M4 1 N.m
XX6 30p Ø 30 1,35 N.m XX7 Vp M3 0,7 N.m
Ø 18 1 N.m
Interchangeability
Using the indexed fixing clamp, the assembly is similar to a block type sensor.
Cabling
Electrical connection
b Connect the sensor before switching on the supply
b Length of cable
v No limitation up to 200 m or up to a line capacitance of < 0.1 µF (characteristics of sensor
remain unaffected).
v It is, however, advisable to take into account the voltage drop on the line.
b Separation of control and power cables

v The sensors are immune to electrical interference encountered in normal industrial
conditions.
v Where extreme conditions of electrical "noise" could occur (large motors, spot welders,
etc.), it is advisable to protect against transients in the normal way:
- suppress interference at source,
- smooth the supply,
- limit the length of cable.
4/8
Osisonic®
Setting-up precautions (continued) Connection in series

b Correct operation of the sensors cannot be assured and, if this method is used, tests must
Sensor 1 be made before installation. The following points should be taken into account:
v Sensor 1 carries the load current in addition to the no-load current consumption values of the
other sensors connected in series. For certain models, this connection method is not possible
unless a current limiting resistor is used.
Sensor 2 v When in the closed state, each sensor will produce a voltage drop and, therefore, the load
v As sensor 1 closes, sensor 2 will not operate until a certain time "T" has elapsed
Sensor 3 v "Flywheel" diodes should be used when the load being switched is inductive.
Sensors and units in series with an external mechanical contact

v When the contact closes, the sensor will not operate until a certain time "T" has elapsed
b No specific restrictions. The use of "flywheel" diodes is recommended when an inductive load
4
b At switch-on, it is necessary to limit (by resistor) the charging current of the capacitive load C.
v The voltage drop in the sensor can also be taken into account by subtracting it from the
–R supply voltage for the calculation of R.
U (supply)
–C R=
I max. (sensor)

than the hot state resistance. This can cause very high current levels on switching. Fit a pre-
heat resistance in parallel with the sensor.
U2
P
Detection
b Influencing factors
1 The ultrasonic sensors are particularly suited to the detection of a hard object with a flat surface
perpendicular to the detection axis.
However, the correct operation of the ultrasonic sensor can be disrupted by:
v air currents, which can accelerate or divert the acoustic wave transmitted by the sensor
(ejection of part by air jet),
v high temperature gradients within the sensing range: an object emitting considerable heat
can create zones of varying temperature that will modify the propagation time of the wave
and thus prevent reliable operation,
2 v sound insulators: sound absorbing materials (cotton, fabrics, rubber, etc.),
v the angle between the face of the object to be detected and the reference axis of the sensor:
Reflector when the angle is offset from 90°, the wave is no longer reflected back along the sensor axis
and the operating distance is reduced. The greater the distance between the sensor and the
target, the greater the effect. Detection is not possible when the angle exceeds ± 10°.
v the shape of the object to be detected: similar to the example above, an excessively angular
object can be difficult to detect 1.
3
b Detection by beam break (reflex system)
In cases requiring detection of sound insulating materials, angular objects, or an angle exists
between the face of the object to be detected and the reference axis of the sensor, it is
recommended that a sensor with the teach mode feature be selected, which enables beam break
Target detection using a reflector. This reflector can be any flat, hard and fixed part of the machine 2.
The sensor with the teach mode feature can also be used in confined spaces by using a 90°
reflector. In the same manner as for the return reflector, the 90° reflector can be a flat part of the
4 machine 3.
It is also possible to use beam break detection (reflex system) with the 90° reflector 4.
Caution: in reflex mode, the NO function opens when an object is present and the NC function
closes when an object is present.
Reflector
4/9
References 4

Cylindrical plastic case, M12 x 1, M18 x 1, M30 x 1.5
d.c. supply, solid-state output
564546
Optimum sensors
Sensors Sensing Function Output Reference Weight
distance (Sn)
m kg
Ø 12 0.05 NO PNP/NPN XX5 12A1KAM8 0.011
XX5 12A1KAM8 0.10 NO NPN XX5 12A2NAM8 0.011
PNP XX5 12A2PAM8 0.011
Ø 18 0.15 NO PNP/NPN XX5 18A1KAM12 0.033
532713
5664547
Universal sensors
Ø 18 0.50 (adjustable) NO NPN XX5 18A3NAM12 0.033
PNP XX5 18A3PAM12 0.033
Ø 30 1 (adjustable) NO PNP/NPN XX6 30A1KAM12 0.091

NO + NC NPN XX6 30A1NCM12 (1) 0.091
PNP XX6 30A1PCM12 (1) 0.091
XX5 18A1KAM12 XX5 18A3pAM12
8 (adjustable) NO + NC NPN XX6 30A3NCM12 0.110
PNP XX6 30A3PCM12 0.110
564531
Accessories
532243
Teach mode pushbutton

Teach mode pushbutton For use with Reference Weight
sensors kg
Selection of detection window XX5 18A3pAM12 XXZ PB100 0.035
4 Input: M12 female connector
Output: M12 male connector
and XX7 V1A1pAM12
XX6 30A1KAM12 Cabling accessories (4-wire output) (3)

XX6 30A3pCM12
Connectors For use with Type Reference Weight
sensor kg
564530
564533
M8 Ø 12 Connection by Straight XZ CC8FDM40V 0.010

in-line IDC Elbowed XZ CC8FCM40V 0.010
Connection to Straight XZ CC8FDM40S 0.010
solder terminals Elbowed XZ CC8FCM40S 0.010
XZ CC12FDp40B M12 Ø 18, Ø 30 Metal Straight XZ CC12FDM40B 0.020
XXZ PB100 clamping ring Elbowed XZ CC12FCM40B 0.020
Plastic Straight XZ CC12FDP40B 0.020
clamping ring Elbowed XZ CC12FCP40B 0.020
Pre-wired For use with Type Length Reference Weight
564534
connectors sensor m kg
M8 Ø 12 Straight 2 XZ CP0166L2 0.080
5 XZ CP0166L5 0.180
10 XZ CP0166L10 0.360
Elbowed 2 XZ CP0266L2 0.080
XZ CP1041Lp
5 XZ CP0266L5 0.180
10 XZ CP0266L10 0.360
564535
M12 Ø 18, Ø 30 Straight 2 XZ CP1141L2 0.090

5 XZ CP1141L5 0.190
10 XZ CP1141L10 0.370
XSZ B11p Elbowed 2 XZ CP1241L2 0.090
5 XZ CP1241L5 0.190
10 XZ CP1241L10 0.370
564532
Fixing accessories
sensor kg
XUZ A118 Fixing clamps Ø 12 XSZ B112 0.006
Ø 18 XSZ B118 0.010
90° fixing bracket Ø 12 XXZ 12 0.025
532517
XUZ 2001 XUZ B20

Ø 18 XUZ A118 0.038
Ø 30 XXZ 30 0.115
3D fixing kit (2) M12 rod Ø 12, Ø 18 and Ø 30 XUZ 2001 0.050
Support for Ø 12, Ø 18 and Ø 30 XUZ 2003 0.160
M12 rod
Ball-joint Ø 12 XUZ B2012 0.175
mounted Ø 18 XUZ B2003 0.175
XUZ 2003 fixing bracket
Ø 30 XUZ B2030 0.160
(1) Sensor available with stainless steel 303 case. To order, replace the 1st letter A by the letter S.
(2) To obtain a 3D fixing kit, order:
rod support XUZ 2003, M12 rod XUZ 2001 and ball-joint mounted fixing bracket XUZ B20pp.
3D fixing kit example (3) For 3-wire cabling accessories, refer to the Global Detection catalogue.
General: Characteristics: Dimensions: Schemes:

pages 4/4 to 4/9 page 4/11 page 4/12 page 4/13
4/10
Characteristics, Ultrasonic sensors 4
setting-up Osisonic®, Optimum and Universal

4
Sensor type XX5 XX5 XX5 XX5 XX6 XX6

12A1pppp 12A2pppp 18A1pppp 18A3pppp 30A1pppp 30A3pppp
Characteristics
Conformity to standards IEC 60947-5-2, UL508 pending and CSA C22-2 n° 14 pending
Connection Connector M8 - 4-pin M8 - 3-pin M12 - 4-pin
Sensing range mm 6.4…51 6.4…102 19…152 51…508 51…991 203…8000
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) m 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.50 1 8
Operating distance mm 6.4…51 6.4…102 25…152 Adjustable using teach mode
Fixed Fixed Fixed
Differential travel mm < 0.7 < 0.7 < 0.35 < 2.5 < 2.5 < 12.7
Blind zone (no object must pass through this zone whilst the mm 0…6.4 0…6.4 0…19 0…51 0…51 0…203
sensor is operating)
Transmission frequency kHz 500 300 200 75
Repeat accuracy mm ± 0.7 ± 1.27 ± 0.9 ± 2.54
Overall beam angle (see detection lobe) 11° 10° 8° 6° 10° 16°
Minimum size of object to be detected Cylinder Ø 2.5 mm or flat bar Cylinder Cylinder Cylinder Cylinder
1 mm wide Ø 1.6 mm Ø 2.5 mm Ø 1.6 mm Ø 50.8 mm
up to a up to a up to a
sensing sensing sensing
distance of distance of distance of
150 mm 635 mm 4732 mm
and IEC 60947-5-2
Storage temperature
Operating temperature
°C
°C
- 40…+ 80
- 20…+ 65 0…+ 50 - 20…+ 65 0…+ 60 - 20…+ 60
4
Materials Case ULTEM® Valox® ULTEM®
Sensing face Epoxy Silicone Epoxy Silicone Epoxy
Vibration resistance To IEC 60068-2-6 Amplitude ± 1 mm (f = 10…55 Hz)
Mechanical shock resistance To IEC 60068-2-27 30 gn, duration 11 ms, in all 3 axes
Electrostatic discharges To IEC 61000-4-2 kV 8, level 4
Radiated electromagnetic fields To IEC 61000-4-3 V/m 10, level 3
Fast transients To IEC 61000-4-4 kV 1, level 3
LED indicators Output state Yellow LED, Yellow LED – Yellow LED Yellow LED, Yellow LED,
rear rear rear
Power on Green LED, Green LED – Green LED – –
rear
Setting-up assistance – – – Dual colour Multicolour LED, rear
Rated supply voltage V c 12…24 V with protection against reverse polarity
Voltage limits (including ripple) V c 10…28 V
Current consumption, no-load mA 25 60 40 50
Switching capacity mA < 100 (PNP and NPN) with overload and short-circuit protection
Voltage drop V < 1 (PNP and NPN)
Maximum switching frequency Hz 125 125 80 40 10 2
Delays First-up ms 20 20 350 100 720 800
Response ms 2 3 3 10 20 200
Recovery ms 2 3 3 10 20 200
Deviation angle from 90° of the ± 10° ± 10° ± 10° ± 7° ± 7° ± 5°
Setting-up precautions
Minimum mounting distances
e
e
e: respect the distances indicated on the e = 4 x Sn max.

detection curves shown on page 4/13.
General: References: Dimensions: Schemes:

4/11
Dimensions 4

Dimensions
XX5 12AppAM8 XX5 18A1KAM12 XX5 18A3pAM12
M18x1 M18x1
M12x1
38
51 43 4,7
50
65 77,7
XXZ PB100 XX6 30A1KAM12 XX6 30A3pCM12
(1) 63 M12x1 M30x1,5

M30x1,5
Ø43,2
20
14,5 16
45 20 64,3 42,1
85 117,35
(1) Cable, length: 152.4 mm.
Accessories
XUZ A118 XXZ 12, XXZ 30
4 90° fixing bracket (Ø 18)

2,5 50 Ø18,2
90° fixing bracket (Ø 12 and Ø 30)
G
c1 10
Ø1 Ø5
35
H
b
28 = =
15 e G1 Ø
1
c a
6,5
=
10
XXZ a b c c1 e H G G1 Ø Ø1
16,5
12 35 40 33 18 2 31 18 18 25 13
=
6,5 20 30 67 65 52 25 3 51 35 33 50 31
XSZ B112, XSZ B118 XUZ 2001 XUZ 2003

Fixing clamps (Ø 12 and Ø 18) M12 rod Support for M12 rod
38,3
b1
b
b2
40
3,5
1,9
12
a1
55
19
(1)
132
a
126
53
4 22,3 8 19 M12
50
23
XSZ a a1 b b1 b2 Ø
40
36
19
B112 21.9 14.5 16 15.5 8.5 12

B118 26 15.7 22.3 20.1 11.5 18
XUZ B2012 XUZ B2003 XUZ 2030
Ball-joint mounted fixing bracket (Ø 12) Ball-joint mounted fixing bracket (Ø 18) Ball-joint mounted fixing bracket (Ø 30)
36 5,7 36 5,7 42,2 6
Ø12,4 Ø18,5 Ø30,5
13
24,1
33
33
67
81,7
67
40
46,3
40
M4 M4
M3
76,5 22,9 76,5 22,9

90,5 22,9
4/12
Curves, Ultrasonic sensors 4
schemes 4
Detection curves
XX5 12A1KAM8 XX5 12A2pNAM8 XX5 18A1KAM12 XX5 18A3pAM12
mm mm mm mm
30 30 120 300
20 20 80 200
10 40
10 100
-10 -40 -100

-10
-20 -80 -200
-20
-30 -30 -120 -300
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 2 4 6 8 10 0 50 100 150 200 0 65 190 320 445 570
mm cm mm mm
XX6 30A1pCM12 XX6 30A3pCM12
mm cm
400 400
300 300
200 200
100 100
-100 -100
-200
-300
-200
-300
4
-400 -400
Blind zone 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 2 4 6 8m
cm
Wiring schemes
M8 connector
XX5 12A1KAM8 XX5 12A2p
4-wire type NO outputs, PNP and NPN 3-wire type NO outputs, NPN NO outputs, PNP
2 4 4
1/BN 1/BN 1/BN
NPN 4/BK NPN 4/BK
1 3 PNP 2/WH PNP 4/BK
3/BU 1 3 3/BU 3/BU
1 (+) 2 PNP output (-) BU (Blue) (+) BN (Brown) 1 (+) 3 (-) (-) BU (Blue) (+) BN (Brown)
3 (-) 4 NPN output WH (White) BK (Black) 4 NPN or PNP output BK (Black)
M12 connector
XX5 18A1KAM12 XX5 18A3p
4-wire type NO outputs, PNP and NPN 3-wire type NO outputs, NPN NO outputs, PNP
4 3 4 3
1/BN 1/BN 1/BN
NPN 4/BK NPN 4/BK
PNP 2/WH PNP 4/BK
1 2 1 2
3/BU 3/BU 3/BU
1 (+) 2 PNP output (-) BU (Blue) (+) BN (Brown) 1 (+) 3 (-) (-) BU (Blue) (+) BN (Brown)
3 (-) 4 NPN output WH (White) BK (Black) 4 NPN or PNP output BK (Black)
XX6 30A1KAM12 XX6 30AppCM12
4-wire type NO outputs, PNP and NPN NO + NC outputs, NPN NO + NC outputs, PNP
4 3 1/BN 1/BN
1/BN
2/WH
NPN 4/BK NPN NPN NC
NC 4/BK
PNP 2/WH 2/WH 4/BK NO
NO
1 2 3/BU 3/BU
3/BU
1 (+) 2 PNP output (-) BU (Blue) (+) BN (Brown) (-) BU (Blue) (+) BN (Brown)
3 (-) 4 NPN output WH (White) BK (Black) WH (White) BK (Black)
XXZ PB100 (teach mode pushbutton for XX5 18A3pAM12)
M12 female M12 male XX5 18A3 XXZ PB100

connector connector 1/BN 1/BN
3 4 1 1 4 3 4/BK 4/BK
2 NO
2/WH
3 3
2 1 4 4 1 3/BU 3/BU
Sensor side Output
XXZ PB100
1 (+) BN (Brown) 2 WH (White)
3 (-) BU (Blue) 4 BK (Black)
4/13
References 4
Osisonic®, Application
Cylindrical plastic case, M30 x 1.5
Sensors with analogue output signal 0…10 V
or 4-20 mA
Sensors
564548

distance (Sn)
m kg
Ø 30 1 (adjustable) – Analogue XX9 30A1A2M12 (1) 0.095
4-20 mA
8 (adjustable) – Analogue XX9 30A3A2M12 0.115

XX9 30A1ApM12 4-20 mA
1 (adjustable) – Analogue XX9 30A1A1M12 (1) 0.095

0-10 V
564531
8 (adjustable) – Analogue XX9 30A3A1M12 0.115

0-10 V
XX9 30A3ApM12
Accessories
Cabling accessories
Connectors Type Reference Weight
4 kg
564533
M12 Metal Straight XZ CC12FDM40B 0.020

clamping ring
Elbowed XZ CC12FCM40B 0.020

XZ CC12FDp40B clamping ring
Elbowed XZ CC12FCP40B 0.020
Pre-wired Type Length Reference Weight

564534
connectors m kg
M12 Straight 2 XZ CP1141L2 0.090
5 XZ CP1141L5 0.190
10 XZ CP1141L10 0.370
XZ CP1041Lp
532248
XUZ 2001 XUZ B2030 5 XZ CP1241L5 0.190
10 XZ CP1241L10 0.370
Fixing accessories
kg
90° fixing bracket XXZ 30 0.115
XUZ 2003
3D fixing kit (2) M12 rod XUZ 2001 0.050
Ball-joint mounted fixing bracket XUZ B2030 0.160
3D fixing kit example (1) Sensor available with stainless steel 303 case. To order, replace the 1st letter A by the letter S.
(2) To obtain a 3D fixing kit, order:
rod support XUZ 2003, M12 rod XUZ 2001 and ball-joint mounted fixing bracket XUZ B2030

4/14
setting-up 4
or 4-20 mA
Sensor type XX9 30A1pppp XX9 30A3pppp

Characteristics
Connection Connector M12 - 4-pin
Sensing range mm 51…991 203…8000
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) m 1 8
Operating distance mm Adjustable using teach mode Adjustable using teach mode
Blind zone (no object must pass through this zone whilst the mm 0…51 0…203
Transmission frequency kHz 200 75
Repeat accuracy mm ± 0.9 ± 2.54
Overall beam angle (see detection lobe) 10° 16°
Minimum size of object to be detected Cylinder Ø 1.6 mm up to a sensing distance Cylinder Ø 50.68 mm up to a sensing
of 635 mm distance of 4732 mm
and IEC 60947-5-2
Storage temperature °C - 40…+ 80 - 40…+ 80
Operating temperature °C 0…+ 50 - 20…+ 60
Materials Case ULTEM®
Sensing face Silicone membrane Epoxy
4
Radiated electromagnetic fields To IEC 61000-4-3 Vm 10, level 3
LED indicators Output state Yellow LED, rear Yellow LED, rear
Power on – –
Setting-up assistance Multicolour LED, rear Multicolour LED, rear
Switching capacity Analogue output 4-20 mA: resistive load from 10 to 500 Ω max.
Analogue output 0-10 V: resistive load from 1kΩ to unlimited
Overload and short-circuit protection
Delays First-up ms 720 1200
Response ms 25 250
Recovery ms 25 250
Deviation angle from 90° of the ± 8° ± 5°
e
e
e: respect to the distances indicated on the e = 4 x Sn max.


4/15
Dimensions 4
or 4-20 mA
Dimensions
XX9 30A1ApM12 XX9 30A3ApM12
M30x1,5
M30x1,5
Ø43,2
45 20
64,3 42,1
85
117,35
Accessories
XXZ 30
90° fixing bracket
35
25 10
31 Ø5
51
65
4 2 33 50
52 67
XUZ 2001 XUZ 2003

M12 rod Support for M12 rod
40
1,9
12
55
19
132
126
53
19 M12
50
23
40
36
19
XUZ 2030
Ball-joint mounted fixing bracket
42,2 6
Ø30,5
13
24,1
81,7
46,3
M3
90,5 22,9
General: References: Characteristics: Schemes:

4/16
schemes 4
or 4-20 mA
Detection curves
Detection curves
XX9 30A1ApM12 XX9 30A3ApM12
mm cm
400 400
300 300
200 200
100 100
-100
-100
-200
-200
-300
-300
-400
-400 0 2 4 6 8m
0 20 40 60 80 100
cm
Blind zone
Output signal curves
Sensors Sensing Output Maximum sensing Sensing range : D

range (in % of maximum
0
D (mm) value) D1 D2
XX930A1A1p
XX930A1A2p
51…991
51…991
0-10 V < 0.5%
4-20 mA < 0.5%
4
XX930A3A1p 223…8000 0-10 V < 0.5%
XX930A3A2p 223…8000 4-20 mA < 0.5%
Sensing range : adjustable

Blind zone
Output signal for

XX930ApA2p
20 mA
4 mA
D1 D2
Output signal for
XX930ApA1p
10 V
0V
D1 D2
Wiring schemes
M12 connector XX9 30ApA1M12 XX9 30ApA2M12
4-wire type
4 3 1/BN 1/BN
0...10 V 4...20 mA
4/BK 4/BK
V mA
1 2 2/WH 2/WH
3/BU 3/BU
1 (+) (-) BU (Blue)

2 Signal return (+) BN (Brown)
3 (-) WH (White)
4 Output signal BK (Black)
General: References: Characteristics: Dimensions:

4/17
References 4

Plastic case, flat form
Optimum sensors
564439
distance (Sn)
mm m kg
7.6 x 19 x 33 0.10 NO NPN XX7 F1A2NAL01M12 0.040
PNP XX7 F1A2PAL01M12 0.040

XX7 F1A2 p AL01M12
16 x 30 x 74 0.25 NO NPN XX7 K1A2NAM12 0.050

564440
564441
PNP XX7 K1A2PAM12 0.050
Universal sensors
18 x 33 x 60 0.50 (adjustable) NO NPN XX7 V1A1NAM12 0.060
+ Ø 18
XX7 K1A2p AM12 XX7 V1A1p AM12 PNP XX7 V1A1PAM12 0.060
564545
4
Accessories
sensor kg
Teach mode pushbutton XX5 18A3pAM12 XXZ PB100 0.035
Selection of detection window and XX7 V1A1pAM12
XXZ PB100 Input:
M12 female connector
Output:
M12 male connector
Cabling accessories
Connectors For use with Type Reference Weight
sensor kg
564534
M12 XX7 ppppp Metal Straight XZ CC12FDM40B 0.020

564533
clamping ring
Elbowed XZ CC12FCM40B 0.020

clamping ring
XZ CC12FDp40B XZ CP1141Lp
Elbowed XZ CC12FCP40B 0.020
Pre-wired For use with Type Length Reference Weight

564542
connectors sensor m kg
M12 XX7 ppppp Straight 2 XZ CP1141L2 0.090
5 XZ CP1141L5 0.190
10 XZ CP1141L10 0.370
XXZ 1933 Elbowed 2 XZ CP1241L2 0.090
5 XZ CP1241L5 0.190
532250
10 XZ CP1241L10 0.370
532249
Fixing accessories
sensor kg
90° fixing XX7 F XXZ 1933 0.025
bracket
Flat mounting XX7 K XXZ 3074F 0.025
plate
Cranked XX7 K XXZ 3074S 0.075
mounting plate
XXZ 3074F XXZ 3074S

4/18
setting-up 4
Sensor type XX7 F1A2pAL01M12 XX7 K1A2pAM12 XX7 V1A1pAM12

Characteristics
Connection Connector M12 - 4-pin, on 152 mm M12 - 4-pin M12 - 4-pin
flying lead
Sensing range mm 6.2…102 51…254 51…508
Nominal sensing distance (Sn) m 0.1 0.25 0.5
Operating distance mm 6.4…102 Fixed 51…254 Fixed Adjustable using teach
mode
Differential travel mm < 0.7 < 0.35 < 2.5
Blind zone (no object must pass through this zone whilst the mm 0…6.4 0…51 0…51
Transmission frequency kHz 500 500 300
Repeat accuracy mm ± 0.7 ± 0.7 ± 1.27
Overall beam angle (see detection lobe) 14° 14° 12°
Minimum size of object to be detected Cylinder Ø 2.5 mm or flat bar Cylinder Ø 1.6 mm Cylinder Ø 2.5 mm or flat bar
1 mm wide 1 mm wide for a sensing
distance of 150 mm
and IEC 60947-5-2
Operating temperature °C - 20…+ 65 0…+ 50 - 20…+ 65
Materials Case ULTEM® ULTEM® Valox®
Sensing face Epoxy Silicone Epoxy 4
Radiated electromagnetic fields To IEC 61000-4-3 V/m 10, level 3
LED indicators Output state Dual colour LED, yellow Yellow LED Dual colour LED, yellow
Power on Dual colour LED, green Green LED Dual colour LED, green
Setting-up assistance – – –
Current consumption, no-load mA 25 60 40
Switching capacity mA < 100 (PNP and NPN)
Voltage drop V < 1 (PNP and NPN)
Maximum switching frequency Hz 100 80 40
Delays First-up ms 20 350 100
Response ms 4 5 10
Recovery ms 4 5 10
e e
e: respect the distances indicated on the e u 4 x Sn max.


4/19
Dimensions 4

Dimensions
XX7 F1A2pAL01M12 XX7 K1A2pAM12
84,4
16,3 74
4,5
7,6 M12x1 (1) 2x 3,5 33
30
21
13
19
17
40 3 20 24 40 2x 4,2
(1) Cable, length: 152 mm.

XX7 V1A1pAM12 XXZ PB100
60
18 37,5 M18x16g
(1) 63 M12x1
16,5
24,1
33
20
43,8
4 14,5 16
4,5
2x 3,2
8,9 M12x16g 31
(1) Cable, length: 152.4 mm.

Fixing accessories
XXZ 1933
90° fixing bracket
13 3
4,5
3,5
28,6
13
28,6 19
3 13
12,8 3
XXZ 3074F XXZ 3074S

Flat mounting plate Cranked mounting plate
56 44,5 56
2,75 40 5,6 25,4 2,75 40 5,6
5,5
5,5
21
21
38,1
79
79
4x 4,2 4x 4,2
23,4
23,4
7,4
7,4
7,14 36,6 9,9 7,14 36,6 9,9
General: Characteristics: References: Schemes:

4/20
schemes 4
Detection curves
XX7 F1A2pAL01M12 XX7 K1A2pAM12 XX7 V1A1pAM12
mm mm mm
30 80 200
20 40 100
10
-40 -100
-10
-80 -200
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 0 65 190 320 445 570
-20 cm mm
-30
0 2 4 6 8 10
cm
Blind zone
Wiring schemes
M12 connector XX7 F1A2NAL01M12 (1), XX7 F1A2PAL01M12 (1),
XX7 K1A2NAM12, XX7 V1A1NAM12 XX7 K1A2PAM12, XX7 V1A1PAM12
3-wire type NO outputs, NPN NO outputs, PNP
4 3 1/BN 1/BN
NPN 4/BK
PNP 4/BK
4
1 2 3/BU 3/BU
1 (+)
2 On sensors XX7 V1A1pAM12, terminal 2 is reserved for the (-) BU (Blue)
teach mode pushbutton. (+) BN (Brown)
3 (-) BK (Black)
4 NPN or PNP output
(1) Remote connector on flying lead approximately 15 cm long.
XXZ PB100 (teach mode pushbutton for XX7 V1A1pAM12)
M12 female M12 male

connector connector
3 4 1 1 4 3 XX7 V1A1 XXZ PB100

2 1/BN 1/BN
4/BK 4/BK
3 3 NO
2 1 4 4 1 2/WH
Sensor side Output 3/BU 3/BU
XXZ PB100
1 (+) BN (Brown)
2 WH (White)
3 (-) BU (Blue)
4 BK (Black)
General: Characteristics: References: Dimensions:

4/21
Contents 0
5 - Limit switches
b Osiconcept®: Offering Simplicity through Innovation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/6
Osiswitch® Universal, Osiconcept®

b Miniature design, metal, type XCM D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/8
v Pre-cabled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/10

v Integral or remote connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/14
v Variable composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/20
v Separate components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/22
b Compact design, metal, type XCK D
v Complete units with 1 ISO M16 x 1.5 cable entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/30
v Integral M12 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/34
b Compact design, plastic, type XCK P
v Integral M12 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/40
b Compact design, plastic, type XCK T
v Complete units with 2 ISO M16 x 1.5 cable entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/42
b Compact design, types XCK D, XCK P and XCK T
v Variable composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/44

v Adaptable sub-assemblies: bodies with contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/46
5 Osiswitch® Optimum
b Miniature design, plastic, type XCM N
v Complete units, pre-cabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/24
b Compact design, plastic, type XCK N
Osiswitch® Application, with reset

b Compact design, metal, type XCD R
v Complete switches with 1 cable entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/56
b Compact design, plastic, type XCP R
v Complete switches with 1 cable entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/58
b Compact design, plastic, type XCT R
v Complete switches with 2 cable entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/60
Osiswitch® Classic
b Metal, type XCK M
v Complete switches with 3 ISO M20 x 1.5 cable entries . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/64
b Metal, type XCK L
v Complete switches incorporating cable gland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/66
b Metal, 2 x 2-pole contacts, type XCK ML
v Complete switches with 3 ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13 cable entries . . . page 5/68
5/0
Osiswitch® Classic (continued)
b Metal, types XCK M and XCK L
v Variable composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/70

v Adaptable sub-assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/72
b Metal, type XCK J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/78
v Complete switches
- Fixed body with 1 ISO M20 x 1.5 cable entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/80
- Fixed body with 1 Integral M12 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/84
- Fixed body with 1 Integral 7/8" 16 UN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/86
v Variable composition: standard bodies, fixed or plug-in . . . . . . . . . . page 5/88
v Adaptable sub-assemblies
- Bodies and contact blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/90
- For low temperature applications (- 40 °C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/100
- For high temperature applications (+ 120 °C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/103
b Plastic, double insulated, type XCK S
v Complete switches with 1 ISO M20 x 1.5 cable entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/108
v Variable composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/110
v Adaptable sub-assemblies: bodies, contact blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/112
Osiswitch® Classic: Applications

b For hoisting and mechanical handling applications,
types XCR and XCK MR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/116
b For conveyor belt shift monitoring, type XCR T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/120

5
b For materials handling applications, type XC1 AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/126
b For very severe applications, type XC2 J
v Complete switches, fixed body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/134

v Fixed or plug-in body, variable composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/136
v Adaptable sub-assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/137
Osiswitch® miniature snap switches

b Subminiature design, DIN 41635 B format, sealed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/150
b Sub-subminiature design, DIN 41635 D format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/151
b Miniature design, DIN 41635 A format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/152
b Sealed design, pre-cabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/154
b General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/156
Limit switches for safety solutions using Preventa

b Miniature design, metal, type XCS M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/158
b Guard switches, plastic, types XCS PA, XCS TA and XCS TE . . . . . . page 5/160
b Safety switches, types XCS PL, XCS TL, XCS PR and XCS TR . . . . page 5/162
b Guard switches, metal, types XCS A, XCS B, XCS C and XCS E . . . page 5/164
b Coded magnetic switches, types XCS DMC, DMP and DMR . . . . . . . page 5/168
Osiswitch® limit switches

b General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/178
b Substitution table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/186
5/1
Selection guide 5
Limit switches 5
Design Miniature Osiconcept Compact Osiconcept
Enclosure Metal Plastic, double insulated
Features Fixing by the body or by the head
Osiconcept modularity Head, body and connection modularity Head and body
modularity
CENELEC conformity – EN 50047 EN 50047 compatible
Body dimensions (w x h x d) in mm 30 x 50 x 16 31 x 65 x 30 58 x 51 x 30
Head Linear movement (plunger)

Rotary movement (lever)
Rotary movement, multi-directional
Same heads for ranges XCM D, XCK D, XCK P and XCK T
Contact blocks 2 snap action contacts with positive N/C + N/O; N/C + N/C N/C + N/O
opening operation
5 3 snap action contacts with positive
opening operation
N/C + N/C + N/O N/C + N/C + N/O; N/C + N/O + N/O –
4 snap action contacts with positive N/C + N/C + N/O + N/O –

opening operation
2 slow break contacts with positive N/C + N/O break N/C + N/O break before make; N/O + N/C make before break;
opening operation before make N/C + N/C simultaneous
2 slow break contacts – N/O + N/O simultaneous
3 slow break contacts with positive N/C + N/C + N/O break N/C + N/C + N/O break before make; –
opening operation before make N/C + N/O + N/O break before make
Insulation voltage (Ui) / thermal current (Ithe) Pre-cabled Screw terminal Screw terminal
2 contacts: 400 V/6 A 2 contacts: 500 V/10 A 2 contacts:
3 contacts: 400 V/4 A 3 contacts: 400 V/6 A 500 V/10 A
4 contacts: 400 V/3 A
Connector Connector Connector –

Integral M12, 4-pin: Integral M12, 5-pin: Integral M12, 4-pin:
250 V/3 A 60 V/4 A 250 V/3 A
Integral M12, 5-pin:
60 V/4 A
Remote 7/8" 16UN:
250 V/6 A
Degree of protection IP/IK IP 66, IP 67, IP 68, IP 66, IP 67, IK 06 IP 66, IP 67, IK 04
IK 06
Connection Screw terminals – 1 entry for ISO M16 or M20, Pg 11, Pg 13 2 entries for ISO M16
cable gland or 1/2" NPT, PF 1/2 or Pg 11 cable gland
or 1/2" NPT (using
adaptor)
Pre-cabled Yes –
Connector Integral or remote M12 Integral M12 –

or remote 7/8" 16UN
Type reference XCM D XCK D XCK P XCK T
Page(s) 5/10 5/30 and 5/34 5/36 and 5/40 5/42
5/2
Selection guide 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Optimum and Application
Miniature Optimum Compact Optimum Compact Application: with manual reset
Plastic, double insulated Metal Plastic, double insulated
Fixing by the body or by the head Fixing by the body
– EN 50047 –
30 x 50 x 16 31 x 65 x 30 58 x 51 x 30
Linear movement (plunger) Linear movement (plunger)

Rotary movement (lever) Rotary movement (lever)
Rotary movement, multi-directional Same heads for ranges XC DR, XC PR and XC TR
N/C + N/O
–
5
–
– – N/C + N/O break before make
– – –
Screw terminal Screw terminal

2 contacts: 2 contacts:
400 V/6 A 500 V/10 A
IP 65, IK 04 IP 66, IP 67, IK 04
– 1 entry for ISO M20 or Pg 11 1 entry for ISO M20 or Pg 13 cable gland or 1/2" NPT 2 entries for ISO M16 or
cable gland Pg 11 cable gland or
1/2" NPT (using adaptor)
Yes –
XCM N XCK N XCD R XCP R XCT R
5/26 5/52 5/56 5/58 5/60
5/3
Selection guide 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Design Classic
Enclosure Metal
Features – Fixed or plug-in body,

- 40 °C or + 120 °C versions
Variable composition switches Head + Body + Operator
CENELEC or DIN conformity – EN 50041

Body dimensions (w x h x d) in mm 63 x 64 x 30 52 x 72 x 30 40 x 77 x 44
42.5 x 84 x 36
Head Linear movement (plunger)

5 Rotary movement (lever)
Rotary movement, multi-directional
Contact blocks 2 snap action contacts with positive N/C + N/O; N/C + N/C N/C + N/O N/C + N/O; N/C + N/C
opening operation
3 snap action contacts with positive N/C + N/C + N/O; N/C + N/O + N/O
opening operation
C/O snap action contacts – 2 C/O
C/O slow break contacts –
2 slow break contacts with positive N/C + N/O break before make
opening operation N/O + N/C make before break
N/C + N/C simultaneous
2 slow break contacts N/O + N/O simultaneous
3 slow break contacts with positive N/C + N/C + N/O break before make; N/C + N/O + N/O break before make
opening operation
Insulation voltage (Ui) / thermal current (Ithe) Screw terminal

– Connector
Integral M12, 5-pin: 60 V/4 A
Integral 7/8" 16UN: 250 V/6 A
Degree of protection IP/IK IP 66, IK 06 IP 66, IK 07
Connection Screw terminals 3 entries for ISO M20 or Pg 11 1 entry incorporating cable 1 entry for ISO M20 or Pg 13
(entry for cable gland) cable gland or 1/2" NPT gland or tapped 1/2" NPT cable gland or 1/2" NPT
Connector – – Integral M12

or 7/8" 16UN
Type reference XCK M XCK L XCK J XCK J
Page(s) 5/62 5/62 5/78
5/4
Selection guide 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic, Application

and Miniature snap switches
Classic Application: for Application: for lifting Sub-miniature, miniature: Applications: safety (1)
installations requiring and materials handling applications requiring
electrical redundancy equipment or very severe high precision and a low
applications operating force
Plastic, double insulated Metal Metal or polyester Plastic Metal or plastic Plastic
– 2 sets of contacts – Depending on type
Head + Body + Operator Fixed composition Depending on type, fixed –

composition or contact
and operator
EN 50041 – EN 50041 or EN 50047 –
40 x 72.5 x 36 72 x 81 x 36 Depending on type DIN 41635, depending on Depending on type 16 x 51 x7
type 25 x 88 x 13
Ø 30, L 38.5
Linear movement Linear movement (plunger) Linear movement Linear movement –
(plunger)
Rotary movement (lever) (plunger) (plunger)
5
Rotary movement, multi- Actuator operated
directional Spindle operated
N/C + N/O; N/C + N/C 2 x N/C + N/O contact Depending on type – Depending on type: Independent Reed type
blocks 2-pole, 3-pole or 4-pole contacts operated by
contact blocks coded magnet. Must be
N/C + N/C + N/O; N/C + – used with a Preventa
N/O + N/O safety module.
Depending on type:
2 C/O – Depending on type 1 single-pole contact
N/C + N/O (N/C
staggered)
– Depending on type – N/O + N/O (1 N/O
staggered)
N/C + N/O break before 2 x N/C + N/O break Depending on type – N/C + N/C + N/O (1 N/C
make before make contact staggered)
N/O + N/C make before blocks N/C + N/O + N/O (1 N/O
break staggered)
N/C + N/C simultaneous N/C + N/O (N/O
N/O + N/O simultaneous – staggered)
N/O + N/O (1 N/O
staggered)
N/C + N/C + N/O break –
before make
N/C + N/O + N/O break
before make
Screw terminal Screw terminal Depending on type
2 contacts: 500 V/10 A 2 contacts: 500 V/10 A
–
IP 65, IK 03 IP 66, IK 06 Depending on type: Depending on type Depending on type:

IP 66, IK 05, IP 65, IK 05 IP 66 and IP 67 or IP 67
or IP 54, IK 05
1 entry for ISO M20 or 3 entries for ISO M20 or Depending on type: 1 or Depending on type: by Depending on type: entry Depending on type:
Pg 13 cable gland Pg 13 cable gland 3 entries for ISO M20 or tags or pre-wired for cable gland or pre- pre-cabled or with
Pg 13 cable gland cabled connector on flying lead
–
XCK J XCK S XCK ML XCR, XCK MR, XEP XCS p XCS DMC
XC2 J, XC1 AC XCS DMP
XCS DMR
5/106 5/62 5/116, 5/124, 5/126 and 5/150 5/158 5/168 and 5/169
5/132
(1) For further information, please refer to our “Safety solutions using Preventa” catalogue.
5/5
General 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch®
Principle Osiconcept principle: innovation through modularity

b The Miniature design XCM D and Compact design XCK D, XCK P and XCK T
product range family benefits from Osiconcept: Offering simplicity through innovation.
b A worldwide detection first for improving productivity.

A complete offer for resolving the most commonly encountered detection problems:
v product selection simplified,
v product availability simplified,
v installation and setting-up simplified,
v maintenance simplified.
Heads
b A single metal operating head type for the Miniature design XCM D and Compact
design XCK D, XCK P and XCK T ranges.
.
b Interchanging of heads achieved by simple operation of forked metal latch.

b Adjustable in 3 planes:
15˚
15˚
15˚
All the heads can be adjusted in All the levers can be adjusted in 15° steps throughout 360°,
15° steps throughout 360°, in in relation to the horizontal axis of the head.
relation to the body.
5/6
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch®
Principle (continued) Cable entries

b The cable entries for Compact design XCK D and XCK P switches enable:
v simple cabling due to unrestricted access to contacts,
v simple adaptation to the various worldwide markets:

- 6 models are available:
v ISO M16 x 1.5
v Pg 11
v ISO M20 x 1.5

v Pg 13
v 1/2" NPT
v PF 1/2 (G 1/2)
Each model is available in metal or plastic,
respectively suited for Compact design
XCK D and XCK P.
Connection components
b The miniature XCM D range allows inter-
changeability of these pre-cabled
connection components:
5
v a 1/4 of a turn is all that is required for
removing the connection component on
XCM D bodies with 2 and 3 contacts,
v 6 alternative cable lengths are available
as standard.
1/4 turn
b The miniature XCM D range also includes
an integral or remote connector solution.
Contact block or body with contacts

b 2 and 3 snap action and slow break
contact blocks, with positive opening
operation, are interchangeable between the
Compact design XCK D and XCK P and
Classic XCK J, XCK S, XCK M and XCK L
ranges.
b For the Miniature design XCM D range,

the contacts are an integral part of the body:
v 2 and 3 snap action and slow break
contacts, with positive opening operation,
and interchangeable connection
component,
v 4 snap action contacts, with positive
opening operation, with monolithic body and
connection components.
5/7
Presentation 5
Limit switches 5

Miniature design, metal, type XCM D
b XCM D v With head for linear movement (plunger). Fixing by the body.
pre-cabled
520341
561279
520343
Page 5/10
v With head for linear movement (plunger). Fixing by the head.

520344
561280
Page 5/10
v With head for rotary movement (lever) or multi-directional. Fixing by the body.
520346
520347
Page 5/11
b XCM D v With head for linear movement (plunger)

with integral connector Fixing by the body Fixing by the head
561281
561282
561283
Page 5/14
561284
561285
Page 5/15
5/8
General characteristics 5
Limit switches 5

Environment characteristics
Conforming to standards Products IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14
Machine assemblies IEC 60204-1, EN 60204-1
Product certifications UL, CSA (except products with special cables), CCC
Protective treatment Standard version: “TC”
Ambient air temperature Operation: - 25…+ 70 °C. Storage: - 40…+ 70 °C
Vibration resistance XCM D snap action: 5 gn. XCM D slow break: 25 gn (10…500 Hz)
conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
Shock resistance 25 gn (18 ms) conforming to IEC 60068-2-27
Electric shock protection Class I conforming to IEC 61-140 and NF C 20-030
Degree of protection IP 66, IP 67 and IP 68 (1) conforming to IEC 60529; IK 06 conforming to EN 50102
Materials Bodies: zamak, heads: zamak
Repeat accuracy 0.05 mm on the tripping points, with 1 million operating cycles for head with end plunger
(1) Protection against prolonged immersion: the test conditions are subject to agreement
between the manufacturer and the user.
Contact block characteristics
Rated operational Switches with 2 contacts a AC-15; B300 (Ue = 240 V, Ie = 1.5 A)
characteristics c DC-13; R300 (Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0.1 A), conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix A,
EN 60947-5-1
Switches with 3 and 4 contacts a AC-15; C300 (Ue = 240 V, Ie = 0.75 A)
c DC-13; R300 (Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0.1 A), conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix A,
EN 60947-5-1
Pre-cabled switches Ithe = 6 A for 2 contacts, 4 A for 3 contacts, 3 A for 4 contacts
Switches with 4-pin Ui = 250 V, Ie = 3 A maximum, Ithe = 3 A
M12 connector
M12 connector
7/8" 16UN connector
Rated insulation voltage Ui = 400 V degree of pollution 3 conforming to IEC 60947-5-1
Ui = 300 V conforming to UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14
Rated impulse withstand voltage
Positive operation (depending on model)
U imp = 4 kV conforming to IEC 60947-1, IEC 60664
N/C contacts with positive opening operation conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix K,
5
EN 60947-5-1
Resistance across terminals ≤ 25 mΩ conforming to IEC 60255-7 category 3
Electric shock protection 6 A cartridge fuse type gG (gl)
Minimum actuation speed Snap action contact: 0.01 m/minute
Slow break contact: 6 m/minute
Electrical durability b Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix C
b Utilisation categories AC-15 and DC-13
b Maximum operating rate: 3600 operating cycles/hour
b Load factor: 0.5
a.c. supply XCM D snap action (N/C + N/O, N/C + N/C, XCM D slow break (N/C + N/O, N/C + N/C +
a 50/60 Hz N/C + N/C + N/O, N/C + N/C + N/O + N/O N/O contacts)
o inductive circuit contacts)
5 5
Millions of operating cycles
4 Ithe 4 Ithe
3 3
12/24/48 V
2 2
48 V 230 V
110 V
1 1
110 V
0,5 0,5
12/24 V
230 V
0,1 0,1
0,5 1 2 3 4 56 10 0,5 1 2 3 4 56 10
Current in A Current in A
d.c. supply c Power broken in W for Power broken in W for
5 million operating cycles 5 million operating cycles
Voltage V 24 48 120 Voltage V 24 48 120
o W 3 2 1 o W 4 3 3
5/9
References, Limit switches 5
characteristics 5
Pre-cabled
Type of head Plunger (fixing by the body) Plunger (fixing by the head)
Type of operator Metal end Metal end Steel roller Retractable steel M12 with metal M16 with metal M12 with steel
plunger plunger with plunger roller lever end plunger end plunger with roller plunger
elastomer boot plunger elastomer boot
References
2-pole N/C + N/O XCM D2110L1 XCM D2111L1 XCM D2102L1 XCM D2124L1 XCM D21F0L1 XCM D21G1L1 XCM D21F2L1
snap action
BK
BU
1,8 4,2(P) 1,8 4,2(P) 3,1(A) 7(P) 11,2(A) 25(P) 1,8 4,2(P) 1,8 4,2(P) 3,1(A) 7(P)
BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH
BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU
BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH
GN-YE BN-BU BN-BU
BK-BK-WH
BN-BU
BK-BK-WH
BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU
BK-BK-WH
BN-BU
0 5mm 0 5mm 0 mm 0 4,9 mm 0 5mm 0 5mm 0 mm
BK-WH
BN
0,8 0,8 1,4 0,8 0,8 1,4
2-pole N/C + N/O break XCM D2510L1 XCM D2511L1 XCM D2502L1 XCM D2524L1 XCM D25F0L1 XCM D25G1L1 XCM D25F2L1
before make, slow break
BK
BU
1,8 3,1(P) 1,8 3,1(P) 3,1(A) 5,6(P) 11,2(A) 19,5(P) 1,8 3,1(P) 1,8 3,1(P) 3,1(A) 5,6(P)
BK-BK-WH
GN-YE BN-BU BN-BU BK-BKWH
BN-BU BN-BU
BN-BU BN-BU BK-BKWH
BN-BU
0 2,6 5 mm 0 2,6 5 mm 4,6 mm 0 16 mm 0 2,6 5 mm 0 2,6 5 mm 4,6 mm
0 0
BK-WH
BN
2-pole N/C + N/C ZCM D29L1 + ZCM D29L1 + ZCM D29L1 + ZCM D29L1 + ZCM D29L1 + ZCM D29L1 + ZCM D29L1 +
snap action ZCE 10 ZCE 11 ZCE 02 ZCE 24 ZCE F0 ZCE G1 ZCE F2
BK
RD
1,8 4,2 (P) 1,8 4,2 (P) 3,1(A) 7(P) 11,2(A) 25(P) 1,8 4,2 (P) 1,8 4,2 (P) 3,1(A) 7(P)
RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH
RD-RD-WH BK-BK-WH
5 GN-YE BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH RD-RD-WH BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH

RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH
0 5 mm 0 5 mm 0 mm 0 4,9 mm 0 5 mm 0 5 mm 0 mm
RD-WH
BK-WH
0,8 0,8 1,4 0,8 0,8 1,4
3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O ZCM D39L1 + ZCM D39L1 + ZCM D39L1 + ZCM D39L1 + ZCM D39L1 + ZCM D39L1 + ZCM D39L1 +
BK
RD
BU
1,8 4,2(P) 1,8 4,2(P) 3,1(A) 7(P) 11,2(A) 25(P) 1,8 4,2(P) 1,8 4,2(P) 3,1(A) 7(P)
GN-YE RD-RD-WH
BN-BU
RD-RD-WH
BN-BU
RD-RD-WH
BN-BU
RD-RD-WH
BU-BN
RD-RD-WH
BN-BU
RD-RD-WH
BN-BU
RD-RD-WH
BN-BU
RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH BK-BK-WH
RD-WH
BK-WH
RD-RD-WH
BN
BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH RD-RD-WH BU-BN BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH RD-RD-WH

BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU
0 5 mm 0 5 mm 0 mm 0 4,9 mm 0 5 mm 0 5 mm 0 mm
0,8 0,8 1,4 0,8 0,8 1,4
3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O break ZCM D37L1 + ZCM D37L1 + ZCM D37L1 + ZCM D37L1 + ZCM D37L1 + ZCM D37L1 + ZCM D37L1 +
before make, slow break ZCE 10 ZCE 11 ZCE 02 ZCE 24 ZCE F0 ZCE G1 ZCE F2
BK
RD
BU
1,8 3,1(P) 1,8 3,1(P) 3,1(A) 5,6(P) 11,2(A) 19,5(P) 1,8 3,1(P) 1,8 3,1(P) 3,1(A) 5,6(P)
RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH
GN-YE BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU BU-BN BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU
0 2,6 5 mm 0 2,6 5 mm 0 4,6 mm 0 16 mm 0 2,6 5 mm 0 2,6 5 mm 0 4,6 mm
RD-WH
BK-WH
BN
Weight (kg) 0.180 0.180 0.185 0.200 0.195 0.220 0.205

4-pole N/C + N/C + N/O + N/O ZCM D41L1 + ZCM D41L1 + ZCM D41L1 + ZCM D41L1 + ZCM D41L1 + ZCM D41L1 + ZCM D41L1 +
BK
RD
BU
VT
1,8 4,2(P) 1,8 4,2(P) 3,1(A) 7(P) 11,2(A) 25(P) 1,8 4,2(P) 1,8 4,2(P) 3,1(A) 7(P)
RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH
GN-YE BN-BU
VT-VT-WH
BN-BU
VT-VT-WH
BN-BU
VT-VT-WH
BU-BN
VT-VT-WH
BN-BU
VT-VT-WH
BN-BU
VT-VT-WH
BN-BU
VT-VT-WH
RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH BK-BK BK-BK-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH BK-BK
RD-WH
VT-WH
BK-WH
RD-RD-WH
BN
BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH RD-RD-WH BU-BN BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH RD-RD-WH

BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU VT-VT-WH BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU
VT-VT-WH VT-VT-WH VT-VT-WH VT-VT-WH VT-VT-WH VT-VT-WH
0 5 mm 0 5 mm 0 mm 0 4,9 mm 0 5 mm 0 5 mm 0 mm
1,4 1,4
0,8 0,8 0,8 0,8
Weight (kg) 0.160 0.160 0.165 0.180 0.175 0.200 0.185
Contact operation contact closed (A) = cam displacement N/C contact with positive opening operation
contact open (P) = positive opening point
Characteristics
Switch actuation On end By 30° cam On end By 30° cam
Type of actuation
Maximum actuation speed 0.5 m/s 0.1m/s

Mechanical durability 10 million operating cycles
Minimum For tripping 8.5 N 7N 2.5 N 8.5 N 7N
force or For positive 42.5 N 35 N 12.5 N 42.5 N 35 N
torque opening
Cabling PvR cable; 5 x 0.75 mm2, length 1 metre for 2-pole contact versions, 7 x 0.5 mm2, length 1 metre for 3-pole contact versions, 9 x 0.34 mm2,
length 1 metre for 4-pole contact versions. For other cable lengths, see page 5/22.
5/10
characteristics (continued) 5
Pre-cabled
Type of head Rotary (fixing by the body) Multi-directional
Type of operator Thermoplastic Steel roller lever Roller lever with Variable length "Cat’s whisker" (1)
roller lever ball bearing thermoplastic
mounted roller roller lever
References
2-pole N/C + N/O snap action XCM D2115L1 XCM D2116L1 XCM D2117L1 XCM D2145L1 XCM D2106L1
BK
BU
25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 20˚

GN-YE BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH
BU-BN
BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU
BK-WH
BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH

BN
BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU BU-BN

0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 10˚
12˚ 12˚ 12˚ 12˚
2-pole N/C + N/O break before make, slow break XCM D2515L1 XCM D2516L1 XCM D2517L1 XCM D2545L1 XCM D2506L1
BK
BU
25˚ 45˚(P) 25˚ 45˚(P) 25˚ 45˚(P) 25˚ 45˚(P) 20˚

GN-YE BK-BK-WH
BN-BU
BK-BK-WH
BN-BU
BK-BK-WH
BN-BU
BK-BK-WH
BN-BU BK-BK-WH
BN-BU
BK-WH
0 36˚ 90˚ 0 36˚ 90˚ 0 36˚ 90˚ 0 36˚ 90˚

BN
40˚
2-pole N/C + N/C snap action ZCM D29L1 + ZCM D29L1 + ZCM D29L1 + ZCM D29L1 + ZCM D29L1 +
BK
RD
ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 06

ZCY 15 ZCY 16 ZCY 17 ZCY 45
GN-YE
25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 20˚
RD-WH
BK-WH

RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH
0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 10˚
3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O snap action ZCM D39L1 +

12˚
ZCM D39L1 +
12˚
ZCM D39L1 +
12˚
ZCM D39L1 +
12˚
ZCM D39L1 +
5
BK
RD
BU

GN-YE
25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 20˚
RD-WH
BK-WH
BN

BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU BU-BN
RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH BK-BK-WH
BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU RD-RD-WH
BU-BN
0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚
10˚
12˚ 12˚ 12˚ 12˚
3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O break before make, slow break ZCM D37L1 + ZCM D37L1 + ZCM D37L1 + ZCM D37L1 + ZCM D37L1 +
BK
RD
BU

GN-YE
25˚ 45˚(P) 25˚ 45˚(P) 25˚ 45˚(P) 25˚ 45˚(P) 20˚
RD-WH
BK-WH
BN

BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU
0 36˚ 90˚ 0 36˚ 90˚ 0 36˚ 90˚ 0 36˚ 90˚ 40˚
Weight (kg) 0.220 0.225 0.220 0.230 0.180

4-pole N/C + N/C + N/O + N/O snap action ZCM D41L1 + ZCM D41L1 + ZCM D41L1 + ZCM D41L1 + ZCM D41L1 +
BK
RD
BU
VT

GN-YE 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 20˚
RD-WH
BK-BK-WH
VT-WH
BK-WH
BN

VT-VT-WH VT-VT-WH VT-VT-WH VT-VT-WH BU-BN
RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH VT-VT-WH
BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU RD-RD-WH
RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH
BU-BN
VT-VT-WH
0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚
10˚
12˚ 12˚ 12˚ 12˚
Weight (kg) 0.200 0.205 0.200 0.210 0.160

Contact operation contact (A) = cam displacement N/C contact with positive opening
closed (P) = positive opening point operation
contact open
(1) Value taken with actuation by moving part at 100 mm from the fixings.
Characteristics
Switch actuation By 30° cam By any moving part
Type of actuation
Maximum actuation speed 1.5 m/s 1 m/s

Mechanical durability 10 million operating cycles 5
Minimum force or torque For tripping 0.1 N.m
For positive opening 0.5 N.m –
Cabling PvR cable; 5 x 0.75 mm2, length 1 metre for 2-pole contact versions, 7 x 0.5 mm2, length 1 metre
2
for 3-pole contact versions, 9 x 0.34 mm , length 1 metre for 4-pole contact versions. For other
cable lengths, see page 5/22.
5/11
Dimensions 5
Limit switches 5

Pre-cabled
XCM D2p10L1 XCM D2p11L1 XCM D2p02L1
(1) (1) (1)
(2) (2) (2)
XCM D2p24L1 XCM D2pF0L1 XCM D2pG1L1
19
12
(3) (3)
e
f
24
(1)
45
88
85
76
52
50
(2) (2)
(2)
5 2
XCM D2pF2L1
e
36
88
52
(2)
(1) 2 fixing holes Ø 4.2 mm, counterbored Ø 8 mm by 4 mm deep.

(2) Overall diameter of cable 7.5 mm.
(3) Fixing nut thickness 3.5 mm.
e: 8 mm max, panel cut-out Ø 12.5 mm.
f: 8 mm max, panel cut-out Ø 16.5 mm.
5/12
Limit switches 5

Pre-cabled
XCM D2p15L1 XCM D2p16L1 XCM D2p17L1
31 31 31
(1) (1) (1)
(2) (2) (2)
XCM D2p45L1 XCM D2p06L1
33
5,5 Ø16
33,5…83,5
53…103
93…143
5
(1) (1)
40
40
20
16 (2) (2)
30
15°
15°

(2) Overall diameter of cable 7.5 mm.
e: 8 mm max, panel cut-out Ø 12.5 mm.
f: 8 mm max, panel cut-out Ø 16.5 mm.
5/13
characteristics 5
Integral or remote connector
Type of operator Metal end Metal end Steel roller Retractable steel M12 with metal M16 with metal M12 with steel
plunger plunger with plunger roller lever end plunger end plunger with roller plunger
elastomer boot plunger elastomer boot
References
Single-pole XCM D2110M12 XCM D2111M12 XCM D2102M12 XCM D2124M12 XCM D21F0M12 XCM D21G1M12 XCM D21F2M12
C/O
snap action
1,8 4,2(P) 1,8 4,2(P) 3,1(A) 7(P) 11,2(A) 25(P) 1,8 4,2(P) 1,8 4,2(P) 3,1(A) 7(P)
+ integral M12 1-2
1-4
1-2
1-4
1-2
1-4
1-2
1-4
1-2
1-4
1-2
1-4
1-2
1-4
4-pin connector 1-2
1-4
1-2
1-4
1-2
1-4
1-2
1-4
1-2
1-4
1-2
1-4
1-2
1-4
0 5mm 0 5mm 0 mm 0 4,9 mm 0 5mm 0 5mm 0 mm
0,8 0,8 1,4 0,8 0,8 1,4
2-pole XCM D2110C12 XCM D2111C12 XCM D2102C12 XCM D2124C12 XCM D21F0C12 XCM D21G1C12 XCM D21F2C12
N/C + N/O
snap action
1,8 4,2(P) 1,8 4,2(P) 3,1(A) 7(P) 11,2(A) 25(P) 1,8 4,2(P) 1,8 4,2(P) 3,1(A) 7(P)
+ integral M12 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2
3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4
5-pin connector 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2
3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4
0 5mm 0 5mm 0 mm 0 4,9 mm 0 5mm 0 5mm 0 mm
0,8 0,8 1,4 0,8 0,8 1,4
2-pole ZCM D29C12 + ZCM D29C12 + ZCM D29C12 + ZCM D29C12 + ZCM D29C12 + ZCM D29C12 + ZCM D29C12 +
N/C + N/C ZCE 10 ZCE 11 ZCE 02 ZCE 24 ZCE F0 ZCE G1 ZCE F2
snap action
5 + integral M12 1-2
3-4
5-pin connector 13 -- 24
1,8 4,2(P)
1-2
3-4
1-2
3-4
1,8 4,2(P)
1-2
3-4
1-2
3-4
3,1(A) 7(P)
1-2
3-4
1-2
11,2(A) 25(P) 1-2
3-4
1-2
3-4
1,8 4,2(P)
1-2
3-4
1-2
3-4
1,8 4,2(P)
1-2
3-4
1-2
3-4
3,1(A) 7(P)
3-4 0 5mm 0
0 5mm 0 5mm 5mm 0
0 1,4 mm 0 4,9 mm 1,4 mm
0,8 0,8 0,8 0,8
Weight (kg) 0.085 0.085 0.090 0.105 0.100 0.125 0.110

2-pole ZCM D21L08R12 ZCM D21L08R12 ZCM D21L08R12 ZCM D21L08R12 ZCM D21L08R12 ZCM D21L08R12 ZCM D21L08R12
N/C + N/O + ZCE 10 + ZCE 11 + ZCE 02 + ZCE 24 + ZCE F0 + ZCE G1 + ZCE F2
snap action
1,8 4,2(P) 1,8 4,2(P) 3,1(A) 7(P) 11,2(A) 25(P) 1,8 4,2(P) 1,8 4,2(P) 3,1(A) 7(P)
+ M12 5-pin 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2
3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4
connector on 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2
3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4
0.8 m flying lead 0 5mm 0 5mm 0 mm 0 0 5mm 0 5mm 0 mm
4,9 mm
0,8 0,8 1,4 0,8 0,8 1,4
2-pole ZCM D21L08U78 ZCM D21L08U78 ZCM D21L08U78 ZCM D21L08U78 ZCM D21L08U78 ZCM D21L08U78 ZCM D21L08U78
N/C + N/O + ZCE 10 + ZCE 11 + ZCE 02 + ZCE 24 + ZCE F0 + ZCE G1 + ZCE F2
snap action 1,8 4,2(P) 1,8 4,2(P)
1,8 4,2(P) 3,1(A) 7(P) 11,2(A) 25(P) 1,8 4,2(P) 3,1(A) 7(P)
+ 7/8" 16UN 4-5 4-5
1-2
4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5
1-2
4-5
1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2
5-pin connector 4-5
1-2
4-5
1-2
4-5 4-5 4-5
1-2
4-5
1-2
4-5
1-2 1-2 1-2
on 0.8 m flying 0 5mm 0 5mm 0 mm 0 0 5mm 0 5mm 0 mm
4,9 mm
lead 0,8 0,8 1,4 0,8 0,8 1,4
Weight (kg) 0.150 0.150 0.155 0.170 0.165 0.190 0.175

Characteristics
Type of actuation
Maximum actuation speed 0.5 m/s 0.1 m/s

torque opening
Positive operation Although their design is identical to the pre-cabled switches, the switches incorporating an M12 4-pin connector cannot be marked
with the symbol because they are single-pole C/O.
5/14
characteristic (continued) 5
Type of head Rotary (fixing by the body) Multi-

directional
Type of operator Thermoplastic Steel roller lever Roller lever with Variable length “Cat’s whisker” (1)
roller lever ball bearing thermoplastic
mounted roller roller lever
References
Single-pole C/O snap action XCM D2115M12 XCM D2116M12 XCM D2117M12 XCM D2145M12 XCM D2106M12
With integral M12 4-pin connector
25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 20˚
1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2
1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4
1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2
1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4
0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 10˚
12˚ 12˚ 12˚ 12˚
2-pole N/C + N/O snap action XCM D2115C12 XCM D2116C12 XCM D2117C12 XCM D2145C12 XCM D2106C12
With integral M12 5-pin connector
25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 20˚
1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2
3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4
1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2
3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4
0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 10˚
12˚ 12˚ 12˚ 12˚
2-pole N/C + N/C snap action ZCM D29C12 + ZCM D29C12 + ZCM D29C12 + ZCM D29C12 + ZCM D29C12 +
With integral M12 5-pin connector ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 06
1-2
20˚ 70˚(P)
1-2
20˚ 70˚(P)
1-2
20˚ 70˚(P)
1-2
20˚ 70˚(P)
1-2
20˚ 5
3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4
1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2
3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4
0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 10˚
12˚ 12˚ 12˚ 12˚
Weight (kg) 0.125 0.130 0.125 0.135 0.085
2-pole N/C + N/O snap action ZCM D21L08R12 ZCM D21L08R12 ZCM D21L08R12 ZCM D21L08R12 ZCM D21L08R12
With M12 5-pin connector on 0.8 m flying lead + ZCE 01 + + ZCE 01 + + ZCE 01 + + ZCE 01 + + ZCE 06
25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 20˚
1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2
3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4
1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2
3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4
0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 10˚
12˚ 12˚ 12˚ 12˚
2-pole N/C + N/O snap action ZCM D21L08U78 ZCM D21L08U78 ZCM D21L08U78 ZCM D21L08U78 ZCM D21L08U78
With 7/8" 16UN 5-pin connector on 0.8 m flying + ZCE 01 + + ZCE 01 + + ZCE 01 + + ZCE 01 + + ZCE 06
lead ZCY 15 ZCY 16 ZCY 17 ZCY 45
25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 20˚
4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5
1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2
4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5
1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2
0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 10˚
12˚ 12˚ 12˚ 12˚
Weight (kg) 0.200 0.205 0.200 0.210 0.160
contact open
(1) Value taken with actuation by moving part at 100 mm from the fixing.
Characteristics
Switch actuation By 30° cam By any moving
part
Type of actuation

Mechanical durability 10 million operating cycles 5
For positive opening 0.5 N.m –
Positive operation Although their design is identical to the pre-cabled switches, the switches incorporating an M12
4-pin connector cannot be marked with the symbol because they are single-pole C/O.
5/15
connections, Osiswitch® Universal, Osiconcept®

dimensions 5
Connector cabling accessories
References of suitable pre-wired female connectors

Type of connector M12 straight, 4-pin M12 straight, 5-pin M12 elbowed, 5-pin 7/8" 16 UN straight,
4 A, 250 V 4 A, 24 V 4 A, 24 V 5-pin, 6 A, 250 V
With cable L=2m XZ CP1169L2 XZ CP1164L2 XZ CP1264L2 XZ CP1771L2
L=5m XZ CP1169L5 XZ CP1164L5 XZ CP1264L5 XZ CP1771L5
L = 10 m XZ CP1169L10 XZ CP1164L10 XZ CP1264L10 XZ CP1771L10
Weight (kg) 0.105 0.115 0.115 0.190
Connections
XCM D with connector
4-pin, M12 5-pin, M12 5-pin, 7/8" 16 UN
4 A - 60 V
2 3 A - 250 V 2 XCM D21pp or ZCM D21pp 3 6 A - 250 V
1 = common 1 - 2 = N/C 1 - 2 = N/C
3 4 2
1 2 = N/C 3 1 3 - 4 = N/O 4 - 5 = N/O
3=t 5=t 3=t
4 = N/O XCM D29pp or ZCM D29pp 5 1
4 4
1 - 2 = N/C
3 - 4 = N/C
5=t
Pre-wired female connectors XZ CP

4-pin, M12 5-pin, M12 5-pin, 7/8" 16 UN
2 1 = brown 2 1 = brown 3 1 = black

2 = blue 2 = white 2 4 2 = blue
3
1 3 = yellow/green t 1 3 3 = blue 3 = yellow/green t
4 = black 4 = black 4 = brown
4 4 t = yellow/green 1 5 5 = white
5
Dimensions
XZ CP116pLp XZ CP1264Lp XZ CP1771Lp
26
20
42 L
32 L
55 L
40
L: cable length 2, 5 or 10 m.
Distances required for plug-in connectors
M12 straight connector M12 elbowed connector Connector on flying lead
d d
d
d: min. 65 mm, recommended 69 mm. d: min. 42 mm, recommended 45 mm. d: min. 20 mm.
5/16
Dimensions 5
Limit switches 5

XCM D2p10M12 XCM D2p11M12 XCM D2p02M12
(1) (1)
(1)
70,4
92,4
50
60
82
50
70
92
50
M12
XCM D2p24M12 XCM D2pF0M12 XCM D2pG1M12

M16X1 Ø7
12 21,4
Ø9 M12x1
e
38
(1)
45
24
88
85
110
107
50
98
52
50
M12 30 30
16 52
5
XCM D2pF2M12 XCM D2p45M12 XCM D2p15M12 /p16M12 /p17M12
31
3,5
53…103
93…143
Ø10,6
34,5
e
36
M12x1
54
115…165
(1) (1)
116
94
110
88
52
M12 30
16 52
32,4
XCM D2p06M12 (1) 2 fixing holes Ø 4.2 mm, counterbored Ø 8 mm by 4 mm deep.

e: 8 mm max., panel cut-out Ø 12.5 mm, fixing nut thickness 3.5 mm.
1,2 f: 8 mm max., panel cut-out Ø 16.5 mm, fixing nut thickness 3.5 mm.
182
204
5/17
Limit switches 5

ZCM D21L08ppp + ZCE 10 ZCM D21L08ppp + ZCE 11 ZCM D21L08ppp + ZCE 02
(1)
(1) (1)
30
70
60
(2) (2) (2)
ZCM D21L08ppp + ZCE 24 ZCM D21L08ppp + ZCE F0 ZCM D21L08ppp + ZCE G1
12 19
Ø9
38
e
f
24
45
(1)
88
85
5
76
50
52
(2) (2) (2)

(2) Overall diameter 7.5 mm.
f: 8 mm max., panel cut-out Ø 16.5 mm, fixing nut thickness 3.5 mm.
5/18
Limit switches 5

ZCM D21L08ppp + ZCE F2 ZCM D21L08ppp + ZCE 01 ZCM D21L08ppp + ZCE 01 + ZCY 45
+ ZCY 15/16/17
31 33
5,5 Ø16
33,5…83,5
53…103
93…143
36
54
e
(1) (1)
94
88
52
(2) (2)
20 (2)
16
30
32,4
15°
15°
ZCM D21L08ppp + ZCE 06
(1) 5
40
(2)

f: 8 mm max., panel cut-out Ø 16.5 mm, fixing nut thickness 3.5 mm.
5/19
Presentation 5
Limit switches 5

Variable composition
Thermoplastic roller Thermoplastic roller Thermoplastic roller Retractable

lever plunger, lever plunger, lever plunger, steel roller lever
horizontal vertical actuation horizontal or vertical plunger
actuation actuation
ZCE 21 ZCE 27 ZCE 28 ZCE 24
Side metal
plunger,
adjustable
Side metal Side steel Side steel Side steel
plunger roller plunger, roller plunger, ball bearing
ZCE 62 horizontal vertical plunger
M12 with M16 with

steel steel end
roller plunger
M12 with plunger with
metal end elastomer
plunger boot
ZCE F0 ZCE F2 ZCE G1
5 Steel
roller
Steel
roller plunger
Spring rod
with
Spring rod
“Cat’s
plunger with elastomer thermoplastic whisker”
boot end
ZCE 02 ZCE 29 ZCE 07 ZCE 08 ZCE 06
Metal end Metal end plunger Steel ball bearing Metal end Side
plunger with elastomer plunger plunger, “Cat’s
boot adjustable whisker”
Body with Body with Body with Body with Body with
2-pole 2-pole 2-pole 3-pole 3-pole
N/C + N/O N/C + N/C N/C + N/O N/C + N/C N/C + N/C
snap snap break before + N/O break + N/O snap
action action make, slow before make, action
contact contact break contact slow break contact
contact
ZCM D21 ZCM D29 ZCM D25 ZCM D37 ZCM D39
Bodies with pre- Bodies with pre- Bodies with pre- Bodies with pre- Bodies with pre-
cabled contacts cabled contacts cabled contacts cabled contacts cabled contacts
ZCM D21L1 ZCM D29L1 ZCM D25L1 ZCM D37L1 ZCM D39L1
(1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
(1) Pre-cabled connection components: replace the “p” in the reference by the required cable length in metres, either: 1, 2, 3, 5, 7 or 10.
Example: ZCM C21Lp becomes ZCM C21L7 for a 7 metre long cable.
Note: only cable lengths of 1, 2 and 5 metres are available for pre-cabled connection components ZCM C37Lp and ZCM C39L p.
5/20
Presentation 5
Limit switches 5

Round rod lever, Square rod lever, Round rod lever, Round rod lever,
steel, Ø 3 mm steel, U 3 mm glass fibre, thermoplastic,
L = 125 mm L = 125 mm Ø 3 mm Ø 6 mm
L = 125 mm L = 200 mm
Ceramic Spring lever with Spring - rod

roller lever thermoplastic lever, metal
end
ZCY 22 ZCY 81 ZCY 91
Variable length Variable length Variable length Variable length

thermoplastic thermoplastic steel roller steel roller lever,
roller lever,
with pliable
roller lever lever with pliable
lever
5
lever
Spring return ZCY 44 ZCY 45 ZCY 46 ZCY 48
for actuation
from left AND
right
ZCE 01 Thermoplastic Steel roller lever, Steel ball bearing Thermoplastic Steel roller lever,
roller lever, track 20/36 mm mounted roller roller lever, track 24/31 mm
track 20/36 mm lever, track 24/31 mm
track 20/36 mm
ZCY 18 ZCY 19 ZCY 12 ZCY 15 ZCY 16
Steel ball bearing Thermoplastic Steel roller lever, Steel ball bearing
Stay put mounted roller roller lever, track 16/39 mm mounted roller
for actuation lever, track 16/39 mm lever,
from left AND track 24/31 mm track 16/39 mm
right
ZCE 09(1)
Forked arm with Forked arm with
rollers, 2 track, rollers, 1 track,
track 21/35 mm track 28 mm
ZCY 61 ZCY 71
Pre-cabled bodies
with 4-pole Bodies with integral connector, with Body with 7/8" 16UN 5-pin connector on
N/C + N/C + N/O + 2-pole snap action contact: 0.8 m flying lead, with
N/O snap action N/C + N/O, M12 5-pin connector 2-pole N/C + N/O snap action contact
contact ZCM D21C12 ZCM D21L08U78
N/C + N/C, M12 5-pin connector
ZCM D29C12 Body with M12 5-pin connector on
ZCM D41L1 0.8 m flying lead, with
ZCM D41L2 C/O, M12 4-pin connector 2-pole N/C + N/O snap action contact
ZCM D41L5 ZCM D21M12 ZCM D21L08R12
(1) Cannot be used on bodies ZCM D21, ZCM D29, ZCM D39, ZCM D41, ZCM D21C12,
ZCM D21M12, ZCM D29C12, ZCM D21L08ppp.
5/21
References 5
Limit switches 5

Separate components
Pre-cabled connection components (CEI cable) (1)

Type of contact Scheme Length of Reference Weight
CEI cable
in metres kg
2-pole
520719
N/C + N/O 1 ZCM C21E1 0.100
BK
BU
snap action
GN-YE
2 ZCM C21E2 0.190
BK-WH
BN
3 ZCM C21E3 0.280
ZCM C21Ep
5 ZCM C21E5 0.440
7 ZCM C21E7 0.700
10 ZCM C21E10 0.970
Bodies with gold contacts

Type of contact Positive Scheme Length of Reference Weight
operation cable in
(2) metres kg
2-pole
520720
N/C + N/O – ZCM D61 0.055
BK
BU
snap action GN-YE
BK-WH
N/C + N/C BN – ZCM D69 0.055

BK
RD
snap action GN-YE

RD-WH
BK-WH
N/C + N/O – ZCM D65 0.055

BK
BU
5 break before make,

slow break
GN-YE
BK-WH
BN
ZCM D6p
ZCM D7p 3-pole
N/C + N/C + N/O – ZCM D79 0.055
BK
RD
BU
snap action GN-YE

RD-WH
BK-WH
BN
N/C + N/C + N/O – ZCM D77 0.055

BK
RD
BU
break before make, GN-YE

RD-WH
BK-WH
BN
slow break
520721
4-pole
N/C + N/C + N/O + N/O 1 ZCM D81L1 0.160
BK
RD
BU
VT
snap action GN-YE

RD-WH
VT-WH
BK-WH
BN
2 ZCM D81L2 0.255
5 ZCM D81L5 0.525
(1) Cable not UL, CSA certified.

(2) bodies with contacts assuring positive opening operation.
ZCM D81Lp
5/22
Limit switches 5

Separate components
562245
Bodies with gold contacts, integral connector

Type of contact Positive Scheme Connector Reference Weight
operation
(1) kg
2-pole
N/C + N/O – M12 5-pin ZCM D61C12 0.065
snap action
N/C + N/C – M12 5-pin ZCM D69C12 0.065

snap action
Single-pole
ZCM D61ppp C/O – M12 4-pin ZCM D61M12 0.065
snap action
561408
Accessories
Description Positive Suitable levers Reference Weight
operation for use with
(1) head kg
Rotary head, without lever, ZCY 12, ZCY 15, ZCE 05 0.045
ZCE 05 spring return, for actuation ZCY 16, ZCY 17,
from left AND right ZCY 18, ZCY 19,
or ZCY 22, ZCY 23,
566638
566637
from left OR right (2) ZCY 25, ZCY 26,

ZCY 39, ZCY 53,
ZCY 54, ZCY 55,
ZCY 81
XCM Z06 Spacer for mounting – – XCM Z06 0.005
XCM Z07
multi-track XCM D
Spacer for angular – – XCM Z07 0.005 5
positioning of heads with
562246
adjustable levers, for values

other than - 90°, 0° and 90°
Bodies with contacts, with rotary head (without operating lever),
pre-cabled
Type of contact Positive Scheme Length of Reference Weight
operation cable in
(1) metres kg
2-pole
N/C + N/O 1 XCM D2101L1 0.180
BK
BU
snap action GN-YE

BK-WH
BN
N/C + N/O 1 XCM D2501L1 0.180

BK
BU
break before make, GN-YE

slow break
BK-WH
BN
XCM D2p01L1
Bodies with contacts, with rotary head (without operating lever),
integral connector
562247
Type of contact Positive Scheme Connector Reference Weight

operation
(1) kg
2-pole
N/C + N/O M12 5-pin XCM D2101C12 0.110
snap action
Single-pole
C/O – M12 4-pin XCM D2101M12 0.110
snap action
(1) bodies with contacts or head assuring positive opening operation.

(2) For programming see page 5/178.
XCM D2101p12
5/23
Presentation 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Optimum
Miniature design, plastic, type XCM N
b XCM N v With head for linear movement (plunger). Fixing by the body.
pre-cabled
520366
530750
Page 5/26
v With head for linear movement (plunger). Fixing by the head.

530751
530752
Page 5/26
v With head for rotary movement (lever) or multi-directional.
5
530753
520371
Page 5/27
5/24
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Optimum
Product certifications UL, CSA, CCC
Protective treatment Standard version “TC”
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 5 gn (10…500 Hz)
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 25 gn (18 ms)
Electric shock protection Class II conforming to IEC 61140 and NF C 20030
Degree of protection IP 65 conforming to IEC 60529; IK 04 conforming to EN 50102
Materials Bodies Plastic
Heads Zamak

Rated operational characteristics a AC-15; B300 (Ue = 240 V, Ie = 1.5 A); Ithe = 6 A
EN 60947-5-1
Rated insulation voltage Ui = 400 V degree of pollution 3 conforming to IEC 60947-1
Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp = 4 kV conforming to IEC 60947-1, IEC 60664 5
Short-circuit protection 6 A cartridge fuse type gG (gl)
5/25
characteristics, Osiswitch® Optimum

dimensions 5
Pre-cabled
Type of operator Metal end Steel roller Steel roller Thermoplastic M12 with metal M12 with steel M12 with steel
plunger plunger for plunger for roller lever end plunger roller plunger for roller plunger for
lateral cam traverse cam plunger, lateral cam traverse cam
approach approach 1 direction of approach approach
actuation
References
2-pole XCM N2110L1 XCM N2102L1 XCM N2103L1 XCM N2121L1 XCM N21F0L1 XCM N21F2L1 XCM N21F3L1
BK
BU
N/C + N/O
snap action 1,8 4,2(P) 3,1(A) 7(P) 3,1(A) 7(P) 6,5(A) 14 (P) 1,8 4,2(P) 3,1(A) 7(P) 3,1(A) 7(P)
BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH
BK-WH

BN

0 5mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 5mm 0 mm 0 mm
0,8 1,4 1,4 2,8 0,8 1,4 1,4
Weight (kg) 0.080 0.080 0.080 0.090 0.065 0.095 0.095

Characteristics
Type of actuation
Maximum actuation speed 0.5 m/s 0.1 m/s 0.5 m/s 0.1 m/s
5 Mechanical durability 5 millions operating cycles
torque opening
Cabling PvR cable, 4 x 0.75 mm2, length 1 metre
Dimensions
XCM N2110L1 XCM N2102L1, XCM N2103L1 XCM N21F2L1, XCM N21F3L1
3,5 Ø10,6
3,5 Ø11,6 M12x1
Ø7
36
(1) (1)
30,4
20
e
88
70,4
60
52
50
50
40
40
(2) (2) (2)

20 20 30
16 16 16
30 30
XCM N2121L1 XCM N21F0L1

(1) 2 fixing holes Ø 4.2 mm, counterbored
Ø 8 mm by 4 mm deep.
16
e: 8 mm max, panel cut-out Ø 12.5 mm,
Ø7
M12x1 fixing nut thickness 3.5 mm.
24
39
e
76
(1)
52
50
40
(2) (2)
20 30
16 16
30
5/26

Pre-cabled
Type of operator Thermoplastic Variable length Round Spring lever with "Cat’s whisker" (1)
roller lever thermoplastic thermoplastic thermoplastic
roller lever rod lever Ø 6 mm end (1)
(1)
References
2-pole XCM N2115L1 XCM N2145L1 XCM N2159L1 XCM N2107L1 XCM N2106L1
BK
BU
N/C + N/O
snap action 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 20˚ 20˚
BK-WH
BK-BK-WH
BN
BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU BU-BN BU-BN

BN-BU BN-BU BN-BU BU-BN BU-BN
0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 10˚ 10˚
12˚ 12˚ 12˚
Weight (kg) 0.100 0.105 0.080 0.085 0.080
contact
open
Characteristics
Type of actuation
5
Maximum actuation speed 1.5 m/s 1 m/s 1 m/s (any direction)
Mechanical durability 5 millions operating cycles
For positive opening 0.5 N.m – –
Cabling PvR cable, 4 x 0.75 mm2, length 1 metre
Dimensions
XCM N2115L1 XCM N2159L1 XCM N2107L1
31
24
5,5 Ø16
30 Ø6
128
34,4
Ø6,4
192
54
168
(1) (1) (1)

232
94
40
40
40
20 (2) 20 (2) 20 (2)

16 16 16
32,4 30 40,5 30 30
XCM N2145L1 XCM N2106L1

33 (1) 2 fixing holes Ø 4.2 mm, counterbored
Ø 8 mm by 4 mm deep.
5,5 Ø16 (2) Overall diameter 7.5 mm.
Ø1,2
33,5…83,5
53…103
142
182
93…143
(1)
(1)
40
20 (2)
20 (2) 16
16 30
30
5/27
Presentation, Limit switches 5
general characteristics 5
Compact design, plastic, types XCK P and XCK T
Compact design, metal, type XCK D
b XCK P, XCK D v With head for linear movement (plunger). Fixing by the head or by the body.
with 1 cable entry XCK D XCK P
Conforming to CENELEC EN 50047
520353
520354
520355
520356
Pages 5/30 and 5/34 Pages 5/36 and 5/40
XCK D XCK P
520357
520358
520359
520360
Pages 5/31 and 5/35 Pages 5/37 and 5/41
b XCK T v With head for linear movement (plunger). Fixing by the head or by the body.
with 2 cable entries XCK T
Tripping/resetting points and fixing centres conform to
5 CENELEC EN 50047
520361
520362
520363
Page 5/42
XCK T
520364
520365
Page 5/42
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 25 gn (10…500 Hz) except switch with head ZCE 24: 20 gn
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 50 gn (11 ms) except heads ZCE 08 : 15 gn (11 ms) and ZCE 24 : 30 gn (18 ms)
Electric shock protection Class II conforming to IEC 61140 and NF C 20-030 for XCK P and XCK T
Class I conforming to IEC 61140 and NF C 20-030 for XCK D
Degree of protection IP 66 and IP 67 conforming to IEC 60529; IK 04 conforming to EN 50102 for XCK P and
XCK T, IK 06 conforming to EN 50102 for XCK D
Cable entry or Depending on model Either: tapped entry for n° 11 or n° 13 cable gland, tapped ISO M16 x 1.5 or ISO M20 x 1.5,
integral connector tapped 1/2" NPT, tapped PF 1/2 (G1/2) or integral M12 connector
Materials XCK D: zamak bodies and heads, XCK P and XCK T: plastic bodies, zamak heads
5/28
General characteristics Limit switches 5
(continued) 5
Compact design, plastic, types XCK P and XCK T

Rated operational XE2p P a AC-15; A300 (Ue = 240 V, Ie = 3 A); Ithe = 10 A
characteristics c DC-13; Q300 (Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0.27 A), conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix A,
EN 60947-5-1
XE3p P a AC-15; B300 (Ue = 240 V, Ie = 1.5 A); Ithe = 6 A
EN 60947-5-1
Rated insulation voltage XE2p P Ui = 500 V degree of pollution 3 conforming to IEC 60947-1
XE3p P Ui = 400 V degree of pollution 3 conforming to IEC 60947-1
Rated impulse withstand XE2p P U imp = 6 kV conforming to IEC 60947-1, IEC 60664
voltage XE3p P U imp = 4 kV conforming to IEC 60947-1, IEC 60664
Positive operation (depending on model) N/C contacts with positive opening operation conforming to IEC 60 947-5-1 Appendix K,
EN 60947-5-1
Resistance across terminals y 25 mΩ conforming to IEC 60255-7 category 3
Short-circuit protection XE2p P 10 A cartridge fuse type gG (gl)
XE3p P 6 A cartridge fuse type gG (gl)
Cabling XE2S Pp151 and XE2S P2141 Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 0.34 mm2, max: 2 x 1.5 mm2
(screw clamp terminals) XE2N P21p1 and XE2N P31p1 Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 0.5 mm2, max: 2 x 2.5 mm2
XE3N P and XE3S P Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 0.34 mm2, max: 1 x 1 mm2 or 2 x 0.75 mm2
Minimum actuation speed XE2S Pp151, XE2S P2141 and XE3S P: 0.01 m/minute
(for head with end plunger) XE2N P21p1, XE2N P31p1 and XE3N P: 6 m/minute
b Load factor: 0.5
XE2S Pp151, XE2S P2141 XE2N P21p1, XE2N P31p1
a.c. supply
a 50/60 Hz 5 5

o inductive circuit Ithe 4 Ithe

3
230 V 12/24/48 V
2
110 V
5
1 1
110 V
0,5 24 V 0,5
230/400 V
48 V 0,2
0,1 0,1
0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10
d.c. supply c Power broken in W for 5 million operating Power broken in W for 5 million operating
cycles. cycles.
o W 10 7 4 o W 13 9 7
For XE2S Pp151 on a or c, N/C and N/O contacts simultaneously loaded to the values shown
with reverse polarity.
XE3N Ppppp XE3S Ppppp

a.c. supply
a 50/60 Hz Ithe
Ithe
5 5
o inductive circuit 4
3
2
12/24/48 V
230 V
1
110 V
1
0,5 0,5
110 V
230/400 V 24 V 0,2
48 V
0,1 0,1
0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10
cycles. cycles.
o W 3 2 1 o W 4 3 2
5/29
characteristics 5
Complete units with 1 ISO M16 x 1.5 cable entry
Type of head Plunger (fixing by the body)

Form B (1) Form C (1) Form E (1)
Type of operator Metal end plunger Metal end plunger Steel roller plunger Thermoplastic Thermoplastic Thermoplastic
with elastomer roller lever plunger, roller lever plunger, roller lever plunger,
boot horizontal actuation vertical actuation horiz. or vert. actu-
in 1 direction in 1 direction ation in 1 direction
References (2) (3)
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK D2110P16 XCK D2111P16 XCK D2102P16 XCK D2121P16 XCK D2127P16 XCK D2128P16
13
21
snap action (XE2S P2151)

1,8 4,6(P) 1,8 4,6(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 6,5(A) 15,7(P) 6,5(B) 15,7(P) 9,8(A) 22,5(P)
14
22
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22

13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 5mm 0 5mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm
0,9 0,9 1,5 3 3 4,9
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK D2510P16 XCK D2511P16 XCK D2502P16 XCK D2521P16 XCK D2527P16 XCK D2528P16
21
13
break before make, slow break

(XE2N P2151) 1,8 3,2(P) 1,8 3,2(P) 3,1(A) 5,6(P) 6,5(A) 11,3(P) 6,5(B) 11,3(P) 9,8(A) 17,2(P)
22
14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22

13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 3 5mm 0 3 5mm 0 5,2 mm 0 10,5 mm 0 10,5 mm 0 16,1 mm
2-pole N/C + N/C ZCD 29 + ZCD 29 + ZCD 29 + ZCD 29 + ZCD 29 + ZCD 29 +

11
21
snap action (XE2S P2141) ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 +
ZCE 10 ZCE 11 ZCE 02 ZCE 21 ZCE 27 ZCE 28
12
22
1,8 4,6(P) 1,8 4,6(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 6,5(A) 15,7(P) 6,5(B) 15,7(P) 9,8(A) 22,5(P)
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
0 5mm 0 5mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm
0,9 0,9 1,5 3 3 4,9
5 2-pole N/C + N/C ZCD 27 + ZCD 27 + ZCD 27 + ZCD 27 + ZCD 27 + ZCD 27 +

11
21
simultaneous, slow break ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 +
(XE2N P2141) ZCE 10 ZCE 11 ZCE 02 ZCE 21 ZCE 27 ZCE 28
12
22
1,8 3,2(P) 1,8 3,2(P) 3,1 5,6(P) 6,6(A) 11,6(P) 6,6(B) 11,6(P) 5,3(A)
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
0 5mm 0 5mm 0 5mm 0 5mm 0 5mm 0 5mm
3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O ZCD 39 + ZCD 39 + ZCD 39 + ZCD 39 + ZCD 39 + ZCD 39 +
13
31
21
snap action (XE3S P2141) ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 +
14
32
22
1,8 4,6(P) 1,8 4,6(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 6,5(A) 15,7(P) 6,5(B) 15,7(P) 9,8(A) 22,5(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 5mm 0 5mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm
0,9 0,9 1,5 3 3 4,9
3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O ZCD 37 + ZCD 37 + ZCD 37 + ZCD 37 + ZCD 37 + ZCD 37 +
13
31
21
break before make, slow break ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 +
14
32
22
1,8 3,2(P) 1,8 3,2(P) 3,1(A) 5,6(P) 6,5(A) 11,3(P) 6,5(B) 11,3(P) 9,8(A) 17,2(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 3 5mm 0 3 5mm 0 5,2 mm 0 10,5 mm 0 10,5 mm 0 16,1 mm
Weight (kg) 0.180 0.180 0.185 0.195 0.190 0.195

Contact operation contact closed (A)(B) = cam displacement N/C contact with positive opening
contact open (P) = positive opening point operation
Characteristics
Switch actuation On end By 30° cam
Type of actuation

Mechanical durability 15 10 15
(in millions of operating cycles)
Minimum force For tripping 15 N 12 N 6N
or torque
For positive opening 45 N 36 N 18 N
Cable entry (3) 1 entry tapped M16 x 1.5 mm for ISO cable gland, clamping capacity 4 to 8 mm
(1) Form conforming to EN 50047, see page 5/184.
(2) Switches with gold contacts or ring type connections: please consult our Regional Sales Office.
(3) For an entry tapped for a n° 11 cable gland, replace P16 in the reference by G11. Examples: XCK D2110P16 becomes XCK D2110G11, ZCD EP16 becomes
ZCD EG11.
5/30
Type of head Plunger (fixing by the head) Rotary (fixing by the body) Multi-
directional
Form A (1)
Type of operator M18 with metal M18 with steel Thermoplastic Variable length Thermoplastic Variable length "Cat’s whisker"
end plunger roller plunger roller lever thermoplastic roller lever, thermoplastic (4)
roller lever Ø 50 mm roller lever,
Ø 50 mm
References (2) (3)
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK D21H0P16 XCK D21H2P16 XCK D2118P16 XCK D2145P16 XCK D2139P16 XCK D2149P16 XCK D2106P16
13
21
snap action
(XE2S P2151) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 70 70
1,8 4,6(P) 70 70
14
22
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22

13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 5mm 0 mm 0 0 0 0 0
0,9 1,5
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK D25H0P16 XCK D25H2P16 XCK D2518P16 XCK D2545P16 XCK D2539P16 XCK D2549P16 XCK D2506P16
21
13
break before
make, slow break
22
1,8 3,2(P) 46
14
3,1(A) 5,6(P) 46 46 46
(XE2N P2151) 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 3 5mm 0 5,2 mm 0 0 0 0 0
2-pole N/C + N/C ZCD 29 + ZCD 29 + ZCD 29 + ZCD 29 + ZCD 29 + ZCD 29 + ZCD29 +
11
21
snap action ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 +
(XE2S P2141) ZCE H0 ZCE H2 ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 06
12
22

1,8 4,6(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 70 70 70 70
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
0
0,9
5mm 0
1,5
mm 0 0 0 0 0
5
2-pole N/C + N/C ZCD 27 + ZCD 27 + ZCD 27 + ZCD 27 + ZCD 27 + ZCD 27 + ZCD 27 +
11
21
simultaneous, ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 +
slow break ZCE H0 ZCE H2 ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 06
12
22
(XE2N P2141) ZCY 18 ZCY 45 ZCY 39 ZCY 49

1,8 3,2(P) 3,1 5,6(P) 46 46 46 46
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
0 5mm 0 5mm 0 0 0 0 0
3-pole N/C + ZCD 39 + ZCD 39 + ZCD 39 + ZCD 39 + ZCD 39 + ZCD 39 + ZCD 39 +
13
31
21
N/C + N/O ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 +
snap action ZCE H0 ZCE H2 ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 06
14
32
22
(XE3S P2141) ZCY 18 ZCY 45 ZCY 39 ZCY 49

1,8 4,6(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 20˚
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 5mm 0 mm 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0

0,9 1,5 12˚ 12˚ 12˚ 12˚ 15˚
3-pole N/C + ZCD 37+ ZCD 37 + ZCD 37 + ZCD 37 + ZCD 37 + ZCD 37 + ZCD 37 +
13
31
21
N/C + N/O ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 + ZCD EP16 +
break before ZCE H0 ZCE H2 ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 06
14
32
22
make, slow ZCY 18 ZCY 45 ZCY 39 ZCY 49

break 1,8 3,2(P) 3,1(A) 5,6(P) 25˚ 46˚(P) 25˚ 46˚(P) 25˚ 46˚(P) 25˚ 46˚(P) 20˚
(XE3N P2141) 21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 3 5mm 0 5,2 mm 0 42˚ 90˚ 0 42˚ 90˚ 0 42˚ 90˚ 0 42˚ 90˚ 0 45˚
Weight (kg) 0.220 0.220 0.225 0.235 0.235 0.245 0.175

Characteristics
Switch actuation On end By 30° cam By any moving part
Type of actuation
Maximum actuation speed 0.5 m/s 1.5 m/s 1 m/s (any direct.)
Mechanical durability 10 million operating cycles 5 million op. cycles
Minimum For tripping 15 N 10 N 0.1 N.m 0.13 N.m
force or For positive 45 N 36 N 0.25 N.m –
torque opening
(3) For an entry tapped for a n° 11 cable gland, replace P16 in the reference by G11. Examples: XCK D21H0P16 becomes XCK D21H0G11, ZCD EP16 becomes
ZCD EG11.
5/31
Dimensions 5
Limit switches 5

Compact design,metal, type XCK D
ZCD 2p + ZCD EP16 / ZCD 3p + ZCDE P16 ZCE 10 ZCE 11

10
12,5 8
(2) 12,5
2
51
30
19
20
(3)
(1)
ZCE 02 ZCE 21 ZCE 27
16
12,5 12,5 5,5
3,5 11,6 5,5
22
20,2
41
30,5
39
5 12
ZCE 28 ZCE H0 ZCE H2
12,5
16 36,2 12,5
5,5 22 12,5 3,5
2,5 = = 2,5
7 M18x1(4)
M18x1(4)
29
38
48
26
13 7
(1) Tapped entry for ISO M16 x 1.5 or Pg 11 cable gland.

(2) 2 elongated holes Ø 4.3 x 6.3 mm on 22 mm centres, 2 holes Ø 4.3 on 20 mm centres.
(3) 2 x Ø 3 holes for support studs, depth 4 mm.
5/32
Limit switches 5

ZCE 01 + ZCY 18 ZCE 01 + ZCY 45 ZCE 01 + ZCY 39
37,5
12,5 42
40 5,5 10
5,5
24
33…83,5
52,5…103
58
33
77,5
52,5
12,5
12,5
16
ZCE 01 + ZCY 49 ZCE 06
40
10
5
142
12,5
12,5 16
5/33
characteristics, Osiswitch® Universal, Osiconcept®

connections, Integral M12 connector
dimensions 5

Type of operator Metal end Metal end Steel roller Thermoplastic Thermoplastic Thermoplastic
plunger plunger with plunger roller lever plunger, roller lever plunger, roller lever plunger,
elastomer boot horizontal actuation vertical actuation horiz. or vert. actu-
References
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK D2110M12 XCK D2111M12 XCK D2102M12 XCK D2121M12 XCK D2127M12 XCK D2128M12
13
21
1,8 4,6(P) 1,8 4,6(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 6,5(A) 15,7(P) 6,5(B) 15,7(P) 9,8(A) 22,5(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 5mm 0 5mm
14
22
0 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm
0,9 0,9 1,5 3 3 4,9
2-pole N/C + N/C ZCD 29M12 + ZCD 29M12 + ZCD 29M12 + ZCD 29M12 + ZCD 29M12 + ZCD 29M12 +
snap action (XE2S P2141) ZCE 10 ZCE 11 ZCE 02 ZCE 21 ZCE 27 ZCE 28
1,8 4,6(P) 1,8 4,6(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 6,5(A) 15,7(P) 6,5(B) 15,7(P) 9,8(A) 22,5(P)
11
21
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12

21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
0 5mm 0 5mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm
12
22
0,9 0,9 1,5 3 3 4,9
Weight (kg) 0.190 0.190 0.195 0.205 0.200 0.205

Contact operation contact closed (A) (B) = cam displacement
Characteristics
5 Switch actuation On end By 30° cam
Type of actuation

Minimum force or For tripping 15 N 12 N 6N
torque For positive opening 45 N 36 N 18 N
Connection M12 5-pin connector, Ui = 60 V, Ie = 4 A maximum, Ith = 4 A
Connections
Integral M12 connector
4 3XE2S P2151 XE2S P2141
5 1-2: N/C 1-2: N/C
3-4: N/O 3-4: N/C
1 2 5: t 5: t
Dimensions
ZCD 2pM12 ZCE 10 ZCE 11 ZCE 02 ZCE 21
12,5 16
10
12,5
(1) 12,5 3,5 Ø11,6 5,5
Ø14
2
12,5 Ø7
65
51
20,2
77
30,5
19
30
39
20
(2)
20/22
ZCE 27 ZCE 28 ZCE H0
M12
30 31 12,5 36,2
Ø22 12,5
Ø14 16 2,5
5,5 2,5 = = Ø7
6 M18x1(3)
29
22
41
26
48
(1) 2 elongated holes Ø 4.3 x 6.3 mm on 22 mm

centres, 2 holes Ø 4.3 on 20 mm centres. 12 13 7
5/34

directional
Form A (1)
Type of operator M18 with metal M18 with steel Thermoplastic Variable length Thermoplastic Variable length “Cat’s whisker”
Ø 50 mm
References
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK D21H0M12 XCK D21H2M12 XCK D2118M12 XCK D2145M12 XCK D2139M12 XCK D2149M12 XCK D2106M12
snap action
(XE2S P2151) 1,8 4,6(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 70 70 70 70
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 21-22 21-22 13-14
13
21
21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 5mm 0 mm 0 0 0 0 0
0,9 1,5
14
22
2-pole N/C + N/C ZCD 29M12 + ZCD 29M12 + ZCD 29M12 + ZCD 29M12 + ZCD 29M12 + ZCD 29M12 + ZCD 29M12 +
snap action ZCE H0 ZCE H2 ZCE 01 + ZCY 18 ZCE 01 + ZCY 45 ZCE 01 + ZCY 39 ZCE 01 + ZCY 49 ZCE 06
(XE2S P2141)
1,8 4,6(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 70 70 70 70
11
21
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12

21-22 21-22 11-12 11-12 11-12 21-22
11-12 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 11-12 11-12 11-12 21-22
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
0 5mm 0 mm 0 0
0 0 0
12
22
0,9 1,5
Weight (kg) 0.235 0.235 0.220 0.220 0.220 0.220 0.185

Contact operation contact closed (A) = cam displacement
5
Characteristics
Type of actuation
Mechanical durability 10 5
torque opening
Dimensions
ZCE 01 + ZCY 18 ZCE 01 + ZCY 45 ZCE 01 + ZCY 39 ZCE 01 + ZCY 49 ZCE 06
37,5 40
12,5 10 Ø50
42
40 5,5 Ø16 10
Ø1,2
54…100,5
5,5 19
73,5…120
24
33…83,5
52,5…103
58
142
77,5
33
52,5
12,5 12,5 12,5

16 12,5 16
ZCE H2
12,5
3,5
M18x1 (3) Fixing nut thickness 3.5 mm.

38
(3)
5/35
characteristics 5
Compact design, plastic, type XCK P

References (2) (3)
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK P2110P16 XCK P2111P16 XCK P2102P16 XCK P2121P16 XCK P2127P16 XCK P2128P16
13
21

1,8 4,6(P) 1,8 4,6(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 6,5(A) 15,7(P) 6,5(B) 15,7(P) 9,8(A) 22,5(P)
14
22
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22

13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 5mm 0 5mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm
0,9 0,9 1,5 3 3 4,9
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK P2510P16 XCK P2511P16 XCK P2502P16 XCK P2521P16 XCK P2527P16 XCK P2528P16
21
13

(XE2N P2151) 1,8 3,2(P) 1,8 3,2(P) 3,1(A) 5,6(P) 6,5(A) 11,3(P) 6,5(B) 11,3(P) 9,8(A) 17,2(P)
22
14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22

13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 3 5mm 0 3 5mm 0 5,2 mm 0 10,5 mm 0 10,5 mm 0 16,1 mm
2-pole N/C + N/C ZCP 29 + ZCP 29 + ZCP 29 + ZCP 29 + ZCP 29 + ZCP 29 +

11
21
snap action (XE2S P2141) ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 +
12
22
1,8 4,6(P) 1,8 4,6(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 6,5(A) 15,7(P) 6,5(B) 15,7(P) 9,8(A) 22,5(P)
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
0 5mm 0 5mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm
5 2-pole N/C + N/C ZCP 27 +

0,9
ZCP 27 +
0,9
ZCP 27 +
1,5
ZCP 27 +
3
ZCP 27 +
3
ZCP 27 +
4,9
11
21
simultaneous, slow break ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 +
12
22
1,8 3,2(P) 1,8 3,2(P) 3,1 5,6(P) 6,6(A) 11,6(P) 6,6(B) 11,6(P) 5,3(A)
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
0 5mm 0 5mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm
3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O ZCP 39 + ZCP 39 + ZCP 39 + ZCP 39 + ZCP 39 + ZCP 39 +
13
31
21
snap action (XE3S P2141) ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 +
14
32
22
1,8 4,6(P) 1,8 4,6(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 6,5(A) 15,7(P) 6,5(B) 15,7(P) 9,8(A) 22,5(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32
31-32 31-32 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
13-14 13-14 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
21-22 21-22 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32
31-32 31-32 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
13-14 13-14 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm
0 5mm 0 5mm
1,5 3 3 4,9
09 09
3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O ZCP 37 + ZCP 37 + ZCP 37 + ZCP 37 + ZCP 37 + ZCP 37 +
13
31
21
break before make, slow break ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 +
14
32
22
1,8 3,2(P) 1,8 3,2(P) 3,1(A) 5,6(P) 6,5(A) 11,3(P) 6,5(B) 11,3(P) 9,8(A) 17,2(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 3 5mm 0 3 5mm 0 5,2 mm 0 10,5 mm 0 10,5 mm 0 16,1 mm
Weight (kg) 0.090 0.090 0.095 0.105 0.100 0.105

Characteristics
Type of actuation

(3) For an entry tapped for a n° 11 cable gland, replace P16 in the reference by G11. Examples: XCK P2110P16 becomes XCK P2110G11, ZCP EP16 becomes
ZCP EG11.
5/36
directional
Form A (1)
Ø 50 mm
References (2)
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK P21H0P16 XCK P21H2P16 XCK P2118P16 XCK P2145P16 XCK P2139P16 XCK P2149P16 XCK P2106P16
13
21
snap action
(XE2S P2151) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 70 70 70 70
1,8 4,6(P)
14
22
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22

13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 5mm 0 mm 0 0 0 0 0
0,9 1,5
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK P25H0P16 XCK P25H2P16 XCK P2518P16 XCK P2545P16 XCK P2539P16 XCK P2549P16 XCK P2506P16
21
13
break before
make, slow break 3,1(A) 5,6(P)
1,8 3,2(P)
22
46
14
(XE2N P2151) 46 46 46
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 3 5mm 0 5,2 mm 0 0 0 0 0
2-pole N/C + N/C ZCP 29 + ZCP 29 + ZCP 29 + ZCP 29 + ZCP 29 + ZCP 29 + ZCP29 +
11
21
snap action ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 +
(XE2S P2141) ZCE H0 ZCE H2 ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 06
12
22
1,8 4,6(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 70 70 70 70 11-12

11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
0 5mm
11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
0 mm
11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
0
11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
0
11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
0
11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
0
21-22
11-12
21-22
0
5
0,9 1,5
2-pole N/C + N/C ZCP 27 + ZCP 27 + ZCP 27 + ZCP 27 + ZCP 27 + ZCP 27 + ZCP 27 +
11
21
simultaneous, ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 +
slow break ZCE H0 ZCE H2 ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 06
12
22
(XE2N P2141) ZCY 18 ZCY 45 ZCY 39 ZCY 49

1,8 3,2(P) 3,1 5,6(P) 46 46 46 46
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
11-12 11-12 21-22
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
0 5mm 0 mm 0 0 0 0 0
3-pole ZCP 39 + ZCP 39 + ZCP 39 + ZCP 39 + ZCP 39 + ZCP 39 + ZCP 39 +
13
31
21
N/C + N/C + N/O ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16+ ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 +
14
32
22

1,8 4,6(P 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 20˚
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32
31-32 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
13-14 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
21-22 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32
31-32 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
13-14 0 mm 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0
0 5mm
1,5 12˚ 12˚ 12˚ 12˚ 15˚
09
3-pole ZCP 37+ ZCP 37 + ZCP 37 + ZCP 37 + ZCP 37 + ZCP 37 + ZCP 37 +
13
31
21
N/C + N/C + N/O ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 + ZCP EP16 +
break before ZCE H0 ZCE H2 ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 01 + ZCE 06
14
32
22
make, slow ZCY 18 ZCY 45 ZCY 39 ZCY 49

break 1,8 3,2(P) 3,1(A) 5,6(P) 25˚ 46˚(P) 25˚ 46˚(P) 25˚ 46˚(P) 20˚
25˚ 46˚(P)
(XE3N P2141) 21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
21-22 21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
13-14 13-14 31-32
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 3 5mm 0 5,2 mm 0 42˚ 90˚ 0 42˚ 90˚ 0 42˚ 90˚ 0 42˚ 90˚ 0 45˚ ˚
Weight (kg) 0.130 0.130 0.135 0.145 0.145 0.155 0.085

Characteristics
Type of actuation
Mechanical durability 10 million operating cycles 5 million op. cycles
torque opening
(3) For an entry tapped for a n° 11 cable gland, replace P16 in the ref. by G11. Examples: XCK P21H0P16 becomes XCK P21H0G11, ZCP EP16 becomes ZCP EG11.
5/37
Dimensions 5
Limit switches 5

ZCP 2p + ZCP EP16 / ZCP 3p + ZCP EP16 ZCE 10 ZCE 11

10
12,5
2
(2) 12,5
51
65
19
30
20
30 (3)
20/22
(1) 31
15˚
15˚
12,5
ZCE 02 ZCE 21 ZCE 27
16
12,5 12,5 5,5
5,5 Ø14
3,5 Ø 11,6
20,2
22
41
39
30,5
12
5
ZCE 28 ZCE H0 ZCE H2
12,5
36,2 12,5
16
Ø22 12,5 3,5
5,5
2,5 = = 2,5
Ø7 M18x1(4)
M18x1
29
(4) 38
48
26
13 7

5/38
Limit switches 5

ZCE 01 + ZCY 18 ZCE 01 + ZCY 45 ZCE 01 + ZCY 39
37,5
12,5 42
40
5,5 10
5,5
24
33
52,5…103
58
52,5
77,5
12,5
12,5
16
ZCE 01 + ZCY 49 ZCE 06
40
10
5
142
12,5
12,5 16
5/39

connections, Integral M12 connector
dimensions 5

References
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK P2110M12 XCK P2111M12 XCK P2102M12 XCK P2121M12 XCK P2127M12 XCK P2128M12
1,8 4,6(P) 1,8 4,6(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 6,5(A) 15,7(P) 6,5(B) 15,7(P) 9,8(A) 22,5(P)
13
21
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22

13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 5mm 0 5mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm
14
22
0,9 0,9 1,5 3 3 4,9
2-pole N/C + N/C ZCP 29M12 + ZCP 29M12 + ZCP 29M12 + ZCP 29M12 + ZCP 29M12 + ZCP 29M12 +
snap action (XE2S P2141) ZCE 10 ZCE 11 ZCE 02 ZCE 21 ZCE 27 ZCE 28
1,8 4,6(P) 1,8 4,6(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 6,5(A) 15,7(P) 6,5(B) 15,7(P) 9,8(A) 22,5(P)
11
21
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12

21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
0 5mm 0 5mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm
12
22
0,9 0,9 1,5 3 3 4,9
Weight (kg) 0.100 0.100 0.100 0.110 0.110 0.110

Characteristics
5 Switch actuation On end By 30° cam
Type of actuation

Connections
4 3 XE2S P2151 XE2S P2141
1-2: N/C 1-2: N/C
3-4: N/O 3-4: N/C
1 2
See connection page 9/44
Dimensions
ZCP 2pM12 ZCE 10 ZCE 11 ZCE 02 ZCE 21
12,5 16
(1) 12,5
12,5 3,5 Ø11,6 5,5
Ø14
12,5 Ø7
10
20,2
30,5
2
39
30
51
20
65
77
19
(2)
ZCE 27 ZCE 28 ZCE H0
M12 = 20/22 = 12,5 36,2
30 31 16 Ø22 12,5
Ø14 2,5 = = 2,5
5,5 6 Ø7 M18x1(3)
29
22
12,5
48
41
26
(1) 2 elongated holes Ø 4.3 x 6.3 mm on

22 mm centres, 2 holes Ø 4.3 on 20 mm ctrs. 12 13 7
(2) 2 x Ø 3 mm holes for support studs, depth
4 mm.
5/40

dimensions 5
directional
Form A (1)
Ø 50 mm
References
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK P21H0M12 XCK P21H2M12 XCK P2118M126 XCK P2145M12 XCK P2139M12 XCK P2149M12 XCK P2106M126
snap action
(XE2S P2151) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 70 70 70 70
1,8 4,6(P) 21-22 21-22 21-22
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 13-14
13
21
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14

21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
21-22 21-22 13-14
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 5mm 0 mm 0 0 0 0 0
0,9 1,5
14
22
2-pole N/C + N/C ZCP 29M12 + ZCP 29M12 + ZCP 29M12 + ZCP 29M12 + ZCP 29M12 + ZCP 29M12 + ZCP 29M12 +
11
21
1,8 4,6(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 70 70 70 70 11-12

11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
21-22 21-22 11-12
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
21-22 21-22
0 0 0 0 0
12
22
0 5mm 0 mm
0,9 1,5
Weight (kg) 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.150 0.155 0.160 0.090
5
Characteristics
Type of actuation
Mechanical durability 10 5
torque opening
Dimensions
ZCE 01 + ZCY 18 ZCE 01 + ZCY 45 ZCE 01 + ZCY 39 ZCE 01 + ZCY 49 ZCE 06
37,5 40
12,5 10 Ø50
40 42
5,5 Ø16 10
5,5
19 Ø1,2
54…100,5
24
73,5…120
33…83,5
52,5…103
58
33
77,5
52,5
142
12,5 12,5
12,5
16 12,5 16
ZCE H2
12,5
3,5
M18x1
38
(3)
5/41

Compact design, plastic, type XCK T
dimensions 5
Complete units with 2 ISO M16 x 1.5 cable entries
Type of head Plunger (fixing by the body) Multi-directional

Type of operator Metal end plunger Metal end plunger with Steel roller plunger Thermoplastic roller "Cat’s whisker" (4)
elastomer boot lever plunger, horizontal
actuation in 1 direction
References (2) (3)
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK T2110P16 XCK T2111P16 XCK T2102P16 XCK T2121P16 XCK T2106P16
13
21
snap action 1,8 4,6(P) 1,8 4,6(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 6,5(A) 15,7(P)
(XE2S P3151) 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
14
22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14

21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 5mm 0 5mm 0 mm 0 mm 0
0,9 0,9 1,5 3
2-pole N/C + N/O ZCT 25P16 + ZCT 25P16 + ZCT 25P16 + ZCT 25P16 + ZCT 25P16 +
21
13
break before make, ZCE 10 ZCE 11 ZCE 02 ZCE 21 ZCE 06

slow break
22
14
1,8 3,2(P) 1,8 3,2(P) 3,1(A) 5,6(P) 6,5(A) 11,3(P)

(XE2N P3151) 21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
0 3 5mm 0 3 5mm 0 5,2 mm 0 10,5 mm 0
2-pole N/C + N/O ZCT 26P16 + ZCT 26P16 + ZCT 26P16 + ZCT 26P16 + ZCT 26P16 +
21
13
make before break, ZCE 10 ZCE 11 ZCE 02 ZCE 21 ZCE 06

slow break
22
14
3 4,4(P) 3 4,4(P) 5,2 7,6(P) 10,9(A) 16(P)

(XE2N P3161) 21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
0 1,8 5mm 0 1,8 5mm 0 3,1 mm 0 6,6 mm 0
2-pole N/C + N/C ZCT 27P16 + ZCT 27P16 + ZCT 27P16 + ZCT 27P16 + ZCT 27P16 +
11
21
simultaneous, ZCE 10 ZCE 11 ZCE 02 ZCE 21 ZCE 06

slow break
12
22
1,8 3,2(P) 1,8 3,2(P) 3,1 5,6(P) 6,6(A) 11,6(P)

(XE2N P3141) 11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
0
5 2-pole N/O + N/O
0
ZCT 28P16 +
5mm 0
ZCT 28P16 +
5mm 0
ZCT 28P16 +
mm 0
ZCT 28P16 +
mm
ZCT 28P16 +
13
23
simultaneous, ZCE 10 ZCE 11 ZCE 02 ZCE 21 ZCE 06

slow break
14
24
1,8 1,8 3,1(A) 6,6(A)

(XE2N P3131) 13-14
23-24
13-14
23-24
13-14
23-24
13-14
23-24
13-14
23-24
0 5mm 0 5mm 0 mm 0 mm 0
Weight (kg) 0.100 0.100 0.105 0.115 0.095
Characteristics
Type of actuation
Maximum actuation speed 0.5 m/s 1 m/s 1 m/s (any direction)

Mechanical durability 15 10 15 5
Minimum force or For tripping 15 N 12 N 6N 0.3 N.m
torque For positive opening 45 N 36 N 18 N –
Cable entry (3) 2 entries tapped M16 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland.
Clamping capacity 4 to 8 mm (1 entry fitted with blanking plug).
(1) Form conforming to EN 50047, see page 5/184. (3) For cable entries tapped for a n° 11 cable gland, replace P16 in the
(2) Switches with gold contacts or ring connections: please consult our Regional Sales Office. reference by G11. Example: XCK T2110P16 becomes XCK T2110G11.
Dimensions
ZCT 2pP16 ZCE 10 ZCE 11 ZCE 21
12,5 Ø7 12,5 16
51
(2)
10
2
30
20
40
(1)
37,6
30 = 20/22 = (3) ZCE 02 ZCE 06

39
40/42
58
15˚
15˚ Ø1,2
12,5
12,5
12,5 Ø11,6
142
(1) 2 tapped entries for ISO M16 x 1.5 or 3,5

Pg 11 cable gland.
30,5
(2) 4 elongated holes Ø 4.3 x 6.3 mm on

22/42 mm ctrs., 4 holes Ø 4.3 on 20/40 mm ctrs.
5/42

Compact design, plastic, type XCK T
Complete units with 2 ISO M16 x 1.5 cable entries
Type of head Plunger (fixing by the head) Rotary (fixing by the body)
Form A (1)
Type of operator M18 with metal end M18 with steel roller Thermoplastic roller Variable length Thermoplastic roller
plunger plunger lever thermoplastic roller lever, Ø 50 mm
lever
References (2) (3)
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK T21H0P16 XCK T21H2P16 XCK T2118P16 XCK T2145P16 XCK T2139P16
13
21
snap action
(XE2S P3151)
14
22
1,8 4,6(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 70 70 70

21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 5mm 0 mm 0 0 0
0,9 1,5
2-pole N/C + N/O ZCT 25P16 + ZCT 25P16 + ZCT 25P16 + ZCT 25P16 + ZCT 25P16+
21
13
break before make, ZCE H0 ZCE H2 ZCE 01 + ZCY 18 ZCE 01 + ZCY 45 ZCE 01 + ZCY 39
slow break
22
14
1,8 3,2(P) 3,1(A) 5,6(P) 46 46 46

(XE2N P3151) 21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
0 3 5mm 0 5,2 mm 0 0 0
2-pole N/O + N/C ZCT 26P16 + ZCT 26P16 + ZCT 26P16 + ZCT 26P16 + ZCT 26P16 +
21
13
make before break, ZCE H0 ZCE H2 ZCE 01 + ZCY 18 ZCE 01 + ZCY 45 ZCE 01 + ZCY 39
slow break
22
14
3 4,4(P) 5,2 7,6(P)

(XE2N P3161) 21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
0 1,8 5mm 0 3,1 mm 0 0 0
2-pole N/C + N/C ZCT 27P16 + ZCT 27P16 + ZCT 27P16 + ZCT 27P16 + ZCT 27P16+
11
21
simultaneous, ZCE H0 ZCE H2 ZCE 01 + ZCY 18 ZCE 01 + ZCY 45 ZCE 01 + ZCY 39

slow break
12
22
1,8 3,2(P) 3,1 5,6(P) 46 46 46

(XE2N P3141)
5
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
0 5mm 0 mm 0 0 0
2-pole N/O + N/O ZCT 28P16 + ZCT 28P16 + ZCT 28P16 + ZCT 28P16 + ZCT 28P16 +
13
23
simultaneous, ZCE H0 ZCE H2 ZCE 01 + ZCY 18 ZCE 01 + ZCY 45 ZCE 01 + ZCY 39

slow break
14
24
1,8 3,1(A) 13-14 13-14 13-14

(XE2N P3131) 13-14
23-24
13-14
23-24
23-24 23-24 23-24
0 5mm 0 mm 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚
Weight (kg) 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.155 0.160

Characteristics
Type of actuation

Minimum force or For tripping 15 N 10 N 0.1 N.m

torque For positive opening45 N 36 N 0.25 N.m
Cable entry (3) 2 entries tapped M16 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland.
Clamping capacity 4 to 8 mm (1 entry fitted with blanking plug).
(3) For cable entries tapped for a n° 11 cable gland, replace P16 in the reference by G11. Example: XCK T21H0P16 becomes XCK T21H0G11.
Dimensions
ZCE H0 ZCE 01 + ZCY 18 ZCE 01 + ZCY 39 ZCE 01 + ZCY 45
12,5 37,5
Ø7 M18x1(4) 42 12,5
40 10 Ø50 5,5 Ø16
26
5,5
33…83,5
24
52,5…103
58
ZCE H2 12,5
77,5
33
52,5
12,5
3,5 M18x1(4)
38
12,5
16
(4) Fixing nut thickness 3.5 mm
5/43
Presentation 5
Limit switches 5

Compact design, types XCK D, XCK P and XCK T
Thermoplastic roller Thermoplastic roller Thermoplastic roller Retractable

lever plunger, lever plunger, lever plunger, steel roller lever
horizontal vertical horizontal or vertical plunger
actuation actuation actuation
Side metal
plunger,
adjustable Side steel Side steel
Side roller plunger, Side steel
roller plunger,
metal horizontal ball bearing
vertical
ZCE 62 plunger plunger
M18 with metal M18 with steel

end plunger roller plunger
ZCE H0 ZCE H2
5
Steel roller Steel roller plunger Spring rod with Spring rod “Cat’s
plunger with elastomer thermoplastic whisker”
boot end
Metal end Metal end plunger Steel ball Metal end Side “Cat’s
plunger with elastomer bearing plunger plunger, whisker”
boot adjustable
ZCE 67
Plastic bodies with integral Plastic bodies Plastic bodies with contacts (1)
M12 connector, with: with contacts (1) with 2 cable entries
N/C + N/O for use in
snap action contact conjunction with
cable gland ISO M16 x 1.5
ZCP 21M12 Pg 11
(see below)
N/C + N/C
snap action contact
ZCP 29M12 1/2" NPT with adaptor
DE9 RA1012
Cable gland entry: ZCP EP16 ZCP EP20 ZCP EG11 ZCP EG13 ZCP EN12 ZCP EF12
ISO M16 x 1.5 ISO M20 x 1.5 Pg 11 Pg 13.5 1/2" NPT PF 1/2 (G 1/2)
(1) For further details, see page 5/46.
(2) Cannot be used on bodies: ZCD 21, ZCP 21, ZCT 21, ZCD 29, ZCP 29, ZCD 31, ZCP 31, ZCD 39.ZCP 39, ZCD 2pM12, ZCP 2pM12.
5/44
Presentation 5
Limit switches 5

Compact design, types XCK D, XCK P and XCK T
Round rod lever, Square rod lever, Round rod lever, Round rod lever,
steel, Ø 3 mm steel, U 3 mm glass fibre, Ø 3 mm thermoplastic, Ø 6 mm
L = 125 mm L = 125 mm L = 125 mm L = 200 mm
Ceramic Spring lever with Spring - rod Variable Variable length

roller thermoplastic lever, metal length thermoplastic
lever end thermoplastic roller lever,
roller lever, Ø 50 mm, with
Ø 50 mm adjustable track
Variable length Variable length

thermoplastic thermoplastic Variable length Variable length Thermoplastic
roller lever, with roller lever steel roller lever steel roller lever, roller lever,
with pliable lever Ø 50 mm
Spring return,
for actuation
pliable lever
5
from left AND
right
ZCE 01 Thermoplastic Steel roller lever, Steel ball bearing Thermoplastic Steel roller lever,
roller lever, track: 24/40 mm mounted roller roller lever, track: 29/36 mm
track: 24/40 mm lever, track: 29/36 mm
track: 24/40 mm
Stay put, Steel ball bearing Thermoplastic Steel roller Steel ball bearing
for actuation mounted roller roller lever, lever, mounted roller
from left AND lever, track: track: lever,
right (2) track: 29/36 mm 21/44 mm 21/44 mm track: 21/44 mm

ZCE 09
Forked arm with Forked arm with
rollers, 2 track, rollers, 1 track,
track: 25/39 mm track: 32 mm
ZCY 61 ZCY 71
Metal bodies with integral

M12 connector, with: Metal bodies with contacts (1)
N/C + N/O for use in conjunction with cable gland
snap action contact (see below)
ZCD 21M12 ZCD
N/C + N/C
snap action contact
ZCD 29M12
Cable gland entry: ZCD EP16 ZCD EP20 ZCD EG11 ZCD EG13 ZCD EN12 ZCD EF12
ISO M16 x 1.5 ISO M20 x 1.5 Pg 11 Pg 13.5 1/2" NPT PF 1/2 (G1/2)
5/45
References 5
Limit switches 5

Compact design, metal, type XCK D or
plastic, types XCK P and XCK T
Adaptable sub-assemblies: bodies with contacts
Bodies with contacts, types XCK D and XCK P(1)

520710
Type of contact Positive Scheme Body Reference Weight

operation material
(2) kg
2-pole
N/C + N/O Metal ZCD 21 0.140
13
21
snap action
(XE2S P2151) Plastic ZCP 21 0.070
14
22
N/C + N/C Metal ZCD 29 0.140
11
21
snap action
12
22
ZCD pp
N/C + N/O Metal ZCD 25 0.140
21
13
break before make,
slow break Plastic ZCP 25 0.070
22
(XE2N P2151)
14
N/O + N/C Metal ZCD 26 0.140
21
13
make before break,
22
14
(XE2N P2161)
N/C + N/C Metal ZCD 27 0.140
11
21
simultaneous,
12
22
(XE2N P2141)
N/O + N/O – Metal ZCD 28 0.140

13
23
simultaneous,
5
14
24
(XE2N P2131)
3-pole
N/C + N/O + N/O Metal ZCD 31 0.140
520711
33
13
21
snap action
34
14
22
N/C + N/C + N/O Metal ZCD 39 0.140

13
31
21
snap action
14
32
22
N/C + N/C + N/O Metal ZCD 37 0.140

13
31
21
break before make,

ZCP pp
14
32
22
(XE3N P2141)
N/C + N/O + N/O Metal ZCD 35 0.140

33
13
21
break before make,

34
14
22
(XE3N P2151)
(1) Bodies with gold contacts or eyelet type connections: please consult your Regional Sales
Office.
(2) : bodies with contacts assuring positive opening operation.
5/46
Limit switches 5

Bodies with contacts, type XCK T plastic, 2 cable entries

561390
Type of contact Positive Scheme Cable Reference Weight

operation entries
(1) kg
2-pole
N/C + N/O ISO ZCT 21P16 0.085
13
21
snap action M16 x 1.5
(XE2S P3151) Pg 11 ZCT 21G11 0.085
14
22
N/C + N/O ISO ZCT 25P16 0.085
21
13
break before make, M16 x 1.5
slow break Pg 11 ZCT 25G11 0.085
ZCT ppp
22
14
(XE2N P3151)
N/C + N/C ISO ZCT 27P16 0.085
11
21
simultaneous, M16 x 1.5
12
22
(XE2N P3141)
N/O + N/O – ISO ZCT 28P16 0.085
13
23
simultaneous, M16 x 1.5
14
24
(XE2N P3131)
N/O + N/C ISO ZCT 26P16 0.085
21
13
make before break, M16 x 1.5
22
14
(XE2N P3161)
Bodies with contacts, type XCK T, plastic, 2 cable entries with

1/2" NPT adaptor
Type of contact Positive Scheme Reference Weight 5
561387
operation
(1) kg
2-pole
N/C + N/O ZCT 21N12 0.130
13
21
snap action
(XE2S P3151)
14
22
N/C + N/O ZCT 25N12 0.130

21
13
break before make,

slow break
22
14
(XE2N P3151)
ZCT ppN12
N/C + N/C ZCT 27N12 0.130
11
21
simultaneous,
slow break
12
22
(XE2N P3141)
N/O + N/O – ZCT 28N12 0.130

13
23
simultaneous,
slow break
14
24
(XE2N P3131)
N/O + N/C ZCT 26N12 0.130

21
13
make before break,

slow break
22
14
(XE2N P3161)
(1) : bodies with contact assuring positive opening operation.
5/47
Limit switches 5

Accessories
Description Suitable levers Unit reference Weight
561427
for use with head kg

Rotary head, ZCY 12, ZCY 15, ZCE 05 0.045
without lever, ZCY 16, ZCY 17,
spring return, ZCY 18, ZCY 19,
for actuation from ZCY 22, ZCY 23,
left AND right ZCY 25, ZCY 26,
ZCE 05
or ZCY 39, ZCY 53,
left OR right (1) ZCY 54, ZCY 55,
ZCY 81
561392
Tap-off terminal (for XCK T) Sold in lots of 10 XAL Z09 0.010

Spacer for angular positioning of – XCM Z07 0.002
heads with adjustable levers, for
values other than - 90°, 0° and 90°
Adaptor for 1/2" NPT conduit Sold in lots of 10 DE9 RA1012 0.050
DE9 RA1012
Bodies with contacts, type XCK P plastic, with rotary head
(without operating lever)
Type of contact Scheme Positive Cable Reference Weight
operation entry
(2) kg
2-pole
561388
N/C + N/O 13 ISO XCK P2101P16 0.115

21
(XE2S P2151) Pg 11 XCK P2101G11 0.115
14
22
M12 XCK P2101M12 0.125

connector
N/C + N/O ISO XCK P2501P16 0.115

21
13
5 slow break Pg 11 XCK P2501G11 0.115

22
14
(XE2N P2151)
Bodies with contacts, type XCK D metal, with rotary head

XCK p2p01pp (without operating lever)
operation entry
(2) kg
2-pole
N/C + N/O ISO XCK D2101P16 0.185
13
21

(XE2S P2151) Pg 11 XCK D2101G11 0.185
14
22
M12 XCK D2101M12 0.195

connector
N/C + N/O ISO XCK D2501P16 0.185

21
13

slow break Pg 11 XCK D2501G11 0.185
22
14
(XE2N P2151)
Bodies with contacts, type XCK T plastic, with rotary head

(without operating lever)
561389
operation entry
(2) kg
2-pole
N/C + N/O ISO XCK T2101P16 0.130
13
21

(XE2S P3151) Pg 11 XCK T2101G11 0.130
14
22
N/C + N/O ISO XCK T2501P16 0.130

21
13

slow break Pg 11 XCK T2501G11 0.130
22
14
(XE2N P3151)
XCK T2p01pp (1) For programming see page 5/178.

(2) : bodies with contact assuring positive opening operation.
5/48
References 5
Limit switches 5

Adaptable sub-assemblies: contact blocks
Contact blocks with screw clamp terminals for XCK D and

XCK P
Type of contact Positive Scheme Reference for Weight
operation (1) standard contacts kg
2-pole
561393
N/C + N/O XE2S P2151 0.020
13
21
snap action
14
22
N/C + N/C XE2S P2141 0.020
11
21
simultaneous,
snap action
12
22
XE2p p21 pp
N/C + N/O XE2N P2151 0.020
21
13
break before make,
slow break
22
14
N/O + N/C XE2N P2161 0.020
21
13
make before break,
slow break
22
14
N/C + N/C XE2N P2141 0.020
11
21
simultaneous,
slow break
12
22
N/O + N/O – XE2N P2131 0.020
13
23
simultaneous,
slow break
14
24
3-pole
561394
N/C + N/O + N/O XE3S P2151 0.035

5
33
13
21
snap action
34
14
22
N/C + N/C + N/O XE3S P2141 0.035

13
31
21
snap action
14
32
22
XE3p p21 pp
N/C + N/C + N/O XE3N P2141 0.035
13
31
21
break before make,

slow break
14
32
22
N/C + N/O + N/O XE3N P2151 0.035

33
13
21
break before make,

slow break
34
14
22
Contact blocks with screw clamp terminals for XCK T

Type of contact Positive Scheme Reference for Weight
operation (1) standard contacts kg
2-pole
N/C + N/O XE2S P3151 0.015
13
21
snap action
14
22
N/C + N/O XE2N P3151 0.015

21
13
break before make,

slow break
22
14
N/O + N/C XE2N P3161 0.015

21
13
make before break,

slow break
22
14
N/C + N/C XE2N P3141 0.015

11
21
simultaneous,
slow break
12
22
N/O + N/O – XE2N P3131 0.015

13
23
simultaneous,
slow break
14
24
(1) : contact blocks assuring positive opening operation.
5/49
Presentation 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Optimum
Compact design, plastic, type XCK N
b XCK N v With head for linear movement (plunger)

with 1 cable entry
530748
530745
530747
Page 5/52
v With head for rotary movement (lever) or multi-directional

530749
530746
Page 5/52
5
5/50
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Optimum
Protective treatment Version Standard “TC”, special "TH"
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 50 gn (11 ms) except XCK N2p49pp: 15 gn and XCK N2p08pp: 10 gn
Electric shock protection Class II conforming to IEC 61140 and NF C 20030
Degree of protection IP 65 conforming to IEC 60529; IK 04 conforming to EN 50102
Cable entry Depending on model: tapped entry for ISO M20 x 1.5 cable gland or n° 11 cable gland
Materials Bodies Plastic

Heads Plastic

Rated operational characteristics a AC-15; A300 (Ue = 240 V, Ie = 3 A); Ithe = 10 A
EN 60947-5-1
Rated insulation voltage Ui = 500 V degree of pollution 3 conforming to IEC 60947-1
Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp = 6 kV conforming to IEC 60947-1, IEC 60664 5
Positive operation N/C contacts with positive opening operation conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix K,
EN 60947-5-1
Cabling Screw clamp terminals Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 0.34 mm2, max: 2 x 1.5 mm2
5/51

dimensions 5
Complete switches with 1 ISO M20 x 1.5 cable entry
Type of operator Metal end Steel roller Steel roller Thermoplastic Thermoplastic
plunger plunger for plunger for roller lever plunger, roller lever plunger,
lateral cam traverse cam horizontal actuation vertical actuation
approach approach in 1 direction in 1 direction
References (1) (2)
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK N2110P20 XCK N2102P20 XCK N2103P20 XCK N2121P20 XCK N2127P20
13
21
snap action 2,5 4,5(P) 4,3(A)7,8(P) 4,3(A)7,8(P) 9(A)15,9(P) 9(B)15,9(P)

21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
14
22
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22

13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 5,5mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm
1,4 2,4 2,4 5,2 5,2
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK N2510P20 XCK N2502P20 XCK N2503P20 XCK N2521P20 XCK N2527P20
21
13

2,8 4,2(P) 4,8(A) 7,3(P) 4,8(A) 7,3(P) 10(A) 14,9(P) 10(B) 14,9(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
22
14
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14

0 4 5,5mm 0 7 mm 0 7 mm 0 14,1 mm 0 14,1 mm
Weight (kg) 0.135 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145
Contact operation contact closed (A) (B) = cam displacement N/C contact with positive opening
Characteristics
Type of actuation
5 Maximum actuation speed 0.5 m/s 0.3 m/s 1 m/s

Mechanical durability (in millions of operating cycles) 10
Minimum force or torque For tripping 15 N 12 N 6N
For positive opening 30 N 20 N 10 N
(1) Sold and packed in lots 20.
(2) For an entry tapped for a n° 11 cable gland, replace P20 in the reference by G11. Example: XCK N2110P20 becomes XCK N2110G11.
Dimensions
XCK N2p10P20 XCK N2p02P20 XCK N2p03P20
(2) (2)
2
(2)
(1) (1) (1)

22
XCK N2p21P20 XCK N2p27P20

(1) Tapped entry for ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 11
cable gland.
(2) Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 4.3 x 6.3 on 22 mm
centres, 2 holes Ø 4.3 on 20 mm centres.
(2)
(2)
(1) (1)
5/52

Type of operator Thermoplastic Variable length Thermoplastic Variable length Spring rod “Cat’s whisker”
roller lever thermoplastic roller roller lever, thermoplastic
lever Ø 50 mm roller lever,
Ø 50 mm
References (1) (2)
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK N2118P20 XCK N2145P20 XCK N2139P20 XCK N2149P20 XCK N2108P20 XCK N2106P20
13
21
snap action 25˚ 50˚(P) 25˚ 50˚(P) 25˚ 50˚(P) 25˚ 50˚(P) 25˚ 25˚
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
14
22
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22

13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 70˚ 0 70˚ 0 70˚ 0 70˚ 0 0
16˚ 16˚ 16˚ 16˚ 15˚ 15˚
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK N2518P20 XCK N2545P20 XCK N2539P20 XCK N2549P20 XCK N2508P20 XCK N2506P20
21
13

28˚ 47˚(P) 28˚ 47˚(P) 28˚ 47˚(P) 28˚ 47˚(P) 28˚ 28˚
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14
22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14

14
0 38˚ 70˚ 0 38˚ 70˚ 0 38˚ 70˚ 0 38˚ 70˚ 0 40˚ 0 40˚
Weight (kg) 0.175 0.180 0.200 0.200 0.140 0.135

Characteristics
Type of actuation
Maximum actuation speed

Mechanical durability
1.5 m/s
10 million operating cycles
1 m/s (any direction)
5
Minimum force or For tripping 0.1 N.m 0.13 N.m
torque For positive opening 0.15 N.m –
(1) and (2) see previous page.
Dimensions
XCK N2p18P20 XCK N2p45P20 XCK N2p39P20 XCK N2p49P20
42
10
55
73
126
(2) (2) (2)

(2)
(1) (1)
(1) (1)
XCK N2p08P20 XCK N2p06P20

(2) Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 4.3 x 6.3 on 22 mm centres,
2 holes Ø 4.3 on 20 mm centres.
(2) (2)
(1) (1)
5/53
Presentation 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Application
Compact design, plastic, with reset,
types XCP R and XCT R
Compact design, metal, with reset, type XCD R
b XCP R, XCD R v With head for linear movement (plunger). Fixing by the body.
with 1 cable entry XCD R XCP R
conforming to EN 50047
520412
520414
520425
520427
Page 5/56 Page 5/58
XCD R XCP R
520416
520428
Page 5/56 Page 5/58
b XCT R v With head for linear movement (plunger). Fixing by the body.
with 2 cable entries XCT R
Tripping/resetting points and fixing centres
520436
520437
5 conforming to EN 50047
Page 5/60
XCT R
520438
Page 5/60
5/54
Characteristics 5
Limit switches 5
Compact design, plastic, with reset,
types XCP R and XCT R
Compact design, metal, with reset, type XCD R
Conformity to standards Products EN/IEC 60947-5-1, EN/IEC 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14
Machine assemblies EN/IEC 60204-1
Product certifications UL, CSA
Electric shock protection Class II conforming to IEC 61140 and NF C 20-030 for XCP R and XCT R
Class I conforming to IEC 61140 and NF C 20-030 for XCD R
Degree of protection IP 66 and IP 67 conforming to IEC 60529; IK 04 conforming to EN 50102
Cable entry Depending on model Either: tapped entry for n° 13 cable gland, tapped ISO M20 x 1.5 or tapped 1/2" NPT
Materials XCD R: zamak bodies and heads, XCP R and XCT R: plastic bodies, zamak heads
Rated operational characteristics a AC-15; A300 (Ue = 240 V, Ie = 3 A); Ithe = 10 A
c DC-13; Q300 (Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0.27 A), conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix A,
EN/IEC 60947-5-1
Rated insulation voltage Ui = 500 V degree of pollution 3 conforming to EN/IEC 60947-1
Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp = 6 kV conforming to EN/IEC 60947-1, IEC 60664
Positive operation (depending on model) N/C contacts with positive opening operation conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix K,
EN/IEC 60947-5-1
Cabling XE2S P2151 Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 0.34 mm2, max: 2 x 1.5 mm2
(screw clamp terminals) XE2N P2151 Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 0.5 mm2, max: 2 x 2.5 mm2
Minimum actuation speed XE2S P2151: 0.01 m/minute
(for head with end plunger) XE2N P2151: 6 m/minute
5
5/55
characteristics 5
Compact design, metal, with reset, type XCDR
Complete switches with 1 cable entry
Type of head Plunger (fixing by the body) Rotary (fixing by the body)
Type of operator Metal end Steel roller Thermoplastic Thermoplastic Thermoplastic Steel roller lever
plunger plunger roller lever plunger, roller lever plunger, roller lever
horizontal actuation vertical actuation
in 1 direction in 1 direction
References of complete switches with 1 ISO M20 x 1.5 cable entry
2-pole N/C + N/O XCDR 2110P20 XCDR 2102P20 XCDR 2121P20 XCDR 2127P20 XCDR 2118P20 XCDR 2119P20
13
21
snap action
(XE2S P2151) 1,8 4,6(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 6,5(A) 15,7(P) 6,5(B) 15,7(P) 70 70
14
22
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22

13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 5mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 0
0,9 1,5 3 3
2-pole N/C + N/O XCDR 2510P20 XCDR 2502P20 XCDR 2521P20 XCDR 2527P20 XCDR 2518P20 XCDR 2519P20
13
21
break before make,

slow break
(XE2N P2151) 1,8 3,2(P) 3,1(A) 5,6(P) 46
14
22
6,5(A) 11,3(P) 6,5(B) 11,3(P) 46

21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 21-22 13-14
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 3 5mm 0 5,2 mm 0 10,5 mm 0 10,5 mm 0
0
Weight (kg) 0.215 0.220 0.225 0.225 0.255 0.255
References of complete switches with 1 Pg 13.5 cable entry

For complete switches with 1 Pg 13.5 cable entry replace P20 by G13.
Example: XCDR 2110P20 becomes XCDR 2110G13.
5 References of complete switches with 1 1/2" NPT cable entry
For complete switches with 1 1/2" NPT cable entry replace P20 by N12.
Example: XCDR 2110P20 becomes XCDR 2110N12.
Characteristics
Type of actuation
Maximum actuation speed 0.5 m/s 1 m/s 1.5 m/s

Minimum force For tripping 15 N 12 N 6N 0.1 N.m
or torque For positive opening 45 N 36 N 18 N 0.25 N.m
Cable entry 1 entry tapped M20 x 1.5 mm for ISO cable gland, clamping capacity 7 to 13 mm, or
1 entry tapped Pg 13.5 for cable gland, clamping capacity 9 to 12 mm, or
1 entry tapped for 1/2" NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit
5/56
Dimensions 5
Limit switches 5
Compact design, metal, with reset, type XCDR
Dimensions
XCDR 2p10ppp XCDR 2p02ppp XCDR 2p21ppp
16
12,5 12,5 12,5
3,5 5,5
35,5
20,2
54,5
46
2
(2)
51
65
19
2
(2)
2
65
51
(2)
65
51
19 19
(3)
14
(1) (3)
14
(3)
14
39,5 (1) (1)
39,5 39,5
(1) Tapped entry for ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13.5 cable gland
or 1/2" NPT conduit.
(2) 2 elongated holes Ø 4.3 x 6.3 mm on 22 mm centres,
Dimensions
XCDR 2p27ppp XCDR 2p18ppp, XCDR 2p19ppp
40
5,5 19
5,5 24
33
22
56,5
68
12 5
2
2
(2) (2)
65
51
51
19 19
(3) (3)
14
14
(1) (1)
39,5 39,5
12,5
(1) Tapped entry for ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13.5 cable gland or 1/2" NPT conduit.
5/57
characteristics 5
Compact design, plastic, with reset, type XCPR
Type of operator Metal end Steel roller Thermoplastic Thermoplastic Thermoplastic Steel roller lever
plunger plunger roller lever plunger, roller lever plunger, roller lever
horizontal actuation vertical actuation
in 1 direction in 1 direction
References of complete switches with 1 ISO M20 x 1.5 cable entry
2-pole N/C + N/O XCPR 2110P20 XCPR 2102P20 XCPR 2121P20 XCPR 2127P20 XCPR 2118P20 XCPR 2119P20
13
21
snap action
(XE2S P2151) 1,8 4,6(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 6,5(A) 15,7(P) 6,5(B) 15,7(P) 70 70
14
22
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22

13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 5mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 0
0,9 1,5 3 3
2-pole N/C + N/O XCPR 2510P20 XCPR 2502P20 XCPR 2521P20 XCPR 2527P20 XCPR 2518P20 XCPR 2519P20
13
21
break before make,

slow break
(XE2N P2151) 1,8 3,2(P) 6,5(B) 11,3(P)
14
22
3,1(A) 5,6(P) 6,5(A) 11,3(P) 46 46

21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 3 5mm 0 5,2 mm 0 10,5 mm 0 10,5 mm 0 0
2-pole N/C + N/C XCPR 2910P20 XCPR 2902P20 XCPR 2921P20 XCPR 2927P20 XCPR 2918P20 –
11
21
snap action
(XE2S P2141) 1,8 4,6(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 6,5(A) 15,7(P) 6,5(B) 15,7(P) 70
12
22
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12

21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
0 5mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0
5 Weight (kg) 0.115

0,9
0.115
1,5
0.125
3
0.120
3
0.155 –
References of complete switches with 1 Pg 13.5 cable entry

For complete switches with 1 Pg 13.5 cable entry replace P20 by G13.
Example: XCPR 2110P20 becomes XCPR 2110G13.
References of complete switches with 1 1/2" NPT cable entry

For complete switches with 1 1/2" NPT cable entry replace P20 by N12.
Example: XCPR 2110P20 becomes XCPR 2110N12.
Characteristics
Type of actuation

Minimum force For tripping 15 N 12 N 6N 0.1 N.m
or torque For positive opening 45 N 36 N 18 N 0.25 N.m
Cable entry 1 entry tapped M20 x 1.5 mm for ISO cable gland, clamping capacity 7 to 13 mm, or
1 entry tapped Pg 13.5 for cable gland, clamping capacity 9 to 12 mm, or
1 entry tapped for 1/2" NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit
Other versions Complete switches with cable entries other than those listed above.
Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
5/58
Dimensions 5
Limit switches 5
Compact design, plastic, with reset, type XCPR
Dimensions
XCPR 2p10ppp XCPR 2p02ppp XCPR 2p21ppp
16
12,5 12,5 12,5
3,5 5,5
20,2
35,5
54,5
46
2
(2)
51
65
19
2
(2) (2)
51
51
19 19
(3)
14
30 (1) (3) (3)
14
14
39,5 31
(1) (1)
(1) Tapped entry for ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13.5 cable gland 39,5 39,5
or 1/2" NPT conduit.
(2) 2 elongated holes Ø 4.3 x 6.3 mm on 22 mm centres,
Dimensions
XCPR 2p27ppp XCPR 2p18ppp, XCPR 2p19ppp
40
5,5
5,5 24 19
33
20
56,5
5
68
12,5
2
(2) (2)
51
51
65
19 19
(3) (3)
14
14
(1) 30 (1)
39,5 39,5
(1) Tapped entry for ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13.5 cable gland or 1/2" NPT conduit.
5/59
characteristics 5
Compact design, plastic, with reset, type XCTR
Complete switches with 2 cable entries
Type of operator Metal end plunger Steel roller plunger Thermoplastic roller Thermoplastic roller
lever plunger lever plunger,
horizontal actuation in
1 direction
References of complete switches with 2 ISO M16 x 1.5 cable entries
2-pole N/C + N/O XCTR 2110P16 XCTR 2102P16 XCTR 2118P16 XCTR 2121P16
13
21
snap action 1,8 4,6(P) 6,5(A) 15,7(P)

3,1(A) 7,8(P) 70
(XE2S P3151) 21-22
13-14 21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22
14
22
13-14 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14
0 5mm 0 mm 0 0 mm
0,9 1,5 3
2-pole N/C + N/O XCTR 2510P16 XCTR 2502P16 XCTR 2518P16 XCTR 2521P16
13
21
break before make,

slow break 1,8 3,2(P) 3,1(A) 5,6(P) 46 6,5(A) 11,3(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
14
22
(XE2N P3151) 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14

0 3 5mm 0 5,2 mm 0 0 10,5 mm
Weight (kg) 0.120 0.125 0.165 0.135
References of complete switches with 2 Pg 11 cable entries

For complete switches with 2 Pg 11 cable entries replace P16 by G11.
Example: XCTR 2110P16 becomes XCTR 2110G11.
References of complete switches with 2 1/2" NPT cable entries

5 For complete switches with 2 1/2" NPT cable entries replace P16 by N12.
Example: XCTR 2110P16 becomes XCTR 2110N12.
Weight (kg) 0.120 0.125 0.165 0.135

N/C contact with positive opening operation
Characteristics
Type of actuation
Maximum actuation speed 0.5 m/s 1.5 m/s 1 m/s

Minimum force or torque For tripping 15 N 12 N 0.1 N.m 6N
For positive opening 45 N 36 N 0.25 N.m 18 N
Cable entry 2 entries tapped M16 x 1.5 mm for ISO cable gland, clamping capacity 4 to 8 mm, or
(1 entry fitted with blanking plug) 2 entries tapped Pg 11 for cable gland, clamping capacity 7 to 10 mm, or
2 entries tapped for 1/2" NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit using Pg 11 - 1/2" NPT adaptor DE9 RA1012
(1 entry fitted with adaptor)
5/60
Dimensions 5
Limit switches 5
Compact design, plastic, with reset, type XCTR
Dimensions
XCTR 2p18ppp XCTR 2p21ppp
40
5,5 16
19
24 12,5
5,5
33
20,2
68
54,5
37,6
51
37,6
2
(2)
51
2
40 40 (2)
(1) (1)
(3) (3)
= 20/22 = 30 = 20/22 =
39,5 40/42 39,5 40/42
58 58
12,5
12,5
(1) Tapped entry for ISO M16 x 1.5 or Pg 11 cable gland or 1/2" NPT conduit.
(2) 4 elongated holes Ø 4.3 x 6.3 mm on 22/42 mm centres, 4 holes Ø 4.3 on 20/40 mm centres.
Dimensions
XCTR 2p10ppp XCTR 2p02ppp DE9 RA1012
12,5 (4) 21 (5)
12,5
3,5 Ø26 5
46
35,5
2
37,6
37,6
(2)
51
2
51
40 40 (2)
(1) (1)
(3) (3)
30 = = 30 = 20/22 =
39,5 40/42 39,5 40/42
58 58
12,5
(2) 4 elongated holes Ø 4.3 x 6.3 mm on 22/42 mm centres, 4 holes Ø 4.3 on 20/40 mm centres.
(4) Tapped entry for 1/2" NPT conduit.
(5) Pg 11 threaded sleeve.
5/61
Osiswitch® Classic
Metal, types XCK M, XCK L and XCK ML
b XCK M v With plunger head v With rotary or multi-directional

with 3 cable entries head
561643
561644
561645
808148
Page 5/64
b XCK L v With plunger head v With rotary or multi-directional

with 1 cable entry head
808140
808145
808141
808147
Page 5/66
5 b XCK ML v With plunger head v With rotary or multi-directional

with 3 cable entries and two 2-pole contacts head
561639
561640
561641
561642
Page 5/68
Product certifications UL, CSA, CCC (for XCK M)
Protective treatment Version Standard “TC”. Special “TH”
Electric shock protection Class I conforming to IEC 61140 and NF C 20-030
Degree of protection IP 66 conforming to IEC 60529 ; IK 05 conforming to EN 50102
Repeat accuracy XCK ML 0.1 mm ; XCK M and XCK L 0.05 mm on the tripping points, with 1 million operating
cycles for head with end plunger
Cable entry or Depending on model XCK M: 3 tapped entries for n° 11 cable glands, or tapped M20 with 1/2" NPT adaptor
integral connector XCK L: 1 tapped entry incorporating cable gland or 1 tapped entry 1/2" NPT
XCK ML: 3 tapped entries for n° 13 cable gland, or tapped M20
Materials Bodies : zamak
Rotary heads : zamak or plastic depending on model ; other heads : plastic
5/62
(continued) 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Metal, types XCK M, XCK L and XCK ML

Rated operational XE2p P a AC-15 ; A300 (Ue = 240 V, Ie = 3 A) ; Ithe = 10 A
characteristics c DC-13 ; Q300 (Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0,27 A), conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix A,
EN 60947-5-1
XE3p P a AC-15 ; B300 (Ue = 240 V, Ie = 1,5 A) ; Ithe = 6 A
c DC-13 ; R300 (Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0,1 A), conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix A,
EN 60947-5-1
Positive operation (depending on model) N/C contacts with positive opening operation conforming to IEC 947-5-1 Section 3, EN 60 947-5-1
Cabling XE2S P21p1 Clamping capacity, min : 1 x 0,34 mm2, max : 2 x 1,5 mm2
(screw and captive cable XE2N P21p1 Clamping capacity, min : 1 x 0,5 mm2, max : 2 x 2,5 mm 2
clamp terminals)
XES P2151L and XEN P2151L Clamping capacity, min : 1 x 0,34 mm2, max : 2 x 1,5 mm2 or 1 x 2,5 mm2
XE3N P et XE3S P Clamping capacity, min : 1 x 0,34 mm2, max : 1 x 1 mm2 or 2 x 0,75 mm 2
Minimum actuation speed XE2S P21p1, XES P2151L and XE3S P : 0,01 m/minute
XE2N P21p1, XEN P2151L and XE3N P : 6 m/minute
Electrical durability b Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 appendix C
b Maximum operating rate : 3600 operating cycles/hour
b Load factor : 0,5
XE2S P21p1, XE2S P2141, XES P2151L XE2N P21p1, XEN P2151L
a.c. supply
a 50/60 Hz 5
Millions of operating cycless

5
o inductive circuit Ithe 4 Ithe

3
2
230 V 12/24/48 V
5
1
110 V
1
110 V
0,5 24 V 0,5
230/400 V
48 V 0,2
0,1 0,1
0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10
Current in A Current 1n A
cycles. cycles.
o W 10 7 4 o W 13 9 7
For XE2S Pp151 on a or c, the “N/C” and “N/O” contacts are simultaneously loaded to the
values shown with reverse polarity.
XE3S Ppppp XE3N Ppppp

a.c. supply
a 50/60 Hz Ithe
Ithe
5 5
3
2
12/24/48 V
230 V
1
110 V
1
0,5 0,5
110 V
230/400 V 24 V 0,2
48 V
0,1 0,1
0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10
cycles. cycles.
o W 3 2 1 o W 4 3 2
5/63
characteristics 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Metal, type XCK M
Complete switches with 3 ISO M20 x 1.5 cable entries
Type of head Plunger (fixing by the body) Rotary Multi-directional

(fixing by the body) (fixing by the body)
Type of operator Metal end plunger Steel roller plunger Thermoplastic roller Thermoplastic roller “Cat’s whisker” (4)
lever plunger, lever (1)
1 direction
References (2) (3)
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK M110H29 XCK M102H29 XCK M121H29 XCK M115H29 XCK M106H29
13
21
snap action
(XE2S P2151) 1,8 4,5(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 4,6(A) 11,1(P)
14
22
21-22 21-22
21-22 21-22 21-22 13-14
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22
21-22 21-22 21-22 13-14
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 5,5mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 0
0,9 1,5 2,2
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK M510H29 XCK M502H29 XCK M521H29 XCK M515H29 XCK M506H29
13
21
break before make,

slow break 1,8 3,2(P) 3,1(A) 5,6(P) 4,6(A) 8(P)
14
22
(XE2N P2151) 21-22

13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
0 3 5,5mm 0 5,2 mm 0 7,6 mm 0 0
2-pole N/C + N/C ZCK M9H29 + ZCK M9H29 + ZCK M9H29 + ZCK M9H29 + ZCK M9H29 +
11
21
snap action ZCK D10 ZCK D02 ZCK D21 ZCK D15 ZCK D06
(XE2S P2141)
12
22
1,8 4,5(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 4,6(A) 11,1(P)

11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
5
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
0 5,5mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 0
0,9 1,5 2,2
2-pole N/C + N/C ZCK M7H29 + ZCK M7H29 + ZCK M7H29 + ZCK M7H29 + ZCK M7H29 +
11
21
simultaneous, ZCK D10 ZCK D02 ZCK D21 ZCK D15 ZCK D06
slow break
12
22
(XE2N P2141) 3,2(P) 5,6(P) 8(P)

11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
1,8 5,5mm 3,1(A) 9mm 4,6(A) mm
3-pole ZCK MD39H29 + ZCK MD39H29 + ZCK MD39H29 + ZCK MD39H29 + ZCK MD39H29 +
31
21
13
N/C + N/C + N/O ZCK D10 ZCK D02 ZCK D21 ZCK D15 ZCK D06
snap action
(XE3S P2141)
32
22
14
1,8 4,5 (P) mm 3,1 (A) 7,8 (P) mm 4,6 (A) 11,1 (P)mm 26˚ 58˚ (P) 30˚
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
5,5 0 70˚
0,9 1,5 2,2 11˚ 14˚
3-pole ZCK MD37H29 + ZCK MD37H29 + ZCK MD37H29 + ZCK MD37H29 + ZCK MD37H29 +
31
21
13
break before make,
slow break
32
22
14
1,8 3,2 (P) mm 3,1 (A) 3,2 (P) mm 4,6 (A) 8 (P) mm 26˚ 42˚ (P) 30˚
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
(XE3N P2141) 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 3 5,5 0 5,2 5,5 0 7,6 0 36˚ 70˚ 0 40˚
Weight (kg) 0.250 0.255 0.300 0.280 0.250

Characteristics
Type of actuation
Maximum actuation speed 0.5 m/s 1.5 m/s 1 m/s (any direction)
Mechanical durability (5) 20 15 10
Minimum force For tripping 15 N 12 N 8N 0.1 N.m 0.13 N.m
or torque For positive opening 45 N 36 N 24 N 0.25 N.m –
Cable entry (3) 3 entries tapped M20 x 1.5 mm for ISO cable gland, clamping capacity 7 to 13 mm
(1) Adjustable throughout 360° in 5° steps, or in 90° steps by reversing the notched washer.
(2) Switches with gold contacts or eyelet type connections: please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(3) For an entry tapped for a Pg 11 cable gland, delete H29 from the end of the reference. Example: XCK M110H29 becomes XCK M110.
(5) Limited to 15 million operating cycles for switches with contacts XE3pP.
5/64
Dimensions 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Metal, type XCK M
Complete switches with 3 ISO M20 x 1.5 cable entries
XCK Mp10 XCK Mp02 XCK Mp21

ZCK MD3p + ZCK D10 ZCK MD3p + ZCK D02 ZCK MD3p + ZCK D21
14
14
8
4
14
54
48,5
30
112,5
108
88,5
(1) = 41 = (1) = 41 = (1) 41 11,5

30 64 30 64 30 65
XCK Mp15 XCK Mp06 Rear view

ZCK MD3p + ZCK D15 ZCK MD3p + ZCK D06 XCK Mppp, ZCK Mp, ZCK MD3p
22 15
14
5,5
34,5
142,5
60,5
41
5
201
119
54
(2)
30 (1) = 41 = (1) = 41 = = 27 =
8 34 64 30 64
(1) 3 tapped entries for ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 11 cable gland or with 1/2" NPT conduit adaptor DE9 RA1012.
(2) 2 x Ø 4 H 11, depth 10.
Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 5.2 x 6.2.
Adaptor for 1/2" NPT conduit

DE9 RA1012
(1) 21 (2)

(2) Threaded sleeve.
5/65
characteristics 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Metal, type XCK L
Complete switches incorporating cable gland
Type of head Plunger (fixing by the body) Rotary Multi-directional

(fixing by the body) (fixing by the body)
Type of operator Metal end plunger Steel roller plunger Thermoplastic roller Thermoplastic roller “Cat’s whisker” (2)
lever plunger, lever (1)
1 direction
References (3)
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK L110 XCK L102 XCK L121 XCK L115 XCK L106
13
21
snap action
(XE2S P2151) 1,8 4,5(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 4,6(A) 11,1(P)
14
22
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22

13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 5,5mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 0
0,9 1,5 2,2
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK L510 XCK L502 XCK L521 XCK L515 XCK L506
13
21
break before make,

slow break 1,8 3,2(P) 3,1(A) 5,6(P) 4,6(A) 8(P)
14
22
(XE2N P2151) 21-22

13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
0 3 5,5mm 0 5,2 mm 0 7,6 mm 0 0
3-pole ZCK LD39 + ZCK LD39 + ZCK LD39 + ZCK LD39 + ZCK LD39 +
31
21
13
snap action
32
22
14
(XE3S P2141) 1,8 4,5 (P) mm 3,1 (A) 7,8 (P) mm 4,6 (A) 11,1 (P)mm 26˚ 58˚ (P) 30˚
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32
5 13-14
21-22
31-32
13-14
5,5
13-14
21-22
31-32
13-14
13-14
21-22
31-32
13-14
13-14
21-22
31-32
13-14
0 70˚
13-14
21-22
31-32
13-14
0,9 1,5 2,2 11˚ 14˚

2-pole N/C + N/C ZCK L7 + ZCK D10 ZCK L7 + ZCK D02 ZCK L7 + ZCK D21 ZCK L7+ ZCK D15 ZCK L7 + ZCK D06
11
21
simultaneous,
slow break
12
22
(XE2N P2141) 3,2(P) 5,6(P) 8(P)

11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
1,8 5,5mm 3,1(A) 9mm 4,6(A) mm
3-pole ZCK LD37 + ZCK LD37 + ZCK LD37 + ZCK LD37 + ZCK LD37 +
31
21
13
break before make,
32
22
14
slow break 1,8 3,2 (P) mm 3,1 (A) 3,2 (P) mm 4,6 (A) 8 (P) mm 26˚ 42˚ (P) 30˚
(XE3N P2141) 21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 3 5,5 0 5,2 5,5 0 7,6 0 36˚ 70˚ 0 40˚
Weight (kg) 0.255 0.260 0.305 0.285 0.255

Characteristics
Type of actuation
Maximum actuation speed 0.5 m/s 1.5 m/s 1 m/s (any direction)
Minimum force For tripping 15 N 12 N 8N 0.1 N.m 0.13 N.m

or torque For positive opening 45 N 36 N 24 N 0.25 N.m –
Cable entry 1 entry incorporating metal cable gland. Clamping capacity 6 to 13.5 mm.
5/66
Dimensions 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Metal, type XCK L
Complete switches incorporating cable gland
XCK Lp10 XCK Lp02 XCK Lp21

ZCK Lp + ZCK D10 ZCK L3p + ZCK D02 ZCK Lp + ZCK D21
ZCK LD3p + ZCK D10 ZCK LD3p + ZCK D02 ZCK LD3p + ZCK D21
14
14
8
4
14
54
48,5
30
115,5
121
97
(1) = 41 = (1) = 41 = 30 (1) 41 5,5

30 52 30 52 59,5
XCK Lp15 XCK Lp06 Body fixings

ZCK Lp + ZCK D15 ZCK Lp + ZCK D06
ZCK LD3p + ZCK D15 ZCK LD3p + ZCK D06
22 15
14
6
5
34,5
142,5
60,5
6
209,5
127,5
72
67
30 (1) = 41 = (1) = 41 = (1) = 41 =
8 34 52 30 52 30 52
(1) Incorporated cable gland.

5/67
characteristics 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Metal, 2 x 2-pole contacts, type XCK ML
Complete switches with 3 ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13 cable
entries
Type of head Plunger (fixing by the body) Rotary

(fixing by the body)
Type of operator Metal end plunger Steel roller plunger Thermoplastic roller lever Thermoplastic roller lever (1)
plunger, horizontal actuation
in 1 direction
References (2)
Switches with 3 entries tapped ISO M20 x 1.5
2 x 2-pole N/C + N/O XCK ML110H29 XCK ML102H29 XCK ML121H29 XCK ML115H29
snap action (XES P2151L)
13
21
13
21
2 5(P) 4(A) 9(P) 5(A) 12,6(P)

21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14
21-22 A 21-22 A 13-14
21-22 A 13-14
21-22 A
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22
14
22
14
22
21-22 21-22 21-22

13-14 B
21-22
13-14
21-22 B 13-14
21-22 B 13-14
21-22 B
13-14 13-14
A B 0
13-14 13-14
6mm 0 mm 0 mm 0
1,2 2 3
2 x 2-pole N/C + N/O XCK ML510H29 XCK ML502H29 XCK ML521H29 XCK ML515H29
(XEN P2151L) 2 3,4(P) 3,3(A) 6(P) 6(A) 9,3(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13
21
13
21
13-14 A 13-14 A 13-14 A 13-14 A

21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 B 13-14 B 13-14 B 13-14 B
0 3,3 6,6mm 0 6 mm 0 10 mm 0
14
22
14
22
A B
Switches with 3 entries tapped for Pg 13 cable gland
5 2 x 2-pole N/C + N/O XCK ML110 XCK ML102 XCK ML121 XCK ML115
snap action (XES P2151L)
13
21
13
21
2 5(P) 4(A) 9(P) 5(A) 12,6(P)

21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 A 21-22 A 21-22 A 13-14
21-22 A
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22
14
22
14
22
21-22
13-14 B 13-14 B 13-14 B
21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14
21-22 B
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
A B 0 6mm 0 mm 0 mm 0
1,2 2 3
2 x 2-pole N/C + N/O XCK ML510 XCK ML502 XCK ML521 XCK ML515
(XEN P2151L) 2 3,4(P) 3,3(A) 6(P) 6(A) 9,3(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13
21
13
21
13-14 A 13-14 A 13-14 A 13-14 A

21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 B 13-14 B 13-14 B 13-14 B
0 3,3 6,6mm 0 6 mm 0 10 mm 0
14
22
14
22
A B
Weight (kg) 0.400 0.405 0.450 0.430
Characteristics
Type of actuation

Minimum For tripping 15 N 12 N 8N 0.2 N.m
force For positive 60 N 50 N 50 N 0.5 N.m
opening
Cable entry 3 entries tapped ISO M20 x 1.5, clamping capacity 7 to 13 mm, or 3 entries tapped for n° 13 cable gland conforming to NF C
68-300 (DIN Pg 13.5), clamping capacity 9 to 12 mm.
(2) Switches available with other 2-pole slow break contact blocks: N/O + N/C make before break, N/C + N/C simultaneous (with positive opening operation),
N/C + N/C simultaneous, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Note: replacement parts
The heads of limit switches type XCK ML are the same as those for types XCK M and XCK L (see heads ZCK D10, ZCK D02, ZCK D21 and ZCK D15 on
page 5/70).
5/68
Dimensions 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Metal, 2 x 2-pole contacts, type XCK ML
Complete switches with 3 ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13 cable
entries
XCK ML110H29, XCK ML510H29, XCK ML110, XCK ML102H29, XCK ML502H29, XCK ML102, XCK ML502
XCK ML510
14,65
4 Ø13
14,65 Ø10
54,5
11,5
11,5
6,5
35
6,5
123,2
Ø Ø
6,2
6,2
5,5
105
5,5
81
81
(2) (1) (1) (2) (1) (1)
(1) 5 = 61,5 = (1) 5 = 61,5 =

14,65 77 15 77
35,6 35,6
XCK ML121H29, XCK ML521H29, XCK ML121, XCK ML115H29, XCK ML515H29, XCK ML115, XCK ML515
XCK ML521
22 15,45
14,65
Ø20 5,5
8
5
11,5
59
6,5
129
135
Ø
6,2
5,5 5,5
81
(2) (1) (1) (2) (1) (1)
(1) 5 = 61,5 = (1) 5

15 77 15
35,6 35,6
(1) XCK MLpppH29: 3 entries tapped M20 x 1.5. XCK MLppp: 3 entries tapped for n° 13 cable gland.
(2) 2 centering holes Ø 3.9 ± 0.2, cover fixing holes axis.
Ø: 2 elongated holes 6.2 x 6.5, inclined at 26°30’ to the vertical axis, for M5 screws.
5/69
Presentation 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Metal, types XCK M and XCK L
Spring lever with Spring-rod lever, Variable length Round rod lever,
thermoplastic end metal (4) thermoplastic roller thermoplastic, Ø 6 mm
(4) lever (4) L = 200 mm (5)
ZCK D81 ZCK D91 ZCK D41 ZCK D59
“Cat’s whisker” Spring rod
ZCK D06 ZCK D08
5 Thermoplastic Steel Steel ball bearing

roller lever (4) roller lever (4) mounted roller lever (4)
ZCK D15 ZCK D16 ZCK D17
Thermoplastic Thermoplastic Steel Steel

roller lever roller lever plunger roller lever roller lever plunger
plunger with protective plunger with protective boot
1 direction of boot, 1 direction 1 direction of 1 direction of actuation
actuation of actuation actuation
Metal end plunger Metal end plunger Steel roller plunger

Steel roller plunger
with protective boot with protective boot
Body with 2-pole contact, Body with 2-pole contact,

3 cable entries for Pg 11 (1) (2) with incorporated cable gland (1) (3)
ZCK M1, M5, M6, M7, M9 ZCK L1, L5, L6, L7

ZCK M8 ZCK L8

3 cable entries for Pg 11 (1) (2) with incorporated cable gland (1) (3)
ZCK MD3 ZCK LD3

(2) For 3 cable entries tapped ISO M20 x 1.5, add H29 to the reference. Example: ZCK M1 becomes ZCK M1H29.
For one cable entry with 1/2" NPT adaptor, add H7 to the reference. Example: ZCK M1 becomes ZCK M1H7.
(3) For one cable entry tapped 1/2" NPT, add H7 to the reference. Example: ZCK L1 becomes ZCK L1H7.
5/70
Presentation (continued) 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Square rod lever, Round rod lever, Round rod lever,

steel, U 3 mm glass fibre Ø 3 mm thermoplastic, Ø 6 mm
L = 125 mm (5) L = 125 mm (5) L = 200 mm (5)
ZCK Y54 ZCK Y55 ZCK Y59
Spring lever with Spring-rod lever,

thermoplastic end metal (4)
(4)
ZCK Y81 ZCK Y91
Variable length Variable Variable Elastomer

thermoplastic length length roller lever,
roller lever (4) steel elastomer Ø 50 mm (4)
roller roller lever,
lever (4) Ø 50 mm (4)
ZCK Y41 ZCK Y43 ZCK Y49 ZCK Y39

5
Thermoplastic Steel Steel ball bearing

roller lever roller lever mounted roller lever
(4) (4) (4)
For actuation
from left AND right
or
from left OR right
ZCK D05
: head assuring positive opening operation.

(5) Adjustable throughout 360° in 5° steps, or in 45° steps by reversing the lever mounting.
5/71
References 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Adaptable sub-assemblies
Bodies with 2-pole contact

With contact block Scheme Positive Cable entry Reference Weight
operation (1) kg
For limit switches type XCK M
N/C + N/O Pg 11 ZCK M1 0.210
21
13
snap action ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK M1H29 0.210
(XE2S P2151)
1/2" NPT (2) ZCK M1H7 0.210
22
14
N/C + N/O Pg 11 ZCK M5 0.210
21
13
break before make, ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK M5H29 0.210
slow break
1/2" NPT (2) ZCK M5H7 0.210
22
14
(XE2N P2151)
N/O + N/C Pg 11 ZCK M6 0.210
21
13
make before make,
ZCK Mp ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK M6H29 0.210
slow break
22 1/2" NPT (2) ZCK M6H7 0.210
14
(XE2N P2161)
N/C + N/C Pg 11 ZCK M7 0.210
11
21
simultaneous, ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK M7H29 0.210
slow break
1/2" NPT (2) ZCK M7H7 0.210
12
22
(XE2N P2141)
N/O + N/O – Pg 11 ZCK M8 0.210
13
23
simultaneous, ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK M8H29 0.210

slow break
1/2" NPT (2) ZCK M8H7 0.210
14
24
(XE2N P2131)
N/C + N/C Pg 11 ZCK M9 0.210
11
21
snap action ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK M9H29 0.210

(XE2S P2141)
12
22
For limit switches type XCK L

N/C + N/O Pg 11 ZCK L1 0.210
21
13
snap action 1/2" NPT ZCK L1H7 0.210

5 (XE2S P2151)
22
14
N/C + N/O Pg 11 ZCK L5 0.210

21
13
break before make, 1/2" NPT ZCK L5H7 0.210

slow break
22
14
(XE2N P2151)
N/O + N/C Pg 11 ZCK L6 0.210
21
13
make before make, 1/2" NPT ZCK L6H7 0.210

slow break
ZCK Lp
22
14
(XE2N P2161)
N/C + N/C Pg 11 ZCK L7 0.210
11
21
simultaneous, 1/2" NPT ZCK L7H7 0.210

slow break
12
22
(XE2N P2141)
N/O + N/O – Pg 11 ZCK L8 0.210

13
23
simultaneous, 1/2" NPT ZCK L8H7 0.210

slow break
14
24
(XE2N P2131)
(1) : N/C contact with positive opening operation.

(2) 3 tapped entries, one with metal adaptor for 1/2" NPT (USASB2-1) conduit.
5/72
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic

With contact block Scheme Positive Cable entry Reference Weight
operation (1) kg
For limit switches type XCK M
N/C + N/O + N/O Pg 13 ZCK MD31 0.210
33
13
31
snap action ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK MD31H29 0.210
(XE3S P2151)
1/2" NPT (2) ZCK MD31H7 0.210
34
14
32
N/C + N/C + N/O Pg 13 ZCK MD39 0.210
13
31
21
snap action ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK MD39H29 0.210
(XE3S P2141)
1/2" NPT (2) ZCK MD39H7 0.210
14
32
22
N/C + N/C + N/O Pg 13 ZCK MD37 0.210
13
31
21
ZCK MD3p break before make, ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK MD37H29 0.210
slow break
1/2" NPT (2) ZCK MD37H7 0.210
14
32
22
(XE3N P2141)
N/C + N/O + N/O Pg 13 ZCK MD35 0.210
33
13
21
break before make, ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK MD35H29 0.210

slow break
1/2" NPT (2) ZCK MD35H7 0.210
34
14
22
(XE3N P2151)
For limit switches type XCK L
N/C + N/O + N/O Pg 11 ZCK LD31 0.210
33
13
31
snap action 1/2" NPT ZCK LD31H7 0.210

(XE3S P2151)
34
14
32
N/C + N/C + N/O Pg 11 ZCK LD39 0.210

13
31
21
snap action 1/2" NPT ZCK LD39H7 0.210

(XE3S P2141)
14
32
22
N/C + N/C + N/O Pg 11 ZCK LD37 0.210

13
31
21
break before make, 1/2" NPT ZCK LD37H7 0.210

ZCK LD3 p
slow break
5
14
32
22
(XE3N P2141)
N/C + N/O + N/O Pg 11 ZCK LD35 0.210
33
13
21
break before make, 1/2" NPT ZCK LD35H7 0.210

slow break
34
14
22
(XE3N P2151)

(2) 3 tapped entries, one with metal adaptor for 1/2" NPT (USASB2-1) conduit.
5/73
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Contact blocks
Type of contact Scheme For bodies Positive Reference Weight
operation (1) kg
2-pole contact
N/C + N/O ZCK M1 XE2S P2151 0.020
21
13
snap action ZCK L1
22
14
N/C + N/O ZCK M5 XE2N P2151 0.020
21
13
XE2S P21 p1 break before make, ZCK L5
slow break
22
14
N/O + N/C ZCK M6 XE2N P2161 0.020
21
13
make before break, ZCK L6
slow break
22
14
N/C + N/C ZCK M7 XE2N P2141 0.020

11
21
simultaneous, ZCK L7
XE2N P21p1 slow break
12
22
N/O + N/O ZCK M8 – XE2N P2131 0.020

13
23
simultaneous, ZCK L8
slow break
14
24
N/C + N/C ZCK M9 XE2S P2141 0.020

11
21
snap action
12
22
3-pole contact
N/C + N/O + N/O ZCK MD31 XE3S P2151 0.035
33
13
31
snap action ZCK LD31
5
34
14
32
N/C + N/C + N/O ZCK MD39 XE3S P2141 0.035

XE3 p P21pp
13
31
21
snap action ZCK LD39

14
32
22
N/C + N/C + N/O ZCK MD37 XE3N P2141 0.035

13
31
21
break before make, ZCK LD37

slow break
14
32
22
N/C + N/O + N/O ZCK MD35 XE3N P2151 0.035

33
13
21
break before make, ZCK LD35

slow break
34
14
22
(1) : N/C contact with positive opening operation or sub-assembly assuring positive opening operation.
Accessories for limit switches type XCK M

lots of kg
Tap-off terminal 1 XCK Z09 0.010
for cabling continuity
XCK Z09 Clip-in markers 25 AB1 R11 0.002

(strips of 10 numbers: 0 to 9)
Other markers, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
AB1 R11
Other versions Gold flashed contacts.
5/74
Operation 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Heads ZCK D10, D109 with body

ZCK M1, L1 ZCK M5, L5 ZCK M6, L6 ZCK M7, L7 ZCK M8, L8 ZCK M9
1,8 4,5(P) 1,8 3,2(P) 3 4,4(P) 3,2(P) 1,8 4,5(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 11-12 13-14 11-12
13-14 13-14 13-14 21-22 23-24 21-22
21-22 11-12
13-14 0 3 5,5mm 1,8 5,5mm 1,8 5,5mm 1,8 5,5mm 21-22
0 5,5mm 0 5,5mm
0,9 0,9
ZCK MD39, LD39 ZCK MD37, LD37 ZCK MD31, LD31 ZCK MD35, LD35
1,8 4,5(P) 1,8 3,2(P) 1,8 4,5(P) 1,8 3,2(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 33-34 33-34
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22
31-32 0 3 5,5mm 33-34 0 3 5,5mm
13-14 13-14
0 5,5mm 0 5,5mm
0,9 0,9

3,1(A) 7,8(P) 3,1(A) 5,6(P) 5,2(A) 7,6(P) 5,6(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 11-12 13-14 11-12
13-14 13-14 13-14 21-22 21-22
23-24 11-12
21-22 0 5,2 mm
13-14 3,1 9mm 3,1(A) 9mm 3,1(A) 9mm 21-22
0 mm 0 mm
1,5 1,5
3,1(A) 7,8(P) 3,1(A) 5,6(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 3,1(A) 5,6(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 33-34 33-34
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22
21-22
31-32
0 5,2 mm 33-34 0 5,2 mm
13-14
13-14
0 mm 0 mm
1,5 1,5
Heads ZCK D21, D23, D219, D239 with body

4,6(A) 11,1(P) 4,6(A) 8(P) 7,6 11,1(P) 8(P) 4,6(A) 11,1(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 11-12 11-12
13-14 13-14
13-14 13-14 21-22 23-24 21-22
11-12
21-22
13-14
0 7,6 mm 4,6(A) mm 4,6(A) mm 4,6(A) mm 21-22
0 mm 0 mm
2,2 2,2
4,6(A) 11,1(P) 4,6(A) 8(P) 4,6(A) 11,1(P) 4,6(A) 8(P)
21-22
31-32
13-14
21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
13-14
0 7,6 mm
21-22
33-34
13-14
21-22
33-34
13-14
21-22
33-34
13-14
0 7,6 mm
5
13-14
0 mm 0 mm
2,2 2,2
Heads ZCK D15, D16, D17 with body

26 58 (P) 26 42 (P) 40 60 (P) 43 (P) 26 58 (P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 11-12 13-14 11-12
13-14 13-14 13-14 21-22 23-24 21-22
21-22 11-12
13-14 0 36 70 24 70 24 70 24 70 21-22
0 70 0 70
11 11
26˚ 58˚(P) 26˚ 42˚(P) 26˚ 58˚(P) 26˚ 42˚(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 33-34 33-34
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22
31-32 0 36˚ 70˚ 33-34 0 36˚ 70˚
13-14 13-14
0 70˚ 0 70˚
11˚ 11˚
Heads ZCK D41, D59, D81, D91 with body

26 26 40 26
21-22 21-22 21-22 11-12 13-14 11-12
13-14 13-14 13-14 21-22 23-24 21-22
21-22 11-12
13-14 0 36 70 24 70 24 70 24 70 21-22
0 70 0 70
11 11
26˚ 26˚ 26˚ 26˚
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 33-34 33-34
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 0 21-22 0
31-32 36˚ 70˚ 33-34
36˚ 70˚
13-14 13-14
0 70˚ 0 70˚
11˚ 11˚

30 30 40 30
21-22 21-22 21-22 11-12 13-14 11-12
13-14 13-14 13-14 21-22 23-24 21-22
21-22 11-12
13-14 0 40 30 30 30 21-22
0 0
14 14
30˚ 30˚ 30˚ 30˚
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 33-34 33-34
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22
31-32 0 40˚ 21-22 0 40˚
13-14 33-34
0 13-14
14˚ 0
14˚
Contact operation G contact closed (A) = cam displacement

H contact open (P) = positive opening point
5/75
Dimensions 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Bodies with contacts

ZCK M1, M5, M6, M7, M8, M9, MD3p, MD3Hp29, MD3pH7 ZCK L1, L5, L6, L7, L8, LD3p
ZCK M1H29, M5H29, M6H29, M7H29, M8H29, M9H29 ZCK L1H7, L5H7, L6H7, L7H7, L8H7, LD3pH7
ZCK M1H7, M5H7, M6H7, M7H7, M8H7
6 6
63,6
58,5
72
67
(1) = 41 =
30 64 (2) = 41 =
30 52
Adaptor for 1/2" NPT conduit

DE9 RA1012
(3) 21 (4)
Ø26
(1) 3 tapped entries for ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 11 cable gland.
5 (2) Incorporated cable gland.

(4) Threaded sleeve.
5/76
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Plunger heads
14
4
14 14
48,5
30
30
ZCK D029 ZCK D21, D23 ZCK D219, D239
14 14 14
4 8 13 8 13
48
54
54
Rotary heads
ZCK D15, D16, D17 ZCK D41 ZCK D59
37 51 44,5 31,7
15 6 43
5,5
5
29,5...84
(1)
50 ...104,5
(2)
34,5
60,5
55
34 56
ZCK D81 ZCK D91
51
51
179
112
56 56
Multi-directional heads
ZCK D06 ZCK D08
14 14
129,5
142,5
(1) 190 max.

(2) 215.5 max.
Note: operating lever spindle threaded M6.
5/77
Osiswitch® Classic
Metal, type XCK J
b XCK J v With head for linear movement (plunger)

fixed body with 1 cable entry
561646
561647
Page 5/80
v With head for rotary movement (lever) or multi-directional

561648
561649
561650
Page 5/80
b XCK J v With head for linear movement (plunger)

plug-in body with 1 cable entry
561651
561652
Page 5/82
v With head for rotary movement (lever)

561653
561654
561655
Page 5/82
Protective treatment Version Standard “TC”, special "TH"
Ambient air temperature Operation - 25…+ 70 °C, special sub-assemblies available for extreme temperatures (-40 °C or +120 °C)
Degree of protection IP 66 conforming to IEC 60529; IK 07 conforming to EN 50 102
Cable entry or Depending on model Tapped entry for n° 13 cable gland, or tapped ISO M20 x 1.5 or 1/2" NPT, or M12 connector
integral connector
Materials Bodies and heads in zamak
5/78
(continued) 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Metal, type XCK J

Rated operational XE2p P a AC-15; A300 (Ue = 240 V, Ie = 3 A); Ithe = 10 A
characteristics c DC-13; Q300 (Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0.27 A), conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 appendix A,
EN 60947-5-1
XE3p P a AC-15; B300 (Ue = 240 V, Ie = 1.5 A); Ithe = 6 A
c DC-13; R300 (Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0.1 A), conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 appendix A,
EN 60947-5-1
Positive operation (depending on model) N/C contacts with positive opening operation conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix K,
EN 60947-5-1
Cabling XE2S P21p1 Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 0.34 mm2, max: 2 x 1.5 mm2
(screw clamp terminals) XE2N P21p1 Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 0.5 mm2, max: 2 x 2.5 mm2
XCK J plug-in and Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 0.75 mm2, max: 2 x 1.5 mm2
XES P20p1
XE3N P and XE3S P Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 0.34 mm2, max: 1 x 1 mm2 or 2 x 0.75 mm2
Minimum actuation speed XE2S P21p1 and XE3S P: 0.01 m/minute

XE2N P21p1 and XE3N P: 6 m/minute
XE2S P21p1, XE2S P2141

b Load factor: 0.5
XE2N P21p1 XCK J plug-in, XES P20p1
5
a.c. supply
a 50/60 Hz 5 5 5

o inductive circuit Ithe 4 Ithe 4 Ithe

3 3
230 V 12/24/48 V 12/24 V
2 2
110 V 230 V 48 V
1 1 1
110 V
0,5 24 V 0,5 0,5
230/400 V
48 V 0,2
110 V
0,1 0,1 0,1
0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10
Current in A Current in A Current in A
d.c. supply c Power broken in W for 5 million operating Power broken in W for 5 million operating Power broken in W for 5 million operating
cycles. cycles. cycles.
Voltage V 24 48 120 Voltage V 24 48 120 Voltage V 24 48 120
o W 10 7 4 o W 13 9 7 o W 10 7 4
For XE2S Pp151 on a or c, N/C and N/O contacts simultaneously loaded to the values shown with reverse polarity.
XE3N Ppppp XE3S Ppppp
a.c. supply
a 50/60 Hz Ithe Ithe
5 5
3
2
12/24/48 V
230 V
1
110 V
1
0,5 0,5
110 V
230/400 V 24 V
0,2
48 V
0,1 0,1
0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10
cycles. cycles.
o W 3 2 1 o W 4 3 2
5/79
characteristics 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Metal, conforming to CENELEC EN 50041, type XCK J
Complete switches, fixed body
1 ISO M20 x 1.5 cable entry
(switches supplied for actuation from left AND right)
Form B (1) Form C (1) Form A (1) Form D (1)
Type of operator Metal end Steel roller Thermoplastic roller Steel roller lever (4) Variable length Round thermoplastic
plunger plunger lever (4) thermoplastic roller rod lever, Ø 6 mm
lever (4) (4) (5)
References (2) (3)
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK J161H29 XCK J167H29 XCK J10511H29 XCK J10513H29 XCK J10541H29 XCK J10559H29
13
21
snap action
(XE2S P2151) 2 4,7(P) 3,2(A) 8,1(P) 23˚ 58˚(P) 23˚ 58˚(P) 23˚ 23˚
14
22
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22

13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 6 0 mm 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚
0,9 mm 1,5 11˚ 11˚ 11˚ 11˚
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK J561H29 XCK J567H29 XCK J50511H29 XCK J50513H29 XCK J50541H29 XCK J50559H29
13
21
break before
make, slow 2 3,4(P) 3,2(A) 5,9(P) 23˚ 40˚(P) 23˚ 40˚(P) 23˚ 23˚
14
22
break 21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
0 3,2 6 0 5,3 mm 0 33˚ 90˚ 0 33˚ 90˚ 0 33˚ 90˚ 0 33˚ 90˚
(XE2N P2151) mm
2-pole N/C + N/C ZCK J9H29 + ZCK J9H29 + ZCK J9H29 + ZCK J9H29 + ZCK J9H29 + ZCK J9H29 +
11
21
snap action ZCK E61 ZCK E67 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y11 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y13 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y41 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y59
(XE2S P2141)
12
22
2 4,7(P) 3,2(A) 8,1(P) 23˚ 58˚(P) 23˚ 58˚(P) 23˚ 23˚

11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
0 6 0 mm 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚
0,9 mm 1,5 11˚ 11˚ 11˚ 11˚
2-pole N/C + N/C ZCK J7H29 + ZCK J7H29 + ZCK J7H29 + ZCK J7H29 + ZCK J7H29 + ZCK J7H29 +
11
21
5 simultaneous,
slow break
ZCK E61 ZCK E67 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y11 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y13 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y41 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y59
12
22
(XE2N P2141) 3,4(P) 5,9(P) 62˚(P) 62˚(P)

11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
0 2 6 0 3,5(A) mm 0 28˚ 90˚ 0 28˚ 90˚ 0 28˚ 90˚ 0 28˚ 90˚
mm
3-pole ZCK JD39H29 + ZCK JD39H29 + ZCK JD39H29 + ZCK JD39H29 + ZCK JD39H29 + ZCK JD39H29 +
13
31
21
N/C + N/C + N/O ZCK E61 ZCK E67 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y11 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y13 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y41 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y59
snap action
14
32
22
(XE3S P2141) 2 4,7(P) 3,2(A) 8,1(P) 23˚ 58˚(P) 23˚ 58˚(P) 23˚
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 6 0 mm 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚
0,9 mm 1,5 11˚ 11˚ 11˚
3-pole ZCK JD37H29 + ZCK JD37H29 + ZCK JD37H29 + ZCK JD37H29 + ZCK JD37H29 + ZCK JD37H29 +
13
31
21
N/C + N/C + N/O ZCK E61 ZCK E67 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y11 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y13 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y41 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y59
break before
14
32
22
make, slow 2 3,4(P) 3,2(A) 5,9(P) 23˚ 40˚(P) 23˚ 40˚(P) 23˚
break 21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
(XE3N P2141) 0 3,2 6 0 5,3 mm 0 33˚ 90˚ 0 33˚ 90˚ 0 33˚ 90˚
mm
Weight (kg) 0.430 0.455 0.480 0.490 0.485 0.485

Characteristics
Type of actuation

(in millions of operating
cycles)
Minimum For tripping 20 N 16 N 0.25 N.m
torque opening
(3) For an entry tapped for a Pg 13 cable gland, delete H29 from the end of the reference. Example: XCK J161H29 becomes XCK J161.
For an entry tapped for 1/2" NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit, replace H29 at the end of the reference by H7. Example: XCK J161H29 becomes XCK J161H7.
(4) Adjustable throughout 360° in 5° steps, or in 45° steps by reversing the lever or its mounting.
5/80
Dimensions 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
1 ISO M20 x 1.5 cable entry
XCK Jp61H29 XCK Jp67H29 XCK Jp051pH29

ZCK Jp + ZCK E61 ZCK Jp + ZCK E67 ZCK Jp + ZCK E05 + ZCK Y11 or Y13
57
17
5 41
5
17
41
63
50
37
133
120
107
60
60
60
(1) (1) (1)
33,5 = 30 = 33,5 = 30 = 33,5 = 30 =

44 40 44 40 62 40
XCK Jp0541H29 XCK Jp0559H29

ZCK Jp + ZCK E05 + ZCK Y41 ZCK Jp + ZCK E05 + ZCK Y59
52
48 26,2
5,5 44
(2)
40…85
62…107
(4)
(5)
5
132…177
(3)
60
60
(1) (1)
33,5 = 30 = 33,5 = 30 =
60 40 60 40
(1) 1 tapped entry for ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13 cable gland or 1/2" NPT.
(2) Ø 6 rod, length 200 mm.
(3) 282 max.
(4) 190 max.
(5) 212 max.
5/81
characteristics 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Complete switches, plug-in body
ISO M20 x 1.5 cable entry
Type of operator Metal end Steel roller Thermoplastic Steel roller lever Variable length Round
plunger plunger roller lever (4) (4) thermoplastic thermoplastic rod
roller lever (4) lever, Ø 6 mm
(4) (5)
References (2) (3)
Single-pole C/O XCK J1161H29 XCK J1167H29 XCK J110511H29 XCK J110513H29 XCK J110541H29 XCK J110559H29
11
13
snap action
2 3,2(A) 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
12
14
11-12 11-12
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
13-14 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
11-12 11-12
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
13-14
0 6mm 0 mm 0 0 0 0
0,9 1,5
Weight (kg) 0.430 0.455 0.480 0.490 0.485 0.485

Contact operation contact contact (A) = cam displacement
closed open
Characteristics
Type of actuation
5
Minimum force or torque for tripping 20 N 16 N 0.25 N.m
Cable entry (3) 1 entry tapped M20 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland.
Clamping capacity 7 to 13 mm
(2) Switches with gold contacts: please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(3) For an entry tapped for a n° 13 cable gland, delete H29 from the end of the reference. Example: XCK J1161H29 becomes XCK J1161.
For an entry tapped for 1/2" NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit, replace H29 at the end of the reference by H7. Example: XCK J1161H29 becomes XCK J1161H7.
(4) Adjustable throughout 360° in 5° steps, or in 45° steps by reversing the lever mounting or clamp.
(5) Value taken with actuator operating at 100 mm from the fixing.
5/82
Dimensions 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Complete switches, plug-in body
ISO M20 x 1.5 cable entry
XCK J1611H29 XCK J1167H29 XCK J110511H29, XCK J110513H29
57
17 5 41
5
17
41
63
50
37
140
127
114
60
60
60
25 (1) 25 (1) 25 (1)
36 = 30 = 36 = 30 = 62 = 30 =
42,5 42,5 42,5
XCK J110541H29 XCK J110559H29
52
48 26,2
5,5 44
(2)
40…85
62…107
(4)
(5)
5
139…184
(3)
60
60
25 (1) 25 (1)
60 = 30 = 60 = 30 =
42,5 42,5
(3) 289 max.
(4) 190 max.
(5) 212 max.
5/83
characteristics 5
Osiswitch® Classic
(2) (3)
References (4)
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK J161D XCK J167D XCK J10511D XCK J10513D XCK J10541D XCK J10559D
13
21

14
22
2 4,7(P) 3,2(A) 8,1(P) 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22

21-22 21-22 13-14 13-14
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
21-22 21-22 13-14 13-14
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 6mm 0 mm 0 0 0 0
0,9 1,5
Weight (kg) 0.430 0.455 0.480 0.490 0.485 0.485

Characteristics
Switch actuation On end By 30° cam By any moving
part
Type of actuation
5
Minimum force or For tripping 20 N 16 N 0.25 N.m
torque For positive opening 50 N 40 N 0.50 N.m – –
Connection M12 5-pin connector, Ui = 60 V, Ie = 4 A (see suitable pre-wired female connectors below).
(2) Adjustable throughout 360° in 5° steps, or in 45° steps by reversing the lever or its mounting.
Type of connector M12 straight, 5-pin, 4 A/24 V max. M12 elbowed, 5-pin, 4 A/24 V max.
With cable, Ø 5.8 mm L=2m XZ CP1164L2 XZ CP1264L2
(4 x 0.34 mm2 + 1 x 0.5 mm2)
L=5m XZ CP1164L5 XZ CP1264L5
L = 10 m XZ CP1164L10 XZ CP1264L10
Weight (kg) L=2m 0.115

L=5m 0.270
L = 10 m 0.520
5/84
Dimensions, Limit switches 5
connections Osiswitch® Classic

5
Dimensions
XCK J161D XCK J167D XCK J1051pD
57
17
5 41
5
17
41
63
50
37
133
120
107
60
60
60
33,5 = 30 = 33,5 = 30 = 33,5 = 30 =

12
12
12
44 40 44 40 62 40
XCK J10541D XCK J10559D XZ CP1164Lp
52
5,5 44 48 26,2
(1) 42 L
40…85
62…107
(3)
(4)
XZ CP1264Lp
5
132…177
(2)
26
20
60
60
32 L
40
12
33,5 = 30 = 33,5 = 30 =
12
59 40 59 40

(2) 282 max.
(3) 190 max.
(4) 212 max.
L: Cable length 2, 5 or 10 m.
Connections
Limit switch XCK JppppD Pre-wired female connector XZ CP1p64Lp
2 2
3 1 1 3
4 4
1-2 = N/C 1 = brown
13
21
3-4 = N/O 2 = white

5 =t 3 = blue
14
22
4 A / 24 V max. 4 = black
5 = t yellow/green
5/85
characteristics 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Integral 7/8" 16UN connector
(2) (3)
References (4)
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK J161A XCK J167A XCK J10511A XCK J10513A XCK J10541A XCK J10559A
13
21

14
22
2 4,7(P) 3,2(A) 8,1(P) 21-22 21-22 21-22

21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 6mm 0 mm 0 0 0 0
0,9 1,5
Weight (kg) 0.430 0.455 0.480 0.490 0.485 0.485

Contact operation contact closed (A) = cam displacement N/C contact with positive opening
Characteristics
Type of actuation
5
Minimum force For tripping 20 N 16 N 0.25 N.m
or torque For positive opening 50 N 40 N 0.50 N.m – –
Connection 7/8" 16UN 5-pin connector, Ui = 250 V; Ie = 6 A (see suitable pre-wired female connectors below).
(3) Value taken with actuator operating at 100 mm from the fixing.

Type of connector 7/8" 16UN straight, 5-pin, 6 A/250 V max.
With cable, Ø 6.7 mm L=2m XZ CP1771L2
(5 x 0.5 mm2 )
L=5m XZ CP1771L5
L = 10 m XZ CP1771L10

L=5m 0.475
L = 10 m 0.950
5/86
Dimensions, Limit switches 5
connections 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Integral 7/8" 16UN connector
Dimensions
XCK J161A XCK J167A XCK J1051pA
57
17
5 41
5
17
41
63
50
37
133
120
107
60
60
60
17
17
17
33,5 = 30 = 33,5 = 30 = 33,5 = 30 =

44 40 44 40 62 40
XCK J10541A XCK J10559A XZ CP1771Lp
52
48 26,2
5,5 44
(1)
55 L
40…85
62…107
(3)
(4)
5
132…177
(2)
60
60
17
17
33,5 = 30 = 33,5 = 30 =
59 40 59 40

(2) 282 max.
(3) 190 max.
(4) 212 max.
L: cable length 2, 5 or 10 m.
Connections
Limit switch XCK JppppA Pre-wired female connector XZ CP1771Lp
3
3
2 4
4 2
5 1 1 5
1 = 21 1 = black
13
21
2 = 22 2 = blue
3 =t 3 = yellow/green t
14
22
4 = 14 4 = brown
5 = 13 5 = white
5/87
Presentation 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Fixed or plug-in body
Variable composition: standard bodies
Thermoplastic roller Steel roller

lever plunger, lever plunger,
1 direction of actuation 1 direction of actuation
ZCK E21 ZCK E23
Side metal Side steel roller Side steel roller

plunger plunger, plunger,
horizontal (1) vertical (1)
ZCK E63 ZCK E64 ZCK E65
Spring rod “Cat’s whisker”
ZCK E08 ZCK E06
End reinforced End steel roller End steel roller

steel roller plunger plunger with plunger
protective boot
End metal End steel ball End metal plunger

plunger bearing plunger with protective boot
Body with 2-pole contact, fixed, Body with contact, cable Body with contact, cable
1 step, entry for Pg 13, fixed, entry for Pg 13, plug-in,
M12 connector (2) 1 step (2) (3) 1 or 2 step (2) (3)
ZCK J1D, J5D, J6D, J7D ZCK JD3p, ZCK J11, J21, J41
ZCK J8D ZCK J1, J5, J6, J7, J9
Body with contact, cable

entry for Pg 13, fixed,
1 step (2) (3)
ZCK J2, J8
Body with contact, cable
entry for Pg 13, fixed,
2 step (2) (3)
ZCK J4
(1) Cannot be used with bodies ZCK J4 and ZCK J41.

(3) For a cable entry tapped ISO M20 x 1.5, add H29 to the reference. Example: ZCK J1 becomes ZCK J1H29.
For a cable entry tapped 1/2" NPT, add H7 to the reference. Example: ZCK J1 becomes ZCK J1H7.
5/88
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Variable composition: standard bodies
Square rod lever, Round rod lever, Round rod lever, Round rod lever,
steel, U 3 mm steel, Ø 3 mm glass fibre, thermoplastic,
L = 125 mm (5) L = 125 mm (5) Ø 3 mm Ø 6 mm
L = 125 mm (5) L = 200 mm (5)

thermoplastic end metal (4)
(4)
ZCK Y81 ZCK Y91
Variable length Variable length

thermoplastic roller steel roller
lever (4) lever (4)
ZCK Y41 ZCK Y43

Spring return,
for actuation
from left AND
5
right
or
from left OR
right
ZCK E05 Thermoplastic roller Steel roller Steel ball bearing

lever (5) lever (5) mounted roller lever (5)
Body with double-pole 2 C/O Body with double-pole 2 C/O

staggered, snap action contact staggered, snap action contact
cable entry for Pg 13, fixed, cable entry for Pg 13, plug-in,
2 step (3) 2 step (3)
ZCK J404 ZCK J4104
Stay put, for Forked arm with Forked arm with

actuation from thermoplastic thermoplastic rollers,
left AND right rollers, 1 track (5) 2 track (5)
ZCK E09 ZCK Y71 ZCK Y61
: head assuring positive opening operation.

5/89
References 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Adaptable sub-assemblies: standard bodies
Fixed bodies with 2-pole contact

Type With contact Scheme Positive Cable entry Reference Weight
block operation
(1) kg
1 step N/C + N/O Pg 13 ZCK J1 0.310
21
13
snap action ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK J1H29 0.310
(XE2S P2151)
1/2" NPT ZCK J1H7 0.310
22
14
2 C/O – Pg 13 ZCK J2 0.310
11
21
13
23
simultaneous, ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK J2H29 0.310
snap action
1/2" NPT ZCK J2H7 0.310
12
22
14
24
(XES P2021)
N/C + N/O Pg 13 ZCK J5 0.310
21
13
ZCK J p break before make, ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK J5H29 0.310
slow break
1/2" NPT ZCK J5H7 0.310
22
14
(XE2N P2151)
N/C + N/O Pg 13 ZCK J6 0.310
21
13
make before make, ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK J6H29 0.310
slow break
1/2" NPT ZCK J6H7 0.310
22
14
(XE2N P2161)
N/C + N/C 11 Pg 13 ZCK J7 0.310
21
slow break
1/2" NPT ZCK J7H7 0.310
12
22
(XE2N P2141)
N/O + N/O – Pg 13 ZCK J8 0.310
13
23

slow break
1/2" NPT ZCK J8H7 0.310
14
24
(XE2N P2131)
N/C + N/C Pg 13 ZCK J9 0.310
11
21

(XE2S P2141)
1/2" NPT ZCK J9H7 0.310
12
22
5 2 step 2 C/O – Pg 13 ZCK J4 0.310

11
21
13
23
staggered, ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK J4H29 0.310

snap action
1/2" NPT ZCK J4H7 0.310
12
22
14
24
(XES P2031)

block operation
(1) kg
– N/C + N/O + N/O Pg 13 ZCK JD31 0.310
33
13
31
snap action ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK JD31H29 0.310

(XE3S P2151)
1/2" NPT ZCK JD31H7 0.310
34
14
32
N/C + N/C + N/O Pg 13 ZCK JD39 0.310

13
31
21
snap action ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK JD39H29 0.310

(XE3S P2141)
1/2" NPT ZCK JD39H7 0.310
14
32
22
N/C + N/C + N/O Pg 13 ZCK JD37 0.310

13
31
21
break before make, ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK JD37H29 0.310

slow break
1/2" NPT ZCK JD37H7 0.310
14
32
22
(XE3N P2141)
N/C + N/O + N/O Pg 13 ZCK JD35 0.310
33
13
21
break before make, ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK JD35H29 0.310

slow break
1/2" NPT ZCK JD35H7 0.310
34
14
22
(XE3N P2151)
5/90
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Adaptable sub-assemblies: standard bodies
Plug-in bodies with contact

block operation
(1) kg
1 step Single-pole C/O – Pg 13 ZCK J11 0.300
11
13
1/2" NPT ZCK J11H7 0.300
12
14
Double-pole 2 C/O – Pg 13 ZCK J21 0.300
11
21
13
23
snap action
1/2" NPT ZCK J21H7 0.300
12
22
14
24
2 step Double-pole 2 C/O – Pg 13 ZCK J41 0.300
11
21
13
23
staggered, ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK J41H29 0.300
ZCK J p1 snap action
1/2" NPT ZCK J41H7 0.300
12
22
14
24
Bodies with contact, with rotary head (without operating lever)
block operation
(1) kg
Fixed body
11
21
13
23
1 from the left AND staggered, ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK J404H29 0.455
1 from the right snap action
1/2" NPT ZCK J404H7 0.455
12
22
14
24
Plug-in body
11
21
13
23
1 from the left AND staggered, ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK J4104H29 0.465
ZCK J404 1 from the right snap action
1/2" NPT ZCK J4104H7 0.465
12
22
14
24
Plug-in housing only 5

Description For use with Contacts Reference Weight
kg
Single-pole 1 C/O ZCK J11 Silver ZCK J01 0.150
with positive opening operation
Double-pole 2 C/O simultaneous ZCK J21 Silver ZCK J02 0.160
with positive opening operation
Double-pole 1 C/O + 1 C/O staggered ZCK J41 Silver ZCK J04 0.160
ZCK J0p
5/91
References 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Adaptable sub-assemblies: bodies with indicator light module

block operation
(1) kg
With module comprising 1 LED, c 24 V
1 step N/C + N/O Pg 13 ZCK J120 0.320
21
13
snap action
(XE2S P2151)
22
14
N/C + N/O Pg 13 ZCK J520 0.320
21
13
break before make,
slow break
22
14
(XE2N P2151)
With module comprising 2 LEDs, c 24 V
ZCK J ppp
1 step N/C + N/O Pg 13 ZCK J121 0.320
21
13
(XE2S P2151)
22
14
N/C + N/O Pg 13 ZCK J521 0.320
21
13
break before make, ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK J521H29 0.320
slow break
22
14
(XE2N P2151)
With module comprising 2 neon indicator lights, a 110/120 V
1 step N/C + N/O Pg 13 ZCK J133 0.320
21
13

(XE2S P2151)
22
14
N/C + N/O Pg 13 ZCK J533 0.320

21
13

slow break
22
14
(XE2N P2151)
5 With module comprising 2 neon indicator lights, a 220/240 V

1 step N/C + N/O Pg 13 ZCK J134 0.320
21
13

(XE2S P2151)
22
14
N/C + N/O Pg 13 ZCK J534 0.320

21
13

slow break
22
14
(XE2N P2151)
Plug-in bodies with single-pole contact

block operation
(1) kg
With module comprising 2 LEDs, c 24 V
1 step C/O – Pg 13 ZCK J1121 0.340
11
13

12
14

1 step C/O – Pg 13 ZCK J1133 0.340
11
13

12
14
ZCK J1ppp
1 step C/O – Pg 13 ZCK J1134 0.340
11
13

12
14

Indicator light module characteristics
Type of indicator 1 LED or 2 LEDs 2 neon lights
Rated insulation voltage c 50 V, conforming to IEC 60947-1 a 250 V, conforming to IEC 60947-1
Current consumption 7 mA per LED 2.5 mA per neon 5 mA per neon
Rated operational voltage c 24 V a 110/120 V a 220/240 V
Voltage limits c 20…30 V (including ripple) a 95…130 V a 190…260 V
Service life 100 000 hours 20 000 hours 20 000 hours
Reverse polarity protection Yes –
5/92
References 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Adaptable sub-assemblies: bodies with M12 connector

Type With contact Scheme Positive Reference Weight
block operation (1) kg
1 step N/C + N/O ZCK J1D 0.320
21
13
snap action
(XE2S P2151)
22
14
N/C + N/O ZCK J5D 0.320
21
13
break before make,
slow break
22
14
(XE2N P2151)
N/O + N/C ZCK J6D 0.320
21
13
make before make,
ZCK J pD slow break
22
14
(XE2N P2161)
N/C + N/C ZCK J7D 0.320
11
21
simultaneous,
slow break
12
22
(XE2N P2141)
N/O + N/O – ZCK J8D 0.320
13
23
simultaneous,
slow break
14
24
(XE2N P2131)
(1) N/C contact with positive opening operation.
5/93
References 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Adaptable sub-assemblies: contact blocks
Contact blocks
Type of contact Scheme For bodies Positive Reference Weight
operation (1) kg
2-pole contact
N/C + N/O ZCK J1 XE2S P2151 0.020
21
13
snap action ZCK J1D
22
14
N/C + N/O ZCK J5 XE2N P2151 0.020
21
13
XE2S P21 p1 break before make, ZCK J5D
slow break
22
14
2 C/O ZCK J2 – XES P2021 0.045
11
21
13
23
simultaneous,
snap action
12
22
14
2 C/O 24 ZCK J4 – XES P2031 0.045

11
21
13
23
staggered,
snap action
12
22
14
24
N/O + N/C ZCK J6 XE2N P2161 0.020

21
13
make before break, ZCK J6D

XE2N P21p1 slow break
22
14
N/C + N/C ZCK J7 XE2N P2141 0.020

11
21
simultaneous, ZCK J7D

slow break
12
22
N/O + N/O ZCK J8 – XE2N P2131 0.020

13
23
simultaneous, ZCK J8D

slow break
14
24
5 N/C + N/C ZCK J9 XE2S P2141 0.020

11
21
snap action
12
22
3-pole contact
XES P20p1 N/C + N/O + N/O ZCK JD31 XE3S P2151 0.035
33
13
31
snap action
34
14
32
N/C + N/C + N/O ZCK JD39 XE3S P2141 0.035

13
31
21
snap action
14
32
22
N/C + N/C + N/O ZCK JD37 XE3N P2141 0.035

13
31
21
break before make,

slow break
14
32
22
N/C + N/O + N/O ZCK JD35 XE3N P2151 0.035

XE3p P21p1
33
13
21
break before make,

slow break
34
14
22
5/94
References 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Adaptable sub-assemblies: add-ons
Covers + indicator light module

For use with Number and type Voltage Reference Weight
of indicators kg
Fixed body 1 LED c 24 V ZCK Z020 0.060
2 LEDs c 24 V ZCK Z021 0.060
2 neon lights a 110/120 V ZCK Z033 0.060

ZCK Z0pp
a 220/240 V ZCK Z034 0.060
Plug-in body 2 LEDs c 24 V ZCK J0121 0.200
2 neon lights a 110/120 V ZCK J0133 0.200
a 220/240 V ZCK J0134 0.200
Indicator light modules

ZCK J01pp
For use with Number and type Voltage Reference Weight
of indicators kg
Fixed body 1 LED c 24 V ZCK J902 0.030
2 LEDs c 24 V ZCK J906 0.030
2 neon lights a 110/120 V ZCK J903 0.030
a 220/240 V ZCK J904 0.030

ZCK J90p
Module with resistor for machine diagnostics

For use with Resistor value Reference Weight
kg
5
Fixed body 15 kΩ, 1/4 W ZCK J82A 0.030
(ZCK J1 only)
Other versions Covers + indicator light module for other supply voltages.
ZCK J82A Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
5/95
Operation 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Function diagrams (positive operation assured only if the associated sub-assemblies are )
Heads ZCK E61, E619, E66 with body
ZCK J1p ZCK J2p ZCK J5p ZCK J6p ZCK J7p ZCK J8p ZCK J9
2 4,7(P) 2 2 3,4(P) 3,2 4,6(P) 3,4(P) 2 4,7(P)
21-22 11-12/21-22 21-22 21-22 11-12 11-12
13-14 13-14/23-24 13-14 21-22
13-14 13-14 21-22
21-22 11-12/21-22 23-24 11-12
13-14 13-14/23-24 0 3,2 6mm 2 6mm 2 6mm 2 6mm 21-22
0 6mm 0 6mm 0 6mm
0,9 0,9 0,9
ZCK JD39 ZCK JD37 ZCK JD31 ZCK JD35

2 4,7(P) 2 3,4(P) 2 4,7(P) 2 3,4(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 33-34 33-34
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22
31-32 0 3,2 6mm 33-34 0 3,2 6mm
13-14 13-14
0 6 0 6mm
0,9 mm 0,9
Head ZCK E63 with body

ZCK J1p ZCK J2p ZCK J5p ZCK J6 ZCK J7 ZCK J8 ZCK J9
1,5 4(P) 1,5 1,5 2,9(P) 2,7 4,1(P) 2,9(P) 1,5 4(P)
21-22 11-12/21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 11-12
13-14 13-14/23-24 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 21-22
21-22 11-12/21-22 11-12
13-14 13-14/23-24 0 2,7 5,5mm 0 1,5 5,5mm 0 1,5 5,5mm 0 1,5 5,5mm 21-22
0 5,5mm 0 5,5mm 0 5,5mm
0,9 0,9 0,9

1,5 4(P) 1,5 2,9(P) 1,5 4(P) 1,5 2,9(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 33-34 33-34
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22
31-32 0 2,7 5,5mm 33-34 0 2,7 5,5mm
13-14 13-14
0 5,5mm 0 5,5mm
0,9 0,9
Heads ZCK E64, E65 with body

2,6(A) 6,4(P) 2,6(A) 2,6(A) 4,7(P) 3,7 5,8(P) 4,7(P) 2,6(A) 6,4(P)
21-22 11-12/21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 11-12
13-14 13-14/23-24 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 21-22
21-22 11-12/21-22 11-12
13-14 13-24/23-24 0 4,6 mm 0 2,6(A) mm 0 2,6(A) mm 0 2,6(A) mm 21-22
0 mm 0 mm 0 mm
1,5 1,5 1,5

2,6(A) 6,4(P) 2,6(A) 4,7(P) 2,6(A) 6,4(P) 2,6(A) 4,7(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 33-34 33-34
5
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 0 4,6 mm 21-22
31-32
13-14
33-34 0 4,6 mm
13-14
0 mm 0 mm
1,5 1,5

3,2(A) 8,1(P) 3,2(A) 3,2(A) 5,9(P) 5,3(A) 8(P) 5,9(P) 3,2 (A) 8,1(P)
21-22 11-12/21-22 21-22 21-22 11-12 11-12
13-14 13-14/23-24 13-14 21-22
21-22 13-14 13-14 21-22 23-24
11-12/21-22 11-12
13-14 13-14/23-24 0 5,3 mm 3,2(A) mm 3,2(A) mm 3,2(A) mm 21-22
0 mm 0 mm 0 mm
1,5 1,5 1,5

3,2 8,1(P) 3,2 5,9(P) 3,2(A) 8,1(P) 3,2(A) 5,9(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 33-34 33-34
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22
31-32 0 5,3 mm 33-34 0 5,3 mm
13-14 13-14
0 mm 0 mm
1,5 1,5

5(A) 11,5(P) 5(A) 5(A) 8,5(P) 8,(A) 11,5(P) 8,5(P) 5(A) 11,5(P)
21-22 11-12/21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 11-12
13-14/23-24 13-14 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 21-22
21-22 11-12/21-22
13-14 13-14/23-24 0 8 mm 0 5(A) mm 0 5(A) mm 0 5(A) mm 11-12
21-22
0 mm 0 mm 0 mm
2,2 2,2 2,2

5(A) 11,5(P) 5(A) 8,5(P) 5(A) 11,5(P) 5(A) 8,5(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 33-34 33-34
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22
31-32 0 8 mm 33-34 0 8 mm
13-14 13-14
0 mm 0 mm
2,2 2,2

21-22 11-12/21-22 21-22 21-22 11-12
13-14 13-14/23-24 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 11-12/21-22 11-12
13-14 13-14/23-24 0 0 0 0 21-22
0 0 0

21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 33-34 33-34
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22
31-32 0 33-34 0
13-14 13-14
0 0
ZCK J4p
Unactuated 1st step 2nd step
11
21
13
23
11
21
13
23
21
11
3,5
13
23
2
12
22
14
24
12
22
12
22
14
24
14
24
Contact operation G contact closed (A) = cam displacement

H contact open (P) = positive opening point
5/96
Operation, Limit switches 5
schemes 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Function diagrams (positive operation assured only if the associated sub-assemblies are )
21-22 11-12/21-22 21-22 21-22 11-12 13-14 11-12
13-14 13-14/23-24 13-14 13-14 21-22 23-24 21-22
21-22 11-12/21-22 11-12
13-14 13-14/23-24 0 21-22
0 0 0

21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 33-34 33-34
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22
31-32 0 0 33-34
13-14 13-14
0 0
ZCK J4p
Unactuated 1st step, actuated from left or right 2nd step, actuated from left or right
11
21
11
21
13
23
13
23
11
21
13
23
12
22
12
22
14
24
14
24
12
22
14
24
ZCK J1p ZCK J2p ZCK JD31 ZCK JD39
0 0 21-22 21-22
21-22 11-12/21-22
13-14 13-14/23-24 33-34 31-32
13-14 13-14
21-22 11-12/21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14/23-24 33-34 31-32
13-14 13-14
0 0 0 0
ZCK J404, J4104 (body with head)

Unactuated Actuated from left Actuated from right
11
21
11
21
11
21
13
23
13
23
13
23
12
22
12
22
12
22
14
24
14
24
14
24
Contact operation G contact closed
H contact open
(P) = positive opening point
5
Wiring schemes
Indicator light modules Module with resistor
1 LED, c 24 V 2 LEDs, c 24 V 2 neon lights, a 110/120 or 220/240 V
+ +
13
13
21
13
13
15 kΩ
1/4 W
14
14
22
14
14
X3
X2
X3
X3
X2
(1) (1) (2) (1) (2)

X1
X1
X1
– –
(1) Orange indicator

(2) Green indicator
ZCK JpD
2
3 1
1 - 2 = N/C
13
21
3 - 4 = N/O
5 = t
14
22
4 A / 24 V max.
5/97
Dimensions 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Bodies
ZCK J1, J2, J5, J4, Jp2p, Jp3p, J6, J7, J8, J9 ZCK J11, J21, J41, J11pp ZCK J1D, J5D, J6D, J7D, J8D
ZCK J1H29, J2H29, J5H29, J4H29, Jp2pH29, Jp3pH29, ZCK J11H29, J21H29, J41H29, J11ppH29
J6H29, J7H29, J8H29, J9H29 ZCK J11H7, J21H7, J41H7, J11ppH7
ZCK J1H7, J2H7, J5H7, J4H7, Jp2pH7, Jp3pH7, J6H7,
J7H7, J8H7, J9H7
6,5
5
6,5
6,5
5
5
83,5
60
76,5
60
76,5
60
(1)
12
33,5 = 30 = (1) = 30 =
44 40 36 42,5 33,5 = 30 =
44 40
Bodies with rotary head mounted

ZCK J404, ZCK J404H29, ZCK J404H7 ZCK J4104, ZCK J4104H29, ZCK J4104H7
10
M6 M6
10
22
22
102
109
60
60
(1)
5
33,5 = 30 =
(1) = 30 =
44 40
36 42,5
60
60
Plunger heads
17 17 52,3
10
37
20
49,5
63,6 63,6 17
10
5
5
10
41
20
20
ZCK E62, ZCK E67 ZCK E629 ZCK E21, E23
17 17 17
5 5 7 19
50
50
61
(1) 1 tapped entry for ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13 cable gland or tapped 1/2" NPT.
5/98
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Rotary head ZCK E05 with operating lever

ZCK Y11, Y13, Y14 ZCK Y41, Y43 ZCK Y51, Y52, Y53, Y59
62 57 59
57 52 J1 J
5 41 44
K1
40…85
K
41
62…107
5,5
63
J J1 K K1 Ø
max.
ZCK Y81 ZCK Y91 ZCK Y51 20 49 137 123 U3
ZCK Y52 20 49 137 125 Ø3
5 53 5 53 ZCK Y53 20 49 137 125 Ø3
ZCK Y59 26.2 48 212 200 Ø6
92
157
114
179
Rotary head ZCK E09 with operating lever

ZCK Y61 ZCK Y71 5
68 56 68 56
56 15 5 15
5
63
63
ZCK E06 ZCK E08
17 17
141
155
Note: operating lever spindle threaded M6.
5/99
References 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Adaptable sub-assemblies for low temperature applications (- 40 °C)
Body with contacts For plunger or rotary head

Type Contact block Scheme Positive Cable entry Reference Weight
operation kg
(1)
Fixed body
1 step 2-pole 1 N/C + 1 N/O Pg 13 ZCK J1 0.310
21
13
(XE2S P2151)
1/2" NPT ZCK J1H7 0.310
22
14
11
21
13
23
simultaneous ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK J2H29 0.310
snap action
1/2" NPT ZCK J2H7 0.310
12
22
14
24
ZCK J1 (XES P2021)
2-pole 1 N/C + 1 N/O Pg 13 ZCK J5 0.310
21
13
break before make ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK J5H29 0.310
slow break
1/2" NPT ZCK J5H7 0.310
22
14
(XE2N P2151)
2-pole 1 N/O + 1 N/C Pg 13 ZCK J6 0.310
21
13
make before break ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK J6H29 0.310
slow break
1/2" NPT ZCK J6H7 0.310
22
14
(XE2N P2161)
2-pole 1 N/C + 1 N/C Pg 13 ZCK J7 0.310
11
simultaneous 21 ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK J7H29 0.310

slow break
1/2" NPT ZCK J7H7 0.310
12
22
(XE2N P2141)
2-pole 1 N/O + 1 N/O – Pg 13 ZCK J8 0.310
13
23

slow break
1/2" NPT ZCK J8H7 0.310
14
24
ZCK J11 (XE2N P2131)

2-pole 1 N/C + 1 N/C Pg 13 ZCK J9 0.310
11
21

(XE2S P2141)
1/2" NPT ZCK J9H7 0.310
5
12
22

11
21
13
23
staggered ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK J4H29 0.310

snap action
1/2" NPT ZCK J4H7 0.310
12
22
14
24
(XES P2031)
Plug-in body
1 step Single-pole 1 C/O – Pg 13 ZCK J11 0.300
11
13

1/2" NPT ZCK J11H7 0.300
12
14

11
21
13
23

snap action
1/2" NPT ZCK J21H7 0.300
12
22
14
24

11
21
13
23
staggered ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK J41H29 0.300

snap action
1/2" NPT ZCK J41H7 0.300
12
22
14
24
Body with contacts With spring return rotary head (without operating lever)
operation kg
(1)
Fixed body
11
21
13
23
1 from the left and 1 from the staggered ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK J4046H29 0.455
right snap action
1/2" NPT ZCK J4046H7 0.455
12
22
14
24
Plug-in body
11
21
13
23
1 from the left and 1 from the staggered ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK J41046H29 0.465
right snap action
1/2" NPT ZCK J41046H7 0.465
12
22
14
24
ZCK J4046
(1) : operating head able to guarantee positive opening operation.
Setting-up: Dimensions:
pages 5/96 and 5/97 pages 5/98 and 5/99
5/100
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Plunger heads
Type of operator Compatible Max. Positive Reference Weight
bodies actuation operation
speed (1) kg
For actuation on end
End plunger ZCK Jp, 0.5 m/s ZCK E616 0.140
metal ZCK Jpp
ZCK E616 ZCK E636
Side plunger ZCK Jp, 0.5 m/s ZCK E636 0.200

metal ZCK Jpp,
except
ZCK J4 and
J41
For actuation by 30° cam
End roller plunger ZCK Jp, 1 m/s ZCK E626 0.155
ZCK E626 ZCK E676 steel ZCK Jpp
End reinforced roller plunger ZCK Jp, 1 m/s ZCK E676 0.155
steel ZCK Jpp
Side roller Horizontal ZCK Jp, 0.6 m/s ZCK E646 0.205
plunger ZCK Jpp,
ZCK E646 ZCK E656
steel except
ZCK J4 and
J41
Vertical ZCK Jp, 0.6 m/s ZCK E656 0.205
ZCK Jpp,
except
ZCK J4 and
J41
Roller lever Thermoplastic ZCK Jp, 1.5 m/s ZCK E216 0.185
plunger
(1 direction
ZCK Jpp 5
of actuation)
ZCK E216 ZCK E236
Steel ZCK Jp, 1.5 m/s ZCK E236 0.195
ZCK Jpp
Rotary heads (without operating lever)

Type Compatible Max. Positive Reference Weight
speed (1) kg
ZCK E056 ZCK E096 Spring return, ZCK Jp, 1.5 m/s by ZCK E056 0.165
actuation from left AND right or ZCK Jpp 30° cam
from left OR right
(see page 5/184)
Stay put, ZCK J1, J11 1.5 m/s – ZCK E096 0.190
actuation from left AND right ZCK J2, J21
(see page 5/184)
Type of operator Compatible Max. Positive Reference Weight
speed (1) kg
ZCK E066 ZCK E086 For actuation by any moving part
“Cat's whisker” ZCK Jp, 1 m/s – ZCK E066 0.115
ZCK Jpp, in any
except direction
ZCK J4 and
ZCK J41
Spring rod lever ZCK Jp, 0.5 m/s – ZCK E086 0.125
ZCK Jpp, in any
except direction
ZCK J4 and
ZCK J41
5/101
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Operating levers for rotary heads

Description Positive Reference Weight
operation kg
(1)
Roller lever Thermoplastic ZCK Y11 0.025
ZCK Y1p (2)
Steel ZCK Y13 0.035
Steel, ball bearing mounted ZCK Y14 0.030
Variable length Thermoplastic – ZCK Y41 0.030

roller lever (3)
Steel – ZCK Y43 0.040
For actuation by any moving part

ZCK Y4p Square rod (2) U 3 mm steel, L = 125 mm – ZCK Y51 0.025
Round rod (2) Ø 3 mm steel, L = 125 mm – ZCK Y53 0.025
Ø 3 mm glass fibre, L = 125 mm – ZCK Y52 0.020
Ø 6 mm thermoplastic, – ZCK Y59 0.030

L = 200 mm
Spring lever (3) – ZCK Y81 0.020
Spring metal rod – ZCK Y91 0.025

lever (3)
ZCKY51 ZCKY5p ZCK Y59 For actuation by specific cam (for operation with ZCK-E096 head)
Forked arm and 1 track – ZCK Y71 0.035
rollers (2)
thermoplastic 2 track – ZCK Y61 0.035
5
2- or double-pole contact blocks
Type Scheme For body Positive Reference Weight
type operation kg
(1)
1 N/C + 1 N/O ZCK J1 XE2S P2151 0.020
21
13
snap action
22
14
1 N/C + 1 N/O ZCK J5 XE2N P2151 0.020

21
13
ZCK Y81 ZCK Y91

break before make
slow break
22
14
2 C/O ZCK J2 – XES P2021 0.045

11
21
13
23
simultaneous
snap action
12
22
14
24
2 C/O ZCK J4 – XES P2031 0.045

11
21
13
23
ZCK Y71 ZCK Y61 staggered

snap action
12
22
14
24
1 N/O + 1 N/C ZCK J6 XE2N P2161 0.020

21
13
make before break

slow break
22
14
1 N/C + 1 N/C ZCK J7 XE2N P2141 0.020

11
21
simultaneous
XE2S P21p1 XE2N P21p1 XES P20p1 slow break
12
22
1 N/O + 1 N/O ZCK J8 – XE2N P2131 0.020

13
23
simultaneous
slow break
14
24
1 N/C + 1 N/C ZCK J9 XE2S P2141 0.020

11
21
snap action
12
22
(1) : operating lever able to guarantee positive opening operation or N/C contact with positive
opening operation.
(3) Adjustable throughout 360° in 5° steps.
5/102
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Adaptable sub-assemblies for high temperature applications (+ 120 °C)
Body with contacts For plunger or rotary head

operation kg
(1)
Fixed body
1 step 2-pole 1 N/C + 1 N/O Pg 13 ZCK J1 0.310
21
13
(XE2S P2151)
1/2" NPT ZCK J1H7 0.310
22
14
11
21
13
23
snap action
ZCK Jp 1/2" NPT ZCK J25H7 0.310
12
22
14
24
(XES P20215)
2-pole 1 N/C + 1 N/O Pg 13 ZCK J5 0.310
21
13
slow break
1/2" NPT ZCK J5H7 0.310
22
14
(XE2N P2151)
2-pole 1 N/O + 1 N/C Pg 13 ZCK J6 0.310
21
13
make before break ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK J6H29 0.310
slow break
1/2" NPT ZCK J6H7 0.310
22
14
(XE2N P2161)
2-pole 1 N/C + 1 N/C 11 Pg 13 ZCK J7 0.310
21
slow break
1/2" NPT ZCK J7H7 0.310
12
22
(XE2N P2141)
2-pole 1 N/O + 1 N/O – Pg 13 ZCK J8 0.310
13
23

slow break
ZCK Jp15 1/2" NPT ZCK J8H7 0.310
14
24
(XE2N P2131)
2-pole 1 N/C + 1 N/C Pg 13 ZCK J9 0.310
11
21

(XE2S P2141)
1/2" NPT ZCK J9H7 0.310
5
12
22

11
21
13
23

snap action
1/2" NPT ZCK J45H7 0.310
12
22
14
24
(XES P20315)
Plug-in body
1 step Single-pole 1 C/O – Pg 13 ZCK J115 0.300
11
13

1/2" NPT ZCK J115H7 0.300
12
14

11
21
13
23

snap action
1/2" NPT ZCK J215H7 0.300
12
22
14
24

11
21
13
23

snap action
1/2" NPT ZCK J415H7 0.300
12
22
14
24
Body with contacts With spring return rotary head (without operating lever)
operation kg
(1)
Fixed body
11
21
13
23
1 from the left AND break before make ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK J4045H29 0.455
1/2" NPT ZCK J4045H7 0.455
12
22
14
24
Plug-in body
11
21
13
23
1 from the left AND break before make ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK J41045H29 0.465
1/2" NPT ZCK J41045H7 0.465
12
22
14
24
ZCK J4045
5/103
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Plunger heads
Type of operator Compatible bodies Max. Positive Reference Weight
actuation operation
speed (1) kg
End plunger Metal ZCK J1, J2, J4, 0.5 m/s ZCK E615 0.140
ZCK J115, J215, J415,
ZCK E615 ZCK E635 ZCK J5, J6, J7, J8, J9
Side plunger Metal ZCK J1, J2, 0.5 m/s ZCK E635 0.200
ZCK J115, J215,
ZCK J5, J6, J7, J8, J9
End ball bearing plunger Steel ZCK J1, J2, J4, 0.1 m/s ZCK E665 0.150
ZCK J115, J215, J415,
ZCK J5, J6, J7, J8, J9
End roller plunger Steel ZCK J1, J2, J4, 1 m/s ZCK E625 0.155
ZCK E665 ZCK E625 ZCK J115, J215, J415,
ZCK J5, J6, J7, J8, J9
End reinforced roller plunger Steel ZCK J1, J2, J4, 1 m/s ZCK E675 0.155
ZCK J115, J215, J415,
ZCK J5, J6, J7, J8, J9
Side roller plunger Steel ZCK J1, J2, 0.6 m/s ZCK E645 0.205
Horizontal ZCK J115, J215,
ZCK J5, J6, J7, J8, J9
Steel ZCK J1, J2, 0.6 m/s ZCK E655 0.205
ZCK E675 ZCK E645 Vertical ZCK J115, J215,
ZCK J5, J6, J7, J8, J9
Roller lever plunger Steel ZCK J1, J2, J4, 1.5 m/s ZCK E235 0.195
(1 direction of actuation) ZCK J115, J215, J415,
ZCK J5, J6, J7, J8, J9
Thermoplastic ZCK J1, J2, J4, 1.5 m/s ZCK E215 0.185
ZCK J115, J215, J415,
ZCK J5, J6, J7, J8, J9
5 Rotary heads (without operating lever)
Type Compatible bodies Max. Positive Reference Weight
actuation operation
ZCK E655 ZCK E235 speed (1) kg
Spring return, ZCK J1, J2, J4, 1.5 m/s ZCK E055 0.165
actuation from left AND right or ZCK J115, J215, by 30° cam
from left OR right ZCK J415,
(see page 5/184) ZCK J5, J6, J7, J8, J9
Stay put, ZCK J1, J2, 0.5 m/s – ZCK E095 0.190
actuation from left AND right ZCK J115, J215
(see page 5/184 )
ZCK E055 ZCK E095
Type of operator Compatible bodies Max. Positive Reference Weight
actuation operation
speed (1) kg
“Cat's whisker” ZCK J1, J2, 1 m/s in any – ZCK E065 0.115
ZCK J115, J215, direction
ZCK J5, J6, J7, J8, J9
Spring rod lever ZCK J1, J2, 0.5 m/s in any – ZCK E085 0.125
ZCK J115, J215, direction
ZCK J5, J6, J7, J8, J9
ZCK E065 ZCK E085
5/104
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic

Description Positive Reference Weight
operation kg
(1)
Roller lever (2) Thermoplastic ZCK Y115 0.025
ZCK Y1p
Steel ZCK Y13 0.035
Steel, ball bearing mounted ZCK Y14 0.030
Variable length Thermoplastic – ZCK Y415 0.030

roller lever (3)
Steel – ZCK Y43 0.040
Square rod (2) U 3 mm Steel, L = 125 mm – ZCK Y51 0.025
ZCK Y43
Round rod (2) Ø 3 mm steel, L = 125 mm – ZCK Y53 0.025
Ø 3 mm glass fibre, L = 125 mm – ZCK Y52 0.020
For actuation by specific cam (for operation with ZCK-E095 head only)
Forked arm and 1 track – ZCK Y715 0.035
rollers (2)
thermoplastiic 2 track – ZCK Y615 0.035
2- or double-pole contact blocks

ZCK Y51 ZCK Y5p Type of operator Scheme For body Positive Reference Weight
type operation kg
(1)
1 N/C + 1 N/O ZCK J1 XE2S P2151 0.020
21
13
snap action
5
22
14
1 N/C + 1 N/O ZCK J5 XE2N P2151 0.020

21
13
break before make

slow break
22
14
2 C/O ZCK J25 – XES P20215 0.045

11
21
13
23
simultaneous
ZCK Y715 ZCK Y615 snap action
12
22
14
24
2 C/O staggered ZCK J45 – XES P20315 0.045

11
21
13
23
snap action
12
22
14
24
1 N/O + 1 N/C ZCK J6 XE2N P2161 0.020

21
13
make before break

slow break
22
14
1 N/C + 1 N/C ZCK J7 XE2N P2141 0.020

11
21
XE2S P21p1 XE2N P21p1 XES P20p15 simultaneous

slow break
12
22
1 N/O + 1 N/O ZCK J8 – XE2N P2131 0.020

13
23
simultaneous
slow break
14
24
1 N/C + 1 N/C ZCK J9 XE2S P2141 0.020

11
21
snap action
12
22
(1) : operating lever able to guarantee positive opening operation or N/C contact with positive
opening operation.
(2) Adjustable throughout 360° in 5° steps, or in 45° steps by reversing the lever mounting or
clamp.
(3) Adjustable throughout 360° in 5° steps.
5/105
Osiswitch® Classic
Double insulated, type XCK S
b XCK S v With head for linear movement (plunger) operators

with 1 cable entry
561656
561657
Page 5/108
v With head for rotary movement (lever) operators

561658
561659
561660
561661
Page 5/108
5 Machine assemblies IEC 60204-1, EN 60204-1
Approvals UL, CSA, CCC

Protective treatment Version Standard “TC” and “TH”

Electric shock protection Class II conforming to IEC 61140 and NF C 20-030

Degree of protection IP 65 conforming to IEC 60529 ; IK 03 conforming to EN 50102
Cable entry Depending on model Tapped entry for n° 13 cable gland, or tapped ISO M20 x 1.5
Materials Body and heads : plastic
5/106
(continued) 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Double insulated, type XCK S

Rated operational XE2p P a AC-15 ; A300 (Ue = 240 V, Ie = 3 A) ; Ithe = 10 A
characteristics c DC-13 ; Q300 (Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0,27 A), conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix A,
EN 60947-5-1
XE3p P a AC-15 ; B300 (Ue = 240 V, Ie = 1,5 A) ; Ithe = 6 A
c DC-13 ; R300 (Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0,1 A), conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix A,
EN 60947-5-1
Positive operation (Dpg. on model) N/C contacts with positive opening operation conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix K,
EN 60947-5-1
Cabling XE2S P21p1 Clamping capacity, min. : 1 x 0.34 mm2, max. : 2 x 1.5 mm2
(screw and captive cable XE2N P21p1 Clamping capacity, min. : 1 x 0.5 mm2, max. : 2 x 2.5 mm2
clamp terminals)
XES P3021 Clamping capacity, min. : 1 x 0.75 mm2 , max. : 2 x 1.5 mm2
XE3N P and XE3S P Clamping capacity, min. : 1 x 0.34 mm2 , max. : 1 x 1 mm2 or 2 x 0.75 mm2
Minimum actuation speed XE2S P21p1, XES P3021 and XE3S P : 0.01 m/minute
XE2N P21p1 and XE3N P : 6 m/minute
b Maximum operating rate : 3600 operating cycles per hour
b Load factor : 0.5
XE2S P21p1, XE2S P2141 XE2N P21p1 XES P3021
a.c. supply
a 50/60 Hz 5 5
5
5
o inductive circuit Ithe 4 Ithe 4 Ithe

3 3
230 V 12/24/48 V 12/24 V
2 2
110 V 230 V 48 V
1 1 1
110 V
0,5 24 V 0,5 0,5
230/400 V
48 V 0,2
110 V
0,1 0,1 0,1
0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10
Current in A Current in A Current in A
d.c. supply c Power broken in W for 5 million operating Power broken in W for 5 million operating Power broken in W for 5 million operating
cycles. cycles. cycles.
Voltage V 24 48 120 Voltage V 24 48 120 Voltage V 24 48 120
o W 10 7 4 o W 13 9 7 o W 10 7 4
For XE2S Pp151 on a ou c, “N/C” and “N/O” contacts simultaneously loaded to the values shown with reverse polarity.
XE3S Ppppp XE3N Ppppp
a.c. supply
a 50/60 Hz Ithe
Ithe
5 5
3
2
12/24/48 V
230 V
1
110 V
1
0,5 0,5
110 V
230/400 V 24 V 0,2
48 V
0,1 0,1
0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10
cycles. cycles.
o W 3 2 1 o W 4 3 2
5/107
characteristics 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Plastic, double insulated, type XCK S
Type of operator Metal end Steel roller Thermoplastic Elastomer roller Variable length Variable length Round thermoplastic
plunger plunger roller lever (4) lever, Ø 50 mm thermoplastic elastomer roller rod lever, Ø 6 mm
(4) roller lever (4) lever, Ø 50 mm (5) (6)
(4)
References (2) (3)
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK S101H29 XCK S102H29 XCK S131H29 XCK S139H29 XCK S141H29 XCK S149H29 XCK S159H29
13
21
snap action
(XE2S P2151) 1,8 4,5(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 23˚ 58˚(P) 23˚ 23˚ 23˚ 23˚
14
22
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22

13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 5,5 0 mm 0 80˚ 0 80˚ 0 80˚ 0 80˚ 0 80˚
0,9 mm 1,5 11˚ 11˚ 11˚ 11˚ 11˚
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK S501H29 XCK S502H29 XCK S531H29 XCK S539H29 XCK S541H29 XCK S549H29 XCK S559H29
13
21
break before
make, slow 1,8 3,2(P) 3,1(A) 5,6(P) 23˚ 42˚(P) 23˚ 23˚ 23˚ 23˚
14
22
break 21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
(XE2N P2151) 0 3 5,5 0 5,2 mm 0 33˚ 80˚ 0 33˚ 80˚ 0 33˚ 80˚ 0 33˚ 80˚ 0 33˚ 80˚
mm
2-pole N/C + N/C ZCK S9H29 + ZCK S9H29 + ZCK S9H29 + ZCK S9H29 + ZCK S9H29 + ZCK S9H29 + ZCK S9H29 +
11
21
snap action ZCK D01 ZCK D02 ZCK D31 ZCK D39 ZCK D41 ZCK D49 ZCK D59
(XE2S P2141)
12
22
1,8 4,5(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 23˚ 58˚(P) 23˚ 23˚ 23˚ 23˚
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
0 5,5 0 mm 0 80˚ 0 80˚ 0 80˚ 0 80˚ 0 80˚
0,9 mm 1,5 11˚ 11˚ 11˚ 11˚ 11˚
2-pole N/C + N/C ZCK S7H29 + ZCK S7H29 + ZCK S7H29 + ZCK S7H29 + ZCK S7H29 + ZCK S7H29 + ZCK S7H29 +
11
21
5 simultaneous,
slow break
ZCK D01 ZCK D02 ZCK D31 ZCK D39 ZCK D41 ZCK D49 ZCK D59
12
22
(XE2N P2141) 3,2(P) 5,6(P) 42˚(P)

11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
0 1,8 5,5 0 3,1(A) 0 23˚ 80˚ 0 23˚ 80˚ 0 23˚ 80˚ 0 23˚ 80˚ 0 23˚ 80˚
mm
3-pole ZCK SD39H29 + ZCK SD39H29 + ZCK SD39H29 + ZCK SD39H29 + ZCK SD39H29 + ZCK SD39H29 + ZCK SD39H29 +
13
31
21
N/C + N/C + N/O ZCK D01 ZCK D02 ZCK D31 ZCK D39 ZCK D41 ZCK D49 ZCK D59
snap action
14
32
22
(XE3S P2141) 1,8 4,5(P) 3,1(A) 7,8(P) 23˚ 58˚(P) 23˚ 23˚ 23˚ 23˚
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 5,5 0 mm 0 80˚ 0 80˚ 0 80˚ 0 80˚ 0 80˚
0,9 mm 1,5 11˚ 11˚ 11˚ 11˚ 11˚
3-pole ZCK SD37H29 + ZCK SD37H29 + ZCK SD37H29 + ZCK SD37H29 + ZCK SD37H29 + ZCK SD37H29 + ZCK SD37H29 +
13
31
21
N/C + N/C + N/O ZCK D01 ZCK D02 ZCK D31 ZCK D39 ZCK D41 ZCK D49 ZCK D59
break before
14
32
22
make, slow 1,8 3,2(P) 3,1(A) 5,6(P) 23˚ 42˚(P) 23˚ 23˚ 23˚ 23˚
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
break 21-22
31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
(XE3N P2141) 0 3 5,5 0 5,2 mm 0 33˚ 80˚ 0 33˚ 80˚ 0 33˚ 80˚ 0 33˚ 80˚ 0 33˚ 80˚
mm
Weight (kg) 0.095 0.105 0.145 0.150 0.155 0.155 0.150

Characteristics
Type of actuation
Maximum actuation speed 0.5 m/s 1.5 m/s 1 m/s

(in millions of operating
cycles)
Minimum For tripping 15 N 12 N 0.15 N.m
force or For positive 45 N 36 N 0.3 N.m – –
torque opening
(3) For an entry tapped for a Pg 13 cable gland, delete H29 from the end of the reference. Example: XCK S101H29 becomes XCK S101.
5/108
Dimensions 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
XCK Sp01H29 XCK Sp02H29 XCK Sp31H29

ZCK Sp + ZCK D01 ZCK Sp + ZCK D02 ZCK Sp + ZCK D31
55
16
6 39
4
16
41
49,5
63
36,5
129
116
103
60
60
60
(1) (1) (1)
29,5 = 30 = 29,5 = 30 = 29,5 = 30 =

36 40 36 40 60 40
XCK Sp39H29 XCK Sp41H29 XCK Sp49H29

ZCK Sp + ZCK D39 ZCK Sp + ZCK D41 ZCK Sp + ZCK D49
58
57 53 10
10 6 45
45...99,5
67...121,5
29,5...84
51,5...106
54,5
76,5
132,5...187,5
117...172
142,5
60
60
60
(1) (1) (1)
29,5 = 30 = 29,5 = 30 = 29,5 = 30 =

65 40 57 40 57 40
XCK Sp59H29
ZCK Sp + ZCK D59
48,5 24
(2)
(3)
(4)
98...280
60
(1)
29,5 = 30 =
57 40
(1) 1 tapped entry for ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13 cable gland.
(3) 190 max.
(4) 212 max.
5/109
Presentation 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic

steel, U 3 mm glass fibre, Ø 3 mm thermoplastic, Ø 6 mm
L = 125 mm (2) L = 125 mm (2) L = 200 mm (3)
Elastomer Variable length Variable length

roller lever, elastomer roller lever, thermoplastic
Ø 50 mm (2) Ø 50 mm (2) roller lever (2)
Thermoplastic Steel roller Steel ball bearing

5 roller lever (2)
ZCK D31
lever (2)
ZCK D33
mounted roller lever (2)
ZCK D34
Spring rod “Cat’s whisker” Spring lever with Spring-rod lever,

thermoplastic end (2) metal (2)
Metal end plunger Metal end plunger Steel roller plunger Steel roller plunger
with protective boot with protective boot

cable entry for Pg 13 cable entry for Pg 13
1 step (1) 1 step (1)
ZCK S1, S5, S6, S7, S9 ZCK SD31, SD35, SD37, SD39
ZCK S2, S8
(1) For further details, see page 5/112. For a cable entry tapped ISO M20 x 1.5, add H29 to the reference.
Example: ZCK S1 becomes ZCK S1H29.
5/110
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic

steel, U 3 mm glass fibre, Ø 3 mm thermoplastic, Ø 6 mm
L = 125 mm (3) L = 125 mm (3) L = 200 mm (3)

thermoplastic end (2) metal (2)
ZCK Y81 ZCK Y91
Variable Variable Variable length Elastomer

length length elastomer roller lever,
thermoplastic steel roller lever, Ø 50 mm (2)
roller lever (2) roller lever (2) Ø 50 mm (2)

5
Thermoplastic Steel Steel ball bearing

roller lever (2) roller lever (2) mounted roller lever (2)
For actuation from

left AND right
or
from left OR right
ZCK D05
Body with double-pole 2 C/O

staggered, snap action contact
cable entry for Pg 13
2 step, 1 from left and 1 from right (1)
ZCK S404
(1) For further details, see page 5/112. For a cable entry tapped ISO M20 x 1.5, add H29 to the reference.
Example: ZCK S1 becomes ZCK S1H29.
: N/C contact with positive opening operation or head assuring positive opening operation.
5/111
References 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic

block operation
(1) kg
1 step N/C + N/O Pg 13 ZCK S1 0.080
21
13
snap action
(XE2S P2151) ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK S1H29 0.080
22
14
2 C/O – Pg 13 ZCK S2 0.080
11
21
13
23
simultaneous,
snap action ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK S2H29 0.080
12
22
14
24
(XES P3021)
N/C + N/O Pg 13 ZCK S5 0.080
21
13
ZCK S p break before make,
slow break ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK S5H29 0.080
22
14
(XE2N P2151)
N/O + N/C Pg 13 ZCK S6 0.080
21
13
make before make,
22
14
(XE2N P2161)
N/C + N/C 11 Pg 13 ZCK S7 0.080
21
simultaneous,
12
22
(XE2N P2141)
N/O + N/O – Pg 13 ZCK S8 0.080
13
23
simultaneous,
14
24
(XE2N P2131)
N/C + N/C Pg 13 ZCK S9 0.080
11
21
snap action
(XE2S P2141) ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK S9H29 0.080
12
22
5
Bodies with double-pole contact and spring return rotary head
Without operating lever
block operation
(1) kg
2 step 2 C/O – Pg 13 ZCK S404 0.150
11
21
13
23
1 from left and staggered,

1 from right snap action ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK S404H29 0.150
12
22
14
24
Bodies with 3-pole contact and 1 cable entry

ZCK S404 Type With contact Scheme Positive Cable entry Reference Weight
block operation
(1) kg
– N/C + N/O + N/O Pg 13 ZCK SD31 0.080
33
13
31
snap action
(XE3S P2151) ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK SD31H29 0.080
34
14
32
N/C + N/C + N/O Pg 13 ZCK SD39 0.080

13
31
21
snap action
(XE3S P2141) ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK SD39H29 0.080
14
32
22
N/C + N/C + N/O Pg 13 ZCK SD37 0.080

13
31
21
break before make,

slow break ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK SD37H29 0.080
14
32
22
(XE3N P2141)
N/C + N/O + N/O Pg 13 ZCK SD35 0.080
33
13
21
break before make,

slow break ISO M20 x 1.5 ZCK SD35H29 0.080
34
14
22
(XE3N P2151)
(1) : N/C contact with positive opening operation or head assuring positive opening operation.
5/112
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Contact blocks
Type of contact Scheme For body Positive Reference Weight
operation (1) kg
2-pole contact
N/C + N/O ZCK S1 XE2S P2151 0.020
21
13
snap action
22
14
XE2S P21 p1 N/C + N/O ZCK S5 XE2N P2151 0.020
21
13
break before make,
slow break
22
14
2 C/O ZCK S2 – XES P3021 0.045
11
21
13
23
simultaneous,
snap action
12
22
14
24
XE2N P21p1 N/O + N/C ZCK S6 XE2N P2161 0.020
21
13
make before break,
slow break
22
14
N/C + N/C ZCK S7 XE2N P2141 0.020

11
21
simultaneous,
slow break
12
22
N/O + N/O ZCK S8 – XE2N P2131 0.020

13
23
simultaneous,
XES P3021
slow break
14
24
N/C + N/C ZCK S9 XE2S P2141 0.020

11
21
snap action
12
22
3-pole contact
5
N/C + N/O + N/O ZCK SD31 XE3S P2151 0.035
33
13
31
snap action
34
14
32
XE3p P21pp
N/C + N/C + N/O ZCK SD39 XE3S P2141 0.035
13
31
21
snap action
14
32
22
N/C + N/C + N/O ZCK SD37 XE3N P2141 0.035

13
31
21
break before make,

slow break
14
32
22
N/C + N/O + N/O ZCK SD35 XE3N P2151 0.035

33
13
21
break before make,

slow break
34
14
22
(1) : N/C contact with positive opening operation or sub-assembly assuring positive opening operation.
Other versions Gold flashed contacts.

5/113
Operation 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic

ZCK S1 ZCK S2 ZCK S5 ZCK S6 ZCK S7 ZCK S8 ZCK S9
1,8 4,5(P) 1,8 1,8 3,2(P) 3 4,4(P) 3,2(P) 13-14 1,8 4,5(P)
21-22 23-24
21-22 11-12/21-22 21-22 11-12 11-12
13-14 13-14/23-24 13-14 13-14 21-22 1,8 5,5mm 21-22
21-22 11-12/21-22 0 5,5mm 11-12
13-14 13-14/23-24
3 1,8 5,5mm 1,8 5,5mm 21-22
0 5,5mm 0 5,5mm 0 5,5mm
0,9 0,9 0,9
ZCK SD39 ZCK SD37 ZCK SD31 ZCK SD35

1,8 4,5(P) 1,8 3,2(P) 1,8 4,5(P) 1,8 3,2(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 33-34 33-34
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22
31-32 0 3 5,5mm 33-34 0 3 5,5mm
13-14 13-14
0 0,9 5,5mm 0 0,9 5,5mm

3,1(A) 7,8(P) 3,1(A) 3,1(A) 5,6(P) 5,2(A) 7,6(P) 5,6(P) 13-14 3,1(A) 7,8(P)
21-22 11-12/21-22 11-12 23-24
21-22 21-22 11-12
13-14 13-14/23-24 13-14 13-14 21-22 3,1(A) 5,5mm 21-22
21-22 11-12/21-22 11-12
13-14 13-14/23-24 0 5,2 mm 3,1 mm 3,1(A) mm 21-22
0 mm 0 mm 0 mm
1,5 1,5 1,5

3,1 7,8(P) 3,1 5,6(P) 3,1 7,8(P) 3,1 5,6(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 33-34 33-34
13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 13-14
31-32 0 5,2 mm 33-34 0 5,2 mm
13-14 13-14
0 5,5mm 0 mm
1,5 1,5
Heads ZCK D31, D33, D34 with body

13-14
21-22 11-12/21-22 21-22 21-22 23-24 11-12
13-14/23-24 11-12
13-14 13-14 13-14 21-22 21-22
21-22 11-12/21-22 11-12
13-14 13-14/23-24 0 21-22
0 0 0

23˚ 58˚(P) 23˚ 42˚(P) 23˚ 58˚(P) 23˚ 42˚(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 33-34 33-34
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22
0 33˚ 80˚ 0 33˚ 80˚
5
31-32 33-34
13-14 13-14
0 80˚ 0 80˚
11˚ 11˚
Heads ZCK D39, D41, D49, D54, D55, D59, D81, D91 with body
11-12 13-14
21-22 11-12/21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 23-24 11-12
13-14 13-14/23-24 13-14 13-14 21-22
21-22 11-12/21-22 11-12
13-14 13-14/23-24
0 21-22
0 0 0

23˚ 23˚ 23˚ 23˚
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 33-34 33-34
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22
31-32 0 33˚ 80˚ 33-34 0 33˚ 80˚
13-14 13-14
0 11˚ 80˚ 0 80˚
11˚
Heads ZCK D05 (positive operation only assured with a operating lever) with body
13-14
21-22 11-12/21-22 21-22 11-12 23-24 11-12
21-22
13-14 13-14/23-24 13-14 13-14 21-22 21-22
21-22 11-12/21-22 11-12
13-14 13-14/23-24 0 21-22
0 0 0

23˚ 58˚(P) 23˚ 42˚(P) 23˚ 58˚(P) 23˚ 42˚(P)
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 33-34 33-34
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22
21-22 0 33˚ 80˚ 33-34 0 33˚ 80˚
31-32 13-14
13-14 0 80˚
0 11˚ 80˚ 11˚

11-12 13-14
21-22 11-12/21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 23-24 11-12
13-14 13-14/23-24 13-14 13-14 21-22
21-22 11-12/21-22 11-12
13-14 13-14/23-24 0 21-22
0 0 0

30˚ 30˚ 30˚ 30˚
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 33-34 33-34
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22
31-32 0 40˚ 80˚ 33-34 0 40˚
13-14 13-14
0 80˚ 0
14˚ 14˚
ZCK S404 (body with head)

11
21
11
21
11
21
13
23
13
23
13
23
12
22
12
22
12
22
14
24
14
24
14
24
Contact operation G contact closed H contact open (A) = cam displacement (P) = positive opening point
5/114
Dimensions 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
Plunger heads
16 16
4 4
16 16
49,5
49,5
36,5
36,5
Rotary heads
ZCK D31, D33, D34 ZCK D39 ZCK D41 ZCK D49
55 57 53 57
6 39 10 6 45 10
29,5...84
41
51,5...106
54,5
45...99,5
63
67...121,5
76,5
60
65 58
65
ZCK D54, D55, D59 ZCK D81 ZCK D91
(4) (5) 5 53 5 53 5
(2)
(1)
(3)
113,5
179
57
ZCK (1) rod (2) (3) (4) (5)

D54 U 3, L = 125 115 max. 137 max. 49 24
D55 Ø 3, L = 125 115 max. 137 max. 49 24
D59 Ø 6, L = 200 190 max. 212 max. 46.5 26.2 Nota : operating lever spindle threaded M6.
Multi-directional heads Bodies with contacts

ZCK D06 ZCK D08 ZCK S1, S2, S5, S6, S7, S8, S9 ZCK S404, S404H29
ZCK S1H29, S2H29, S5H29,
S6H29, S7H29, S8H29, S9H29
ZCK SD3p, SD3pH29
6,5
16 M6
16
32
Ø
10
72,5
60
Ø
98,5
2xØ5,8
144
(1)
131
60
2xØ5,3
(1)
29,5 = 30 =
36 40
29,5 = 30 =
57 40
(1) 1 tapped entry for ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13 cable gland.

5/115
Presentation 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
For hoisting and mechanical handling applications,
types XCR and XCK MR
For conveyor belt shift monitoring, type XCR T
b XCR v With head for rotary movement operators, spring return to off position
1 contact actuation position per direction
562249
562248
562250
Page 5/118
v With head for rotary movement operators, stay put

1 contact actuation position per direction
500779_1
Page 5/118
b XCK MR v With head for rotary movement operators, stay put

5 4 contact actuation positions
1 contact per position: + 90°, + 180°, - 90° and - 180°
500781_1
562251
Page 5/124
b XCR T v With head for rotary movement operators, spring return to off position
2 contact actuation positions per direction
1 actuated at 10°, other contact actuated at 18°
562252
562253
Page 5/120
5/116
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
types XCR and XCK MR
For conveyor belt shift monitoring, type XCR T
Conforming to standards Products IEC/EN 60947-5-1, VDE 0660-200 (CSA C22-2 n° 14 for XCR), CCC (for XCR)
Machine assemblies IEC/EN 60204-1, NF C 79-130
Product certifications Standard version XCR A, B, E, F: CSA A300
Special version XCR A, B, E, F: CSA A300, 1/2" NPT
Storage - 40…+ 70 °C (+ 85 °C for XCK MR)
Vibration resistance XCR: 9 gn (10…500 Hz), XCK MR: 25 gn (10…500 Hz) conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
Shock resistance XCR A, B, E, F: 68 gn, XCR T: 30 gn (18 ms), XCK MR: 50 gn conforming to IEC 60068-2-27
Degree of protection XCR A, B, E, F: IP 54 conforming to IEC 60529 ; IP 545 conforming to NF C 20-010
XCR T: IP 65 conforming to IEC 60529 ; IP 655 conforming to NF C 20-010
XCK MR: IP 66 conforming to IEC 60529 ; IP 665 conforming to NF C 20-010
Enclosure XCR and XCK MR: metal, except XCR T315: polyester
Cable entry XCR: tapped entry for n° 13 (Pg 13.5) cable gland
XCK MR: 3 tapped entries for n° 13 (Pg 13.5) cable gland or tapped M20 x 1.5
Rated operational characteristics a AC-15 ; A300 (Ue = 240 V, Ie = 3 A)
c DC-13 ; XCR: Q300 (Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0.27 A), XCK MR: Q150 (Ue = 125 V, Ie = 0.55 A),
conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix A, EN 60947-5-1
Rated insulation voltage Ui = 500 V degree of pollution 3 conforming to IEC 60947-1 and VDE 0110, group C conforming
to NF C 20-040
Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp = 6 kV conforming to IEC 60947-1, IEC 60664
Positive operation (Depending on model) N/C contacts with positive opening operation to IEC 60947-5-1 Section 3, EN 60947-5-1
(contacts 21-22 of XCK MR)
Resistance across terminals ≤ 25 mΩ conforming to NF C 93-050 method A or IEC 60255-7 category 3
Cabling Screw clamp terminals XE2S P2151: Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 0.34 mm2, max: 2 x 1.5 mm2
XE2N P2151: Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 0.5 mm2, max: 2 x 2.5 mm2
XCR T contacts: Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 0.5 mm2, max: 2 x 2.5 mm2
5
XCK MR contacts: Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 0.34 mm2, max: 2 x 1.5 mm2 or 1 x 2.5 mm2
Minimum actuation speed XE2S P2151 and XCR T contacts: 0.01 m/minute,
XE2N P2151 and XCK MR contacts: 6 m/minute
b Maximum operating rate: 3600 operating cycles per hour
b Load factor: 0.5
a.c. supply XE2S P2151 XE2N P2151
a 50/60 Hz 5 5
inductive circuit Ithe 4 Ithe

3
230 V 12/24/48 V
2
1
110 V
1
110 V
0,5 24 V 0,5
230/400 V
48 V 0,2
0,1 0,1
0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10
XCR T contacts
5
4 Ithe
3
12/24 V
2
230 V 48 V
1
0,5
110 V
0,1
0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10
Current in A
d.c. supply c Voltage V 24 48 120
Power broken in W for XE2S P2151 10 7 4
5 million operating cycles XE2N P2151 13 9 7
W
XCR T contacts 10 7 4
For XE2S P2151 on a or c N/C and N/O contacts simultaneously loaded to the values shown
with reverse polarity.
5/117
characteristics 5
Osiswitch® Classic
For hoisting and materials handling applications,
type XCR
Type of head Rotary with spring return to off position Stay put
Maximum displacement 55° in each direction 90° in each direction
Type of operator Metal rod, U 6 mm Thermoplastic roller Large thermoplastic Metal rods, U 6 mm
lever roller lever crossed or “T” (1)
(1) Crossed rods for XCR Ep8, “T” rods for XCR Fp7.
References of complete switches ( N/C contact with positive opening operation)
Two 2-pole 1 N/C + 1 N/O Both contacts operate in each XCR A11 XCR A12 XCR A15 XCR E18
snap action direction
XE2S P2151
30 (P) 0 30 (P) 30 (P) 0 30 (P) 30 (P) 0 30 (P) 75 (P) 0 75 (P)
55 16 16 55 55 16 16 55 55 16 16 55 90 65 65 90
21
21
12
13
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22

13-14
21-22 (1) 13-14
21-22 (1) 13-14
21-22 (1) 13-14
21-22
(1)
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22 (2)
21-22
13-14
21-22 (2)
21-22
13-14
21-22 (2)
21-22
13-14
21-22
(2)
22
22
14
14
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14

5 5 5 5 5 5 25 25
15 (P)
1st contact 2nd contact
1 contact operates in each XCR B11 XCR B12 XCR B15 XCR F17
direction
34 (P) 0 34 (P) 34 (P) 0 34 (P) 34 (P) 0 34 (P) 75 (P) 0 75 (P)
55 20 20 55 55 20 20 55 55 20 20 55 90 65 65 90
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14
21-22 (1) 13-14
21-22 (1) 13-14
21-22 (1) 13-14
21-22
(1)
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14
21-22
(2) 13-14
21-22
(2) 13-14
21-22
(2) 13-14
21-22
(2)
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
5 5 5 5 5 5 35 35
Two 2-pole 1 N/C + 1 N/O Both contacts operate in each XCR A51 XCR A52 XCR A55 XCR E58
5 break before make, slow break direction
XE2N P2151 0 0 0 0
(1) (1) (1)
21
13
21
12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22

13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 (1)
21-22
13-14 (2) 21-22
13-14 (2) 21-22
13-14 (2) 13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22 (2)
22
14
22
14
13-14
1st contact 2nd contact

1 contact operates in each XCR B51 XCR B52 XCR B55 XCR F57
direction
0 0 0 0
21-22 (1) 21-22 (1) 21-22 (1) 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14
13-14
21-22
13-14
(1)
21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 (2) 13-14 (2) 13-14 (2) 21-22
13-14
21-22
(2)
13-14
Weight (kg) 1.110 1.145 1.155 1.135

Contact operation contact closed (P) = positive opening point
contact open (1) 1st contact
(2) 2nd contact
Complementary characteristics not shown under general characteristics (page 5/107)

Maximum actuation speed 1.5 m/s
Minimum torque For tripping 0.45 N.m 0.60 N.m

For positive opening 0.75 N.m 0.70 N.m
Cable entry 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland conforming to NF C 68-300 (DIN Pg 13.5)
Dimensions:
page 5/122
5/118
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
type XCR
Separate components
Description For Type Reference Weight
switches kg
Rod, U 6 mm XCR A L = 200 mm XCR Z03 0.020
XCR B
L = 300 mm XCR Z04 0.030
Roller lever XCR A – XCR Z02 0.050

XCR Z02 XCR Z05 thermoplastic roller XCR B
Large roller lever XCR A – XCR Z05 0.090

thermoplastic roller XCR B
Quick fixing/release XCR A, XCR B – XCR Z09 0.520

bracket XCR E, XCR F
Contact block XCR A, XCR B 2-pole 1 N/C + 1 N/O XCR Z12 0.135
(2 contacts) with XCR E, XCR F snap action
mounting plate
2-pole 1 N/C + 1 N/O XCR Z15 0.135

XCR Z09 XCR Z1p break before make,
slow break
Description Application Sold in Unit Weight

lots of reference kg
Adaptor Pg 13.5 to 5 DE9 RA13520 0.050
ISO M20 x 1.5 5
Dimensions:
page 5/122
5/119
characteristics 5
Osiswitch® Classic
For conveyor belt shift monitoring applications,
type XCR T
Type of switch Standard For corrosive atmospheres
Features Zinc alloy enclosure Zinc alloy enclosure Glass reinforced polyester
Colour: industrial blue Colour: blue enclosure
Zinc plated steel lever, Stainless steel lever, Colour: grey
spring return to off position spring return to off position Stainless steel lever,
Cam angles: 10° and 18° Cam angles: 10° and 18° spring return to off position
Maximum displacement: 90° Maximum displacement: 90° Cam angles: 10° and 18°
Maximum displacement: 70°
References of complete switches
2 single-pole C/O snap action XCR T115 XCR T215 XCR T315
11
13
0 0 0
90 10 10 90 90 10 10 90 70 10 10 70
12
14
11-12 11-12 11-12

13-14 13-14 13-14
11-12 11-12 11-12
13-14 13-14 13-14
1st contact
4 4 4 4 4 4
11
13
0 0 0
90 18 18 90 90 18 18 90 70 18 18 70
11-12 11-12 11-12
13-14 13-14 13-14
12
14
11-12 11-12 11-12

13-14 13-14 13-14
4 4 4 4 4 4
2nd contact
5 Weight (kg) 1.170 1.170 1.520

Contact operation contact closed
contact open
Mechanical durability 0.3 million operating cycles
Minimum tripping torque 1 N.m
Cable entry 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland conforming to NF C 68-300 (DIN Pg 13.5)
Switch operation
Normal position Fault signalling Stopping of the conveyor belt Maximum rotation
Dimensions:
page 5/123
5/120
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
type XCR T
Separate components
Description Type For Reference Weight
switches kg
Roller with lever Zinc plated steel XCR T115 XCR Z901 0.230
XCR T215
Stainless steel XCR T115 XCR Z902 0.230

XCR T215
XCR T315 XCR Z903 0.230

XCR Z9pp
Quick fixing/release – XCR T115 XCR Z09 0.520

bracket XCR T215
Contact block (2 contacts) Single-pole C/O XCR Tp15 XCR Z42 0.135
with mounting plate snap action
Description Application Sold in Unit Weight

XCR Z09 lots of reference kg
Adaptor Pg 13.5 to 5 DE9 RA13520 0.050
ISO M20 x 1.5
XCR Z42
5
Dimensions:
page 5/123
5/121
Dimensions 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
type XCR
XCR A11, B11, A51, B51 XCR A12, B12, A52, B52
72…60
66 9
6 (2)
(3)
=
=
18
18
85
95
85
95
= 32 = (1) = 32 = (1)
=
=
53 = 75 = 53 = 75 =
75 85 4 75 85
XCR A15, B15, A55, B55 XCR E18, E58, F17, F57
68
9 66
6 (2)
102
5
78
=
=
18
18
(4)
85
95
85
95
= 32 = (1) = 32 = (1)
=
53 = 75 = 53 = 75 =
75 85 75 85
(1) 1 tapped entry for n° 13 cable gland.

(2) Rod length: 200 mm.
(3) Rod + roller length: 160 mm.
(4) Rod length: 300 mm for XCR F17 and F57, 200 mm for XCR E18 and E58.
Supplementary fixing using 2 adjustable lugs (included with switch) Quick fixing/release bracket XCR Z09
Horizontally positioned Vertically positioned
127 36 95
10
53 = 107 = = = 11
=
= =
11
5
=
140
85
117
137
100
95
=
10
5
50 50
Ø: 1 elongated hole Ø 6 x 8.
Characteristics: References: Operation:

5/122
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch® Classic
type XCR T
XCR T115, T215

66
(2)
80
(2)
(1)
=
18
85
95
= 32 = (3)
=
53 = 75 =
75 85
XCR T315
107
80
(4) (4)
5
188
=
54
146
105
=
83 (5) = 70 =
87 85
(1) 200 max., 83 min. (4) 70° max.

(2) 90° max. (5) 1 plain entry for n° 13 cable gland.
(3) 1 tapped entry for n° 13 cable gland.
Supplementary fixing using 2 adjustable lugs (included with XCR T115 and T215) Quick fixing/release bracket XCR Z09
Horizontally positioned Vertically positioned
127 36 95
10
53 = 107 = = = 11
=
= =
11
5
=
140
85
117
100
137
95
=
10
5
50 50
=
Ø: 1 elongated hole Ø 6 x 8.
Characteristics: References: Operation:

5/123
characteristics, Osiswitch® Classic

setting-up 5
type XCK MR
Type of operating head Angular
Type of operator With cruciform metal rods With cruciform metal rods, reversed head
References for complete switches ( N/C contact with positive opening operation on contacts 21-22)
Devices with 3 tapped cable entries ISO M20 x 1.5
2 x 2-pole N/C + N/C XCK MR54D1H29 XCK MR54D2H29
break before make contacts
11
21
11
21
(non interchangeable contacts)

12
22
12
22
A B
Devices with 3 cable entries for 13 mm cable gland

2 x 2-pole N/C + N/C XCK MR54D1 XCK MR54D2
break before make contacts
11
21
11
21
(non interchangeable contacts)

12
22
12
22
A B
Weight (kg) 0.550 0.550

Switch actuation Lateral
5 Maximum actuation speed

Mechanical durability
1.5 m/s
Minimum torque For tripping 0.5 N.m

For positive opening 0.75 N.m
Accuracy ± 0.3 mm
Cable entry 3 tapped entries ISO M20 x 1.5, clamping capacity 7 to 13 mm
3 tapped entries for 13 mm cable gland conforming to NF C 68-300 (DIN Pg 13.5), clamping
capacity 9 to 12 mm
Setting-up
Stop Stop
Slowing down Slowing down
A2 B1 0 A1 A2
B2 B2
B1
B2
A2
A1
B1
A1
A2
B2
B1
A1
0
0
B2
0 A1 A2 B1 0
180 90 0 90 180
A 11-12
21-22
11-12
B 21-22
Direction of rotation Direction of rotation Reference mark on head (1) Direction of rotation Direction of rotation
A2 B2 B1 0 A1 A2 B2
B2 A2
A1 B1 0 B1 A1 0 A1 B1
A2 B2
0 A1 B2 A2 B1 0
21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22
11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12
Contact A Contact B Contact A Contact B Contact A Contact B Contact A Contact B Contact A Contact B
(1) Triangle symbol marked on top of operating head
5/124
References (continued), Limit switches 5
dimensions 5
Osiswitch® Classic
type XCK MR
References for separate parts

kg
Rod U 6 mm, L = 200 mm XCR Z03 0.020
XCR Z03
Dimensions
XCK MR54D1H29 XCK MR54D2H29
XCK MR54D1 XCK MR54D2
6
200
31,5
6,5
118
11,5
6,2
5,5
(1) 81
(2)
26°30’ 5
(1)
(1) 5 55 = 61,5 =
15 59 77
35,6 200
47
51
(1) XCK MR54DpH29 = 3 tapped entries ISO M20 x 1.5.

XCK MR54Dp = 3 tapped entries for n°13 cable gland.
(2) 2 centring holes Ø 3.9 ± 0.2, for cover fixing screws alignment.
Ø : 2 elongated holes 6.2 x 6.5, inclined at 26°30' for M5 screws.
5/125
Presentation 5
Limit switches 5
For materials handling applications,

type XC1 AC
b XC1 AC v With head for linear movement (plunger)

with slow break contacts
500769_1
500770_1
500768_1
Page 5/128
500772_1
500771_1
Page 5/128
5/126
Limit switches 5

type XC1 AC
Conformity to standards IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC 60337-1, VDE 0660-200, CSA C22-2 n° 14
Product certifications Special version CSA 600 V (ac) HD
Protective treatment Version Standard “TC”, special “TH”
Operating position All positions
Vibration resistance 9 gn (10…500 Hz) conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
Degree of protection IP 65 conforming to IEC 60529 and NF C 20-010
Cable entry 3 tapped entries for n° 13 cable gland
Conventional thermal current 10 A
Rated insulation voltage Slow break contact blocks a 500 V and c 600 V conforming to IEC 60947-5-1, NF C 20-040
a and c 600 V conforming to CSA C22-2 n° 14
Resistance across terminals ≤ 8 mΩ
Minimum tripping force XC1 AC1p1: 33 N, XC1 AC1p6: 23 N, XC1 AC1p7: 29 N
Terminal referencing Conforming to CENELEC EN 50013
b Load factor: 0.5
Slow break contact blocks
a.c. supply Power broken in VA
a 50/60 Hz
inductive circuit Voltage V 48 110 230
For 1 million operating cycles 450 900 1900
For 3 million operating cycles 170 350 430 5
d.c. supply c Power broken in W
inductive circuit
Voltage V 48 110 230
5/127
characteristics 5
type XC1 AC
Complete switches with slow break contacts
Type of head Plunger
Type of operator End plunger End ball bearing Roller lever Offset roller lever Reinforced roller Roller lever on
plunger lever needle roller
bearing
References of complete switches
Single pole C/O XC1 AC111 XC1 AC115 XC1 AC116 XC1 AC118 XC1 AC117 XC1 AC119
slow break ZC1 AZ11
11
13
2,1 9 2,1 9 2,3 12 2,3 12 1,6 11,5 1,6 11,5

11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
5,6 mm 5,6 mm 7,3 mm 7,3 mm 6,2 mm 6,2 mm
12
14
2-pole N/C + N/O XC1 AC121 XC1 AC125 XC1 AC126 XC1 AC128 XC1 AC127 XC1 AC129
break before make, slow break ZC1 AZ12
11
13
6 7,5 6 7,5 7 11,5 7 11,5 5,2 11,5 5,2 11,5

11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
6,8 mm 6,8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 6,8 mm 6,8 mm
12
14
2-pole N/O + N/C XC1 AC131 XC1 AC135 XC1 AC136 XC1 AC138 XC1 AC137 XC1 AC139
make before break, slow break ZC1 AZ13
11
13
3,5 8 3,5 8 4,5 10,5 4,5 10,5 4,4 11,5 4,4 11,5
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
4,8 mm 4,8 mm 7 mm 7 mm 6,5 mm 6,5 mm
12
14
2-pole N/C + N/C XC1 AC141 XC1 AC145 XC1 AC146 XC1 AC148 XC1 AC147 XC1 AC149
simultaneous, slow break ZC1 AZ14
5
11
21
4,3 9,3 4,3 9,3 5,5 12 5,5 12 5 12,5 5 12,5

11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
mm mm mm mm mm mm
12
22
2-pole N/O + N/O XC1 AC151 XC1 AC155 XC1 AC156 XC1 AC158 XC1 AC157 XC1 AC159
simultaneous, slow break ZC1 AZ15
13
23
5,6 9 5,6 9 7,2 11,5 7,2 11,5 7 11,5 7 11,5

13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
23-24 23-24 23-24 23-24 23-24 23-24
mm mm mm mm mm mm
14
24
2-pole N/C + N/C XC1 AC161 XC1 AC165 XC1 AC166 XC1 AC168 XC1 AC167 XC1 AC169
staggered, slow break ZC1 AZ16
11
21
3,7 9 3,7 9 4,5 12 4,5 12 4 12 4 12

11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
4,9 mm 4,9 mm 6,2 mm 6,2 mm 5,5 mm 5,5 mm
12
22
2-pole N/O + N/O XC1 AC171 XC1 AC175 XC1 AC176 XC1 AC178 XC1 AC177 XC1 AC179
staggered, slow break ZC1 AZ17
13
23
4,8 8,5 4,8 8,5 5,8 12 5,8 12 6 12 6 12

13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
23-24 23-24 23-24 23-24 23-24 23-24
6 mm 6 mm 7,6 mm 7,6 mm 7,5 mm 7,5 mm
14
24
Weight (kg) 0.530 0.530 0.595 0.595 0.870 0.870

Contact operation contact closed
contact open
Type of actuation
A B
Maximum actuation speed 0.5 m/s 1 m/s (direction A), 0.5 m/s (direction B) (1)
Cable entry 3 tapped entries for n° 13 (DIN Pg 13.5) cable gland, clamping capacity 9 to 12 mm
(2 entries fitted with blanking plug)
Connection Screw terminals. Clamping capacity: min 1 x 0.5 mm 2, max 1 x 2.5 mm 2
(1) For a 45° cam the maximum actuation speed becomes 0.5 m/s and for a 15° cam, 1 m/s.
5/128
Dimensions 5
Limit switches 5

type XC1 AC
Complete switches with slow break contacts
XC1 AC1p1 XC1 AC1p5 XC1 AC1p6
53
20 26 37
20 53 5
53
56
47
30
139
130
113
12 12 12
83
83
83
(1) = 67 = (1) = 67 = (1) = 67 =
44 77 44 77 44 77
XC1 AC1p8 XC1 AC1p7, XC1 AC1p9
110
53 20 30 53
3 37 14 45,5
5 Ø28
73,5
56
5
156,5
139
12 12
83
83
(1) = 67 = (1) = 67 =
44 77 44 77
(1) 3 tapped entries for n° 13 cable gland or ISO 20 with adaptor DE9 RA13520
Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 6.5 x 10.
5/129
References 5
Limit switches 5

type XC1 AC
Replacement parts
Plunger heads
Type of operator Maximum Type of actuation Reference Weight
actuation
speed kg
End plunger 0.5 m/s ZC1 AC001 0.035
ZC1 AC001

End ball bearing plunger 0.5 m/s ZC1 AC005 0.050
Roller lever 1 m/s ZC1 AC006 0.100

ZC1 AC005 (direction A)
A B
0.5 m/s
(direction B)
Reinforced roller lever 1 m/s ZC1 AC007 0.375

(direction A)
A B
0.5 m/s
(direction B)
Offset roller lever 1 m/s ZC1 AC008 0.100

(direction A)
A B
0.5 m/s
(direction B)
ZC1 AC006
Roller lever on needle 1 m/s ZC1 AC009 3.380
roller bearing (direction A)
A B
0.5 m/s
5 (direction B)
Contact blocks
Type of contact Scheme Reference Weight
kg
C/O, single pole ZC1 AZ11 0.040
11
13
12
14
N/C + N/O break before make ZC1 AZ12 0.045

11
13
ZC1 AC007
12
14
ZC1 AC009
N/O + N/C make before break ZC1 AZ13 0.040
11
13
12
14
N/C + N/C simultaneous ZC1 AZ14 0.045

11
21
12
22
N/O + N/O simultaneous ZC1 AZ15 0.045

13
23
14
24
ZC1 AC008 N/C + N/C staggered ZC1 AZ16 0.040

11
21
12
22
N/O + N/O staggered ZC1 AZ17 0.040

13
23
14
24
Adaptation plate
kg
Mounting plate ZC1 AZ8 3.380
(For replacing an old version type RN-67522 limit switch by an
ZC1 AZ1p XC1-AC limit switch)
5/130
Dimensions 5
Limit switches 5

type XC1 AC
Replacement parts
Dimensions
ZC1 AC001 ZC1 AC005 ZC1-AC006
53
26 37
20
5
20 53
53
56
47
30
ZC1 AC008 ZC1 AC007, AC009
110
53 20 30 53
3 37 16 45,5
5 Ø28
73,5
56
5/131
Presentation 5
Limit switches 5
For very severe applications, type XC2 J
b XC2 J v With head for linear movement (plunger)

with 1 cable entry
500762_1
500763_1
500764_1
Page 5/134
v With head for rotary movement (lever)
500766_1
500767_1
500765_1
Page 5/134
5/132
Limit switches 5
Conformity to standards Products IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC 60337-1, VDE 0660-200, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14
Machine assemblies IEC/EN 60204-1, NF C 79-130
Product certifications Standard version DEMKO, NEMKO, CSA 300 V c HD, a 60 W
Special version UL 250 V a HD Listed, CSA 300 V a HD, 60 W with 1/2" NPT tapped cable entry
Ambient air temperature For operation - 25…+ 70 °C. Special adaptable sub-assemblies: - 40 °C or + 120 °C
Degree of protection IP 65 conforming to IEC 60529, IP 657 conforming to NF C 20-010
Cable entry 1 entry incorporating cable gland. Clamping capacity: 6…13.5 mm
Rated operational characteristics a AC-15; A300 (Ue = 240 V, Ie = 3 A)
c DC-13; Q300 (Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0.27 A), conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix A,
EN 60947-5-1
Rated insulation voltage 500 V conforming to IEC 60947-5-1, group C conforming to NF C 20-040, 300 V conforming to
CSA C22-2 n° 14
Resistance across terminals ≤ 25 mΩ conforming to NF C 93-050 method A or IEC 60255-7 category 3
Connection Screw clamp terminals XCK Z01: clamping capacity, min: 1 x 0.5 mm2, max: 2 x 2.5 mm2
XES P10p1: clamping capacity, min: 1 x 0.75 mm2, max: 2 x 1.5 mm2
Minimum actuation speed 1 m/minute
b Load factor: 0.5
XCK Z01, XES P1021, XES P1031
a.c. supply
a 50/60 Hz 5
5
inductive circuit 4 Ithe

3
12/24 V
2
230 V 48 V
1
0,5
110 V
0,1
0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10
Current in A
d.c. supply c Voltage V 24 48 120
Power broken in W for 5 million operating cycles 10 7 4
W
5/133
characteristics 5
Complete switches, fixed body,
1 cable entry incorporating cable gland
Type of head Plunger Rotary
Type of operator Metal end Steel roller Metal side Thermoplastic Variable length Steel rod lever
plunger plunger plunger roller lever (1) thermoplastic U 3 mm (1)
roller lever (1)
(1) Adjustable throughout 360°.
References
Single pole C/O Actuation from left AND right
snap action XCK Z01 ZC2 JC1 + ZC2 JC1 + ZC2 JC1 + ZC2 JC1 + ZC2 JC1 + ZC2 JC1 +
ZC2 JE61 ZC2 JE62 ZC2 JE63 ZC2 JE01 + ZC2 JE01 + ZC2 JE01 +
ZC2 JY11 ZC2 JY31 ZC2 JY51
11
13
12
14
1,4 2,4 (A) 2,3

11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 5mm 0 mm 0 5mm 0 0 0
0,5 0,9 0,5
Actuation from left OR right

ZC2 JC1 + ZC2 JC1 + ZC2 JC1 +
ZC2 JE05 + ZC2 JE05 + ZC2 JE05 +
ZC2 JY11 ZC2 JY31 ZC2 JY51
5
11-12 11-12 11-12
13-14 13-14 13-14
11-12 11-12 11-12
13-14 13-14 13-14
0 0 0
Weight (kg) 0.555 0.560 0.600 0.605 0.620 0.605

contact open
Switch actuation On end By 30° cam On end By 30° cam By any moving
part
Type of actuation

Minimum tripping force or torque 18 N 26 NWith head ZC2 JE01: 0.30 N.m
With head ZC2 JE05: 0.20 N.m
Cable entry 1 tapped entry incorporating metal cable gland. Clamping capacity 6 to 13.5 mm
Other versions Switches with gold flashed contacts. Special protective treatments.
5/134
Dimensions 5
Limit switches 5
Complete switches, fixed body,
1 cable entry incorporating cable gland
ZC2 JC1 + ZC2 JE61 ZC2 JC1 + ZC2 JE62 ZC2 JC1 + ZC2 JE63
19,5
4
19,5
19,5 19
59
47
38
21
133
121
(1) (1) (1)
112
60
60
60
24 = 29 = 24 = 29 = 24 = 29 =
41 40 41 40 41 40
ZC2 JC1 + ZC2 JE0p + ZC2 JY11 ZC2 JC1 + ZC2 JE0p + ZC2 JY31 ZC2 JC1 + ZC2 JE0p + ZC2 JY51
39…71
5 54…66
41…39
5
46...86
69...109
(3)
44
(4)
143...183
67
(2)
141
(1) (1) 60 (1)
60
60
24 = 29 = 24 = 29 = 24 = 29 =
5
65 40 65 40 65 40
(1) Fixing from the rear: by 2 M5 screws.

Depth of thread on switch: 10 mm.
(2) 222 max.
(3) 125 max.
(4) 148 max.
Ø: Fixing from the front via 2 holes Ø 5.5.
Cable gland incorporated (all XC2 JC models).
5/135
Presentation 5
Limit switches 5
ZC2 JE85
ZC2 JY71
ZC2 JY61
ZC2 JE09
ZC2 JE84
ZC2 JE65
ZC2 JY91
ZC2 JY81 ZC2 JE83
ZC2 JE64
ZC2 JE01,JE02, ZC2 JY51

JE03,JE05 ZC2 JE82
5 ZC2 JE63
ZC2 JY31
ZC2 JY12 ZC2 JE81

ZC2 JE70
ZC2 JY13
ZC2 JE62
ZC2 JY11
ZC2 JE04,JE06,
JE07
ZC2 JE66
ZC2 JE6 1
ZC2 JD4
ZC2 JC4, JC48
ZC2 JD1, JD2
ZC2 JC1, JC2, JC18, JC28
Plunger head
Rotary head
Multi-directional head
5/136
References 5
Limit switches 5
Bodies with contacts for plunger or rotary head

Type With contact block Scheme Reference Weight
kg
Fixed bodies
1 step Single-pole 1 C/O ZC2 JC1 0.355
11
13
snap action
(XCK Z01)
12
14
ZC2 JCp Double-pole 2 C/O ZC2 JC2 0.355
11
21
13
23
simultaneous
snap action
12
22
14
24
(XES P1021)
2 step Double-pole 2 C/O ZC2 JC4 0.355
11
21
13
23
staggered
snap action
12
22
14
24
(XES P1031)
Plug-in bodies
1 step Single-pole 1 C/O ZC2 JD1 0.380
11
13
snap action
12
14
Double-pole 2 C/O ZC2 JD2 0.380
11
21
13
23
simultaneous
snap action
12
22
14
24
ZC2 JDp
2 step Double-pole 2 C/O ZC2 JD4 0.380
11
21
13
23
staggered
snap action
12
22
14
24
5
Bodies incorporating gold flashed contacts, for plunger or rotary head
kg
Fixed bodies
11
13
snap action
(XCK Z018)
12
14
Double-pole 2 C/O ZC2 JC28 0.360

11
21
13
23
simultaneous
snap action
12
22
14
24
(XES P1028)
ZC2 JCp8
11
21
13
23
staggered
snap action
12
22
14
24
(XES P1038)
Operation: Dimensions:
page 5/142 pages 5/142 and 5/143
5/137
Limit switches 5
Plunger heads
Type of operator Compatible Maximum actuation Reference Weight
bodies speed kg
ZC2 JE p1 End plunger ZC2 Jp1 0.5 m/s ZC2 JE61 0.195
metal ZC2 Jp2
ZC2 Jp4 0.5 m/s ZC2 JE81 0.195
Side plunger ZC2 Jp1 0.5 m/s ZC2 JE63 0.240

ZC2 JE p3
metal ZC2 Jp2
ZC2 Jp4 0.5 m/s ZC2 JE83 0.240

End ball bearing plunger ZC2 Jp1 0.1 m/s ZC2 JE66 0.205
ZC2 JE66 ZC2 Jp2
End roller plunger ZC2 Jp1 1 m/s ZC2 JE62 0.200

steel ZC2 Jp2
ZC2 Jp4 1 m/s ZC2 JE82 0.200
5 ZC2 JE p2
Side plunger with ZC2 Jp1 0.6 m/s ZC2 JE64 0.245
horizontal roller ZC2 Jp2
steel
ZC2 Jp4 0.6 m/s ZC2 JE84 0.245
ZC2 JE p4
vertical roller ZC2 Jp2
steel
ZC2 Jp4 0.6 m/s ZC2 JE85 0.245
ZC2 JE p5
page 5/142 pages 5/142 and 5/143
5/138
Limit switches 5

Type Compatible Maximum actuation Reference Weight
bodies speed kg
Spring return
ZC2 JE0p Actuation from ZC2 Jp1 1.5 m/s ZC2 JE01 0.210
left AND right ZC2 Jp2
ZC2 Jp4 1.5 m/s ZC2 JE04 0.210
Actuation from ZC2 Jp1 1.5 m/s ZC2 JE02 0.210

right ZC2 Jp2
ZC2 Jp4 1.5 m/s ZC2 JE06 0.210

left ZC2 Jp2
ZC2 Jp4 1.5 m/s ZC2 JE07 0.210

left OR right ZC2 Jp2
(see page 5/184)
5
Stay put (see page 5/184)
Multi-directional head (with operator)

bodies speed kg
For actuation
by any moving part
“Cat’s whisker” ZC2 Jp1 1 m/s in any direction ZC2 JE70 0.190
ZC2 Jp2
ZC2 JE70
page 5/142 pages 5/142 and 5/143
5/139
Limit switches 5

kg
Roller lever Thermoplastic ZC2 JY11 0.030
(1)
ZC2 JY1p
Steel ZC2 JY13 0.040
ZC2 JY31
Steel, ball bearing mounted ZC2 JY12 0.040
Variable length roller lever Thermoplastic ZC2 JY31 0.045

(1)
ZC2 JY51

Rigid rod lever Steel U 3 mm, L = 125 mm (1) ZC2 JY51 0.035
Spring lever ZC2 JY81 0.040

(1)
Spring-rod lever ZC2 JY91 0.040

5 ZC2 JY81 ZC2 JY91
(1)
For actuation by specific cam (only for operation with head ZC2 JE09, see page 5/184)
Forked arm with rollers 1 track ZC2 JY71 0.055
thermoplastic
(1)
ZC2 JY71 2 track ZC2 JY61 0.055
ZC2 JY61 Other versions Other operating levers for rotary heads.
page 5/142 pages 5/142 and 5/143
5/140
Limit switches 5
Contact blocks
Type of contact Scheme For body Reference Weight
kg
Single-pole 1 C/O ZC2 JC1 XCK Z01 0.050
11
13
snap action
12
14
XCK Z01
Double-pole 2 C/O ZC2 JC2 XES P1021 0.045
11
21
13
23
simultaneous
snap action
12
22
14
24
11
21
13
23
staggered
snap action
12
22
14
24
XES P10p1
Contact blocks with gold flashed contacts

kg
11
13
snap action
12
14

11
21
13
23
simultaneous
snap action
5
12
22
14
24

11
21
13
23
staggered
snap action
12
22
14
24
page 5/142 pages 5/142 and 5/143
5/141
Operation, Limit switches 5
dimensions 5
Operation (function diagrams)

Heads ZC2 JE61, JE66 with body Head ZC2 JE62 with body Head ZC2 JE63 with body
ZC2 Jp1 ZC2 Jp2 ZC2 Jp1 ZC2 Jp2 ZC2 Jp1 ZC2 Jp2
1,4 1,4 2,4 (A) 2,4(A) 2,3 2,3
11-12 11-12/21-22 11-12 11-12/21-22 11-12 11-12/21-22
13-14 13-14/23-24 13-14 13-14/23-24 13-14 13-14/23-24
11-12 11-12/21-22 11-12 11-12/21-22 11-12 11-12/21-22
13-14 13-14/23-24 13-14 13-14/23-24 13-14 13-14/23-24
0 5mm 0 5mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 5mm 0 5mm
0,5 0,5 0,9 0,9 0,5 0,5
Heads ZC2 JE64, JE65 with body Heads ZC2 JE01, JE02, JE03, JE05 with body
ZC2 Jp1 ZC2 Jp2 ZC2 Jp1 ZC2 Jp2
2,4 (A) 2,4(A) 12 12
11-12 11-12/21-22 11-12 11-12/21-22
13-14 13-14/23-24 13-14 13-14/23-24
11-12 11-12/21-22 11-12 11-12/21-22
13-14 13-14/23-24 13-14 13-14/23-24
0 mm 0 mm 0 75 0 75
0,9 0,9 6 6
Head ZC2 JE09 with body Head ZC2 JE70 with body
ZC2 Jp1 ZC2 Jp2 ZC2 Jp1 ZC2 Jp2
0 65 90 0 65 90 20 20
11-12 11-12/21-22 11-12 11-12/21-22
13-14 13-14/23-24 13-14 13-14/23-24
11-12 11-12/21-22
11-12 11-12/21-22 13-14 13-14/23-24
13-14 13-14/23-24 0
0
90 65 0 90 65 0
6 6
Contact operation G contact closed H contact open (A) = cam displacement

Heads ZC2 JE81, JE82 with body ZC2 Jp4
11
21
13
23
2,6
1,4
12
22
14
24
Heads ZC2 JE83, JE84, J85 with body ZC2 Jp4

5
11
21
13
23
12
22
14
24
2,3 3,5
Heads ZC2 JE04 with body ZC2 Jp4

11
21
13
23
12
22
14
24
Heads ZC2 JE06, JE07 with body ZC2 Jp4

11
21
13
23
12
22
14
24
Dimensions
Fixed bodies Plug-in bodies
ZC2 JC1, JC2, JC4 ZC2 JD1, JD2, JD4
7
(2)
60
60
81
81
(1) 24 = = 5,5 29 5,5 (1) 16 = = 6,5 29 6,5

41 40 41 42
(1) Incorporated cable gland (1) Incorporated cable gland

(2) Fixing from the rear by 2 M5 screws, depth of thread on switch: 10 mm Ø: fixing from the rear by 2 M6 screws
Ø: fixing from the front via 2 holes Ø 5.5 Fixing from the front via 2 holes Ø 5.5 (remove front part of switch for access)
pages 5/137 to 5/141 pages 5/142 and 5/143
5/142
Limit switches 5
Plunger heads
ZC2 JE61, JE81 ZC2 JE66 ZC2 JE62, JE82
19,5
19,5 4
19,5
58
59
47
ZC2 JE63, JE83 (2 position) ZC2 JE64, JE84, JE65, JE85 (2 position)
19,5
53 19,5 19 65 4 31
17
21 17
38
38
21
21
21
4
Rotary heads (ZC2 JE01 to JE07) with operating lever
ZC2 JY11, JY12, JY13 ZC2 JY31 ZC2 JY51
41…69 39…71 54…66

5
46...96
(1)
5
69...109
44
(2)
5
67
65
65
(1) 125 max. (2) 148 max.
ZC2 JY81 ZC2 JY91
54…60
54…60
171
105
194
128
65 65
Rotary heads (ZC2-JE09) with operating lever Multi-directional heads

ZC2 JY61 ZC2 JY71 ZC2 JE70
40…69 40…69 19,5

5 5
2
22 22
44
44
153
67
67
65 30 65 30
References: Operation:
pages 5/137 to 5/141 page 5/142
5/143
References 5
Limit switches 5
Fixed or plug-in body. Adaptable sub-assemblies for
low temperature applications (- 40 °C)

kg
Fixed bodies
11
13
snap action
(XCK Z01)
12
14
ZC2 JCp6
Double-pole 2 C/O ZC2 JC26 0.355
11
21
13
23
simultaneous
snap action
12
22
14
24
(XES P1021)
11
21
13
23
staggered
snap action
12
22
14
24
(XES P1031)
Plug-in bodies
1 step Single-pole 1 C/O ZC2 JD16 0.380
11
13
snap action
12
14
Double-pole 2 C/O ZC2 JD26 0.380

11
21
13
23
simultaneous
snap action
12
22
14
24
ZC2 JDp6
5 2 step Double-pole 2 C/O ZC2 JD46 0.380

11
21
13
23
staggered
snap action
12
22
14
24
Plunger heads
bodies speed kg
End plunger ZC2 Jp16 0.5 m/s ZC2 JE616 0.195
metal ZC2 Jp26
ZC2 Jp46 0.5 m/s ZC2 JE816 0.195
Side plunger ZC2 Jp16 0.5 m/s ZC2 JE636 0.240

metal ZC2 Jp26
ZC2 Jp46 0.5 m/s ZC2 JE836 0.240

End ball bearing plunger ZC2 Jp16 0.1 m/s ZC2 JE666 0.205
ZC2 Jp26
End roller plunger ZC2 Jp16 1 m/s ZC2 JE626 0.200
steel ZC2 Jp26
ZC2 Jp46 1 m/s ZC2 JE826 0.200
horizontal roller ZC2 Jp26
steel ZC2 Jp46 0.6 m/s ZC2 JE846 0.245
vertical roller ZC2 Jp26
ZC2 JEp56 steel ZC2 Jp46 0.6 m/s ZC2 JE856 0.245
page 5/142 pages 5/142 and 5/143
5/144
Limit switches 5

bodies speed kg
Spring return
ZC2 JE0p6 Actuation from ZC2 Jp16 1.5 m/s ZC2 JE016 0.210
ZC2 Jp46 1.5 m/s ZC2 JE046 0.210

right ZC2 Jp26
ZC2 Jp46 1.5 m/s ZC2 JE066 0.210

left ZC2 Jp26
ZC2 Jp46 1.5 m/s ZC2 JE076 0.210

left OR right ZC2 Jp26
(see page 5/184)

Multi-directional head (with operator)

Type of operator Compatible
bodies
Maximum actuation
speed
Reference Weight
kg 5
For actuation
by any moving part
“Cat’s whisker” ZC2 Jp16 1 m/s in any direction ZC2 JE706 0.190
ZC2 Jp26
ZC2 JE706
page 5/142 pages 5/142 and 5/143
5/145
Limit switches 5

kg
Roller lever (1) Thermoplastic ZC2 JY11 0.030
ZC2 JY1p
ZC2 JY31
Variable length Thermoplastic ZC2 JY31 0.045

roller lever (1)
ZC2 JY51

Spring lever (1) ZC2 JY81 0.040
Spring-rod lever (1) ZC2 JY91 0.040

5 ZC2 JY81 ZC2 JY91
thermoplastic
(1)
ZC2 JY71 2 track ZC2 JY61 0.055
Contact blocks
kg
11
13
ZC2 JY61 snap action

12
14

11
21
13
23
simultaneous
snap action
12
22
14
24

11
21
13
23
XCK Z01
staggered
snap action
12
22
14
24
Other versions Other operating levers for rotary heads.

XES P10p1
page 5/142 pages 5/142 and 5/143
5/146
Limit switches 5
Fixed body. Adaptable sub-assemblies for
high temperature applications (+ 120 °C)

kg
Fixed bodies
11
13
snap action
(XCK Z01)
12
14
ZC2 JCp5 Double-pole 2 C/O ZC2 JC25 0.355
11
21
13
23
simultaneous
snap action
12
22
14
24
(XES P10215)
11
21
13
23
staggered
snap action
12
22
14
24
(XES P10315)
ZC2 JEp15
Plunger heads
bodies speed kg
End plunger ZC2 JC15 0.5 m/s ZC2 JE615 0.195
metal ZC2 JC25
ZC2 JEp35
ZC2 JC45 0.5 m/s ZC2 JE815 0.195
Side plunger ZC2 JC15 0.5 m/s ZC2 JE635 0.240

metal ZC2 JC25
5
ZC2 JC45 0.5 m/s ZC2 JE835 0.240
ZC2 JE665

End ball bearing plunger ZC2 JC15 0.1 m/s ZC2 JE665 0.205
ZC2 JC25
End roller plunger ZC2 JC15 1 m/s ZC2 JE625 0.200

steel ZC2 JC25
ZC2 JEp25
ZC2 JC45 1 m/s ZC2 JE825 0.200
Side plunger with ZC2 JC15 0.6 m/s ZC2 JE645 0.245
horizontal roller ZC2 JC25
steel
ZC2 JEp45
ZC2 JC45 0.6 m/s ZC2 JE845 0.245
Side plunger with ZC2 JC15 0.6 m/s ZC2 JE655 0.245
vertical roller ZC2 JC25
steel
ZC2 JEp55
ZC2 JC45 0.6 m/s ZC2 JE855 0.245
page 5/142 pages 5/142 and 5/143
5/147
Limit switches 5

bodies speed kg
Spring return
ZC2 JE0p5 Actuation from ZC2 JC15 1.5 m/s ZC2 JE015 0.210
left AND right ZC2 JC25
ZC2 JC45 1.5 m/s ZC2 JE045 0.210
Actuation from ZC2 JC15 1.5 m/s ZC2 JE025 0.210

right ZC2 JC25
ZC2 JC45 1.5 m/s ZC2 JE065 0.210

left ZC2 JC25
ZC2 JC45 1.5 m/s ZC2 JE075 0.210

left AND right ZC2 JC25
5 Multi-directional head (with operator)

bodies speed kg
For actuation
by any moving part
“Cat’s whisker” ZC2 JC15 1 m/s in any direction ZC2 JE705 0.190
ZC2 JE705 ZC2 JC25
page 5/142 pages 5/142 and 5/143
5/148
Limit switches 5

kg
Roller lever (1) Thermoplastic ZC2 JY115 0.030
ZC2 JY1p
Offset roller lever (1) Thermoplastic ZC2 JY215 0.035

ZC2 JY51 roller lever (1)

offset roller lever (1)

Spring lever (1) ZC2 JY815 0.040
ZC2 JY815 ZC2 JY915

5
Spring-rod lever (1) ZC2 JY915 0.040
thermoplastic
ZC2 JY715
(1)
2 track ZC2 JY615 0.055
Contact blocks
kg
ZC2 JY615
11
13
snap action
12
14

11
21
13
23
simultaneous
snap action
12
22
14
24
XCK Z015
11
21
13
23
staggered
snap action
12
22
14
24
XES P10p15
Other versions Other operating levers for rotary heads.
page 5/142 pages 5/142 and 5/143
5/149
References, Miniature snap switches 5
dimensions 5
Osiswitch®
Subminiature design, DIN 41635 B format, sealed
Sub-subminiature design, DIN 41635 D format
References
Type of operator Plunger Flat lever (1) Roller lever (1)

Single-pole C/O 2.8 mm cable clip XEP4 E1W7 (3) XEP4 E1W7A326 (3) XEP4 E1W7A454 (3)
snap action tag connections
Wiring: Weight (g) 2.4 3.1 3.2
1 4 2 1 Black
2 Grey Pre-cabled XEP4 E1FD (3) XEP4 E1FDA326 (3) XEP4 E1FDA454 (3)
4 Blue connections
Weight (g) 14.1 14.8 14.9
Separate components Flat lever (2) ZEP4 L326 (3) – –
Weight (g) 0.7 – –

Roller lever (2) ZEP4 L454 (3) – –
Weight (g) 0.8 – –

Sub-subminiature design, DIN 41635D format
Type of operator Plunger Flat lever (1)

Single-pole C/O Solder tag XEP5 P1W2 (3) XEP5 P1W2Z55B (3)
snap action connections
Weight (g) 1.4 1.9
1 42
Dimensions
5 XEP4 E1W7 XEP4 E1W7A326 XEP4 E1W7A454
= 7,5 7,5 =
39˚
0,5
7,5
Ø2,2 24 F 20
2,8 r=
r=2 r= 4,8
2,2
A(4) B(4)
2,2
2
2,5
4x0,3
1,55
2,25
8,4
0,5
2,5
3
5
Ø1,2 9,5 5,2
XEP4 E1FD XEP4 E1FDA326 XEP4 E1FDA454
20
A(4) B(4) 24 r= 4,8
2,2
r= F
2,2
6,4 19,9 3 19,9 3

19,9 3
XEP5 P1W2 XEP5 P1W2Z55B
13 Z(4) ,9
0,5 19 F
r=
1,5 0,5
10,3
0,8
1,5
2,1
9,1
8,9
0,4x2,9
1,9
8,4
9,6
5
1,4 4,7 5,1 4,7

2,3
3,8 4,75
4,7 6,7
(1) In order to avoid damage to the fixing spigots, removal of the lever from complete products is not recommended.
(2) Levers only for mounting on basic (plunger) snap switches (XEP4 E1W7 and XEP4 E1FD).
(3) Switches sold in lots of 5.
(4) A, B, Z: lever fixing positions.
5/150
Characteristics 5
Miniature snap switches 5
Osiswitch®
Sub-subminiature design, DIN 41635 D format
Switch type XEP4 E1pp, XEP4 E1ppA326, XEP4 E1ppA454

XEP5 P1W2 XEP5 P1W2Z55B
Plunger Flat lever Roller lever
Lever fixing position (1) – A A
Switch actuation On end Horizontal
Product certifications e, IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1, c UR us, UL 1054, EN 61058
Degree of protection IP 67 XEP4 E1FDpp, case IP 67 and tags IP 00 XEP4 E1W7pp, case IP 40 and tags IP 00
XEP 5P1W2pp
Operating temperature - 40...+ 105 °C XEP4 E1FDpp, - 40...+125 °C XEP4 E1Wpppp and XEP5 P1ppp
Materials Enclosure Polyester XEP4, diallyl-phtalate XEP5
Lever – Stainless steel Stainless steel, glass reinforced
polyamide roller
Contact AgCdO XEP4 E1pp, Ag XEP5
Tags Tinned brass XEP4 E1Wppp, gold plated brass XEP5 P1pp
Mechanical characteristics
Lever fixing
position (1)
Maximum tripping force XEP4 A 2.5 N 0.63 N 0.83 N
B 2.5 N 1.25 N 1.67 N
XEP5 2N 0.80 N –
Minimum release force XEP4 A 0.80 N 0.20 N 0.27 N
B 0.80 N 0.40 N 0.53 N
XEP5 0.40 N 0.15 N –
Maximum permissible XEP4 A 10 N 2.5 N 3.33 N
end of travel force B 10 N 5N 6.67 N
XEP5 10 N – –
Tripping point (TP) (2) XEP4 A 8.40 +/- 0.3 mm 10.7 +/- 1.7 mm 15.5 +/- 1.4 mm
B 8.40 +/- 0.3 mm 9.6 +/- 1.0 mm 14.5 +/- 0.9 mm
XEP5 8.40 mm 9.20 mm –
Maximum differential travel XEP4 A 0.13 mm 0.52 mm 0.39 mm 5
B 0.13 mm 0.26 mm 0.20 mm
XEP5 0.06 mm 0.25 mm –
Minimum overtravel XEP4 A 0.60 mm 2.40 mm 1.80 mm
B 0.60 mm 1.20 mm 0.90 mm
XEP5 0.10 mm – –
Inter-contact distance XEP4 0.4 mm
XEP5 0.3 mm
Mechanical durability XEP4 2 million operating cycles
XEP5 0.1 million operating cycles
Electrical characteristics
Operational characteristics XEP4 AC-15: B300 (Ue: 240 V, Ie: 1.5 A)
DC-13: R300 (Ue: 250 V, Ie: 0.1 A) conforming to IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1 Appendix A
125-250 V AC 6.0 A conforming to UL 1054
6 (1) A 250 V AC 10,000 cycles conforming to EN 61058
XEP5 AC-15: D300 (Ue: 240 V, Ie: 0.3 A) conforming to IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1 Appendix A
Thermal current XEP4 7.5 A on 250 V (50/60 Hz)
XEP5 8.5 A on 250 V (50/60 Hz)
Connection XEP4 XEP4 E1W7p: 2.8 mm cable clip tags
XEP4 E1FD: Pre-cabled (horizontally in-line), 3 x 0.5 mm2, length 0.5 m
XEP5 Solder tags
Operating curves
XEP4 E1pp XEP5 P1pp
6
Number of cycles
2x10
6 2
10
Number of cycles
5
10
5
1
2 2
4
10 250 V a
5
10
250 V a: resistive 5
circuit
2
10
3 1 Resistive circuit
4 2 Inductive circuit
10
0,05 0,1 0,2 0,5 1 2 5 10 A 0,1 0,2 0,5 1 2 5 10 16 A Cos ϕ 0.8
Current Current
(1) Miniature snap switches fitted with a lever are supplied with the lever fixed in position A (see page 5/150). For basic (plunger) snap switches, it is possible to fix
a lever in position A or B, depending on the required tripping conditions (see page 5/150).
(2) Position of the operator in relation to the switch fixings (fixing hole centre line), at the instant the contact changes state.
5/151
dimensions 0
Osiswitch®
Miniature design, DIN 41635 A format
References
Type of operator Plunger Flat lever (1) Roller lever (1)

Single- Standard Solder tags XEP3 S1W2 (2) XEP3 S1W2B524 (2) XEP3 S1W2B529 (2)
2 pole contacts 4.8 mm cable clip tags XEP3 S1W6 (2) XEP3 S1W6B524 (2) XEP3 S1W6B529 (2)
4 C/O
6.35 mm cable clip tags XEP3 S1W3 (2) XEP3 S1W3B524 (2) XEP3 S1W3B529 (2)
snap
1 Weight (g) 5.6 6.3 6.6
action
Very low Solder tags XEP3 S2W2 (2) XEP3 S2W2B524 (2) XEP3 S2W2B529 (2)
operating 4.8 mm cable clip tags XEP3 S2W6 (2) XEP3 S2W6B524 (2) XEP3 S2W6B529 (2)
force
6.35 mm cable clip tags XEP3 S2W3 (2) XEP3 S2W3B524 (2) XEP3 S2W3B529 (2)
contacts
Weight (g) 5.6 6.3 6.6
Separate components Flat lever (3) ZEP3 L524 (2)

Weight (g) 0.7
Roller lever (3) ZEP3 L529 (2)

Weight (g) 1
Dimensions
XEP3 SpW2 XEP3 SpW6 XEP3 SpW3
2,8 22,2 2,8 2,8 22,2 2,8 2,8 22,2 2,8

10,7 20,2
3,9x0,8
20,2 3,2 20,2

5 3 3 3
3,2
3,2
1,7
3
= 10,3 =
= 10,3 =
= 10,3 =
15,8
15,8
A BC
15,8
A BC A BC
3
6,7
3
6,3
17,4
17,4
6,3
47˚ 47˚ 47˚

2,8
3,4 3,4 3,4

3,2
4 9,8 6,2
1,4 1,7
10,3
10,3
10,3
3,9
3,9
3,9
6,3x0,8
4,8x0,5
3 3 3,1 3 4,3
27,8 27,8 7,1 27,8 9,3
ZEP3 L529 ZEP3 L524
6,3
2,4 1 2,4
4,3
0,3
5,4
4,3
4, r=2
r=2
4,8
8 7
3,4
(1) In order to avoid damage to the fixing spigots, removal of the lever from complete products is not recommended.
(2) Switches sold in lots of 10.
(3) Levers only for mounting on basic (plunger) snap switches (XEP3 S pW2, XEP3 SpW3 and XEP3 SpW6), in fixing positions A, B or C.
5/152
Characteristics 0
Osiswitch®
Miniature design, DIN 41635 A format
Switch type XEP3 SpW2 XEP3 SpW2B254 XEP3 SpW2B259

Type of operator Plunger Flat lever Roller lever
Lever fixing position (1) – B B
Switch actuation On end Horizontal
Product certifications c UR us, e, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 1054, EN 61058-1
Degree of protection Case IP 40 and tags IP 00
Operating temperature - 25...+ 125 °C
Materials Enclosure Polyester
Lever – Stainless steel Stainless steel, glass reinforced
polyamide roller
Contact AgNi
Lever fixing position (1)
Maximum tripping force Standard A 0.8 N 0.2 N
B 0.8 N 0.4 N
C 0.8 N 0.53N
Very low force A 0.25 N 0.06 N
B 0.25 N 0.13 N
C 0.25 N 0.17 N
Minimum release force Standard A 0.20 N 0.05 N
B 0.20 N 0.10 N
C 0.20 N 0.13 N
Very low force A 0.05 N 0.01N
B 0.05 N 0.03 N
C 0.05 N 0.03 N
Maximum permissible Standard, A 20 N 5N
end of travel force very low force B 20 N 10 N
C 20 N 13 N
Tripping point (TP) (2) Standard,
very low force
A
B
14.70+/- 0.4 mm
14.70+/- 0.4 mm
15.20+/- 2.5 mm
15.20+/- 1.0 mm
20.5+/- 2.9 mm
20.5+/- 1.5 mm
5
C 14.70+/- 0.4 mm 15.20+/- 0.8 mm 20.5+/- 1.2 mm
Maximum differential travel Standard, A 0.35 mm 1.40 mm
very low force B 0.35 mm 0.70 mm
C 0.35 mm 0.53 mm
Minimum overtravel Standard A 1.20 mm 4.80 mm
B 1.20 mm 2.40 mm
C 1.20 mm 1.80 mm
Very low force A 1.10 mm 4.40 mm
B 1.10 mm 2.20 mm
C 1.10 mm 1.65 mm
Inter-contact distance 0.40 mm
Mechanical durability for 2/3 Standard 20 million operating cycles
overtravel Very low force 50 million operating cycles
Operational characteristics Standard AC-15: B300 (Ue: 240 V, Ie: 1.5 A)
DC-13: R300 (Ue: 250 V, Ie: 0.1 A) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix A
125-250 VAC 10.1A - 1/2 HP conforming to UL 1054
12 (3) A 250 V AC 10,000 cycles conforming to EN 61058-1
Very low force AC-15: D300 (Ue: 240 V, Ie: 0.3 A) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix A
125-250 V AC 4 A - 1/10 HP conforming to UL 1054
4 (1) A 250 V AC 50,000 cycles conforming to EN 61058-1
Thermal current Standard 15 A on 250 V (50/60 Hz)
Very low force 5 A on 250 V (50/60 Hz)
Connection XEP3 SpW2: solder tags, XEP3 SpW6: 4.8 mm cable clip tags
XEP3 SpW3: 6.35 mm cable clip tags.
Operating curves
XEP3 S1pp XEP3 S2pp
Number of cycles
Number of cycles
10 7 250 V 10 8
5 5
2 2 250 V
10 6 10 7
5 5
2 Resistive circuit 2 Resistive circuit
10 5 10 6
5 Inductive circuit 5 Inductive circuit
2 Cos ϕ 0.8 2 Cos ϕ 0.8
10 4 10 5
Current Current
0,1 0,2 0,5 1 2 5 12 A 0,1 0,2 0,5 1 2 4 A
(1) Miniature snap switches fitted with a lever are supplied with the lever fixed in position B (see page 5/152). For basic (plunger) snap switches, it is possible to fix
a lever in position A, B or C, depending on the required tripping conditions (see page 5/152).
(2) Position of the operator in relation to the switch fixings (fixing hole centre line), at the instant the contact changes state.
5/153
dimensions 5
Osiswitch®
Sealed design
Pre-cabled
Type of operator Head with flat plunger Head with domed encased plunger
References
Single-pole C/O snap action XC 010L2 XC 011L2
1 Wiring:
2
4 1 Black
2 Brown
4 Blue
Weight (kg) 0.145 0.150
Dimensions
XC 010L2
12
12,3
10,3
PA
2000
32
26
20
24
5
6
16
49
71
XC 011L2
r6
18,3
PA
10,3
1
2000
32
26
20
24
6
16
49
71
5/154
Characteristics 5
Osiswitch®
Sealed design
Pre-cabled
Switch type XC 010p XC 011p

Switch actuation On end, flat plunger (1) On end, domed plunger (1)
Product certifications e, IEC 60947-5-1
Operating temperature 0...+ 85 °C
Materials Internal housing Metal

Casing Nitrile
Fixing support Steel, zinc passivated
Contact Ag
Maximum tripping force 5.3 N
Minimum release force 1.5 N
Maximum permissible end of travel force 30 N
Tripping point (TP) (2) 11.4± 0.4 mm 17.4± 0.5 mm
Maximum differential travel 0.2 mm
Minimum overtravel 0.2 mm
Inter-contact distance 0.5 mm
Operational current 1 A on 24 V (50/60 Hz)
5
Thermal current/insulation voltage 12 A/60 V
Connection A05 VVF cable, 3 x 0.75 mm2, length 2 metres, overall diameter ≤ 7.6 mm
Electrical durability AC-15: 0.5 million operating cycles
Operating curve
(1) Manual actuation must be made by an intermediate insulated part, in order to meet basic safety requirements.
One of the two fixing holes must also be used as an earth protection terminal.
(2) Distance between the base of the switch and the top of the plunger at the instant the contact changes state (see dimensions, page 5/154).
5/155
Presentation, Miniature snap switches 5
terminology, Osiswitch®
Miniature design
characteristics, General
mounting 5
Presentation Electromechanical detection

b Osiswitch miniature snap switches, featuring electromechanical technology, assure the
following functions:
v detection of presence or absence,
v detection of position.
Actuation of the operator (plunger or lever) on the miniature snap switch causes the electrical
XEP4 E1Wp contact to change state. This information can then be processed by a PLC controlling the
installation.
Osiswitch miniature snap switches can be used both for industrial applications and the building
XEP3 sector.
Features
b Osiswitch miniature snap switches incorporate a C/O snap action, single break, contact.
XEP4 E1FDp They are characterised by:
v high electrical ratings for their very small size,
v short tripping travel,
v low tripping force,
v high repeat accuracy on the tripping points,
XC0 v long service life.
XEP5
Terminology Forces
b Maximum tripping force:
maximum force which must be applied to the operator to move it from the rest (unactuated)
position to the trip position (tripping point).
b Minimum release force:
value to which the force on the operator must be reduced to allow the snap action mechanism
to return to its rest (unactuated) position.
b Maximum permissible end of travel force:
maximum force that can be applied to the operator at the end of its travel without damaging
the switch.
Position / Travel
1 Tripping point: position of the operator in relation to the switch fixings (fixing hole centre line)
at the instant the switch contact changes state.
A Differential travel: distance between the tripping point and the position at which the snap
5 action mechanism returns to its initial state on release of the operator.
2 Overtravel limit: position of the operator when an extreme force has moved it to the effective
end of its available travel.
B Overtravel: distance between the tripping point and the overtravel limit.
The reference point for the figures given for forces and travel is a point F, which is situated on the
plunger in the case of a basic switch or at 3 mm from the end of the plain lever in the case of a
lever operated switch.
Mechanical characteristics Changeover time
NC b This is the time taken by the moving contact when moving from one fixed contact to another
until it becomes fully stable (contact bounce included).
b This time is related to the inter-contact distance, the mechanical characteristics of the snap
action mechanism and the mass of the moving element. However, due to the snap action
NO mechanisms used, the time is largely independent to the speed of operation. It is normally
T1 less than 20 milliseconds (including bounce times of less than 5 ms).
T
T1: bounce time Operating speed and maximum usable operating rate
T: changeover time b Our miniature snap switches are suitable for a wide range of operating speeds: generally,
from 1 mm/mn to 1 m/s.
b The maximum usable operating rate on a light electrical load may be as high as
10 operations/second.
A BC
Mounting Mounting and operation

b To conform to the leakage paths and air gaps in standards EEC 24 - EN/IEC 61058 and
EN/IEC 60947:
v an insulation pad must be inserted between the snap switch and the fixing surface if the latter
is metal,
v manual operation of a metal actuator must only be carried out with the aid of an intermediate
actuator made of an insulating material.
b The installer must ensure adequate protection against direct contact with the output terminals.
Actuation method
b Direct operation:
v the plunger should preferably be actuated along its axis. However, the majority of our
A BC miniature snap switches will accept skewed operation provided the angle of actuation is not
more than 45°.
The travel of the actuator must not be limited to only reaching the tripping point. The actuator
must always be operated in such a manner so that the plunger reaches a point at least 0.5
times the stated overtravel value of the switch. Steps must also be taken to ensure that it does
not reach its end of travel nor exceed the maximum permissible end of travel force.
5/156
Mounting, Miniature snap switches 5
Osiswitch®
Miniature design
General
Mounting (continued) Actuation method (continued)

b Lever operators:
v when actuation is by a roller lever, force should preferably be applied in the direction shown
in the diagrams opposite,
v where the movements involved are fast, the ramp should be so designed as to ensure that
the operator is not subjected to any violent impact or abrupt release.
30˚ 30˚
A BC A BC
Fixing - Tightening torque

b The tightening torque of the fixing screws must conform to the following values:
Ø of fixing screw 2 2.5 3 3.5 4

Tightening torque (cm.N) Maximum 25 35 60 100 150
Minimum 15 25 40 60 100
Resistance to mechanical shock and vibration

b Resistance to shock and vibration depends on the mass of the moving parts and on the
forces holding the contacts together.
b In general, for a miniature snap switch without accessory:
v vibration > 10 gn, 10 to 500 Hz,
v shock > 50 gn 11 ms 1/2 sine wave.
Electrical characteristics Operating curves

b These indicate the electrical life of the miniature snap switches under standard conditions
(20°C, 1 cycle/2 seconds), by showing the number of switching operations which can be
5
Number of cycles
7
10 performed with given types of load. For sealed snap switches, the operating rate is
5
2
1 cycle/6 s.
10 6
5
2
10 5
5
2
10 4
Resistive circuit
Inductive circuit
0,1 0,2 0,5 1 2 5 10 16 A Cos ϕ 0.8
Current
Insulation resistance
b The insulation resistance of the miniature snap switches is generally greater than 50,000 MΩ,
measured at 500 V d.c.
Dielectric strength
b The dielectric strength of our miniature snap switches is generally superior to:
v 1500 Volts between live parts and earth,
v 1000 Volts between contacts,
1500 V v 600 Volts between contacts for switches with an inter-contact distance less than 0.3 mm.
1000 V
5/157
References, Safety detection solutions 5
characteristics 5
Safety limit switches
Miniature design, metal, type XCS M
Pre-cabled
Type of operator Metal end plunger Roller plunger Thermoplastic roller Steel roller lever
lever
References
3-pole N/C+N/C+N/O XCS M3910L1 XCS M3902L1 XCS M3915L1 XCS M3916L1
BK
RD
BU
snap action contact

GN-YE
1,8 4,2(P) 3,1(A) 7(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P)
RD-WH
BK-WH
BN

RD-RD-WH BK-BK-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH
BK-BK-WH RD-RD-WH BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH
0 5 mm 0 mm 0 90˚ 0 90˚
0,8 1,4 12˚ 12˚
3-pole N/C+N/C+N/O XCS M3710L1 XCS M3702L1 XCS M3715L1 XCS M3716L1
BK
RD
BU
break before make,

GN-YE slow break contact
RD-WH
BK-WH
BN
1,8 3,1(P) 3,1(A) 5,6(P) 25˚ 45˚(P) 25˚ 45˚(P)

0 2,6 5 mm 0 4,6 mm 0 36˚ 90˚ 0 36˚ 90˚
4-pole N/C+N/C+N/O+N/O XCS M4110L1 XCS M4102L1 XCS M4115L1 XCS M4116L1
BK
RD
BU
VT
snap action contact

GN-YE
1,8 4,2(P) 3,1(A) 7(P) 25˚ 70˚(P) 25˚ 70˚(P)
RD-WH
VT-WH
BK-WH
BN
5
RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH
BN-BU BN-BU RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH
VT-VT-WH VT-VT-WH BN-BU BN-BU
RD-RD-WH BK-BK VT-VT-WH VT-VT-WH
RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH
BK-BK-WH RD-RD-WH BK-BK-WH BK-BK-WH
VT-VT-WH VT-VT-WH RD-RD-WH RD-RD-WH
0 5 mm 0 mm
0 90˚ 0 90˚
0,8 1,4
12˚ 12˚
Weight (kg) 0.165 0.170 0.205 0.210
Contact operation closed (A) = cam displacement
open (P) = positive opening point
N/C contact with opening positive operation
Type of actuation
Maximum actuation speed 0.5 m/s 0.5 m/s 1.5 m/s

Minimum force or torque Tripping 8.5 N 7N 0.5 N.m
Positive opening 42.5 N 35 N 0.1 N.m
Cabling 3-pole contacts PvR pre-cabled, 7 x 0.5 mm2, length 1 m (1)
4-pole contacts PvR pre-cabled, 9 x 0.34 mm2, length 1 m (1)
For a 5 m long cable, replace L1 with L5.
5/158
Dimensions, Safety detection solutions 5
connections 5
Safety limit switches
Miniature design, metal, type XCS M
Pre-cabled
Dimensions
XCSM pp10L1 XCSM pp02L1
(1)
(1)
(1) Protective plate fixed by 5-lobe torque safety screws.

XCSM pp15L1 XCSM pp16L1
31 31
(1) (1)
(1) Protective plate fixed by 5-lobe torque safety screws.

Connections
Wiring to category 1 conforming to EN 954-1/ Wiring to category 3 conforming to EN 954-1/IEC 13849-1
IEC 13849-1
Example with 3-pole N/C+N/C+N/O contact and protection fuse to Example with 3-pole N/C+N/C+N/O contact with mixed redundancy of the contacts and the
prevent shunting of the N/C contacts, either by cable damage or associated control relyas. Opening and closing of the guard necessary to activate K1.
by tampering.
F1 (1) F1 O
BK
RD
BU
BK
RD
BU
K1 K1
K2
GN-YE GN-YE
BK-WH
RD-WH
BN
BK-WH
RD-WH
BN
KM1
I KM2
K2
O
KM1
KM2
I K K1 K2
M
M
K K2 H1 K1
(1) Signalling contact H1: “guard closed” indicator light

Example of guard monitoring using 2 switches and 1 safety module (category 4)
Operation in positive and negative (combined) mode
XPS
5/159
characteristics 5
Guard switches
Plastic, turret head (1), types XCS PA,
XCS TA and XCS TE
1 or 2 cable entries M16 x 1.5 (2)
Type of switch Without locking of actuator
References of switches without actuator ( N/C contact with positive opening operation)
2-pole N/C + N/O XCS PA592 –
21
13
break before make

slow break (3)
22
14
2-pole N/C + N/O XCS PA692 –

13
21
make before break

slow break (3)
22
14
2-pole N/C + N/C XCS PA792 –

11
21
slow break (3)

12
22
3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O – XCS TA592

13
33
21
(2 N/O staggered)
slow break (3)
14
34
22
5 3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O – XCS TA792

13
31
21
(N/O staggered)
slow break (3)
14
32
22
3-pole N/C + N/C + N/C – XCS TA892

11
21
31
slow break (3)

12
22
32
Weight (kg) 0.110 0.160
Characteristics
Actuation speed Maximum: 0.5 m/s, minimum: 0.01 m/s
Resistance to forcible withdrawal of actuator XCS PA, XCS TA: 2 N (50 N using actuators XCS Z12 or XCS Z13 together with guard retaining
device XCS Z21)
XCS TE: 500 N
Mechanical durability XCS PA, XCS TA: > 1 million operating cycles
XCS TE: 1 million operating cycles
Maximum operating rate For maximum durability: 600 operating cycles per hour
Minimum force for extraction of actuator u 15 to 30 N depending on type.
Cable entry XCS PA, XCS TE: 1 entry tapped M16 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland
XCS TA: 2 entries tapped M16 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland
Materials Body: zamak. Head: zamak. Safety screws: 5-lobe torque. Protective plate: steel.
References of accessories
Description For use with Unit reference Weight
kg
Blanking plugs for operating head slot XCS PA, XCS Z28 0.050
(Sold in lots of 10) XCS TA, XCS TE
Tool for forced opening of interlocking XCS TE XCS Z100 0.050

device
(Sold in lots of 10)
XCS Z91
Padlocking device XCS PA, XCS Z91 0.053
to prevent insertion of actuator, XCS TA, XCS TE
for up to 3 padlocks (padlocks not included)
(1) Head adjustable in 90° steps throughout 360°. Blanking plug for operating head slot included with switch.
(2) For cable entries tapped for n° 11 (Pg 11) cable gland, replace the last number in the reference (2) by 1.
Example: XCS PA592 becomes XCS PA591.
(3) Schematic diagrams shown represent the contact states whilst the actuator is inserted in the head of the switch.
5/160
Guard switches
Plastic, turret head (1), types XCS PA,
XCS TA and XCS TE
Type of switch With interlocking, locking by solenoid
Type of interlocking Locking on de-energisation and unlocking on energisation of solenoid (3).

To order a guard switch with locking on energisation and unlocking on de-energisation of the
solenoid, replace the 2nd number (3) by 5 in the references shown below.
Example: XCS TE5312 becomes XCS TE5512.
Supply voltage of solenoid a or c 24 V (50/60 Hz on a) a or c 120 V (50/60 Hz on a) a or c 230 V (50/60 Hz on a)
2-pole N/C + N/O XCS TE5312 XCS TE5332 XCS TE5342
21
13
break before make

slow break (4)
22
14
2-pole N/C + N/O XCS TE6312 XCS TE6332 XCS TE6342

13
21
make before break

slow break (4)
22
14
2-pole N/C + N/C XCS TE7312 XCS TE7332 XCS TE7342

11
21
slow break (4)
5
12
22
Weight (kg) 0.360 0.360 0.360
Solenoid characteristics
Load factor 100%
Rated operational voltage a or c 24 V a or c 120 V a or c 230 V
Voltage limits - 20%, + 10% of the rated operational voltage (including ripple on c)
conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1
Service life 20 000 hours
Consumption 10 VA max.
References of actuators and guard retaining device
Description Straight actuator Actuator with wide Pivoting Right-angled Guard retaining
fixing (5) actuator actuator device (6)
For guard switches XCS PA, TA, TE XCS Z11 XCS Z12 XCS Z15 XCS Z13 XCS Z14 XCS Z21
Weight (kg) 0.015 0.015 0.012 0.085 0.025 0.080

Example: XCS TE5312 becomes XCS TE5311.
(3) A special tool included with the guard switch enables the forced opening of the interlocking mechanism, by authorised personnel, allowing withdrawal of the
actuator and subsequent opening of the N/C safety contacts.
(5) 2 actuator lengths, XCS Z12: L = 40 mm, XCS Z15: L = 29 mm.
(6) Only for use with guard switches XCS PA and XCS TA used in conjunction with actuators XCS Z12, XCS Z13 or XCS Z15.
5/161
characteristics 5
Safety switches
Plastic, double insulated, turret head (1),
types XCS PL, XCS TL, XCS PR and XCS TR
Type Elbowed lever (flush with rear of switch) Straight lever Spindle
Operator To left Centred To right To right OR Centred Length 30 mm

to left (3)
References ( N/C contact with positive opening operation)
2-pole N/C + N/O XCS PL592 XCS PL582 XCS PL572 XCS PL562 XCS PL552 XCS PR552
13
21
break before make

slow break
14
22
2-pole N/C + N/C XCS PL792 XCS PL782 XCS PL772 XCS PL762 XCS PL752 XCS PR752
11
21
slow break
12
22
Weight (kg) 0.095 0.095 0.095 0.095 0.095 0.105
Operator To left Centred To right To right OR Centred Length 30 mm

to left (3)
References ( N/C contact with positive opening operation)
3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O XCS TL592 XCS TL582 XCS TL572 XCS TL562 XCS TL552 XCS TR552
13
33
21
(2 N/O staggered)
slow break
14
34
22
3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O XCS TL792 XCS TL782 XCS TL772 XCS TL762 XCS TL752 XCS TR752
13
31
21
(N/O staggered)
slow break
14
32
22
3-pole N/C + N/C + N/C XCS TL892 XCS TL882 XCS TL872 XCS TL862 XCS TL852 XCS TR852
11
21
31
slow break
12
22
32
Weight (kg) 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.155
Characteristics
Lever displacement tripping angle 5°
Minimum torque For tripping: 0.1 N.m; for positive opening: 0.25 N.m (XCS PL and XCS PR),
0.45 N.m (XCS TL and XCS TR)
Cable entry XCS Pp: 1 cable entry tapped M16 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland.
XCS Tp: 2 cable entries tapped M16 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland.
Clamping capacity 7 to 10 mm (switch supplied with 1 entry fitted with blanking plug)
(1) Head adjustable in 90° steps throughout 360°. Switches supplied with 2 additional self-locking screws for positive fixing of the operating head.
Example: XCS PL592 becomes XCS PL591.
(3) For switches with 80 mm spindle: replace the second number in the reference (5) by 6. Example: XCS PR562. The weight increases by 0.032 kg.
5/162
Operation, Safety detection solutions 5
dimensions, Safety switches

Plastic, double insulated, turret head (1),
schemes 5
types XCS PL, XCS TL, XCS PR and XCS TR

Operation
Operator displacement
XCS PLp92, p72, p62 XCS PLp82, p52 XCS TLp92, p72, p62 XCS TLp82, p52 XCS PRp52 XCS TRp52
or or
Function diagrams
XCS PL592, 572, 562 XCS PL582, 552 XCS TL592, 572, 562 XCS L582, TL552 XCS PR552 XCS TR552
5˚ -5˚+5˚ 5˚ -5˚+5˚ -5˚+5˚ +5˚+5˚
-5˚
0 180˚ -90˚ 0 +90˚ 0 180˚ -90˚ 0 +90˚ -270˚ 0 +270˚ +270˚
-270˚ 0 +270˚
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
10˚ 33-34 33-34 33-34
10˚ 10˚
10˚ 10˚ 10˚
XCS PL792, 772, 762 XCS PL782, 752 XCS TL792, 772, 762 XCS TL782, 752 XCS PR752 XCS TR752
5˚ -5˚+5˚ 5˚ -5˚ +5˚ +5˚ -5˚ +5˚ -5˚
0 180˚ -90˚ 0 +90˚ 0 180˚ -90˚ 0 +90˚ -270˚ 0 +270˚ -270˚ 0 +270˚
11-12 11-12 21-22 21-22 11-12 21-22
21-22 21-22 31-32 31-32 21-22 31-32
13-14 13-14 13-14
10˚ 10˚ 10˚
Contact operation XCS TL892, 872, 862 XCS TL882, PL852 XCS TR852
G contact closed 5˚ -5˚+5˚ -5˚+5˚
H contact open 0 180˚ -90˚ 0 +90˚ -270˚ 0 +270˚
11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 31-32
Dimensions and wiring schemes

XCS PLpp2 XCS TLpp2 Wiring to category 1 conforming to
EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1
Example with cable short-circuit protection
2,5 2,5 fuse
2,5 5,3
43
43
72,5
5,3
72,5
2,5
5
70
70
27,4 16 27,4 16
33
33
F1
28
28
23,35
23,35
21
13
87,5
108,35
(3)
(2)
12,5
22
14
(1) 20/22 O
30 30 (1) 12,5 20/22
I X
30 40,3 M
52
X
(1) 1 cable entry tapped M16 x 1.5 (1) 2 cable entries tapped M16 x 1.5
Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 4.3 x 8.3 on 22 mm centres, (2) 2 elongated holes Ø 4.3 x 8.3 on 22 mm centres,
2 holes Ø 4.3 on 20 mm centres 2 holes Ø 4.3 on 20 mm centres
XCS PRpp2 XCS TRpp2 Wiring to category 3 conforming to
EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1
L L 52 Example with 3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O contact
with mixed redundancy of the contacts and the
5 M4 5 M4 associated control relays.
32,1
32,1
41,75
41,75
F1 O
28
28
K1
96,25
K1
117
13
21
33
(3) (2) K2
8,5 8,5
12,5
KM1
14
22
34
13 13
I KM2
(1) 22 20/22 22
K2
30 30 (1) 12,5 20/22 KM1
K1 K2
30 40,3 KM2 M
K1 K2 H1
(1) 1 cable entry tapped M16 x 1.5 (1) 2 cable entries tapped M16 x 1.5 To activate K1, the lever or the spindle must be
Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 4.3 x 8.3 on 22 mm centres, (2) 2 elongated holes Ø 4.3 x 8.3 on 22 mm centres, rotated when the supply is switched on.
2 holes Ø 4.3 on 20 mm centres 2 holes Ø 4.3 on 20 mm centres H1: “lever or spindle displaced from initial position”
L = 30 (XCS PRp52) or 80 (XCS PRp62) (3) 2 elongated holes Ø 5.3 x 13.3 indicator.
L = 30 (XCS TRp52) or 80 (XCS TRp62) When used in conjunction with an XPS safety
module and another safety switch, the rotary lever
or spindle operator safety switch can provide a
category 3 or 4 control and monitoring system for
moving guards conforming to EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1.
5/163
characteristics 5
Guard switches
Metal, turret head (1), types XCS A, XCS B,
XCS C and XCS E
Type of switch Without locking of actuator With locking of actuator, manual unlocking (3)
LED indication on opening Without 1 orange 1 orange Without 1 orange 1 orange Without 1 orange 1 orange
of N/C contacts LED LED LED LED LED LED
z 24/48 V a 110/ z 24/48 V a 110/ z 24/48 V a 110/
240 V 240 V 240 V
3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O XCS A502 XCS A512 XCS A522 XCS B502 XCS B512 XCS B522 XCS C502 XCS C512 XCS C522
13
33
21
(2 N/O staggered)
slow break (4)
14
34
22
3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O XCS A702 XCS A712 XCS A722 XCS B702 XCS B712 XCS B722 XCS C702 XCS C712 XCS C722
13
31
21
(N/O staggered)
slow break (4)
14
32
22
3-pole N/C + N/C + N/C XCS A802 – – XCS B802 – – XCS C802 – –
11
21
31
slow break (4)

12
22
32
Weight (kg) 0.440 0.440 0.440 0.475 0.475 0.475 0.480 0.480 0.480
5 Characteristics
Actuation speed Maximum: 0.5 m/s, minimum: 0.01 m/s
Resistance to forcible withdrawal XCS B and XCS C: 1500 N; XCS E: 2000 N

of actuator
Mechanical durability XCS A and XCS E: > 1 million operating cycles

XCS B and XCS C: 0.6 million operating cycles
Maximum operating rate For maximum durability: 600 operating cycles per hour
Minimum force for extraction of u 20 N

actuator
Cable entry XCS A, XCS B, XCS C: 1 cable entry.

XCS E: 2 cable entries
Entries tapped M20 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland. Clamping capacity 7 to 13 mm
Materials Body: zamak. Head: zamak. Safety screws: 5-lobe torque. Protective plate: steel.
References of actuators
Description Straight actuator Wide actuator Pivoting actuator Latch for sliding doors
For guard switches XCS A, B, C, E XCS Z01 XCS Z02 XCS Z03 XCS Z05
Weight (kg) 0.020 0.020 0.095 0.600
(2) For cable entries tapped for n° 13 (Pg 13.5) cable gland, replace the last number in the reference (2) by 1.
Example: XCS A502 becomes XCS A501.
(3) Unlocking by pushbutton for XCS Bppp and by key operated lock for XCS Cppp.
5/164
Guard switches
Metal, turret head (1), types XCS A, XCS B,
XCS C and XCS E
Type of switch With interlocking, locking by solenoid
Type of interlocking Locking on de-energisation and unlocking on energisation of solenoid (3).

To order a guard switch with locking on energisation and unlocking on de-energisation of the
solenoid, replace the 2nd number (3) by 5 in the references shown below.
Example: XCS E5312 becomes XCS E5512.
LED indication Orange LED: “guard open” signalling.
Green LED: “guard closed and locked” signalling.
Supply voltage of solenoid a or c 24 V a or c 48 V a or c a or c
(50/60 Hz on a) (50/60 Hz on a) 110/120 V (4) 220/240 V (4)
(50/60 Hz on a) (50/60 Hz on a)
Type of contact on solenoid N/C + N/O 2 N/C N/C + N/O N/C + N/O N/C + N/O
3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O XCS E5312 – XCS E5322 XCS E5332 XCS E5342
13
33
21
(2 N/O staggered)
slow break (5)
14
34
22
3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O XCS E7312 XCS E73127 XCS E7322 XCS E7332 XCS E7342 5
13
31
21
(N/O staggered)
slow break (5)
14
32
22
3-pole N/C + N/C + N/C XCS E8312 (6) XCS E83127 (6) XCS E8322 (6) XCS E8332 (6) XCS E8342 (6)
11
21
31
slow break (5)

12
22
32
Weight (kg) 1.140 1.140 1.140 1.140 1.140
Solenoid characteristics
Load factor 100%
Rated operational voltage a or c 24 V a or c 24 V a or c 48 V a or c a or c
110/120 V 220/240 V
Voltage limits - 20%, + 10% of the rated operational voltage (including ripple on c)
conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1
Service life 20 000 hours
Consumption Inrush: 10 VA. Sealed: 10 VA
LED indicator characteristics

Rated insulation voltage 50 V conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 250 V conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1
Current consumption 7 mA 7 mA
Rated operational voltage a or c 24/48 V a 110/240 V
Voltage limits a or c 20...52 V (including ripple) a 95...264 V (including ripple)

Service life 100 000 hours 100 000 hours
Protection against overvoltages Yes Yes
(2) For cable entries tapped for n° 13 (Pg 13.5) cable gland, replace the last number in the reference by 1.
Example: XCS E5312 becomes XCS E5311.
(3) A key operated lock enables the forced opening of the interlocking mechanism, by authorised personnel, allowing withdrawal of the actuator and subsequent
opening of the N/C safety contacts.
(4) For use on c 110/120 V or c 220/240 V, remove the LED indicator module.
(6) Switches supplied with a single green LED.
5/165
Presentation 5
Safety detection solutions 5
Coded magnetic switches

Plastic
XCS DMC Rectangular, compact: 51 x 16 x 7

Pre-cabled connection Connector on flying lead connection
Pages 5/168 and 5/169
XCS DMP Rectangular, standard: 88 x 25 x 13

Pages 5/168 and 5/169
XCS DMR Cylindrical, diameter: 30, length: 38.5

Pages 5/168 and 5/169
5/166
Characteristics 5

Plastic
Environment
Conformity to standards Products IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22 2 n° 14
Machine assemblies IEC/EN 60204-1, EN/ISO 12100, EN 1088/ISO 14119 (XCS DMp5pp only)
Product certifications UL-CSA, BG
Protective treatment Standard version: “TH”
Ambient air temperature For operation °C - 25…+ 85
For storage °C - 40…+ 85
Sensitivity to magnetic fields mT ≥ 0.3
Electric shock protection Class II conforming to IEC 60536
Degree of protection Conforming to IP 66 and IP 67 for coded magnetic switches with pre-cabled connection
IEC 60529 IP 67 for coded magnetic switches with connector on flying lead connection
Materials Thermoplastic case (PBT)
PVC cable (ROHS)
Rated operational characteristics Ue: c 24 V, Ie: 100 mA max.
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Ui: c 100 V
Rated impulse withstand voltage (U imp) kV 2.5 conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1
Resistance across terminals Contact with LED Ω 57 5

Contact without LED Ω 10
Protection (not using safety module) External cartridge fuse: 500 mA gG (gl)
Connection XCS DMC 2 contact model Pre-cabled, 4 x 0.25 mm2, length: 2, 5 or 10 m depending on model
or M8 connector on 0.15 m flying lead
XCS DMP 2 contact model Pre-cabled, 4 x 0.25 mm2, length: 2, 5 or 10 m depending on model
3 contact model Pre-cabled, 6 x 0.25 mm2, length: 2, 5 or 10 m depending on model
XCS DMR 2 contact model Pre-cabled, 4 x 0.25 mm2, length: 2, 5 or 10 m depending on model
Contact material Rhodium
Electrical durability 1.2 million operating cycles
Maximum switching voltage V c 100
Switching capacity Contact with LED mA 5…100
Contact without LED mA 0.1…100
Insulation resistance MΩ 1000
Maximum breaking capacity Contact with LED VA 3
Contact without LED VA 10
5/167
characteristics 5
Plastic, pre-cabled
Type Rectangular Cylindrical

Compact Standard Diameter 30
51 x 16 x 7 88 x 25 x 13 Length 38.5
References of switches (1) d must be used in conjunction with safety modules XPS, see pages 5/174 to 5/177
Contact states shown are with the magnet positioned in front of the switch
WH
BN
2-pole N/C + N/O XCS DMC5902 XCS DMP5902 XCS DMR5902

BN BU
(N/C staggered)
WH BK
2-pole N/O + N/O (2) XCS DMC7902 XCS DMP7902 XCS DMR7902
(1 N/O staggered)
GY BK
WH BU
BN
3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O – XCS DMP5002 –

BN BU
GY PK
WH BK
(1 N/C staggered)
5 3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O (2) – XCS DMP7002 –

(1 N/O staggered)
BN BK
BU
WH PK
2-pole N/C + N/O XCS DMC5912 XCS DMP5912 XCS DMR5912

(N/C staggered)
BU
WH BK
+
BN
2-pole N/O + N/O (2) XCS DMC7912 XCS DMP7912 XCS DMR7912
(1 N/O staggered)
BU
BK
+
WH
GY
BN
3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O – XCS DMP5012 –

(1 N/C staggered)
BU
PK
WH BK
+
GY
BN
3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O (2) – XCS DMP7012 –

(1 N/O staggered)
BU
BK
PK
Weight (kg) 0.101 0.180 0.146

(1) Magnetic switch + coded magnet (XCS ZCpppp).
Switch pre-cabled with 2 m long cable. For other cable lengths, replace the last number of the reference (2) by 5 for a 5 m long cable or by 10 for a 10 m long cable.
Example: rectangular, compact switch with N/C + N/O contacts and 10 m cable becomes XCS DMC59010.
(2) Only to be wired in conjunction with an XPS AF module (see page 5/175).
Complementary characteristics not shown under General characteristics (page 5/167)

Operating zone Sao: 5 mm Sao: 8 mm Sao: 8 mm
Sar: 15 mm Sar: 20 mm Sar: 20 mm
Approach directions 3 directions 3 directions 1 direction
Accessories (page 5/170)
Dimensions:
page 5/172
5/168
characteristics 5
Plastic, connector on flying lead
Type Rectangular Cylindrical

Compact Standard Diameter 30
51 x 16 x 7 88 x 25 x 13 Length 38.5
M8 connector M12 connector M12 connector
References of switches (1) d must be used in conjunction with safety modules XPS, see pages 5/174 to 5/177
Contact states shown are with the magnet positioned in front of the switch
2
2-pole N/C + N/O XCS DMC590L01M8 XCS DMP590L01M12 XCS DMR590L01M12

(N/C staggered)
4
3
2
2-pole N/O + N/O (2) XCS DMC790L01M8 XCS DMP790L01M12 XCS DMR790L01M12
(1 N/O staggered)
4
3
6
3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O – XCS DMP500L01M12 –

(1 N/C staggered)
7
3
6
3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O (2) – XCS DMP700L01M12 – 5

(1 N/O staggered)
7
3
2
2-pole N/C + N/O XCS DMC591L01M8 XCS DMP591L01M12 XCS DMR591L01M12

(N/C staggered)
4
3
2
2-pole N/O + N/O (2) XCS DMC791L01M8 XCS DMP791L01M12 XCS DMR791L01M12
(1 N/O staggered)
4
3
6
3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O – XCS DMP501L01M12 –

(1 N/C staggered)
7
3
6
3-pole N/C + N/O + N/O (2) – XCS DMP701L01M12 –

(1 N/O staggered)
7
Weight (kg) 0.101 0.180 0.146

(1) Magnetic switch + coded magnet (XCS ZCpppp).
(2) Only to be wired in conjunction with an XPS AF module (see page 5/175).
Complementary characteristics not shown under General characteristics (page 5/167)

Operating zone Sao: 5 mm Sao: 8 mm Sao: 8 mm
Sar: 15 mm Sar: 20 mm Sar: 20 mm
Approach directions 3 directions 3 directions 1 direction
Accessories (page 5/170)
Dimensions:
page 5/172
5/169
characteristics 5
Accessories
Accessories
Accessories for coded magnetic switches XCS DMCppp2 XCS DMPppp2 XCS DMRppp2
XCS DMCpppL XCS DMPpppL XCS DMRpppL
Fixing clamp – XSZ B130
Weight (kg) – 0.080
Additional coded magnet XCS ZC1 XCS ZP1 XCS ZR1

Weight (kg) 0.009 0.050 0.018
Non-magnetic shims XCS ZCC (lot of 2) XCS ZCP (lot of 2) XCS ZCR
Weight (kg) 0.008 0.012 0.002
Pre-wired female connectors for connector version switches

Pre-wired connector characteristics
Pre-wired connector type XZ CP0941Lp, XZ CP1041Lp XZ CP29P11Lp XZ CP1141Lp, XZ CP1241Lp
Type of connection Screw threaded (metal Screw threaded (metal Screw threaded (metal
clamping ring) clamping ring) clamping ring)
Number of contacts 4 8 4
Degree of protection IP 67 (with clamping ring correctly tightened)
Ambient air temperature Static - 35…+ 90 °C - 35…+ 90 °C - 35…+ 90 °C
Dynamic - 5…+ 90 °C - 5…+ 90 °C - 5…+ 90 °C
Cabling Ø 5.2 mm cable, Ø 5.2 mm cable, Ø 5.2 mm cable,
wire c.s.a.: 4 x 0.34 mm2 wire c.s.a.: 8 x 0.25 mm 2 wire c.s.a.: 4 x 0.34 mm2
LED signalling – – –
Nominal voltage a 60 V, c 75 V a 250 V, c 300 V a 250 V, c 300 V
Nominal current 4A 2A 4A
Insulation resistance > 109 Ω > 109 Ω > 109 Ω
Contact resistance y 5 mΩ y 5 mΩ y 5 mΩ
5
References of pre-wired connectors
Type of Number For use with Type Cable Reference Weight
connector of pins length
m kg
503626
503627
Female, M8 4 XCS DMCpppL Straight 2 XZ CP0941L2 0.080

5 XZ CP0941L5 0.180
10 XZ CP0941L10 0.360
XZ CP0941Lp 5 XZ CP1041L5 0.180
10 XZ CP1041L10 0.360
Female, M12 8 XCS DMPpppL Straight 2 XZ CP29P11L2 0.100

534640
XZ CP1041Lp 5 XZ CP29P11L5 0.290

10 XZ CP29P11L10 0.470
Female, M12 4 XCS DMRpppL/ Straight 2 XZ CP1141L2 0.090

503630
XCS DMPpppL 5 XZ CP1141L5 0.190

XZ CP29P11Lp 10 XZ CP1141L10 0.370
5 XZ CP1241L5 0.190
10 XZ CP1241L10 0.370
563352
XZ CP1241Lp
XZ CP1141Lp
Dimensions:
page 5/173
5/170
Function diagrams 5
Function diagrams with magnet present (pre-cabled version)

XCS DMC59pp XCS DMC79pp XCS DMP50pp XCS DMP70pp
0 5 14 mm Colour 0 5 14 mm Colour 0 8 14 20 mm Colour 0 8 14 20 mm Colour

Sao (N/O): BN/BU Sao (N/O): BN/BU Sao Sar (N/O): BN/BU Sao Sar (N/O): BN/BU
F F F F
O
(N/C): BK/WH F
(N/O): BK/WH O
(N/C): BK/WH F
(N/O): BK/WH
Sar Sar O (N/C): GY/PK O (N/C): GY/PK
15 15
XCS DMR59pp/XCS DMP59pp XCS DMR79pp/XCS DMP79pp
0 8 14 20 mm Colour 0 8 14 20 mm Colour
Sao Sar (N/O): BN/BU Sao Sar (N/O): BN/BU
F F
O
(N/C): BK/WH F
(N/O): BK/WH
Function diagrams with magnet present (connector on flying lead version)

XCS DMC59pp XCS DMC79pp XCS DMP50pp XCS DMP70pp
0 5 14 mm Pin 0 5 14 mm Pin 0 8 14 20 mm Pin 0 8 14 20 mm Pin

Sao (N/O): 1/3 Sao (N/O): 1/3 Sao Sar (N/O): 1/3 Sao Sar (N/O): 1/3
F F F F
O
(N/C): 4/2 F
(N/O): 4/2 O
(N/C): 4/2 F
(N/O): 4/2
Sar Sar O (N/C): 6/7 O (N/C): 6/7
15 15
XCS DMR59pp/XCS DMP59pp XCS DMR79pp/XCS DMP79pp
0 8 14 20 mm Pin 0 8 14 20 mm Pin
F
O
Sao Sar (N/O): 1/3
(N/C): 4/2 F
F
Sao Sar (N/O): 1/3
(N/O): 4/2 5
Contact closed Sao: assured operating distance.

Sar: assured tripping distance.
Contact open Conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-3.
Contact unstable
References:
pages 5/168 and 5/169
5/171
Dimensions 5

Plastic

XCS DMC Coded magnet for XCS DMC
Pre-cabled connection Connector on flying lead connection XCS ZC1
16 16 16
7 (1) 12,5 7 (1) 12,5 7 (1) 12,5
8
8
16
16
16
51
51
51
151
(2)
(1) Counterbored: Ø 6 x 3.5 mm. (1) Counterbored: Ø 6 x 3.5 mm. (1) Counterbored: Ø 6 x 3.5 mm.
(2) M8 4-pin connector.
XCS DMP Coded magnet for XCS DMP

Pre-cabled connection Connector on flying lead connection XCS ZP1
5
(1)
151
88
78
88
78
78
78
3,5 8 6,5 3,5 8 6,5 13 3,5 8 6,5

25 25 25
(1) 4 or 6-pin M12 connector.
XCS DMR Coded magnet for XCS DMR

Pre-cabled connection Connector on flying lead connection XCS ZR1
M30x1,5
7
M30x1,5
(1)
16
13 (1)
38,5 38,5 151
(1) M12 4-pin connector. (1) 2 x Ø 4.3, countersunk: Ø 7.5 at 45°.
References:
pages 5/168 and 5/169
5/172
Dimensions (continued), Safety detection solutions 5
schemes, Coded magnetic switches

Plastic
mounting 5
Accessories
Fixing clamp Non-magnetic shims
XSZ B130 XCS ZCC XCS ZCP XCS ZCR
16 25
38,3 13 12,5 12 = 21,6 = 12 Ø30
30
16
35,5
31
51
18,5
2xØ4,3
16
78
88
65
8
3,5
21,7 4xØ3,5
39
(1)
Ø4,5
11,5
4 22 8

Pre-wired female connectors
XZ CP0941Lp XZ CP1041Lp XZ CP1141Lp XZ CP1241Lp XZ CP29P11Lp
Ø10 M8x1 19,7 Ø14,8 M12x1 27,4 M12x1

Ø10
Ø14,8
27,9
34,5
M8x1
34,6
42
M12x1
44
5
L
L
L
L
Ø7,5 Ø7,5 Ø11 Ø11 Ø11
Schemes
M8 pre-wired female connector M12 pre-wired female connector
XZ CP0941Lp XZ CP1141Lp, XZ CP1241Lp XZ CP29P11Lp
BK WH BU BK GY
5
4 2 3 4 YE PK
4 6
3 1
3 7
2 1 GN BU
BU BN
WH BN 2 1
BN WH
8
RD
Mounting
XCS DMC XCS DMP XCS DMR
d d c
b e
A B
b
b
a
a
Ød
C
a
A B
XCS a b c d e Non-magnetic shims

DMC 40 13 min. – 81 x 55 – A XCS ZCC
DMP 100 10 min. – 118 x 55 – B XCS ZCP
DMR 40 12 min. > 10 Ø 45 20 C XCS ZCR
– > 10 Ø 45 13
12 min. < 10 – 20
– < 10 – 17
5/173
Schemes, Safety detection solutions 5
connections 5
Plastic, pre-cabled
XCS DMP5ppp with XPS DMB

Wiring to category 4 conforming to EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1. Example with 3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O (1 N/C staggered) contact.
+ 24 V F1
Guard 1 closed To PLC
+ 24 V
Start
F S1
BN+
WH
S3
GY
K3
BU
PK
BK
ESC
XCS DM K4
A1 S11 S12 S13 Y1 Y2 13 23

XPS DMB
K1
Supply A1/A2 Fault
Fault K1/K2
Logic K2
K1/K2
A2 S21 S22 S23 Y34 Y44 14 24
S2
BU
PK
BK
To PLC
BN+
GY
WH
F
XCS DM K3 K4
+ 24 V To PLC
0V Guard 2 closed
5 2 solid-state outputs
Channel 1
Safety outputs
Channel 2
ESC: External start conditions.

XCS DMC5ppp, XCS DMP5ppp, XCS DMR5ppp with XPS DME
Wiring to category 4 conforming to EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1. Example with 2-pole N/C + N/O (N/C staggered) contact.
+ 24 V F1
Guard 1 closed Guard 3 closed Guard 5 closed
S1 XCS DM S3 XCS DM S5 XCS DM S7 Start

ESC
BN+
BN+
BN+
WH
WH
WH
K3
BU
BU
BU
BK
BK
BK
K4
A1 S11 S12 S13 S31 S32 S33 S51 S52 S53 Y1 Y2 13 23
XPS DME
Supply A1/A2 S13 S33 S53 K1
Fault
Fault S12 S32 S52
K1/K2
Logic
K1/K2 S23 S43 S63 K2
S22 S42 S62
A2 S21 S22 S23 S41 S42 S43 S61 S62 S63 Y34 Y44 14 24
S2 XCS DM S4 XCS DM S6 XCS DM

BU
BU
BU
BK
BK
BK
To PLC
BN+
BN+
BN+
WH
WH
WH
K3 K4
0V Guard 2 closed Guard 4 closed Guard 6 closed

Chnl. 1 Chnl. 2
2 solid-state outputs
Safety outputs
References:
pages 5/168 and 5/169
5/174
connections (continued) 5
Plastic, pre-cabled
Connection of up to 3 magnetic switches, with an LED on one input, with XPS DMp (1)
Wiring to category 3 conforming to EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1
Example with 2-pole N/C + N/O contact Example with 3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O contact
+ 24 V
F
S1.1 XCS DM S1.1
XCS DM
BN+
BN+
WH
GY
WH
BU
PK
BK
BU
BK
S1.2 XCS DM S1.2

XCS DM
BN+
BN+
WH
GY
WH
BU
PK
BK
BU
BK
S1.3 XCS DM S1.3

XCS DM
BN+
BN+
WH
GY
WH
BU
PK
BK
BU
BK
To PLC
S11 S12 S13 S11 S12 S13
5
S21 S22 S23
S21 S22 S23
(1) Input: S11, S12, S13 or S21, S22, S23.

XCS DMp7ppp with XPS AF
Wiring to category 4 conforming to EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1. Example with 2-pole N/C + N/C contact (not conforming to standard EN 1088/ISO 14119)
L ( +) F1
K3
S2 Start
K4
ESC (1) (2)
A1 S33 S34 S39 13 23 33

XPS AF
K1
Logic
T
K2
A2 S11 S21 S22 S12 14 24 34
S1 XCS DM
BU
BK
BN+
WH
K3 K4
N( )
(1) With start button monitoring.

(2) Without start button monitoring.
5/175
connections 5
XCS DMP5ppp with XPS DMB

Wiring to category 4 conforming to EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1. Example with 3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O (1 N/C staggered) contact.
+ 24 V F1
Guard 1 closed To PLC
+ 24 V
Start
F S1
S3
K3
6
1
3
7
4
ESC
XCS DM K4
A1 S11 S12 S13 Y1 Y2 13 23

XPS DMB
K1
Supply A1/A2 Fault
Fault K1/K2
Logic K2
K1/K2
A2 S21 S22 S23 Y34 Y44 14 24
S2
7
To PLC
1
6
F
XCS DM K3 K4
+ 24 V To PLC
0V Guard 2 closed
5 2 solid-state outputs
Channel 1
Safety outputs
Channel 2

XCS DMC5ppp, XCS DMP5ppp, XCS DMR5ppp with XPS DME
Wiring to category 4 conforming to EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1. Example with 2-pole N/C + N/O (N/C staggered) contact.
+ 24 V F1
Guard 1 closed Guard 3 closed Guard 5 closed
S1 XCS DM S3 XCS DM S5 XCS DM S7 Start

ESC
K3
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
K4
A1 S11 S12 S13 S31 S32 S33 S51 S52 S53 Y1 Y2 13 23
XPS DME
Supply A1/A2 S13 S33 S53 K1
Fault
Fault S12 S32 S52
K1/K2
Logic
K1/K2 S23 S43 S63 K2
S22 S42 S62
A2 S21 S22 S23 S41 S42 S43 S61 S62 S63 Y34 Y44 14 24
S2 XCS DM S4 XCS DM S6 XCS DM

To PLC
3
3
4
4
1
1
2
K3 K4
0V Guard 2 closed Guard 4 closed Guard 6 closed

Chnl. 1 Chnl. 2
2 solid-state outputs
Safety outputs
References:
pages 5/168 and 5/169
5/176
Connection of up to 3 magnetic switches, with an LED on one input, with XPS DMp (1)
Wiring to category 3 conforming to EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1
Example with 2-pole N/C + N/O contact Example with 3-pole N/C + N/C + N/O contact
+ 24 V
F
S1.1 XCS DM S1.1
XCS DM
1
6
2
2
3
7
4
3
4
S1.2 XCS DM S1.2

XCS DM
1
6
2
2
3
7
4
3
4
S1.3 XCS DM S1.3

XCS DM
1
6
2
2
3
7
4
3
4
To PLC
S11 S12 S13 S11 S12 S13
5
S21 S22 S23
S21 S22 S23
(1) Input: S11, S12, S13 or S21, S22, S23.

XCS DMp7ppp with XPS AF
Wiring to category 4 conforming to EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1. Example with 2-pole N/C + N/C contact (not conforming to standard EN 1088/ISO 14119)
L ( +) F1
K3
S2 Start
K4
ESC (1) (2)
A1 S33 S34 S39 13 23 33

XPS AF
K1
Logic
T
K2
A2 S11 S21 S22 S12 14 24 34
S1 XCS DM
4
3
1
2
K3 K4
N( )
(1) With start button monitoring.

(2) Without start button monitoring.
5/177
terminology 5
Osiswitch®
General
Presentation Electromechanical detection

Limit switches are used in all automated installations and also in a wide variety of applications,
due to the numerous advantages inherent to their technology.
They transmit data to the logic processing system regarding:
v presence/absence,
v passing,
v positioning,
v end of travel.
Simplicity of installation, advantages

b From an electrical viewpoint
v galvanic separation of circuits,
v models suitable for low power switching, combined with good electrical durability,
v very good short-circuit withstand in coordination with appropriate fuses,
v total immunity to electromagnetic interference,
v high rated operational voltage.
b From a mechanical viewpoint
v N/C contacts with positive opening operation,
v high resistance to the different ambient conditions encountered in industry (standard tests
and specific tests under laboratory conditions),
v high repeat accuracy, up to 0.01 mm on the tripping points.
Detection movements
b Linear movement b Rotary movement (lever) b Multi-directional movement
(plunger)
Unactuated Tripped Unactuated Tripped Unactuated Tripped
Terminology Rated value of a quantity b This replaces the term “nominal value”.
b It is the fixed value for a specific function.
Utilisation categories b AC-15 replaces AC-11: control of an electromagnet on a.c.,
test 10 le/le.
b AC-12: control of a resistive load on a.c. or static load isolated
by opto-coupler.
b DC-13 replaces DC-11: control of an electromagnet on d.c.,
test le/le.
Positive opening travel b Minimum travel from the initial movement of contact actuator to
the position required to accomplish positive opening operation.
Positive opening force b The force required on the contact actuator to accomplish
positive opening operation.
Switching capacity b Ithe is no longer a rated value but a conventional current used
for heating tests.
Example: for category A300 the corresponding operational
current, le maximum, is 6 A-120 V or 3 A-240 V, the equivalent Ithe
being 10 A.
Positive opening b A limit switch complies to this specification when all the closed
operation contact elements of the switch can be changed, with certainty,
to the open position (no flexible link between the moving
contacts and the operator of the switch, to which an actuating
force is applied).
b All limit switches incorporating either a slow break contact
block or a snap action N/C + N/O (form Zb), N/C + N/O + N/O,
N/C +
N/C + N/O, N/C + N/C + N/O + N/O contact block are positive
opening operation, in complete conformity with standard
IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix K.
5/178
Contact blocks 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch®
General
Contact blocks Snap action contacts

b Snap action contacts are characterised by different tripping and reset points (differential
travel).
b The displacement speed of the moving contacts is not related to the speed of the operator.
b This feature ensures satisfactory electrical performance in applications involving low speed
actuators.
13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14
21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22
Unactuated state Approach travel Contact change of state Positive opening

Slow break contacts
b Slow break contacts are characterised by identical tripping and resetting points.
b The displacement speed of the moving contacts is equal, or proportional, to the speed of the
operator (which must not be less than 1 m/s = 6 m/minute).
The opening distance is also dependent on the distance travelled by the operator.
21 22 21 22
13 14 13 14
5
Electrical durability for normal loads
V Insulation voltage limit b Normally, for inductive loads, the current value is less than 0.1 A (sealed), i.e. values of 3 to
500 40 VA sealed and 30 to 1000 VA inrush, depending on the voltage.
For this type of application the electrical durability will exceed 10 million operating cycles.
3 Application example: XCK J161 + LC1 D12pppp (7 VA sealed, 70 VA inrush).
240 Electrical durability = 10 million operating cycles.
200
Switching capacity
150
4 1 Normal industrial PLC input type 1
120
100 2 Normal industrial PLC input type 2
3 Switching capacity conforming to IEC 60947-5-5, utilisation category AC-15, DC-13
60 A300 240 V 3 A B300 240 V 1.5 A
(1) Inductive
48 zone
Q300 250 V 0.27 A R300 250 V 0.13 A
4 Switching capacity conforming to IEC 60947-5-1, utilisation category AC-15, DC-13
24 A300 120 V 6 A B300 120 V 3 A
Heating limit (Ithe)
20 Q300 125 V 0.55 A R300 125 V 0.27 A

1
15 Electrical durability for small loads
2
10 b The use of limit switches with programmable controllers is becoming more common.
8 b With small loads, limit switches offer the following levels of reliability:
v failure rate of less than 1 for 100 million operating cycles using snap action contacts (contacts
6
5 XE2 S P).
1 mA 2 3 mA 6 mA 10 1A 2 A 3A 6A 10 A v failure rate of less than 1 for 20 million operating cycles using slow break contacts (contacts
mA mA XEpN P and XE3 S P).
v failure rate of less than 1 for 5 million operating cycles using contacts XCM D.
Range of use
Standard contacts XE2S P2151, P3151
Continuous service XE2N Ppppp
(frequent switching)
Contacts of XCM D
XE3p Ppppp
Gold flashed Occasional service (1)
contacts Infrequent switching,
on resistive load y 1 operating cycle/
day and/or corrosive
atmosphere
(1) Usable up to 48 V/10 mA.
5/179
Contact blocks (continued) 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch®
Contact blocks
General
Contact blocks (continued) Functional diagrams of snap action contacts

b Example: N/C + N/O
A
B P A - Maximum travel of the operator in millimetres or degrees.
B - Tripping travel of contact.
21 - 22 Tripping C - Resetting travel of contact.
13 - 14 D - Differential travel = B - C.
21 - 22 Resetting
13 - 14 P - Point from which positive opening is assured.
0
C D
v Linear movement (plunger)

0
D C
1 1 - Resetting point of contact.

B
2 2 - Tripping point of contact.

A
P A - Maximum travel of the operator in millimetres.

max. B - Tripping travel of contact.
C - Resetting travel of contact.
D - Differential travel = B - C.
P - Point from which positive opening is assured.
v Rotary movement (lever)
B 1 - Resetting point of contact.

2 - Tripping point of contact.
C 1 A A - Maximum travel of the operator in degrees.
2 B - Tripping travel of contact.
D
C - Resetting travel of contact.
D - Differential travel = B - C.
P
Functional diagrams of slow break contacts

b Example: N/C + N/O break before make
A
B P A - Maximum travel of the operator in millimetres or degrees.

B - Tripping and resetting travel of contact 21-22.
C - Tripping and resetting travel of contact 13-14.
21 - 22 Tripping
13 - 14 and
0 Resetting
C
0 v Linear movement (plunger)

B
1 1 - Tripping and resetting points of contact 21-22.

C
2 2 - Tripping and resetting points of contact 13-14.

A
P A - Maximum travel of the operator in millimetres.

max. B - Tripping and resetting travel of contact 21-22.
C - Tripping and resetting travel of contact 13-14.
P - Positive opening point.
v Rotary movement (lever)
C 1 - Tripping and resetting points of contact 21-22.

2 - Tripping and resetting points of contact 13-14.
A A - Maximum travel of the operator in degrees.
B 2 B - Tripping and resetting travel of contact 21-22.
1 C - Tripping and resetting travel of contact 13-14.
P - Positive opening point.
5/180
Contact blocks (continued), Limit switches 5
mounting 5
Osiswitch®
General
Contact blocks (continued) Contact connections

b Tightening torque:
v minimum tightening torque ensuring the nominal characteristics of the contact: 0.8 N.m,
v maximum tightening torque without damage to the terminals: 1.2 N.m for XE2 pP, 1 N.m for
XE3 pP.
b Connecting cable: cable preparation lengths:
v for XE2p P, L = 22 mm,
v for XE2p P3ppp, L = 45 mm.
XE2p P screw clamp terminal connections
v for XE3p P, L = 14 mm, L1 = 11 mm.
L L1
XE3p P screw clamp terminal connections

Mounting Sweep of connecting cable
1 Recommended
2 To be avoided
1 2
5
Position of cable gland

1 Recommended
2 To be avoided 1 2
Type of cam
1 Recommended 1 2
2 To be avoided 30 30
Mounting and fixing limit switches by the head

1 Recommended Types XCK D, XCK P and XCK T, XCM D and XCM N
2 Forbidden
1 2 2
5/181
Setting-up 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch®
General
Setting-up Tightening torque

b The minimum torque is that required to ensure correct operation of the switch.
b The maximum torque is the value which, if exceeded, will damage the switch.
Range Item Torque (N.m)
Min. Max.
Compact design XCK D, XCK P, Cover 0.8 1.2
XCK T Fixing screw for lever on rotary head 1 1.5
Miniature design XCM D, XCM N – – –
Fixing screw for lever on rotary head 1 1.5
Compact design XCK N Cover 0.8 1.2
Fixing screw for lever on rotary head 1 1.5
Classic design XCK J Cover 1 1.5
Fixing nut for lever on rotary head 1 1.5
Classic design XCK S Cover 0.8 1.2
Fixing nut for lever on rotary head 1 1.5
Classic design XCK M, XCK ML, Cover 0.8 1.2
XCK L Fixing nut for lever on rotary head 1 1.5
Types XCK D, XCK P, XCK T, XCM D
b Adjustable in 3 planes:
15˚
15˚
15˚
All the heads can be adjusted in All the levers can be adjusted in 15° steps throughout 360°,
15° steps throughout 360°, in in relation to the horizontal axis of the head.
relation to the body.
Type XCK J
b Adjustable throughout 360° in 5° steps, or in 45° steps by reversing the lever or its mounting.
1 Reversed α = 5°
2 Forward α = 45°
45° steps
5° steps
throughout
throughout
360°
360°
1 2
5/182
Setting-up (continued) 5
Limit switches 5
Osiswitch®
General
Setting-up (continued) Direction of actuation programming

b XC2 J
Head ZC2 JE05
b XCK J
Head ZCK E05
b XCK S
5
Head ZCK D05
b XCK D, XCK P, XCK T and XCM D
Head ZCE 05
Specific cams for heads ZCK E09 and ZC2 J09

1 0.5 mm min.
2 2 mm min.
1
B
2
A
A = length of lever + 11 mm
ZCK E09: 13 < h < 18 mm and B = 12 mm max.
ZCK JE09: 14 < h < 24 mm and B = 6 mm max.
5/183
Reminder of Limit switches 5
the standards 5
Osiswitch®
General
Reminder of the standards

The majority of Telemecanique products comply to national standards (for example French NF C standards, German DIN standards), European
standards (for example CENELEC) or international standards (for example IEC). These standards rigidly stipulate the characteristic requirements of
the designated products (for example IEC 60947 relating to low voltage switchgear and controlgear).
These products, when correctly used, enable the production of control equipment assemblies, machine control equipment or installations conforming
to their own specific standards (for example IEC 60204 for the electrical equipment of industrial machines).
IEC 60947-5-1
Insulation coordination (and dielectric strength) b The standard IEC 60664 defines 4 categories of prospective transient overvoltages. It is
important for the user to select control circuit components which are able to withstand these
overvoltages. To these ends, the manufacturer states the rated impulse withstand voltage (U
imp) applicable to the product.
Terminal connections b The cabling capacity, mechanical robustness and durability of the terminals, as well as the
ability to resist loosening, are verified by standardised tests.
b Terminal reference marking conforms to standard EN 50013.
Switching capacity b With maximum electrical load. A single designation (A300 for example) enables indication of
the contact block characteristics related to its utilisation category.
Positive opening operation (IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix K) b For contacts used in safety applications (end of travel, emergency stop device, etc.) the
assurance of positive opening is required (see IEC 60204, EN 60204) after each test, the
opening of the contact being verified by testing with an impulse voltage (2500 V).
Electrical symbols for contacts b Form Za, b Form Zb,
the 2 contacts are the 2 contacts are electrically separate.
the same polarity.
Symbol for positive opening b Simplified b Complete symbol

version
CENELEC EN 50047
The European standards organisation CENELEC, which has 14 member countries, has defined in this standard the first type of limit switch.
It defines 4 variants of devices (forms A, B, C, E). (1) Minimum value A: reference axis
Limit switches XCK P, XCK D and XCK T conform to (2) Maximum value H: differential travel
standard EN 50047. P: tripping point
E: cable entry
Form A, with roller lever Form B, with end plunger (rounded)
5
50 (2)
20 (1)
H P
12,5
P
5 (1)
H
55
40
10 (1)
A
15 (1)
21 (1)
55 (2)
E
31 (2)
12,5 (1)
30 (2)
Form C, with end roller plunger Form E, with roller lever for 1 direction of actuation
10 (1) 10 (1)
20 (1)
H
12,5
P
2,5 (1)
35
5 (1)
25
10 2
20 (1)
P H
H
31 (1)
25 (1)
P
28
40
30 (2)
5/184
Reminder of Limit switches 5
the standards (continued) 5

Osiswitch®
General
Reminder of the standards (continued)

CENELEC EN 50041
The European standards organisation CENELEC, which has 14 member countries, has defined in this standard the second type of limit switch.
It defines 6 variants of devices (forms A, B, C, D, F, G). (1) Minimum value A: reference axis Za: tripping zone
Limit switches XCK J and XCK S conform to standard (2) Maximum value B: optional elongated holes Sa: tripping threshold
EN 50041. H: differential travel
P: tripping point
E: cable entry
Form A, with roller lever Form B, with end plunger (rounded)
70 (2)
20 (1)
H P
P
H
70 (2)
5 (1)
40 (1)
67
5,3
31(1)
10 (1)
A
7,3
80 (2)
E B
15 (1)
30 42,5 (2)
46 (2)
Form C, with end roller plunger Form D, with rod lever

Za
˚ 40
40 ˚
10 (1) H P
5
Sa
20 (2) 20 (2)
100 (1)
200
3 (1)
58
20 (1)
P
H
53 (1)
44 (1)
Form F, with side plunger (rounded) Form G, with side roller plunger
56 (1)
20 (1) 58 20 (1) 41
39 (1)
47 (1) 30˚
30 (1)
H
H
3
20
20
H H
H
72 55
H H 3 (1)
20
59 (1) 41 (1)
67 (1) 50 (1)
5/185
Substitution table Limit switches 5 5

functionalities 0
Old design New Osiswitch design Old design New Osiswitch design Old design New Osiswitch design
Miniature design XCMA1035E ZCE02 + ZCMD21 + XCMA115 XCMD2115L1

ZCMC21E5
XCMA102 XCMD2102L1 XCMA1150 ZCE01 + ZCY15 +
XCMA1036 ZCE02 + ZCMC21L7 + ZCMC21L10 + ZCMD21
XCMA1020 ZCE02 + ZCMC21L10 + ZCMD21
ZCMD21 XCMA1152 ZCE01 + ZCY15 + ZCMD21L2
XCMA1037 ZCE02 + ZCMC21L7 +
XCMA1022 ZCE02 + ZCMD21L2 ZCMD21 XCMA1153 ZCE01 + ZCY15 + ZCMC21L3
+ ZCMD21
XCMA1022AE ZCE02 + ZCMD61 + XCMA1038 ZCE02 + ZCMC21L10 +
ZCMC21E2 ZCMD21 XCMA1154 ZCE01 + ZCY15 + ZCMC21L3
+ ZCMD21
XCMA1022E ZCE02 + ZCMD21 + XCMA1039 ZCE02 + ZCMC21L10 +
ZCMC21E2 ZCMD21 XCMA1155 ZCE01 + ZCY15 + ZCMD21L5
XCMA1023 ZCE02 + ZCMC21L3 + XCMA103AE ZCE02 + ZCMD61 + XCMA1156 ZCE01 + ZCY15 + ZCMC21L7
ZCMD21 ZCMC21E1 + ZCMD21
XCMA1023AE ZCE02 + ZCMD61 + XCMA103E ZCE02 + ZCMD21 + XCMA115L0120 ZCE01 + ZCY15 +

ZCMC21E3 ZCMC21E1 ZCMD21L08R12
XCMA1023E ZCE02 + ZCMD21 + XCMA103L0120 ZCE02 + ZCMD21L08R12 XCMA115M1020 ZCE01 + ZCY15 +

ZCMC21E3 ZCMD21L08U78
XCMA103M1020 ZCE02 + ZCMD21L08U78
XCMA1024 ZCE02 + ZCMD21L5 XCMA115T200 XCMD2115C12
XCMA103T200 XCMD2102C12
XCMA1024AE ZCE02 + ZCMD61 + XCMA115T300 XCMD2115M12
ZCMC21E5 XCMA103T300 XCMD2102M12
XCMA116 XCMD2116L1
XCMA1024E ZCE02 + ZCMD21 + XCMA110 XCMD2110L1
XCMA1160 ZCE01 + ZCY16 +
ZCMC21E5
XCMA1100 ZCE10 + ZCMC21L10 + ZCMC21L10 + ZCMD21
XCMA1025 ZCE02 + ZCMD21L5 ZCMD21
XCMA1162 ZCE01 + ZCY16 + ZCMD21L2
XCMA1025AE ZCE02 + ZCMD61 + XCMA1102 ZCE10 + ZCMD21L2
XCMA1162AE ZCE01 + ZCY16 + ZCMD61 +
ZCMC21E5
XCMA1102AE ZCE10 + ZCMD61 + ZCMC21E2
XCMA1025E ZCE02 + ZCMD21 + ZCMC21E2
XCMA1162E ZCE01 + ZCY16 + ZCMD21 +
ZCMC21E5
XCMA1026 ZCE02 + ZCMC21L7 + ZCMC21E2
XCMA1163 ZCE01 + ZCY16 + ZCMC21L3
ZCMD21
XCMA1103 ZCE10 + ZCMC21L3 + + ZCMD21
5 XCMA1028
ZCMD21
ZCE02 + ZCMC21L10 +
XCMA1103AE ZCE10 + ZCMD61 +
ZCMC21E3
ZCMC21E3
ZCMD21
XCMA1029 ZCE02 + ZCMC21L10 + ZCMC21E3
ZCMD21
XCMA1104 ZCE10 + ZCMD21L5
ZCMC21E1
ZCMC21E5
XCMA102E ZCE02 + ZCMD21 +
ZCMC21E1
ZCMC21E5
XCMA102L0120 ZCE02 + ZCMD21L08R12
XCMA102M1020 ZCE02 + ZCMD21L08U78
XCMA102T200 XCMD2102C12 ZCMC21E5
XCMA102T300 XCMD2102M12 XCMA1105E ZCE10 + ZCMD21 + ZCMC21E5
ZCMC21E5
XCMA103 XCMD2102L1 XCMA1166 ZCE01 + ZCY16 + ZCMC21L7
XCMA1106 ZCE10 + ZCMC21L7 + + ZCMD21
ZCMD21 XCMA116AE ZCE01 + ZCY16 + ZCMD61 +
XCMA1032 ZCE02 + ZCMD21L2 ZCMC21E1
XCMA1032AE ZCE02 + ZCMD61 + XCMA110E ZCE10 + ZCMD21 + ZCMC21E1
ZCMC21E2 ZCMC21E1
XCMA116L0120 ZCE01 + ZCY16 +
XCMA1032E ZCE02 + ZCMD21 + XCMA110L0120 ZCE10 + ZCMD21L08R12 ZCMD21L08R12
ZCMC21E2
XCMA110M1020 ZCE10 + ZCMD21L08U78 XCMA116M1020 ZCE01 + ZCY16 +
XCMA1033 ZCE02 + ZCMC21L3 + ZCMD21L08U78
ZCMD21 XCMA110T200 XCMD2110C12
XCMA1033AE ZCE02 + ZCMD61 + XCMA110T300 XCMD2110M12
ZCMC21E3 XCMA116T300 XCMD2116M12
XCMA111 XCMD2111L1
XCMA1033E ZCE02 + ZCMD21 + XCMA117 XCMD2117L1
ZCMC21E3
ZCMD21 XCMA1170 ZCE01 + ZCY17 +
XCMA1034 ZCE02 + ZCMD21L5 ZCMC21L10 + ZCMD21
XCMA1034AE ZCE02 + ZCMD61 + XCMA1172 ZCE01 + ZCY17 + ZCMD21L2
ZCMC21E5
ZCMD21 XCMA1173 ZCE01 + ZCY17 + ZCMC21L3
XCMA1034E ZCE02 + ZCMD21 + + ZCMD21
ZCMC21E5
ZCMD21
ZCMC21E5
5/186

functionalities 0
Miniature design (continued) XCMA1270 ZCE01 + ZCY23 + XCMB5153 ZCE01 + ZCY15 + ZCMC25L3
ZCMC21L10 + ZCMD21 + ZCMD25
+ ZCMD21 XCMA1272 ZCE01 + ZCY23 + ZCMC21L2 XCMB5154 ZCE01 + ZCY15 + ZCMD25L5
+ ZCMD21
XCMA117L0120 ZCE01 + ZCY17 + XCMB5155 ZCE01 + ZCY15 + ZCMD25L5
ZCMD21L08R12 XCMA1273 ZCE01 + ZCY23 + ZCMC21L3
+ ZCMD21 XCMB5156 ZCE01 + ZCY15 + ZCMC25L7
XCMA117M1020 ZCE01 + ZCY17 + + ZCMD25
ZCMD21L08U78 XCMA1274 ZCE01 + ZCY23 + ZCMC21L5
+ ZCMD21 XCMB516 XCMD2516L1
XCMA1275 ZCE01 + ZCY23 + ZCMC21L5 XCMB5160 ZCE01 + ZCY16 +
XCMA117T300 XCMD2117M12 + ZCMD21 ZCMC25L10 + ZCMD25
XCMA125 ZCE01 + ZCY25 + ZCMC21L1 XCMA1276 ZCE01 + ZCY23 + ZCMC21L7 XCMB5162 ZCE01 + ZCY16 + ZCMD25L2
+ ZCMD21 + ZCMD21 XCMB5163 ZCE01 + ZCY16 + ZCMC25L3
XCMA1250 ZCE01 + ZCY25 + XCMA1277 ZCE01 + ZCY23 + ZCMC21L7 + ZCMD25
ZCMC21L10 + ZCMD21 + ZCMD21 XCMB5164 ZCE01 + ZCY16 + ZCMD25L5
XCMA1252 ZCE01 + ZCY25 + ZCMC21L2 XCMA1278 ZCE01 + ZCY23 + XCMB5165 ZCE01 + ZCY16 + ZCMD25L5
+ ZCMD21 ZCMC21L10 + ZCMD21
XCMB5166 ZCE01 + ZCY16 + ZCMC25L7
XCMA1252AE ZCE01 + ZCY25 + ZCMC21E2 XCMA1279 ZCE01 + ZCY23 + + ZCMD25
+ ZCMD61 ZCMC21L10 + ZCMD21
XCMB517 XCMD2517L1
XCMA1252E ZCE01 + ZCY25 + ZCMC21E2 XCMB502 XCMD2502L1
+ ZCMD21 XCMB5170 ZCE01 + ZCY17 +
XCMB5020 ZCE02 + ZCMC25L10 + ZCMC25L10 + ZCMD25
XCMA1253 ZCE01 + ZCY25 + ZCMC21L3 ZCMD25
+ ZCMD21 XCMB5172 ZCE01 + ZCY17 + ZCMD25L2
XCMB5022 ZCE02 + ZCMD25L2
XCMA1253AE ZCE01 + ZCY25 + ZCMC21E3 XCMB5173 ZCE01 + ZCY17 + ZCMC25L3
+ ZCMD61 XCMB5023 ZCE02 + ZCMC25L3 + + ZCMD25
ZCMD25
XCMA1253E ZCE01 + ZCY25 + ZCMC21E3 XCMB5174 ZCE01 + ZCY17 + ZCMD25L5
+ ZCMD21 XCMB5024 ZCE02 + ZCMD25L5
XCMB5175 ZCE01 + ZCY17 + ZCMD25L5
XCMA1254 ZCE01 + ZCY25 + ZCMC21L5 XCMB5025 ZCE02 + ZCMD25L5
XCMB5026 ZCE02 + ZCMC25L7 + + ZCMD25
XCMA1254AE ZCE01 + ZCY25 + ZCMC21E5 ZCMD25
XCMA1254E ZCE01 + ZCY25 + ZCMC21E5

+ ZCMD21
XCMB503
XCMB5030
XCMD2502L1
ZCE02 + ZCMC25L10 + XCMB5250
+ ZCMD25
ZCE01 + ZCY25 +
5
ZCMD25 ZCMC25L10 + ZCMD25
XCMB5032 ZCE02 + ZCMD25L2 XCMB5252 ZCE01 + ZCY25 + ZCMC25L2
+ ZCMD21
XCMA1255AE ZCE01 + ZCY25 + ZCMC21E5
ZCMD25 XCMB5253 ZCE01 + ZCY25 + ZCMC25L3
+ ZCMD61
XCMB5034 ZCE02 + ZCMD25L5 + ZCMD25
XCMA1255E ZCE01 + ZCY25 + ZCMC21E5
+ ZCMD21 XCMB5035 ZCE02 + ZCMD25L5 XCMB5254 ZCE01 + ZCY25 + ZCMC25L5
+ ZCMD25
XCMA1256 ZCE01 + ZCY25 + ZCMC21L7 XCMB5036 ZCE02 + ZCMC25L7 +
+ ZCMD21 ZCMD25 XCMB5255 ZCE01 + ZCY25 + ZCMC25L5
+ ZCMD25
XCMA125AE ZCE01 + ZCY25 + ZCMC61E1 XCMB510 XCMD2510L1
XCMA125E ZCE01 + ZCY25 + ZCMC21E1 ZCMD25
+ ZCMD21 XCMB5103 ZCE10 + ZCMC25L3 + XCMB5260 ZCE01 + ZCY26 +
ZCMD25 ZCMC25L10 + ZCMD25
XCMA1260 ZCE01 + ZCY26 +
ZCMC21L10 + ZCMD21 XCMB5104 ZCE10 + ZCMD25L5 XCMB5262 ZCE01 + ZCY26 + ZCMC25L2
+ ZCMD25
XCMA1262 ZCE01 + ZCY26 + ZCMC21L2 XCMB5105 ZCE10 + ZCMD25L5
XCMA1263 ZCE01 + ZCY26 + ZCMC21L3 ZCMD25
XCMB511 XCMD2511L1 + ZCMD25
XCMB5110 ZCE11 + ZCMC25L10 + XCMB5265 ZCE01 + ZCY26 + ZCMC25L5
+ ZCMD21
ZCMD25 + ZCMD25
XCMB5112 ZCE11 + ZCMD25L2 XCMB5266 ZCE01 + ZCY26 + ZCMC25L7
+ ZCMD21
ZCMD25 XCMB5267 ZCE01 + ZCY26 + ZCMC25L7
+ ZCMD21
+ ZCMD21 XCMB5115 ZCE11 + ZCMD25L5 XCMB5268 ZCE01 + ZCY26 +
ZCMC25L10 + ZCMD25
XCMA1268 ZCE01 + ZCY26 + XCMB5116 ZCE11 + ZCMC25L7 +
ZCMC21L10 + ZCMD21 ZCMD25 XCMB5269 ZCE01 + ZCY26 +
ZCMC25L10 + ZCMD25
XCMA1269 ZCE01 + ZCY26 + XCMB515 XCMD2515L1
ZCMC21L10 + ZCMD21 XCMB527 ZCE01 + ZCY23 + ZCMC25L1
XCMB5150 ZCE01 + ZCY15 + + ZCMD25
XCMA127 ZCE01 + ZCY23 + ZCMC21L1 ZCMC25L10 + ZCMD25
+ ZCMD21 XCMB5270 ZCE01 + ZCY23 +
XCMB5152 ZCE01 + ZCY15 + ZCMD25L2 ZCMC25L10 + ZCMD25
5/187

functionalities 0
Miniature design (continued) XCMF1033E ZCEF2 + ZCMD21 + XCMF1114 ZCEG1 + ZCMD21L5

ZCMC21E3
XCMB5272 ZCE01 + ZCY23 + ZCMC25L2 XCMF1115 ZCEG1 + ZCMD21L5
+ ZCMD25 XCMF1034 ZCEF2 + ZCMD21L5
XCMF1116 ZCEG1 + ZCMC21L7 +
XCMB5273 ZCE01 + ZCY23 + ZCMC25L3 XCMF1034AE ZCEF2 + ZCMD61 + ZCMD21
+ ZCMD25 ZCMC21E5
XCMB5274 ZCE01 + ZCY23 + ZCMC25L5 XCMF1034E ZCEF2 + ZCMD21 + ZCMD21
+ ZCMD25 ZCMC21E5
XCMB5275 ZCE01 + ZCY23 + ZCMC25L5 XCMF1035 ZCEF2 + ZCMD21L5 ZCMD21
+ ZCMD25
XCMF1035AE ZCEF2 + ZCMD61 + XCMF1119 ZCEG1 + ZCMC21L10 +
XCMB5276 ZCE01 + ZCY23 + ZCMC25L7 ZCMC21E5 ZCMD21
+ ZCMD25
XCMF1035E ZCEF2 + ZCMD21 + XCMG502 XCMD25F2L1
XCMB5277 ZCE01 + ZCY23 + ZCMC25L7 ZCMC21E5
XCMG5020 ZCEF2 + ZCMC25L10 +
+ ZCMD25
XCMF1036 ZCEF2 + ZCMC21L7 + ZCMD25
XCMB5278 ZCE01 + ZCY23 + ZCMD21
XCMG5022 ZCEF2 + ZCMD25L2
ZCMC25L10 + ZCMD25
XCMF1037 ZCEF2 + ZCMC21L7 +
ZCMD21 XCMG5023 ZCEF2 + ZCMC25L3 +
XCMB5279 ZCE01 + ZCY23 +
ZCMD25
ZCMC25L10 + ZCMD25
ZCMD21 XCMG5024 ZCEF2 + ZCMD25L5
XCMF102 XCMD21F2L1
XCMF1039 ZCEF2 + ZCMC21L10 + XCMG5025 ZCEF2 + ZCMD25L5
ZCMD21 ZCMD21 XCMG5026 ZCEF2 + ZCMC25L7 +
XCMF103AE ZCEF2 + ZCMD61 + ZCMD25
XCMF1022 ZCEF2 + ZCMD21L2
ZCMC21E1 XCMG5027 ZCEF2 + ZCMC25L7 +
XCMF1022AE ZCEF2 + ZCMD61 +
XCMF103E ZCEF2 + ZCMD21 + ZCMD25
ZCMC21E2
XCMF1022E ZCEF2 + ZCMD21 +
XCMF110 XCMD21F0L1 ZCMD25
ZCMC21E2
XCMF1100 ZCEF0 + ZCMC21L10 + XCMG5029 ZCEF2 + ZCMC25L10 +
ZCMD21 ZCMD25
ZCMD21
XCMF1102 ZCEF0 + ZCMD21L2 XCMG503 XCMD25F2L1
5 XCMF1023E ZCEF2 + ZCMD21 +
ZCMC21E3
ZCMC21E2 ZCMD25
XCMF1102E ZCEF0 + ZCMD21 + XCMG5032 ZCEF2 + ZCMD25L2

XCMF1024 ZCEF2 + ZCMD21L5 ZCMC21E2 XCMG5033 ZCEF2 + ZCMC25L3 +
ZCMC21E5 ZCMD21 XCMG5034 ZCEF2 + ZCMD25L5
XCMF1024E ZCEF2 + ZCMD21 + XCMF1103AE ZCEF0 + ZCMD61 + XCMG5035 ZCEF2 + ZCMD25L5
ZCMC21E5 ZCMC21E3
XCMG5036 ZCEF2 + ZCMC25L7 +
XCMF1025 ZCEF2 + ZCMD21L5 XCMF1103E ZCEF0 + ZCMD21 + ZCMD25
ZCMC21E3
XCMF1025AE ZCEF2 + ZCMD61 + XCMG5037 ZCEF2 + ZCMC25L7 +
ZCMC21E5 XCMF1104 ZCEF0 + ZCMD21L5 ZCMD25
XCMF1025E ZCEF2 + ZCMD21 + XCMF1104E ZCEF0 + ZCMD21 + XCMG5038 ZCEF2 + ZCMC25L10 +
ZCMC21E5 ZCMC21E5 ZCMD25
XCMF1026 ZCEF2 + ZCMC21L7 + XCMF1105 ZCEF0 + ZCMD21L5 XCMG5039 ZCEF2 + ZCMC25L10 +
ZCMD21 ZCMD25
XCMF1027 ZCEF2 + ZCMC21L7 + ZCMC21E5 XCMG510 XCMD25F0L1
ZCMD21
XCMF1105E ZCEF0 + ZCMD21 + XCMG5100 ZCEF0 + ZCMC25L10 +
XCMF1028 ZCEF2 + ZCMC21L10 + ZCMC21E5 ZCMD25
ZCMD21
XCMF1106 ZCEF0 + ZCMC21L7 + XCMG5102 ZCEF0 + ZCMD25L2
ZCMD21 XCMG5103 ZCEF0 + ZCMC25L3 +
XCMF102AE ZCEF2 + ZCMD61 + ZCMD21
ZCMC21E1 XCMG5104 ZCEF0 + ZCMD25L5
XCMF102E ZCEF2 + ZCMD21 + ZCMD21 XCMG5105 ZCEF0 + ZCMD25L5
ZCMC21E1
XCMF1109 ZCEF0 + ZCMC21L10 + XCMG5106 ZCEF0 + ZCMC25L7 +
XCMF103 XCMD21F2L1 ZCMD21 ZCMD25
XCMF1030 ZCEF2 + ZCMC21L10 + XCMF110AE ZCEF0 + ZCMD61 + XCMG5107 ZCEF0 + ZCMC25L7 +

ZCMD21 ZCMC21E1 ZCMD25
XCMF1032 ZCEF2 + ZCMD21L2 XCMF110E ZCEF0 + ZCMD21 + XCMG5108 ZCEF0 + ZCMC25L10 +

ZCMC21E1 ZCMD25
ZCMC21E2 XCMF111 XCMD21G1L1 XCMG5109 ZCEF0 + ZCMC25L10 +
ZCMD25
XCMF1032E ZCEF2 + ZCMD21 + XCMF1110 ZCEG1 + ZCMC21L10 +
ZCMC21E2 ZCMD21 XCMG511 XCMD25G1L1
XCMF1033 ZCEF2 + ZCMC21L3 + XCMF1112 ZCEG1 + ZCMD21L2 XCMG5110 ZCEG1 + ZCMC25L10 +

ZCMD21 ZCMD25
XCMF1033AE ZCEF2 + ZCMD61 + ZCMD21 XCMG5112 ZCEG1 + ZCMD25L2
ZCMC21E3
5/188

functionalities 0
Old design New Osiswitch design
Miniature design (continued)

XCMG5113 ZCEG1 + ZCMC25L3 +
ZCMD25
XCMG5114 ZCEG1 + ZCMD25L5
XCMG5115 ZCEG1 + ZCMD25L5
ZCMD25

ZCMD25
ZCMD25
ZCMD25
5/189

functionalities 0
Design compact XCKP111H29 (1) XCKP2111P16 XCKP1558 ZCP61 + ZCE01 + ZCY55 +

ZCPEG11
Compact design plastic type XCKP XCKP111H44 (1) ZCP21 + ZCE11 + ZCPEG13
XCKP155H29 ZCP21 + ZCE01 + ZCY55 +
ZCKY45 + XCKP601 ZCP26 + ZCE01 + ZCY45 + XCKP111H7 (1) ZCP21 + ZCE11 + ZCPEN12 ZCPEP16
ZCPEG11
XCKP118 XCKP2118G11 XCKP155H44 ZCP21 + ZCE01 + ZCY55 +
ZCKY45 + XCKP601H29 ZCP26 + ZCE01 + ZCY45 + ZCPEG13
XCKP118H29 XCKP2118P16
ZCPEP16
XCKP118H44 ZCP21 + ZCE01 + ZCY18 + XCKP155H7 ZCP21 + ZCE01 + ZCY55 +
ZCKY54 + XCKP601 ZCP26 + ZCE01 + ZCY54 + ZCPEN12
ZCPEG13
ZCPEG11
XCKP118H7 ZCP21 + ZCE01 + ZCY18 + XCKP501 XCKP2501G11
ZCKY54 + XCKP601H29 ZCP26 + ZCE01 + ZCY54 +
ZCPEN12 XCKP501H29 XCKP2501P16
ZCPEP16
XCKP119 ZCP21 + ZCE01 + ZCY19 + XCKP502 XCKP2502G11
ZCKY55 + XCKP601 ZCP26 + ZCE01 + ZCY55 +
ZCPEG11
ZCPEG11
XCKP5029 XCPR2502G13
XCKP1198 ZCP61 + ZCE01 + ZCY19 +
ZCPEG11 XCKP5029H29 XCPR2502P20
ZCPEP16
XCKP119H29 ZCP21 + ZCE01 + ZCY19 + XCKP5029H7 XCPR2502N12
ZCPEP16
ZCPEG11 XCKP502H29 XCKP2502P16
ZCKY18 + XCKP701H29 ZCP27 + ZCE01 + ZCY18 + XCKP502H44 ZCP25 + ZCE02 + ZCPEG13
ZCPEN12
ZCPEP16
XCKP121 XCKP2121G11 XCKP502H7 ZCP25 + ZCE02 + ZCPEN12
ZCPEG11 XCKP1218 ZCP61 + ZCE21 + ZCPEG11 XCKP506 XCKP2506G11
ZCKY45 + XCKP701H29 ZCP27 + ZCE01 + ZCY45 + XCKP121H29 XCKP2121P16 XCKP506H29 XCKP2506P16

ZCPEP16
XCKP121H44 ZCP21 + ZCE21 + ZCPEG13 XCKP506H44 ZCP25 + ZCE06 + ZCPEG13
XCKP121H7 ZCP21 + ZCE21 + ZCPEN12 XCKP506H7 ZCP25 + ZCE06 + ZCPEN12
ZCPEG11
XCKP127 XCKP2127G11 XCKP510 XCKP2510G11
ZCPEP16 XCKP5109 XCPR2510G13
XCKP1278 ZCP61 + ZCE27 + ZCPEG11
ZCKY55 + XCKP701 ZCP27 + ZCE01 + ZCY55 + XCKP5109H29 XCPR2510P20
ZCPEG11
XCKP127H44 ZCP21 + ZCE27 + ZCPEG13 XCKP5109H7 XCPR2510N12
5 ZCKY18 + XCKP801
ZCPEP16
ZCP28 + ZCE01 + ZCY18 +
XCKP127H7 ZCP21 + ZCE27 + ZCPEN12 XCKP510H29
XCKP510H44
XCKP2510P16
ZCP25 + ZCE10 + ZCPEG13
XCKP128 XCKP2128G11
ZCPEG11
XCKP1288 ZCP61 + ZCE28 + ZCPEG11 XCKP510H7 ZCP25 + ZCE10 + ZCPEN12
XCKP128H29 XCKP2128P16 XCKP511 (1) XCKP2511G11
ZCPEP16
XCKP128H44 ZCP21 + ZCE28 + ZCPEG13 XCKP511H29 (1) XCKP2511P16
ZCPEG11 XCKP511H44 (1) ZCP25 + ZCE11 + ZCPEG13
XCKP128H7 ZCP21 + ZCE28 + ZCPEN12
ZCKY45 + XCKP801H29 ZCP28 + ZCE01 + ZCY45 + XCKP511H7 (1) ZCP25 + ZCE11 + ZCPEN12
XCKP145 XCKP2145G11
ZCPEP16
XCKP1458 ZCP61 + ZCE01 + ZCY45 + XCKP518 XCKP2518G11
ZCPEG11 XCKP5189 XCPR2518G13
ZCPEG11
XCKP145H29 XCKP2145P16 XCKP5189H29 XCPR2518P20
ZCPEP16 XCKP145H44 ZCP21 + ZCE01 + ZCY45 + XCKP5189H7 XCPR2518N12
ZCPEG13
ZCPEG11 XCKP145H7 ZCP21 + ZCE01 + ZCY45 +
ZCPEN12 XCKP518H44 ZCP25 + ZCE01 + ZCY18 +
ZCPEG13
ZCPEP16 XCKP146 ZCP21 + ZCE01 + ZCY46 +
ZCPEN12
XCKP101H44 ZCP21 + ZCE01 + ZCPEG13
ZCPEG11 XCKP519 ZCP25 + ZCE01 + ZCY19 +
XCKP102 XCKP2102G11 ZCPEG11
XCKP102H29 XCKP2102P16 ZCPEP16 XCKP519H29 ZCP25 + ZCE01 + ZCY19 +
ZCPEP16
XCKP102H44 ZCP21 + ZCE02 + ZCPEG13 XCKP146H7 ZCP21 + ZCE01 + ZCY46 +
ZCPEN12 XCKP519H7 ZCP25 + ZCE01 + ZCY19 +
XCKP102H7 ZCP21 + ZCE02 + ZCPEN12 ZCPEN12
XCKP106 XCKP2106G11 ZCPEG11 XCKP521 XCKP2521G11
XCKP106H29 XCKP2106P16 XCKP1548 ZCP61 + ZCE01 + ZCY54 + XCKP5219 XCPR2521G13
ZCPEG11
XCKP106H44 ZCP21 + ZCE06 + ZCPEG13 XCKP5219H29 XCPR2521P20
XCKP106H7 ZCP21 + ZCE06 + ZCPEN12 XCKP5219H7 XCPR2521N12
ZCPEP16
XCKP110 XCKP2110G11 XCKP521H29 XCKP2521P16
XCKP1108 ZCP61 + ZCE10 + ZCPEG11 ZCPEG13 XCKP521H44 ZCP25 + ZCE21 + ZCPEG13
XCKP110H29 XCKP2110P16 XCKP154H7 ZCP21 + ZCE01 + ZCY54 + XCKP521H7 ZCP25 + ZCE21 + ZCPEN12
ZCPEN12
XCKP110H44 ZCP21 + ZCE10 + ZCPEG13 XCKP527 XCKP2527G11
XCKP110H7 ZCP21 + ZCE10 + ZCPEN12 ZCPEG11 XCKP5279 XCPR2527G13
XCKP111 (1) XCKP2111G11 XCKP5279H29 XCPR2527P20
(1) Functional substitution, mounting offset by 10 mm.
5/190

functionalities 0
Design compact XCKP619 ZCP26 + ZCE01 + ZCY19 + XCKP721 ZCP27 + ZCE21 + ZCPEG11
ZCPEG11
Compact design plastic type XCKP (continued) XCKP721H29 ZCP27 + ZCE21 + ZCPEP16
XCKP5279H7 XCPR2527N12 XCKP721H44 ZCP27 + ZCE21 + ZCPEG13
XCKP621H29 ZCP26 + ZCE21 + ZCPEP16
XCKP527H29 XCKP2527P16 XCKP727 ZCP27 + ZCE27 + ZCPEG11
XCKP527H44 ZCP25 + ZCE27 + ZCPEG13 XCKP727H29 ZCP27 + ZCE27 + ZCPEP16
XCKP527H7 ZCP25 + ZCE27 + ZCPEN12 XCKP727H44 ZCP27 + ZCE27 + ZCPEG13
XCKP528 XCKP2528G11 XCKP728 ZCP27 + ZCE28 + ZCPEG11
XCKP528H29 XCKP2528P16 XCKP728H29 ZCP27 + ZCE28 + ZCPEP16
XCKP528H7 ZCP25 + ZCE28 + ZCPEN12 XCKP745 ZCP27 + ZCE01 + ZCY45 +
XCKP628H44 ZCP26 + ZCE28 + ZCPEG13 ZCPEG11
XCKP539 XCKP2539G11
XCKP639 ZCP26 + ZCE01 + ZCY39 + XCKP745H29 ZCP27 + ZCE01 + ZCY45 +
XCKP545 XCKP2545G11 ZCPEG11 ZCPEP16
XCKP545H29 XCKP2545P16 XCKP645 ZCP26 + ZCE01 + ZCY45 + XCKP745H44 ZCP27 + ZCE01 + ZCY45 +
ZCPEG11 ZCPEG13
ZCPEG13 XCKP645H29 ZCP26 + ZCE01 + ZCY45 + XCKP746 ZCP27 + ZCE01 + ZCY46 +
ZCPEP16 ZCPEG11
ZCPEN12 XCKP645H44 ZCP26 + ZCE01 + ZCY45 + XCKP746H29 ZCP27 + ZCE01 + ZCY46 +
ZCPEG13 ZCPEP16
ZCPEG11 XCKP646 ZCP26 + ZCE01 + ZCY46 + XCKP754 ZCP27 + ZCE01 + ZCY54 +
ZCPEG11 ZCPEG11
ZCPEP16 XCKP646H29 ZCP26 + ZCE01 + ZCY46 + XCKP754H29 ZCP27 + ZCE01 + ZCY54 +
ZCPEP16 ZCPEP16
ZCPEN12 XCKP654 ZCP26 + ZCE01 + ZCY54 + XCKP754H44 ZCP27 + ZCE01 + ZCY54 +
ZCPEG11 ZCPEG13
ZCPEG11 XCKP654H29 ZCP26 + ZCE01 + ZCY54 + XCKP755 ZCP27 + ZCE01 + ZCY55 +
ZCPEP16 ZCPEG11
XCKP554H44
ZCPEP16
ZCP25 + ZCE01 + ZCY54 +
ZCPEG13
ZCPEP16 5
ZCPEG13 XCKP655 ZCP26 + ZCE01 + ZCY55 + XCKP755H44 ZCP27 + ZCE01 + ZCY55 +
ZCPEG11 ZCPEG13
ZCPEN12 XCKP655H29 ZCP26 + ZCE01 + ZCY55 + XCKP801 ZCP28 + ZCE01 + ZCPEG11
ZCPEP16
XCKP555 ZCP25 + ZCE01 + ZCY55 + XCKP801H29 ZCP28 + ZCE01 + ZCPEP16
ZCPEG13 XCKP802 ZCP28 + ZCE02 + ZCPEG11
ZCPEP16 XCKP701 ZCP27 + ZCE01 + ZCPEG11 XCKP802H29 ZCP28 + ZCE02 + ZCPEP16
XCKP555H44 ZCP25 + ZCE01 + ZCY55 + XCKP701H29 ZCP27 + ZCE01 + ZCPEP16 XCKP802H44 ZCP28 + ZCE02 + ZCPEG13
ZCPEG13
XCKP702 ZCP27 + ZCE02 + ZCPEG11 XCKP806 ZCP28 + ZCE06 + ZCPEG11
XCKP702H29 ZCP27 + ZCE02 + ZCPEP16 XCKP806H29 ZCP28 + ZCE06 + ZCPEP16
ZCPEN12
XCKP706 ZCP27 + ZCE06 + ZCPEG11 XCKP810 ZCP28 + ZCE10 + ZCPEG11
XCKP706H29 ZCP27 + ZCE06 + ZCPEP16 XCKP810H29 ZCP28 + ZCE10 + ZCPEP16
XCKP710 ZCP27 + ZCE10 + ZCPEG11 XCKP810H7 ZCP28 + ZCE10 + ZCPEN12
XCKP710H29 ZCP27 + ZCE10 + ZCPEP16 XCKP811 (1) ZCP28 + ZCE11 + ZCPEG11
XCKP710H44 ZCP27 + ZCE10 + ZCPEG13 XCKP811H29 (1) ZCP28 + ZCE11 + ZCPEP16
XCKP711 (1) ZCP27 + ZCE11 + ZCPEG11 XCKP811H44 (1) ZCP28 + ZCE11 + ZCPEG13
XCKP711H29 (1) ZCP27 + ZCE11 + ZCPEP16 XCKP818 ZCP28 + ZCE01 + ZCY18 +
ZCPEG11
XCKP610H29 ZCP26 + ZCE10 + ZCPEP16 XCKP711H44 (1) ZCP27 + ZCE11 + ZCPEG13
XCKP610H44 ZCP26 + ZCE10 + ZCPEG13 XCKP718 ZCP27 + ZCE01 + ZCY18 + ZCPEP16
ZCPEG11
XCKP611 (1) ZCP26 + ZCE11 + ZCPEG11 XCKP818H44 ZCP28 + ZCE01 + ZCY18 +
XCKP7188 ZCP67 + ZCE01 + ZCY18 + ZCPEG13
XCKP611H29 (1) ZCP26 + ZCE11 + ZCPEP16 ZCPEG11
XCKP611H44 (1) ZCP26 + ZCE11 + ZCPEG13 XCKP718H29 ZCP27 + ZCE01 + ZCY18 + ZCPEG11
ZCPEP16
XCKP618 ZCP26 + ZCE01 + ZCY18 + XCKP821 ZCP28 + ZCE21 + ZCPEG11
ZCPEG13 XCKP821H29 ZCP28 + ZCE21 + ZCPEP16
ZCPEP16 XCKP719 ZCP27 + ZCE01 + ZCY19 + XCKP821H44 ZCP28 + ZCE21 + ZCPEG13
ZCPEG11 XCKP827 ZCP28 + ZCE27 + ZCPEG11
ZCPEG13 XCKP719H29 ZCP27 + ZCE01 + ZCY19 + XCKP827H29 ZCP28 + ZCE27 + ZCPEP16
ZCPEP16
5/191

functionalities 0
Design compact (continued) Compact design plastic type XCKT XCKT1218 ZCE21 + ZCT61G11
Compact design plastic type XCKP (continued) ZCKY18 + XCKT601 ZCE01 + ZCY18 + ZCT26G11 XCKT121H29 XCKT2121P16
XCKP827H44 ZCP28 + ZCE27 + ZCPEG13 ZCKY18 + XCKT601H29 ZCE01 + ZCY18 + ZCT26P16 XCKT121H7 ZCE21 + ZCT21N12
XCKP828 ZCP28 + ZCE28 + ZCPEG11 ZCKY45 + XCKT601 ZCE01 + ZCY45 + ZCT26G11 XCKT128 ZCE28 + ZCT21G11
XCKP828H29 ZCP28 + ZCE28 + ZCPEP16 ZCKY45 + XCKT601H29 ZCE01 + ZCY45 + ZCT26P16 XCKT128H29 XCKT2128P16
XCKP828H44 ZCP28 + ZCE28 + ZCPEG13 ZCKY54 + XCKT601 ZCE01 + ZCY54 + ZCT26G11 XCKT139 XCKT2139G11
XCKP845 ZCP28 + ZCE01 + ZCY45 + ZCKY54 + XCKT601H29 ZCE01 + ZCY54 + ZCT26P16 XCKT1398 ZCE01 + ZCY39 + ZCT61G11
ZCPEG11
ZCKY55 + XCKT601 ZCE01 + ZCY55 + ZCT26G11 XCKT145 XCKT2145G11
ZCKY55 + XCKT601H29 ZCE01 + ZCY55 + ZCT26P16 XCKT1458 ZCE01 + ZCY45 + ZCT61G11
ZCPEP16
ZCKY18 + XCKT701 ZCE01 + ZCY18 + ZCT27G11 XCKT145H29 XCKT2145P16
ZCPEG13 ZCKY18 + XCKT701H29 ZCE01 + ZCY18 + ZCT27P16 XCKT145H7 ZCE01 + ZCY45 + ZCT21N12
XCKP846 ZCP28 + ZCE01 + ZCY46 + ZCKY45 + XCKT701 ZCE01 + ZCY45 + ZCT27G11 XCKT146 ZCE01 + ZCY46 + ZCT21G11
ZCPEG11
ZCPEP16 ZCKY54 + XCKT701 ZCE01 + ZCY54 + ZCT27G11 XCKT146H29 ZCE01 + ZCY46 + ZCT21P16
XCKP854 ZCP28 + ZCE01 + ZCY54 + ZCKY54 + XCKT701H29 ZCE01 + ZCY54 + ZCT27P16 XCKT146H7 ZCE01 + ZCY46 + ZCT21N12
ZCPEG11
ZCKY55 + XCKT701 ZCE01 + ZCY55 + ZCT27G11 XCKT154 ZCE01 + ZCY54 + ZCT21G11
ZCPEP16
ZCKY18 + XCKT801 ZCE01 + ZCY18 + ZCT28G11 XCKT154H29 ZCE01 + ZCY54 + ZCT21P16
ZCPEG13 ZCKY18 + XCKT801H29 ZCE01 + ZCY18 + ZCT28P16 XCKT154H7 ZCE01 + ZCY54 + ZCT21N12
XCKP855 ZCP28 + ZCE01 + ZCY55 + ZCKY45 + XCKT801 ZCE01 + ZCY45 + ZCT28G11 XCKT155 ZCE01 + ZCY55 + ZCT21G11
ZCPEG11
ZCPEP16 ZCKY54 + XCKT801 ZCE01 + ZCY54 + ZCT28G11 XCKT155H29 ZCE01 + ZCY55 + ZCT21P16
XCKP855H44 ZCP28 + ZCE01 + ZCY55 + ZCKY54 + XCKT801H29 ZCE01 + ZCY54 + ZCT28P16 XCKT155H7 ZCE01 + ZCY55 + ZCT21N12
ZCPEG13
ZCKY55 + XCKT801 ZCE01 + ZCY55 + ZCT28G11 XCKT501 ZCE01 + ZCT25G11
5 XCKP901 ZCP29 + ZCE01 + ZCPEG11
ZCKY55 + XCKT801H29 ZCE01 + ZCY55 + ZCT28P16 XCKT501H29 ZCE01 + ZCT25P16
XCKT101 XCKT2101G11 XCKT502 ZCE02 + ZCT25G11
XCKT1018 ZCE01 + ZCT61G11 XCKT5029 XCTR2502G11
XCKT101H29 XCKT2101P16 XCKT5029H29 XCTR2502P16
XCKT102 XCKT2102G11 XCKT5029H7 XCTR2502N12
XCKT1028 ZCE02 + ZCT61G11 XCKT502H29 ZCE02 + ZCT25P16
XCKT102H29 XCKT2102P16 XCKT502H7 ZCE02 + ZCT25N12
XCKT102H7 ZCE02 + ZCT21N12 XCKT506 ZCE06 + ZCT25G11
XCKP911 (1) ZCP29 + ZCE11 + ZCPEG11
XCKT106 XCKT2106G11 XCKT506H29 ZCE06 + ZCT25P16
XCKP911H44 (1) ZCP29 + ZCE11 + ZCPEG13
XCKT1068 ZCE06 + ZCT61G11 XCKT506H7 ZCE06 + ZCT25N12
XCKT106H29 XCKT2106P16 XCKT510 ZCE10 + ZCT25G11
XCKT106H7 ZCE06 + ZCT21N12 XCKT5109 XCTR2510G11
XCKT110 XCKT2110G11 XCKT5109H29 XCTR2510P16
XCKT1108 ZCE10 + ZCT61G11 XCKT5109H7 XCTR2510N12
XCKT110H29 XCKT2110P16 XCKT510H29 ZCE10 + ZCT25P16
XCKT110H7 ZCE10 + ZCT21N12 XCKT510H7 ZCE10 + ZCT25N12
XCKT111 (1) XCKT2111G11 XCKT511 (1) ZCE11 + ZCT25G11
ZCPEG11
XCKT111H29 (1) XCKT2111P16 XCKT511H29 (1) ZCE11 + ZCT25P16
XCKT111H7 (1) ZCE11 + ZCT21N12 XCKT511H7 (1) ZCE11 + ZCT25N12
XCKT118 XCKT2118G11 XCKT518 ZCE01 + ZCY18 + ZCT25G11
XCKT1188 ZCE01 + ZCY18 + ZCT61G11 XCKT5189 XCTR2518G11
XCKT118H29 XCKT2118P16 XCKT5189H29 XCTR2518P16
XCKT118H7 ZCE01 + ZCY18 + ZCT21N12 XCKT5189H7 XCTR2518N12
XCKT119 ZCE01 + ZCY19 + ZCT21G11 XCKT518H29 ZCE01 + ZCY18 + ZCT25P16
XCKT1198 ZCE01 + ZCY19 + ZCT61G11 XCKT518H7 ZCE01 + ZCY18 + ZCT25N12
XCKT119H29 ZCT21P16 + ZCE01 + ZCY19 XCKT519 ZCE01 + ZCY19 + ZCT25G11
XCKT119H7 ZCE01 + ZCY19 + ZCT21N12 XCKT519H29 ZCE01 + ZCY19 + ZCT25P16
XCKT121 XCKT2121G11 XCKT519H7 ZCE01 + ZCY19 + ZCT25N12
5/192

functionalities 0
Design compact (continued) XCKT706H29 ZCE06 + ZCT27P16 Compact design plastic type XCKN
Compact design plastic type XCKT (continued) XCKT710 ZCE10 + ZCT27G11 XCKA110 XCKN2110G11
XCKT521 ZCE21 + ZCT25G11 XCKT710H29 ZCE10 + ZCT27P16 XCKA102 XCKN2102G11
XCKT5219 XCTR2521G11 XCKT711 (1) ZCE11 + ZCT27G11 XCKA121 XCKN2121G11
XCKT5219H29 XCTR2521P16 XCKT711H29 (1) ZCE11 + ZCT27P16 XCKA118 XCKN2118G11
XCKT5219H7 XCTR2521N12 XCKT718 ZCE01 + ZCY18 + ZCT27G11
XCKT521H29 ZCE21 + ZCT25P16 XCKT718H29 ZCE01 + ZCY18 + ZCT27P16
XCKT521H7 ZCE21 + ZCT25N12 XCKT719 ZCE01 + ZCY19 + ZCT27G11
XCKT528 ZCE28 + ZCT25G11 XCKT719H29 ZCE01 + ZCY19 + ZCT27P16
XCKT528H29 ZCE28 + ZCT25P16 XCKT721 ZCE21 + ZCT27G11
XCKT539 ZCE01 + ZCY39 + ZCT25G11 XCKT721H29 ZCE21 + ZCT27P16
XCKT545 ZCE01 + ZCY45 + ZCT25G11 XCKT739 ZCE01 + ZCY39 + ZCT27G11
XCKT545H29 ZCE01 + ZCY45 + ZCT25P16 XCKT745 ZCE01 + ZCY45 + ZCT27G11
XCKT546H29 ZCE01 + ZCY46 + ZCT25P16 XCKT746H29 ZCE01 + ZCY46 + ZCT27P16
XCKT546H7 ZCE01 + ZCY46 + ZCT25N12 XCKT754 ZCE01 + ZCY54 + ZCT27G11
XCKT555 ZCE01 + ZCY55 + ZCT25G11 XCKT801 ZCE01 + ZCT28G11
XCKT555H29 ZCE01 + ZCY55 + ZCT25P16 XCKT801H29 ZCE01 + ZCT28P16
XCKT555H7 ZCE01 + ZCY55 + ZCT25N12 XCKT802 ZCE02 + ZCT28G11

XCKT802H29 ZCE02 + ZCT28P16
XCKT601
XCKT601H29
ZCE01 + ZCT26G11
ZCE01 + ZCT26P16 XCKT806 ZCE06 + ZCT28G11 5
XCKT602H29 ZCE02 + ZCT26P16 XCKT810 ZCE10 + ZCT28G11
XCKT606H29 ZCE06 + ZCT26G11 XCKT811 (1) ZCE11 + ZCT28G11
XCKT610 ZCE10 + ZCT26G11 XCKT811H29 (1) ZCE11 + ZCT28P16
XCKT610H29 ZCE10 + ZCT26P16 XCKT818 ZCE01 + ZCY18 + ZCT28G11
XCKT611 (1) ZCE11 + ZCT26G11 XCKT818H29 ZCE01 + ZCY18 + ZCT28P16
XCKT611H29 (1) ZCE11 + ZCT26P16 XCKT819 ZCE01 + ZCY19 + ZCT28G11
XCKT618H29 ZCE01 + ZCY18 + ZCT26P16 XCKT821 ZCE21 + ZCT28G11
XCKT619 ZCE01 + ZCY19 + ZCT26G11 XCKT821H29 ZCE21 + ZCT28P16
XCKT619H29 ZCE01 + ZCY19 + ZCT26G11 XCKT839 ZCE01 + ZCY39 + ZCT28G11
XCKT621 ZCE21 + ZCT26G11 XCKT845 ZCE01 + ZCY45 + ZCT28G11
XCKT621H29 ZCE21 + ZCT26P16 XCKT845H29 ZCE01 + ZCY45 + ZCT28P16
XCKT654H29 ZCE01 + ZCY54 + ZCT26P16 XCKT910H7 ZCE10 + ZCT29N12
XCKT655 ZCE01 + ZCY55 + ZCT26G11

XCKT655H29 ZCE01 + ZCY55 + ZCT26P16
XCKT701 ZCE01 + ZCT27G11
5/193
Contents 0
6 - Sensors for pressure control
Electronic pressure sensors for control circuits

For controlling the pressure of air, water, hydraulic oils, corrosive fluids
b Nautilus® type XML G, without display
v Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/10
v Pressure transmitters with analogue output 4...20mA or 0...10 V. . . . page 6/12
v Pressure and vacuum switches with solid-state NPN or PNP output . page 6/16
v Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/20
b Nautilus® type XML E, without display

v Pressure transmitter with analogue output 4...20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/24
v Pressure and vacuum switches for regulation between 2 thresholds . page 6/28
v Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/32
b Nautilus® Universal, Osiconcept®, type XML F, with digital display

v Size - 1 bar to 600 bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/36
v Accessories and replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/62
b General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/64
Electromechanical pressure and vacuum switches

for control circuits
For controlling the pressure of air, water, hydraulic oils, corrosive fluids and
viscous products
b Nautilus® type XML, presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/68
b For detection of a single treshold (fixed differential)

6
v Nautilus® type XML A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/70
b For regulation between 2 thresholds (adjustable differential)
v Nautilus® type XML B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/71

v Nautilus® type XML C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/72
b Dual stage, fixed differential, for detection at each threshold
v Nautilus® type XML D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/73
b Accessories and replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/122

b Equivalent model references of XML and XM2 JM, XMJ and XMG
pressure and vacuum switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/126
b Components materials of switch in contact with the fluid . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/128
For controlling the pressure of air, water, hydraulic oils and corrosive fluids
b For control regulation beween 2 thresholds, with adjustable differential
v Types ACW and ADW, presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/130

v Type ACW, size 0.7 to 131 bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/132
v Type ADW, size 69 to 340 bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/134
For controlling the pressure of air and water

b For control regulation beween 2 thresholds, with adjustable differential
v Types XMX and XMA, presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/138

v Types XMX and XMA, sizes 6 to 25 bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/140
v Accessories and replacement parts for XMX and XMA . . . . . . . . . . page 6/142
6/0
Electromechanical pressure switches for
power circuits
For controlling the pressure of water
b Types FTG, FSG and FYG
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/144
b For detection of a sigle threshold with fixed differential
v Type FTG, size 4.6 bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/146
b For regulation between 2 thresholds with adjustable differential

v Type FSG, size 4.6 bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/147
v Type FSG NE, size 4.6 bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/148
v Type FYG, sizes 7 and 10.5 bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/149
For controlling the pressure of air and water

b For regulation between 2 thresholds with adjustable differential
v Type XMP, presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/152

v Type XMP, IP 54, sizes 6 to 25 bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/154
v Type XMP, IP 65, sizes 6 to 25 bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/160
v Accessories and replacement parts for XMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/162

b Nautilus®
v General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/164

v Operating curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/170
6/1
Selection guide 6
Sensors for pressure control 6
Nautilus®
Electronic pressure sensors
Applications Type of installation Control circuits
Fluids controlled Air, water, hydraulic oils, corrosive fluids
Type of sensor and features Units without display

Pressure transmitters
Analogue output 4…20 mA or 0...10 V
Fluid characteristics Air, fresh water, sea water, hydraulic oils, corrosive fluids (- 15…+ 125 °C)
Sizes - 1 bar…400 bar (- 14.5 psi…5800 psi)
Dimensions of case (mm) Width x height x depth Ø 22.8 x 70.1 Ø 22.8 x 85
Type of output Analogue, 4…20 mA or 0…10 V
6 Degree of protection IP 66, IP 67 conforming to IEC/EN60529, NEMA4
Electrical connection M12 connector (1) Integrated quick connection (2)
Fluid connection G 1/4 A (BSP male) conforming to ISO7 (3)
Type reference XML GpppD21

XML GpppD21ppTQ (4) XML GpppQ21ppTQ (4)
Pages 6/12 and 6/13, 6/14 and 6/15
Other versions (1) Other connections (AMP connector, cable, etc.), please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(2) Phoenix Contact “Quickon” type integrated connection.
(3) Other fluid connections (G1/4, 1/4 NPT, etc.), please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(4) Sold in lots of 25.
6/2
6
6
Control circuits
Air, water, hydraulic oils, corrosive fluids
Units without display

Pressure and vacuum switches Pressure transmitters Pressure and vacuum switches with
Factory set switching thresholds Analogue output 4…20 mA solid-state output
Solid-state NPN or PNP output Regulation between 2 thresholds
(adjustable differential)
Air, fresh water, sea water, hydraulic oils, corrosive fluids (- 15…+ 125 °C) Air, fresh water, sea water, hydraulic oils, corrosive fluids (- 15…+ 80 °C)
- 1 bar…400 bar (- 14.5 psi…5800 psi) - 1 bar…600 bar (- 14.5 psi…8700 psi)
Ø 22.8 x 70.1 Ø 22.8 x 85 Ø 40 x 87 (sizes - 1…25 bar)

Ø 40 x 97 (sizes 60…600 bar)
Solid-state, PNP or NPN normally closed (NC) output Analogue, 4…20 mA Solid-state, NPN or PNP, normally
150 mA, c 12/24 V closed (NC) output
IP 66, IP 67 conforming to IEC/EN60529, NEMA4 IP 65

6
M12 connector (1) Integrated quick connection (2) DIN 43650A or M12 connector
G 1/4 A (BSP male) conforming to ISO7 (3) G 1/4 A (BSP male)
XML GpppD31ppTQ (4) XML GpppQ31ppTQ (4) XML Epppppp21 XML Epppppp31
XML GpppD41ppTQ (4) XML GpppQ41ppTQ (4) XML Epppppp41
6/16 and 6/17, 6/18 and 6/19 6/24 to 6/27 6/28 to 6/31
(1) Other connections (AMP connector, cable, etc.), please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(3) Other fluid connections (G1/4, 1/4 NPT, etc.), please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(4) Sold in lots of 25.
6/3
Selection guide 6
Nautilus®
Electronic pressure sensors
Fluids controlled Air, water, hydraulic oils, corrosive fluids
Type of sensor and features Configurable units with digital display Configurable units with digital display
Pressure transmitters Pressure transmitters
Output current 4…20 mA Output voltage 0…10 V
Fluid characteristics Air, fresh water, sea water, hydraulic oils, corrosive fluids (- 15…+ 80 °C)
Dimensions of case (mm) Width x height x depth 46 x 113 x 58
6 Type of output Analogue, 4…20 mA Analogue, 0…10 V
Electrical connection M12 connector, “Snap-C” compatible
Fluid connection G 1/4 A (BSP) or 1/4 NPT or SAE 7/16-20UNF female
Type reference XML FpppD201p XML FpppD211p
Pages 6/36 to 6/61
Other versions Pressure transmitters and electronic pressure and vacuum switches with alternative tapped fluid
entries: ISO, NPT, etc. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
6/4
6
Control circuits
Air, water, hydraulic oils, corrosive fluids
Configurable units with digital Configurable units with digital Configurable units with digital Configurable units with digital
display display display display
Universal sensors Universal sensors Pressure and vacuum switches with Dual stage pressure and vacuum
Regulation between 2 thresholds Regulation between 2 thresholds 2.5 A relay outputs switches (solid-state outputs)
(adjustable differential) (adjustable differential) Regulation between 2 thresholds Detection of 2 thresholds and
(adjustable differential) adjustable differential for each
Solid-state and analogue output Solid-state and analogue output threshold
current 4…20 mA voltage 0…10 V
Air, fresh water, sea water, hydraulic oils, corrosive fluids (- 15…+ 80 °C)
- 1 bar…600 bar (- 14.5 psi…8700 psi)
46 x 113 x 58 46 x 119 x 58 46 x 113 x 58
Solid-state, PNP or NPN, 200 mA,

c 24 V output
Solid-state, PNP or NPN, 200 mA,
c 24 V output
Relay output
2.5 A, a 120 V
2 solid-state, PNP or NPN, 200 mA, c
24 V outputs 6
Analogue output 4…20 mA Analogue output 0…10 V
IP 67
M12 connector, “Snap-C” compatible SAE 7/8-16UN connector M12 connector, “Snap-C” compatible
G 1/4 A (BSP) or 1/4 NPT or SAE 7/16-20UNF female
XML FpppD202p XML FpppD212p XML FpppE204p XML FpppD203p
6/36 to 6/61
6/5
Selection guide 6
Nautilus®
Fluids/products controlled Air, water, hydraulic oils, corrosive fluids, viscous products
Type of operation Detection of a single Regulation between 2 thresholds (adjustable differential)

threshold
(fixed differential)
Fluid characteristics Air, fresh water, sea water, corrosive fluids, viscous products, up to 160 °C
depending on model
Dimensions of case (mm) Width x height x depth 35 x 68 x 75 46 x 68 x 85
Type of contacts 1 C/O single-pole, snap action 2 C/O single-pole, simultaneous,

snap action
6 Degree of protection IP 66: switches with terminal connections IP 66: switches with terminal
IP 65: switches with plug-in connector connections
Electrical connection Screw terminals: 1 entry tapped M20 x 1.5 mm for ISO cable gland, or
tapped for n° 13 cable gland
Fluid connection G 1/4 (BSP female)

G1¼" (BSP female) for viscous products
Type reference XML A XML B XML C
Pages 6/70 to 6/121
Other versions Electromechanical pressure and vacuum switches with alternative tapped cable entries and/or
fluid entries: NPT etc. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
6/6
6
6
Control circuits
Air, water, hydraulic oils, corrosive fluids, Air, hydraulic oils, corrosive fluids
viscous products
Dual stage switches Regulation between 2 thresholds (adjustable differential)

Detection at each threshold (fixed differential)
Air, fresh water, sea water, corrosive fluids, viscous Air, oils and other non corrosive fluids Oils and other fluids
products, up to 160 °C (- 73…+ 125 °C) (- 30…+ 125 °C)
depending on model Only oils, including synthetic oils, for certain models
- 1 bar…500 bar (- 14.5 psi…7250 psi) 0.7 bar…131 bar (10.15 psi…1900 psi) 69 bar…340 bar (1000 psi…4930 psi)
45 x 68 x 85 88 x 88 x 68
2 C/O single-pole, staggered, snap action 1 C/O or 2 C/O single-pole, snap action
IP 66: switches with terminal connections IP 65

6
Screw terminals: 1 entry tapped M20 x 1.5 mm for Screw terminals: 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland
ISO cable gland or tapped for n° 13 cable gland
G 1/4 (BSP female) G 3/8 (BSP female)

G1¼" (BSP female) for viscous products
XML D ACW ADW
6/70 to 6/121 6/132 and 6/133 6/134 and 6/135
6/7
6
Nautilus®
Electromechanical pressure switches
Applications Type of installation Power circuits
Fluids controlled Water
Type of operation Detection of a single Regulation between 2 thresholds (adjustable differential)

threshold
(fixed differential)
Fluid characteristics Fresh water, sea water (0…+ 70 °C)
Sizes 4.6 bar (66.7 psi)
Dimensions of case (mm) Width x height x depth 72 x 73 x 102 72 x 77 x 106
Setting of switching points Internal screws
Type of contacts 2 N/C snap action
6
Electrical connection Screw terminals: 2 cable entries, with grommet Screw terminals: 2 entries
incorporating n° 13 cable gland
Fluid connection G 1/4 or R 1/4 (BSP female or BSP male) G 1/4 (BSP female)
Type reference FTG FSG p FSG 2NE
Page(s) 6/146 6/147 6/148
Other versions Electromechanical pressure switches with alternative tapped cable entries and/or fluid entries:
ISO, NPT, etc. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
6/8
6
6
Power circuits Control circuits
Water Air, water
Regulation between 2 thresholds Regulation between 2 thresholds (adjustable differential)

(adjustable differential)
Fresh water, sea water (0…+ 70 °C) Air, fresh water, sea water (0…+ 70 °C)
7 bar and 10.5 bar 6 bar, 12 bar and 25 bar (87 psi, 174 psi and 362.5 psi)
(101.5 psi and 152.3 psi)
72 x 73 x 102 57 x 78 x 97.5
Internal screws External screws
2 N/C snap action 2 N/C or 3 N/C snap action 1 C/O single-pole, snap action
IP 20 IP 54 or IP 65 depending on model IP 54
6
Screw terminals: 2 cable entries, with Screw terminals: 2 entries Screw terminals: 2 entries tapped for n° 13 cable gland,
grommet incorporating n° 13 cable gland or one fitted with n° 13 cable gland,
without cable gland, depending on one fitted with blanking plug
model
G 1/4 (BSP female) G 1/4, G 3/8 or 4 x G 1/4 (BSP female) G 1/4 or 4 x G 1/4 (BSP female) depending on model
depending on model
FYG XMP XMX XMA
6/149 6/154 to 6/161 6/140 6/141
6/9
Presentation 6
Electronic pressure sensors 6
Nautilus® type XML G

For control circuits
Presentation
Pressure transmitters and pressure switches type XML G are characterised by their
ceramic pressure measuring cell. The deformation caused by the pressure is
1
transmitted to the resistors of a Wheatstone bridge silk-screened on the ceramic. The
change in resistance is then processed by the integrated electronics for providing
either a digital or analogue output signal.
2
3
1 Electrical connection, for example: M12
4 2 Electronics with EMC protection
3 Ceramic measuring cell
4 Seals
5 5 Leakage protection
6 6 Threaded connection
Functions
Pressure transmitters have an analogue 4-20 mA or 0-10 V output that is proportional
to the measuring range.
Pressure and vacuum switches have a solid-state NPN or PNP normally closed (NC)
output.
An anti-leakage system integrated in products for pressures u 40 bar prevents fluid

leakage in the event of the measuring cell destruction pressure being exceeded.
These compact products that offer excellent EMC characteristics are particularly
suited to difficult industrial environments.
The selling in lots is mainly intended for machine manufacturers.
Important ordering requirement

6 Pressure and vacuum switches XML G are factory set, the upper and lower switching
thresholds must be stated when ordering.
6/10
Characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML G

Environmental characteristics
Conformity to standards e
IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1
EN 50081-1, EN 50082-2, EN 61000-6-2
Rated supply voltage Transmitters 4-20 mA V c 12/24

Pressure/vacuum switches
Transmitters 0-10 V V c 24
Voltage limits Transmitters 4-20 mA V c 8…33

Pressure/vacuum switches
Transmitters 0-10 V V c 11.4…33
Current consumption Pressure/vacuum switches mA <4

Transmitters mA < 20

Fluids or products controlled Hydraulic oils, air, fresh water, sea water, corrosive fluids from - 15… + 125 °C
Component materials in contact with fluid Ceramic Al2O3, stainless steel type AISI 303, FPM (Viton),
PPS (Leakage protection for P > 40 bar)
Shock resistance 25 gn (half sine wave 11 ms) conforming to IEC 60068-2-27
Resistance to electromagnetic Electrostatic discharges Standard EN 61000-4-2, 15 kV in air, 8 kV on contact

interference Radiated electromagnetic fields Standard EN 61000-4-3, 200 V/m, 80…1000 MHz
Fast transients Standard EN 61000-4-4, 4 kV
Surges Standard EN 61000-4-5, 500 V 12 Ω, 1 kV 42 Ω
Conducted disturbances, Standard EN 61000-4-6, 30 V 0.15…80 MHz
induced by radio frequency fields
Magnetic fields Standard EN 61000-4-8, 30 A/m, 50 Hz
Electrical protection Protected against reverse polarity and load short-circuit

6
Rated impulse withstand voltage kV 0.5
Degree of protection IP 66, IP 67 conforming to IEC/EN 60529, NEMA 4
Output response time ms <2
Repeat accuracy ± 0.1% of the measuring range
Precision Transmitters Combined sum of linearity, hysteresis and repeat accuracy < ± 0.3% of the measuring
range
Setting tolerance of zero point and measuring range limit < ± 0.3% of the measuring
range
Pressure/vacuum switches Setting accuracy < ±1% of the measuring range
Drift Of the zero point < ± 0.015% of the measuring range/°C
Of the sensitivity < ± 0.015% of the measuring range/°C
Service life In millions of operating cycles > 10
Fluid connection G 1/4 A (BSP male) conforming to ISO 7
Electrical connection M12 connector or integrated connection (1)
6/11
References, Electronic pressure sensors 6
characteristics 6
Nautilus® Pressure transmitters type XML G
With analogue output 4-20 mA
Sizes - 1 to 1 bar (- 14.5 to 14.5 psi)
Units with analogue output
Pressure range (1) - 1…0 bar (- 14.5…0 psi) 0…1 bar (0…14.5 psi)
Type of electrical connection (2) M12 Integrated quick M12 Integrated quick
connection (3) connection (3)
References
Sold in packs of: 1 XML GM01D21 – XML G001D21 –
bulk (4) XML GM01D21TQ (4) XML GM01Q21TQ (4) XML G001D21TQ (4) XML G001Q21TQ (4)
Fluid connection (5) G 1/4 A (BSP male)
Weight (kg) 0.095 0.095 0.095 0.095
Rated supply voltage c 12/24 V
Voltage limits c 8…33 V
Analogue output (6) 4…20 mA, 2-wire technique
Current consumption < 20 mA
Maximum permissible accidental pressure 2.7 bar (39.1 psi) 2.7 bar (39.1 psi)
Destruction pressure 3 bar (43.5 psi) 3 bar (43.5 psi)
Electrical connection By connector XML GpppD21: M12, 3-pin male. For suitable female connectors, including pre-wired versions,
see pages 6/20 and 6/21
Integrated XML GpppQ21: integrated quick connection (3)
(1) Other pressure ranges, please consult us.
(2) Other connections (AMP connector, cable…), please consult us.
(4) Sold in lots of 25, minimum quantity 50.
6 (5) Other fluid connections (G 1/4 female, 1/4" NPT…), please consult us.
Component materials of units in contact with the fluid, see page 6/11.
(6) To order a pressure transmitter with a 0...10 V analogue output, replace 21 in the reference
by 71 (bulk packs only). Example: XML GM01D21TQ becomes XML GM01D71TQ with a
0...10 V analogue output.
Output curves
XML GM01p21 XML G001p21
Is (mA) Is (mA)
20 20
16 16
12 12
8 8
4 4
-1 -0,8 -0,6 -0,4 -0,2 0 P (bar) 0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 P (bar)
Accessories: Dimensions: Schemes:

6/12
characteristics 6
Sizes 10 to 25 bar (145 to 362.5 psi)
Pressure range (1) 0…10 bar (0…145 psi) 0…25 bar (0…362.5 psi)
References
Sold in packs of: 1 XML G010D21 – XML G025D21 –
bulk (4) XML G010D21TQ (4) XML G010Q21TQ (4) XML G025D21TQ (4) XML G025Q21TQ (4)
Weight (kg) 0.095 0.095 0.095 0.095
Maximum permissible accidental pressure 22 bar (319 psi) 56 bar (812 psi)
Destruction pressure 25 bar (362.5 psi) 62.5 bar (906.2 psi)
(5) Other fluid connections (G 1/4 female, 1/4" NPT…), please consult us.
Component materials of units in contact with the fluid, see page 6/11. 6
by 71 (bulk packs only). Example: XML G010D21TQ becomes XML G010D71TQ with a
Output curves
XML G010p21 XML G025p21
Is (mA) Is (mA)
20 20
16 16
12 12
8 8
4 4
0 2 4 6 8 10 P (bar) 0 5 10 15 20 25 P (bar)

6/13
characteristics 6
Sizes 100 to 250 bar (1450 to 3625 psi)
Pressure range (1) 0…100 bar (0...1450 psi) 0…250 bar (0...3625 psi)
References
Sold in packs of: 1 XML G100D21 – XML G250D21 –
bulk (4) XML G100D21TQ (4) XML G100Q21TQ (4) XML G250D21TQ (4) XML G250Q21TQ (4)
Weight (kg) 0.095 0.095 0.095 0.095
Maximum permissible accidental pressure 225 bar (3262.5 psi) 560 bar (8120 psi)
Destruction pressure 250 bar (3625 psi) 625 bar (9062.5 psi)
6 (5) Other fluid connections (G 1/4 female, 1/4" NPT…), please consult us.
Output curves
XML G100p21 XML G250p21
Is (mA) Is (mA)
20 20
16 16
12 12
8 8
4 4
0 20 40 60 80 100 P (bar) 0 50 100 150 200 250 P (bar)

6/14
characteristics 6
Size 400 bar (5800 psi)
Pressure range (1) 0…400 bar (0…5800 psi)

Type of electrical connection (2) M12 Integrated quick connection (3)
References
Sold in packs of: 1 XML G400D21 –
bulk (4) XML G400D21TQ (4) XML G400Q21TQ (4)
Weight (kg) 0.095 0.095
Maximum permissible accidental pressure 800 bar (11 600 psi)
Destruction pressure 900 bar (13 050 psi)
(5) Other fluid connections (G 1/4 female, 1/4" NPT…), please consult us.
Component materials of units in contact with the fluid, see page 6/11. 6
Output curves
XML G400p21
Is (mA)
20
16
12
4
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 P (bar)

6/15
characteristics 6
Nautilus® Pressure and vacuum switches type XML G
Units with solid-state output (1)
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) - 0.08…- 1 bar (- 1.16…- 14.5 psi) 0.08…1 bar (1.16…14.5 psi)
Rising pressure (2) (8)
References
Only sold in bulk packs (5)
NPN output XML GM01D31TQ (5) XML GM01Q31TQ (5) XML G001D31TQ (5) XML G001Q31TQ (5)
PNP output XML GM01D41TQ (5) XML GM01Q41TQ (5) XML G001D41TQ (5) XML G001Q41TQ (5)
Weight (kg) 0.095 0.095 0.095 0.095
Switching thresholds (7) Factory set
Possible differential Min. at low setting 0.03 bar (0.44 psi) 0.03 bar (0.44 psi)
Min. at high setting 0.03 bar (0.44 psi) 0.03 bar (0.44 psi)
Max. at high setting 0.95 bar (13.77 psi) 0.95 bar (13.77 psi)
Maximum permissible accidental pressure 2.7 bar (39.1 psi) 2.7 bar (39.1 psi)
Destruction pressure 3 bar (43.5 psi) 3 bar (43.5 psi)
Output Solid-state, NPN or PNP, NC
Switching capacity 150 mA
6 Electrical connection By connector XML GpppDpp: M12, 3-pin male. For suitable female connectors, including pre-wired versions,
Integrated XML GpppQpp: integrated quick connection (4)
(1) Other types of output (normally open PNP, NPN…), please consult us.
(6) Fluids controlled: hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea water, air, corrosive fluids,
from - 15…+ 125 °C.
Other fluid connections (G 1/4 female, 1/4" NPT…), please consult us.
(7) State the switching threshold settings when ordering.
(8) For vacuum switches (size - 1 bar): adjustable range of switching point (PB) on falling
pressure.
Operating curves
XML GM01pp1 XML G001pp1
Rising pressure
bar
-0,97 -0,5 -0,05 0 bar
Rising pressure
1
-0,08
1 2
2 1 -0,5 0,5
Falling pressure
1 Maximum differential
2 Minimum differential 0,08
-1
bar 0 0,05 0,5 0,97bar
Falling pressure

6/16
characteristics 6
Nautilus® Pressure switches type XML G
Sizes 10 to 25 bar (11.6 to 362.5 psi)
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) 0.8…10 bar (11.6…145 psi) 2…25 bar (29…362.5 psi)
Rising pressure (2)
References
NPN output XML G010D31TQ (5) XML G010Q31TQ (5) XML G025D31TQ (5) XML G025Q31TQ (5)
PNP output XML G010D41TQ (5) XML G010Q41TQ (5) XML G025D41TQ (5) XML G025Q41TQ (5)
Weight (kg) 0.095 0.095 0.095 0.095
Electrical connection By connector XML GpppDpp: M12, 3-pin male. For suitable female connectors, including pre-wired versions, 6
Integrated XML-GpppQpp: integrated quick connection (4)
(6) Fluids controlled: hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea water, air, corrosive fluids, from
- 15…+ 125 °C.
Operating curves
XML G010pp1 XML G025pp1
bar bar
10 25
Rising pressure
Rising pressure
20
1 2 1 2
5
10
2 Minimum differential 0,8 2
0 0,5 5 9,7 bar 0 1,2 10 20 24,2 bar

Falling pressure Falling pressure

6/17
characteristics 6
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) 8…100 bar (11.6…1450 psi) 20…250 bar (29…3625 psi)
Rising pressure (2)
References
NPN output XML G100D31TQ (5) XML G100Q31TQ (5) XML G250D31TQ (5) XML G250Q31TQ (5)
PNP output XML G100D41TQ (5) XML G100Q41TQ (5) XML G250D41TQ (5) XML G250Q41TQ (5)
Weight (kg) 0.095 0.095 0.095 0.095
Possible differential Min. at low setting 3 bar (43.5 psi) 7.5 bar (108.8 psi)
Min. at high setting 3 bar (43.5 psi) 7.5 bar (108.8 psi)
Max. at high setting 95 bar (1377.5 psi) 237.5 bar (3443.7 psi)
6 Electrical connection By connector XML GpppDpp: M12, 3-pin male. For suitable female connectors, including pre-wired versions,
from - 15…+ 125 °C.
Operating curves
XML G100pp1TQ XML G250pp1TQ
bar bar
Rising pressure
Rising pressure
100 250
200
1 2 1 2
50
100
2 Minimum differential 8 20
0 5 50 97 bar 0 12,5 100 200 242,5 bar


6/18
characteristics 6
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) 32…400 bar (464…5800 psi)

Rising pressure (2)
Type of electrical connection (3) M12 Integrated quick connection (4)
References
NPN output XML G400D31TQ (5) XML G400Q31TQ (5)
PNP output XML G400D41TQ (5) XML G400Q41TQ (5)
Weight (kg) 0.095 0.095
Possible differential Min. at low setting 12 bar (174 psi)
Min. at high setting 12 bar (174 psi)
Max. at high setting 380 bar (5510 psi)
Electrical connection By connector XML GpppDpp: M12, 3-pin male. For suitable female connectors, including pre-wired versions, 6
from - 15…+ 125 °C.
Operating curve
XML G400pp1TQ
bar
400
Rising pressure
300
1 2
200
100
1 Maximum differential 32
2 Minimum differential 0 20 100 200 300 388 bar
Falling pressure

6/19
References 6
Nautilus® Accessories and replacement parts for

sensors type XML G
Connection accessories
563352
Description Length Reference Weight

of cable
503360
m kg
M12 “Snap C”, straight, female – XZ CC12FDM40V 0.015
connector (1)
XZ CP1141Lp M12 female connector, metal Straight – XZ CC12FDM40B 0.020

clamping ring (2)
Elbowed – XZ CC12FCM40B 0.020
Pre-wired M12 female connectors Straight 2 XZ CP1141L2 0.090
XZ CP1241Lp 5 XZ CP1141L5 0.190
10 XZ CP1141L10 0.370
531622
532711
5 XZ CP1241L5 0.190
XZ CC12FDM40V XZ CC12FCM40B 10 XZ CP1241L10 0.370
Replacement part
532715

lots of kg
Quick connection (3) 10 XML GZ001 0.025
(1) Connector incorporating IDCs (Insulation Displacement Connectors) for simple and quick
direct, in-line, connection to cable, without the need of a screwdriver or soldering iron.
(2) Connector with screw terminal connections.
(3) Phoenix Contact “Quickon” type connection.
XML GZ001
6/20
Dimensions, Electronic pressure sensors 6
schemes 6
Nautilus®
Transmitters and Pressure switches type XML G
Dimensions
XML GpppDpp, M12 x 1 connection
~ 90
SW 21
Ø 18,8 ± 0,1
Ø 22,8
G 1/4
12 8
2,1 56
XML GpppQpp, integrated quick connection
~ 85
SW 21
Ø 18,8 ± 0,1
Ø 22,8
G 1/4
12 8
2,1 64
Connector schemes (pressure sensor connector pin view)

Electronic pressure switches
M12 Integrated quick
M12 Integrated quick
6
connection connection
3-wire technique (PNP) 3-wire technique (PNP) 2-wire technique (4-20 mA) 2-wire technique (4-20 mA)
Input + Output Input + – GND Input + – Input + –
1 4 1 4
1 1
2 2
3 – 3 3 3
GND Output
Output Output
3-wire technique (NPN) 3-wire technique (NPN) 3-wire technique (0-10 V) 3-wire technique (0-10 V)
Input + Input + Input + – Input + – GND

GND
1 4 1 4
1 1
Output 2 2
3 – 3 – 3 3
GND GND Output
Output
Output
6/21
Presentation, Electronic pressure sensors 6
principle 6
Nautilus® type XML E
;;; 5
6
7
4
3
Presentation
Pressure switches and pressure transmitters type XML E are characterised by their
ceramic pressure measuring cell.
1 Threaded fluid entry.
2 Sealing gaskets.
3 Measuring load cell (ceramic technology).
4 Electronic card.
5 Electrical connector.
6 Adjustment potentiometer for switching point PH (rising pressure).

2 Only applicable to pressure switches.
1 7 Adjustment potentiometer for switching point PB (falling pressure).

Only applicable to pressure switches.
2
Operating principle
Pressure switches XML E incorporate a solid-state NPN or PNP NC output.

Two potentiometers enable the setting of the PH (rising pressure) and PB (falling
pressure) switching points.
Pressure transmitters XML E provide a 4 to 20 mA analogue output which is

proportional to the measuring range.
6 A digital display unit can be directly plugged-in between the male and female
DIN 43650A connectors.
Simple unrestricted positioning of the display unit + sensor + connector (can be
rotated through 360°).
The display can be adjusted to enable reading from any direction (360° orientation
both vertically and horizontally).
6/22
Characteristics 6
Characteristics
Conformity to standards e, EN 50081, EN 50082
Ambient air temperature °C For operation: - 15…+ 80
Fluids or products controlled Hydraulic oils, air, fresh water, sea water, corrosive fluids from - 15…+ 80 °C
Component materials in contact with fluid Stainless steel fluid entry type AISI 303, viton gasket
Vibration resistance gn 5 (25…200 Hz) and 35 (60…2000 Hz)
Shock resistance gn 50
Electrical protection Protected against reverse polarity, short-circuit and overload
Degree of protection IP 65 conforming to IEC/EN 60529
Operating rate Hz 50
Response time ms <5
Service life Op. > 10 million

cycles
Drift Of the zero point: < ± 0.03% of the measuring range/°C
Of the sensitivity: < ± 15% of the measuring range/°C
Precision < ± 0.3% of the measuring range
Fluid connection G 1/4 A (BSP male) conforming to NF E 03-004, ISO 7
Electrical connection DIN 43650A or M12 connector
6/23
characteristics 6
Transmitters without display (1)
Type With analogue output, fluid connection 1/4" BSP male
Pressure range 0…- 1 bar (0…- 14.5 psi) 0…1 bar (0…14.5 psi)
Electrical connector type DIN 43650A M12 DIN 43650A M12
References
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea XML EM01U1C21 XML EM01U1D21 XML E001U1C21 XML E001U1D21
(2) water, air, corrosive fluids,
from - 15…+ 80 °C
Weight (kg) 0.250 0.300 0.250 0.300

Output Analogue, 4…20 mA, 2-wire technique
6 Electrical connection XML EpppU1C21: DIN 43650A, 4-pin male connector. For suitable female connector, see page
6/32.
XML EpppU1D21: M12, 5-pin male connector. For suitable female pre-wired connector, see
page 6/32.
(1) Optional digital display for sensor, see page 6/32.

(2) Component materials of units in contact with the fluid, see page 6/23.
Output curves
Is (mA) Is (mA)
20 20
16 16
12 12
8 8
4 4
-1 -0,8 -0,6 -0,4 -0,2 0 P (bar) 0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 P (bar)
Other versions Pressure transmitters with 1/4" NPTF fluid connection.


6/24
6
6
With analogue output, fluid connection 1/4" BSP male
0…10 bar (0…145 psi) 0…25 bar (0…362.5 psi)
DIN 43650A M12 DIN 43650A M12
References
XML E010U1C21 XML E0101U1D21 XML E025U1C21 XML E025U1D21
0.250 0.300 0.250 0.300

20 bar (290 psi) 50 bar (725 psi)
30 bar (435 psi) 75 bar (1087.5 psi)
c 24 V
c 11…33 V
Analogue, 4…20 mA, 2-wire technique
< 20 mA
XML EpppU1C21: DIN 43650A, 4-pin male connector. For suitable female connector, see page 6/32.
XML EpppU1D21: M12, 5-pin male connector. For suitable female pre-wired connector, see page 6/32. 6
Output curves
Is (mA) Is (mA)
20 20
16 16
12 12
8 8
4 4
0 2 4 6 8 10 P (bar) 0 5 10 15 20 25 P (bar)

6/25
Transmitters without display (1)
Type With analogue output, fluid connection 1/4" BSP male
Pressure range 0…60 bar (0…870 psi) 0…100 bar (0…1450 psi)
References
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea XML E060U1C21 XML E060U1D21 XML E100U1C21 XML E100U1D21
(2) water, air, corrosive fluids,
from - 15…+ 80 °C
Weight (kg) 0.270 0.320 0.270 0.320

Destruction pressure 180 bar (2610 psi) 300 bar (4350 psi)
Output Analogue, 4…20 mA, 2-wire technique
6 Electrical connection XML EpppU1C21: DIN 43650A, 4-pin male connector. For suitable female connector, see page
6/32.
XML EpppU1D21: M12, 5-pin male connector. For suitable female pre-wired connector, see
page 6/32.
(1) Optional digital display for sensor, see page 6/32.

Output curves
Is (mA) Is (mA)
20 20
16 16
12 12
8 8
4 4
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 P (bar) 0 20 40 60 80 100 P (bar)
Other versions Pressure transmitters with 1/4" NPTF fluid connection.


6/26
6
6
With analogue output, fluid connection 1/4" BSP male
0…250 bar (0…3625 psi) 0…600 bar (0…8700 psi)
DIN 43650A M12 DIN 43650A M12
References
0.270 0.320 0.270 0.320

500 bar (7250 psi) 1200 bar (17 400 psi)
750 bar (10 875 psi) 1800 bar (26 100 psi)
c 24 V
c 11…33 V
Analogue, 4…20 mA, 2-wire technique
< 20 mA
XML EpppU1C21: DIN 43650A, 4-pin male connector. For suitable female connector, see page 6/32.
XML EpppU1D21: M12, 5-pin male connector. For suitable female pre-wired connector, see page 6/32. 6
Output curves
Is (mA) Is (mA)
20 20
16 16
12 12
8
8
4 4
0 50 100 150 200 250 P (bar) 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 P (bar)

6/27
characteristics 6
Vacuum and pressure switches without display (1),
for regulation between 2 thresholds
Type With solid-state output, fluid connection 1/4" BSP male
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) - 0.07…- 1 bar (- 1.015…- 14.5 psi) 0.07…1 bar (1.015…14.5 psi)
(Rising pressure) (2)
References
Fluids controlled (3) Type of
output
Hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea water, air, NPN XML EM01U1C31 XML EM01U1D31 XML E001U1C31 XML E001U1D31
corrosive fluids, from - 15 to + 80 °C
PNP XML EM01U1C41 XML EM01U1D41 XML E001U1C41 XML E001U1D41
Weight (kg) 0.250 0.300 0.250 0.300

Max. at high setting 0.95 bar (13.77 psi) (max. differential at low 0.95 bar (13.77 psi)
setting)
6 Switching capacity
Current consumption
100 mA
< 15 mA
Electrical connection XML EpppU1Cp1: DIN 43650A, 4-pin male connector. For suitable female connector, see page
6/32.
XML EpppU1Dp1: M12, 4-pin male connector. For suitable female pre-wired connector, see
page 6/32.
(1) Optional digital display for pressure switch, see page 6/32.
(2) For vacuum switches (size -1 bar): adjustable range of switching point (PB) on falling
pressure.
Operating curves
Falling pressure
bar
Falling pressure
0 bar
-0,07
1
-0,2
0,8
-0,4
0,6
1 2 1 2
-0,6
0,4
-0,8
0,2
-1
0,07
0
0 -0,2 -0,4 -0,6 -0,8 bar 0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 bar
-0,05 -0,98 0,05 0,98
Rising pressure Rising pressure
2 Minimum differential
Other versions Pressure and vacuum switches with 1/4" NPTF fluid connection.

6/28
6
With solid-state output, fluid connection 1/4" BSP male
0.7…10 bar (10.15…145 psi) 1.75…25 bar (25.38…362.5 psi)
DIN 43650A M12 DIN 43650A M12
References
0.250 0.300 0.250 0.300

0.2 bar (2.9 psi) 0.2 bar (2.9 psi)
0.2 bar (2.9 psi) 0.2 bar (2.9 psi)
9.5 bar (137.7 psi) 23.75 bar (344.37 psi)
20 bar (290 psi) 50 bar (725 psi)

30 bar (435 psi) 75 bar (1087.5 psi)
c 24 V
c 11…33 V
Solid-state, NPN or PNP, NC
100 mA
< 15 mA
6
XML EpppU1Cp1: DIN 43650A, 4-pin male connector. For suitable female connector, see page 6/32.
XML EpppU1Dp1: M12, 5-pin male connector. For suitable female pre-wired connector, see page 6/32.
Operating curves
Rising pressure
bar
Rising pressure
bar
10 25
8 20
1 2
6 15
1 2
4 10
2 5
0,7 1,75
0 0
0 2 4 6 8 bar 0 5 10 15 20 bar
0,5 9,8 1,25 24,5

6/29
Pressure switches without display (1),
for regulation between 2 thresholds.
Type With solid-state output, fluid connection 1/4" BSP male
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) 4.2…60 bar (60.9…870 psi) 7…100 bar (101.5…1450 psi)
(Rising pressure)
References
Fluids controlled (2) Type of
output
Hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea water, air, NPN XML E060U1C31 XML E060U1D31 XML E100U1C31 XML E100U1D31
corrosive fluids, from - 15 to + 80 °C
PNP XML E060U1C41 XML E060U1D41 XML E100U1C41 XML E100U1D41
Weight (kg) 0.270 0.320 0.270 0.320

Possible differential Min. at low setting 1.2 bar (17.4 psi) 2 bar (29 psi)
Min. at high setting 1.2 bar (17.4 psi) 2 bar (29 psi)
Max. at high setting 57 bar (826.5 psi) 95 bar (1377.5 psi)
6 Switching capacity 100 mA
Electrical connection XML EpppU1Cp1: DIN 43650A, 4-pin male connector. For suitable female connector, see page
6/32.
XML EpppU1Dp1: M12, 5-pin male connector. For suitable female pre-wired connector, see
page 6/32.
(1) Optional digital display for pressure switch, see page 6/32.
Operating curves
Rising pressure
bar
Rising pressure
bar
60 100
50
80
40
60
1 2 1 2
30
40
20
20
10
4,2 7
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 bar 0 20 40 60 80 bar
3 58,8 5 98
Other versions Pressure and vacuum switches with 1/4" NPTF fluid connection.

6/30
6
6
With solid-state output, fluid connection 1/4" BSP male
17.5…250 bar (253.7…3625 psi) 42…600 bar (609…8700 psi)
DIN 43650A M12 DIN 43650A M12
References
0.270 0.320 0.270 0.320

5 bar (72.5 psi) 12 bar (174 psi)
5 bar (72.5 psi) 12 bar (174 psi)
237.5 bar (3443.7 psi) 570 bar (8265 psi)
500 bar (7250 psi) 1200 bar (17 400 psi)
750 bar (10 875 psi) 1800 bar (26 100 psi)
c 24 V
c 11…33 V
Solid-state, NPN or PNP, NC
100 mA 6
< 15 mA
XML EpppU1Cp1: DIN 43650A, 4-pin male connector. For suitable female connector, see page 6/32.
XML EpppU1Dp1: M12, 5-pin male connector. For suitable female pre-wired connector, see page 6/32.
Operating curves
Rising pressure
bar
Rising pressure
bar
250 600
500
200
400
150
1 2 300
1 2
100
200
50
100
17,5
0 42
0
0 50 100 150 200 bar 0 100 200 300 400 500 bar
12,5 245 30 588

6/31
References 6

Accessories
Accessories
Description Sensor Reference Weight
size
bar kg
Digital displays for analogue - 1…0 XML EZM01 0.100
pressure sensors
0…1 XML EZ001 0.100
0…10 XML EZ010 0.100
0…25 XML EZ025 0.100
XML EZpppp
0…60 XML EZ060 0.100
0…100 XML EZ100 0.100
0…250 XML EZ250 0.100
0…600 XML Z600 0.100
XZ CC43FCP40B
of cable
m kg
Female DIN 43650 A connector – XZ CC43FCP40B 0.035
DIN 43650 A - straight M12 male 1m XZ CR1523062K1 0.080

jumper cables for splitter boxes
2m XZ CR1523062K2 0.110
6 XZ CP1164Lp
Pre-wired M12, straight, female 2m XZ CP1164L2 0.115
connectors
5m XZ CP1164L5 0.270
10 m XZ CP1164L10 0.520
Pre-wired M12, elbowed, female 2m XZ CP1264L2 0.115

connectors
5m XZ CP1264L5 0.270
10 m XZ CP1264L10 0.520
XZ CP1264Lp
6/32
schemes 6
Dimensions
XML EpppU1C21, XML U1C31 XML EpppU1D31
42
26
Ø 40
Ø 40
Ø
Ø
50 12 10 a
12 10 a 36
XML E a XML E a
M01, 001, 010, 025 65 M01, 001, 010, 025 65
060, 250, 600 75 060, 250, 600 75
Ø: G 1/4 A (BSP male) Ø: G 1/4 A (BSP male)
Digital displays
XML EZppp
50
36
66
a + 22 (1)
Ø 40 51,5
(1) a = 65 or 75, see above.
Wiring schemes
Pressure transmitters (1) Electronic pressure switches (2)
XML EpppU1C21 XML EpppU1D21 XML EpppU1C31 XML EpppU1D31
– – –
2 3/BU 2 3/BU
3 4 2 – 4 2/WH
3
1 + YG 1/BN + 1 + YG 1/BN +
Jumper cables, DIN 43650 A - straight M12 male

XZ CR15230D62Kp XML EpppU1C41 XML EpppU1D41
–
2 3/BU
5
2
4 3 4 – 4
3 2/WH
1 1 1 + YG 1/BN +
(1) sensor connector pin view (2) switch connector pin view
References:
pages 6/24 to 6/31
6/33
Presentation 6
Nautilus® Universal, Osiconcept®

For control circuits, type XML F
Presentation
Electronic pressure sensors type XML F are used for pressure control of hydraulic
oils, fresh water, sea water, air and corrosive fluids, between - 1 and 600 bar.
b Osiconcept: simplicity of setting-up
Electronic pressure sensors type XML F are characterised by their ceramic pressure
measuring cell.
1 Large 4-digit display indicating programming codes, parameter values or the

measured pressure.
2 LED indicators for pressure unit of measurement selected (direct reading of bar or
1 psi).
6 3 LED indicator(s) for providing status of pressure switch output(s).
Output 1 Bar
Output 2 Psi 2 4 Ergonomic keys for configuring the product via the pull-down menu.
3 5 Excellent resistance to overpressures.
Menu 6 Memorisation and possibility of reading pressure peaks within the installation.
v Three menus enable the user to:
4
- configure (“PROG” menu) the various functions of the unit (access to all the
Enter parameters of the product),
- perform (“USER” menu) diagnostic operations and, for pressure switches, to set
the switching point pressure values,
- read (“READ” menu) all the configuration details, together with the values set in
the “PROG” and “USER” menus.
5 Functions
b Pressure transmitters XML FpppD2p1p have a 4…20 mA or 0…10 V analogue

output. In addition to having a manual diagnostic function (see below), they also
incorporate a remote diagnostic function: a digital input connected, for example, to a
PLC enables remote activation of the sensor’s test function. When the sensor is
operating correctly, the analogue output must, when testing, be close to 50% of the
sensor size (12 mA or 5 V).
b Universal sensors XML FpppD2p2p are pressure switches with an adjustable
differential, for regulation between 2 thresholds, featuring a solid-state output
(configurable both for NPN or PNP and NO or NC), and a 4…20 mA or 0…10 V
analogue output. They incorporate the manual diagnostic function (see below).
b Pressure switches XML FpppD2p3p are dual stage switches, with adjustable
6 differential for each threshold, featuring 2 solid-state outputs (configurable both for
NPN or PNP and NO or NC). They incorporate the manual diagnostic function (see
below).
b Pressure switches XML FpppE2p4p for a.c. control are switches with adjustable
differential, for regulation between 2 thresholds, featuring an a 2.5 A relay output
(configurable for NO or NC). They incorporate the manual diagnostic function (see
below).
Sensors type XML F feature:
b Various configurable functions
v For the display:
- pressure unit of measurement (bar or psi),
- response time (slow: display refreshes in 1% steps of the units size,
normal: display refreshes in 0.5% steps of the units size or fast: display refreshes
every 10 ms).
v For the analogue output:
- response time (adjustable from 5 to 500 ms, in steps of 1 ms),
- maximum pressure of the output curve (adjustable from 75 to 125% of the units
size).
v For each solid-state output:
- PNP or NPN logic,
- NO or NC output,
- time delay both on trip and on reset (adjustable from 0 to 50 s, in steps of 1 s),
- response time (adjustable from 5 to 500 ms, in steps of 1 ms).
v For the a.c. relay output models:
- NO or NC contact,
- time delay both on trip and on reset (adjustable from 0 to 50 s, in steps of 1 s),
- response time (adjustable from 5 to 500 ms, in steps of 1 ms).
b Manual diagnostic function enabling:
- checking correct operation of sensor,
- reading the value of the maximum pressure peak that has occurred since the last
reset to zero and also, deleting this value for a fresh reset.
6/34
Characteristics 6
Nautilus® Universal, Osiconcept®

For control circuits, type XML F
Conformity to standards e,
IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1,
EN 50081, EN 50082, EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/8/11

Ambient air temperature For operation - 25…+ 80 °C (d.c. models)

- 25…+ 75 °C (a.c. models)
Fluids or products controlled Hydraulic oils, air, fresh water, sea water, corrosive fluids from - 15…+ 80 °C
Component materials in contact with fluid Stainless steel fluid entry type AISI 303, viton gasket

Vibration resistance 5 gn (25…200 Hz) and 35 gn (60…2000 Hz), conforming to IEC 68-2-6
Shock resistance 50 gn, conforming to IEC 68-2-27

Electrical protection Protected against reverse polarity, short-circuit, overload and connection faults
Resistance to electromagnetic Electrostatic discharges Standard EN 61000-4-2 contact 4kV, air 8 kV

interference Radiated electromagnetic Standard EN 61000-4-3 10 V/m
fields
Fast transients Standard EN 61000-4-4 2 kV
Surges Standard EN 61000-4-5 (AC) 1 kV, (DC) 0.5 kV
Conducted disturbances, Standard EN 61000-4-6 10 V
induced by radio frequency
fields
Degree of protection IP 67 conforming to IEC/EN 60529, NEMA 4/6/12/13
Operating rate < 50 Hz

Output response time Adjustable from 5 to 500 ms, in steps of 1 ms
Service life In millions of operating > 10

cycles
Drift Of the zero point < ± 0.1% of the measuring range/°C
Of the sensitivity < ± 0.03% of the measuring range/°C
Precision Analogue output

Digital output
y 0.6% of the measuring range, output offset < 200 mV
y 0.6% of the measuring range
6
Repeat accuracy y 0.5% of the measuring range
Display response time Adjustable; 3 options:
- slow (1% of the units size),
- normal (0.5% of the units size), or
- fast (refreshed every 10 ms)
Fluid connection G 1/4 A (BSP female) conforming to NF E 03-004 and ISO 7, 1/4" NPT or SAE 7/16-20UNF
female, depending on model
Electrical connection M12 “Snap-C” compatible connector or SAE 7/8-16UN connector, depending on model
6/35
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML F
Size - 1 bar (- 14.5 psi)
Type Pressure transmitters Universal sensors with adjustable

differential. Solid-state and analogue
outputs (1)
Adjustable range of switching point (PB) – - 0.08…- 1 bar (- 1.16…- 14.5 psi)
(Falling pressure)
Analogue output 4-20 mA 0-10 V 4-20 mA 0-10 V
References
Fluid connection 1/4" BSP female XML FM01D2015 XML FM01D2115 XML FM01D2025 XML FM01D2125
(2) 1/4" NPT female XML FM01D2016 XML FM01D2116 XML FM01D2026 XML FM01D2126
SAE 7/16-20UNF female XML FM01D2019 XML FM01D2119 XML FM01D2029 XML FM01D2129
Weight (kg) 0.480
Possible differential Min. at low and high setting – 0.03 bar (0.44 psi)
(add to PB to give PH) Max. at low setting – 0.95 bar (13.77 psi)
Maximum permissible accidental pressure 3 bar (43.5 psi)
Destruction pressure 5 bar (72.5 psi)
Current consumption 80 mA
Output – Programmable, NPN or PNP and NO or NC
Time delay – Adjustable time delay on trip and on reset from
0 to 50 s, in steps of 1 second
Switching capacity – 200 mA
Analogue output 4…20 mA or 0…10 V, depending on model. Maximum signal level adjustable between - 0.25
6 Electrical connection
and 0.25 bar (- 3.62 and 3.62 psi)
M12, 4-pin male connector. For suitable female connectors, including pre-wired versions, see
page 6/62
(1) Vacuum sensors with adjustable differential for regulation between 2 thresholds. Solid-state
and analogue outputs.
(2) Fluids controlled: hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea water, air, corrosive fluids, from - 15 to
+ 80 °C. Component materials of units in contact with the fluid, see page 6/35.
Curves
Analogue output curve Vacuum sensor operating curves
Rising pressure
bar
-0,97 -0,5 -0,05 0
20 mA - 10 V
-0,08
Time
2 1
12 mA - 5 V -0,5
PH
Falling pressure
PB
4 mA - 0 V -1
-1 - 0,50 - 0,25 0 0,25 bar bar Vacuum
1 Maximum differential –– Adjustable value


6/36
Type Vacuum switches with adjustable Dual stage adjustable vacuum

differential and relay output (1) switches with solid-state outputs (2)
Adjustable range of switching point(s) (PB or PB1 and PB2) - 0.08…- 1 bar (- 1.16…- 14.5 psi)
(Falling pressure)
References
Fluid connection 1/4" BSP female XML FM01E2045 XML FM01D2035
(3) 1/4" NPT female XML FM01E2046 XML FM01D2036
SAE 7/16-20UNF female XML FM01E2049 XML FM01D2039
Weight (kg) 0.590 0.480
Possible differential (add to: Min. at low and high setting 0.03 bar (0.44 psi) For each stage:
- PB to give PH Max. at low setting 0.95 bar (13.77 psi) min. at low and high setting: 0.03 bar (0.44 psi)
- PB1 & PB2 to give PH1 & PH2) max. at low setting: 0.95 bar (13.77 psi)
Maximum permissible accidental pressure 3 bar (43.5 psi)
Rated supply voltage a 120 V c 24 V
Voltage limits a 102…132 V c 17…33 V
Output Relay Programmable, NPN or PNP and NO or NC
Time delay Adjustable time delay on trip and on reset from 0 to 50 s, in steps of 1 second
Switching capacity 2.5 A, AC-15, C300 (120 V - 1.5 A) 200 mA
Electrical connection SAE 7/8-16UN, 5-pin male connector. For M12, 4-pin male connector. For suitable female
suitable female pre-wired connectors, see connectors, including pre-wired versions, see
page 6/62. page 6/62
(1) Vacuum switches with adjustable differential for regulation between 2 thresholds. Relay
output. 6
(2) Vacuum switches with 2 adjustable stages and adjustable differential for each threshold.
Solid-state outputs.
Vacuum switch operating curves

(Curve for each stage for dual stage vacuum switches) Vacuum switches with relay output Dual stage vacuum switches
Rising pressure
bar
-0,97 -0,5 -0,05 0
-0,08
Time Time
2 1 -0,5
PH PH1
Falling pressure
PB1
PH2
PB PB2
-1
bar Vacuum Vacuum
1 Maximum differential –– Adjustable value –– Adjustable value


6/37
characteristics 6
Size 1 bar (14.5 psi)

outputs (1)
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) – 0.08…1 bar (1.16…14.5 psi)

(Rising pressure)
References
Fluid connection 1/4" BSP female XML F001D2015 XML F001D2115 XML F001D2025 XML F001D2125
(2) 1/4" NPT female XML F001D2016 XML F001D2116 XML F001D2026 XML F001D2126
SAE 7/16-20UNF female XML F001D2019 XML F001D2119 XML F001D2029 XML F001D2129
Weight (kg) 0.480
(subtract to PH Max. at high setting – 0.95 bar (13.77 psi)
to give PB)
Maximum permissible accidental pressure 4 bar (58 psi)
Destruction pressure 6 bar (87 psi)
6 Analogue output 4…20 mA or 0…10 V, depending on model. Maximum signal level adjustable between 0.75 and
1.25 bar (10.88 and 18.12 psi)
Electrical connection M12, 4-pin male connector. For suitable female connectors, including pre-wired versions, see
page 6/62
(1) Pressure sensors with adjustable differential for regulation between 2 thresholds. Solid-state
Curves
Analogue output curve Pressure sensor operating curves
Rising pressure
bar
20 mA - 10 V 1
Pressure
PH
1 2
12 mA - 5 V 0,5
PB
0,08
4 mA - 0 V
0 0,5 0,75 1 1,25 bar 0 0,05 0,5 0,97bar Time
Falling pressure

6/38
Type Pressure switches with adjustable Dual stage adjustable pressure

Adjustable range of switching point(s) (PH or PH1 and PH2) 0.08…1 bar (1.16…14.5 psi)
(Rising pressure)
References
Fluid connection 1/4" BSP female XML F001E2045 XML F001D2035
(3) 1/4" NPT female XML F001E2046 XML F001D2036
SAE 7/16-20UNF female XML F001E2049 XML F001D2039
Weight (kg) 0.590 0.480
Possible differential Min. at low and high setting 0.03 bar (0.44 psi) For each stage:
(subtract from: Max. at high setting 0.95 bar (13.77 psi) min. at low and high setting: 0.03 bar (0.44 psi)
- PH to give PB max. at high setting: 0.95 bar (13.77 psi)
- PH1 & PH2 to give PB1 & PB2)
6
(1) Pressure switches with adjustable differential for regulation between 2 thresholds. Relay
output.
(2) Pressure switches with 2 adjustable stages and adjustable differential for each threshold.
Pressure switch operating curves

(Curve for each stage for dual stage pressure switches) Pressure switches with relay output Dual stage pressure switches
Rising pressure
bar
1
Pressure Pressure
PH PH2
1 2 PB2
0,5
PH1
PB PB1
0,08
0 0,05 0,5 0,97bar Time Time

Falling pressure

6/39
characteristics 6
Size 2.5 bar (36.25 psi)

outputs (1)
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) – 0.20…2.5 bar (2.9…36.25 psi)

(Rising pressure)
References
Weight (kg) 0.480
(subtract from PH Max. at high setting – 2.38 bar (34.51 psi)
to give PB)
3.1 bar (27.5 and 44.9 psi)
page 6/62
Curves
Rising pressure
bar
20 mA - 10 V 2,5
Pressure
2
PH
1 2
12 mA - 5 V
1 PB
0,20
4 mA - 0 V
0 1 1,9 2,5 3,1 bar 0 0,12 1 2 2,42 bar Time
Falling pressure

6/40

Adjustable range of switching point(s) (PH or PH1 and PH2) 0.20…2.5 bar (2.9…36.25 psi)
(Rising pressure)
References
Weight (kg) 0.590 0.480
(1) Pressure switches with adjustable differential for regulation between 2 thresholds. Relay 6
output.

Rising pressure
bar
2,5
Pressure Pressure
2
PH PH2
1 2 PB2
PH1
1 PB PB1
0,20
0 0,12 1 2 2,42 bar Time Time

Falling pressure


6/41
characteristics 6

outputs (1)
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) – 0.8…10 bar (11.6…145 psi)

(Rising pressure)
References
Weight (kg) 0.480
to give PB)
Analogue output 4…20 mA or 0…10 V, depending on model. Maximum signal level adjustable between 7.5 and
6 12.5 bar (108.75 and 181.25 psi)
page 6/62
Curves
Rising pressure
bar
20 mA - 10 V 10
Pressure
PH
1 2
12 mA - 5 V 5
PB
0,8
4 mA - 0 V
0 5 7,5 10 12,5 bar 0 0,5 5 9,7 bar Time
Falling pressure

6/42

Adjustable range of switching point(s) (PH or PH1 and PH2) 0.8…10 bar (11.6…145 psi)
(Rising pressure)
References
Weight (kg) 0.590 0.480
suitable female pre-wired connectors, see
page 6/62.
connectors, including pre-wired versions, see
page 6/62 6
output.

Rising pressure
bar
10
Pressure Pressure
PH PH2
1 2 PB2
5
PH1
PB PB1
0,8
0 0,5 5 9,7 bar Time Time

Falling pressure


6/43
characteristics 6

outputs (1)

(Rising pressure)
References
Weight (kg) 0.480
to give PB)
Analogue output 4…20 mA or 0…10 V, depending on model. Maximum signal level adjustable between 12 and
6 20 bar (174 and 290 psi)
page 6/62
Curves
Rising pressure
bar
20 mA - 10 V 16
Pressure
1 PH
10
2
12 mA - 5 V
PB
1,28
4 mA - 0 V
0 10 12 16 20 bar 0 0,8 10 15,5 bar Time
Falling pressure


6/44

(Rising pressure)
References
Weight (kg) 0.590 0.480
6
output.

Rising pressure
bar
16
Pressure Pressure
PH PH2
1 2
10 PB2
PH1
PB PB1
1,28
0 0,8 10 15,5 bar Time Time

Falling pressure


6/45
characteristics 6

outputs (1)
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) – 2…25 bar (29…362.5 psi)

(Rising pressure)
References
Weight (kg) 0.480
to give PB)
Analogue output 4…20 mA or 0…10 V, depending on model. Maximum signal level adjustable between 18.8 and
6 31.2 bar (272.6 and 452.4 psi)
page 6/62
Curves
Rising pressure
bar
20 mA - 10 V 25
Pressure
20
PH
1 2
12 mA - 5 V
10 PB
2
4 mA - 0 V
0 10 18,8 25 31,2 bar 0 1,2 10 20 24,2 bar Time
Falling pressure

6/46

Adjustable range of switching point(s) (PH or PH1 and PH2) 2…25 bar (29…362.5 psi)
(Rising pressure)
References
Weight (kg) 0.590 0.480
6
output.

Rising pressure
bar
25
Pressure Pressure
20
PH PH2
1 2 PB2
PH1
10 PB PB1
0 1,2 10 20 24,2 bar Time Time

Falling pressure

6/47
characteristics 6

outputs (1)

(Rising pressure)
References
Weight (kg) 0.500
(subtract from PH Max. at high setting – 38 bar (551 psi)
to give PB)
6 50 bar (435 and 725 psi)
page 6/62
Curves
Rising pressure
bar
20 mA - 10 V 40
Pressure
30
PH
1 2
12 mA - 5 V 20
PB
10
3,2
4 mA - 0 V
0 10 20 30 40 50 bar 0 2 10 20 30 38,8 bar Time
Falling pressure

6/48

(Rising pressure)
References
Weight (kg) 0.610 0.500
(subtract from: Max. at high setting 38 bar (551 psi) min. at low and high setting: 1.2 bar (17.4 psi)
- PH to give PB max. at high setting: 38 bar (551 psi)
page 6/62.
page 6/62
6
output.

Rising pressure
bar
40
Pressure Pressure
30 PH2
PH
1 2 PB2
20
PH1
PB PB1
10
3,2
0 2 10 20 30 38,8 bar Time Time

Falling pressure


6/49
characteristics 6

outputs (1)

(Rising pressure)
References
Weight (kg) 0.500
to give PB)
87.5 bar (761.3 and 1268.7 psi)
page 6/62
Curves
Rising pressure
bar
20 mA - 10 V 70
Pressure
50 PH
1 2
12 mA - 5 V
PB
20
5,6
4 mA - 0 V
0 20 52,5 70 87,5 bar 0 3,5 20 50 67,9 bar Time
Falling pressure

6/50

(Rising pressure)
References
Weight (kg) 0.610 0.500
Electrical connection SAE 7/8-16UN, 5-pin male connector. For
M12, 4-pin male connector. For suitable female
6
output.

Rising pressure
bar
70
Pressure Pressure
50 PH PH2
1 2 PB2
PH1
PB PB1
20
5,6
0 3,5 20 50 67,9 bar Time Time

Falling pressure

6/51
characteristics 6

outputs (1)
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) – 8…100 bar (116…1450 psi)

(Rising pressure)
References
Weight (kg) 0.500
Possible differential Min. at low and high setting – 3 bar (43.5 psi)
(subtract from PH Max. at high setting – 95 bar (1377.5 psi)
to give PB)
6 Analogue output 4…20 mA or 0…10 V, depending on model. Maximum signal level adjustable between 75 and
125 bar (1087.5 and 1812.5 psi)
page 6/62
Curves
Rising pressure
bar
20 mA - 10 V 100
Pressure
PH
1 2
12 mA - 5 V 50
PB
8
4 mA - 0 V
0 50 75 100 125 bar 0 5 50 97 bar Time
Falling pressure

6/52

Adjustable range of switching point(s) (PH or PH1 and PH2) 8…100 bar (116…1450 psi)
(Rising pressure)
References
Weight (kg) 0.610 0.500
Possible differential Min. at low and high setting 3 bar (43.5 psi) For each stage:
(subtract from: Max. at high setting 95 bar (1377.5 psi) min. at low and high setting: 3 bar (43.5 psi)
- PH to give PB max. at high setting: 95 bar (1377.5 psi)
connectors, including pre-wired versions, see 6
output.

Rising pressure
bar
100
Pressure Pressure
PH PH2
1 2 PB2
50
PH1
PB PB1
0 5 50 97 bar Time Time

Falling pressure


6/53
characteristics 6

outputs (1)

(Rising pressure)
References
Weight (kg) 0.590
to give PB)
Maximum permissible occasional surge pressure 640 bar (9280 psi)
6 200 bar (1740 and 2900 psi)
page 6/62
Curves
Rising pressure
bar
20 mA - 10 V 160
Pressure
1 PH
100
2
12 mA - 5 V
PB
12,8
4 mA - 0 V
0 100 120 160 200 bar 0 8 100 155,2 bar Time
Falling pressure


6/54

(Rising pressure)
References
Weight (kg) 0.700 0.590
(subtract from: Max. at high setting 152 bar (2204 psi) min. at low and high setting: 4.8 bar (69.6 psi)
page 6/62.
page 6/62
6
output.

Rising pressure
bar
160
Pressure Pressure
PH PH2
100
1 2
PB2
PH1
PB PB1
12,8
0 8 100 155,2 bar Time Time

Falling pressure


6/55
characteristics 6

outputs (1)

(Rising pressure)
References
Weight (kg) 0.590
to give PB)
6 Analogue output 4…20 mA or 0…10 V, depending on model. Maximum signal level adjustable between 187 and
312 bar (2711 and 4524 psi)
page 6/62
Curves
Rising pressure
bar
20 mA - 10 V 250
Pressure
200
PH
1 2
12 mA - 5 V
100
PB
20
4 mA - 0 V
0 100 187 250 312 bar 0 12,5 100 200 242,5 bar Time
Falling pressure


6/56

(Rising pressure)
References
Weight (kg) 0.700 0.590
(subtract from: Max. at high setting 237.5 bar (3443.7 psi) Min. at low and high setting: 7.5 bar (108.8 psi)
- PH to give PB Max. at high setting: 237.5 bar (3443.7 psi)
connectors, including pre-wired versions, see 6
output.

Rising pressure
bar
250
Pressure Pressure
200
PH PH2
1 2 PB2
PH1
100 PB1
PB
20
0 12,5 100 200 242,5 bar Time Time

Falling pressure


6/57
characteristics 6

outputs (1)

(Rising pressure)
References
Weight (kg) 0.590
Possible differential Min. at low and high setting – 12 bar (174 psi)
to give PB)
6 500 bar (4350 and 7250 psi)
page 6/62
Curves
Rising pressure
bar
20 mA - 10 V 400
Pressure
300 PH
1 2
12 mA - 5 V 200
PB
100
32
4 mA - 0 V
0 100 200 300 400 500 bar 0 20 100 200 300 388 bar Time
Falling pressure


6/58

(Rising pressure)
References
Weight (kg) 0.700 0.590
Possible differential Min. at low and high setting 12 bar (174 psi) For each stage:
(subtract from: Max. at high setting 380 bar (5510 psi) min. at low and high setting: 12 bar (174 psi)
Maximum permissible accidental pressure 1200 bar (17,400 psi)
page 6/62.
page 6/62
6
output.

Rising pressure
bar
400
Pressure Pressure
300 PH PH2
1 2 PB2
200 PH1
PB PB1
100
32
0 20 100 200 300 388 bar Time Time

Falling pressure


6/59
characteristics 6

outputs (1)

(Rising pressure)
References
Weight (kg) 0.590
Possible differential Min. at low and high setting – 18 bar (261 psi)
to give PB)
6 750 bar (6525 and 10 875 psi)
page 6/62
Curves
Rising pressure
bar
20 mA - 10 V 600
Pressure
PH
400
1 2
12 mA - 5 V
PB
200
48
4 mA - 0 V
0 200 450 600 750 bar 0 30 200 400 582 bar Time
Falling pressure


6/60

(Rising pressure)
References
Weight (kg) 0.700 0.590
Possible differential Min. at low and high setting 18 bar (261 psi) For each stage:
(subtract from: Max. at high setting 570 bar (8265 psi) min. at low and high setting: 18 bar (261 psi)
page 6/62.
page 6/62
6
output.

Rising pressure
bar
600
Pressure Pressure
PH PH2
400
1 2 PB2
PH1
PB PB1
200
48
0 30 200 400 582 bar Time Time

Falling pressure


6/61
References 6
Nautilus® Universal, Osiconcept®, type XML F

Accessories and replacement parts
References
Replacement parts
kg
Transparent cover with legends XML ZL007 0.020
Sealing gasket All sizes (XML F) XML ZL010 0.015
Accessories
of cable kg
XML ZL007 Fixing bracket – XML ZL008 0.037
Cooler for versions with – XML ZL009 0.370

1/4" BSP fluid connection (2)
Usage temperature:
150 °C max. for the fluid,
XML ZL009 50 °C for the ambient air
Pre-wired M12, straight, 2m XZ CP1141L2 0.115
female connectors 5m XZ CP1141L5 0.270
10 m XZ CP1141L10 0.520
XML ZL010 XML ZL008

Pre-wired M12, elbowed, 2m XZ CP1241L2 0.115
10 m XZ CP1241L10 0.520
Pre-wired 7/8" 16UN, straight, 2m XZ CP1764L2 0.185

10 m XZ CP1764L10 0.900
XZ CP1141Lp XZ CP1241Lp
M12 “Snap C”, straight, – XZ CC12FDM40V 0.520
female connector (1)
M12 - M12 jumper Straight female connector 1m XZ CR1511041C1 0.065
cables 2m XZ CR1511041C2 0.095
6 with straight male
connector, for
Elbowed female connector 1m XZ CR1512041C1 0.065
splitter box
2m XZ CR1512041C2 0.095
XZ CP1764Lp XZ CC12FDM40V (1) Connector incorporating IDCs (Insulation Displacement Connectors) for simple and quick
direct, in-line, connection to cable, without the need of a screwdriver or soldering iron.
(2) Available with other fluid connections (1/4" NPT and SAE 7/16-20 UNF).
XZ CR1511041Cp XZ CR1512041Cp
6/62
schemes 6
Nautilus® Universal, Osiconcept®, type XML F
Dimensions
XML ZL009 XML FpppD2ppp
G1/4
G1/4
M12 x 1
10
27 16
114
142
129
113
88
XML ZL008
12,45
15
(1) 27
21
46
10
58
138
58
(1) Female fluid entry
4,2
XML Fppp D2pp5: G 1/4 A (BSP)

Ø4,4 XML Fppp D2pp6: 1/4" NPT
XML Fppp D2pp9: SAE 7/16-20UNF
XML FpppE2ppp
49,6
20
17
7/8" 16 UN
Ø31,2 9,63
16
6
XML ZL010
164
1,5
119
88
Ø14 2
15
Ø19
(1) 27
58 46
138
(1) Female fluid entry

XML FpppE2 pp5: G 1/4 A (BSP)
XML FpppE2 pp6: 1/4" NPT
XML FpppE2 pp9: SAE 7/16-20UNF
Connections (pressure sensor connector pin view)
XML FpppD201p, XML FpppD202p, XML FpppD203p XML FpppE204p
FpppD211p FpppD212p
Calibration Solid-state 1st stage

shunt
– – solid-state
4 3 output 4 3 –
output 4 3
4 2
Relay 3
1 2 1 2 5 1
1 2 output
+ +
Analogue Analogue + 2nd stage
output output solid-state
output
6/63
General 6
Nautilus®
Functions
The function of pressure transmitters is the control and measurement of pressure or
vacuum levels in hydraulic or pneumatic systems. They transform the pressure into
an electrical signal which is proportional to the pressure measured.
Their high precision makes them suitable for all industrial applications requiring
pressure/vacuum display, control or regulation.
Being very robust, they are equally suitable for applications involving high operating
rates.
Pressure and vacuum switches
The function of electronic pressure and vacuum switches is the control or regulation
of pressure or vacuum levels in hydraulic or pneumatic systems. They transform the
pressure change into a digital output signal when the preset pressure or vacuum
points are reached. The very wide adjustment range for the setting points
characterise these electronic switches.
Their robustness, together with their excellent adherence to the set values over a
period of time, make them ideal for applications involving high operating rates.
In addition, the high repeat accuracy and fast response time of these sensors make
them equally suitable for applications requiring accurate pressure regulation and
monitoring.
Universal sensors
Universal sensors are electronic pressure and vacuum switches which include an
analogue output, identical to that of the pressure transmitters.
Operating principle
The electrical signal from the pressure transmitter (signal proportional to the
pressure being monitored) is amplified, calibrated and output as a standard 4 to
20 mA or 0 to 10 V (depending on model) analogue signal.
Signal
4…20 mA
or 0…10 V
Operating range Pressure
Pressure and vacuum switches

6 Designed for regulation between 2 thresholds (adjustable differential), these
switches have both a high point setting (PH) and a low point setting (PB). Both of
these points can be independently adjusted.
The difference (differential) between the two setting points can be little or
considerable, thus enabling small or large differentials to be set.
Being electronic, the switches have no mechanical moving parts.
Operating principle with solid-state NC outputs
Pressure switches with digital Vacuum switches with digital
output output
Pressure
PH Time
Adjustable
differential PH
PB Adjustable
differential
–– Adjustable value PB
Time PH = high point 2 1 2 1
1 2 1 2
PB = low point Vacuum
1 Output on 1 Output on
2 Output off 2 Output off
Dual stage pressure switches
–– Adjustable value
Pressure
PH2 PH1 = high point 1st stage
Adjustable
differential PB1 = low point 1st stage
PB2 PH2 = high point 2nd stage
PH1 PB2 = low point 2nd stage
Adjustable 1 Output 1st stage on
differential 2 Output 1st stage off
PB1
3 Output 2nd stage on
4 Output 2nd stage off
1 2 1 2 Time
3 4 3 4
6/64
Nautilus®
Terminology
Measuring range
The measuring range (M.R.) of a pressure sensor corresponds to the difference
between the upper and lower values measured by the load cell. It is comprised
between 0 bar and the pressure corresponding to the size of the sensor.
Operating range
The operating range of a pressure transmitter corresponds to its measuring
range. Within this range, its analogue output signal varies between 4 and 20 mA or
0 and 10 V and is proportional to the measured pressure.
The operating range of a pressure or vacuum switch is the difference between
the minimum low point (PB) and the maximum high point (PH) setting values.
Precision
This comprises linearity, hysteresis, repeat accuracy and setting tolerances. It is
expressed as a % of the measuring range (M.R.) of the load cell (% M.R.).
Signal The linearity is the maximum deviation

between the real transmitted curve and
the ideal curve.
Pressure
Signal The hysteresis is the maximum

deviation between the rising pressure
curve and the falling pressure curve.
Pressure
Signal The repeat accuracy is the maximum

drift encountered at varying pressures
under given conditions.
Pressure 6
Signal Signal The setting tolerances are the
manufacturer’s tolerances regarding
the zero point and sensitivity (gradient
of output signal curve from pressure
transmitter).
Pressure Pressure
Temperature drift
The precision of a pressure sensor is always susceptible to variation due to the
operating temperature.
Signal t° Zero point drift

t° This is proportional to the temperature
and is expressed as % M.R./°C.
Pressure
Signal t° Sensitivity drift

This is proportional to the temperature
t°
and is expressed as % M.R./°C.
Pressure
6/65
Nautilus®
Terminology (continued)
Switching point on rising pressure (PH)
The upper pressure setting at which the output of the electronic pressure or vacuum
switch changes state on rising pressure.
Switching point on falling pressure (PB)

The lower pressure setting at which the output of the electronic pressure or vacuum
switch changes state on falling pressure.
Differential
The difference between the switching point on rising pressure (PH) and the switching
point on falling pressure (PB). The low point can be set at the values indicated on the
operating curves shown on the product pages.
Repeat accuracy
The variation of the operating point of the pressure or vacuum switch between
several successive operations.
Size
Pressure transmitters and pressure switches
This is the maximum value of the operating range.
Vacuum transmitters and vacuum switches
This is the minimum value of the operating range.
Maximum permissible accidental pressure

The maximum pressure (excluding pressure surges) that the sensor can
occasionally withstand without permanent damage.
Destruction pressure
The pressure value which if exceeded is likely to cause serious damage to the sensor,
6 i.e. leaking, bursting, component failure, etc.
Load resistance of pressure transmitters

The supply voltage and load resistance of a pressure transmitter must be selected
according to the formula:
R load = U supply - U supply min. (U supply min. = 11 V for XML E and 17 V for XML F)
0.02 A
6/66
Nautilus®
Features of pressure sensors XML F

Pressure sensors type XML F (see page 6/34) feature numerous configuration
possibilities with regards to the display (response time, choice of bar or psi units of
measurement), analogue output signal operation (maximum signal output
adjustable between 75% and 125% of the units size), solid-state output operation
(PNP or NPN, NO or NC, time delay on opening or on closing, response time) and
status signalling (see below).
A diagnostic function is incorporated which enables verification, at any time, of the
sensors correct operation (see below) and also, to provide information regarding
pressure peak values.
Self-test function (calibration shunt)

All pressure sensors XML F incorporate a diagnostic function which can be used, at
any time, to check the correct operation of the unit. It comprises an internal system
which enables automatic monitoring of all the sensor circuits, including the ceramic
pressure measuring load cell.
For all models, this function is manually activated and the result of the test is
indicated on the display (DONE or ERR).
For pressure transmitters, this function can also be remotely activated via a digital
input connected to a PLC, thus enabling automatic verification without the need of
intervention by an operator. In this instance, the self-test also generates an
analogue output signal which is equivalent to 50% of the sensors size (12 mA or
5 V) which, in turn, can be verified by the PLC.
The unit can be considered as defective if the difference between the signal
transmitted and the standard theoretical value is too great.
Operational status signalling

Pressure and vacuum switches XML F feature status LED indicators for the digital
outputs. Indication can be configured for 2 modes:
- “hysteresis” mode: indicator illuminated when output activated (output off for NC
configuration or output on for NO configuration).
- “window” mode: indicator illuminated when the pressure being measured is
between the high and low set point values.
Selection of switch size

Size selection is made according to the maximum pressure of the system to
be controlled.
6
Adherence to pressure
Select a size whereby the nominal pressure is higher than the maximum pressure
of the system to be controlled.
Precision, repeat accuracy

The precision and repeat accuracy are expressed as a percentage of the measuring
range and better detection is achieved when the size of the sensor is close to that
of the maximum pressure of the system to be controlled. As general rule, avoid
working towards the bottom limit of the measuring range.
Minimum differential of a pressure or vacuum switch

The minimum differential for each switch size is 2% for XML E and 3% for XML F of
its operating range.
Selection example for a pressure switch

Maximum pressure of system = 11 bar
PH = 7 bar
PB = 6 bar
2 alternative choices:
XML p010ppppp (10 bar) or
XML p025ppppp (25 bar)
Advantages:
XML p010ppppp: maximum repeat accuracy and precision
XML p025ppppp: withstand to overpressure.
6/67
;;;;;;
6
;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;
;
Presentation
6/68
2
2
6
Electromechanical pressure and
vacuum switches
Nautilus®
For control circuits, type XML
Presentation
Pressure and vacuum switches type XML are switches for control circuits.
They are used to control the pressure of hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea water, air,
steam, corrosive fluids or viscous products, up to 500 bar.
XML A pressure and vacuum switches have a fixed differential and are for detection
of a single threshold. They incorporate a 1 C/O single-pole contact.
XML B pressure and vacuum switches have an adjustable differential and are for
regulation between 2 thresholds. They incorporate a 1 C/O single-pole contact.
XML C pressure and vacuum switches have an adjustable differential and are for
regulation between 2 thresholds. They incorporate 2 C/O single-pole contacts.
XML D pressure and vacuum switches are dual stage switches, each stage with a
fixed differential, and are for detection at each threshold. They incorporate 2 C/O
single-pole contacts (one per stage).
Setting
When setting pressure and vacuum switches XML, adjust the switching point on
rising pressure (PH) first and then the switching point on falling pressure (PB).
Pressure and vacuum switches with fixed differential, type XML A
Switching point on rising pressure

The switching point on rising pressure (PH) is set by adjusting the red screw 1.
Switching point on falling pressure

The switching point on falling pressure (PB) is not adjustable.
The difference between the tripping and resetting points of the contact is the natural
differential of the switch (contact differential, friction, etc.).
Pressure and vacuum switches with adjustable differential, types XML B and
XML C

The switching point on rising pressure (PH) is set by adjusting the red screw 1.

The switching point on falling pressure (PB) is set by adjusting the green screw 2.
Dual stage pressure and vacuum switches with fixed differential for each
threshold, type XML D
Switching point on rising pressure of stage 1 and stage 2

The first stage switching point on rising pressure (PH1) is set by adjusting the red
screw 1.
The second stage switching point on rising pressure (PH2) is set by adjusting the
blue screw 2.

The switching points on falling pressure (PB1 and PB2) are not adjustable.
The difference between the tripping and resetting points of each contact is the natural
6
Characteristics 6
vacuum switches 6
Nautilus®
For control circuits, type XML
Conformity to standards e, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14
Product certifications UL, CSA, CCC, BV, LROS, RINA, GL, DNV, VIT-SEPRO
Protective treatment Standard version “TC”. Special version “TH”
Ambient air temperature °C For operation: - 25…+ 70. For storage: - 40 …+ 70
Fluids or products controlled Hydraulic oils, air, fresh water, sea water (0…+ 160 °C), depending on model
Steam, corrosive fluids, viscous products (0…+ 160 °C), depending on model
Materials Case: zinc alloy
Component materials in contact with fluid: see pages 6/128 and 6/129
Vibration resistance 4 gn (30...500 Hz) conforming to IEC 68-2-6 except XML pL35ppppp,
XML p001ppppp and XML BM03ppppp: 2 gn
Shock resistance 50 gn conforming to IEC 68-2-27 except XML pL35ppppp, XML p001ppppp and
XML BM03ppppp: 30 gn
Electric shock protection Class I conforming to IEC 1140, IEC 536 and NF C 20-030
Degree of protection Screw terminal models: IP 66 conforming to IEC/EN 60529
Connector models: IP 65 conforming to IEC/EN 60529
Operating rate Op. Piston version switches: ≤ 60 (for temperature > 0 °C)
cycles/ Diaphragm version switches: ≤ 120 (for temperature > 0 °C)
min
Repeat accuracy < 2%
Fluid connection G 1/4 (BSP female) conforming to NF E 03-005, ISO 228 or 1/4" NPTF (consult your
Regional Sales Office)
Electrical connection Screw terminal models: ISO M20 x 1.5 tapped entry
For an entry tapped for n° 13 (DIN Pg 13.5) cable gland, replace the last number of
the reference by 1 (example: XML A010A2S12 becomes XML A010A2S11)
For an entry tapped 1/2" NPT, please consult your Regional Sales Office
Connector models (either type DIN 43650 A or M12): please consult your Regional
Sales Office

Rated operational characteristics a AC-15; B300 (Ue = 240 V, Ie = 1.5 A - Ue = 120 V, Ie = 3 A)
c DC-13; R300 (Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0.1 A) conforming to IEC 947-5-1 Appendix A,
EN 60 947-5-1
Rated insulation voltage Ui = 500 V conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1
Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp = 6 kV conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1
Type of contacts Silver tipped contacts
XML A and XML B: 1 C/O single-pole contact (4 terminal), snap action
XML C: 2 C/O single-pole contacts (8 terminal), simultaneous, snap action
XML D: 2 C/O single-pole contacts (8 terminal), staggered, snap action 6
Resistance across terminals mΩ < 25 conforming to NF C 93-050 method A or IEC 255-7 category 3
Connection Screw clamp terminals.
Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 0.2 mm2, max: 2 x 2.5 mm2
Electrical durability XML A and XML B XML C and XML D

Conforming to IEC 947-5-1 Appendix C a.c. supply a 50/60 Hz a.c. supply a 50/60 Hz
Utilisation categories AC-15 and DC-13 o Inductive circuit, lthe = 10 A o Inductive circuit, lthe = 10 A
Operating rate: 3600 operating cycles/hour 7 5

Load factor: 0.5

Ithe 4 Ithe
5 3
4 12/24 V
3 2
2
48 V 230 V 48 V
1
1
0,5
0,5
230 V 110 V
0,2
0,1
110 V
0,1
0,3 0,5 1 2 5 10 20 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 10
d.c. supply c d.c. supply c

Power broken in W Power broken in W
for 1 million operating cycles for 5 million operating cycles
o W 31 29 26 o W 10 7 4
6/69
References, Electromechanical vacuum switches 6
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
Fixed differential, for detection of a single threshold
Switches with 1 C/O single-pole contact
Fluid connection 1/4" BSP
Vacuum switches type XML A With setting scale Without setting scale
Adjustable range of switching point (PB) - 0.28…- 1 bar (- 4.06…- 14.5 psi)
(Falling pressure)
Electrical connection Terminals DIN connector Terminals DIN connector
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea XML AM01V2S12 XML AM01V2C11 XML AM01V1S12 XML AM01V1C11
(2) water, air, up to + 70 °C
Hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea XML AM01T2S12 XML AM01T2C11 XML AM01T1S12 XML AM01T1C11
water, air, corrosive fluids, up to
+ 160 °C
Weight (kg) 0.685 0.715 0.685 0.715
Natural differential At low setting (3) 0.24 bar (3.48 psi)
(add to PB to give PH) At high setting (3) 0.24 bar (3.48 psi)
Maximum permissible Per cycle 5 bar (72.5 psi)
pressure Accidental 9 bar (130.5 psi)
Mechanical life 3 x 106 operating cycles
Cable entry for terminal models 1 entry tapped M20 x 1.5 mm for ISO cable gland, clamping capacity 7 to 13 mm
Connector type for connector models DIN 43650A, 4-pin male. For suitable female connector, see page 6/122
Vacuum switch type Diaphragm
(1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML AM01V2S12
becomes XML AM01V2S11).
(2) Component materials of units in contact with the fluid, see pages 6/128 and 6/129.
(3) Deviation of the differential at low and high setting points for switches of the same size:
6 ± 0.05 bar (± 0.72 psi).
Operating curves Connection
Terminal model
Rising pressure
13
11
-1 -0,76 -0,6 -0,4 -0,2 -0,04 Time

bar 0
14
12
-0,2
-0,28
Connector model
-0,4 PH Vacuum switch connector pin view
-0,6 PB 1 → 11 and 13
2 → 12
3 → 14
Falling pressure
Vacuum
-0,8 1 2
3
-1
bar
--- Non adjustable value
Other versions Vacuum switches with alternative tapped cable entries: NPT etc.
Accessories: Dimensions:
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/70
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
Adjustable differential, for regulation between 2 thresholds
Vacuum switches type XML B With setting scale Without setting scale
(Falling pressure)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea XML BM02V2S12 XML BM02V2C11 XML BM02V1S12 XML BM02V1C11
Hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea XML BM02T2S12 XML BM02T2C11 XML BM02T1S12 XML BM02T1C11
+ 160 °C
Weight (kg) 1.015 1.030 1.015 1.030
Possible differential Min. at low setting (3) 0.13 bar (1.88 psi)
(add to PB to give PH) Min. at high setting (3) 0.13 bar (1.88 psi)
Max. at high setting 0.8 bar (11.6 psi)
(1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML BM02V2S12
becomes XML BM02V2S11).
± 0.02 bar (± 0.29 psi).
6
Terminal model
Rising pressure
13
11
-1 -0,87 -0,6 -0,4 -0,2 -0,01 Time

bar 0
14
12
-0,14
-0,2
PH
Connector model
-0,4
Vacuum switch connector pin view
2
-0,6 PB 1 → 11 and 13
2 → 12
Vacuum 3 → 14
Falling pressure
1 1 2
-0,8
3
-1
bar

page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/71
Nautilus® type XML

characteristics 6

Switches with 2 C/O single-pole contacts
Vacuum switches type XML C With setting scale
(Falling pressure)
Electrical connection Terminals
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea XML CM02V2S12
Hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea XML CM02T2S12
+ 160 °C
Weight (kg) 1.015
(add to PB to give PH) Min. at high setting (3) 0.14 bar (2.03 psi)
(1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML CM02V2S12
becomes XML CM02V2S11).
6 ± 0.02 bar (± 0.29 psi).
Terminal model
Rising pressure
-0,86 -0,6 -0,4 -0,14 0 Time
bar -0,01
13
11
23
21
-0,2
14
12
24
22
PH
-0,4
2
-0,6 PB
Vacuum
Falling pressure
-0,8
bar

page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/72
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
Dual stage, fixed differential, for detection at each threshold
Switches with 2 C/O single-pole contacts (one per stage)
Vacuum switches type XML D Without setting scale
Adjustable range of each 2nd stage switching point (PB2) - 0.12…- 1 bar (- 1.74…- 14.5 psi)
switching point 1st stage switching point (PB1) - 0.10…- 0.98 bar (- 1.45…- 14.21 psi)
(Falling pressure)
Spread between 2 stages (PB2 - PB1) 0.02…0.88 bar (0.29…12.76 psi)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea XML DM02V1S12
Hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea XML DM02T1S12
+ 160 °C
Weight (kg) 1.015
(add to PB1/PB2 At high setting (4) 0.1 bar (1.45 psi)
to give PH1/PH2)
(1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML DM02V1S12
becomes XML DM02V1S11).
(3) Deviation of the differential at low setting point for switches of the same size:
6
± 0.035 bar (± 0.51 psi).
(4) Deviation of the differential at high setting point for switches of the same size:
± 0.02 bar (± 0.29 psi).
Operating curves
High setting tripping points of contacts 1 and 2 Natural differential of contacts 1 and 2
PH1 setting (falling pressure) Rising pressure

-0,98 -0,8 -0,6 -0,4 -0,12 0 -1 -0,88 -0,6 -0,4 -0,2 -0,02 Time
bar 0 bar 0
E
-0,12 -0,12
-0,2
G-0,2
PH1
PH2 setting (falling pressure)
PB1
-0,4 -0,4
2 PH2
-0,6 -0,6 PB2
Falling pressure
Vacuum
1
-0,8 -0,8 –– Adjustable value
-0,98
F
-0,98
bar H bar Connection
Terminal model
Contact 1 Contact 2
(stage 1) (stage 2)
1 Maximum differential EF Contact 1 (stage 1)
13
11
23
21
2 Minimum differential GH Contact 2 (stage 2)

14
12
24
22
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/73
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
Size - 200 mbar (- 2.9 psi)
Vacuum switches type XML B With setting scale
Adjustable range of switching point (PB) - 20…- 200 mbar (- 0.29…- 2.9 psi)
(Falling pressure)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, air, up to + 160 °C XML BM03R2S12
(2) Fresh water, sea water, XML BM03S2S12
corrosive fluids, up to + 160 °C
Weight (kg) 3.310
Possible differential Min. at low setting (3) 18 mbar (0.26 psi)
(add to PB to give PH) Min. at high setting (3) 18 mbar (0.26 psi)
Max. at high setting 180 mbar (2.6 psi)
pressure Accidental 2 bar (29 psi)
Destruction pressure 3.5 bar (50.75 psi)
(1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML BM03R2S12
becomes XML BM03R2S11).
6 ± 2 mbar (± 0.29 psi).
Terminal model
Rising pressure
-182 -160 -120 -80 -40 -20 -2 Time
mbar 0
13
11
-20
14
12
-40
PH
-80
2
-120 PB
Vacuum
Falling pressure
-160
1
-200
mbar

page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/74
References, Electromechanical pressure switches 6
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
Size 50 mbar (0.72 psi)
Pressure switches type XML B With setting scale Without setting scale
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) 2.6…50 mbar (0.038…0.72 psi)

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, air, up to + 160 °C XML BL05R2S12 XML BL05R1S12
(2) Fresh water, sea water, XML BL05S2S12 XML BL05S1S12
Weight (kg) 2.420
Possible differential Min. at low setting (3) 1.4 mbar (0.02 psi)
(subtract from PH to give PB) Min. at high setting (4) 4 mbar (0.06 psi)
Maximum permissible Per cycle 62.5 mbar (0.90 psi)
pressure Accidental 112.5 mbar (1.63 psi)
Destruction pressure 225 mbar (3.26 psi)
Pressure switch type Diaphragm
(1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML BL05R2S12
becomes XML BL05R2S11).
- 0.8 mbar, + 1.1 mbar (- 0.01 psi, + 0.02 psi).
6
± 1.4 mbar, (+ 0.02 psi).
Terminal model
Pressure
Rising pressure
mbar
50 PH
13
11
1
14
12
40
PB
30
2
20
Time
10
2,6
0
1,2 10 20 30 40 46 mbar
Falling pressure
Other versions Pressure switches with DIN 43650A connector or with alternative tapped cable entries: NPT etc.
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/75
References, Electromechanical vacu-pressure
characteristics 6
switches 6
Nautilus® type XML. Size 5 bar (72.5 psi).

Adjustable differential, for regulation between 2 thresholds.
Switches with 1 C/O single-pole contact. Fluid connection 1/4" BSP
Vacu-pressure switches type XML B With setting scale Without setting scale
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) - 0.5…5 bar (- 7.25…72.5 psi)

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea XML BM05A2S12 XML BM05A2C11 XML BM05A1S12 XML BM05A1C11
Hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea XML BM05B2S12 XML BM05B2C11 XML BM05B1S12 XML BM05B1C11
water, air, up to + 160 °C
Corrosive fluids, up to + 160 °C XML BM05C2S12 XML BM05C2C11 XML BM05C1S12 XML BM05C1C11
Viscous products, up to + 160 °C XML BM05P2S12 XML BM05P2C11 XML BM05P1S12 XML BM05P1C11
(G1¼" fluid connection)
Weight (kg) 0.685 0.715 0.705 0.735
(subtract from PH to give PB) Min. at high setting (3) 0.5 bar (7.25 psi)
Maximum permissible Per cycle 6.25 bar (90.62 psi)
pressure Accidental 11.25 bar (163.12 psi)
Vacu-pressure switch type Diaphragm
6 (1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML BM05A2S12
becomes XML BM05A2S11).
± 0.05 bar (± 0.72 psi).
Terminal model
Pressure
13
11
Rising pressure
bar
PH1
5
14
12
PB1
4 1
3 Connector model
PH2
1 0
Time Vacu-pressure switch pin view
2 PB2
2 2
1
0,5
3 1 → 11 and 13
PH3
1 2 2 → 12
0 3
-0,5 PB3 3 → 14
-1 Vacuum
-1 0 1 2 3 4 4,5 5 bar
Falling pressure

Other versions Vacu-pressure switches with alternative tapped cable entries: NPT etc.
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/76
References, Electromechanical vacu-pressure
characteristics 6
switches 6
Nautilus® type XML. Size 5 bar (72.5 psi).

Adjustable differential, for regulation between 2 thresholds.
Switches with 2 C/O single-pole contacts. Fluid connection 1/4" BSP
Vacu-pressure switches type XML C With setting scale
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) - 0.55…5 bar (- 7.97…72.5 psi)

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea XML CM05A2S12
Hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea XML CM05B2S12
Corrosive fluids, up to + 160 °C XML CM05C2S12
Weight (kg) 0.685
Vacu-pressure switch type Diaphragm
(1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML CM05A2S12
becomes XML CM05A2S11).
Operating curves
± 0.1 bar (± 1.45 psi).
Connection
6
Terminal model
13
11
23
21
Pressure
Rising pressure
bar
5
PH1
14
12
24
22
4 PB1
1
3
Connector model
PH2
2
1 Vacu-pressure switch pin view
0
2 Time
PB2
2 1 → 11 and 13
1
0,5 3 2 → 12
0 PH3 1 2 3 → 14
3
-0,55
PB3
-1
-1 0 1 2 3 4 4,55 5 bar Vacuum
Falling pressure

Other versions Vacu-pressure switches with alternative tapped cable entries: NPT etc.
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/77
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
Pressure switches type XML B With setting scale 30 bar (435 psi)
overpressure
With setting scale
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) 45…350 mbar (0.65…5.07 psi) 42…330 mbar
(Rising pressure) (0.61…4.78 psi)
Electrical connection Terminals DIN connector Terminals
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, air, up to + 160 °C XML BL35R2S12 XML BL35R2C11 XML BS35R2S12
(2) Fresh water, sea water, XML BL35S2S12 XML BL35S2C11 –
Viscous products, up to + 160 °C XML BL35P2S12 XML BL35P2C11 –
Weight (kg) 2.575 2.590 3.500
Possible differential Min. at low setting (3) 42 mbar (0.60 psi) 33 mbar (0.48 psi)
(subtract from PH to give PB) Min. at high setting (4) 50 mbar (0.72 psi) 58 mbar (0.84 psi)
Max. at high setting 300 mbar (4.35 psi) 250 mbar (3.62 psi)
Maximum permissible Per cycle 1.25 bar (18.12 psi) 30 bar (435 psi)
pressure Accidental 2.25 bar (32.62 psi) 37.5 bar (543.75 psi)
Destruction pressure 4.5 bar (65.25 psi) 67.5 bar (978.75 psi)
Mechanical life 4 million operating cycles 2 million operating cycles
6 Connector type for connector models
Pressure switch type
DIN 43650A, 4-pin male. For suitable female connector, see page 6/122
Diaphragm
- 8 mbar, + 3 mbar (- 0.12 psi, + 0.04 psi).
± 8 mbar (± 0.11 psi).
Terminal model
Pressure
Rising pressure
mbar
13
11
350
PH
14
12
300
1
PB Connector model
200 2 Pressure switch connector pin view
100 Time 1 → 11 and 13

1 2 2 → 12
3
45 3 → 14
0
3 50 100 200 300 mbar
Falling pressure

Other versions Pressure switches with alternative tapped cable entries: NPT etc.
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/78
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
Pressure switches type XML B Without setting scale
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) 45…350 mbar (0.65…5.07 psi)

(Rising pressure)
Electrical connection Terminals DIN connector
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, air, up to + 160 °C XML BL35R1S12 XML BL35R1C11
(2) Fresh water, sea water, XML BL35S1S12 XML BL35S1C11
Viscous products, up to + 160 °C XML BL35P1S12 XML BL35P1C11
Weight (kg) 2.575 2.590
Possible differential Min. at low setting (3) 42 mbar (0.60 psi)
(subtract from PH to give PB) Min. at high setting (4) 50 mbar (0.72 psi)
Mechanical life 4 million operating cycles
Connector type for connector models
Diaphragm 6
- 8 mbar, + 3 mbar (- 0.12 psi, + 0.04 psi).
± 8 mbar (± 0.11 psi).
Terminal model
Rising pressure
mbar Pressure
13
11
350
PH
14
12
300
1
PB Connector model
200 2 Pressure switch connector pin view
100 Time 1 → 11 and 13

1 2 2 → 12
3
45 3 → 14
0
3 50 100 200 300 mbar
Falling pressure

page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/79
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
Pressure switches type XML C With setting scale 30 bar (435 psi) overpressure
With setting scale
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) 45…350 mbar (0.65…5.07 psi) 42…330 mbar (0.61…4.78 psi)
(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, air, up to + 160 °C XML CL35R2S12 XML CS35R2S12
(2) Fresh water, sea water, XML CL35S2S12 –
Weight (kg) 2.575 3.500
Possible differential Min. at low setting (3) 20 mbar (0.29 psi) 40 mbar (0.58 psi)
(subtract from PH to give PB) Min. at high setting (3) 35 mbar (0.51 psi) 88 mbar (1.27 psi)
Max. at high setting 300 mbar (4.35 psi) 230 mbar (3.33 psi)
Destruction pressure 4.5 bar (65.25 psi) 67.5 bar (978.75 psi)
Mechanical life 4 million operating cycles 2 million operating cycles
(1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML CL35R2S12
becomes XML CL35R2S11).
6 (2) Component materials of units in contact with the fluid, see pages 6/128 and 6/129.
± 20 mbar (± 0.29 psi).
Terminal model
Pressure
Rising pressure
mbar
350
13
11
23
21
PH
1
300
14
12
24
22
PB
200
2
100 Time
45
0
0 25 50 100 200 315 mbar
Falling pressure

page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/80
Nautilus® type XML
Pressure switches type XML D Without setting scale
Adjustable range of each 2nd stage switching point (PH2) 58…350 mbar (0.84…5.07 psi)
switching point 1st stage switching point (PH1) 33…325 mbar (0.48…4.71 psi)
(Rising pressure)
Spread between 2 stages (PH2 - PH1) 25…310 mbar (0.36…4.50 psi)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, air, up to + 160 °C XML DL35R1S12
(2) Fresh water, sea water, XML DL35S1S12
Weight (kg) 2.575
Natural differential At low setting (3) 30 mbar (0.44 psi)
(subtract from PH1/PH2 At high setting (4) 30 mbar (0.44 psi)
to give PB1/PB2)
(1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML DL35R1S12
becomes XML DL35R1S11).
± 10 mbar (± 0.15 psi).
6
± 8 mbar (± 0.11 psi).
Operating curves
PH2 setting (falling pressure
Falling pressure
mbar mbar Pressure

350 350
343 F H
1 325 PH2
300 300 PB2
PH1
PB1
200 200
2
100 100
Time
G
58 58
33
E –– Adjustable value
0 0 --- Non adjustable value
0 33 100 200 300 325mbar 3 28 100 200 295 320 mba
PH1 setting (falling pressure) Rising pressure Connection
Terminal model
Contact 1 Contact 2
(stage 1) (stage 2)
13
11
23
21

14
12
24
22
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/81
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
Pressure switches type XML A With setting scale Without setting scale
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) 0.03…1 bar (0.435…14.5 psi)

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, air, up to + 160 °C XML A001R2S12 XML A001R2C11 XML A001R1S12 XML A001R1C11
(2) Fresh water, sea water, XML A001S2S12 XML A001S2C11 XML A001S1S12 XML A001S1C11
Weight (kg) 2.555 2.570 2.555 2.570
(subtract from PH to give PB) At high setting (3) 0.04 bar (0.58 psi)
(1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML A001R2S12
becomes XML A001R2S11).
6 (3) Deviation of the differential at high and low setting points for switches of the same size:
± 0.01 bar (± 0.14 psi).
Terminal model
Pressure
Rising pressure
bar
13
11
1
PH
14
12
0,8
PB
Connector model
0,6 Pressure switch connector pin view
0,4
Time
1 → 11 and 13
1 2 2 → 12
0,2 3
3 → 14
0,03
0
0,01 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 0,96
bar
Falling pressure
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/82
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, air, up to + 160 °C XML B001R2S12 XML B001R2C11 XML B001R1S12 XML B001R1C11
(2) Fresh water, sea water, XML B001S2S12 XML B001S2C11 XML B001S1S12 XML B001S1C11
Viscous products, up to + 160 °C XML B001P2S12 XML B001P2C11 XML B001P1S12 XML B001P1C11
Weight (kg) 2.575 2.590 2.575 2.590
(1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML B001R2S12
becomes XML B001R2S11).
6
± 10 mbar (± 0.14 psi).
± 20 mbar (± 0.29 psi).
Terminal model
Rising pressure
Pressure
13
11
bar
1
PH
14
12
0,8
1
Connector model
PB
0,6 Pressure switch connector pin view
2
0,4
1 → 11 and 13
Time
0,2
1 2 2 → 12
3
3 → 14
0,05
0
0,01 0,25 0,4 0,6 0,8 0,94
bar
Falling pressure

page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/83
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
Pressure switches type XML C With setting scale

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, air, up to + 160 °C XML C001R2S12
(2) Fresh water, sea water, XML C001S2S12
Weight (kg) 2.555
(1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML C001R2S12
becomes XML C001R2S11).
6 (3) Deviation of the differential at low setting point for switches of the same size:
± 0.01 bar (± 0.14 psi).
± 0.03 bar (± 0.43 psi).
Terminal model
Pressure
Rising pressure
bar
1
13
11
23
21
PH
1
14
12
24
22
PB
0,6
2
0,4
Time
0,2
0,05
0
0,02 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 0,96 bar
Falling pressure

page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/84
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
Adjustable range of each 2nd stage switching point (PH2) 0.12…1 bar (1.74…14.5 psi)
switching point 1st stage switching point (PH1) 0.04…0.92 bar (0.58…13.34 psi)
(Rising pressure)
Spread between 2 stages (PH2 - PH1) 0.08…0.73 bar (1.16…10.59 psi)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, air, up to + 160 °C XML D001R1S12
(2) Fresh water, sea water, XML D001S1S12
Weight (kg) 2.575
(subtract from PH1/PH2 At high setting (4) 0.07 bar (1.02 psi)
to give PB1/PB2)
(1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML D001R1S12
becomes XML D001R1S11).
± 0.01 bar (± 0.14 psi).
6
± 0.04 bar (± 0.58 psi).
Operating curves
Rising pressure
PH2 setting (rising pressure)
bar bar Pressure

1 1
H PH2
0,92
1 F PB2
0,8
0,77
PH1
PB1
0,6 0,6
2
0,4 0,4
Time
0,2 0,2
0,12 G
0,12
0,04 E --- Non adjustable value
0 0
0,04 0,27 0,4 0,6 0,8 0,92 bar 0,01 0,09 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,85 0,93 bar Connection
PH1 setting (rising pressure) Falling pressure Terminal model
Contact 2 Contact 1
(stage 2) (stage 1)
13
11
23
21

14
12
24
22
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/85
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) 0.15…2.5 bar (2.17…36.25 psi)

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea XML A002A2S12 XML A002A2C11 XML A002A1S12 XML A002A1C11
Hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea XML A002B2S12 XML A002B2C11 XML A002B1S12 XML A002B1C11
Corrosive fluids, up to + 160 °C XML A002C2S12 XML A002C2C11 XML A002C1S12 XML A002C1C11
Weight (kg) 0.995 1.010 0.995 1.010
(1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML A002A2S12
6 becomes XML A002A2S11).
(3) Deviation of the differential at high and low setting points for switches of the same size:
± 0.03 bar (± 0.43 psi).
Terminal model
Pressure
Rising pressure
bar
13
11
2,5
PH
14
12
2
PB
Connector model
Pressure switch connector pin view
1
1 → 11 and 13
Time
1 2 2 → 12
3
3 → 14
0,15
0
0,02 1 2 2,37 bar
Falling pressure
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/86
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
Pressure switches type XML B With setting scale Without setting scale 30 bar (435 psi)
overpressure
With setting scale

(Rising pressure)
Electrical connection Terminals DIN connector Terminals DIN connector Terminals
References (1)
Fluids Hydraulic oils, fresh XML B002A2S12 XML B002A2C11 XML B002A1S12 XML B002A1C11 –
controlled water, sea water, air,
(2) up to + 70 °C
Hydraulic oils, fresh XML B002B2S12 XML B002B2C11 XML B002B1S12 XML B002B1C11 –
water, sea water, air,
up to + 160 °C
Hydraulic oils, fresh – XML BS02B2S12
water, air, up to
+ 160 °C
Corrosive fluids, up to XML B002C2S12 XML B002C2C11 XML B002C1S12 XML B002C1C11 –
+ 160 °C
Weight (kg) 1.015 1.030 1.015 1.030 3.500
Possible Min. at low setting (3) 0.16 bar (2.32 psi) 0.1 bar (1.45 psi)
differential Min. at high setting (3) 0.21 bar (3.04 psi) 0.22 bar (3.19 psi)
(subtract from PH
Max. at high setting 1.75 bar (25.37 psi) 1.45 bar (21 psi)
to give PB)
Maximum Per cycle 5 bar (72.5 psi) 30 bar (435 psi)
permissible
pressure
Accidental 9 bar (130.5 psi) 37.5 bar (543.75 psi)
6
Destruction pressure 18 bar (261 psi) 67.5 bar (978.75 psi)
Mechanical life 8 x 106 operating cycles 2 x 106 op. cycles
(1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML B002A2S12 becomes
XML B002A2S11).
- 0.03 bar, + 0.05 bar (- 0.43 psi, + 0.72 psi).
Pressure Terminal model
Rising pressure
bar
2,5
13
11
PH
14
12
1 PB
Connector model
2
1
Time
1 2 1 → 11 and 13
3 2 → 12
0,3
3 → 14
0
0,14 0,75 1 2 2,29 bar
Falling pressure
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/87
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
With setting scale

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, fresh water, air, – XML CS02B2S12
(2) up to + 160 °C
Hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea XML C002B2S12 –
Corrosive fluids, up to + 160 °C XML C002C2S12 –
Weight (kg) 0.995 3.500
Possible differential Min. at low setting (3) 0.13 bar (1.89 psi) 0.1 bar (1.45 psi)
(subtract from PH to give PB) Min. at high setting (4) 0.17 bar (2.47 psi) 0.18 bar (2.61 psi)
Max. at high setting 2 bar (29 psi) 1.25 bar (18.12 psi)
Maximum permissible Per cycle 5 bar (72.5 psi) 30 bar (435 psi)
pressure Accidental 9 bar (130.5 psi) 37.5 bar (543.75 psi)
Mechanical life 8 x 106 operating cycles 2 x 106 operating cycles
(1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML C002B2S12
becomes XML C002B2S11).
± 0.02 bar (± 0.29 psi).
± 0.03 bar (± 0.43 psi).
Terminal model
Rising pressure
bar Pressure
2,5
13
11
23
21
PH
1
14
12
24
22
PB
2
1
Time
0,3
0
0,17 0,5 1 2 2,33 bar
Falling pressure

page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/88
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
Adjustable range of each 2nd stage switching point (PH2) 0.34…2.5 bar (4.93…36.25 psi)
(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea XML D002B1S12
Corrosive fluids, up to + 160 °C XML D002C1S12
Weight (kg) 1.015
to give PB1/PB2)
(1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML D002B1S12
becomes XML D002B1S11).
± 0.04 bar (± 0.58 psi).
6
± 0.07 bar (± 1.02 psi).
Operating curves
Rising pressure
bar bar H Pressure

2,5 2,5
F
2,36 PH2
2 1 2
PB2
PH1
1,69
PB1
2
1 1
Time
0,34 0,34 G –– Adjustable value

0,20 --- Non adjustable value
E
0 0
0,2 1 2 2,36 bar 0,06 1 2,17 2,31 bar Connection
PH1 setting (rising pressure) Falling pressure
Terminal model
Contact 2 Contact 1
(stage 2) (stage 1)
13
11
23
21

14
12
24
22
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/89
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
Size 4 bar (58 psi)
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) 0.4…4 bar (5.8…58 psi)

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Viscous products, up to + 160 °C XML A004P2S12 XML A004P2C11 XML A004P1S12 XML A004P1C11
Weight (kg) 0.685 0.715 0.685 0.715
6 Pressure switch type Diaphragm

becomes XML A004A2S11).
± 0.03 bar (± 0.43 psi).
Terminal model
Rising pressure
bar Pressure
13
11
4
PH
14
12
3 PB
Connector model
2
1 → 11 and 13
1 Time
1 2 2 → 12
3
3 → 14
0,4
0
0,05 1 2 3 3,65 4 bar
Falling pressure
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/90
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
Size 4 bar (58 psi)
overpressure
With setting scale

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
(2) up to + 70 °C
water, sea water, air,
up to + 160 °C
Hydraulic oils, fresh – XML BS04B2S12
+ 160 °C
Weight (kg) 1.015 1.030 1.015 1.030 3.500
(subtract from PH
to give PB)
permissible Accidental 9 bar (130.5 psi) 37.5 bar (543.75 psi)
pressure
Mechanical life 8 x 106 operating cycles 2 x 106 op. cycles 6
XML B004A2S11).
± 0.01 bar (± 0.14 psi).
- 0.03 bar, + 0.05 bar (- 0.43 psi, + 0.72 psi).
Pressure Terminal model
Rising pressure
bar
4
13
11
PH
14
12
1 PB
2 Connector model
2 Pressure switch connector pin view
Time
1 1 2 1 → 11 and 13
3 2 → 12
0,25 3 → 14
0
0,05 1 1,6 2 3 3,75 bar
Falling pressure

page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/91
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
Size 4 bar (58 psi)
With setting scale

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, fresh water, air, – XML CS04B2S12
(2) up to + 160 °C
Weight (kg) 0.685 3.500
± 0.02 bar (± 0.29 psi).
Terminal model
Rising pressure
bar Pressure
4
13
11
23
21
PH
14
12
24
22
3
1
PB
2 2
1 Time
0,3
0
0,15 1 1,5 2 3 3,83 bar
Falling pressure

page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/92
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
Size 4 bar (58 psi)
Adjustable range of each 2nd stage switching point (PH2) 0.40…4 bar (5.8…58 psi)
(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Weight (kg) 1.015
to give PB1/PB2)
± 0.03 bar (± 0.43 psi). 6
Operating curves
Rising pressure
bar bar H Pressure

4 4
3,79
F PH2
PB2
3 3
1 PH1
PB1
2,35
2 2
2
1 1 Time

0,19
0 0 E --- Non adjustable value
0,19 1 1,82 2 3 3,79 bar 0,04 1 2 3 3,6 3,81 bar
PH1 setting (rising pressure) Falling pressure Connection
Terminal model
Contact 2 Contact 1
(stage 2) (stage 1)
13
11
23
21

14
12
24
22
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/93
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Weight (kg) 0.685 0.715 0.685 0.715

± 0.05 bar (± 0.72 psi).
Terminal model
Rising pressure
bar
13
11
Pressure
10
PH
14
12
8
PB
6 Connector model
4
Time 1 → 11 and 13
2
1
1 2 2 → 12
3
0,6 3 → 14
0
0,1 2 4 6 8 9,5 bar
Falling pressure
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/94
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
overpressure
With setting scale

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
(2) up to + 70 °C
Hydraulic oils, fresh – – – – XML BS10A2S12
+ 160 °C
Viscous products, up to XML B010P2S12 XML B010P2C11 XML B010P1S12 XML B010P1C11 –
+ 160 °C
Weight (kg) 0.705 0.735 0.705 0.735 3.500
(subtract from PH
to give PB)
Maximum Per cycle 12.5 bar (181.25 psi) 30 bar (435 psi)
permissible Accidental 22.5 bar (326.25 psi) 37.5 bar (543.75 psi)
pressure
6
XML B010A2S11).
± 0.05 bar (± 0.72 psi).
- 0.1 bar, + 0.15 bar (- 1.45 psi, + 2.17 psi).
bar Terminal model
Rising pressure
10 Pressure
13
11
PH
8
14
12
1
6 PB
Connector model
2
4
Time
2 1 2 1 → 11 and 13
3
2 → 12
0,7
0
3 → 14
0,13 2,5 4 6 8 9,15
bar
Falling pressure
6/95
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
With setting scale

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, fresh water, air, – XML CS10A2S12
(2) up to + 70 °C
Weight (kg) 0.685 3.500
Max. at high setting 8 bar (116 psi) 5.6 bar (81.2 psi)
± 0.05 bar (± 0.72 psi).
± 0.01 bar (± 1.45 psi).
Terminal model
Rising pressure
bar
13
11
23
21
Pressure
10
1 PH
14
12
24
22
6 PB
2
4
Time
2
0,7
0
0,25 2 4 6 8 9,3 bar
Falling pressure

page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/96
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Weight (kg) 0.705
to give PB1/PB2)
± 0.05 bar (± 0.72 psi).
6
± 0.1 bar (± 1.45 psi).
Operating curves
Rising pressure
Pressure
bar bar H
10
10
9,32 PH2
F
PB2
8
8
1 PH1
6,34 PB1
6
6
2
4
4
Time
2
2
1,2 G –– Adjustable value
1,2
0 E
0
0,52 2 4,2 6 8 9,32 bar
0,07 0,75 2 4 6 8,72 9,4 bar Connection
PH1 setting (rising pressure) Falling pressure Terminal model
Contact 2 Contact 1
(stage 2) (stage 1)
13
11
23
21

14
12
24
22
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/97
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Weight (kg) 0.685 0.715 0.685 0.715
(subtract from PH to give PB) At high setting (3) 1 bar (14.5 psi)
6 (1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML A020A2S12
± 0.1 bar (± 1.45 psi).
Terminal model
Rising pressure
bar
13
11
Pressure
20
PH
14
12
15
PB
Connector model
5 Time 1 → 11 and 13
1 2
3
2 → 12
0,7 3 → 14
0
0,3 5 10 15 19,3 bar
Falling pressure
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/98
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
overpressure
With setting scale

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
(2) up to + 70 °C
Hydraulic oils, fresh – – – – XML BS20A2S12
+ 160 °C
Viscous products, up to XML B020P2S12 XML B020P2C11 XML B020P1S12 XML B020P1C11 –
+ 160 °C
Weight (kg) 0.705 0.735 0.705 0.735 3.500
Possible Min. at low setting (3) 1 bar (14.5 psi) 0.95 bar (13.78 psi)
(subtract from PH
to give PB)
permissible Accidental 45 bar (652.5 psi) 37.5 bar (543.75 psi)
pressure
6
XML B020A2S11).
± 0.25 bar (± 3.63 psi).
Terminal model
Rising pressure
bar Pressure
20
13
11
PH
14
12
15
2 PB
1 Connector model
5 Time
1 2 1 → 11 and 13
3 2 → 12
1,3 3 → 14
0
0,3 5 9 10 15 18,4 bar
Falling pressure
6/99
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
With setting scale

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, fresh water, air, – XML CS20A2S12
(2) up to + 70 °C
Weight (kg) 0.685 3.500
(subtract from PH to give PB) Min. at high setting (3) 1 bar (14.5 psi) 1.15 bar (16.67 psi)
± 0.2 bar (± 2.9 psi).
Terminal model
Rising pressure
bar
13
11
23
21
Pressure
20
PH
14
12
24
22
15
1 2 PB
10
5 Time
1,3
0
0,6 5 9 10 15 19 bar
Falling pressure

page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/100
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Weight (kg) 0.705
to give PB1/PB2)
± 0.15 bar (± 2.18 psi).
6
± 0.3 bar (± 4.35 psi).
Operating curves
Pressure
Rising pressure
bar bar H
20 20
18,76 PH2
F
PB2
15 15 PH1
PB1
1 2
10,6 10
5 5 Time

0 0 E
0,9 5 10,45 15 18,76 bar 0,2 1,44 5 10 15 17,46 18,7 bar Connection
Terminal model
Contact 2 Contact 1
(stage 2) (stage 1)
13
11
23
21

14
12
24
22
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/101
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Weight (kg) 0.695 0.725 0.695 0.725

± 0.25 bar (± 3.62 psi).
Terminal model
Rising pressure
bar
13
11
Pressure
35
PH
14
12
30
PB
20 Connector model
10
Time 1 → 11 and 13
1 2 2 → 12
1,5 3
0 3 → 14
0,25 10 20 30 33,75 bar
Falling pressure
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/102
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea XML B035A2S12 XML B035A2C11 XML B035A1S12 XML B035A1C11
Hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea XML B035B2S12 XML B035B2C11 XML B035B1S12 XML B035B1C11
Corrosive fluids, up to + 160 °C XML B035C2S12 XML B035C2C11 XML B035C1S12 XML B035C1C11
Viscous products, up to + 160 °C XML B035P2S12 XML B035P2C11 XML B035P1S12 XML B035P1C11
Weight (kg) 0.715 0.745 0.715 0.745
Connector type for connector models
Diaphragm
6
(1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML B035A2S12
becomes XML B035A2S11).
- 0.5 bar, + 0.7 bar (- 7.25 psi, + 10.15 psi).
Terminal model
Rising pressure
bar
13
11
Pressure
35
PH
14
12
30
1 2
20 PB Connector model
10
Time 1 → 11 and 13
3,5 1 2 2 → 12
3
0 3 → 14
1,8 10 15 20 32,45 bar
Falling pressure

page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/103
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, fresh water, sea XML C035B2S12
Corrosive fluids, up to + 160 °C XML C035C2S12
Weight (kg) 0.695
Possible differential Min. at low setting (3) 1 bar (14.5 psi)
± 0.2 bar (± 2.9 psi).
± 0.5 bar (± 7.25 psi).
Terminal model
Rising pressure
bar
13
11
23
21
Pressure
35
PH
14
12
24
22
30
1
20 2 PB
10
Time
3,5
0
2,5 10 13 20 33,5 bar
Falling pressure

page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/104
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
Adjustable range of each 2nd stage switching point (PH2) 4.4…35 bar (63.8…507.5 psi)
(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Weight (kg) 0.715
to give PB1/PB2)
6
± 0.3 bar (± 4.35 psi).
± 0.7 bar (± 10.15 psi).
Operating curves
Pressure
Rising pressure
bar
bar 35
F H
35 32,5 PH2
30 PB2
30
1 PH1
PB1
22,3 20
20 2
10 Time
10
4,4
G
4,4
1,9
0
E --- Non adjustable value
0 0,4 2,9 10 20 29,9 32,4 bar
1,9 10 14,6 20 30 32,5 bar Connection
Terminal model
Contact 2 Contact 1
(stage 2) (stage 1)
13
11
23
21

14
12
24
22
6/105
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) 5…70 bar (72.5…1015 psi)

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, up to + 160 °C XML A070D2S12 XML A070D2C11 XML A070D1S12 XML A070D1C11
(2) Fresh water, sea water, XML A070E2S12 XML A070E2C11 XML A070E1S12 XML A070E1C11
up to + 160 °C
Corrosive fluids, air, XML A070N2S12 XML A070N2C11 XML A070N1S12 XML A070N1C11
up to + 160 °C
Weight (kg) 0.695 0.725 0.695 0.725
Natural differential At low setting (3) 3 bar (43.5 psi)
Maximum permissible Per cycle 90 bar (1035 psi)
Pressure switch type Piston
(1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML A070D2S12
6 becomes XML A070D2S11).
± 1 bar (± 14.5 psi).
Terminal model
Rising pressure
bar
13
11
Pressure
70
PH
14
12
60
PB
40 Connector model
20
Time 1 → 11 and 13
1 2 2 → 12
5 3
0 3 → 14
02 8 20 40 62,5 bar
Falling pressure
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/106
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, up to + 160 °C XML B070D2S12 XML B070D2C11 XML B070D1S12 XML B070D1C11
(2) Fresh water, sea water, XML B070E2S12 XML B070E2C11 XML B070E1S12 XML B070E1C11
up to + 160 °C
Corrosive fluids, air, XML B070N2S12 XML B070N2C11 XML B070N1S12 XML B070N1C11
up to + 160 °C
Weight (kg) 0.715 0.745 0.715 0.745
(1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML B070D2S12
becomes XML B070D2S11).
6
- 0.4 bar, + 0.7 bar (- 5.8 psi, + 10.15 psi).
- 0.6 bar, + 0.8 bar (- 8.7 psi, + 11.6 psi).
Terminal model
Rising pressure
bar
13
11
Pressure
70
PH
14
12
60
1
40 PB Connector model
2
20
Time 1 → 11 and 13
7
1 2 2 → 12
3
0 3 → 14
2,3 20 40 61,2 bar
Falling pressure

page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/107
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, up to + 160 °C XML C070D2S12
(2) Fresh water, sea water, XML C070E2S12
up to + 160 °C
Corrosive fluids, up to + 160 °C XML C070N2S12
Weight (kg) 0.695
(1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML C070D2S12
becomes XML C070D2S11).
± 0.8 bar (± 11.6 psi).
6 Terminal model
Rising pressure
13
11
23
21
bar Pressure
70
PH
14
12
24
22
60
1
PB
40
2
20
Time
7
0
2,5 10 20 40 61,1 bar
Falling pressure

page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/108
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
(Rising pressure)
Spread between 2 stages (PH2 - PH1) 2.8…46 bar (40.6…667 psi)
References (1)
Fluids controlled Hydraulic oils, up to + 160 °C XML D070D1S12
(2) Fresh water, sea water, XML D070E1S12
up to + 160 °C
Corrosive fluids, air, XML D070N1S12
up to + 160 °C
Weight (kg) 0.715
to give PB1/PB2)
(1) For 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, replace S12 by S11 (example: XML D070D1S12
becomes XML D070D1S11).
± 1.5 bar (± 21.75 psi).
6
± 2 bar (± 29 psi).
Operating curves
Rising pressure
bar bar Pressure

70 70 H
67,2 F PH2
60 60 PB2
1
52,6
PH1
PB1
40
2 40
20 20 Time
9,4 9,4 G
6,6 E –– Adjustable value
0 0 --- Non adjustable value
6,6 20 24 40 60 67,2 bar 1,6 4,4 20 40 57,7 60,5 bar
Terminal model
Contact 2 Contact 1
(stage 2) (stage 1)
13
11
23
21

14
12
24
22
6/109
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
(2) Fresh water, sea water, XML A160E2S12 XML A160E2C11 XML A160E1S12 XML A160E1C11
up to + 160 °C
up to + 160 °C
Weight (kg) 0.750 0.780 0.750 0.780
(subtract from PH to give PB) At high setting (4) 18 bar (261 psi)
± 1 bar (± 14.5 psi).
± 3 bar (± 43.5 psi).
Terminal model
Rising pressure
bar
13
11
Pressure
160 PH
14
12
140
PB
120
100 Connector model

60
40 Time 1 → 11 and 13
20 1 2 2 → 12
10 3
0 3 → 14
4,5 20 40 60 80 100 120 142 160 bar
Falling pressure
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/110
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
(2) Fresh water, sea water, XML B160E2S12 XML B160E2C11 XML B160E1S12 XML B160E1C11
up to + 160 °C
up to + 160 °C
Weight (kg) 0.750 0.780 0.750 0.780
6
- 1.8 bar, + 1.5 bar (- 26.1 psi, + 21.75 psi).
- 1.9 bar, + 1.6 bar (- 27.55 psi, + 23.2 psi).
Terminal model
Rising pressure
bar
13
11
160 Pressure
PH
14
12
120
1
PB Connector model
80
2
40 Time 1 → 11 and 13
1 2 2 → 12
10 3
3 → 14
0
0,7 40 60 80 120 139,2 bar
Falling pressure

page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/111
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
(2) Fresh water, sea water, XML C160E2S12
up to + 160 °C
Corrosive fluids, up to + 160 °C XML C160N2S12
Weight (kg) 0.750
(subtract from PH to give PB) Min. at high setting (3) 21 bar (304.5 psi)
± 0.9 bar (± 13.05 psi).
6 Terminal model
Rising pressure
bar
13
11
23
21
160 Pressure
PH
14
12
24
22
100 2
PB
50
Time
12
0
3 50 100 139 bar
Falling pressure

page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/112
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
switching point 1st stage switching point (PH1) 10.5…154 bar (152.25…2233 psi)
(Rising pressure)
Spread between 2 stages (PH2 - PH1) 6…83 bar (87…1203.5 psi)
References (1)
(2) Fresh water, sea water, XML D160E1S12
up to + 160 °C
up to + 160 °C
Weight (kg) 0.750
(subtract from PH1/PH2 At high setting (4) 20 bar (290 psi)
to give PB1/PB2)
± 1.5 bar (± 21.75 psi).
6
± 7 bar (± 101.5 psi).
Operating curves
Rising pressure
bar bar H Pressure

160
154
F PH2
140
PB2
120 120
1 PH1
100 PB1
94,5 2
80 80
60
40 40 Time

10 10,5 --- Non adjustable value
0 E
0
0 10,5 40 60 77 100 120 154 bar 1,7 7,7 40 60 80 100 134140 160 bar Connection
Terminal model
Contact 2 Contact 1
(stage 2) (stage 1)
13
11
23
21

14
12
24
22
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/113
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
(2) (5) Fresh water, sea water, XML A300E2S12 XML A300E2C11 XML A300E1S12 XML A300E1C11
up to + 160 °C
up to + 160 °C
Weight (kg) 0.750 0.780 0.750 0.780
± 3 bar (± 43.5 psi).
± 6 bar (± 87 psi).
(5) Only for control of group 2 fluids, in accordance with directive 97/23/EEC.
Terminal model
Rising pressure
bar
13
11
Pressure
PH
14
12
300
PB
200 Connector model

100
Time 1 → 11 and 13
1 2 2 → 12
20 3
0 3 → 14
3,5 100 200 265 300 bar
Falling pressure
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/114
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
(2) (5) Fresh water, sea water, XML B300E2S12 XML B300E2C11 XML B300E1S12 XML B300E1C11
up to + 160 °C
up to + 160 °C
Weight (kg) 0.750 0.780 0.750 0.780
6
- 1.5 bar, + 1.7 bar (- 21.75 psi, + 24.65 psi).
- 1 bar, + 4 bar (- 14.5 psi, + 58 psi).
Terminal model
Rising pressure
bar
13
11
300 Pressure
PH
14
12
200 1
PB Connector model
100
Time 1 → 11 and 13
1 2 2 → 12
22 3
3 → 14
0
2,6 100 200 263 bar
Falling pressure

page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/115
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
(2) (4) Fresh water, sea water, XML C300E2S12
up to + 160 °C
Corrosive fluids, air, XML C300N2S12
up to + 160 °C
Weight (kg) 0.750
Possible differential Min. at low setting (3) 16 bar (232 psi)
± 0.9 bar (± 13.05 psi).
6 Operating curves
Connection
Terminal model
Rising pressure
bar
13
11
23
21
300 Pressure
1
14
12
24
22
PH
200
PB
2
100
Time
22
0
6 60 100 200 265 bar
Falling pressure

page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/116
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
Adjustable range of each 2nd stage switching point (PH2) 36…300 bar (522…4350 psi)
switching point 1st stage switching point (PH1) 25…289 bar (362.5…4190.5 psi)
(Rising pressure)
Spread between 2 stages (PH2 - PH1) 11…189 bar (159.5…2740.5 psi)
References (1)
(2) (5) Fresh water, sea water, XML D300E1S12
up to + 160 °C
up to + 160 °C
Weight (kg) 0.750
(subtract from PH1/PH2 At high setting (4) 42 bar (609 psi)
to give PB1/PB2)
± 2.5 bar (± 36.25 psi).
± 9 bar (± 130.5 psi).
6
Operating curves
Rising pressure
Pressure
bar bar H
300 300
289 PH2
F
PB2
1
215 PH1
200 200 PB1
100 100
Time
36 36 G
20 25 –– Adjustable value
0 E
0 25 111 200 289 bar
0
8 19 100 200 247 258 300 bar
Terminal model
Contact 2 Contact 1
(stage 2) (stage 1)
13
11
23
21

14
12
24
22
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/117
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
(2) (5) Fresh water, sea water, XML A500E2S12 XML A500E2C11 XML A500E1S12 XML A500E1C11
up to + 160 °C
up to + 160 °C
Weight (kg) 0.750 0.780 0.750 0.780
Natural differential At low setting (3) 20 bar (290 psi)
pressure Accidental 1125 bar (16 312.5 psi)
becomes XML A500D2S11).
± 6 bar (± 87 psi).
± 10 bar (± 145 psi).
Terminal model
Rising pressure
13
11
bar Pressure
500
PH
14
12
400
PB
300 Connector model

200
Time 1 → 11 and 13
100
1 2 2 → 12
3
30 3 → 14
0
10 100 200 300 400 455 bar
Falling pressure
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/118
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
(2) (5) Fresh water, sea water, XML B500E2S12 XML B500E2C11 XML B500E1S12 XML B500E1C11
up to + 160 °C
up to + 160 °C
Weight (kg) 0.750 0.780 0.750 0.780
(2) Component materials of units in contact with the fluid, see pages 6/128 and 6/129. 6
- 2.6 bar, + 3.8 bar (- 37.7 psi, + 55.1 psi).
- 14.8 bar, + 11.2 bar (- 214.6 psi, + 162.4 psi).
Terminal model
Rising pressure
bar
13
11
Pressure
500
PH
14
12
400
300 1 PB
Connector model
200 2
Time 1 → 11 and 13
100
1 2 2 → 12
30 3
3 → 14
0
7 100 200 400 447,4 bar
Falling pressure

page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/119
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML

(Rising pressure)
References (1)
(2) (4) Fresh water, sea water, XML C500E2S12
up to + 160 °C
Corrosive fluids, air, XML C500N2S12
up to + 160 °C
Weight (kg) 0.750
(subtract from PH to give PB) Min. at high setting (3) 52 bar (754 psi)
± 0.9 bar (± 13.05 psi).
6 Operating curves
Connection
Terminal model
Rising pressure
bar
13
11
23
21
Pressure
500
PH
14
12
24
22
400
1
300 PB
2
200
Time
100
30
0
11 100 160 200 300 400 448 bar
Falling pressure

page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/120
characteristics 6
Nautilus® type XML
Adjustable range of each 2nd stage switching point (PH2) 41…500 bar (594.5…7250 psi)
switching point 1st stage switching point (PH1) 25…484 bar (362.5…7018 psi)
(Rising pressure)
Spread between 2 stages (PH2 - PH1) 16…244 bar (232…3538 psi)
References (1)
(2) (5) Fresh water, sea water, XML D500E1S12
up to + 160 °C
up to + 160 °C
Weight (kg) 0.750
(subtract from PH1/PH2 At high setting (4) 65 bar (942.5 psi)
to give PB1/PB2)
± 3 bar (± 43.5 psi).
± 10 bar (± 145 psi).
6
Operating curves
bar Pressure
Rising pressure
500 bar H
484
F PH2
PB2
400 400
PH1
1
300 PB1
300
273,5
200 2
200
Time
100
100
41 41 G
0
25E --- Non adjustable value
0
25 100 200 256300 400 484 bar 4 20 100 200 300 419 435 bar Connection
Terminal model
Contact 2 Contact 1
(stage 2) (stage 1)
13
11
23
21

14
12
24
22
page 6/122 pages 6/123 to 6/125
6/121
References 6
vacuum switches 6
Nautilus® type XML A, XML B, XML C and XML D

Accessories for pressure switches and vacuum switches

Description Specific For use with Unit reference Weight
characteristics switches kg
Rear fixing bracket – XML pL35 XML ZL006 0.230
for vibrations > 2 gn XML p001
Additional top support bracket – XML AM01 XML ZL002 0.020

for vibrations > 4 gn XML pM05
XML A004
XML p010…
XML p500
Knurled adjustment knob, Ø 36 mm – All models XML ZL003 0.010
fits over adjustment screw(s) to facilitate
setting
XML ZL006
Fixing plate – XML AM01 XML ZL004 0.110
for replacing an XMJ A or XMG B switch XML pM05
by an XML switch XML A004
XML p010…
XML p500
XML ZL002 Lead sealable protective cover – XML A XML ZL001 0.035
to prevent unauthorised access to adjustment XML B
screws and fixing screw of switch cover
Lead sealable protective cover – All models XML ZL011 0.030

XML ZL003 XML ZL004 to prevent unauthorised access to adjustment
screws
Indicator modules and Without setting a or c 24/48 V XML A/B XML ZZ024 0.090
associated covers, 2 LEDs scale
(orange and green) a 110/240 V XML A/B XML ZZ120 0.090
XML ZL001 With setting a or c 24/48 V XML A XML ZA024 0.090

scale
XML B XML ZB024 0.090
a 110/240 V XML A XML ZA120 0.090
XML ZL011 XML B XML ZB120 0.090
6 Hydraulic block – All models XML ZL005 0.240

for base mounting directly onto fluid manifold
Female connector, DIN 43650A – XML ppppppC11 XZ CC43FCP40B 0.035
Jumper cables, DIN 43650 A - M12, L=1m XML ppppppC11 XZ CR1523062K1 0.080
XML ZL005 straight, male for splitter boxes
(see connections, page 6/33) L=2m XML ppppppC11 XZ CR1523062K2 0.110
Adaptor, G 1/4"/G3/8" male/female – All models XML ZL012 0.130
Replacement parts
Sealing gasket For sizes u 300 bar XML ZL010 0.015
(XML A/B/C/D)
Diaphragms – XMLpS35 XML ZL013 0.060
XML pS02 XML ZL014 0.040
XML pS04 XML ZL015 0.030
XML ZAppp,
XML ZBppp
XML ZL010
XZ CC43FCP40B
6/122
Dimensions 6
vacuum switches 6
XML pL35, XML p001, XML pS
XML C/D : 46
a XML A/B : 35
(2)
max 162
56,5
17
(1)
57 = 45 =
(1) 1 fluid entry, tapped G 1/4 (BSP female)

(2) 1 electrical connections entry, tapped M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13.5
XML BM03, XML BL05
40 (3)
(4)
65
(2)
145
10
56
(1) c2 20 20
c1 ¯a
(1) 1 fluid entry, tapped G 1/4 (BSP female) XML Øa c1 c2

(2) 1 electrical connections entry, tapped M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13.5 BM03 150 155.5 80.5
BL05 200 204 104
(4) 1 elongated hole Ø 15.2 x 5.2
pL35, p001 110 – –
pS35, pS02, pS04 110 – –
pS10, pS20 86 – –
Characteristics: References:
pages 6/69 to 6/121 pages 6/70 to 6/121
6/123
vacuum switches 6
XML AM01, XML BM05, XML CM05, XML A004, XML p010…500
XML C/D : 85 XML C/D : 46

XML A/B : 75 XML A/B : 35
113
(2)
37 5
37
17,5
(1) 23 = 20-22 =
56
120

XML pM02, XML p002, XML B004, XML C004, XML D004
55
XML C/D : 90 XML C/D : 46
XML A/B : 77,5 XML A/B : 35
Ø5,2
6
106
(2)
158
34
Ø
13
(1)
30 = 37-40 =
122

pages 6/69 to 6/121 pages 6/70 to 6/121
6/124
vacuum switches 6
XML BL35P, XML B001P
(2)
175
86,5
(1) 55
(1) 1 fluid entry, tapped G 1¼ (BSP female)

XML BM05P, XML A004P, XML p010P, XML p020P, XML p035P
35
37 5
130
(2)
54
(1) 25
76
(1) 1 fluid entry, tapped G 1¼ (BSP female)

pages 6/69 to 6/121 pages 6/70 to 6/121
6/125
Substitution table 6
vacuum switches 6
Nautilus®
Equivalent model references of pressure and vacuum switches
XML for previous range switches XM2 JM, XMJ and XMG
Pressure and vacuum switches with fixed differential

XM2 JM reference Equivalent XML A reference XM2 JM reference Equivalent XML A reference
XM2 JM091 XML AM01V1S11 XM2 JM3004 XML A300E1S11
XM2 JM002 XML A002A1S11 XM2 JM500 XML A500D1S11
XM2 JM0025 XML A002C1S11 XM2 JM5004 XML A500E1S11
XM2 JM004 XML A004A1S11 XM2 JM0912 XML AM01V1S11
XM2 JM0045 XML A004C1S11 XM2 JM0022 XML A002B1S11
XM2 JM0046 XML A004P1S11 XM2 JM00225 XML A002C1S11
XM2 JM012 (1) XML A010A1S11 XM2 JM0042 XML A004B1S11
XM2 JM012 (1) XML A020A1S11 XM2 JM00425 XML A004C1S11
XM2 JM0125 (1) XML A010C1S11 XM2 JM00426 XML A004P1S11
XM2 JM0125 (1) XML A020C1S11 XM2 JM0122 XML A010B1S11
XM2 JM0126 (1) XML A010P1S11 XM2 JM01225 XML A010C1S11
XM2 JM0126 (1) XML A020P1S11 XM2 JM01226 XML A010P1S11
XM2 JM0304 (2) XML A020A1S11 XM2 JM0502 XML A070D1S11
XM2 JM0304 (2) XML A035A1S11 XM2 JM05024 XML A070E1S11
XM2 JM050 (3) XML A070D1S11 XM2 JM16024 XML A160E1S11
XM2 JM0504 (3) XML A070E1S11 XM2 JM30024 XML A300E1S11
XM2 JM160 XML A160D1S11 XM2 JM5002 XML A500D1S11
XM2 JM1604 XML A160E1S11 XM2 JM50024 XML A500E1S11
XM2 JM300 XML A300D1S11
XMJ A reference Equivalent XML A reference XMJ A reference Equivalent XML A reference
XMJ A091 XML AM01V1S11 XMJ A0507 (3) XML A070D2S11
XMJ A0915 XML AM01T1S11 XMJ A0507 (4) XML A070E2S11
XMJ A0037 XML A004A2S11 XMJ A0507 (4) XML A070N2S11
XMJ A003 XML A004A1S11 XMJ A0707 XML A070D2S11
XMJ A00375 XML A004C2S11 XMJ A070 XML A070D1S11
XMJ A0035 XML A004C1S11 XMJ A07074 XML A070E2S11
XMJ A0127 (1) XML A010A2S11 XMJ A0704 XML A070E1S11
XMJ A0127 (1) XML A020A2S11 XMJ A07075 XML A070N2S11
6 XMJ A012 (1)
XMJ A01275 (1)
XML A020A1S11
XML A010C2S11
XMJ A0705
XMJ A0708
XML A070N1S11
XML A070N1S11
XMJ A01275 (1) XML A020C2S11 XMJ A115 (4) (5) XML A070D1S11
XMJ A0125 (1) XML A010C1S11 XMJ A115 (4) (5) XML A070E1S11
XMJ A0125 (1) XML A020C1S11 XMJ A115 (4) (5) XML A070N1S11
XMJ A020 XML A020A1S11 XMJ A115 (4) (5) XML A160D1S11
XMJ A0207 XML A020A2S11 XMJ A115 (4) (5) XML A160E1S11
XMJ A02075 XML A020C2S11 XMJ A115 (4) (5) XML A160N1S11
XMJ A0205 XML A020C1S11 XMJ A1157 (4) (5) XML A070D2S11
XMJ A0307 (2) XML A020A2S11 XMJ A1157 (4) (5) XML A070E2S11
XMJ A0307 (2) XML A035A2S11 XMJ A1157 (4) (5) XML A070N2S11
XMJ A03074 (2) XML A020A2S11 XMJ A1157 (4) (5) XML A160D2S11
XMJ A03074 (2) XML A035A2S11 XMJ A1157 (4) (5) XML A160E2S11
XMJ A03078 (2) XML A020A2S11 XMJ A1157 (4) (5) XML A160N2S11
XMJ A03078 (2) XML A035A2S11 XMJ A1607 XML A160D2S11
XMJ A030 (2) XML A020A1S11 XMJ A160 XML A160D1S11
XMJ A03075 (2) XML A020C2S11 XMJ A1608 XML A160N1S11
XMJ A03075 (2) XML A035C2S11 XMJ A3007 XML A300D2S11
XMJ A0305 (2) XML A020C1S11 XMJ A300 XML A300D1S11
XMJ A0305 (2) XML A035C1S11 XMJ A30074 XML A300E2S11
XMJ A050 (3) XML A070D1S11 XMJ A30075 XML A300N2S11
XMJ A050 (4) XML A070E1S11 XMJ A30078 XML A300N2S11
XMJ A050 (4) XML A070N1S11 XMJ A3005 XML A300N1S11
6/126
vacuum switches 6
Nautilus®
Equivalent model references of pressure and vacuum switches
XML for previous range switches XM2 JM, XMJ and XMG
Pressure and vacuum switches with fixed differential (continued)

XMJ A reference Equivalent XML A reference XMJ A reference Equivalent XML A reference
XMJ A5007 XML A500D2S11 XMJ A50075 XML A500N2S11
XMJ A500 XML A500D1S11 XMJ A50078 XML A500N2S11
XMJ A50074 XML A500E2S11 XMJ A5005 XML A500N1S11
XMJ A5004 XML A500E1S11 XMJ A5008 XML A500N1S11
Pressure and vacuum switches with adjustable differential

XMG B Equivalent XML B XMG B Equivalent XML C XMG B Equivalent XML B XMG B Equivalent XML C
reference reference reference reference reference reference reference reference
XMG B091 XML BM02V2S11 XMG B0912 XML CM02V2S11 XMG B0146 (1) XML B020P2S11 XMG B01462 (8)
XMG B092 XML BM02V2S11 XMG B0922 XML CM02V2S11 XMG B0286 (6) XML B020P2S11 XMG B02862 (8)
XMG B093 XML BM02V2S11 (8) XMG B0932 XML CM02V2S11 XMG B0286 (6) XML B035P2S11 XMG B02862 (8)
XMG B0911 XML BM02T2S11 XMG B09112 XML CM02T2S11 XMG B070 XML B070D2S11 XMG B0702 XML C070D2S11
XMG B001 (4) XML BL35R2S11 XMG B0012 (4) XML CL35R2S11 XMG B0704 XML B070E2S11 XMG B07042 XML C070E2S11
XMG B001 (4) XML BL35S2S11 XMG B0012 (4) XML CL35S2S11 XMG B1404 XML B160E2S11 XMG B14042 XML C160E2S11
XMG B002 XML B002A2S11 XMG B0022 XML C002A2S11 XMG B2804 XML B300E2S11 XMG B28042 XML C300E2S11
XMG B003 XML B004A2S11 XMG B0032 XML C004A2S11 XMG B5004 XML B500E2S11 XMG B50042 XML C500E2S11
XMG B008 XML B010A2S11 XMG B0082 XML C010A2S11 XMG B0708 XML B070N2S11 XMG B07082 XML C070N2S11
XMG B014 (1) XML B010A2S11 XMG B0142 (1) XML C010A2S11 XMG B1408 XML B160N2S11 XMG B14082 XML C160N2S11
XMG B028 (6) XML B035A2S11 XMG B0282 (6) XML C035A2S11 XMG B0701 (4) XML B070D2S11 XMG B07012 (4) XML C070D2S11
XMG B0011 (4) XML BL35R2S11 XMG B00112 (4) XML CL35R2S11 XMG B0701 (4) XML B070E2S11 XMG B07012 (4) XML C070E2S11
XMG B0011 (4) XML BL35S2S11 XMG B00112 (4) XML CL35S2S11 XMG B1401 (4) XML B160D2S11 XMG B14012 (4) XML C160D2S11
XMG B0021 XML B002B2S11 XMG B00212 XML C002B2S11 XMG B1401 (4) XML B160E2S11 XMG B14012 (4) XML C160E2S11
XMG B0031 XML B004B2S11 XMG B00312 XML C004B2S11 XMG B2801 (4) XML B300D2S11 XMG B28012 (4) XML C300D2S11
XMG B0081 XML B010B2S11 XMG B00812 XML C010B2S11 XMG B2801 (4) XML B300E2S11 XMG B28012 (4) XML C300E2S11
XMG B0141 (1) XML B010B2S11 XMG B01412 (1) XML C010B2S11 XMG B5001 (4) XML B500D2S11 XMG B50012 (4) XML C500D2S11
XMG B0141 (1) XML B020B2S11 XMG B01412 (1) XML C020B2S11 XMG B5001 (4) XML B500E2S11 XMG B50012 (4) XML C500E2S11
XMG B0281 (6) XML B020B2S11 XMG B02812 (6) XML C020B2S11 XMG B0707 XML B070N2S11 XMG B07072 XML C070N2S11
XMG B0281 (6) XML B035B2S11 XMG B02812 (6) XML C035B2S11 XMG B1407 XML B160N2S11 XMG B14072 XML C160N2S11
XMG B0017 XML BL35S2S11 XMG B00172 XML CL35S2S11 XMG B2807 XML B300N2S11 XMG B28072 XML C300N2S11
XMG B0027 XML B002C2S11 XMG B00272 XML C002C2S11 XMG B5007 XML B500N2S11 XMG B50072 XML C500N2S11 6
XMG B0037 XML B004C2S11 XMG B00372 XML C004C2S11 XMG B0018 XML BS35R2S11 XMG B00182 XML CS35R2S11
XMG B0087 XML B010C2S11 XMG B00872 XML C010C2S11 XMG B0028 XML BS02B2S11 XMG B00282 XML CS02B2S11
XMG B0147 (1) XML B010C2S11 XMG B01472 (1) XML C010C2S11 XMG B0038 XML BS04B2S11 XMG B00382 XML CS04B2S11
XMG B0147 (1) XML B020C2S11 XMG B01472 (1) XML C020C2S11 XMG B0088 XML BS10A2S11 (7) XMG B00882 XML CS10A2S11 (7)
XMG B0287 (6) XML B020C2S11 XMG B02872 (6) XML C020C2S11 XMG B0148 (1) XML BS10A2S11 (7) XMG B01482 (1) XML CS10A2S11 (7)
XMG B0287 (6) XML B035C2S11 XMG B02872 (6) XML C035C2S11 XMG B0148 (1) XML BS20A2S11 (7) XMG B01482 (1) XML CS20A2S11 (7)
XMG B0016 XML BL35P2S11 XMG B00162 (8) XMG B0120 (5) (4) XML B070D2S11 XMG B01202 (5) (4) XML C070D2S11
XMG B0026 XML BM05P2S11 XMG B00262 (8) XMG B0120 (5) (4) XML B070E2S11 XMG B01202 (5) (4) XML C070E2S11
XMG B0036 XML BM05P2S11 XMG B00362 (8) XMG B0120 (5) (4) XML B160D2S11 XMG B01202 (5) (4) XML C160D2S11
XMG B0086 XML B010P2S11 XMG B00862 (8) XMG B0120 (5) (4) XML B160E2S11 XMG B01202 (5) (4) XML C160E2S11
XMG B0146 (1) XML B010P2S11 XMG B01462 (8)
(1) Depending on required adjustment range, examples: pressure < 8 bar = XML A/B/C010,
pressure > 8 bar = XML A/B/C010.
(4) Depending on fluid to be controlled.
(7) Temperature of fluid to be controlled limited to 70 °C.
(8) Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
6/127
Component materials of Electromechanical pressure and
units in contact with fluid 6
vacuum switches 6
This information will assist in checking the corrosion resistance of

the pressure or vacuum switches in relation to the fluids controlled
Nautilus® type XML
Component materials in contact with fluid

Pressure or vacuum switch reference Zinc alloy Stainless Brass Steel Nitrile PTFE FPM, FKM Aluminium
steel
XML AM01Vpppp, XML pM02Vpppp (1)
XML AM01Tpppp, XML pM02Tpppp (1)
XML BM03Rpppp (1)
XML BM03Spppp (1)
XML pM05Apppp (1)
XML pM05Bpppp (1)
XML pM05Cpppp (1)
XML BM05Ppppp (1)
XML BL05Rpppp
XML BL05Spppp (2)
XML pL35Rpppp, XML pS35Rpppp (2)
XML pL35Spppp (2)
XML BL35Ppppp (2)
XML p001Rpppp (2)
XML p001Spppp (2)
XML B001Ppppp (2)
XML p002Apppp
XML p002Bpppp, XML pS02Bpppp
XML p002Cpppp (2)

6 XML A004Apppp
XML A004Bpppp
XML A004Cpppp (2)
XML A004Ppppp
Materials in contact with fluid
(1) X2GNiMo 17-12-2 (AISI 316L)

(2) X8GNiS 18-09 (AISI 303)
6/128
Component materials of Electromechanical pressure and
units in contact with fluid 6 vacuum switches 6
This information will assist in checking the corrosion resistance of

the pressure or vacuum switches in relation to the fluids controlled
Nautilus® type XML
Component materials in contact with fluid

Pressure switch reference Zinc alloy Stainless Brass Steel Nitrile PTFE FPM, FKM Aluminium
steel
XML B004Apppp
XML p004Bpppp, XML pS04Bpppp
XML p004Cpppp (2)
XML p010Apppp
XML p010Bpppp
XML p010Cpppp (1)
XML p010Ppppp, XML pS10Apppp
XML p020Apppp, XML p035Apppp
XML p020Bpppp, XML p035Bpppp
XML p020Cpppp, XML p035Cpppp (1)
XML p020Ppppp, XML p035Ppppp, XML pS20Apppp
XML p070Dpppp, XML p160Dpppp
XML p070Epppp, XML p160Epppp (3)
XML p070Npppp, XML p160Npppp (4)
XML p300Dpppp
XML p300Epppp (3)
XML p300Npppp (4)
XML p500Dpppp (1)
XML p500Epppp (3)
XML p500Npppp4 (4)

6
Materials in contact with fluid
(1) X2GNiMo 17-12-2 (AISI 316L)

(2) X8GNiS 18-09 (AISI 303)
(3) X2GNiMo 17-12-2 (AISI 316L) + X2CrNiMoN 22-5-3
(4) X2GNiMo 17-12-2 (AISI 316L) + X8GNiS 18-09 (AISI 303)
6/129
Presentation 6
Electromechanical pressure switches 6
For control circuits, types ACW and ADW
Presentation
Pressure switches type ACW and ADW are switches for control circuits, with an
adjustable differential.
Pressure switches type ACW are used to control the pressure of air, oils and other
non corrosive fluids, up to 131 bar.
Pressure switches type ADW are used to control the pressure of oils (including
synthetic), up to 340 bar.
Setting, operating principle

Pressure switches type ACW
1
The switching point on falling pressure (low point - PB) is adjusted using screw 1.
–
+ 2 The switching point on rising pressure (high point - PH) is made by adjusting screw
2. This sets the differential between the low and high points, giving a switching point
on rising pressure of the displayed low point setting plus the differential setting.
The two adjustments are completely independent.
Contact block operation

1 2
When the rising pressure reaches the high point setting (low point setting +
3 4
differential setting), contact B (1-2) opens and contact A (3-4) closes. The contacts
remain actuated until the pressure falls back to the low point setting.
1 Pressure switches type ADW
– The switching point on rising pressure (high point - PH) is adjusted using screw 1.
+ 2
6 The switching point on falling pressure (low point - PB) is made by adjusting screw
2. This sets the differential between the high and low points, giving a switching point
on falling pressure of the displayed high point setting minus the differential setting.
The two adjustments are completely independent.
Contact block operation

1 2
When the rising pressure reaches the high point setting, contact B (1-2) opens and
3 4
contact A (3-4) closes. The contacts remain actuated until the pressure falls back to
the low point setting (high point setting - differential setting).
6/130
Characteristics 6
For control circuits, types ACW and ADW
Pressure switch type ACW (bellows operated) ADW (piston operated)
Conformity to standards e, IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Product certifications CSA, UL (Recognized)
Protective treatment “TC”
Materials Zinc alloy case Zinc alloy case

Phosphor bronze bellows Pressure switches with drainage hole:
Buna N diaphragm, steel piston, cast iron
cylinder
Pressure switches with Quad-Ring piston
seal: Buna N diaphragm, Teflon and Viton
seal, stainless steel piston and cylinder
Ambient air temperature (for operation) °C - 56…+ 85 - 30…+ 85
Fluids controlled Air, oils and other non corrosive fluids, Oils and other fluids, from - 25 to + 120 °C
from - 73 to + 125 °C (for ADW 5, 6, 7S1, 25, 26, 27S1)
Oils (including synthetic) only, from - 30 to

+ 125 °C (for ADW 3, 4, 7, 23, 24, 27)
Fluid connection G 1/4 (BSP female) conforming to G 3/8 (BSP female) conforming to
NF E 03-005, ISO 228 NF E 03-005, ISO 228
Electrical connection Terminals. 1 tapped entry for n° 13 (DIN Pg 13.5) cable gland

Rated operational current 1 C/O single-pole 2 C/O single-pole
pressure switches pressure switches
Category AC-15
Ue Ie Ie
24 V 5A 3A
110 V 5A 3A
220 V 3A 1.5 A
500 V 1.4 A 0.7 A
Category DC-13 Ue
24 V
Ie
5A
Ie
1.5 A 6
110 V 0.5 A 0.25 A
220 V 0.25 A –
500 V 0.10 A –
600 V 0.06 A –
Short-circuit protection 10 A cartridge fuse type gG
Connection Screw terminals

Minimum clamping capacity: 1 x 1 mm2
Maximum clamping capacity: 2 x 2.5 mm2
6/131
characteristics 6
For control circuits, type ACW
Sizes 0.70 to 131 bar (10.15 to 1900 psi)
Pressure switches type ACW Bellows operated
MINI MINI
I I
MAX MAX
Adjustable range of switching point (PB) 0.07…0.70 bar 0.07…1.4 bar 0.07…5.2 bar 0.07…7.6 bar
(Falling pressure) (1.01…10.15 psi) (1.01…20.3 psi) (1.01…75.4 psi) (1.01…110.2 psi)
References
Fluids controlled Air, oils and other non corrosive ACW 3M129012 ACW 4M129012 ACW 5M129012 ACW 1M129012
fluids, from - 73 °C to + 125 °C
(1)
Weight (kg) 1.750 1.550

Fluids controlled Air, oils and other non corrosive ACW 23M129012 ACW 24M129012 ACW 25M129012 ACW 21M129012
fluids, from - 73 °C to + 125 °C
(1)
Weight (kg) 1.750 1.550

Possible differential 1 C/O switches Min. 0.04 bar (0.58 psi) 0.10 bar (1.45 psi) 0.30 bar (4.35 psi) 0.50 bar (7.25 psi)
(add to PB
to give PH Max. 0.34 bar (4.93 psi) 0.40 bar (5.8 psi) 1 bar (14.5 psi) 2 bar (29 psi)
2 C/O switches Min. 0.05 bar (0.73 psi) 0.14 bar (2.03 psi) 0.41 bar (5.95 psi) 0.9 bar (13.05 psi)
6 Max. 0.48 bar (6.96 psi) 0.70 bar (10.15 psi) 1.4 bar (20.3 psi) 2.8 bar (40.6 psi)
Maximum permissible pressure 2 bar (29 psi) 7 bar (101.5 psi) 17 bar (246.5 psi)
Mechanical life 1 x 106 operating cycles (average value, depending on application)
Cable entry 1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, conforming to NF C 68-300 (DIN Pg 13.5).
(1) See “Component materials of units in contact with the fluid”, page 6/131.
Operating curve Contact block connections

Pressure
PH
2
4
3
PB
Time
Other versions Pressure switches with alternative tapped cable entries: ISO, NPT, etc.
Dimensions:
page 6/136
6/132
6
6
Bellows operated
MINI MINI
MINI
I I
MAX MAX
I
MAX
1.4…12 bar 0.7…18 bar 0.7…21 bar 5.2…34 bar 10…69 bar 24…131 bar
(20.3…174 psi) (10.15…261 psi) (10.15…304.5 psi) (75.4…493 psi) (145…1000 psi) (348…1900 psi)
References
ACW 8M129012 ACW 9M129012 ACW 2M129012 ACW 6M129012 ACW 7M129012 ACW 10M129012
1.550 2.100

ACW 28M129012 ACW 29M129012 ACW 22M129012 ACW 26M129012 ACW 27M129012 ACW 20M129012
1.550 2.100

0.70 bar (10.15 psi) 1 bar (14.5 psi) 1.7 bar (24.7 psi) 3.4 bar (49.3 psi) 5.9 bar (85.6 psi) 11 bar (159.5 psi)
2 bar (29 psi) 1.7 bar (24.7 psi) 8.6 bar (124.7 psi) 8.3 bar (120.4 psi) 10 bar (145 psi) 21 bar (304.5 psi)
1 bar (14.5 psi) 1.6 bar (23.2 psi) 2.4 bar (34.8 psi) 5.9 bar (85.6 psi) 9.3 bar (134.9 psi) 17 bar (246.5 psi)
2.8 bar (40.6 psi) 2.4 bar (34.8 psi) 10 bar (145 psi) 11 bar (159.5 psi) 14 bar (203 psi) 24 bar (348 psi)
6
17 bar (246.5 psi) 20 bar (290 psi) 41 bar (549.5 psi) 140 bar (2030 psi) 140 bar (2030 psi) 175 bar (2538 psi)
1 x 106 operating cycles (average value, depending on application)
1 entry tapped for n° 13 cable gland, conforming to NF C 68-300 (DIN Pg 13.5).

Dimensions:
page 6/136
6/133
characteristics 6
For control circuits, type ADW
Pressure switches type ADW Piston operated, with drainage hole (1)
MINI
I
MAX
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) 9.3…69 bar 28…210 bar 38…340 bar
(Rising pressure) (135…1000 psi) (406…3045 psi) (551…4930 psi)
References
Fluids controlled Oils (including synthetic), ADW 3M129012 ADW 4M129012 ADW 7M129012
from - 30 °C to + 125 °C (2) (3)
Weight (kg) 1.880

Fluids controlled Oils (including synthetic), ADW 23M129012 ADW 24M129012 ADW 27M129012
from - 30 °C to + 125 °C (2) (3)
Weight (kg) 1.880

Possible differential 1 C/O switches Min. 2.4 bar (34.8 psi) 6.9 bar (100 psi) 8.6 bar (124.7 psi)
(subtract from PH
to give PB) Max. 9.3 bar (135 psi) 28 bar (406 psi) 38 bar (551 psi)
2 C/O switches Min. 3.1 bar (45 psi) 8.6 bar (124.7 psi) 14 bar (203 psi)
Max. 14 bar (203 psi) 34 bar (493 psi) 41 bar (594.5 psi)
Maximum permissible pressure 690 bar (10 000 psi)
6 Mechanical life 1 x 106 operating cycles (average value, depending on application)
(1) Since it is normal for piston type pressure switches (not incorporating a piston seal) to have
a slight oil leakage past the piston, a drain hole through the cylinder wall is incorporated. To
avoid back pressure, this hole should never be plugged. If for any reason this oil leakage is
undesirable, use pressure switches incorporating a Quad-Ring piston seal.

Pressure
PH
2
4
3
PB
Time
Dimensions:
page 6/137
6/134
Pressure switches type ADW Piston operated, with Quad-Ring piston seal
MINI
I
MAX
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) 9.3…69 bar 28…210 bar 38…340 bar
(Falling pressure) (135…1000 psi) (406…3045 psi) (551…4930 psi)
References
Fluids controlled Oils and other fluids, ADW 5M129012 ADW 6M129012 ADW 7S1M129012
from - 25 °C to + 120 °C (1) (2)
Weight (kg) 1.880

Fluids controlled Oils and other fluids, ADW 25M129012 ADW 26M129012 ADW 27S1M129012
from - 25 °C to + 120 °C (1) (2)
Weight (kg) 1.880

Possible differential 1 C/O switches Min./max. at 4.8/6.9 bar (69.6/100 psi) 14/21 bar (203/304.5 psi) 19/25 bar (275.5/362.5 psi)
(subtract from PH low setting
to give PB) Min./max. at 8.6/10 bar (124.7/145 psi) 28/34 bar (406/493 psi) 38/45 bar (551/652.5 psi)
high setting
2 C/O switches Min./max. at 6.2/7.9 bar (89.9/114.6 psi) 17/24 bar (246.5/348 psi) 22/28 bar (319/406 psi)
low setting
Min./max. at 10/12 bar (145/174 psi) 34/39 bar (493/565.5 psi) 44/50 bar (638/725 psi)
high setting
Maximum permissible pressure 690 bar (10 000 psi)
Mechanical life 1 x 106 operating cycles (average value, depending on application) 6


Pressure
PH
2
4
3
PB
Time
Dimensions:
page 6/137
6/135
Dimensions 6
For control circuits, type ACW
ACW 3, 4, 23, 24 ACW 1, 5, 8, 9, 21, 25, 28, 29
88 88
68 9,5 69 9,5 68 9,5 69 9,5
31 31 31 31
9,5
9,5
17
17
;; ;
; 69
88
88
69
167
(1) (1)
190
9,5
9,5
18 18
31 31
31 31
(1) Tapped entry for n° 13 cable gland (1) Tapped entry for n° 13 cable gland
Ø: G 1/4 (BSP female) Ø: G 1/4 (BSP female)
ACW 2, 22 ACW 6, 7, 10, 26, 27, 20
88
6 68 9,5 69 9,5 9,5 69 9,5
31 31 31 31
9,5
9,5
17
17
88
88
69
69
173
(1) (1)
221
9,5
9,5
18
31 31
31 31
(1) Tapped entry for n° 13 cable gland (1) Tapped entry for n° 13 cable gland
Ø: G 1/4 (BSP female) Ø: G 1/4 (BSP female)
pages 6/131, 6/132 and 6/135 pages 6/132 and 6/133
6/136
Dimensions 6
ADW 3, 4, 7, 23, 24, 27
88
68 9,5 69 9,5
31 31
9,5
16
;;
88
69
176
(1)
9,5
18
(2)
31 31
(1) Tapped entry for n° 13 cable gland

(2) Drainage hole, tapped G 1/8 (BSP female)
Ø: G 3/8 (BSP female)
ADW 5, 6, 7S1, 25, 26, 27S1
88
68 9,5 69 9,5
31 31
6
9,5
16
88
69
176
(1)
9,5
18
31 31
(1) Tapped entry for n° 13 cable gland

Ø: G 3/8 (BSP female)
6/137
Presentation 6
For control circuits, types XMX and XMA
Presentation
Pressure switches type XMX and XMA are switches for control circuits, with an
adjustable differential.
They are used to control the pressure of water and air, up to 25 bar.
Equipment fitted to the various models

Location of setting screw
Pressure switches type XMX have an internal setting screw that is only accessible
after removing the cover.
Pressure switches type XMA have an external setting screw that is accessible
without removing the cover.
Case
Pressure switches type XMX have a black opaque case.

Pressure switches type XMA can have a transparent case or a black opaque case.
Setting
1 When setting pressure switches XMX or XMA, adjust the switching point on rising
2 pressure (PH) first and then the switching point on falling pressure (PB).

The switching point on rising pressure (PH) is set by adjusting screw-nut 1.

The switching point on falling pressure (PB) is set by adjusting screw-nut 2.
pages 6/140 and 6/141 page 6/143
6/138
Characteristics 6
Product certifications UL, CSA, ccc
Protective treatment “TC”
Ambient air temperature °C For operation: - 25…+ 70 for 6 and 25 bar versions
- 25…+ 55 for 12 bar versions
For storage: - 40…+ 70
Fluids controlled °C Air, fresh water, sea water: 0…+ 70 °C for 6 and 25 bar versions
0…+ 55 °C for 12 bar versions
Materials Case: polycarbonate impregnated with Lexan 500R fibreglass (black opaque cover) or
polycarbonate impregnated with Lexan 123 fibreglass (transparent cover)
Component materials in contact with fluid: chromated zinc alloy (fluid entry), canvas
covered nitrile (diaphragm)
Electric shock protection Class I conforming to IEC 536
Operating rate Op. 600

cycles/h
Repeat accuracy < 3.5%
Fluid connection G 1/4 or 4 x G 1/4 (BSP female) conforming to NF E 03-005, ISO 228

2 tapped entries for n° 13 (DIN Pg 13.5) cable gland

Rated operational characteristics a AC-15, B300 (Ue = 240 V, Ie = 1.5 A; Ue = 120 V, Ie = 3 A)
c DC-13, R300 (Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0.1 A)
Rated insulation voltage V Ui = 500 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1
Rated impulse withstand voltage kV U imp = 6 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1
Type of contacts 1 C/O single-pole contact, snap action

6
Short-circuit protection 10 A cartridge fuse type gG (gI)
Connection Screw clamp terminals

Minimum clamping capacity: 1 x 1 mm2
Maximum clamping capacity: 2 x 2.5 mm2
Electrical durability a.c. supply 50/60 Hz, Ith = 10 A
Inductive circuit, utilisation category AC-15, 3 A/240 V: 1 million operating cycles
pages 6/140 and 6/141 page 6/143
6/139
characteristics 6
For control circuits, type XMX
Pressure switches type XMX (internal setting screw)
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) 1…6 bar 1.3…12 bar 3.5…25 bar 1…6 bar 1.3…12 bar 3.5…25 bar
(Rising pressure) (14.5…87 psi) (18.85…174 psi) (50.75…362.5 psi) (14.5…87 psi) (18.85…174 psi) (50.75…362.5 psi)
Fluid connection G 1/4 (BSP female) 4 x G 1/4 (BSP female)
References
Switches with black opaque cover
Fluids controlled Air, fresh water, sea XMX A06L2135 XMX A12L2135 XMX A25L2135 XMX A06L2435 XMX A12L2435 XMX A25L2435
water (1)
Weight (kg) 0.430 0.650 0.430 0.650
Possible differential Min. at low setting 0.8 bar (11.6 psi) 1 bar (14.5 psi) 3.4 bar (49.3 psi) 0.8 bar (11.6 psi) 1 bar (14.5 psi) 3.4 bar (49.3 psi)
(subtract from PH
to give PB) Min. at high setting 1.2 bar (17.4 psi) 1.7 bar (24.6 psi) 4.5 bar (65.2 psi) 1.2 bar (17.4 psi) 1.7 bar (24.6 psi) 4.5 bar (65.2 psi)
Max. at high setting 4.2 bar (60.9 psi) 8.4 bar (121.8 psi) 20 bar (290 psi) 4.2 bar (60.9 psi) 8.4 bar (121.8 psi) 20 bar (290 psi)
Maximum Per cycle 7.5 bar (108.7 psi) 15 bar (217.5 psi) 31.25 bar (453.1 psi) 7.5 bar (108.7 psi) 15 bar (217.5 psi) 31.25 bar (453.1 psi)
permissible pressure
Accidental 13.5 bar (195.7 psi) 27 bar (391.5 psi) 56.25 bar (815.6 psi) 13.5 bar (195.7 psi) 27 bar (391.5 psi) 56.25 bar (815.6 psi)
Destruction pressure 30 bar (435 psi) 100 bar (1450 psi) 30 bar (435 psi) 100 bar (1450 psi)
Cable entry 2 entries tapped for n° 13 cable gland, conforming to NF C 68-300 (DIN Pg 13.5)
Operating curves
XMX A06ppppp XMX A12ppppp XMX A25ppppp
Pressure
Rising pressure
Rising pressure
Rising pressure
bar bar bar

6 12 30
PH
5 1 10
1 25
2
4
2 20 1
8
PB
3 6 15 2
2 4 10
1 2 Time
1,3 3,5
0 0
0
0,2 1 1,8 2 3 4 4,8 6 bar 0,3 2 3,6 4 6 8 10 10,3 bar 0,1 5 10 15 20,5 25 30 bar
Falling pressure Falling pressure Falling pressure
Connections
1 Maximum differential 1 Maximum differential 1 Maximum differential
13
21
2 Minimum differential 2 Minimum differential 2 Minimum differential

14
22
page 6/142 page 6/143
6/140
characteristics 6
For control circuits, type XMA
Pressure switches type XMA (external setting screw)
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) 1…6 bar 1.3…12 bar 3.5…25 bar 1…6 bar 1.3…12 bar 3.5…25 bar
(Rising pressure) (14.5…87 psi) (18.85…174 psi) (50.75…362.5 psi) (14.5…87 psi) (18.85…174 psi) (50.75…362.5 psi)
Fluid connection G 1/4 (BSP female) 4 x G 1/4 (BSP female)
References
Switches with black opaque cover
Fluids controlled Air, fresh water, sea XMA H06L2135 XMA H12L2135 XMA H25L2135 XMA H06L2435 XMA H12L2435 XMA H25L2435
water (1)
Switches with transparent cover
Fluids controlled Air, fresh water, sea XMA V06L2135 XMA V12L2135 XMA V25L2135 XMA V06L2435 XMA V12L2435 XMA V25L2435
water (1)
Weight (kg) 0.430 0.650 0.430 0.650
Possible differential Min. at low setting 0.8 bar (11.6 psi) 1 bar (14.5 psi) 3.4 bar (49.3 psi) 0.8 bar (11.6 psi) 1 bar (14.5 psi) 3.4 bar (49.3 psi)
(subtract from PH
to give PB) Min. at high setting 1.2 bar (17.4 psi) 1.7 bar (24.6 psi) 4.5 bar (65.2 psi) 1.2 bar (17.4 psi) 1.7 bar (24.6 psi) 4.5 bar (65.2 psi)
Max. at high setting 4.2 bar (60.9 psi) 8.4 bar (121.8 psi) 20 bar (290 psi) 4.2 bar (60.9 psi) 8.4 bar (121.8 psi) 20 bar (290 psi)
Maximum Per cycle 7.5 bar (108.7 psi) 15 bar (217.5 psi) 31.25 bar (453.1 psi) 7.5 bar (108.7 psi) 15 bar (217.5 psi) 31.25 bar (453.1 psi)
permissible pressure
Accidental 13.5 bar (195.7 psi) 27 bar (391.5 psi) 56.25 bar (815.6 psi) 13.5 bar (195.7 psi) 27 bar (391.5 psi) 56.25 bar (815.6 psi)
Destruction pressure 30 bar (435 psi) 100 bar (1450 psi) 30 bar (435 psi) 100 bar (1450 psi)
Mechanical life 1 x 106 operating cycles 6

Operating curves
XMA p06ppppp XMA p12ppppp XMA p25ppppp
Rising pressure
Pressure
Rising pressure
bar bar
Rising pressure
bar
6 12 30
PH
5 1 10
1 25
2
4
2 20 1
8
PB
3 15 2
6
2 4 10
1 2 Time
3,5
1,3
0 0 0
0,2 1 1,8 2 3 4 4,8 6 bar 0,3 2 3,6 4 6 8 10 10,3 bar 0,1 5 10 15 20,5 25 30 bar
Connections
13
21

14
22
page 6/142 page 6/143
6/141
References 6


kg
Fixing bracket XMA ZL001 0.035
Knurled adjustment knob, Ø 36 mm XML ZL003 0.010

fits over adjustment screws to facilitate setting
XMA ZL001
N° 13 plastic With anti pull-out ring DE9 PM1201 0.005
cable gland (for cable Ø 6…9 mm)
Without anti pull-out ring DE9 PM1202 0.005

XML ZL003
(for cable Ø 6…9 mm)
With anti pull-out ring DE9 PM1203 0.005

(for cable Ø 9…12.5 mm)
DE9 PM1201 Without anti pull-out ring DE9 PM1204 0.005

Description For pressure Reference Weight

switch kg
Diaphragms Size 6 bar XMP Z31 0.005
Size 12 bar XMP Z32 0.005

DE9 PM1202
XMP Z3p
Dimensions:
page 6/143
6/142
Dimensions 6
XMX A06L2135, XMX A12L2135 XMX A06L2435, XMX A12L2435

XMA p06L2135, XMA p12L2135 XMA p06L2435, XMA p12L2435
XMA : 7
XMA : 7
106
106
(1)
30,5 43,5 30,5
= = 58 = =
57 97,5 57
r = 63 (2) r = 63 (2)
A C A
ØA = G 1/4 (BSP female) ØA = ØB = ØC = ØD = G 1/4 (BSP female)

(1) 2 tapped entries for n° 13 cable gland (1) 2 tapped entries for n° 13 cable gland
(2) Minimum clearance zone for screwing-on pressure switch at point A (2) Minimum clearance zone for screwing-on pressure switch at point A
XMX A25L2135, XMX A25L2435 Fixing bracket
XMA p25L2135, XMA p25L2435 XMA ZL001
XMA : 7
6
126
(1)
43,5 30,5
58 = =
97,5 57
r = 63 (2)
C A
XMp p25L2135: ØA only = G 1/4 (BSP female) (1) 2 tapped entries for n° 13 cable gland
XMp p25L2435: ØA = ØB = ØC = ØD = G 1/4 (BSP female) (2) Minimum clearance zone for screwing-on pressure switch at point A
6/143
Presentation 6
For power circuits, types FTG, FSG and FYG
Presentation
Pressure switches types FTG, FSG and FYG are switches for power circuits.
They are used to control the pressure of water, up to 10.5 bar.
Pressure switches type FTG have a fixed differential and are for detection of a single
threshold.
Pressure switches type FSG and FYG have an adjustable differential and are for
regulation between 2 thresholds.
Setting
Pressure switches with fixed differential (type FTG)
Only the switching point on rising pressure is adjustable.

1

The switching point on falling pressure (PB) is not adjustable.
The difference between the tripping and resetting points of the contact is the natural
Pressure switches with adjustable differential (types FSG and FYG)
When setting the pressure switch, adjust the switching point on rising pressure (PH)
1 first and then the switching point on falling pressure (PB).
2 Switching point on rising pressure


The switching point on falling pressure (PB) is set by adjusting screw-nut 2.
6/144
Characteristics 6
Pressure switch type FTG p FSG p and FYG p2 FSG 2NE
Conformity to standards e, IEC/EN 60730
Protective treatment Standard version: “TC”
Ambient air temperature °C For operation: 0…+ 45. For storage: - 30…+ 80
Fluids controlled Fresh water, sea water (0…+ 70 °C)
Materials Case: polystyrene, resistant to mechanical impact

Component materials in contact with fluid: nylon 6/6, zinc plated steel, nitrile
Degree of protection IP 20 conforming to IEC/EN 60529 IP 65 conforming to

IEC/EN 60529
Operating rate Op. 600
cycles/h
Repeat accuracy < 2%
Fluid connection FpG 2, FYG p2: G 1/4 (BSP female) conforming to NF E 03-005, ISO 228
FpG 9: R 1/4 (BSP male) conforming to NF E 03-004, ISO 7
Electrical connection Terminals. 2 cable entries, with grommet Terminals. 2 entries

incorporating n° 13 plastic
cable gland (DIN Pg 13.5)

Rated operational characteristics Ie = 10 A, Ue = a 250 V conforming to EN 60730-1
Power ratings of controlled motors Voltage a 2-pole a 2-pole a 2-pole a 2-pole a 2-pole a 2-pole
1-phase 3-phase 1-phase 3-phase 1-phase 3-phase
110 V 0.75 kW 1.1 kW 0.75 kW 1.1 kW 0.75 kW 1.1 kW

(1 HP) (1.5 HP) (1 HP) (1.5 HP) (1 HP) (1.5 HP)
230 V 1.1 kW
(1.5 HP)
1.5 kW
(2 HP)
1.5 kW
(2 HP)
2.2 kW
(3 HP)
1.5 kW
(2 HP)
2.2 kW
(3 HP)
6
400 V 1.5 kW 1.5 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW
(2 HP) (2 HP) (2 HP) (3 HP) (2 HP) (3 HP)
Rated impulse withstand voltage kV U imp = 6 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1
Type of contacts One 2-pole 2 N/C (4 terminal) contact, snap action
Short-circuit protection 20 A cartridge fuse type gG
Connection Screw clamp terminals.

Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 1 mm2, max: 2 x 2 m m2
Electrical durability Op. 40 000 at an operating rate 100 000 at an operating rate of 600 operating cycles/hour
cycles of 600 operating cycles/hour
6/145
characteristics 6
For power circuits, type FTG
Size 4.6 bar (66.7 psi), fixed differential, for detection of
a single threshold. Switches with 2-pole 2 N/C contact.
Fluid connection G 1/4 (BSP female) R 1/4 (BSP male)

(Rising pressure)
References
Fluids controlled Fresh water, sea water, FTG 2 FTG 9
from 0 °C to + 70 °C (1)
Weight (kg) 0.340

Natural differential At low setting 1.1 bar (15.95 psi)
(subtract from PH
to give PB) At middle setting 1.3 bar (18.85 psi)
At high setting 1.5 bar (21.75 psi)

pressure
Accidental 8 bar (116 psi)
Cable entry 2 cable entries, with grommet
6 Operating curves Connections

Rising pressure
bar
5
4,6
4
Pressure
3 PH
PB
2
1,4
1
1
2
0
0 0,3 1 2 3,1 4 5 bar Time
Falling pressure
---- Non adjustable value
Dimensions:
page 6/150
6/146
characteristics 6
For power circuits, type FSG
Size 4.6 bar (66.7 psi), adjustable differential, for
regulation between 2 thresholds. Switches with 2-pole
2 N/C contact. Degree of protection IP 20
Fluid connection G 1/4 (BSP female) R 1/4 (BSP male)

(Rising pressure)
References
Fluids controlled Fresh water, sea water, FSG 2 FSG 9
from 0 °C to + 70 °C (1)
Weight (kg) 0.340

Possible differential Max. at low setting 2.1 bar (30.45 psi)
(subtract from PH
to give PB) Max. at middle setting 2.2 bar (31.9 psi)
Min. at low setting 1 bar (14.5 psi)
Min. at middle setting 1.1 bar (15.95 psi)
Min. at high setting 1.2 bar (17.4 psi)

pressure

6
Operating curves Connections

Rising pressure
bar
5
4,6
4
Pressure
3 1 PH
2
2
PB
1,4
1
1
2
0
0 0,3 1 2 2,3 3 3,4 4 5 bar Time
Falling pressure
Dimensions:
page 6/150
6/147
characteristics 6
For power circuits, type FSG 2NE
Size 4.6 bar (66.7 psi), adjustable differential, for
regulation between 2 thresholds. Switches with 2-pole
2 N/C contact. Degree of protection IP 65

(Rising pressure)
References
Fluids controlled Fresh water, sea water, FSG 2NE
from 0 °C to + 70 °C (1)
Weight (kg) 0.360

Possible differential Max. at low setting 2.1 bar (30.45 psi)
(subtract from PH
to give PB) Max. at middle setting 2.2 bar (31.9 psi)
Min. at low setting 1 bar (14.5 psi)
Min. at middle setting 1.1 bar (15.95 psi)
Min. at high setting 1.2 bar (17.4 psi)

pressure

6 Cable entry 2 entries incorporating n° 13 plastic cable gland, conforming to NF C 68-300 (DIN Pg 13.5).

Rising pressure
bar
5
4,6
4
Pressure
3 1 PH
2
2
PB
1,4
1
1
2
0
0 0,3 1 2 2,3 3 3,4 4 5 bar Time
Falling pressure

Dimensions:
page 6/151
6/148
characteristics 6
For power circuits, type FYG
Sizes 7 and 10.5 bar (101.5 and 152.3 psi), adjustable
differential, for regulation between 2 thresholds. Switches
with 2-pole 2 N/C contact. Degree of protection IP 20
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) 2.8…7 bar (40.6…101.5 psi) 5.6…10.5 bar (81.2…152.3 psi)
(Rising pressure)
References
Fluids controlled Fresh water, sea water, FYG 22 FYG 32
from 0 °C to + 70 °C (1)
Weight (kg) 0.340

Possible differential Max. at low setting 2.3 bar (33.35 psi) 3 bar (43.5 psi)
(subtract from PH
to give PB) Max. at middle setting 2.5 bar (36.25 psi) 3.2 bar (46.4 psi)
Min. at low setting 1.2 bar (17.4 psi) 1.9 bar (27.55 psi)
Min. at middle setting 1.4 bar (20.3 psi) 2.1 bar (30.45 psi)
Maximum permissible Per cycle 8.75 bar (126.9 psi) 13 bar (188.5 psi)
pressure
Accidental 15 bar (217.5 psi) 15 bar (217.5 psi)

6

FYG 22 FYG 32
Rising pressure
Rising pressure
bar bar
8
7 10
9
6 8 Pressure
1
5 7 2 PH
4 1 2 5,6
5
2,8 4
3 PB
2
1
2
1
1
2
0 0
0 0,5 1 2 3 4,3 5,4 6 7 8 bar 0 1 2,6 4 5 6 7,1 8,2 9 10 bar Time
1 Maximum differential 1 Maximum differential –– Adjustable value

2 Minimum differential 2 Minimum differential
Dimensions:
page 6/151
6/149
Dimensions 6
Dimensions
FTG 2 FTG 9
102 72 102 72
Ø22 Ø22
96
105
22
22
23
32
31 G 1/4
60 31 R 1/4
60
FSG 2 FSG 9
102 72 102 72
Ø22 Ø22
96
105
22
22
23
6
32
31 G 1/4
60 31 R 1/4
60
6/150
Dimensions (continued)
FSG 2NE
106 72
115
41
25
63
G 1/4
FYG 22, FYG 32
102 72
Ø22
94
22
21
6
31 G 1/4
60
6/151
Presentation 6
For power circuits, type XMP
Presentation
Pressure switches type XMP are switches for power circuits (direct switching), with
an adjustable differential.
They are used to control the pressure of water and air, up to 25 bar.
Equipment fitted to the various models

Case
Pressure switches type XMP, depending on the model, include:
b 3 types case:
v bare case,
v case with On/Off knob (black): used as a switch for starting and stopping the
installation,
v case with reset knob (yellow): necessary when the safety requirements of the
system include tripping in the event of overpressure. Resetting is not automatic on
return to normal pressure, and it can only be achieved by manually turning the
“Reset” knob”.
b 2 levels of sealing:
v IP 54,
v IP 65.
Decompression valve
Depending on the model, 2 types of decompression valve can be fitted to pressure

switches type XMP:
b Straight, instant connection, decompression valve (connection by Ø 6 mm plastic
tube).
b Straight, olive connection, decompression valve (connection by Ø 6 mm plastic or
metal tube).
Setting
6
When setting XMP pressure switches, adjust the switching point on rising pressure
1 (PH) first and then the switching point on falling pressure (PB).

2 The switching point on rising pressure (PH) is set by adjusting the screw-nut or
knurled knob 1.
Tighten either the nut or knurled knob 1 to increase the high point switching value.

The switching point on falling pressure is set by adjusting screw-nut 2.
Tighten nut 2 to reduce the low point switching value (increase in differential).
pages 6/154 to 6/161 page 6/163
6/152
Characteristics 6
Ambient air temperature °C For operation: - 25…+ 70

For storage: - 40…+ 70
Fluids controlled Air, fresh water, sea water (0…+ 70 °C)
Materials Case: polyamide impregnated with fibreglass

Component materials in contact with fluid: chromated zinc alloy (fluid entry), canvas
covered nitrile (diaphragm)
Vibration resistance 3 gn (10…500 Hz), conforming to IEC 68-2-6
Shock resistance 50 gn, conforming to IEC 68-2-27
Degree of protection IP 54 conforming to IEC/EN 60529 or IP 65 for universal model
Operating rate Op. y 600

cycles/h
Repeat accuracy < 3.5%
Fluid connection G 1/4, 4 x G 1/4 or G 3/8 (BSP female) conforming to NF E 03-005, ISO 228
Electrical connection 2 tapped entries for n° 13 (DIN Pg 13.5) cable gland

Rated impulse withstand voltage V U imp = 6 kV conforming to IEC/EN 60 947-1
Type of contacts One 2-pole 2 N/C or 3-pole 3 N/C contact, snap action
Resistance across terminals mΩ y 25 conforming to NF C 93-050 method A or IEC 255-7 category 3
Short-circuit protection Cartridge fuse type Am

6
Connection Screw clamp terminals. Minimum clamping capacity: 2 x 4 mm2
Electrical durability Power Number of operating cycles

Operating rate: 600 operating cycles/hour
Load factor: 0.4 kW a 400 V, 3-phase a 230 V, 3-phase
1.5 1 000 000 600 000
2.2 700 000 –
3 500 000 –
pages 6/154 to 6/161 page 6/163
6/153
characteristics 6
Type XMP, IP 54
Size 6 bar (87 psi)
Switches with 2-pole 2 N/C or 3-pole 3 N/C contact
1 2

(Rising pressure)
Type of contact 2-pole 2 N/C 3-pole 3 N/C
References (1)
Switches without decompression valve
Bare case 1 XMP A06B2131 XMP A06C2131
Case with reset knob 2 XMP B06B2131 –
Case with On/Off knob 2 XMP C06B2131 XMP C06C2131
Weight (kg) 0.430
Switches with straight decompression valve, instant connection

Bare case 1 XMP D06B2131 XMP D06C2131
Case with On/Off knob 2 XMP E06B2131 XMP E06C2131
Weight (kg) 0.450

Possible differential Min. at low setting 0.8 bar (11.6 psi)
(subtract from PH Min. at high setting 1.2 bar (17.4 psi)
to give PB)
6 Mechanical life 1 million operating cycles
(1) References for individually packaged switches. Also available packaged in lots of 10. To
order, add the letter C to the reference selected from above. Example: reference for lot of 10
pressure switches XMP A06B2131 in one package becomes XMP A06B2131C.
Operating curves
Rising pressure
bar
6
5 1 Pressure
2
PH
4
2 PB
0
0,2 1 1,8 2 3 4 4,8 6 bar Time
Falling pressure
Adjustable value
page 6/162 page 6/163
6/154
6
6
4 x G 1/4 (BSP female) G 3/8 (BSP female)
2
1 2
1…6 bar (14.5…87 psi)
2-pole 2 N/C 3-pole 3 N/C 2-pole 2 N/C 3-pole 3 N/C
References (1)
– XMP A06B2242 XMP A06C2242
– XMP B06B2242 –
– XMP C06B2242 XMP C06C2242
– 0.430

– XMP D06B2242 XMP D06C2242
XMP E06B2431 XMP E06C2431 XMP E06B2242 XMP E06C2242
0.450

0.8 bar (11.6 psi)
1.2 bar (17.4 psi)
4.2 bar (60.9 psi)
30 bar (435 psi)
1 million operating cycles 6

2 entries tapped for n° 13 cable gland, conforming to NF C 68-300 2 entries incorporating n° 13 plastic cable gland (DIN Pg 13.5)
(DIN Pg 13.5) Clamping capacity 9 to 13 mm
Diaphragm
Other versions Pressure switches not listed above, comprising the equipment proposed for the choice of
reference. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
XMP pppBpppp XMP pppCpppp
5
1
1
3
6
2
2
4
page 6/162 page 6/163
6/155
Type XMP, IP 54
1 2

(Rising pressure)
Type of contact 2-pole 2 N/C 3-pole 3 N/C
References (1)
Bare case 1 XMP A12B2131 XMP A12C2131
Case with reset knob 2 XMP B12B2131 –
Case with On/Off knob 2 XMP C12B2131 XMP C12C2131
Weight (kg) 0.430

Bare case 1 XMP D12B2131 XMP D12C2131
Case with On/Off knob 2 XMP E12B2131 XMP E12C2131
Weight (kg) 0.450
Switches with straight decompression valve, olive connection

Case with On/Off knob 2 XMP R12B2131 XMP R12C2131
Weight (kg) 0.450

Possible differential Min. at low setting 1 bar (14.5 psi)
6 to give PB)
Operating curves
Rising pressure
bar
12
1 Pressure
10
2 PH
8
6
PB
4
2
1,3
0
Time
0,3 2 3,6 4 6 8 10 10,3 bar
Falling pressure Adjustable value
page 6/162 page 6/163
6/156
6
6
4 x G 1/4 (BSP female) G 3/8 (BSP female)
2 1 2
1.3…12 bar (18.85…174 psi)
2-pole 2 N/C 3-pole 3 N/C 2-pole 2 N/C 3-pole 3 N/C
References (1)
– XMP A12B2242 XMP A12C2242
– XMP B12B2242 –
– XMP C12B2242 XMP C12C2242
– 0.430

– XMP D12B2242 XMP D12C2242
XMP E12B2431 XMP E12C2431 XMP E12B2242 XMP E12C2242
0.450

–
–

1 bar (14.5 psi)
1.7 bar (24.6 psi)
8.4 bar (121.8 psi) 6
30 bar (435 psi)
2 entries tapped for n° 13 cable gland, conforming to NF C 68-300 2 entries incorporating n° 13 plastic cable gland (DIN Pg 13.5)
(DIN Pg 13.5) Clamping capacity 9 to 13 mm
Diaphragm
1
5
1
3
2
6
2
page 6/162 page 6/163
6/157
Type XMP, IP 54
1 2

(Rising pressure)
Type of contact 2-pole 2 N/C
References (1)
Bare case 1 XMP A25B2131
Case with reset knob 2 XMP B25B2131
Case with On/Off knob 2 XMP C25B2131
Weight (kg) 0.650

Case with On/Off knob 2 XMP R25B2131
Weight (kg) 0.670

Possible differential Min. at low setting 3.4 bar (49.3 psi)
to give PB)
6 Mechanical life 1 million operating cycles
pressure switches XMP A25B2131 in one package becomes XMP 25B2131C.
Operating curves
Rising pressure
bar
30
Pressure
25
1 PH
20
15 2
10 PB
3,5
0
0,1 5 10 15 20,5 25 30 bar Time
Falling pressure
Adjustable value
page 6/162 page 6/163
6/158
6
6
G 1/4 (BSP female)
1 2
3.5…25 bar (50.75…362.5 psi)
3-pole 3 N/C
References (1)
XMP A25C2131
–
XMP C25C2131
0.650

XMP R25C2131
0.670

3.4 bar (49.3 psi)
4.5 bar (65.2 psi)
20 bar (290 psi)
100 bar (1450 psi)

6
2 entries tapped for n° 13 cable gland, conforming to NF C 68-300 (DIN Pg 13.5)
Diaphragm
pressure switches XMP A25C2131 in one package becomes XMP A25C2131C.
5
1
1
3
6
2
2
4
page 6/162 page 6/163
6/159
Type XMP, IP 65
Adjustable range of switching point (PH) 1…6 bar (14.5…87 psi) 1.3…12 bar (18.85…174 psi) 3.5…25 bar (50.75…362.5 psi)
(Rising pressure)
Type of contact 2-pole 2 N/C 3-pole 3 N/C 2-pole 2 N/C 3-pole 3 N/C 2-pole 2 N/C 3-pole 3 N/C
References (1)
Case with On/Off knob XMP R06B2133 XMP R06C2133 XMP R12B2133 XMP R12C2133 XMP R25B2133 XMP R25C2133
Weight (kg) 0.450 0.670

Possible differential Min. at low setting 0.8 bar (11.6 psi) 1 bar (14.5 psi) 3.4 bar (49.3 psi)
(subtract from PH Min. at high setting 1.2 bar (17.4 psi) 1.7 bar (24.6 psi) 4.5 bar (65.2 psi)
to give PB)
Max. at high setting 4.2 bar (60.9 psi) 8.4 bar (121.8 psi) 20 bar (290 psi)
Adjustment of high setting point (PH) By screw-nut

pressure switches XMP R06B2133 in one package becomes XMP R06B2133C.
Operating curves
XMP R06ppppp XMP R12ppppp XMP R25ppppp
Rising pressure
Rising pressure
bar bar
Rising pressure
bar
6 12 30
1 10
1 25
Pressure
5
2
2 20 1 PH
4 8
6 15 2
3
4 10 PB
2
1 2
1,3 3,5
0 0 0
0,2 1 1,8 2 3 4 4,8 6 bar 0,3 2 3,6 4 6 8 10 10,3 bar 0,1 5 10 15 20,5 25 30 bar Time

Adjustable value
page 6/162 page 6/163
6/160
6
6
4 x G 1/4 (BSP female)
1…6 bar 1.3…12 bar 3.5…25 bar

(14.5…87 psi) (18.85…174 psi) (50.75…362.5 psi)
2-pole 2 N/C 3-pole 3 N/C 2-pole 2 N/C 3-pole 3 N/C 2-pole 2 N/C 3-pole 3 N/C
References (1)
XMP R06B2433 XMP R06C2433 XMP R12B2433 XMP R12C2433 XMP R25B2433 XMP R25C2433
0.450 0.670

0.8 bar (11.6 psi) 1 bar (14.5 psi) 3.4 bar (49.3 psi)
1.2 bar (17.4 psi) 1.7 bar (24.6 psi) 4.5 bar (65.2 psi)
4.2 bar (60.9 psi) 8.4 bar (121.8 psi) 20 bar (290 psi)
30 bar (435 psi) 100 bar (1450 psi)
2 entries tapped for n° 13 cable gland, conforming to NF C 68-300 (DIN Pg 13.5)
By screw-nut
Diaphragm
6
pressure switches XMP R06B2433 in one package becomes XMP R06B2433C.
5
1
1
3
6
2
2
4
page 6/162 page 6/163
6/161
References 6

References
kg
Fixing bracket XMA ZL001 0.035
XMA ZL001
Knurled adjustment knob, Ø 36 mm XMP MDR01 0.010

fits over adjustment screws to facilitate setting
XMP MDR01
N° 13 plastic cable gland With anti pull-out ring DE9 PM1201 0.005

DE9 PM1201
With anti pull-out ring DE9 PM1203 0.005

DE9 PM1202
6 Description For pressure Reference Weight

switch kg
Diaphragms Size 6 bar XMP Z31 0.005

XMP Z3p
Dimensions:
page 6/163
6/162
Dimensions 6
Dimensions
XMP p06ppppp and XMP p12ppppp
Fluid connection G 1/4 or G 3/8 (BSP female) Fluid connection 4 x G 1/4 (BSP female) With straight, instant conn-
Without decompression valve Without decompression valve ection, decompression valve
19
19
106
106
119
(1) (1)
13
43,5 30,5
43,5 30,5
58 = = 22,5
58 = =
97,5 57
97,5 57
With straight, olive conn-
ection, decompression valve
r = 63 (2) r = 63 (2)
A C A
119
B
13
ØA = G 1/4 or G 3/8 (BSP female) ØA = ØB = ØC = ØD = G 1/4 (BSP female)
(1) 2 tapped entries for n° 13 cable gland 22,5
(2) Minimum clearance zone for screwing-on pressure switch at point A
XMP p25ppppp Fixing bracket XMA ZL001
Fluid connection G 1/4 or 4 x G 1/4 (BSP female) With straight, olive connection,
Without decompression valve decompression valve
3,6 6
19
19
52
40
24,75
126
136
12,5 38
18,5 54
(1)
43,5 30,5
22,5
58 = =
97,5 57
r = 63 (2)
C A
XMP p25p21pp: ØA only = G 1/4 (BSP female)

XMP p25p24pp: ØA = ØB = ØC = ØD = G 1/4 (BSP female)
(1) 2 tapped entries for n° 13 cable gland
(2) Minimum clearance zone for screwing-on pressure switch at
point A
6/163
General 6
vacuum switches 6
Nautilus®
Function
The function of pressure and vacuum switches is the control or regulation of
pressure or vacuum levels in hydraulic or pneumatic systems.
They transform the pressure change into a digital electrical signal when the preset
switching points are reached.
Switches for power circuits

Switches with power electrical contacts, either 2-pole or 3-pole, designed for direct
switching of single-phase or 3-phase motors (pumps, compressors, etc.).
Switches for control circuits

Switches with standard electrical contacts, designed for control of contactors,
relays, power valves, PLC inputs, etc.
Pressure switch operating principle

Detection of a single threshold
The switches for detection of a single threshold (fixed differential) have a single
adjustable setting point (PH). The differential between the high and low points
(PH - PB) depends upon the natural characteristics of the switch. It is not adjustable.
Pressure Example: contact
PH schematics of XML A
Fixed
13
11
13
11
differential
PB
14
12
14
12
Time 1 2
1 2 1 2
–– Adjustable value PH = High point

--- Non adjustable value PB = Low point
Regulation between 2 thresholds
The switches for regulation between 2 thresholds (adjustable differential) have both
a high point setting (PH) and a low point setting (PB). Both of these points can be
independently adjusted.
6 PH
Adjustable
schematics of XML B
13
11
13
11
spread 14
12
14
12
PB
Time 1 2
1 2 1 2

PB = Low point
Detection of 2 thresholds
The dual stage switches, for detection at each threshold, have an adjustable high
point setting for each stage (PH1 and PH2). Both of these points can be
independently adjusted. For both stages, the differential between the high point and
the low point (PH1 - PB1 and PH2 - PB2) depends upon the natural characteristics
of the switch. It is not adjustable.
PH2 schematics of XML D
Fixed
Adjustable
13
11
23
21
PB2 differ-
differential
ential 1
PH1
14
12
24
22
Fixed
PB1 differ-
ential
13
11
23
21
Time
2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
14
12
24
22

13
11
23
21
--- Non adjustable value PB = Low point 3

14
12
24
22
13
11
23
21
4
14
12
24
22
6/164
vacuum switches 6
Nautilus®
Vacuum switch operating principle

Detection of a single threshold
The switches for detection of a single threshold (fixed differential) have a single
adjustable setting point (PH).
The differential between the high and low points (PH - PB) depends upon the natural
characteristics of the switch. It is not adjustable.
Time Example: contact

schematics of XML A
13
11
13
11
14
12
14
12
PH
Fixed
differential
1 2
PB
1 2 1 2
Vacuum

--- Non adjustable value PB = Low point
Regulation between 2 thresholds

The switches for regulation between 2 thresholds (adjustable differential) have both
a high point setting (PH) and a low point setting (PB). Both of these points can be

schematics of XML B
13
11
13
11
PH
14
12
14
12
Adjustable
spread
1 2
PB
1 2 1 2
Vacuum
6
PB = Low point
Detection of 2 thresholds
The dual stage switches, for detection at each threshold, have an adjustable high
point setting for each stage (PH1 and PH2). Both of these points can be
For both stages, the differential between the high point and the low point (PH1 - PB1
and PH2 - PB2) depends upon the natural characteristics of the switch. It is not
adjustable.

schematics of XML D
PH1
13
11
23
21
Fixed
PB1 differ- Adjustable 1
ential differential
14
12
24
22
PH2
Fixed
13
11
23
21
PB2 differ- 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 ential
14
12
24
22
Vacuum
13
11
23
21
--- Non adjustable value PB = Low point 3

14
12
24
22
13
11
23
21
4
14
12
24
22
6/165
vacuum switches 6
Nautilus®
Terminology
Operating range
The difference between the minimum low point (PB) and the maximum high point
(PH) setting values.
Size
Pressure switches and vacuum-pressure switches (vacu-pressure switches)
Maximum value of the operating range.
Vacuum switches
Minimum value of the operating range.
Switching point on rising pressure (PH)

Pressure switches
The upper pressure setting at which the pressure switch will actuate the contacts on
rising pressure.
Vacuum switches
The lower vacuum setting at which the vacuum switch will reset the contacts on
rising pressure.
Switching point on falling pressure (PB)

The pressure at which the switch output changes state on falling pressure.
Switches with fixed differential

The lower point (PB) is not adjustable and is entirely dependent on the high point
setting (PH) and the natural differential of the switch.
Switches with adjustable differential

The adjustable differential enables the independent setting of the lower point (PB).
Differential
The difference between the switching point on rising pressure (PH) and the
switching point on falling pressure (PB).
Spread
6 For dual stage switches, the spread indicates the difference between the 2 switching
points on rising pressure (PH2 and PH1) and, for vacuum switches, the difference
between the 2 switching points on falling pressure (PB2 and PB1).
Accuracy (switches with setting scale)

The tolerance between the point at which
+ the switch actuates its contacts and the
Setting point
value indicated on the setting scale. Where
– very high setting accuracy is required (initial
installation of the product), it is
recommended to use separate measuring
equipment (pressure gauge, etc.).
6/166
vacuum switches 6
Nautilus®
Terminology (continued)
Repeat accuracy (R)
The tolerance between two consecutive
switching operations
R
Drift (F)
The tolerance of the switching point
throughout the entire service life of the
F switch.
Accidental overpressure
bar This is an accidental pressure surge of
300 very short duration (a few milliseconds).
200 If accidental overpressures occur and

their duration is less than 50
100 milliseconds, the pressure damping
device incorporated in the XML switches
0 (sizes 10 bar and greater) will diminish
0 50 100 150 the effect.
ms
Example 1: with destructive pressure

level.
bar
100
50
0
6
0 50 100 150
ms
Example 2: with destructive pressure

level and destructive pressure
oscillations.
Without damping device
With damping device
Maximum permissible pressure per cycle (Ps)

A pressure switch can withstand this pressure, without detrimental effect, on each
cycle throughout its service life.
Its minimum value is at least equal to 1.25 times the switch size.
Maximum permissible accidental pressure

The maximum accidental pressure is at least equal to 2.25 times the switch size.
Destruction pressure
The maximum guaranteed pressure that the switch will withstand before its
destruction, i.e. bursting, rupturing, component failure, etc.
Its value is at least equal to 4.5 times the switch size.
6/167
vacuum switches 6
Nautilus®
Application range of pressure and vacuum switches types XML, XMA and XMX, for control circuits
On standard loads
Continuous duty, frequent switching.
Insulation voltage limit
V
500
240 3
200
150
4
120
100
60
Inductive loads
48
Heating limit (lth)

24
20
1
15
6 2
10
5 I
1 mA 2 mA 3 mA 6 mA 10 mA 1 A 1,5 A 2A 3A 6A 10 A
1 Standard PLC input, type 1 Pressure Application range

2 Standard PLC input, type 2 switches
3 Switching capacity conforming to XML A
IEC 947-5-1, XML B
utilisation category AC-15, DC-13 XML C
B300 240 V 1.5 A XML D
R300 250 V 0.1 A XMX, XMA
4 Switching capacity conforming to XML E
IEC 947-5-1, XML F
utilisation category AC-15, DC-13 XML G
B300 120 V 3A
R300 125 V 0.22 A
PLC: Programmable Logic Controller
On small loads
The use of electromechanical pressure and vacuum switches with programmable
logic controllers is becoming more predominant.
On small loads, the reliability of the switches maintain a failure rate of less than 1 for
100 million operating cycles.
6/168
vacuum switches 6
Nautilus®
Selection of switch size

After establishing the type of switch required for the application (single threshold
detection or regulation between 2 thresholds), the selection of its size will depend
on the following criteria:
v the differential: difference between the high point (PH) and the low point (PB),
v the maximum pressure permissible per cycle,
v repeat accuracy, precision and minimum drift.
Examples of a fixed differential pressure switch selection, for detection of a

single threshold
Main criterion: minimum differential
Example: for a selected high point (PH) of 7 bar
10 bar 20 bar 35 bar
7 6,5
7 6
7
5
0,6 1 1,5
XML A010ppppp XML A020ppppp XML A035ppppp
Differential = 0.5 bar Differential = 1 bar Differential = 2 bar
Select an XML A010ppppp (the lowest size)
Main criterion: tolerance to overpressures

45 bar 80 bar
25
45
20
35
12
12
1
1,5
XML A020ppppp XML A035ppppp

Permissible accidental Permissible accidental
overpressure = 45 bar overpressure = 80 bar
Select an XML A035ppppp (the highest size) 6
Main criterion: repeat accuracy, precision and minimum drift
20 bar 35 bar As a general rule, working
18 at the upper or lower limits
of the operating range
18
should be avoided.
1 1,5
XML A020ppppp XML A035ppppp

Adjustable from 1 to 20 bar Adjustable from 1.5 to 35 bar
Select an XML A035ppppp
Units of pressure conversion table

psi kg/cm2 bar atm mm Hg mm H2O Pa
(Torr)
1 psi = 1 0.07031 0.06895 0.06805 51.71 703.7 6895
1 kg/cm2 = 14.22 1 0.98066 0.96784 735.55 10 000 98 066
1 bar = 14.50 1.0197 1 0.98695 750.06 10 197 105
1 atm = 14.70 1.0333 1.0132 1 760.0 10 333 101 325
1 mm Hg = 0.01934 1.360 x 1.333 x 1.316 x 1 13.59 133.3
(Torr) 10-3 10 -3 10-3
1 mm H2O = 1.421 x 10-4 a 10 -4 a 10-4 0.07361 1 a 9.80
10 -3
1 Pa = 1.45 x 10-4 1.0197 x 10 -5 9.8695 x 7.5 x 10-3 0.10197 1
10-5 10-6
Example: 1 bar = 14.50 psi = 105 Pa
6/169
Operating curves 6
vacuum switches 6
Fixed differential switches, for detection of a

single threshold
Adjustment Rising pressure
range of the Defined by the difference between the

+ minimum and maximum high point (PH)
high point Maxi setting values.
Adjustment range
of high point (PH)
For a high set point (PH), the lower
point (PB) is fixed and cannot be
adjusted.
For a low set point (PB), the higher point
(PH) is fixed and cannot be adjusted.
Mini
– 0
0 Low point (PB) Falling
range pressure
Switching Rising pressure
point on The upper pressure setting at which the

+ pressure or vacuum switch will actuate
rising the contacts on rising pressure.
PH
pressure
(PH) Adjustable throughout the range on
rising pressure.
– 0
0 Falling pressure
point on The pressure at which the switch

+ contact changes state on falling
falling pressure.
PH
pressure
(PB) The lower point (PB) is not adjustable
and is entirely dependent on the high
point setting (PH) and the natural
PB differential of the switch.
6 – 0
0 PB
Falling pressure
Differential Rising pressure

PH - PB = natural differential
+ The difference between the switching
PH point on rising pressure (PH) and the
switching point on falling pressure (PB).
PH – PB
This point is not adjustable and
therefore, the value of the differential is
PB fixed.
It is the natural differential of the switch
(contact differential, friction, etc.).
– 0
0 PB
Falling pressure
Example Rising pressure

bar b Consider a switching point on rising
60 pressure (PH) of 40 bar (set value at
which the contact will change state on
rising pressure).
PH 40 b It can be seen that the switching point
on falling pressure (PB) is 28 bar (fixed
value at which the contact will return to
20 its original state).
Conclusion:
v the differential will be 40 - 28 = 12 bar.
0
03 20 28 40 60 bar
PB
Falling pressure
6/170
Operating curves 6
vacuum switches 6
Adjustable differential switches, for regulation

between 2 thresholds
range of the Defined by the difference between the

+ minimum and maximum high point (PH)
high point Maxi setting values.
Adjustment range
of high point (PH)
1 2
Mini
– 0
Low point (PB) Falling
0
range pressure

rising the contacts on rising pressure.
pressure PH 1 2
(PH) Adjustable throughout the range on
rising pressure.
– 0
0 Falling pressure

+ contact changes state on falling
falling pressure.
pressure PH 1 2
(PB) The adjustable differential enables the
independent setting of the lower point
PB" (PB).
PB'
– 0
0 PB' PB" 6
Falling pressure

Low point < High point
+ PH - PB' = natural differential
PH - PB" = minimum differential
PH 1 2
The difference between the switching
PH – PB" point on rising pressure (PH) and the
PH – PB'
PB" switching point on falling pressure (PB).
PB'
Note: the low point can be set at any value
between PB' and PB".
– 0
0 PB' PB"
Falling pressure
Example Rising pressure

bar b Consider a switching point on rising
30 pressure (PH) of 22 bar (set value at
which the contact will change state on
PH 22 1 2 rising pressure).
20 b It can be seen that the switching
point on falling pressure (PB) can be
between 4 and 19 bar inclusive (set
10 value at which the contact will return to
its original state).
Conclusion:
1 Maximum differential 0 v the maximum differential will be
0 4 10 19 20 30 bar
2 Minimum differential PB' PB" 22 - 4 = 18 bar,
Falling pressure v the minimum differential will be
22 - 19 = 3 bar.
6/171
Operating curves Electromechanical pressure and
(switching points vacuum switches 6
on rising pressure) 6
Dual stage, fixed differential switches, for
detection at each threshold
ranges of the Defined by the difference between the

+ minimum and maximum high point
switching setting values of each stage (PH1 and
points PH1
of high point (PH2)

PH2).
Adjustment range
1 2
and PH2
on rising
pressure
– 0
Adjustment range Rising
0
of high point PH1 pressure
point PH2 The upper pressure setting at which the

on rising contact 2 on rising pressure.
pressure PH2 1 2
Adjustable throughout the range on
rising pressure.
– 0
0 Rising pressure
point PH1 The upper pressure setting at which the

on rising contact 1 on rising pressure.
pressure PH2 1 2
PH1"
PH1'
6 – 0
0 PH1' PH1"
Rising pressure
Spread Rising pressure

PH1 < PH2
+ PH2 - PH1' = maximum spread
PH2 - PH1" = minimum spread
PH2 1 2
The difference between switching
PH2 – PH1" points PH2 and PH1 on rising pressure.
PH2 – PH1'
PH1"
PH1' Note: switching point PH1 can be set at any
value between PH1' and PH1".
– 0
0 PH1' PH1"
Rising pressure
Example: Rising pressure
Determining bar b Consider a 2nd stage switching point

30 on rising pressure (PH2) of 20 bar (set
switching value at which contact 2 will change
points on 1 2 state on rising pressure).
rising PH2 20 b It can be seen that the 1st stage
pressure for switching point (PH1) can be set
between 4.5 and 17 bar on rising
the 2 stages 10 pressure.
Conclusion:
v the maximum spread will be:
0 20 - 4.5 = 15.5 bar,
1 Maximum spread 0 4,5 10 17 20 30 bar
2 Minimum spread PH1' PH1" v the minimum spread will be:
Rising pressure 20 - 17 = 3 bar.
6/172
Operating curves Electromechanical pressure and
(switching points vacuum switches 6
on rising pressure) 6
Dual stage, fixed differential switches, for
detection at each threshold
range of Defined by the difference between the

+ minimum and maximum high point
high point Maxi (PH1 or PH2) setting values for each
(PH1 or PH2) stage.
Adjustment range
of high point
For a high set point (PH1 or PH2), the
lower point (PB1 or PB2) is fixed and
cannot be adjusted.
For a low set point (PB1 or PB2), the
Mini
higher point (PH1 or PH2) is fixed and
– 0 cannot be adjusted.
0 Low point (PB) Falling pressure
range

rising PH the contact, for each stage, on rising
pressure pressure.
(PH1 or PH2)
Adjustable throughout the range on
rising pressure.
– 0
0 Falling pressure

+ contact changes state, for each stage,
falling on falling pressure.
PH
pressure
(PB1 or PB2) The lower point (PB) is not adjustable
and is entirely dependent on the high
point setting (PH) and the natural
PB differential of the switch.
– 0
0 PB
6
Falling pressure

PH - PB = natural differential
+ The difference between the switching
PH
point on rising pressure (PH) and the
switching point on falling pressure (PB),
for each stage.
PH – PB
This point is not adjustable and
PB therefore, the value of the differential is
fixed.
It is the natural differential of the switch
– 0 (contact differential, friction, etc.) for
0 PB each of its 2 stages.
Falling pressure
Example: Rising pressure

bar H For stage 2 (segment GH):
stage 1 = 30
F b Consider a switching point on rising
segment EF pressure (PH2) of 20 bar (set value at
stage 2 = which contact 2 will change state on
PH 20 rising pressure).
segment GH
b It can be seen that the switching point
on falling pressure (PB2) is 14 bar (fixed
10 value at which contact 2 will return to its
G original state).
E Conclusion:
0 for stage 2, the differential will be:
1 Maximum spread 03 10 14 20 30 bar
2 Minimum spread PB 20 - 14 = 6 bar.
Falling pressure Repeat the same procedure for stage 1
(segment EF).
6/173
7/0
Contents 0
7 - Rotary encoders
b General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/4
Osicoder® incremental encoders

b Ø 40 mm encoders, type XCC 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/11
b Ø 58 mm encoders, parameterable versions, type XCC 15 . . . . . . . . . page 7/15

b Ø 90 mm encoder, type XCC 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/17
b Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/35
Osicoder® single turn absolute encoders

Osicoder® multiturn absolute encoders

Osicoder® multiturn absolute encoders on bus

b CANopen
v Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/42

v CANopen Ø 58 mm encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/44
b PROFIBUS-DP
v Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/46

v PROFIBUS-DP Ø 58 mm encoders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/48
b Accessories for CANopen and PROFIBUS-DP encoders . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/50
7/1
Selection guide 7
Opto-electronic rotary encoders 7
Osicoder®
Encoder type Incremental encoders
Applications Counting indication
Diameter of housing Ø 40 mm Ø 58 mm Ø 58 mm parameterable Ø 90 mm

(multi-resolution) (1)
Shaft Solid Ø 6 mm Ø 6 mm and Ø 10 mm Ø 10 mm Ø 12 mm

Through Ø 6 mm Ø 14 mm Ø 14 mm Ø 30 mm
Ø 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm Ø 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm Ø 12, 20 and 25 mm
(with reduction collar) (with reduction collar) (with reduction collar)
Resolution Incremental 100 points 100 points 100 points – 100 points
encoders 256 points – – 256 to 4096 points –
360 points 360 points 360 points 360 to 5760 points 360 points
500 points 500 points 500 points 500 to 8000 points 500 points
1000 points 1000 points 1000 points – 1000 points
1024 points 1024 points 1024 points 1024 to 16 384 points 1024 points
2500 points – 2500 points – 2500 points
3600 points – – – 3600 points
4096 points – – – –
5000 points – 5000 points 5000 to 80 000 points 5000 points
10 000 points – – – 10000 points
Absolute 4096 points/8192 turns – – – –
encoders (12-bit/13-bit)
8192 points – – – –
8192 points/4096 turns – – – –
(13-bit/12-bit)
Output stage/ Incremental Type R (N) 5 V, RS 422, – – 5 V, RS 422,

supply (2) encoders 4.5…5.5 V 4.5…5.5 V
Type K (N) Push-pull, 11…30 V – – Push-pull, 11…30 V
Type X – 5 V, RS 422, 5 V, RS 422, –
7 Type Y –
4.75…30 V
Push-pull, 5…30 V
4.75…30 V
Push-pull, 5…30 V –
Absolute Type KB (N) or KG (N) – – – –
encoders
Type SB (N) or SG (N) – – – –
Type C – – – –
Type F – – – –
Connection Pre-cabled, radial p – – –

Connector, radial, M23 – p p p
Terminal block, radial – – – –
Type reference XCC 14ppppp XCC 15ppppp XCC 15ppppMppp XCC 19ppppp
Page(s) 7/11 7/13 to 7/15 7/17

(3) Parameterable version: multiplication of the basic resolution of the disc using dip switches, the factory setting being that of the lowest value.
7/2
7
Single turn absolute encoders Multiturn absolute encoders Accessories for

encoders
Absolute position indication within a revolution Absolute position indication within a revolution Fieldbus:
and indication of the number of revolutions PROFIBUS-DP, CANopen
Ø 58 mm Ø 90 mm Ø 58 mm Ø 90 mm Ø 58 mm - Shaft couplings with

spring,
- anti-rotation devices,
- reduction collars,
Ø 6 mm and Ø 10 mm Ø 12 mm Ø 6 mm and Ø 10 mm Ø 12 mm Ø 10 mm
- pre-wired connectors,
Ø 14 mm Ø 30 mm Ø 14 mm Ø 30 mm Ø 15 mm (hollow shaft) - etc.
Ø 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm Ø 12, 20 and 25 mm Ø 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm Ø 16, 20 and 25 mm Ø 6, 8, 10, 12 and 14 mm
(with reduction collar) (with reduction collar) (with reduction collar) (with reduction collar) (with reduction collar)
– – – – –
– – – – –
– – – – –
– – – – –
– – – – –
– – – – –
– – – – –
– – – – –
– – – – –
– – – – –
– – – – –
– – 4096 points/8192 turns – –
8192 points 8192 points – – –

– – 8192 points/4096 turns 8192 points/4096 turns 8192 points/4096 turns
– – – – –
– – – – –
– – – – –
– – – – –
7
Push-pull, 11…30 V, Push-pull, 11…30 V, – – –
binary or Gray binary or Gray
SSI, 11…30 V, binary or SSI, 11…30 V, binary or SSI, 25-bit, 11…30 V, SSI, 25-bit, 11…30 V, –
Gray Gray binary or Gray binary or Gray
– – – – 11…30 V, CANopen
– – – – 11…30 V, PROFIBUS-DP
– – – – –
p p p p p
– – – – p
XCC 25ppppp XCC 29ppppp XCC 35ppppp XCC 39ppppp XCC 35pppppFB XCC R, XCC P, XZC
XCC 35pppppCB
7/21 7/23 7/27 7/29 7/44 and 7/48 7/35 and 7/50
(4) Characteristics of the output stage/supply types:
- type R (N): 5 V output driver, RS 422, 4.5…5.5 V.
- type K (N): push-pull output driver, 11…30 V.
- type X: 5 V output driver, RS 422, 4.75…30 V.
- type Y: push-pull output driver, 5…30 V.
- KB (N) or KG (N) output: push-pull output driver, 11…30 V, binary code KB (N) or Gray code KG (N).
- type SB (N) or SG (N): SSI output without parity, 13 or 25-bit clock, 11…30 V, binary code SB (N) or Gray code SG (N).
- type KB (N) or KG (N): push-pull output driver, 11…30 V, binary code KB (N) or Gray code KG (N) with multiturn connecting cable.
- type C: Binary CANopen serial link.
- type F: Binary PROFIBUS serial link, RS 485.
7/3
General 7
Osicoder®
Applications The increase in the power of processing systems, coupled with the requirements for
high productivity, has created the need for continuous information in all areas of
production regarding:
b counting, positioning by counting,
b absolute positioning,
b speed control.
Example
Programmable controller The positioning of a moving part is fully controlled by the processing system via the
encoder.
b Processing units
Variable please refer to our “Premium automation platform” catalogue.
speed drive
b Variable speed drives
please refer to our “Variable speed drives and starters” catalogue.
Terminal
Encoder Motor
Principle of the opto-electronic The opto-electronic rotary encoder is an angular position sensor.
rotary encoder
Mechanically coupled to a driving spindle of a machine, the shaft of the encoder
rotates a disc that comprises a succession of opaque and transparent sectors.
Light from light emitting diodes (LEDs) passes through the transparent sectors of the
disc as they appear and is detected by photosensitive diodes.
The photosensitive diodes, in turn, generate an electrical signal which is amplified

and converted into a digital signal before being transmitted to a processing system
or an electronic variable speed drive.
The electrical output of the encoder therefore represents, in digital form, the angular
position of the input shaft.
7 Types of opto-electronic
rotary encoder
b Incremental encoders:
Counting, positioning by counting, speed.
b Parameterable incremental encoders:
Multiplication of the basic resolution of the disc using dip switches (the factory
setting being that of the lowest value).
b Single turn and multiturn absolute encoders:
Absolute positioning.
b Fieldbus multiturn absolute encoders:
CANopen and PROFIBUS-DP.
7/4
Incremental encoder Principle

Outside track Inside track The disc of an incremental encoder comprises 2 types of track:
b one or several outside tracks (channels A and B), comprising “n” equal angular
steps that are alternately opaque and transparent, with “n” being the resolution or
number of periods of the encoder,
b an inside track comprising a single window, which serves as the reference point
and enables reinitialisation at each revolution (top 0).
Schemes and settings

The operation of the photosensitive elements (LEDs + photosensitive diodes)
is based on the real-time differential optical reading principle:
1/4 period b the photosensitive elements of tracks A and B are offset so that each will
simultaneously read only its respective slot (channels A and B are 90° electrically offset),
Channel A b the electronics operate following the principle of real-time differential
measurement.
1/2 period
Channel B (rising edge) arriving before A in the clockwise direction viewed from base
Channel B side.
360° period
Period: 360° electrical.
Cyclic ratio: 180° electrical ± 10%.
Top 0
Phase displacement: 90° electrical ± 25%.
Advantages of real-time differential optical reading

Reading by offset photosensitive elements
b Radial play of encoder shaft greater than 30%, which is higher than traditional
optical reading encoders.
b Maintains a phase displacement of channels A and B within the tolerance limits of
the unit.
Triple light source emission

b Maintains cyclic ratio, even in the event of:
- failure of one of the 3 light sources,
- diminishing efficiency of the light sources (up to 30%),
- fine dust deposit on the optical components, reducing signal strength of the
photosensitive elements (up to 30%).
These advantages are the reliability factors of the XCC encoders.

7
Absolute encoder Principle
Track B1 The disc of an absolute encoder comprises “n” concentric tracks, equally divided into
alternate opaque and transparent segments, and each track has its own transmitter
Track B2 and receiver.
Track B3
The inside track is half opaque and half transparent. Reading of this MSB (Most
Significant Bit) track determines in which half-turn the encoder is situated.
Track B4
The next track is divided into 4 quarters, alternately opaque and transparent. The
reading of this track, in conjunction with the previous track, determines in which
quarter-turn the encoder is situated.
Binary disc
The following tracks enable successive determination of which eighth-turn,
sixteenth-turn, etc. the encoder is situated.
Track G1
The outside track corresponds to the LSB (Least Significant Bit) and provides the
Track G2
final accuracy. It has 2 to the power “n” points corresponding to the resolution of the
encoder. Therefore, for each angular position of the shaft, the disc provides a code.
Track G3 This code can either be binary or Gray.
Following one complete revolution of the encoder, the same coded values are
Track G4 repeated.
Gray disc
The multiturn absolute encoder, in addition to providing the digital position within the
revolution, also provides the total number of revolutions.
7/5
Absolute encoder (continued) Binary coding

The binary code is directly usable by processing systems (programmable controllers
for example) in order to execute calculations or comparisons, but has the
disadvantage of having several bits which change state between 2 positions.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B1
B2
B3
B4
Gray coding
The Gray code offers the advantage of only changing one bit between 2 consecutive
numbers.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
G1
G2
G3
G4
Example of Gray code disc

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
0
2 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
22 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
24 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
28 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
216 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Representation of the first 24 decimal values corresponding to the reading of the first
5 tracks.
Advantages of position detection by an absolute encoder

An absolute encoder continuously provides a code that is an image of the actual
position of the moving object being monitored.
7 On power-up, or restart following a supply failure, the encoder provides data that is
directly exploitable by the processing system.
7/6
Selection of encoder type 7
Characteristics required to define an encoder
7 characteristics to be established 1 Function

b Incremental encoder
Provides counting indication.
b Single turn absolute encoder

Provides absolute position within each revolution.
b Multiturn absolute encoder

Provides absolute position within each revolution and indicates total number of
revolutions.
2 Diameter of housing
b Incremental encoders
Ø 40, 58 and 90
b Single turn and multiturn absolute encoders

Ø 58 and 90
3 Diameter of shaft
b Ø 6 mm to 30 mm, depending on model.
b Reduction collars
For Ø 58 and 90 mm encoders, with Ø 14, 15 and 30 mm through shaft, reduction
collars are available to reduce the diameters:
- from 14 to 6, 8, 10 and 12
- from 15 to 6, 8, 10, 12 and 14
- from 30 to 12, 16, 20 and 25.
4 Type of shaft
b Solid shaft
The shaft of the encoder is mechanically linked to a drive shaft using a flexible
coupling, which eliminates alignment inaccuracies.
b Through shaft/Hollow shaft

The encoder is mounted directly on the drive shaft. A flexible mounting kit
prevents encoder rotation and compensates for alignment inaccuracies.
5 Connection method
b Pre-cabled with 2 m long shielded cable or M23/M12 connector.
b Radial type connection.
6 Resolution
b Number of points per revolution.
b Number of revolutions (for multiturn absolute encoders).
b On Ø 58 parameterable incremental encoders, this resolution can be adjusted
7
using dip switches (multiplication factor up to 16 times on 9 basic resolutions).
7 Type of output
b Incremental encoders
500 mm 5 V output driver, RS 422, 4.75…30 V.
// output Push-pull output driver, 5…30 V, 11...30 V.
SSI output Deserialisation
connecting cable b Single turn absolute encoders (depending on model)
Push-pull output driver, 11…30 V, binary code or Gray code.
SSI output without parity, 13-bit clock, 11…30 V, binary code or Gray code.
b Multiturn absolute encoders (depending on model)

Encoder XCC 35 or 39 SSI output without parity, 25-bit clock, 11…30 V, binary code or Gray code.
// output
Connector kit
x metres b Parallel outputs available using converter connecting cables
500 mm
The SSI versions can be converted to a parallel version by using the
SSI output deserialisation connecting cable (see pages 7/33 and 7/36).
Cable Deserialisation b Multiturn absolute encoders, communicating version, fieldbus:

8 conductors connecting cable v CANopen: 11...30 V (see page 7/42).
v PROFIBUS-DP: 11...30 V (see page 7/46).
Encoder XCC 35 or 39
7/7
Precautions 7
Installation
Installation precautions Type of cables

In an environment subject to considerable electrical interference, it is recommended
that cables with several twisted pairs, reinforced by general shielding, be used.
For the signals, it is recommended that standard 0.14 mm2/0.22 mm2 conductors be
used.
For 5 V supply encoders.

Due to line voltage drops, it is recommended that the 0 V and + V cables have the
following minimum cross-sectional areas:
b 0.14 mm2 if the encoder-supply distance is less than 30 m,
b 0.22 mm2 if the encoder-supply distance is greater than 30 m.
Cabling
Separate, by as much as possible, the connecting cables to encoders and power
cables. Also, avoid parallel cable runs. Maintain a distance of at least 20 cm and, in
the event of cables crossing, ensure that the crossovers are at right-angles.
When using cables with twisted pairs (shielded or non shielded) group signal cables
in common pairs.
In environments subject to electrical interference, it is recommended to earth the

encoder base using one of the fixing screws.
Connect the control inputs to a potential (absolute encoder).

Connect all 0 V connections back to a star point, i.e. only one and same referential.
Earth the shielding throughout 360° using tap-off braids. This is to be done at both
ends of each cable. To earth the shielding use at least 4 mm2 cable.
As much as possible, earth the 0 V of the supply to the encoders on the supply side.
Maximum frequency of signals for SSI depending on distance:
Indicative values that can vary depending on the cable characteristics
Distance (m) Frequency (kHz)
50 400
100 300
200 200
400 100
Supply
It is imperative that regulated and smoothed power supplies, with a ripple factor on
24 V of 500 mV and on 5 V of 200 mV, are used that are specifically for the encoder.
Telemecanique ABL7 range power supplies are available. Please refer to our “Power
supplies, splitter boxes and interfaces” catalogue.
7 For 5…30 V encoders, the supply via a transformer with a 24 V rms rectified and
smoothed secondary is prohibited, since the d.c. voltage obtained is higher than the
supply voltage limits of the encoder.
Prior to powering-up for the first time, ensure that the rated supply voltage of the
encoder is suitable for the supply.
7/8
Precautions 7
Connection and powering-up
Connection and powering-up Connection

precautions
The plugging-in or unplugging of a connector version encoder must only be done
whilst the supply is disconnected.
Encoder supplied by central unit:

b disconnect supply to central unit,
b proceed with connection or disconnection,
b re-establish supply to central unit.
Encoder supplied by source external to central unit:
b disconnect supply to central unit, then disconnect supply to encoder,
b proceed with connection or disconnection,
b re-establish supply to encoder, then re-establish supply to central unit.
Powering-up
For synchronisation reasons, the powering-up or switching-off of the encoder must
coincide with that of its associated electronics.
7/9
Characteristics, Incremental encoders 7
schemes 7
Osicoder®
Ø 40 mm encoders
Environment
Encoder type XCC 1406Ppppp XCC 1406Tpppp
Conformity e
Temperature Operation (housing) °C - 20…+ 80
Storage °C - 30…+ 85
Resistance to electromagnetic Electrostatic discharges Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2: level 3, 8 kV air; 4 kV contact
interference Radiated electromagnetic fields Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3: level 3, 10 V/m
(electromagnetic waves)
Fast transients (Start/Stop Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4: level 3, 2 kV (1 kV for inputs/outputs)
interference)
Surge withstand Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5: level 2, 1 kV
Materials Base Aluminium or Zamak
Housing Aluminium or Zamak
Shaft Stainless steel or Aluminium
Ball bearings 688AZZ1
Shaft type mm Ø 6, solid shaft (g7) Ø 6, through shaft (H7)
Maximum rotational speed Continuous 9000 rpm
Shaft moment of inertia g.cm2 10 5
Torque N.cm 0.2 0.25
Maximum load Radial daN 2
Axial daN 1
Connection Radial: pre-cabled, 8 x 0.14 mm 2 shielded, pre-cabled, 8 x 0.14 mm2 shielded,
Ø ext = 6 mm, length = 2 m Ø ext = 6 mm, length = 2 m
Crimped metal cable entry Crimped metal cable entry
Frequency kHz 100
Number of channels 3 channels: A, B, top 0 and complements A, B, 0
Encoders with type R output stage: 5 V output driver, RS 422, 4.5…5.5 V supply
Supply voltage c 5 V ± 10%
Max. ripple: 200 mV
Current consumption, no-load mA 100 max.
Output current mA 40 max.
Output levels Low level (Is = 20 mA) 0.5 V max.
High level (Is = 20 mA) 2.5 V min.
Encoders with type K output stage: push-pull output driver, 11…30 V supply
7 Supply voltage c 11 V…30 V

Max. ripple: 500 mV
Protection Against short-circuits and reverse polarity
High level (Is = 20 mA) V supply - 3 V min.
Schemes
Type R output stage Type K output stage
Encoder Processing Encoder Processing

5 V supply 11 V/30 V supply
AB0 AB0
RS422 Is Push-Pull Is
100
max. max.
AB0 AB0
0V 0V 0V 0V
References: Dimensions: Connections:

7/10
References 7
Incremental encoders 7
Osicoder®
Ø 40 mm encoders
Solid shaft, Ø 6 mm
105160
Resolution Connection Output stage Supply Reference Weight

method type (1) voltage kg
100 points Pre-cabled 5 V, RS 422 4.5…5.5 V XCC 1406PR01R 0.355
radial
L=2m Push-pull 11…30 V XCC 1406PR01K 0.355

radial
XCC 1406PRppp
radial

radial

radial
Through shaft, Ø 6 mm (2)

105161
method type (1) voltage kg

100 points Pre-cabled 5 V, RS 422 4.5…5.5 V XCC 1406TR01R 0.405
radial
L=2m Push-pull 11…30 V XCC 1406TR01K 0.405

radial
XCC 1406TRppp 500 points Pre-cabled 5 V, RS 422 4.5…5.5 V XCC 1406TR05R 0.405
radial

radial

radial
(1) For characteristics of the output stage type (indicated by last letter of the reference), see page
7/10.
(2) Anti-rotation device included with encoder.
7
Characteristics: Dimensions: Connections:

7/11
schemes 7
Osicoder®
Ø 58 mm encoders
Environment
Encoder type XCC 1506Ppppp XCC 1510Ppppp XCC 1514Tpppp
Conformity e
Temperature Operation (housing) °C - 30…+ 100 (except XCC TSMppX and XCC TSMppY: - 30…+70)
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 65 IP 65 (IP 67 with collar IP 65
option XCC RB3)
Resistance to electromagnetic Electrostatic discharges Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2: level 3, 8 kV air, 4 kV contact
interference)
Materials Base Aluminium
Housing Zamak
Shaft Stainless steel
Ball bearings 6000ZZ1 6803ZZ
Shaft type Ø 6, solid shaft (g7) Ø 10 mm, solid shaft Ø 14, through shaft (H7)
Maximum rotational speed Continuous 9000 rpm 9000 rpm 6000 rpm
Shaft moment of inertia g.cm2 10 10 22
Torque N.cm 0.4 0.4 0.6
Maximum load Radial daN 10 10 5
Axial daN 5 5 2
Connection Connector M23, 12-pin male connector
Frequency kHz 300
Encoders with type X output stage: 5 V output driver, RS 422, 4.75…30 V supply
Supply voltage c 4.75…30 V
Max. ripple: 500 mV
High level (Is = 20 mA) 4.5 V min.
Encoders with type Y output stage: push-pull output driver, 5…30 V supply
7 Supply voltage c 5…30 V
Max. ripple: 500 mV
(for U supply = 30 V)
High level (Is = 20 mA) V supply - 2.5 V min.
Schemes
Type X output stage Type Y output stage

4.75 V/30 V supply 5 V/30 V supply
+5V
5 V supply
AB0 AB0
Is (1) Is
RS422 100 Push-Pull
max. max.
AB0 AB0
0V 0V 0V 0V
(1) RS 422 at 5 V.

pages 7/13 to 7/15 page 7/18 page 7/19
7/12
References 7
Osicoder®
Ø 58 mm encoders
method (1) type (2) voltage kg
100 points Connector 5 V, RS 422 4.75…30 V XCC 1506PS01X 0.495
105163
radial
M23 male Push-pull 5…30 V XCC 1506PS01Y 0.495

radial
XCC 1506PSppp
radial

radial

radial

radial

radial
100 points Connector 5 V, RS422 4.75…30 V XCC 1510PS01X 0.465
105164
radial

radial
XCC 1510PSppp
radial
1000 points Connector

radial
5 V, RS 422 4.75…30 V XCC 1510PS10X 0.465 7

radial

radial

radial
(1) For female connector use XZC C23FDP120S, see page 7/36.
7/12.

7/13
Osicoder®
Ø 58 mm encoders

100 points Connector 5 V, RS 422 4.75…30 V XCC 1514TS01X 0.435
105166
radial
M23 male Push-pull 5…30 V XCC 1514TS01Y 0.435

radial

XCC 1514TSppp radial

radial

radial

radial

radial
Through shaft, Ø 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm (1)

Encoder type Diameter Reduction collar to be
ordered
mm (see page 7/37)
566465
Encoders with through shaft Ø6 XCC R158RDA06

XCC 1514TSppp
Ø8 XCC R158RDA08
Ø 10 XCC R158RDA10
Ø 12 XCC R158RDA12

XCC R158RDA
7 7/12.

7/14
Osicoder®
Ø 58 mm encoders
Parameterable versions (1)
Parameterable with solid shaft, Ø 10 mm

256…4096 Connector 5 V, RS 422 4.75…30 V XCC 1510PSM02X 0.465
105184
points radial
M23 male Push-pull 5…30 V XCC 1510PSM02Y 0.465

points radial

points radial
XCC 1510PSM02X
1024…16 384 Connector 5 V, RS 422 4.75…30 V XCC 1510PSM11X 0.465
points radial
5000…80 000 Connector 5 V, RS 422 4.75…30 V XCC 1510PSM50X 0.465

points radial
Parameterable with through shaft, Ø 14 mm (4)

256…4096 Connector 5 V, RS 422 4.75…30 V XCC 1514TSM02X 0.435
points radial
M23 male Push-pull 5…30 V XCC 1514TSM02Y 0.435

points radial

points radial
1024…16 384 Connector 5 V, RS 422 4.75…30 V XCC 1514TSM11X 0.435

points radial
5000…80 000 Connector 5 V, RS 422 4.75…30 V XCC 1514TSM50X 0.435

points radial
Parameterable with through shaft, Ø 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm (4)

7
Encoder type Diameter Reduction collar to be ordered
mm (see page 7/37)
566465

XCC 1514TSMppp
Ø8 XCC R158RDA08
Ø 10 XCC R158RDA10
Ø 12 XCC R158RDA12
(1) Parameter configuration: refer to table indicating position of dip switches on page 7/19.
XCC R158RDA
7/12.

7/15
schemes 7
Osicoder®
Ø 90 mm encoders
Environment
Encoder type XCC 1912Ppppp XCC 1930Tpppp
Conformity e
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 68-2-6 10 gn (f = 10…1 kHz)
interference)
Housing Zamak
Ball bearings 6001ZZ 6807
Shaft type Ø 12, solid shaft (g6) Ø 30, through shaft (H7)
Maximum rotational speed Continuous 6000 rpm 3600 rpm
Torque N.cm 1 2.5
Maximum load Radial daN 20 8
Axial daN 10 5
Connection Connector M23, 12-pin male connector
Frequency kHz 100
Encoders with type R (N) output stage: 5 V output driver, RS 422, 4.5…5.5 V supply
Supply voltage c 5 V ± 10%
Max. ripple: 200 mV
High level (Is = 20 mA) V supply - 2.5 V min.
Encoders with type K (N) output stage: push-pull output driver, 11…30 V supply
Supply voltage c 11 V…30 V
Max. ripple: 500 mV
7 Current consumption, no-load
Protection
mA 75 max.
Against short-circuits and reverse polarity
High level (Is = 20 mA) V supply -3 V min.
Schemes
Type R (N) output stage Type K (N) output stage

5 V supply 11 V/30 V supply
AB0 AB0
RS422 Is 100 Push-Pull Is
max. max.
AB0 AB0
0V 0V 0V 0V

7/16
References 7
Osicoder®
Ø 90 mm encoders
100 points Connector, radial 5 V, RS 422 4.5…5.5 V XCC 1912PS01RN 1.360
105168
M23 male Push-pull 11…30 V XCC 1912PS01KN 1.360



M23 male
XCC 1912PSpppN Push-pull 11…30 V XCC 1912PS10KN 1.360




10 000 points Connector, radial 5 V, RS 422 4.5…5.5 V XCC 1912PS00RN 1.360


105171

100 points Connector, radial 5 V, RS 422 4.5…5.5 V XCC 1930TS01RN 0.960
M23 male Push-pull 11…30 V XCC 1930TS01KN 0.960


XCC 1930TSpppN

1024 points Connector, radial 5 V, RS 422

M23 male Push-pull
4.5…5.5 V
11…30 V
XCC 1930TS11RN
XCC 1930TS11KN
0.960
0.960 7


10 000 points Connector, radial 5 V, RS 422 4.5…5.5 V XCC 1930TS00RN 0.960

523200
Through shaft, Ø 12, 20 and 25 mm (3)

mm (see page 7/37)
Encoders with through shaft Ø 12 XCC R290RDP12
XCC 1930TSppppN Ø 20 XCC R290RDP20
Ø 25 XCC R290RDP25
(2) For characteristics of the output stage type (indicated by last letters of the reference), see
XCC R290RDPppN page 7/16.

7/17
Dimensions 7
Ø 40 mm, Ø 58 mm and Ø 90 mm encoders
Ø 40 mm encoders
XCC 1406PRpppN XCC 1406TRpppN
(3) (4)
5
3 3
(2) Ø20 (1)
10
(1) Ø3,2
Ø46
27
Ø8
10
Ø40
Ø40
40˚
22
Ø6g7
4
9
(2)
5,5 8 1,5 Ø52 25 4 (3) 3H8
35
(1) 3 holes M3 x 0.45 at 120° on 28 PCD, depth: 6 mm. (1) 2 M4 holes at 120° for cross-headed screws on 30 PCD, depth: 6 mm.
(2) 3 holes M3 x 0.45 at 120° on 24 PCD, depth: 6 mm. (2) Through shaft, Ø 6 (H7).
(3) Ø 6 cable, length 2 m, minimum bend radius: 30 mm. (3) 2 M2 x 3 flat cross-headed locking screws.
(4) Ø 6 cable, length 2 m, minimum bend radius: 30 mm.
Ø 58 mm encoders
XCC 1506PSppX, XCC 1506PSppY XCC 1510PSppX, 1510PSppY / XCC 1510PSMppX, 1510PSMppY
M23 Ø25 M23 Ø25
Nitrile seal Nitrile seal
(2)
2
-0,010
Ø10 -0,025
(1)
54
54
10,5 19
5,5
9,5
Ø58,5
Ø58
Ø6g7
10
15
(2) (3)
(1) 36,5 10 36,5 10
(1) 3 holes M3 x 4 at 120° on 42 PCD, depth: 10 mm. (1) 3 M4 holes at 120° on 48 PCD, depth: 8 mm.
(2) Collar XCC RB1 mounted. (2) 3 M3 holes at 120° on 48 PCD, depth: 8 mm.
(3) Blanking plug, for encoders XCC 1510PSMppX and 1510PSMppY only.
XCC 1514TSppX, 1514TSppY / XCC 1514TSMppX, 1514TSMppY
M23 Ø25
Nitrile seal
36˚
Ø81
18˚ Ø64
(1) Ø24
52
(1) Through shaft, Ø 14 (H7).

Ø58,5
(2) Flexible mounting kit, 1 x XCC RF5N

(3) mounted.
7 Ø48 (4)
(3) 2 HC M4 x 4 locking screws.
(4) Hole for M3 x 6 self-threading screw.
(5) (5) Blanking plug, for encoders
40 (2) Ø3,2 (5) XCC 1514TSMppX and 1514TSM ppY
Ø88 45 only.
Ø 90 mm encoders
XCC 1912PSpppN XCC 1930TSpppN
Ø110
5 5 5 7
30˚ (4)
71,5
14
72
14
Ø12g6
Ø5,5
4
Ø80h7
Ø90
Ø58
(2)
Ø90
25 (3)
30
(1)
(1) 10
9,5 78 51
Ø100
72
(1) 6 holes M6 x 1 at 120° on 60 PCD, depth: 12 mm max. (1) Through shaft, Ø 30 (H7).
(2) Anti-rotation device, 1 x XCC RF9N, mounted.
(3) 4 M5 x 6 on 78 PCD.
(4) 1 CHC M5 x 12 stainless steel A2 locking screw.
Characteristics: References: Connections:

pages 7/10, 7/12 and 7/16 pages 7/11, 7/13 to 7/15, 7/17 page 7/19
7/18
Connections 7
Ø 40 mm, Ø 58 mm and Ø 90 mm encoders
Pre-cabled version encoders

8 x 0.14 mm2 shielded cable connections for Ø 40 encoders
Wire colour BN RD VT BU YE OG GN BK
Signal A +V 0 0 B B A 0V
Supply
BN = Brown
RD = Red
VT = Violet
BU = Blue
YE = Yellow
OG = Orange
GN = Green
BK = Black
Note: in environments subject to electrical interference, it is recommended to earth the encoder base
using one of the fixing screws.
Connector version encoders

M23, 12-pin connector connections
Male connector on encoder (pin view)
Pin number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
9 Signal A +V 0 0 B B R A R 0V 0V +V
1 8 Supply
2 7
10 12
3 11 6
4 5
Note: in environments subject to electrical interference, it is recommended to earth the encoder base
using one of the fixing screws.
R = reserved, do not connect.
Resolutions
Resolutions for parameterable Ø 58 mm encoders XCC 1510PSMppp and XCC 1514TSMppp
Simple multiplication of the basic resolution of the disc using dip switches (1)
(Plastic Ø 2.5 screwdriver recommended).
The factory setting is for factor X1.
on
Interpolation Basic resolution Position of dip switches

factor
Counting Speed 256 360 500 1024 5000 1 2 3 4
x1 x1 256 360 500 1024 5000
x2 x2 512 720 1000 2048 10 000

7
1 2 3 4
x3 x3 768 1080 1500 3072 15 000
x4 x4 1024 1440 2000 4096 20 000
x5 – 1280 1800 2500 5120 25 000
x8 – 2048 2880 4000 8192 40 000
x 10 – 2560 3600 5000 10 240 50 000
x 12 – 3072 4320 6000 12 288 60 000
x 16 – 4096 5760 8000 16 384 80 000
(1) Setting the switches to other configurations will result in the encoder providing an unpredictable
resolution.
Characteristics: References: Dimensions:

pages 7/10, 7/12 and 7/16 pages 7/11, 7/13 to 7/15, 7/17 page 7/18
7/19
Characteristics, Single turn absolute encoders 7
schemes 7
Osicoder®
Ø 58 mm encoders
Environment
Encoder type XCC 2506Pppppp XCC 2510Pppppp XCC 2514Tppppp
Conformity e
option XCC RB3)
interference)
Housing Zamak
Maximum rotational speed Continuous 9000 rpm 9000 rpm 6000 rpm
Shaft moment of inertia g.cm2 10 10 22
Torque N.cm 0.4 0.4 0.6
Maximum load Radial daN 10 10 5
Axial daN 5 5 2
Connection Connector Encoders with parallel output stage types KG (N), KB:
M23, 16-pin male connector.
Encoders with SSI output stage types SB (N), SG (N):
Frequency kHz Encoders with parallel output stage types KG (N), KB:
100 kHz on LSB (Least Significant Bit)
Encoders with SSI output stage types SB (N), SG (N): 100 kHz to 1 MHz clock
Encoders with type KB and KG (N) output stage: push-pull output driver, 11…30 V supply, Gray code
Supply voltage c 11…30 V
Max. ripple: 500 mV
7 High level (Is = 20 mA) V supply - 2.5 V min.
Schemes
Type KB and KG (N) output stage KB and KG (N) DIRECTION input
11…30 V < 1 ms < 1 ms
V supply
DIRECTION input
Output 0V
DIRECTION
of counting Anticlockwise Clockwise Anticlockwise

7/20
schemes (continued), Osicoder®

Ø 58 mm encoders
references 7
Electrical characteristics (continued)

Encoders with type SB (N) or SG (N) output stage: SSI output without parity, 13-bit clock, 11…30 V supply, binary code (SB) or Gray code (SG)
Supply voltage c 11…30 V. Max. ripple: 500 mV
Output level Idata = 20 mA |VOD| > 2 V
Schemes
RS 422 data output Isolated clock input DIRECTION input
< 1 ms < 1 ms
DATA + Iclk
CLK + V supply
2,2 nF DIRECTION input
0V
1 nF
VOD VID
DIRECTION
1 nF of counting Clockwise Anticlockwise Clockwise
2,2 nF
DATA – CLK -
Idata = 20 mA |VOD| > 2 V |VID| max.: 5 V

|Iclk| max.: 15 mA
References
105173
8192 points Connector Push-pull, 11…30 V XCC 2506PS81KB 0.495

radial binary
M23 male Push-pull, 11…30 V XCC 2506PS81KGN 0.495
Gray
SSI, 13-bit, 11…30 V XCC 2506PS81SBN 0.490
binary
SSI, 13-bit, 11…30 V XCC 2506PS81SGN 0.490
XCC 2506PS81ppp Gray
8192 points Connector Push-pull, 11…30 V XCC 2510PS81KB 0.465
radial binary
M23 male Push-pull, 11…30 V XCC 2510PS81KGN 0.465
Gray
binary
Gray
8192 points Connector Push-pull, 11…30 V XCC 2514TS81KB 0.435
radial binary
M23 male Push-pull, 11…30 V XCC 2514TS81KG 0.435
Gray
SSI, 13-bit, 11…30 V XCC 2514TS81SB 0.430
7
binary
SSI, 13-bit, 11…30 V XCC 2514TS81SG 0.430
Gray
mm (see page 7/37)
566465

XCC 2514TS81pp
Ø8 XCC R158RDA08
Ø 10 XCC R158RDA10
Ø 12 XCC R158RDA12
(1) For female connector use:

- XZC C23FDP120S for encoders type SBN and SGN
XCC R158RDA
- XZC C23FDP160S for encoders type KB and KGN, see page 7/36.
pages 7/20 and 7/21.

7/21
schemes 7
Osicoder®
Ø 90 mm encoders
Environment
Encoder type XCC 2912Pppppp XCC 2930Tppppp
Conformity e
interference
Radiated electromagnetic fields Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3: level 3, 10 V/m
interference)
Housing Zamak
Ball bearings 6001ZZ 6807
Torque N.cm 1 2.5
Axial daN 10 5
Connection Connector Encoders with parallel output stage types KB (N), KG (N):
Encoders with SSI output stage types SB (N), SG (N):
Frequency Encoders with parallel output stage types KB (N), KG (N):
100 kHz on LSB (Least Significant Bit)
Encoders with SSI output stage types SB (N), SG (N): 100 kHz to 1 MHz clock
Encoders with type KBN or KGN output stage: push-pull output driver, 11…30 V supply, binary code (KBN) or Gray code (KGN)
High level (Is = 20 mA) V supply -3 V min.
7
Schemes
Type KB (N) and KG (N) output stage KB (N) and KG (N) DIRECTION input
11…30 V < 1 ms < 1 ms
V supply
DIRECTION input
Output 0V
DIRECTION
of counting Anticlockwise Clockwise Anticlockwise

7/22
schemes (continued), Osicoder®

Ø 90 mm encoders
references 7
Electrical characteristics (continued)

Encoders with type SBN or SGN output stage: SSI output without parity, 13-bit clock, 11…30 V supply, binary code (SBN) or Gray code (SGN)
Max. ripple: 500 mV
Schemes
RS 422 data output Isolated clock input DIRECTION input
< 1 ms < 1 ms
DATA + Iclk
CLK + V supply
2,2 nF DIRECTION input
0V
1 nF
VOD VID
DIRECTION
1 nF of counting Clockwise Anticlockwise Clockwise
2,2 nF
DATA – CLK -

|Iclk| max.: 15 mA
References
105168
8192 points Connector Push-pull, 11…30 V XCC 2912PS81KBN 1.365

radial binary
M23 male
Push-pull, 11…30 V XCC 2912PS81KGN 1.365
Gray

binary

XCC 2912PSpppp
Gray

8192 points Connector Push-pull, 11…30 V XCC 2930TS81KBN 0.975
105171
radial binary
M23 male
Push-pull, 11…30 V XCC 2930TS81KGN 0.975
Gray 7
SSI, 13-bit, 11…30 V XCC 2930TS81SBN 0.980
binary
SSI, 13-bit, 11…30 V XCC 2930TS81SGN 0.980

Gray
XCC 2930TSpppp
mm (see page 7/37)
523200

XCC 2930TS81ppp
Ø 20 XCC R290RDP20
Ø 25 XCC R290RDP25
(1) For female connectors use:

- XZC C23FDP120S for encoders type SBN and SGN
- XZC C23FDP160S for encoders type KBN and KGN, see page 7/36.
XCC R290RDPpp pages 7/22 and 7/23.

7/23
Dimensions 7
Single turn absolute encoders 7
Ø 58 mm and Ø 90 mm encoders
Ø 58 mm encoders
XCC 2506PS81KB, XCC 2506PS81KGN, XCC 2506PS81SBN, XCC 2510PS81KB, XCC 2510PS81KGN, XCC 2510PS81SBN,
XCC 2506PS81SGN XCC 2510PS81SGN
M23 Ø25 M23 Ø25

(2) 2
60˚ 60˚
-0,010
Ø10 -0,025
54
54
10,5 19
9,5
5,5
Ø58,5
Ø58
Ø6g7
10 15
(2)
(1) 36,5 10 (1) 36,5 10
(1) 3 M4 holes at 120° on 42 PCD, depth: 10 mm. (1) 3 M4 holes at 120° on 48 PCD, depth: 8 mm.
XCC 2514TS81KB, XCC 2514TS81KGN, XCC 2514TS81SB, XCC 2514TS81SG
M23 Ø25
Nitrile seal
36˚
Ø81
18˚ Ø64
(1) Ø24
52
Ø58,5
(3)
Ø48 (4)
40 (2) Ø3,2
Ø88 45

(2) Flexible mounting kit, 1 x XCC RF5N mounted.
Ø 90 mm encoders
XCC 2912PS81KBN, XCC 2912PS81KGN XCC 2930TS81SBN, XCC 2930TS81SGN
7 14 14
Ø110
5 5 5 7
30˚ (4)
71,5
72
Ø12g6
Ø5,5
4
Ø80h7
Ø90
(2)
Ø58
Ø90
25 (3)
30
(1) (1) 10
9,5 78 Ø100 72
(2) Anti-rotation device, 1 x XCC RF9N mounted.
(3) 4 M5 x 6 on 78 PCD.
(4) 1 CHC M5 x 12 stainless steel A2 locking screw.

pages 7/20 to 7/23 page 7/21 and 7/23 page 7/25
7/24
Connections 7
Single turn absolute encoders 7

Encoders type KB (N) and KG (N)
M23, 16-pin connector, anticlockwise connections
16b
1 11
2 12
10
3 13 16 9
4 14 15 8
5 7
6
Pin number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Signal/Supply 0V +V d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 d8 d9 d10 d11 d12 Direction

If a resolution less than 13 bits (8192 points) is required, only (1)
the corresponding number of bits need to be connected:
Example:
- D5 to D12 for 8 bits (256 points)
(1) : Clockwise direction, 16 to + V.

: Anticlockwise direction, 16 to 0 V.
Encoders type SB (N) and SG (N)

12b
9
1 8
2 7
10 12
3 11 6
4 5
Pin number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Signal/Supply 0V Data + Clk + R Direction R

(1)
R +V R Data – Clk – R
7
R = Reserved (do not connect).
(1) : Clockwise direction, 5 to 0 V.
: Anticlockwise direction, 5 to + V.

pages 7/20 to 7/23 page 7/21 and 7/23 page 7/24
7/25
Characteristics, Multiturn absolute encoders 7
schemes 7
Osicoder®
Ø 58 mm encoders
Environment
Encoder type Multiturn absolute XCC 3506Pppppp XCC 3510Pppppp XCC 3514Tppppp
Conformity e
option XCC RB3)
interference)
Housing Steel
Torque N.cm 0.4 0.6
Axial daN 5 2
Connection Connector Encoders with SSI output stage types SB (N), SG (N): M23, 12-pin male connector
Frequency Encoders with SSI output stage types SB (N), SG (N): 100 to 500 kHz clock
Schemes
RS 422 data output Isolated clock input
DATA + Iclk
CLK +
2,2 nF
1 nF
VOD
VID
7 1 nF
2,2 nF
DATA –
CLK -

|Iclk| max.: 15 mA
DIRECTION input Input stage - Reset to zero

> 100 ms
< 1 ms < 1 ms (shaft stopped) < 2 ms
V supply V supply
DIRECTION input Reset input
0V 0V
DIRECTION Position = 0 (Reset to zero)

of counting Clockwise Anticlockwise Clockwise Position

page 7/27 page 7/30 pages 7/32 and 7/33
7/26
References 7
Multiturn absolute encoders 7
Osicoder®
Ø 58 mm encoders
Ø 58 mm multiturn absolute encoders with SSI output

convertible to parallel output
The SSI versions can be converted to a parallel version using the deserialisation connecting
cable XCC RM23SUB37pp, see pages 7/33 and 7/36.
4096 points Connector SSI, 25-bit, 11…30 V XCC 3506PS48SGN 0.725
105174
8192 turns radial Gray

M23 male
8192 points Connector SSI, 25-bit, 11…30 V XCC 3506PS84SBN 0.725
4096 turns radial binary
M23 male
Gray
XCC 3506PS84SBN Solid shaft, Ø 10 mm

4096 points Connector SSI, 25-bit, 11…30 V XCC 3510PS48SGN 0.685
8192 turns radial Gray
M23 male
M23 male
Gray

8192 points Connector SSI, 25-bit, 11…30 V XCC 3514TS84SB 0.655
M23 male
SSI, 25-bit, 11…30 V XCC 3514TS84SG 0.655
Gray

Encoder type Diameter Reduction collar to
mm be ordered
(see page 7/37)
566465
Encoders with through shaft Ø 6 XCC R158RDA06

XCC 3514TS84ppp
Ø8 XCC R158RDA08
Ø 10 XCC R158RDA10
Ø 12 XCC R158RDA12
7
XCC R158RDA
page 7/26.

7/27
schemes 7
Osicoder®
Ø 90 mm encoders
Environment
Encoder type XCC 3912Pppppp XCC 3930Tppppp
Conformity e
Temperature Operation (housing) °C - 20…+ 85 - 10…+ 75
Storage °C - 30…+ 85 - 20…+ 85
interference)
Housing Zamak
Ball bearings 6001ZZ 6807ZZ
Torque N.cm 1 0.8
Axial daN 10 5
Connection Connector Encoders with SSI output stage types SB (N), SG (N): M23, 12-pin male connector
Frequency Encoders with SSI output stage types SB (N), SG (N): 100 to 500 kHz clock
Encoders with type SBN or SGN (Gray) output stage: SSI output without parity, 25-bit clock, 11…30 V supply, binary code (SB) or Gray code (SG)
Max. ripple: 500 mV
Schemes
RS 422 data output Isolated clock input
DATA + Iclk
CLK +
2,2 nF
1 nF
VOD
VID
1 nF
7 2,2 nF
DATA –
CLK -

|Iclk| max.: 15 mA

XCC 3912Pppppp
> 100 ms (shaft stopped)
< 2 ms
< 1 ms < 1 ms
V supply
V supply Reset input
DIRECTION input
0V
0V
Position = 0 (Reset to zero)
Position
DIRECTION
of counting Clockwise Anticlockwise Clockwise
XCC 3930Tppppp
> 1 s (shaft stopped)
1s
V supply
Reset input
0V
Position = 0 (Reset to zero)

Position

7/28
References 7
Osicoder®
Ø 90 mm encoders
Ø 90 mm multiturn absolute encoders with SSI output

convertible to parallel output
The SSI versions can be converted to a parallel version using the deserialisation connecting
cable XCC RM23SUB37pp, see pages 7/33 and 7/36.
105178

M23 male

Gray
XCC 3912PSpppp

105179

8192 points Connector SSI, 25-bit, 11…30 V XCC 3930TS84SBN 1.060
M23 male
SSI, 25-bit, 11…30 V XCC 3930TS84SGN 1.060

Gray
XCC 3930TSpppp

Encoder type Diameter Reduction collar to
mm be ordered
(see page 7/37)
523200

XCC 3930TS84ppp
Ø 20 XCC R390RDP20
Ø 25 XCC R390RDP25
7
XCC R390RDP pp
page 7/28.

7/29
Dimensions 7
Ø 58 mm encoders
Ø 58 mm encoders
XCC 3506PS84SBN, XCC 3506PS84SGN XCC 3510PS84SBN, XCC 3510PS84SGN
37 37
M23 22,5 M23 22,5
2
2
(2)
60˚ 2
72
60˚
72
48,5
48,5
10,5 19
Ø10
5,5
9,5
Ø58,5
Ø58
Ø6g7
10
15
(2)
(1) 41,5 10 (1) 41,5 10
(1) 3 M4 holes at 120° on 42 PCD, depth: 10 mm. (1) 3 M4 holes at 120° on 48 PCD, depth: 8 mm.
XCC 3514TS84SB, XCC 3514TS84SG
37
M23 22,5
Nitrile seal
2
36˚
(2) Ø81
18˚
72
Ø64
48,5
Ø24
Ø58,5
(3)
Ø48 (4)
(1) Ø3,2
Ø88 42,5 7,5

(2) Flexible mounting kit, 1 x XCC RF5N mounted.
7

7/30
Ø 90 mm encoders
Ø 90 mm encoders
XCC 3912PS84SpN XCC 3930TS84SpN
M23 13
M23 14
Ø110 Nitrile seal
6 5 5 5 4
30˚
71
64
Ø12g6
Ø5,5 (4)
Ø80h7
Ø90
Ø47
(2)
Ø90
25 (3)
30
(1)
(1)
9,5 84 10,7 48
Ø100
80
(2) Anti-rotation device, 1 x XCC RF9N mounted.
(3) 4 M5 x 6 on 78 PCD.
(4) 3 HC M5 x 6 stainless steel A2 locking screws.

7/31
Connections 7

Encoders with SSI output (types SBN and SGN)
12b
9
1 8
2 7
10 12
3 11 6
4 5
Twisted cable pairs + general shielding must be used.

Pin number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Signal/Supply 0V Data + Clk + R Direction Reset R +V R Data – Clk – R

(1)
R = Reserved (do not connect).
(1) : Clockwise direction, : Anticlockwise direction.
Selection of code progression direction

The DIRECTION input enables the code progression to match the rotational direction of the encoder shaft (clockwise or anticlockwise).
Clockwise direction: connect pin 5 to 0 V.
Anticlockwise direction: connect pin 5 to + V.
Reset to zero
The RESET input enables the encoder to be set to the zero position.
It is actuated by applying an 11…30 V d.c. supply to pin 6, whilst the shaft is stopped, for the following times:
b over 100 ms for XCC 3506, XCC 3510 and XCC 3912,
b over 1 s for XCC 3930T.
Following a reset to zero, pin 6 must be reconnected to 0 V.

Note: in environments subject to electrical interference, it is recommended to earth the encoder base using one of the fixing screws.

pages 7/26 and 7/28 pages 7/27 and 7/29 pages 7/30 and 7/31
7/32
Connections (continued) 7
Pre-cabled version multiturn absolute encoders

Deserialisation The deserialisation connecting cable XCC RM23SUB37 enables conversion, by simple
connecting cable connection, of encoders XCC 35pp and XCC 39pp with SSI output to parallel output.
e 0514
Franc
Parallel output Characteristics
c 11 to 30 V
SSI
GRA
Supply
XCC-R Y =>
M23SU NPN
GRA
B37 Y
NG
11 12
Clk ) R Encoder input/output Levels RS 422
53
10
0-0
9
825
8 Data
(…) (…
+V R 5
8
Parallel outputs Push-pull protection against short-circuits

Operating temperature 0 to 50 °C
SSI output
36 x 0.14 mm2 shielded cable and SUB-D 37-pin end connector connections
Encoders Encoders
4096 points 8192 points
Pin number Signal 8192 turns 4096 turns
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 20 (LSB)
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 2 21
3 22
Resolution per revolution
Resolution per revolution

Male connector (pin view) 4 23
5 24
b Selection of code progression direction 6 25
The DIRECTION input enables the code progression to match
7 26
the rotational direction of the encoder shaft (clockwise or
anticlockwise). 8 27
Clockwise direction: connect pin 30 to an 11…30 V d.c. supply. 9 28
Anticlockwise direction: connect pin 30 to 0 V. 10 29
b Reset to zero
11 210
The RESET input enables the encoder to be set to the zero
position. It is actuated by applying an 11…30 V d.c. supply to 12 211
pin 27 for more than 1 second. 13 212
b Encoder selection 14 213
The SELECT input enables encoder selection when several
15 214
units are connected in parallel on the same data bus.
Encoder selected: apply 0 V potential to pin 28. 16 215
Number of revolutions
Number of revolutions
Encoder not selected: apply 11…30 V d.c. to pin 28. 17 216
b Data locking 18 217
The LATCH input, particularly useful for high speed
19 218
applications, enables the freezing of the encoder data output
whilst reading the code. 20 219
Function not actuated: apply 0 V potential to pin 29. 21 220
Function actuated: apply 11…30 V d.c. to pin 29. 22 221
23 222
24 223
25 224 (MSB)
26 R
27 Reset to zero
R = Reserved, do not connect 28 Select
(1) : clockwise direction, : anticlockwise direction. 29 Latch
Note: in environments subject to electrical interference, it is 30 Direction (1)
recommended to earth the encoder base using one of the fixing 31, 32, 33, 34, 35 R
screws.
36 +V 7
37 0V
Schemes
LATCH input PUSH-PULL SELECT input
V supply Supply: 11 to 30 V c V supply
LATCH input < 1 ms < 1 ms Max. ripple: 500 mV SELECT input < 1 ms < 1 ms
0V Protection against reverse polarity 0V
d0 to d24 Data Data Data Max. no-load consumption: 50 mA (30 mA typical on 24 V) Data Data Data
d0 to d24
valid frozen valid valid impeded valid
11 to 30 V
min. max. min. max.
Level “0” 0V 0.3 x V supply Level “0” 0V 0.3 x V supply
Level “1” 0.7 x V supply V supply Level “1” 0.7 x V supply V supply
I Latch < 5 mA Output I Select < 5 mA

< 1 ms < 1 ms > 100 ms
(shaft stopped) < 2 ms
V supply
DIRECTION input Max. current: 20 mA V supply
0V Level “0” max.: 1.5 V Reset input
Level “1” min.: V supply - 2.5 V 0V
DIRECTION Anti- Protection against short-circuits
Clockwise Clockwise
of counting clockwise NPN/PNP compatible
Position Position = 0 (Reset to zero)
min. max.
Level “0” 0 V 0.3 x V supply Increasing Clockwise min. max.
Level “1” 0.7 x V supply V supply Increasing Anticlockwise Level “0” 0V 0.3 x V supply
I DIR < 5 mA Level “1” 0.7 x V supply V supply
I Reset < 5 mA
Note: do not neglect the LATCH and SELECT inputs. Connecting them to 0 V makes the outputs active.
General:
page 7/7
7/33
Characteristics 7
Rotary encoders 7
Osicoder®
Accessories
Shaft couplings with spring (1)

Maximum torque N.cm 300
Maximum angular misalignment 5°
Maximum radial misalignment mm ± 1.5
Materials Collars Zamak
Spring Nickel plated steel
Compression/Expansion mm ± 1 max.
Homokinetic (flexible) shaft couplings with bellows

Maximum lateral misalignment mm ± 0.3
Maximum axial misalignment mm ± 0.5
Materials Bellows Stainless steel
Fixing collar Aluminium
Screws Stainless steel
Elastic monobloc shaft couplings

Maximum angular misalignment ± 2.5°
Materials Glass fibre reinforced polyamide
(1) Not recommended for resolutions higher than 500 points.
pages 7/35 to 7/37 pages 7/38 to 7/41
7/34
References 7
Rotary encoders 7
Osicoder®
Accessories
References
Shaft couplings (for encoders with solid shaft)
105191
Type Bore diameter Bore diameter Reference Weight

(encoder side) (machine side) kg
With spring (1) 6 mm 6 mm XCC RAR0606 0.125
XCC RARppp
8 mm XCC RAR0608 0.125
10 mm XCC RAR0610 0.125
12 mm XCC RAR0612 0.120
14 mm XCC RAR0614 0.120
16 mm XCC RAR0616 0.120
105192
10 mm 8 mm XCC RAR1008 0.120

10 mm XCC RAR1010 0.120
XCC RASpppp
12 mm XCC RAR1012 0.110
14 mm XCC RAR1014 0.110
16 mm XCC RAR1016 0.105
806309
12 mm 8 mm XCC RAR1208 0.110

12 mm XCC RAR1212 0.110
XCC RAE0606 14 mm XCC RAR1214 0.105
16 mm XCC RAR1216 0.100
Homokinetic 6 mm 6 mm XCC RAS0606 0.020
(flexible) with 8 mm XCC RAS0608 0.020
bellows
10 mm XCC RAS0610 0.020
806311
12 mm XCC RAS0612 0.015

10 mm 8 mm XCC RAS1008 0.015
XCC RFp 10 mm XCC RAS1010 0.015
12 mm XCC RAS1012 0.015
12 mm 8 mm XCC RAS1208 0.010
566461
12 mm XCC RAS1212 0.010

Elastic, monobloc 6 mm 6 mm XCC RAE0606 0.010
Anti-rotation devices (for encoders with through shaft)

Description Features For encoders Reference Weight
kg
Flexible mounting Set of 2 flexible Ø 40 XCC 1406T XCC RF4 0.010
kit fixings + screws
1 flexible fixing + Ø 58 XCC 15ppT, XCC RF5N 0.020
screws XCC 25ppT,
XCC RE9S
XCC 3514T
Set of 2 flexible Ø 90 XCC 19ppT, XCC RF9 0.030
566462
fixings + screws XCC 29ppT,

XCC 39ppT
Mounting and fixing accessories (for encoders with solid shaft)

Description For encoders Reference Weight
Set of 3 eccentric XCC 15ppP, XCC 25ppP, XCC 35ppP XCC RG5
kg
0.010 7
806312
clamps
+ 3 fixing screws (2) XCC 1912P, XCC 2912P, XCC 3912P XCC RG9 0.030
+ 3 washers
Plain brackets for XCC 1510P, XCC 2510P, XCC 3510P XCC RE5SN 0.130
Ø 58
XCC REpR XCC RGp Plain brackets for XCC 1912P, XCC 2912P, XCC 3912P XCC RE9SN 0.290
Ø 90
Brackets with play XCC 1510P, XCC 2510P, XCC 3510P XCC RE5RN 0.345
566463
566464
compensator
XCC 1912P, XCC 2912P, XCC 3912P XCC RE9RN 0.890
Collar for synchro XCC 1510P, XCC 2510P, XCC 3510P XCC RB1 0.040
mounting, for Ø 58
Substitution XCC 1912P, XCC 2912P, XCC 3912P XCC RB2 0.175
XCC RB1 interface collar
for Ø 90
XCC RB2 IP 67 sealed collar XCC 1510P, XCC 2510P, XCC 3510P XCC RB3 0.030
for Ø 58
(2) 3 M3 x 12 screws for XCC RG5, 3 M4 x 25 screws for XCC RG9.
Characteristics: Dimensions:
page 7/34 pages 7/38 to 7/41
7/35
Rotary encoders 7
Osicoder®
Accessories
Cables
Description For encoders No. of wires/ Ø Reference Weight
c.s.a. mm kg
Shielded cables Incremental 10 wires/ 6 XCC RX10 5.000
with twisted pairs 0.14 mm2
Length: 100 m
UL/CSA
Absolute, 16 wires/ 6.8 XCC RX16 5.600
single turn // 0.14 mm2
Absolute, 36 wires/ 9.2 XCC RX36 13.500
multiturn // 0.14 mm2
Absolute, 1 pair of 8.6 XCC RXS8 11.750
single turn and 0.50 mm2 wires
multiturn SSI and 3 pairs of
0.14 mm2 wires
Connectors
566466
Description For use with Number Type Reference Weight

of pins kg
M23 female Encoders 12 Straight XZC C23FDP120S 0.040
connectors Incremental,
XZC C23FMDP120S absolute SSI
Absolute encoders, 16 Straight XZC C23FDP160S 0.040
single turn parallel
Connector kit SSI jumper cable – – XZC C23FMDP120S 0.090
566467
1 female + 1 male or incremental

encoders
SUB-D 37-pin Absolute encoders, 37 Straight XZC CHFDM370S 0.115
female connector multiturn parallel
XZC CHFDM1370S
Pre-wired connectors
Description Number of wires Cable Reference Weight
length kg
M23 F 8 wires 2m XCC PM23122L2 0.190
straight Absolute SSI
5m XCC PM23122L5 0.470
10 m XCC PM23122L10 0.900

105194
10 wires 2m XCC PM23121L2 0.160

Incremental
5m XCC PM23121L5 0.330
10 m XCC PM23121L10 0.620
16 wires 2m XCC PM23161L2 0.175

Absolute single turn //
5m XCC PM23161L5 0.415
7 XCC PM23161L2
10 m XCC PM23161L10 0.790
Deserialisation jumper cables (1)

105193
Description Type Reference Weight

kg
M23 F - SUB-D37 M SSI Gray//Gray PNP (PG) XCC RM23SUB37PG 0.225
jumper cables,
straight M23, SSI Gray//Gray NPN (NG) XCC RM23SUB37NG 0.225
length 0.5 m
SSI Binary//Binary PNP (PB) XCC RM23SUB37PB 0.225
SSI Binary//Binary NPN (NB) XCC RM23SUB37NB 0.225

XCC RM23SUB37PG
(1) See General, page 7/7 and Connections, page 7/33.
7/36
Rotary encoders 7
Osicoder®
Accessories
Reduction collars for encoders with through shaft

Description For use with Reduction Reference Weight
kg
Reduction Incremental encoders Ø 58 14 to 6 XCC R158RDA06 0.015
collars Absolute single turn encoders Ø 58
Absolute multiturn encoders Ø 58 14 to 8 XCC R158RDA08 0.010
105188
XCC R158RDA08 14 to 10 XCC R158RDA10 0.010
14 to 12 XCC R158RDA12 0.010
Incremental encoders Ø 90 30 to 12 XCC R290RDP12 0.060

Absolute single turn encoders Ø 90
30 to 20 XCC R290RDP20 0.030
105190
30 to 25 XCC R290RDP25 0.020
XCC Rp90RDP20 Absolute multiturn encoders Ø 90 30 to 16 XCC R390RDP16 0.040
30 to 20 XCC R390RDP20 0.020
30 to 25 XCC R390RDP25 0.020
Dimensions:
page 7/41
7/37
Dimensions 7
Rotary encoders 7
Osicoder®
Accessories
Shaft couplings
XCC RARpppp XCC RASpppp XCC RAE0606
Øe XCC Øe Øs Øe XCC Øe Øs Ø6H7
2,6
RAR0606 6 6 RAS0606 6 6
6
RAR0608 6 8 RAS0608 6 8
20
RAR0610 6 10 RAS0610 6 10
6
35
RAR0612 6 12 RAS0612 6 12
2,6
Ø6H7
50
RAR0614 6 14 RAS1008 10 8
RAR0616 6 16 RAS1010 10 10 Ø15
9
RAR1008 10 8 RAS1012 10 12
Øs
RAR1010 10 10 RAS1208 12 8
Ø21
RAR1012 10 12 RAS1212 12 12
Øs
RAR1014 10 14
Ø26 RAR1016 10 16
RAR1208 12 8
RAR1212 12 12
RAR1214 12 14
RAR1216 12 16
Anti-rotation devices (flexible mounting kit)

XCC RF4 XCC RF5N
Mounting on Ø 40 mm encoder XCC 1406T Mounting on Ø 58 mm encoders XCC 1514T, XCC 2514T and XCC 3514T
Ø88
(1) Ø3,2 Ø46 7,5 (1)
Ø64
Ø81
Ø36
40˚
22
57
Ø20
Ø52
18˚
Ø3,2
7,5
66˚
(1) 2 holes Ø 4 at 180° on 30 PCD. TC M4 x 5 screw fixings. (1) 3 holes Ø 4.1 at 120° on 48 PCD. TC M3 x 6 screw fixings.
XCC RF9
Mounting on Ø 90 mm encoders XCC 1930T, XCC 2930T and XCC 3930T
30˚ Ø5,5
7 Ø100
(1)
Ø56
Ø110
44 21
65
(1) 4 holes Ø 5.2 at 90° on 78 PCD. TH M5 x 6 screw fixings.
References:
page 7/35
7/38
Rotary encoders 7
Osicoder®
Accessories
Collar kits
XCC RB1 XCC RB2
Collar for synchro mounting, for Ø 58 encoders: Interface collar for Ø 90 encoders:
XCC 15ppP, XCC 25ppP and XXC 35ppP XCC 1912P, XCC 2912P and XCC 3912P
(2) 10
(1)
(1)
60˚
Ø36 H8
Ø50 h9
(2)
Ø53
Ø58
Ø56 H9
Ø84,5
Ø89,5
4 Ø32
3
10
7 Ø12,5
20
(1) 3 holes M4 x 0.7 at 120° on 42 PCD. TC M3 x 8 screw (1) 4 holes Ø 6.6 at 120° on 60 PCD. Countersunk for TZ M6 x 16 screws.
fixings. (2) 4 holes M5 x 0.8 at 90° on 78 PCD.
(2) 3 counterbored holes for TC M4 x 8 screws at 120° on
48 PCD.
XCC RB3
IP 67 sealed collar for Ø 58 encoders:
XCC 1510P, XCC 2510P and XCC 3510P
(1)
Ø36 f7
Ø58
Nitrile seal VITON seal

10 (2)
13,5
18
7
(1) 3 holes M3 x 0.5 at 120° on 48 PCD. TZ M3 x 8 screw

fixings.
(2) Shaft Ø 10 mm.
References:
pages 7/35
7/39
Rotary encoders 7
Osicoder®
Accessories
Plain brackets
XCC RE5SN XCC RE9SN
(1)
Ø36
Ø40
80
116
45
(1)
70
(2)
110
6
40
17
6
60 2xØ7
80
63
30
20
10
40 4xØ7
90
(1) 3 counterbored holes for CHC M3 screws at 120° on 48 PCD. (1) 6 holes Ø 7 at 60° on 60 PCD for CHC M6 screws.
(2) 3 counterbored holes for CHC M4 screws at 120° on 48 PCD.
Brackets with play compensator
XCC RE5RN XCC RE9RN
12
20
Ø31,8 (2)
Ø40,1 (1)
93
maxi
48 max.
40 min.
mini
160
7
10
(1)
80
80 max.
maxi
mini
60 min.
60
12
10
140
85
50
20
10
80
35
60 4xØ6,5
20
90 4xØ6,5
(1) 3 counterbored holes for CHC M3 screws at 120° on 48 PCD. (1) 6 counterbored holes for CHC M6 screws at 120° on 60 PCD.
(2) 3 counterbored holes for CHC M4 screws at 120° on 48 PCD.
7/40
Dimensions (continued), Rotary encoders 7
connections 7
Osicoder®
Accessories
Reduction collars for through shaft

XCC R158RDApp XCC R290RDPpp
For Ø 58 incremental and absolute single turn and For Ø 90 incremental and absolute single turn encoders
multiturn encoders
Ø+2,5
40 ØX H7
Ø32
Ø+4
Ø30
1,5 Ø14g7
12 2 1 Ø H8
20
58,5
XCC Ø XCC Ø
R158RDA06 6 R290RDP12 12
R158RDA08 8 R290RDP20 20
R158RDA10 10 R290RDP25 25
R158RDA12 12
XCC R390RDPpp
For Ø 90 absolute multiturn encoders
Ø30
Ø+4
20 2 ØH8
63
XCC Ø
R390RDP16 16
R390RDP20 20
R390RDP25 25
Pre-wired connector connections

XCC PM23121Lp XCC PM23122Lp XCC PM23161Lp
Pin Function Colour Pin Function Colour Pin Function Colour
1 A/ BN 1 0V BK 1 Gnd WH 7
2 V Supply RD 2 Data (+) BN 2 V Supply BN
3 Top 0 VT 3 Clk (+) GN 3 d0 GN
4 Top 0/ BU 4 R – 4 d1 YE
5 B YE 5 VT 5 d2 GY
6 B/ OG 6 Reset BU 6 d3 OG
7 R – 7 R – 7 d4 BU
8 A GN 8 +V RD 8 d5 RD
9 R – 9 R – 9 d6 BK
10 Gnd BK 10 Data (-) OG 10 d7 VT
11 Gnd WH 11 Clk (-) YE 11 d8 WH/BN
12 V Supply GY 12 R – 12 d9 WH/GN
13 d10 WH/YE
14 d11 WH/BK
15 d12 WH/OG
16 WH/RD
R: reserved, do not connect Direction of rotation for pin 5 Direction of rotation for pin 16
References:
page 7/37
7/41
Presentation 7
Multiturn absolute encoders on bus 7
Osicoder®
CANopen Ø 58 mm encoders
Presentation
The Osicoder® CANopen multiturn absolute Ø 58 mm encoder is designed to cater
for configurations encountered in communicating industrial installations. Models
XCC 3510PS84CB and XCC3515CS84CB integrate CANopen communication
protocols as standard.
The CAN-Bus interface integrated in the absolute rotary encoder supports all
CANopen functions. The following modes can be programmed and made operational
or stopped: Pooling mode, Cyclic mode and Sync mode. The application specific
protocol supports the programming of the following additional functions:
- code sequence,
- resolution per revolution,
- global resolution,
1 - presets,
2 - speed and address.
105231
3 The connection housing assures simple assembly and addressing. It performs the
4
function of a T coupler and has M12 connectors for the bus incoming and outgoing
signals.
The rotary encoder can be supplied via the CANopen bus or by using the dedicated
5 PG9 cable gland. The address of the equipment is adjusted from the rotary switches.
Encoders XCC 3510PS84CB and XCC 3515CS84CB have 2 LEDs located on the
rear face of the housing to facilitate monitoring and diagnostics conforming to
1 2 LEDs standard DR303-3 v1.2.1.0 (CIA). The LEDs provide information regarding the
2 M12 male connector (CANopen incoming bus) operative mode, bus errors, supply problems.
3 PG9 connection for supply cable
4 M12 female connector (CANopen outgoing bus) Standards
5 Encoder shaft Encoders XCC 3510PS84CB and XCC3515CS84CB conform to:
- standard ISO 11898,
- specifications DS301 V4.02/CAN2.A, DS406 V3.1, DR303-1V1.3, DR303-3 V1.2.
They are CiA certified and meet the requirements of the Schneider Electric
interoperability standards.
Encoder setting-up/configuration software

The CANopen bus is configured with the aid of SyCon version 2.9 software,
reference SYC SPU LF.
To be ordered separately.
The EDS file, reference TEXCC35CB_0100E.eds, required for encoder
configuration is available and downloadable from our site www.telemecanique.com.
Configurable parameters
b Transmission speed
Default value: 250 Kbaud, configurable from 10 Kbaud (distance 6700 m) to 1 Mbaud
(distance 40 m).
7 b Address
defines encoder identification on the bus, 1 to 89. Default value: id = 1. It is defined
using 2 coding wheels located in the housing.
b Resolution
defines the number of points per revolution (0 to 8191)
b Global resolution
defines the total number of codes of the encoder (0 to 33 554 431)
b Direction
enables defining of the counting direction of the encoder (increasing clockwise or
anticlockwise) in relation to its mechanical position
b Reset to X
defines the value of its actual position (reset to X or reset to amount).
Communication modes
b Pooling mode
The encoder responds to requests from the master. This mode enables
programming and referring to the encoder parameters whilst in position.
b Cyclic mode
The encoder transmits its position cyclically. The transmission period is
programmable from 0 to 65535 ms.
b Sync mode
The encoder transmits its position when requested by the master synchro.
7/42
Characteristics 7
Osicoder®
Characteristics
Encoder type XCC 3510PS84CB XCC 3515CS84CB
Conformity e

Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 100 gn (6 ms, 1/2 sine wave)
interference)
Surge withstand Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5: level 1, 500 V

Housing Aluminium
Shaft type mm Ø 10, solid shaft (h8) Ø 15, hollow shaft (F7)
Shaft moment of inertia g.cm2 30
Torque N.cm 0.3
Connection Connector CANopen bus network by M12 connector (input: male; output: female), 5-pin,
A coding.
Supply via PG9 of each encoder or via the bus
Frequency kHz 800
Supply Nominal voltage V 24 (10-30)
Protection Against reverse polarity and voltage peaks

7
Signalling Green LED: CAN_RUN; red LED: CAN_ERR
Communication
CANopen service Conformity class S10 (Transparent Ready)
Profile DS406 V3.1, class C2
Specifications ISO 11898, DS301 V4.02/CAN2.A, DR303-1V1.3, DR303-3 V1.2.
Structure Speed Kbps/s 10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500, 800 and 1000
Product certification CiA

Schneider Electric interoperability standards

7/43
References 7
Osicoder®
105231
Description Connection Output Supply Reference Weight

method stage type voltage kg
Ø 58 mm Radial CANopen, 11…30 V XCC 3510PS84CB 0.560
multiturn absolute 2 x M12 25-bit,
CANopen Bus connectors binary
XCC 3510PS84CB encoders A coding
Resolution 8192 pts/ 1 x PG9
4096 turns
105232
Hollow shaft, Ø 15 mm (1)

Ø 58 mm Radial CANopen, 11…30 V XCC 3515CS84CB 0.570
multiturn absolute 2 x M12 25-bit,
CANopen Bus connectors binary
encoders A coding
Resolution 8192 pts/ 1 x PG9
4096 turns
XCC 3515CS84CB
Hollow shaft, Ø 6, 8, 10 and 14 mm (1)

mm (see page 7/50)
566468
Encoders with hollow shaft Ø6 XCC R358RDL06

XCC 3515CS84CB
Ø8 XCC R358RDL08
Ø 10 XCC R358RDL10
Ø 12 XCC R358RDL12
Ø 14 XCC R358RDL14
XCC R358RDL
Connection accessories for CANopen bus
Connecting cables for CANopen bus
m kg
Connecting cables fitted with 2 0.3 FTX CN3203 0.040
elbowed type M12 connectors, 0.6 FTX CN3206 0.070
A coding
1 FTX CN3210 0.100
2 FTX CN3220 0.160
3 FTX CN3230 0.220
5 FTX CN3250 0.430
CANopen cables
105507
Description Length Unit reference Weight

7 kg
Standard CANopen cables 50 m TSX CAN CA50 –
conforming to IEC 60 332-1 100 m TSX CAN CA100 –
300 m TSX CAN CA300 –
TSX CAN CApp
Connectors
Description Type Unit reference Weight
806000
kg
805999
M12 female connector Straight XZ CC12FDM50B 0.020

5 screw terminals Elbowed XZ CC12FCM50B 0.020
M12 male connector Straight XZ CC12MDM50B 0.025
5 screw terminals Elbowed XZ CC12MCM50B 0.025
XZ CC12ppM50B
XZ CC12ppM50B

7/44
Dimensions, Multiturn absolute encoders on bus 7
connections 7
Osicoder®
XCC 3510PS84CB XCC 3515CS84CB
15 15
12 12 12 12
Ø15F7
Ø10h8
Ø63
95
95
Ø58
Ø58
20˚
20
18
Ø3,2
(1)
(1) 15˚ (2) 92 30 72 30
60 122 112
(1) 3 M4 holes at 120° on 48 PCD, depth: 6 mm. (1) Flexible mounting kit, 1 x XCC RF5B mounted.
(2) 3 M3 holes at 120° on 48 PCD, depth: 6 mm.
Connection
CANopen
RT Bus termination resistor

On
RT RT
On On
IN OUT
1st or Encoder X
+ - last encoder
901 901 901

78
78
78
23
23
23
456 456 456
Bd x1
x10
Permissible address range
901 901 1 => 89

0 => reserved
78
78
23
23
4 56 4 56
x10 x1
Example: 59
4 3 4 3
5 5
1 2 1 2
Bus IN Bus OUT 7
M12 male connector M12 female connector
Pin 1 2 3 4 5
Function CAN_SHLD (CAN_V+) CAN_GND CAN_H CAN_L
Terminal + –
Function 24 V 0V
Presentation: Characteristics: References:

7/45
Presentation 7
Osicoder®
PROFIBUS-DP Ø 58 mm encoders
Presentation
The Osicoder® PROFIBUS-DP multiturn absolute Ø 58 mm encoder is designed to
cater for configurations encountered in communicating industrial installations.
Models XCC 3510PV84FB and XCC3515CV84FB integrate PROFIBUS-DP
communication protocols as standard.
The PROFIBUS-DP bus interface integrated in the absolute rotary encoder is based
on RS 485 transmission and enables speeds of up to 12Mbps. Exchanges are
possible between the master and the encoder as well as between encoders. The
application specific protocol DP-V2 conforms to the class 2 profile for encoders and
supports the following functions:
- code sequence,
- resolution per revolution,
- global resolution,
1
105233
- presets,
- soft stops,
- speed and address.
2
The housing of the encoders provides easy access to 2 coding wheels for
configuration of the address. 2 LEDs are integrated to facilitate diagnostics. It
3 performs the function of a T coupler with 3 x PG9 cable glands (2 for the bus
incoming and outgoing signals, 1 for the encoder supply).
PROFIBUS-DP encoders have 2 LEDs to indicate the encoder status:
1 2 LEDs - Green LED: “Sta”
2 PG9 connection for supply cable - Red LED: “Err”.
3 Encoder shaft
Standards
PROFIBUS-DP encoders XCC 3510PV84FB and XCC3515CV84FB conform to:
- international standards IEC 61158 and IEC 61784 for PROFIBUS-DP
communication
- the PROFIBUS-DP standard EN50170 Class 2 in accordance with profile
3.062 V 1.1 for the encoder application.
They are certified by the PNO organisation and meet the requirements of the
Schneider Electric interoperability standards.
Encoder setting-up/configuration software

The PROFIBUS-DP bus is configured with the aid of SyCon version 2.9 software,
reference SYC SPU LF. To be ordered separately.
The GSD file, reference TELE4711.gsd, required for encoder configuration is
available and downloadable from our site www.telemecanique.com.
Configurable parameters
b Speed
defines the instantaneous speed in 16 bit binary. It can be data according to 1 of 4
7 modes:
v Steps/10 ms
v Steps/100 ms
v Steps/s or rpm.
b Address
Addressing is performed using 2 rotary switches located in the housing. The
addresses possible are 1 to 99.
b Resolution:
defines the number of points per revolution (0 to 8191)
b Global resolution:
defines the total number of codes of the encoder (0 to 33 554 431)
b Direction:
enables defining of the counting direction of the encoder (increasing clockwise or
anticlockwise) in relation to its mechanical position
b 2 soft stops:
one high stop and one low stop can be defined and extracted from the position word
b Reset to X:
defines the value of its actual position (reset to X or reset to amount).
Communication modes
2 communication modes are possible:
- simple and fast, cyclic and deterministic exchanges between the master and the
encoder,
- acyclic exchanges.
7/46
Characteristics 7
Osicoder®
Characteristics
Encoder type XCC 3510PV84FB XCC 3515CV84FB
Conformity DIN VDE 0160

Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 100 gn (6 ms, 1/2 sine wave)
interference)
Surge withstand Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5: level 1, 500 V

Housing Aluminium
Shaft type mm Ø 10, solid shaft (h8) Ø 15, hollow shaft (F7)
Maximum rotational speed 6000 rpm
Shaft moment of inertia g.cm2 30
Torque N.cm 0.3
Connection PG9 3 x PG9 inputs:
- 2 x PG9 inputs for the PROFIBUS-DP bus
- 1 x PG9, positioned in middle, for external supply (10-30 V)
Due to the T integrated in the housing, the supply can be distributed on the bus.
Connections are made using screw terminals.

Frequency kHz 800
Supply Nominal voltage V 24 (10-30)

7
Protection Against reverse polarity and voltage peaks
Signalling Green LED: “Sta”; red LED: “Err”
Communication
PROFIBUS-DP V2 service Profile for encoder 3.062 V1.1.
Specifications IEC 61158, IEC 61784, EN 50170 class 2, EN 50254
Interface RS 485
Speed 9.6 Kbps…12 Mbps max.
Product certification PNO

Schneider Electric interoperability standards

7/47
References 7
Osicoder®
References
105233
Description Connection Output Supply Reference Weight

method stage type voltage kg
Ø 58 mm 3 x PG9 PROFIBUS- 11…30 V XCC 3510PV84FB 0.560
multiturn absolute radial DP,
PROFIBUS-DP 25-bit,
encoders binary
XCC 3510PV84FB Resolution 8192 pts/
4096 turns
Hollow shaft, Ø 15 mm (1)

105236
Ø 58 mm 3 x PG9 PROFIBUS- 11…30 V XCC 3515CV84FB 0.570

multiturn absolute radial DP,
PROFIBUS-DP 25-bit,
encoders binary
Resolution 8192 pts/
4096 turns
XCC 3515CV84FB
Hollow shaft, Ø 6, 8, 10 and 14 mm (1)
mm (see page 7/50)
566468
Encoders with hollow shaft Ø6 XCC R358RDL06

XCC 3515CV84FB
Ø8 XCC R358RDL08
Ø 10 XCC R358RDL10
Ø 12 XCC R358RDL12
Ø 14 XCC R358RDL14
XCC R358RDL
Presentation: Characteristics: Dimensions: Connections:

page 7/46 page 7/47 page 7/49 page 7/49
7/48
Dimensions, Multiturn absolute encoders on bus 7
connections 7
Osicoder®
XCC 3510PV84FB XCC 3515CV84FB
20 20 Ø6,5-9 15 20 20 Ø6,5-9 15
Ø15F7
Ø10h8
Ø63
95
95
Ø58
Ø58
20˚
20
18
Ø3,2
(1)
(1) 15˚ (2) 92 30 72 30
60 122 112
(1) 3 M4 holes at 120° on 48 PCD, depth: 6 mm. (1) Flexible mounting kit, 1 x XCC RF5B mounted.
(2) 3 M3 holes at 120° on 48 PCD, depth: 6 mm.
Connection
PROFIBUS-DP
R Bus termination resistor

On R R
On On
1st or Encoder X
B A - + B A - + last encoder
901 901
78
78
23
23
456 456
x10 x1
Permissible address range
901 901
78
78
23
23
4 56 4 56 0 => 99
x10 x1
Example: 55
Terminal B (left) A (left) – +

7
Function Earth Bus line B Bus line A 0V 11-30 V
(Bus in) (Bus in)
Terminal B (right) A (right) – +
Function Bus line B Bus line A 0V 11-30 V

(Bus out) (Bus out)
Presentation: Characteristics: References:

7/49
references 7
Osicoder®
Accessories for CANopen and PROFIBUS-DP encoders
Shaft couplings with spring (1)

Materials Collars Zamak

Spring Nickel plated steel
Homokinetic (flexible) shaft couplings with bellows

Maximum lateral misalignment mm ± 0.3
Maximum axial misalignment mm ± 0.5
Materials Bellows Stainless steel

Fixing collar Aluminium
Screws Stainless steel

References
Shaft couplings (for encoders with solid shaft)
Type Bore diameter Bore diameter Reference Weight
(encoder side) (machine side) kg
With spring (2) 10 mm 8 mm XCC RAR1008 0.120
105191
10 mm XCC RAR1010 0.120

XCC RARppp
12 mm XCC RAR1012 0.110
14 mm XCC RAR1014 0.110
16 mm XCC RAR1016 0.105
Homokinetic 10 mm 8 mm XCC RAS1008 0.015

(flexible) with
105192
bellows 10 mm XCC RAS1010 0.015
XCC RASpppp 12 mm XCC RAS1012 0.015
7 Anti-rotation devices (for encoders with hollow shaft)

Description Features For encoders Reference Weight
kg
Flexible mounting 1 flexible fixing CANopen and XCC RF5B 0.010
kit + screws PROFIBUS-DP
Reduction collars for encoders with hollow shaft

Description For use with Reduction Reference Weight
kg
Reduction collars CANopen and 15 to 6 XCC R358RDL06 0.040
105189
PROFIBUS-DP
XCC R358RDL06 encoders 15 to 8 XCC R358RDL08 0.030
15 to 10 XCC R358RDL10 0.025
15 to 12 XCC R358RDL12 0.020
15 to 14 XCC R358RDL14 0.010
Dimensions:
page 7/51
7/50
Dimensions 7
Osicoder®
Accessories for CANopen and PROFIBUS-DP encoders
Shaft couplings
XCC RARpppp XCC RASpppp
Øe XCC Øe Øs Øe XCC Øe Øs
RAR1008 10 8 RAS1008 10 8
RAR1010 10 10 RAS1010 10 10
9
RAR1012 10 12 RAS1012 10 12
35
RAR1014 10 14
50
RAR1016 10 16
9
Øs
Ø21
Øs
Ø26
Anti-rotation device Reduction collars

XCC RF5B XCC R358RDLpp
Mounting on Ø 58 mm CANopen and PROFIBUS-DP For CANopen and PROFIBUS-DP encoders
encoders XCC 3510pppFB, XCC 3510pppCB,
XCC 3515CpppFB, XCC 3515CpppCB
1
6
Ø63 Ø15 h7
29,5 ØX F7
9,9
1
1
(1)
XCC Ø
52,5
35
R358RDL06 6
10
72
Ø
R358RDL08 8
R358RDL10 10
3,5
R358RDL12 12
R358RDL14 14
Ø3,2 14,5 9
20˚
20
53
(1) 4 holes Ø 3.2. M3 x 6 screw fixings.

7
References:
page 7/50
7/51
8/0
Contents 0
8 - Radio frequency identification
13.56 MHz
Ositrack® RFID
b Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/4
b Ositrack ® Compact stations, 13.56 MHz
v C format compact station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/8

v D format compact station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/8
b Electronic tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/8
b Connection boxes
v Ethernet box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/9

v Tap-off box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/9
b Portable 13.56 MHz RFID diagnostics terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/9
8/1
Selection guide 8
Ositrack® RFID 8
Radio frequency identification

13.56 MHz
Applications Numerous and varying applications in the industrial, logistic and building sectors:
flexible production workshops, traceability, access control, etc.
Compact stations, 13.56 MHz C format D format
Dimensions, W x H x D (mm) 40 x 40 x 15 80 x 80 x 26
Protocols Modbus RTU, Uni-Telway and CANopen (1)
Nominal sensing distance depending on associated tag 18 to 70 20 to 100

(mm)
Station type XGC S4901201 XGC S8901201
Page 8/8
Electronic tags C format ISO badge Disc E format Cylindrical

(2)
Dimensions, W x H x D (mm) 40 x 40 x15 54 x 85.5 x 0.8 Ø 30 x 3 26 x 26 x 13 M18 x 1 x 12
Type of memory EEPROM
8 Memory capacity (bytes) 3 408 13 632 256 112 256 256
Nominal sensing distance With station XGC S49p 33 30 70 48 40 18

(mm)
With station XGC S89p 48 40 100 65 55 20
Time (ms) Read 9.25 + 16.25 + 12 + 0.825 x n (3)

375 x n (3) 375 x n (3)
Write 13 + 20 + 20 + 12 + 20 + 19 +
0.8 x n (3) 0.8 x n (3) 11.8 x n (3) 5.6 x n (3) 11.8 x n (3) 4.1 x n (3)
Tag type XGH XGH XGH XGH XGH XGH
B444345 B445345 B90E340 B320345 B221346 B211345
Page 8/8
(2) Available later for Uni-Telway and CANopen protocols.

(3) Customised versions on request.
(4) n = number of 16-bit words.
8/2
8
Connection boxes Ethernet box Tap-off box
Protocols Modbus TCP/IP Modbus, Uni-Telway and CANopen (1)
Associated compact stations XGC S49p and XGC S89p
Supply voltage c 24 V
Connection box type XGS Z33ETH TCS AMT31FP
Page 8/9
Portable terminal For 13.56 MHz RFID diagnostics
Function Read/Write operations on electronic tags and diagnostics on compact stations
Operating system Microsoft® Windows CE.NET Professional® version 4.2
Terminal type XGS TP401
Page 8/9
Ositrack® accessories Cables, adaptors, fixing plates, etc.
Pages 8/10 and 8/11
8/3
Presentation, Ositrack® RFID 8
description 8
13.56 MHz
Operating principle
RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) is a term generally used for radio frequency
identification systems. These frequencies range between 50 kHz and 2.5 GHz. The
most widely used is 13.56 MHz.
The Ositrack® RFID identification system enables object traceability, identification

(tracking) functions to be performed and access control.
The information is stored in an accessible memory using a simple radio frequency
link. This memory is in the form of an electronic tag, which contains an antenna and
an integrated circuit.
The tag contains the information associated with the object to which it is fixed. When
a tag passes through the field generated by the reader/station, it detects the signal
and exchanges the data (read or write) between its memory and the reader/station.
The applications are numerous:
b Logistics: dispatch, receipt, transit, etc.
b Tracking and sorting of baggage
b Automatic tolls
b Access control, etc.
The Ositrack® RFID system is also suited to difficult environments (humidity,
temperature, mechanical shock, vibration, dust, etc.).
Ositrack® RFID
Ositrack® is open to the majority of ISO 18000-3, ISO 15693 and ISO 14443
electronic tags.
Ositrack® integrates Modbus RTU, Uni-Telway (1), Modbus TCP/IP and CANopen (1)
protocols.
The Ositrack® RFID offer comprises:

b 2 models of 13.56 MHz stations (read/write)
b 6 models of 13.56 MHz electronic tags
b 1 portable RFID diagnostics terminal
b 2 models of network connection boxes
b connection and mounting accessories.
Setting-up
Ositrack® compact stations are simple to set-up:
v Integrated RFID and network functions
v No programming
v Automatic detection of the RFID electronic tags (read or write)
v Automatic setting of the communication parameters (speed, format, parity,
protocol, etc.)
v Configuration of the network address (1 to 15) using badge included with the
station
v Read/write compatibility with the majority of 13.56 MHz tags on the market
v Low sensitivity to metal environments.
Installation
The Ositrack® stations are compact and robust. They can easily be integrated in
flexible manufacturing production lines:
- quick connection using M12 connector
- clip-on mounting.
Ositrack® compact stations can be connected on Ethernet, Modbus, CANopen (1)
8 and Uni-Telway (1) networks and bus via a connection box.
Description
Ositrack® 13.56 MHz compact stations (2)
Stations XGC S enable the reading and writing of 13.56 MHz RFID tags that comply
to standards ISO 15693 and ISO 14443 A and B.
2 models of Ositrack® compact stations are available:
b Format C compact station: Station XGC S490pppp:
v Dimensions (mm): 40 x 40 x 15
v Nominal sensing distance: 18 to 70 mm depending on associated tag
b Format D compact station: Station XGC S890pppp:
v Dimensions (mm): 80 x 80 x 26
v Nominal sensing distance: 20 to 100 mm depending on associated tag.
(2) For station and tag selection according to passing speeds, see page 8/16.
Characteristics: References: Dimensions: Connections: Curves, installation:

pages 8/6 and 8/7 pages 8/8 to 8/11 pages 8/12 and 8/13 pages 8/14 and 8/15 pages 8/16 and 8/17
8/4
Description (continued) 8
Ositrack® RFID 8

13.56 MHz
Description (continued)
Ositrack® RFID electronic tags (2)
b Electronic tags XGH B offer the following advantages:
v fast access to the data,
v wide range of memory capacities,
v access security to the contents,
v operation without battery,
v positioning flexibility,
v and protection suited to the environmental conditions.
The nominal transmission distance is 18 to 100 mm depending on the model of the
tag and associated compact station.
Connection boxes
Two types of quick connection boxes are available:
- an Ositrack ® Ethernet box XGS Z33ETH for Ethernet network
- an Ositrack ® tap-off box TCS AMT31FP for Modbus, Uni-Telway (1) and
CANopen (1) communication bus.
b Ethernet box XGS Z33ETH
The Ositrack® Ethernet box XGS Z33ETH enables connection of stations XGC S to
the Ethernet network (Modbus TCP/IP protocol).
It enables, from a PLC or PC, access to the functions of stations XGC S:
v reading/writing of tags,
v control and checking,
v monitoring,
v diagnostics.
The Ethernet box XGS Z33ETH is fitted with M12 connectors. It is used to connect
1
the supply, the Ethernet network and 1 to 3 stations XGC S.
2
It comprises a sealed metal enclosure fitted with:
1 Ethernet network signalling LEDs
3 2 One Ethernet M12 type, D coding, socket
3 One green LED indicator: power on
4 One power supply M12 type 4-pin male socket
5 4 5 3 M12 type female, A coding, sockets for connecting 1 to 3 stations XGC S.
b Tap-off box TCS AMT31FP

Tap-off box TCS AMT31FP enables connection of stations XGC S to Modbus,
Uni-Telway (1) or CANopen (1) communication bus.
The tap-off box TCS AMT31FP is fitted with M12 connectors. It is used to connect
the supply, the communication bus (Modbus) and 1 to 3 stations XGC S.
It comprises a sealed metal enclosure fitted with:
1 One green LED indicator: power on
3 IN OUT 2 2 One network output M12 type 5-pin female, A coding, socket
3 One network input M12 type 5-pin male, A coding, socket
1 4 One power supply M12 type 4-pin male, A coding, socket
5 3 M12 type female, A coding, sockets for connecting 1 to 3 compact
5 4 stations XGC S.
Portable 13.56 MHz RFID diagnostics terminal
The portable terminal XGS TP401 is designed for use in industrial applications. Its
hardened structure combined with its numerous functions make it suitable for
applications in arduous environments. It operates on Microsoft® Windows CE.NET
Professional® version 4.2. The 13.56 MHz RFID function and Ositrack® software
installed on the portable terminal enable maintenance operations to be performed on
1
the electronic tags and compact stations.
Transfer of data to a PC is made via an RS 232 communication port.
8
The portable terminal XGS TP401 comprises a:
1 Touchscreen
2 Keypad (45 keys)
3 RS 232 port
2 The following accessories are included with the terminal:
- a PC connecting cable,
- Ositrack® software (installed),
- a battery,
- a universal battery charger,
- 3 styluses,
3 - a protective cover,
- a user guide.
(2) For station and tag selection according to passing speeds, see page 8/16.
Characteristics: References: Dimensions: Connections: Curves, installation:

8/5
Characteristics 8
Ositrack® RFID 8

13.56 MHz
Characteristics of Ositrack® compact stations

Station type XGC S4901201 XGC S8901201
Certifications UL (pending)
Conformity to standards e, EN 301489-1, EN 301489-3, ETS 300330-1 and ETS 300330-2
Vibration resistance Conforming to 2 mm from 5 to 29.5 Hz / 7 gn from 29.5 to 150 Hz
EN 60068.2.27
Shock resistance Conforming to 30 g/11 ms
EN 60068.2.6
Conforming to EN 50102 Degree IK 02
Resistance to interference Conforming to IEC 61000 Resistance to electrostatic discharge, radiated electromagnetic fields, fast transients,
electrical surges, conducted and induced interference and network frequency
magnetic fields.
Dimensions, W x H x D mm C format: 40 x 40 x 15 D format: 80 x 80 x 26
RFID frequency MHz 13.56
Type of associated tag ISO 15693 and ISO 14443 standard tags.
Automatic detection of the type of tag
Nominal sensing distance Depending on associated mm 18 to 70 20 to 100
tag
Nominal supply voltage V c 24 PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage)
Supply voltage limits (including ripple) V 19.2…29
Consumption mA < 60
Serial links Type RS 485/CAN (1)
Protocol Modbus RTU or Uni-Telway (1) or CANopen (1)
Speed Bauds 9600…115 200 (automatic detection)
Display 1 dual colour LED for the communication network:
Modbus / Uni-Telway (1) / CANopen (1)
1 dual colour LED for the RFID communication
(Presence of tag / Station/tag dialogue)
Connections M12, 5-pin male, shielded connector. Only for connection to the communication
network and the supply.
Tightening torque Screws Nm <1 <3

Characteristics of electronic tags
Tag type XGH XGH XGH XGH XGH XGH
B444345 B445345 B90E340 B320345 B221346 B211345
Ambient air temperature For operation °C - 25…+ 70 - 25…+ 50 - 25…+ 70
For storage °C - 40…+ 85 - 40…+ 55 - 40…+ 85
Degree of protection IP 68 IP 65 IP 68
Standard supported ISO 14443 ISO 15693
Vibration resistance Conforming to 2 mm from 5 to 29.5 Hz/7 gn from 29.5 to 150 Hz
EN 60068.2.27
Shock resistance Conforming to 30 g/11 ms
EN 60068.2.6
Conforming to EN 50102 Degree IK 02
Dimensions mm 40 x 40 x 15 40 x 40 x 15 54 x 85.5 x 1 Ø 30 x 3 26 x 26 x 13 M18 x 1 x 12
Housing material PBT PBT PVC PC PBT PBT
Fixing method Screw or clip Screw or clip – Screw Screw or clip Screw in
8 Memory capacity
Type of memory
bytes 3 408
EEPROM
13 632 256 112 256
Type of operation Read/Write

Type of associated station XGC Sppppppp
Nominal sensing distance With station XGC S49 mm 33 30 70 48 40 18
(Read/Write) With station XGC S89 mm 48 40 100 65 55 20
Number of read cycles Unlimited
Number of write cycles Guaranteed minimum 100 000 per data bit throughout the temperature range
At 30 °C 2.5 million (typical value)
Read time ms 9.25 + 16.25 + 12 + 0.825 x n (2)
375 x n (2) 375 x n (2)
Write time ms 13 + 20 + 20 + 12 + 20 + 19 +
0.8 x n (2) 0.8 x n (2) 11.8 x n (2) 5.6 x n (2) 11.8 x n (2) 4.1 x n (2)
Data retention time 10 years
Mounting on metal support Yes (3) No Yes (3) No
(2) n = number of 16-bit words.
(3) Installation precautions: see pages 8/16 and 8/17.
Presentation, description: References: Dimensions: Connections: Curves, installation:

8/6
Characteristics (continued) 8
Ositrack® RFID 8

13.56 MHz
Characteristics of connection boxes

Connection box type Tap-off box TCS AMT31FP Ethernet box XGS Z33ETH
Certifications UL (pending)
Conformity to standards e
Ambient air temperature For operation °C - 25…+ 55 0...+ 50

For storage °C - 40…+ 85 - 40...+ 66
Relative humidity RH 30...95% without condensation
Supply voltage V c 24 PELV (limits 19.2 V...29 V). M12, 4-pin male, A coding, connector
Consumption W – <1
(connection box only)
Station connection M12 5-pin female, A coding, connector
Electromagnetic interference Conforming to IEC 61000 Level 3

Conforming to EN 55022 Class B
LED display Power on (green) - Ethernet network activity (RUN, green)

- Collision detection (COL, red)
- Diagnostics (STS, yellow)
- Fault (Err, red)
- Power on (green)
Transparent Ready Services Class – A10

Basic Web server – Available later
Basic Ethernet TCP/IP – Modbus messaging
communication service (read/write of words)
Ethernet connection Physical interface – 10 BASE-T/100BASE-TX

Transfer rate – 10/100 Mbps
Medium – Ethernet cable with M12 connection,
reference TCS ECL1M1pS2
(Telemecanique ConneXium range)
Characteristics of portable 13.56 MHz RFID diagnostics terminal

Conformity to standards e, FCC class A, Part 15225
Ambient air temperature For operation °C 0... + 50
For storage °C - 25... + 55
Relative humidity RH 5...95% without condensation
Supply voltage V 7.2 V NiMH type rechargeable battery (included with terminal)
External: c 11-18
Operating time 4 hours continuous operation (tag dialogue)
Operating system Microsoft Windows CE.NET Professional® version 4.2

8
Processor Intel technology Xscale PXA255 CPU, 400 MHz
Memory RAM SDRAM 64 Mb

Storage Internal compact Flash: 64 Mb standard (16 Mb reserved for operating system),
expandable to 128 Mb + Slot for compact Flash card
Display Screen Colour touchscreen: 72 mm x 54 mm, QVGA TFT

Resolution 320 x 240 pixels
Keypad 45 booted keys
Signalling 5 LEDs + 1 charging LED
Presentation, description: References: Dimensions: Connections: Curves, installation:

8/7
References 8
Ositrack® RFID 8

13.56 MHz
Compact stations, 13.56 MHz

105909
Description Protocols Dimensions Reference Weight

mm kg
Compact station Modbus RTU, 40 x 40 x 15 XGC S4901201 0.057
C format (1) Uni-Telway (2)
M12 male connector and
on flying lead CANopen (2)
Compact station Modbus RTU, 80 x 80 x 26 XGC S8901201 0.257

D format (1) Uni-Telway (2)
M12 male connector and
on flying lead CANopen (2)
Electronic tags
Tag type Nominal sensing Dimensions Sold in Unit reference Weight
distance mm lots of kg
XGC S4901201 according to station
XGC S49p XGC S89p
C format 33 mm 48 mm 40 x 40 x 15 – XGH B444345 0.031
3 408 bytes
105914
C format 30 mm 40 mm 40 x 40 x 15 – XGH B445345 0.031

13 632 bytes
105910
ISO badge (3) 70 mm 100 mm 54 x 85.5 x 1 10 XGH B90E340 0.005

256 bytes
Disc 48 mm 65 mm Ø 30 x 3 5 XGH B320345 0.005

112 bytes
XGH B44p345 XGH B90E340
E format 40 mm 55 mm 26 x 26 x 13 – XGH B221346 0.025
256 bytes
105913
105911
105912
Cylindrical 18 mm 20 mm M18 x 1 x 12 5 XGH B211345 0.020

256 bytes
XGH B221346 XGH B211345 XGH B320345

(1) Configuration badge XGS ZCNF01 included with station - installation guide to be ordered
separately (reference DIA4ED3051001).
(3) Customised versions on request.
Presentation, description: Characteristics: Dimensions: Connections: Curves, installation:

pages 8/4 and 8/5 pages 8/6 and 8/7 pages 8/12 and 8/13 pages 8/14 and 8/15 pages 8/16 and 8/17
8/8
Ositrack® RFID 8

13.56 MHz
Connection boxes
105915
Description For use with Supply Reference Weight

voltage kg
Ethernet box Compact stations c 24 V XGS Z33ETH 1.060
3-channel XGC S49p and
Integrated Ethernet port XGC S89p
(10/100 Mbps)
Modbus TCP/IP protocol
Class A10
TCS AMT31FP Tap-off box Compact stations c 24 V TCS AMT31FP 1.060

3-channel XGC S49p and
Modbus, Uni-Telway (1) XGC S89p
and CANopen (1)
Ositrack® terminal and accessories

105918
Description Application Reference Weight

kg
Portable 13.56 MHz Read/write operations on electronic XGS TP401 0.943
RFID diagnostics tags and diagnostics on compact
terminal (2) stations
Operating system:
Microsoft Windows CE.NET version 4.2
PF540455
Battery pack charger Portable terminal XGS TP41CH 0.675
Battery, 7.2 V NiMH Portable terminal XGS TP41BA 0.168
Compact Flash Portable terminal XBT ZGM128 0.050

memory expansion Capacity = 128 Mb
XGS TP401
XGS TP41CH Configuration badge (replacement)
Description Application Reference Weight
kg
Badge Configuration of station addresses XGS ZCNF01 0.005
105920
105921
Ositrack® documentation
kg
Ositrack® compact stations guide DIA4ED3051001 0.130
XGS TP41BA XGS ZCNF01

(2) Ositrack® software (installed), universal battery charger, PC connecting cable, 3 styluses,
protective cover, battery and user guide included with terminal.
Presentation, description: Characteristics: Dimensions Connections: Curves, installation:

8/9
Ositrack® RFID 8

13.56 MHz
Description Application Length Reference Weight
105925
m kg
Modbus network connection accessories
Modbus shielded RS485 connection between 1 TCS MCN1M1F1 0.080
connecting cable a compact station and a 2 TCS MCN1M1F2 0.115
black, IP 67 tap-off box TCS AMT31FP
5 TCS MCN1M1F5 0.270
M12 connectors, or between 2 tap-off boxes
male/female, 10 TCS MCN1M1F10 0.520
A coding (1)
Modbus shielded Connection between tap-off 2 TCS MCN1F2 0.115
pre-wired M12 box TTCS AMT31FP and 5 TCS MCN1F5 0.270
connector, IP 67, Modbus/Uni-Telway network
10 TCS MCN1F10 0.520
TCS MCN1FQM2 male/bare wires, (TSX SCA50)
A coding (1)
105927
Modus shielded Connection between tap-off 2 TCS MCN1FQM2 0.270

connecting cable, box TCS AMT31FP and
black, M12/SUB-D15, Modbus/Uni-Telway network
A coding (TSX SCA62)
Modbus shielded Modbus connection 2 TCS MCN1F9M2P 0.350

connecting cable, between tap-off box
black, M12/Mini-DIN TCS AMT31FP and a PLC
8-way, (Twido...)
A coding
TCS MCN1F9M2P Modbus SL serial link Modbus SL serial link 100 TSX CSA100 5.680
cable (Shielded dual 200 TSX CSA200 10.920
twisted pair RS485 main
500 TSX CSA500 30.000
cables)
105924
Ethernet connection accessories

Ethernet connecting Connection between the 1 TCS ECL1M1M1S2 0.080
cable, M12 Ethernet box XGS Z33ETH 2 TCS ECL1M1M2S2 0.115
ConneXium (2) and an M12 Ethernet switch
5 TCS ECL1M1M5S2 0.270
2 M12 4-pin male TCS ESU051F0
connectors, 10 TCS ECL1M1M10S2 0.520
D coding
TCS ECL1M3Mppp Ethernet shielded Connection between the 1 TCS ECL1M3M1S2 0.075
connecting cable, Ethernet box and the 3 TCS ECL1M3M3S2 0.110
ConneXium (2), Ethernet network
5 TCS ECL1M3M5S2 0.265
M12 male
10 TCS ECL1M3M10S2 0.515
535803
D coding/RJ45,
4-pin 40 TCS ECL1M3M40S2 2.000
M12 Ethernet switch – – TCS ESU051F0 0.210

IP 67, ConneXium (2)
Adaptor Ethernet connection – TCS EAAF11F13F00 –
M12 female/RJ45
Other connection accessories

TCS ESU051F0
Pre-wired M12 4-pin c 24 V supply to 2 XGS Z08L2 0.115
female connector, connection boxes 5 XGS Z08L5 0.270
A coding (1) XGS Z33ETH and
10 XGS Z08L10 0.520
TCS AMT31FP
535625
Shielded M12 5-pin – – FTX DP12F5 0.050

female, A coding,
8 connector
Shielded M12 5-pin – – FTX DP12M5 0.050
TCS EAAF11F13F00
male, A coding,
connector
Network “T” connector, RS485 network or – TCS CTN011M11F 0.035
PF540456
M12, 1 male/2 female CANopen

5-pin, A coding
Supply connector, – – XZC C12FDM40B 0.020
screw terminals,
M12 straight, A coding
TCS CTN011M11F
Protective cap M12 female connector – FTX CM12B 0.100
(Sold in lots of 10)
Network terminator, – – FTX CNTL12 0.010
M12 male 120 Ω
(1) Holder for identification legend included with product.
(2) Other ConneXium connection accessories: please refer to www.telemecanique.com.

8/10
Ositrack® RFID 8

13.56 MHz
kg
“Clip-on” 90° fixing bracket C format station: XSZ BC90 0.060
105922
XGC S4901201
C format tags:
XGH B44p345
Tags XSZ BE90 0.060
XGH B221346
XGS Z3P
“Clip-on” fixing plate C format station: XSZ BC00 0.025
XGC S4901201
C format tags:
XGH B44p345
Tags XSZ BE00 0.025
XGH B221346
Fixing plate Connection boxes XGS Z3P 0.195

TCS AMT31FP and
XGS Z33ETH
Complementary accessories
lots of kg
Key for screwing in/unscrewing Ø 18 mm – XGS Z05 0.011
806603
cylindrical tag
Identification legend for 23 x 4 mm 200 XGS Z08MKW 0.056

connecting cables
XGS Z05
Power supplies
Description Output Nominal Nominal Reference Weight
voltage power current
cV W A kg
Regulated power 24 15 0.6 ABL7 CEM24006 0.180
supply
a 100/240 V 48 2 ABL7 RE2402 0.520

8/11
Dimensions 8
Ositrack® RFID 8

13.56 MHz
Compact stations
XGC S4901201 XGC S8901201
15 40 26 80
9,8 33 16 65
4XØ4,5 4XØ5,5
40
80
(2)
14
(1)
14
(2)
(1)
(1) For CHC type screws. (3) M12 5-pin male, A coding, shielded connector.
(2) Shielded cable (length: 20 cm).
Read/write electronic tags

Square format tags
XGH B44p345 XGH B221346
15 40
9,8 33 13 26
4XØ4,5 (1)
26
40
8,8 33 4XØ3,5 (1)
(1) For CHC type screws.

Rectangular format tags Cylindrical format tags
XGH B90E340 XGH B320345 XGH B211345
1 85,5 3 12 M18X1
Ø3
Ø30
54
Connection boxes (1)

TCS AMT31FP XGS Z33ETH
=
=
50
80
50
80
IN OUT
8
=
=
51 = 115 = 51 = 115 =
130 130
(1) Allow a 110 mm clearance zone for connecting the cables.

Fixing plate XGS Z3P
= 140 =
=
2xØ4,3
60
50
74
2xØ5,4
=
2,5 = 115 =
8/12
Ositrack® RFID 8

13.56 MHz
Ositrack® RFID portable diagnostics terminal

XGS TP401
120,6
333,5
250
39,6 96
62
Fixing brackets Fixing plates

XSZ BC90 XSZ BC00
16 (1) M5 16 (1)
30
42
10
30
10
42
4,5 77,2
36,9 M5 44,3
12
44,4
8
(1) Four M4 x 14 screws (included). (1) Four M4 x 14 screws (included).
XSZ BE90 XSZ BE00
30,8 11,9 M3 10
23,9 (1)
27,4
17
6
27,4
17
6
5,5 (1)
10 M3 29,4 48,5
(1) Two M3 x 12 screws (included). (1) Two M3 x 12 screws (included).
Presentation, description: Characteristics: References: Connections: Curves, installation:

pages 8/4 and 8/5 pages 8/6 and 8/7 pages 8/8 to 8/11 pages 8/14 and 8/15 pages 8/16 and 8/17
8/13
Connections 8
Ositrack® RFID 8

13.56 MHz
Modbus connections
Stations XGC Sp901201
Pin n° Station - Modbus signal

1 Drain (Modbus-SHLD)
4 3 (1)
2 + 24 V
5 3 0 V/Modbus-GND
4 D0
1 2
5 D1
(2)
Connector casing Shielding
(1) Shielding per pair.
(2) General cable shielding.
Tap-off box TCS AMT31FP
Socket to station cabling Socket to power supply cabling Socket to another connection box Socket to industrial PLC cabling
cabling
Pin n° Signal Pin n° Signal Pin n° Signal Pin n° Signal
1 2 1 – Drain 2 1 1 c + 24 V 1 2 1 Drain 2 1 1 Drain
(Modbus-SHLD) (Modbus-SHLD) (Modbus-SHLD)
5 2 Red + 24 V 2 c + 24 V 5 2 – 5 2 –
4 3 3 Black 0 V/Modbus-GND 3 4 3 c0V 4 3 3 0 V/Modbus-GND 3 4 3 0 V/Modbus-GND
4 White D0 4 c0V 4 D0 4 D0
5 Blue D1 5 D1 5 D1
Connector Shielding Connector Shielding Connector Shielding
casing casing casing
Cable connections
TCS MCN1Fp XGS Z08L
Pin n° Signal Pin n° Signal

1 – Drain 1 Brown c + 24 V
1 2
(Modbus-SHLD) 1 2
5 2 Red + 24 V 2 White c + 24 V
4 3
3 Black 0 V/Modbus-GND 3 Blue c0V
4 3
4 White D0 4 Black c0V
5 Blue D1
Connector Shielding
casing
Mounting example for Modbus network
Premium
L1 Maximum length of bus
The maximum length of the bus (L + L1
+ l4) depends on the speed of the
IN OUT IN OUT network:
- 9600 bauds: 1000 m,
- 19 200 bauds: 500 m.
L 24 V 24 V
l1 l2 l3 l4 Maximum length of tap-offs:
l1, l2 and l3: 10 m.
Example of connection to a Telemecanique PLC
8 Direct connection Connection via a TSX SCA62
PLC PLC
TSX CSAp00 TSX CSA62

IN OUT
TCS MCN1F9M2P IN OUT
TCS MCN1FQM2
TCS MCN1M1Fp XGS Z08Lp
c 24 V
TCS MCN1M1Fp XGS Z08Lp c 24 V
Presentation, description: Characteristics: References: Dimensions: Curves, installation:

8/14
Ositrack® RFID 8

13.56 MHz
Ethernet connection
Ethernet box XGS Z33ETH
Socket to station cabling Socket to power supply cabling Cable XGS Z08L connections
Pin n° Signal Pin n° Signal Pin n° Signal
1 2 1 – Drain 2 1 1 c + 24 V 1 2 1 Brown c + 24 V
(Modbus-SHLD)
5 2 Red + 24 V 2 c + 24 V 2 White c + 24 V
4 3
4 3 3 Black 0 V/Modbus-GND 3 4 3 c0V 3 Blue c0V
4 White D0 4 c0V 4 Black c0V
5 Blue D1
Connector Shielding
casing
Ethernet socket connection Cable TCS ECL1M3MppS2

1
M12 Signal Signal RJ45
4 5 1 TD + TD + 1
2
3 TD – TD – 2
3 2 RD + RD + 3
4 RD – RD – 6
Connection example on Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP network
IP 67 IP 20
PLC
TCS ECL1M1MpS2
TCS ESU051F0
TCS EAAF11F13F00
TCS ECL1M1MpS2
TCS ECL1M3MpS2
TCS ECL1M1MpS2 ABL 7
ConneXium switch
c 24 V c 24 V c 24 V XGS Z08Lp
XGC S49/89
XGS Z33ETH XGS Z33ETH XGS Z33ETH TCS MCN1M1Fp

8
XGC S49/89 XGC S49/89
Presentation, description: Characteristics: References: Dimensions: Curves, installation:

8/15
Curves 8
Ositrack® RFID 8

13.56 MHz
Detection zones of compact stations Angular positioning between station and tag
(1)
Sn K
1
α 0,85
0
y 60˚ 0 60 90 α (˚)
(1) Recommended crossing zone: between 0.4 and 0.8 Sn. K = correction coefficient to be applied to the nominal sensing
distance.
Read distance = nominal sensing distance x K.
Station and tag selection according to passing speeds
Read time with station XGC S49ppppp Write time with station XGC S49ppppp
Passing speed (m/min) Passing speed (m/min) 1 XGH B444345
300 250 2 XGH B445345
3 XGH B211345
250 4 XGH B320345
200
5 XGH B90E340
200 6 XGH B221346
150
4
150 1
100
100 1 2
2
50
50 3
3-4-5-6 5-6
0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Number of words Number of words
Read time with station XGC S89ppppp Write time with station XGC S89pppp
Passing speed (m/min) Passing speed (m/min) 1 XGH B444345
600 450 2 XGH B445345
3 XGH B211345
400
500 4 XGH B320345
350 5 XGH B90E340
400 300 6 XGH B221346
4
250
300 1
200
2
200 1 150
2
100
100 3
50
3-4-5-6
0 0 5-6
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Application example
Read time with station XGC S49ppppp Read time with station XGC S89ppppp
On an assembly line, the object passing speed is 100 m/min. The application requires that 60 words be read.
Passing speed (m/min) Passing speed (m/min)
8 300 600
250 500
200 400
150 300
1 1
100 200
2 2
50 100
3-4-5-6 3-4-5-6
0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Station XGC S49 cannot be used; no Ositrack ® tag can be read Station XGC S89 can be used; only tags XGH B444345 and XGH B445345 meet the
under these conditions (Speed/Number of words) requirements (Speed/Number of words)
Presentation, description: Characteristics: References: Dimensions: Connections:

8/16
Installation precautions 8
Ositrack® RFID 8

13.56 MHz
Minimum mounting distances between system components

Distance between stations
Minimum distance between 2 identical stations in relation to their positioning and type of tag used
e1 Tag C format XGC S4 stations D format XGC S8 stations

e1 e2 e3 e1 e2 e3
XGH B90E340 310 550 120 430 750 280
XGH B221346 200 320 100 280 530 260
XGH B320345 140 360 110 310 540 240
e2 e3 XGH B211345 210 180 60 200 370 170
XGH B444345 90 190 30 310 400 160
XGH B445345 110 170 30 310 380 160
Distance between tags

Minimum distance between 2 identical tags in relation to their positioning and type of station used
Tag C format XGC S4 stations D format XGC S8 stations

e1
e1 e2 e1 e2
XGH B90E340 35 60 110 140
e2
XGH B221346 50 10 120 50

XGH B320345 70 50 190 60
XGH B211345 40 10 120 20
XGH B444345 20 10 70 40
XGH B445345 10 10 60 10
Minimum permissible mounting distances in a metal structure

Stations XGC S49/S89 and Tags XGH B90E340 and XGH B211345 Tag XGH B320345
Tags XGH B221346/B444345/B445345
No metal parts within 25 mm of the tag. (1)
e
e e
e
e e
e
e u 15 mm.
e u 20 mm. e u 20 mm.
(1) Tightening torque y 1 N.m.
Tags Nominal sensing distance Reduced sensing distance

with presence of metal
XGC S49 XGC S89 XGC S49 XGC S89
XGH B90E340 70 100 58 80
XGH B221346 40 55 30 33
XGH B320345 48 65 45 56
XGH B211345 18 20 16 15
XGH B444345 33 48 28 34
XGH B445345 30 40 24 28
Presentation, description: Characteristics: References: Dimensions: Connections:

8/17
9/0
Contents 0
9 - Machine cabling accessories
b Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/6
Pre-wired connectors
b Connectors Ø 8 mm and M8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/8
b Connectors M12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/10
b Connectors 1/2" 20UNF and 7/8" 16UN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/12
Jumper cables
b Jumper cables M8-M8 and M8-M12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/14
b Jumper cables Ø 8 mm-M12 and M8-M12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/16
b Jumper cables M12-M12 and DIN 43650 A-M12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/18
Pre-wired connectors, Application series

b Connectors M8, M12, 1/2" 20UNF and 7/8" 16UN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/22
Jumper cables, Application series

b Connectors M8-M12 and M12-M12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/24
Connectors
b Connectors M8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/26
b Connectors M12 and 1/2" 20UNF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/28
b Connectors M18, DIN 43650A and type 717 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/32
b Connectors M23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/34
Adaptors and accessories

b Connector adaptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/36
Passive splitter boxes

b Telefast®, ABE9 splitter boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/38
Selection
b Cabling system for sensors with connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/44
9/1
Selection guide 9
Machine cabling accessories 9
Description Pre-wired connectors Jumper cables (female–male)
Type M8 M12 1/2" 7/8" M8 – M8 M8 – M12 M12 – M8 M12 – M12 DIN – M12
Ø8 20UNF 16UN
Female p p (1) p p (M8) p (M12) p (DIN)
Male p p (1) – p (M8) p (M12) p (M8) p (M12)
Connection Clip p – p –
Screw p p
threaded
Model Straight p p –
Elbowed p p (3) p – p
Number 3 4 3 4 5 3 5 3 4 5 3 4 3 4 5 3
of pins
Signalling Without LED p – p p
With LED p – p – –
Nominal c 10…30 V p – p – –
voltage (with LED)
a 30, – p – – p – p
c 36 V
a 60, p – p –
c 75 V
a 125, – –
c 150 V
a 250, – p – p – – p –
c 300 V
a 250 V – p –
Current (A) 4 6 4& 4

6
Cable 0.5 m p – p (2) – –
length
1m p – p (2) – p
2m p p
5m p p (3) p –
10 m p p (3) p –
9
Reference XZ CP XZ CR
Pages 9/8 9/10 9/12 9/13 9/14 to 9/17 9/18 to 9/21 9/19
and and
9/9 9/11
(1) With 4 or 5 pins. p Characteristics applicable to the cabling accessory.
(2) For male pre-wired connectors. – Characteristics not applicable to the cabling accessory.
(3) For female pre-wired connectors.
9/2
9
9
Pre-wired connectors - Application series Jumper cables (female–male) - Application series
M8 M12 1/2" 20UNF 7/8" 16UN M8 – M12 M12 – M12
p p p p (M8) p (M12)
– – – p (M12) p (M12)
– –
p (1) p (1)
p p
– p p – –
3 4 4 5 3 4 3 4 5
p p
– –
– –
– –
p – p –
– –
– p – p
– –
4 6 4
– –
– –
– p – p
p p
p –
9
XZ CPA XZ CRA
9/22 and 9/23 9/24 and 9/25
(1) Tightening by hand recommended.

p Characteristics applicable to the cabling accessory.
– Characteristics not applicable to the cabling accessory.
9/3
Selection guide 9
Description Connectors
Type M8 M12 1/2" 20UNF M18 DIN 43650 Type 717 M23
Female p
Male p – p
Connection Clip –
Screw threaded p
Model Straight p – p
Elbowed p
Number of pins 3 4 5 3 4 5 19
Signalling Without LED p
With LED – p –
Nominal voltage c 10…30 V – p –

(with LED)
a 30, c 36 V – p –
a 60, c 75 V p – p
a 125, c 150 V – p –
a 250, c 300 V – p –
a 250 V – p –
Current (A) 4 3 4 16 7.5
Cable length 0.5 m –
1m –
2m –
5m –
10 m –
9
Reference XZ CC
Pages 9/26, 9/27 9/28, 9/31 9/29, 9/32 9/33 9/34 9/35
9/31
9/4
9
9
Connector adaptors Passive splitter boxes (1)
M12 7/8" 16UN 4 or 8 channel
– p (M12)
p –
– –
p –
p p
– –
4 5 19
p p
– p
– c 24 V
– p – –
– –
– –
p – p –
– –
4 6 4 per channel
Length of wires: 0.10 m –
9
XZ CE ABE 9
9/36 9/38
(1) Other splitter boxes, including Advantys FTB etc. Please refer to the Telemecanique Power supplies, splitter boxes and interfaces catalogue.
Other versions Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
9/5
Presentation 9
Cabling systems
Parallel cabling system Traditional cabling
Enclosure
Connector Pre-wired Jumper cable

connector
Series cabling system Cabling on AS-Interface bus
AS-Interface bus
AS-Interface bus
I
I
O
O
Connector Pre-wired connector Jumper cable
9/6
Presentation, Machine cabling accessories 9
characteristics 9
Cabling accessories selection
Cabling accessories Connector adaptor XZ CE for cable gland entry
Connector XZ CC
Pre-wired connector XZ CP
Jumper cable XZ CR
Splitter box ABE 9
Terminal block
Control
Terminal block
Integral
connector Control
Remote
connector
Connection example
Pre-wired connector
Connector
adaptor Jumper cable
Splitter box
Characteristics
Type of cable Cable for pre-wired connectors and Bare cables XZ CB4Lpppp Application series cables
jumper cables
Ambient air temperature
For operation °C - 35…+ 90 - 25... + 95
For storage °C - 35…+ 100 - 40…+ 100 - 25... + 95
Colour Matt black
Material Sheath PUR/PVC PvR (PVC/NBR) PVC
Conductor insulation PVC PVC
Manufacturing method
Nominal voltage V
Without silicone and without unmoulding agent
320 conforming to 300 a 250 c 300 9
DIN VDE 0110 (III/3)
Insulation voltage kV 2.5 2 conforming to NF C 32-201-1 3
Flame resistance C2 conforming to NF C 32-070 C2 conforming to NF C 32-070 C2 conforming to NF C 32-070
Environmental resistance Resistant to soluble, mineral or synthetic oils at 90 °C Resistant to solvents and detergents
Bending radius Flexing: 15 x external diameter R min. = 3 x external diameter
Static: 10 x external diameter Static: 10 x external diameter
Tensile strength N/mm² 20…45 10…35 11
Hardness 80 +/- 5 shores A 70 +/- 5 shores A 80 +/- 5 shores A
Certification – – UL / CSA
9/7
References, Machine cabling accessories 9
characteristics, Pre-wired connectors, Ø 8 mm and M8

dimensions,
connections 9
Connector type Female, Ø 8 mm, Female, Ø 8 mm, Female, Ø 8 mm, Female, Ø 8 mm,
straight elbowed elbowed with PNP LED elbowed with NPN LED
Number of pins 3
References
PUR cable L=2m XZ CP0166L2 XZ CP0266L2 XZ CP0366L2 XZ CP0466L2
(see page 9/7)
L=5m XZ CP0166L5 XZ CP0266L5 XZ CP0366L5 XZ CP0466L5
L = 10 m XZ CP0166L10 XZ CP0266L10 XZ CP0366L10 XZ CP0466L10
Weight (kg) 0.050 (L = 2 m),

0.110 (L = 5 m),
0.215 (L = 10 m)
Characteristics
Connection type Clip (1) Clip (1)
Degree of protection IP 67 (when correctly clipped together) IP 65 (when correctly clipped together)
Ambient air temperature Static cable - 35…+ 90 °C - 35…+ 90 °C

Flexing cable - 5…+ 90 °C - 5…+ 90 °C
Cabling Ø 5.2 mm cable, Ø 5.2 mm cable,
conductor c.s.a.: 3 x 0.34 mm2 conductor c.s.a.: 3 x 0.34 mm2
LED indicators – 2 PNP LEDs 2 NPN LEDs

Nominal voltage a 60 V, c 75 V c 10…30 V
Nominal current 4A 4A
Insulation resistance > 109 Ω > 109 Ω
Contact resistance ≤ 5 mΩ ≤ 5 mΩ
Dimensions
XZ CP0166Lp XZ CP0266Lp XZ CP0366Lp, XZ CP0466Lp
Ø8,4 19,7 20 (1)

Ø8,4
Ø8,4
27,9
28
34,6
L
L
Ø7,5 Ø7,5 Ø7,5
(1) 2 LEDs limited to c 10…30 V max.

L = 2, 5 or 10 m
Connections
LED connection
XZ CP0p66Lp XZ CP0366Lp XZ CP0466Lp
9 BK PNP
BN +
NPN
BU –
4 1 3
BK Signal BK
Signal
BU BN 4 4
3 1
YW YW
GN GN
3
BU –
1
BN +
(1) Clip together connectors, without clamping ring.
9/8
9
9
Female, M8, straight Female, M8, elbowed Female, M8, elbowed Female, M8, elbowed Female, M8, straight Female, M8, elbowed Male, M8, straight
with PNP LED with NPN LED
3 4 3
XZ CP0566L2 XZ CP0666L2 XZ CP0766L2 XZ CP0866L2 XZ CP0941L2 XZ CP1041L2 XZ CP2737L05
0.060 (L = 2 m), 0.080 (L = 2 m), 0.030 (L = 0.5 m),

0.120 (L = 5 m), 0.180 (L = 5 m), 0.050 (L = 1 m),
0.225 (L = 10 m) 0.360 (L = 10 m) 0.080 (L = 2 m)
Screw threaded (metal clamping ring) Screw threaded (metal clamping ring) Screw threaded (metal clamping ring) Screw threaded and clip
(metal clamping ring)
IP 67 (with clamping ring correctly tightened) IP 67 (with clamping ring correctly tightened) IP 67 (with clamping ring correctly tightened) IP 67 (with clamping
ring correctly tightened)
- 35…+ 90 °C - 35…+ 90 °C - 35…+ 90 °C - 35…+ 90 °C
- 5…+ 90 °C - 5…+ 90 °C - 5…+ 90 °C - 5…+ 90 °C
Ø 5.2 mm cable, Ø 5.2 mm cable, Ø 5.2 mm cable, Ø 5.2 mm cable,
conductor c.s.a.: 3 x 0.34 mm2 conductor c.s.a.: 3 x 0.34 mm2 conductor c.s.a.: 4 x 0.34 mm2 conductor c.s.a.:
3 x 0.34 mm2
– 2 PNP LEDs 2 NPN LEDs – –
a 60 V, c 75 V c 10…30 V a 60 V, c 75 V a 60 V, c 75 V
4A 4A 4A 4A
> 109 Ω > 109 Ω > 109 Ω > 109 Ω
≤ 5 mΩ ≤ 5 mΩ ≤ 5 mΩ ≤ 5 mΩ
XZ CP0566Lp XZ CP0666Lp XZ CP0766Lp, XZ CP0866Lp XZ CP0941Lp XZ CP1041Lp XZ CP2737Lp
Ø10 M8x1 19,7 20 (1) Ø10 M8x1 19,7 Ø10 M8x1

Ø10
Ø10
Ø10
27,9
27,9
28
M8x1 M8x1 M8x1

34,6
34,6
39,5
L
L
L
L
Ø7,5 Ø7,5 Ø7,5 Ø7,5 Ø7,5 Ø7,5

L = 2, 5 or 10 m L = 0.5, 1 or 2 m
LED connection
XZ CP0p66Lp XZ CP0766Lp XZ CP0866Lp XZ CPpp41Lp XZ CP2737Lp
BK PNP NPN BK WH BK
9
1
BN + BU –
4 3 4 2 4
BK Signal BK Signal
BU BN 4 4 3 1 BN BU
3 1 1 3
YW YW
GN GN BU BN
BU – BN +
3 1
9/9
characteristics, Pre-wired connectors, M12

dimensions,
Connector type Female, M12, Female, M12, Female, M12, Female, M12, Female, M12,
elbowed with LED elbowed with LED elbowed with LED straight elbowed
Number of pins 3 4
References
PUR cable L = 0.5 m –
(see page 9/7)
L=1m –
L=2m XZ CP2540L2 XZ CP1340L2 XZ CP1440L2 XZ CP1141L2 XZ CP1241L2
L=5m XZ CP2540L5 XZ CP1340L5 XZ CP1440L5 XZ CP1141L5 XZ CP1241L5
L = 10 m XZ CP2540L10 XZ CP1340L10 XZ CP1440L10 XZ CP1141L10 XZ CP1241L10
Weight (kg) 0.080 (L = 2 m), 0.090 (L = 2 m),

0.180 (L = 5 m), 0.190 (L = 5 m),
0.350 (L = 10 m) 0.370 (L = 10 m)
Characteristics
Connection type Screw threaded Screw threaded (metal clamping ring) Screw threaded (metal clamping
(stainless steel ring)
clamping ring)
Degree of protection IP 67 (with clamping ring correctly tightened) IP 67 (with clamping ring correctly
tightened)
Ambient air temperature Static cable - 35…+ 90 °C - 35…+ 90 °C
Flexing cable - 5…+ 90 °C - 5…+ 90 °C
Cabling Ø 5.2 mm cable, Ø 5.2 mm cable,
conductor c.s.a.: 3 x 0.34 mm2 conductor c.s.a.: 4 x 0.34 mm2
LED indicators 2 PNP LEDs 2 PNP LEDs 2 NPN LEDs –
Nominal voltage c 10…30 V a 250 V, c 300 V
Dimensions
XZ CP2540Lp, XZ CP1340Lp, XZ CP1440Lp XZ CP1141Lp XZ CP1241Lp
28 (1) Ø14,8 M12x1 27,4

Ø14,8
Ø14,8
34,5
36,3
M12x1
44
M12x1
L
L
L
Ø12 Ø11
Ø11
9 L = 2, 5 or 10 m
Connections
LED connection
XZ CP2540Lp, XZ CP1p40Lp XZ CP2540Lp, XZ CP1340Lp XZ CP1440Lp XZ CP1p41Lp
PNP NPN
BU BK BN + BU BK
1 3
BU –
3 4 BK Signal Signal 3 4
BK
4 4
YW YW
2 1 2 GN 2 GN 2 1
BN
3
BU –
1
BN + WH BN
9/10
9
9
Female, M12, straight Female, M12, straight Female, M12, elbowed Male, M12, straight Male, M12, straight
4 5 5 4 5
– XZ CP1541L05 XZ CP1564L05
– XZ CP1541L1 XZ CP1564L1
XZ CP1169L2 XZ CP1164L2 XZ CP1264L2 XZ CP1541L2 XZ CP1564L2
XZ CP1169L5 XZ CP1164L5 XZ CP1264L5 –
XZ CP1169L10 XZ CP1164L10 XZ CP1264L10 –
0.105 (L = 2 m), 0.115 (L = 2 m), 0.030 (L = 0.5 m), 0.040 (L = 0.5 m),
0.260 (L = 5 m), 0.270 (L = 5 m), 0.050 (L = 1 m), 0.065 (L = 1 m),
0.500 (L = 10 m) 0.520 (L = 10 m) 0.085 (L = 2 m) 0.115 (L = 2 m)
Screw threaded (metal clamping ring) Screw threaded (metal clamping ring)
IP 67 (with clamping ring correctly tightened) IP 67 (with clamping ring correctly tightened)
- 35…+ 90 °C - 35…+ 90 °C
- 5…+ 90 °C - 5…+ 90 °C
Ø 5.7 mm cable, Ø 5.9 mm cable, Ø 5.2 mm cable, Ø 5.9 mm cable, conductor c.s.a.:
conductor c.s.a.: 4 x 0.34 mm2 conductor c.s.a.: 5 x 0.34 mm2 conductor c.s.a.: 4 x 0.34 mm2 4 x 0.34 mm2 + 1 x 0.5 mm2
– – – –
a 250 V, c 300 V a 30 V, c 36 V a 250 V, c 300 V a 30 V, c 36 V
4A 4A 4A 4A
> 109 Ω > 109 Ω > 109 Ω > 109 Ω
≤ 5 mΩ ≤ 5 mΩ ≤ 5 mΩ ≤ 5 mΩ
XZ CP1169Lp, XZ CP1164Lp XZ CP1264Lp XZ CP1541Lp, XZ CP1564Lp
Ø14,8 M12x1 27,4 Ø14,8 M12x1

Ø14,8
34,5
46,8
M12x1
44
L
L
Ø11 Ø11 Ø11
L = 2, 5 or 10 m L = 0.5, 1 or 2 m
9
XZ CP1169Lp XZ CP1p64Lp XZ CP1541Lp XZ CP1564Lp
Y/G BK BU BK BK BU BK BU
3 4 3 4 4 3 4 3
5 5
Y/G Y/G
2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2
BU BN BK/WH BN BN WH BN BK/WH
9/11
characteristics, Pre-wired connectors, 1/2" 20UNF and 7/8" 16UN

dimensions,
Connector type Female, 1/2" 20UNF, straight Female, 1/2" 20UNF, elbowed
Number of pins 3
References
PUR cable L=2m XZ CP1865L2 XZ CP1965L2
(see page 9/7)
L=5m XZ CP1865L5 XZ CP1965L5
L = 10 m XZ CP1865L10 XZ CP1965L10
Weight (kg) 0.080 (L = 2 m),

0.180 (L = 5 m),
0.350 (L = 10 m)
Characteristics
Connection type Screw threaded (metal clamping ring)
Ambient air temperature - 35…+ 80 °C
Cabling Ø 5.2 mm cable, conductor c.s.a.: 3 x 0.34 mm2
LED indicators –
Nominal voltage a 250 V, c 300 V
Nominal current 4A
Insulation resistance > 109 Ω
Contact resistance ≤ 5 mΩ
Dimensions
XZ CP1865Lp XZ CP1965Lp
Ø14,8 1/2" 20UNF 1/2" 20UNF 26,7

Ø14,8
34,5
43,7
L
L
Ø11 Ø11
L = 2, 5 or 10 m
Connections
XZ CP1p65Lp
GN
1
9 3 2
RD/WH RD/BK
9/12
9
9
Female, 7/8" 16UN, straight Female, 7/8" 16UN, straight Female, 7/8" 16UN, straight Female, 7/8" 16UN, straight
3 5
XZ CP1662L2 XZ CP1670L2 XZ CP1764L2 XZ CP1771L2
XZ CP1662L5 XZ CP1670L5 XZ CP1764L5 XZ CP1771L5
– XZ CP1670L10 XZ CP1764L10 XZ CP1771L10
0.180 (L = 2 m), 0.180 (L = 2 m), 0.185 (L = 2 m), 0.190 (L = 2 m),

0.420 (L = 5 m) 0.420 (L = 5 m), 0.460 (L = 5 m), 0.475 (L = 5 m),
0.820 (L = 10 m) 0.900 (L = 10 m) 0.950 (L = 10 m)
Screw threaded (metal clamping ring) Screw threaded (metal clamping ring)
- 35…+ 80 °C - 35…+ 80 °C
Ø 5 mm cable Ø 5 mm cable Ø 5.9 mm cable Ø 6.7 mm cable
conductor c.s.a.: 3 x 0.5 mm2 conductor c.s.a.: 3 x 0.5 mm2 conductor c.s.a.: 5 x 0.34 mm2 conductor c.s.a.: 5 x 0.5 mm2
– – – –
a 250 V a 250 V a 250 V a 250 V
6A 6A 4A 6A
> 109 Ω > 109 Ω > 109 Ω > 109 Ω
≤ 5 mΩ ≤ 5 mΩ ≤ 5 mΩ ≤ 5 mΩ
XZ CP1662Lp, XZ CP1670Lp, XZ CP1764Lp, XZ CP1771Lp
Ø25,2
Ø14,2 7/8" 16UN
61,5
L
L = 2, 5 or 10 m
XZ CP1662Lp XZ CP1670Lp XZ CP1764Lp XZ CP1771Lp
BN BU BK BK/WH Y/G Y/G
2 3 2 3
1 1 BU BN BU BN
2
1
3
4
5 1
2
3
4
5 9
BK GN BK BK/WH BK BK/WH
9/13
characteristics, Jumper cables, M8-M8 and M8-M12

dimensions,
connections 9
Male connector type M8, 3-pin, straight
Female connector type M8, 3-pin, straight M8, 3-pin, elbowed M8, 4-pin, straight
Number of conductors 3 3 3
References
PUR cable L=1m XZ CR2705037R1 XZ CR2706037R1 XZ CR2709037S1
L=2m XZ CR2705037R2 XZ CR2706037R2 XZ CR2709037S2
L=2m 0.090
Characteristics
Connection type Male: screw threaded and clip. Female: screw threaded. Metal clamping ring.
Ambient air temperature Static - 35…+ 90 °C
Flexing - 5…+ 90 °C
Conductor c.s.a. 3 x 0.34 mm2
Cable diameter 5.2 mm
Nominal current 4A
Dimensions
XZ CR2705037Rp XZ CR2706037Rp XZ CR2709037Sp
M8x1 M8x1 M8x1 27,9 M8x1 M8x1

19,7
Ø10
Ø10
Ø10
Ø10
39,5 L 34,6 39,5 L 34,6

Ø10
39,5 L
Ø10 M8x1
L = 1 or 2 m
9 Connections
4 1 1 4 4 1 1 4 4 1 1 4 2
1 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 3 1
4 4 4 4 4 4
9/14
9
9
M8, 3-pin, straight
M8, 4-pin, elbowed M12, 5-pin, straight M12, 5-pin, elbowed
3 3 3
XZ CR2710037S1 XZ CR2711037T1 XZ CR2712037T1
XZ CR2710037S2 XZ CR2711037T2 XZ CR2712037T2
0.060 0.065 0.065
0.090 0.093 0.093
Male: screw threaded and clip. Female: screw threaded. Metal clamping ring
IP 67
- 35…+ 90 °C
- 5…+ 90 °C
3 x 0.34 mm2
5.2 mm
a 60 V, c 45 V
4A
> 109 Ω
≤ 5 mΩ
XZ CR2710037Sp XZ CR2711037Tp XZ CR2712037Tp
M8x1 27,9 M8x1 M12x1 M8x1 34,5

27,4
19,7
Ø10
Ø10
Ø10
39,5 L 39,5 L
Ø14,8
39,5 L 44
Ø10 M8x1 Ø14,8
M12x1
L = 1 or 2 m
9
3 4 3 4
4 1 1 4 2 4 1 1 4 1 1
5 5
1 3 3 3 1 3 3 3
1 3 3 3 3 1 4 4 4 4
4 4 2 1 2 1
9/15
characteristics, Jumper cables, Ø8 mm-M12 and M8-M12

dimensions,
connections 9
Clip
Female connector type Ø 8 mm, 3-pin, straight Ø 8 mm, 3-pin, elbowed
Number of conductors 3
References
PUR cable L=1m XZ CR1501040G1 XZ CR1502040G1
(see page 9/7) L=2m XZ CR1501040G2 XZ CR1502040G2
Weight (kg) 0.050 (L = 1 m), 0.080 (L = 2 m)
Characteristics
Connection type Male: screw threaded. Female: clip (1)
Degree of protection IP 67 (when correctly clipped together or with clamping ring correctly tightened)
Ambient air temperature Static cable - 35…+ 90 °C
Flexing cable - 5…+ 90 °C
Nominal current 4A
Dimensions
XZ CR1501040Gp XZ CR1502040Gp
M12x1 M12x1 27,9

19,7
Ø14,8
Ø14,8
Ø8,4
46,8 L 34,6 46,8 L

Ø8,4
L = 1 or 2 m
Connections
XZ CR1501040Gp, XZ CR1502040Gp
4 3 4
1 1
5
3 3 3 1
4 4
1 2
(1) Clip together connector, without clamping ring.
9/16
9
9
Screw threaded
M12, 3-pin, straight M12, 4-pin, straight
M8, 3-pin, straight M8, 3-pin, elbowed M8, 4-pin, straight M8, 4-pin, elbowed
3 4
XZ CR1509040H1 XZ CR1510040H1 XZ CR1509041J1 XZ CR1510041J1

XZ CR1509040H2 XZ CR1510040H2 XZ CR1509041J2 XZ CR1510041J2
0.050 (L = 1 m), 0.080 (L = 2 m) 0.055 (L = 1 m), 0.090 (L = 2 m)
Male and female: screw threaded

IP 67 (with clamping ring correctly tightened)
- 35…+ 90 °C
- 5…+ 90 °C
3 x 0.34 mm2 4 x 0.34 mm2
5.2 mm
a 60 V, c 75 V
4A
> 109 Ω
≤ 5 mΩ
XZ CR1509040Hp, XZ CR1509041Jp XZ CR1510040Hp, XZ CR1510041Jp
M12x1 M8x1 M12x1 27,9

19,7
Ø14,8
Ø14,8
46,8 L 34,6 46,8 L

M8x1 Ø10
L = 1 or 2 m
XZ CR1509040Hp, XZ CR1510040Hp XZ CR1509041Jp, XZ CR1510041Jp
4 3 4 4 3
1 1 2 1 1 4 2
5 5 2 2
3 3 3 1 3 1
3 3
4 4 4 4
1 2 1 2
9/17
characteristics, Jumper cables, M12-M12 and DIN 43650 A-M12

dimensions,

Female connector type M12, 3-pin, straight M12, 3-pin, elbowed M12, 3-pin, straight M12, 3-pin, elbowed
References
PUR cable L=1m XZ CR1511040A1 XZ CR1512040A1 XZ CR1511040E1 XZ CR1512040E1
(see page 9/7) L=2m XZ CR1511040A2 XZ CR1512040A2 XZ CR1511040E2 XZ CR1512040E2
Weight (kg) 0.065 (L = 1 m), 0.095 (L = 2 m)
Characteristics
Connection type Male and female: screw threaded
Nominal current 4A
Dimensions
XZ CR1511040Ap, XZ CR1511040Ep XZ CR1512040Ap, XZ CR1512040Ep
M12x1 M12x1 M12x1 34,5

27,4
46,8 L 44
Ø14,8
46,8 L
Ø14,8
Ø14,8
M12x1
Ø14,8
L = 1 or 2 m
Connections
XZ CR1511040Ap, XZ CR1512040Ap XZ CR1511040Ep, XZ CR1512040Ep
4 3 3 4 4 3 3 4
1 1 1 1
5 5 5 2 2 5
3 3 3 3
4 4
1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1
9/18
9
9
M12, 3-pin, straight

M12, 3-pin, straight M12, 3-pin, elbowed M12, 3-pin, straight M12, 3-pin, elbowed DIN 43650 A, elbowed
3
XZ CR1511062B1 XZ CR1512062B1 XZ CR1511062F1 XZ CR1512062F1 XZ CR1523062K1

XZ CR1511062B2 XZ CR1512062B2 XZ CR1511062F2 XZ CR1512062F2 XZ CR1523062K2
0.065 (L = 1 m), 0.095 (L = 2 m) 0.110 (L = 1 m),
0.140 (L = 2 m)

- 35…+ 90 °C
- 5…+ 90 °C
3 x 0.5 mm2 3 x 0.75 mm 2
5.2 mm 6 mm
a 30 V, c 36 V
4A
> 109 Ω
≤ 5 mΩ
XZ CR1511062Bp, XZ CR1511062Fp XZ CR1512062Bp, XZ CR1512062Fp XZ CR1523062Kp
M12x1 M12x1 M12x1 34,5 M12x1

27,4
29
Ø14,8
46,8 L 44 Ø14,8
Ø14,8
46,8 L
Ø14,8
M12x1 46,8 L 47 27
Ø14,8
L = 1 or 2 m
XZ CR1511062Bp, XZ CR1512062Bp XZ CR1511062Fp, XZ CR1512062Fp XZ CR1523062Kp
4 3 1 1 3 4 4 3 1 3 4
5 2 2 5 5 5 4 3 1 1 3
3 5
4 4 3 1 2
1 2 5 5 2 1 1 2 5 5 2 1 4 4
1 2 5 4
9/19
characteristics, Jumper cables, M12-M12 (continued)

dimensions,

Female connector type M12, 4-pin, straight M12, 4-pin, elbowed
References
PUR cable L=1m XZ CR1511041C1 XZ CR1512041C1
(see page 9/7) L=2m XZ CR1511041C2 XZ CR1512041C2
Weight (kg) 0.065 (L = 1 m), 0.095 (L = 2 m)
Characteristics
Connection type Male and female: screw threaded
Nominal current 4A
Dimensions
XZ CR1511041Cp XZ CR1512041Cp
M12x1 M12x1 M12x1 34,5

27,4
46,8 L 44
Ø14,8
46,8 L
Ø14,8
Ø14,8
M12x1 Ø14,8
L = 1 or 2 m
Connections
XZ CR1511041Cp, XZ CR1512041Cp
4 3 1 1 3 4
5 2 2 5
3 3
4 4
1 2 2 1
9/20
9
9
M12, 5-pin, straight

M12, 5-pin, straight M12, 5-pin, elbowed
5
XZ CR1511064D1 XZ CR1512064D1
XZ CR1511064D2 XZ CR1512064D2
0.080 (L = 1 m), 0.130 (L = 2 m)

- 35…+ 90 °C
- 5…+ 90 °C
4 x 0.34 mm2 + 1 x 0.5 mm2
5.9 mm
a 30 V, c 36 V
4A
> 109 Ω
≤ 5 mΩ
XZ CR1511064Dp XZ CR1512064Dp
M12x1 M12x1 M12x1 34,5

27,4
Ø14,8
46,8 L 44
Ø14,8
46,8 L
Ø14,8
M12x1
Ø14,8
L = 1 or 2 m
XZ CR1511064Dp, XZ CR1512064Dp
4 3 1 1 3 4
5 2 2 5
3 3
4 4
1 2 5 5 2 1
9/21
characteristics, Pre-wired connectors, Application series

M8, M12, 1/2" 20UNF and 7/8" 16UN
dimensions,
connections 9
Connector type Female, M8, Female, M8, Female, M12, Female, M12, Female, M12,
straight straight straight elbowed elbowed
Number of pins 3 4 4 4 5
References
PVC cable L=2m – – XZ CPA1141L2 XZ CPA1241L2 XZ CPA1164L2
(see page 9/7) L=5m XZ CPA0566L5 XZ CPA0941L5 XZ CPA1141L5 XZ CPA1241L5 XZ CPA1164L5
L = 10 m XZ CPA0566L10 XZ CPA0941L10 XZ CPA1141L10 XZ CPA1241L10 XZ CPA1164L10
Weight (kg) L=2m – – 0.090 0.090 0.110

L=5m 0.175 0.200 0.210 0.210 0.250
L = 10 m 0.340 0.400 0.410 0.410 0.485
Characteristics
Connection type Screw threaded, smooth, hexagonal, stainless steel 316L clamping ring (1)
Clamping ring dimension 9 mm 14 mm
Degree of protection IP 68 IP 69K
Ambient air temperature Static cable usage - 25…+ 85 °C
Cabling Cable Ø 5.0 mm Ø 5.3 mm Ø 5.3 mm Ø 5.3 mm Ø 5.7 mm
Conductor c.s.a. 3 x 0.34 mm2 4 x 0.34 mm 2 4 x 0.34 mm2 5 x 0.34 mm2
Nominal voltage a 60 V, c 75 V a 250 V, c 300 V
(1) Tightening by hand recommended
Dimensions
XZ CPA0566Lp, XZ CPA0941Lp XZ CPA1141Lp XZ CPA1241Lp, XZ CPA1164Lp
Ø10 M8x1 Ø14 M12x1 27

Ø14
31
M12x1
38
46
L
Ø8
Ø10
L
Ø10
L = 2, 5 or 10 m
Connections
9 XZ CPA0566Lp XZ CPA0941Lp XZ CPA1141Lp, XZ CPA1241Lp XZ CPA1164Lp
BK BK WH BU BK BU BK
4 3 4 3 4
4 2
5
BU BN 3 1 Y/G
3 1
2 1 2 1
BU BN
WH BN BK/WH BN
9/22
9
9
Female, 1/2" 20UNF, Female, 1/2" 20UNF, Female, 7/8" 16UN, Female, 7/8" 16UN,
straight elbowed straight straight
3 3 3 3
– – – –
XZ CPA1865L5 XZ CPA1965L5 XZ CPA1662L5 XZ CPA1670L5
XZ CPA1865L10 XZ CPA1965L10 XZ CPA1662L10 XZ CPA1670L10
– – – –
0.210 0.250 0.280 0.280
0.410 0.485 0.530 0.530
Screw threaded, smooth, hexagonal, stainless steel 316L clamping ring (1) Screw threaded knurled clamping ring
14 mm –
IP 69K IP 67
- 25…+ 85 °C - 25…+ 85 °C
Ø 5.0 mm Ø 5.0 mm
3 x 0.34 mm2 3 x 0.34 mm2 3 x 0.5 mm2 3 x 0.5 mm2
a 250 V, c 300 V a 250 V, c 300 V a 250 V a 250 V
4A 4A 6A 6A
> 109 Ω > 109 Ω > 109 Ω > 109 Ω
≤ 5 mΩ ≤ 5 mΩ ≤ 5 mΩ ≤ 5 mΩ
XZ CPA1865Lp XZ CPA1965Lp XZ CPA1662Lp, XZ CPA1670Lp
Ø14 1/2" 20UNF 27 25 7/8" 16UN

Ø14
1/2" 20UNF
38
46
50
L
Ø10
L
Ø10
Ø15
L = 5 or 10 m
XZ CPA1865Lp, XZ CPA1965Lp XZ CPA1662Lp XZ CPA1670Lp 9

GN BN BU BK BK/WH
1 2 3 2 3
1 1
3 2
RD/WH RD/BK
BK GN
9/23
characteristics, Jumper cables, Application series

M8-M12 and M12-M12
dimensions,
connections 9
Male connector type M12, 4-pin, straight M12, 3-pin, straight

Female connector type M8, 4-pin, straight M12, 3-pin, straight
Number of conductors 4 3
References
PVC cable L=2m XZ CRA150941J2 XZ CRA151140A2
(see page 30208/3) L=5m XZ CRA150941J5 XZ CRA151140A5
Weight (kg) L=2m 0.100 0.095

L=5m 0.210 0.200
Characteristics
Connection type Screw threaded, smooth, hexagonal, stainless steel 316L clamping ring (1)
Clamping ring dimension 14/9 mm 14 mm
Degree of protection IP 68 IP 69K
Ambient air temperature Static cable usage - 25…+ 85 °C
Cabling Cable Ø 5.3 mm Ø 5.0 mm
Conductor c.s.a. 4 x 0.34 mm2 3 x 0.34 mm2
Nominal current 4A
Dimensions
XZ CRA150941Jp XZ CRA151140Ap
51 L 31 51 L 46
Ø14
Ø10
Ø14
Ø14
M12x1 M8x1 M12x1 M12x1
L = 2 or 5 m
Connections
XZ CRA150941Jp XZ CRA151140Ap
4 3 4 3 3 4
1 1 4 2 1 1
5 2 2 5 5
3 3 3 1 3 3
4 4 4 4
1 2 1 2 2 1
9/24
9
9

4 5
XZ CRA151141C2 XZ CRA151164D2
XZ CRA151141C5 XZ CRA151164D5
0.105 0.120
0.220 0.260
Screw threaded, smooth, hexagonal, stainless steel 316L clamping ring (1)
14 mm
IP 69K
- 25…+ 85 °C
Ø 5.3 mm Ø 5.7 mm
4 x 0.34 mm2 5 x 0.34 mm2
a 250 V, c 300 V
4A
> 109 Ω
≤ 5 mΩ
XZ CRA151141Cp XZ CRA151164Dp
51 L 46 51 L 46
Ø14
Ø14
Ø14
Ø14
M12x1 M12x1 M12x1 M12x1
L = 2 or 5 m
XZ CRA151141Cp XZ CRA151164Dp
4 3 1 1 3 4 4 3 1 1 3 4
5 2 2 5 5 2 2 5
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
1 2 2 1 1 2 5 5 2 1
9/25
characteristics, Connectors, M8
dimensions,
connections 9
Connector type Female, M8, straight Female, M8, elbowed Female, M8, straight Female, M8, elbowed
Number of pins 3
Cable connection By axial IDC (Insulation Displacement To solder terminals
Connector)
References
Plastic body Metal clamping ring XZ CC8FDM30V XZ CC8FCM30V XZ CC8FDM30S XZ CC8FCM30S
Plastic clamping ring –
Weight (kg) 0.010
Characteristics
Connection type Screw threaded (metal clamping ring) Screw threaded (metal clamping ring)
Degree of protection IP 67 (with clamping ring correctly tightened) IP 67 (with clamping ring correctly tightened)
Ambient air temperature - 25…+ 70 °C - 40…+ 85 °C
Cabling By IDC. To solder terminals.

Conductor diameter: 1…1.55 mm Maximum conductor c.s.a.: 0.25 mm 2
Cable gland: M9.5 x 1. Cable gland: M9.5 x 1.
Maximum clamping capacity: 5 mm Maximum clamping capacity: 5 mm
LED indicators – –
Dimensions
XZ CC8FDM30V XZ CC8FCM30V XZ CC8FDM30S XZ CC8FCM30S
M8x1 40 M8x1 28
24,5
12,5
23
42
37
M8x1 M8x1
(1) (1)
(1)
(1)
(1) Cable gland: M9.5 x 1

Connections
XZ CC8FDM30p, XZ CC8FCM30p
3 1
9/26
9
9
Female, M8, straight Female, M8, elbowed Female, M8, straight Female, M8, elbowed Male, M8, straight
4 3
By axial IDC (Insulation Displacement Connector) To solder terminals
XZ CC8FDM40V XZ CC8FCM40V XZ CC8FDM40S XZ CC8FCM40S XZ CC8MDM30V

–
0.010
Screw threaded (metal clamping ring) Screw threaded (metal clamping ring) Screw threaded (metal
clamping ring)
IP 67 (with clamping ring correctly tightened) IP 67 (with clamping ring correctly tightened) IP 67 (with clamping ring
correctly tightened)
- 25…+ 70 °C - 40…+ 85 °C - 40…+ 85 °C
By IDC. To solder terminals. By IDC.

Conductor diameter: 1…1.55 mm Maximum conductor c.s.a.: 0.25 mm2 Maximum conductor c.s.a.:
Cable gland: M9.5 x 1. Cable gland: M9.5 x 1. 0.25 mm2
Maximum clamping capacity: 5 mm Maximum clamping capacity: 5 mm Cable gland: M9.5 x 1.
Maximum clamping
capacity: 5 mm
– – –
a 60 V, c 75 V a 60 V, c 75 V a 60 V, c 75 V
4A 4A 4A
> 109 Ω > 109 Ω > 109 Ω
≤ 10 mΩ ≤ 5 mΩ ≤ 5 mΩ
XZ CC8FDM40V XZ CC8FCM40V XZ CC8FDM40S XZ CC8FCM40S XZ CC8MDM30V
M8x1 40 M8x1 28 M8x1 Ø10,2

24,5
12,5
23
42
43,5
37
M8x1 M8x1
(1) (1)
(1)
(1) (1)
(1) Cable gland: M9.5 x 1
XZ CC8FDM40p, XZ CC8FCM40p XZ CC8MDM30V
2 4 4
1 3 1 3
9/27
characteristics, Connectors, M12 and 1/2" 20UNF

dimensions,
“Snap-C”
connector (1)
Connector type Female, M12, Female, M12, Female, M12, Female, M12,
straight elbowed elbowed straight
Number of pins 4 4 (2)
Cable connection To screw terminals By axial IDC
(Insulation Displace-
ment Connector)
References
Plastic body Metal clamping ring XZ CC12FDM40B XZ CC12FCM40B – XZ CC12FDM40V
Plastic clamping ring XZ CC12FDP40B XZ CC12FCP40B XZ CC12FCP42B –
Weight (kg) 0.020 0.015
Characteristics
Connection type Screw threaded (plastic or metal clamping ring, depending on model) Screw threaded (metal
clamping ring)
Ambient air temperature - 40…+ 85 °C - 25…+ 70 °C
Cabling To screw terminals. By IDC. Maximum

Maximum conductor c.s.a.: 0.75 mm2. conductor c.s.a.: 0.5
Cable gland: n° 7 plastic (Pg 7). mm2
Clamping capacity: 3 to 6 mm Cable gland: n° 7
plastic (Pg 7)
LED indicators – 2 PNP LEDs –
Nominal voltage a 125 V, c 150 V c 10…30 V z 60 V max.
Nominal current 3A 3A 4A
Insulation resistance > 1012 Ω > 1012 Ω > 109 Ω
Contact resistance ≤ 8 mΩ ≤ 8 mΩ < 8 mΩ
Dimensions
XZ CC12FDp40B XZ CC12FCp40B, XZ CC12FCP42B XZ CC12FDM40V
M12x1 36 M12x1 M12x1

37
20,5
45
54
(1) 25 (1)
(1)
(1) Cable gland: n° 7 plastic (Pg 7)

Connections
XZ CC12FDp40B, XZ CC12FCp40B, XZ CC12FCP42B LED connection for XZ CC12FCP42B XZ CC12FDM40V
3 4 BN GN (BU) (BK)
9 BK
3 4
2 1 YW
BU 2 1
(WH) (RD)
(1) Connector incorporating IDC (Insulation Displacement Connector) for simple and quick direct in-line connection to cable, without the need of a screwdriver or
soldering iron, specially designed for cabling Telemecanique brand products fitted with an M12 “Snap-C” compatible connector. Specifically for use with 4-core
PvR cable, ref. XZ-CB4L pppp (see page 5/3).
(2) For secure assembly, it is necessary to connect at least 3 pins of the connector.
9/28
9
9
Female, M12, Female, M12, Female, 1/2" 20UNF, Female, 1/2" 20UNF,
straight elbowed straight elbowed
5 3
To screw terminals
XZ CC12FDM50B XZ CC12FCM50B XZ CC20FDM30B XZ CC20FCM30B

–
0.020
Screw threaded (metal clamping ring)
- 40…+ 85 °C - 40…+ 85 °C
To screw terminals.
Maximum conductor c.s.a.: 0.75 mm2.
Cable gland: n° 7 plastic (Pg 7).
Clamping capacity: 3 to 6 mm
– –
a 30 V, c 36 V a 250 V
3A 4A
> 1012 Ω > 1012 Ω
≤ 8 mΩ ≤ 8 mΩ
XZ CC12FDM50B XZ CC12FCM50B XZ CC20FDM30B XZ CC20FCM30B
M12x1 36 M12x1 1/2" 20UNF 36 1/2" 20UNF

37
37
20,5
20,5
54
54
(1) 25 (1) 25
(1) (1)
XZ CC12FpM50B XZ CC20FpM30B
3 4 1
5
9
2 1
3 2
9/29
characteristics, Connectors, M12 and 1/2" 20UNF

dimensions,
Connector type Male, M12, straight Male, M12, elbowed Male, M12, elbowed
Number of pins 4
Cable connection To screw terminals
References
Plastic body Metal clamping ring XZ CC12MDM40B XZ CC12MCM40B –
Plastic clamping ring XZ CC12MDP40B XZ CC12MCP40B XZ CC12MCP42B
Weight (kg) 0.025
Characteristics
Connection type Screw threaded (plastic or metal clamping ring, depending on model)
Cabling To screw terminals.

LED indicators – 2 PNP LEDs
Nominal voltage a 125 V, c 150 V c 10…30 V
Dimensions
XZ CC12MDp40B XZ CC12MCp40B, XZ CC12MCP42B
M12x1 41 M12x1
37
20,5
60
(1) 23 9
(1)

Connections
XZ CC12MDp40B, XZ CC12MCp40B, XZ CC12MCP42B LED connection for XZ CC12MCP42B
4 3 BN GN
BK
1 2 YW
BU
9
9/30
9
9
Male, M12, straight Male, M12, elbowed Male, 1/2" 20UNF, straight Male, 1/2" 20UNF, elbowed
5 3
To screw terminals
XZ CC12MDM50B XZ CC12MCM50B XZ CC20MDM30B XZ CC20MCM30B

–
0.025
- 40…+ 85 °C - 40…+ 85 °C
To screw terminals.
– –
a 30 V, c 36 V a 250 V
3A 4A
> 1012 Ω > 1012 Ω
≤ 8 mΩ ≤ 8 mΩ
XZ CC12MDM50B XZ CC12MCM50B XZ CC20MDM30B XZ CC20FCM30B
M12x1 41 M12x1 1/2" 20UNF 1/2" 20UNF

41
37
20,5
37
60
60
20,5
(1) 23 9
(1) 23 9
(1) (1)
XZ CC12MpM50B XZ CC20MpM30B
4 3 1
5
1 2 2 3
9/31
characteristics, Connectors, M18, DIN 43650A and type 717

dimensions,
Connector type Female, M18, straight Female, M18, elbowed

Number of pins 4
Cable connection To screw terminals
References
Plastic body Metal clamping ring –
Plastic clamping ring XZ CC18FDP40B XZ CC18FCP40B
Weight (kg) 0.035
Characteristics
Connection type Screw threaded (plastic clamping ring)
Cabling To screw terminals.

LED indicators –
Nominal voltage a 250 V
Nominal current 16 A
Dimensions
XZ CC18FDP40B XZ CC18FCP40B
M18x1 43 M18x1
42
23,5
56
(1) 31
(1)

Connections
XZ CC18FpP40B
3 2
4 1
9/32
9
9
Female, DIN 43650 A, elbowed Female, type 717, elbowed

4 5
To screw terminals
XZ CC43FCP40B XZ CC51FCP50B
–
0.035 0.060
With locking screw With locking screw
IP 65 (with connector correctly locked) IP 67 (with connector correctly locked)
- 40…+ 125 °C - 25…+ 90 °C
To screw terminals.
– –
a 250 V a 250 V, c 300 V
16 A 16 A
> 108 Ω > 1010 Ω
≤ 4 mΩ ≤ 5 mΩ
36 29,5 33
14
50
28
50
60
(1) 25
(1) 25
1 2 1 4
2 3 9
9/33
characteristics, Connectors, M23

dimensions,
Connector type Female, M23, straight Female, M23, elbowed

Number of pins 19
Cable connection To solder terminals
References
Metal body and metal Contacts numbered XZ CC23FDM190S XZ CC23FCM190S
clamping ring anti-clockwise
Weight (kg) 0.080 0.150
Characteristics
Connection type Screw threaded (metal clamping ring)
Cabling To solder terminals.

Maximum conductor c.s.a.: 1 mm2
Cable gland: n° 13 metal (Pg 13.5).
LED indicators –
Nominal current 7.5 A
Dimensions
XZ CC23FDM190S XZ CC23FCM190S
52
65,5
58
SW 20
SW 20
(1)
(1)
(1) Cable gland: n° 13 metal (Pg 13.5)

Connections
XZ CC23FpM190S
6
7 5
8 15 4
16 14
9 9
10
17
19
18
13
2
3
11 1
12
9/34
9
9
Male, M23, straight Male, M23, elbowed (compatible with enclosure feed-throughs ABE 7ACC82)
19
To solder terminals
XZ CC23MDM190S XZ CC23MCM190S
0.080 0.150
- 25…+ 110 °C
To solder terminals.
Maximum conductor c.s.a.: 1 mm2.
Cable gland: n° 13 metal (Pg 13.5).
–
a 60 V, c 75 V
7.5 A
> 1016 Ω
≤ 5 mΩ
XZ CC23MDM190S XZ CC23MCM190S
52
51
58
SW 20
SW 20
(1)
(1)
(1) Cable gland: n° 13 metal (Pg 13.5)
XZ CC23MpM190S
6
5 7
4 15 8
14 16
3
2
13
19
18
17
9
10
9
1 11
12
9/35
characteristics, Connector adaptors

dimensions,
connections 9
Type of 5-pin connector M12, male 7/8" 16UN, male
Size of tapped hole 11 (Pg 11) 13 (Pg 13.5) M20 x 1.5 13 (Pg 13.5)
References
4-wire connector adaptors, plastic body XZ CE11P124M XZ CE13P124M XZ CE03P124M –
5-wire connector adaptors, metal body – XZ CE13M125M XZ CE03M125M XZ CE13M785M
Weight (kg) 0.020 0.020 (4-wire), 0.050

0.025 (5-wire)
Characteristics
Connection type Screw threaded
Cabling By 100 mm length wires. With cable ends
Conductor c.s.a. 4 x 0.34 mm2 XZ CEp3P124M : 4 x 0.34 mm2 5 x 1 mm 2

XZ CEp3M125M : 4 x 0.34 mm2 + 1 x 0.5 mm2
Nominal voltage a 250 V, c 300 V XZ CEp3P124M : a 250 V, c 300 V a 250 V, c 300 V
XZ CEp3M125M : a 30 V, c 36 V
Contact resistance y 5 mΩ
Dimensions
XZ CE11P124M XZ CEp3P124M XZ CEp3M125M XZ CE13M785M
(1) (1) (1) (1)

19,5
19,5
19,5
23,5
14,5
13
11,5
13
13
10
10
10
M12 x 1 M12 x 1 M12 x 1 7/8" 16UN
(1) Thread size 11 (1) Thread size 13 or M20 x 1.5 (1) Thread size 13 or M20 x 1.5 (1) Thread size 13
Connections
XZ CEppP124M XZ CEppP125M XZ CE13M785M
9 BK BU Y/G
4 BK BU
3 BN BU
4 3
5
1 2 Y/G 4 2
3
1 2 5 1
BN WH
BN WH
WH BK
9/36
References 9
Accessories
Accessories
806083
Description Unit Weight

reference kg
Fitting tool XZ CG0223 0.120
for M23 connector
Blanking plugs XZ LG102 0.005

for M12 female connectors
(sold in lots of 10)
XZ CG0223
Markers for splitter boxes XZ LG101 0,010
(strips of 10 units)
806082
XZ LG102 PvR cables, 4 x 0.5 mm2 L = 25 m XZ CB4L0025 1.115

(see characteristics, page 9/7)
806081
L = 50 m XZ CB4L0050 2.220
X3
L = 100 m XZ CB4L0100 4.490

XZ LG101
L = 500 m XZ CB4L0500 25.700
806084
L = 1000 m XZ CB4L1000 46.300
XZ CB4L pppp
9/37
Presentation 9
IP 67 passive splitter boxes 9
Telefast®, ABE9 splitter boxes
Presentation
ABE9 passive splitter boxes for M12 connectors make it possible to eliminate long
and difficult cabling operations. Due their modularity and their dimensions, they are
the ideal solution for a wide variety of customer applications.
Connection to the processing unit can either be made by connector or by multicore
cable of different lengths.
IP 67 protection allows these products to be used within processes or machines in
harsh environments (splashing water, oil, dust, etc.).
The splitter boxes, available in 4 or 8 channel versions, allow connection of up to 16
signals maximum, depending on the version (2 per channel).
The characteristics of splitter boxes ABE 9C12 are as follows:

b Connection of sensors and actuators using M12, 5-pin connectors.
b Modularity: 4 or 8 channels.
b Fixing system and connection to the processing unit conforming to market
standards:
v fixing centres,
v M23, 19-pin connector, enabling the use of pre-formed cables in order to reduce
installation time and the risk of error,
v multicore cable, 5 or 10 metres long. The splitter box comprises a connection cover
fitted with plug-in terminals, which provides considerable flexibility for:
- the replacement of damaged parts,
- modification of cable length.
Base units ABE 9C12ppLpp enable the use of 2 separate commons which, for
example, can be used for the management of an emergency stop. This function is
accessible beneath the terminal cover using 2 removable links. If both links are
removed, the 2 supplies become independent.
The use of a Y-connector allows 2 signals to be connected to the same M12 channel
on the splitter box.
Example: splitter box ABE 9C1281 (8 channels) enables the connection of
16 signals to the processing unit.
The Y-connector is available in 2 versions:

b M12-M12 for connection of two M12 connectors to a single M12 channel on the
splitter box,
b M8-M12 for connection of two M8 connectors to a single M12 channel on the
splitter box.
Complete reference = Splitter box only + Connector with cable

ABE 9C1240L05 = ABE 9C1240M + ABE 9XCA1405



Connector only
ABE 9CM12C
Description: Characteristics: References: Dimensions: Connections:

page 9/39 page 9/40 page 9/41 page 9/42 page 9/43
9/38
Description 9
Description
Passive splitter boxes ABE 9C12ppC23 have the following on the front face:
1
1 Four or eight M12 female connectors (depending on model) for connection of
sensors and actuators (2 channels per connector).
2
2 Eight or sixteen channel status indicator lights (depending on model).
3 One “Power on” indicator light on the splitter box (depending on model).
4 One M23, 19-pin male connector.
7 5 Four or eight channel marker labels.
3 6 One splitter box marker label.
5 7 Splitter box fixing holes.
Passive splitter boxes ABE 9C12ppLpp have the following on the front face:
1
1 Four or eight M12 female connectors (depending on model) for connection of
sensors and actuators (2 channels per connector).
2
2 Eight or sixteen channel status indicator lights (depending on model).
3 Two “Power on” indicator lights on the splitter box (depending on model).
4 One removable connection cover fitted with plug-in terminals.
7 5 Four or eight channel marker labels.

3
6 One splitter box marker label.
5 7 Splitter box fixing holes.
Presentation: Characteristics: References: Dimensions: Connections:

9/39
Characteristics, IP 67 passive splitter boxes 9
substitution 9
Splitter box type ABE 9C12p0C23 ABE 9C12p1C23 ABE 9C12p0Lpp, ABE 9C12p1Lpp,
ABE 9C12p0M ABE 9C12p1M
Product certifications cULus
Temperature Operation °C - 20…+ 80
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 68-2-6, Hz 10 ≤ f ≤ 57 (constant amplitude = 1.5 mm)

test Fc 57 ≤ f ≤ 150 (constant acceleration = 0.20 gn)
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC/EN 68-2-2 30 gn, for 11 ms
Insulation group VDE 0110 Category 3
Mounting All positions
Mechanical fixing M4 screw fixing
Channel characteristics
Number of channels 4 or 8 (depending on model)
Type of connection per channel M12, 5-pin female connectors
Nominal voltage cV 24
Current per channel A 4 maximum
Contact resistance mΩ 5
Power supply status indication – Green LED – Green LED
Channel status indication – Yellow LED – Yellow LED
Connection characteristics
Type of connection M23, 19-pin male connector Multicore cable
Total current in commons 1 mm2 supply wire A 16
0.75 mm2 supply wire A 12
Separation of commons Without Without or with (by removing links BR1 and
BR2, see connections on page 9/43)
Substitution table
Previous range New range
Splitter boxes with connection by M23 connector
XZ LC1241C3 ABE 9C1241C23
Splitter boxes with connection by cable
XZ LC1241L5 ABE 9C1241L05
XZ LC1241L10 ABE 9C1241L10
XZ LC1240L10 ABE 9C1240L10
9 XZ LC1280L5
XZ LC1281L10
ABE 9C1280L05
ABE 9C1281L10
XZ LC1280L10 ABE 9C1280L10
Accessories
XZ LG102 FTX CM12B
XZ LC1220C1 FTX CY1212
Presentation: Description: References: Dimensions: Connections:

9/40
References 9
References
Splitter boxes with connection by M23 connector
562421 Number of Connection LED Reference Weight
channels by indicator kg
4 4 x M12 female connectors With ABE 9C1241C23 0.080
562511
Without ABE 9C1240C23 0.080
8 8 x M12 female connectors With ABE 9C1281C23 0.140

Without ABE 9C1280C23 0.140
Splitter boxes with connection by cable

Number of Connection Length LED Reference Weight
channels by m indicator kg
4 4 x M12 female 5 With ABE 9C1241L05 0.680
ABE 9C124pC23
connectors Without ABE 9C1240L05 0.680
ABE 9C128pC23
10 With ABE 9C1241L10 1.700

Without ABE 9C1240L10 1.700
562422
8 8 x M12 female 5 With ABE 9C1281L05 1.610

connectors Without ABE 9C1280L05 1.610
562512
10 With ABE 9C1281L10 3.060

Without ABE 9C1280L10 3.060
Splitter boxes only, M12

Number of For use with connector LED Reference Weight
channels terminal with cable indicator kg
4 ABE 9CM12C ABE 9XCA14pp With ABE 9C1241M 0.060
Without ABE 9C1240M 0.060
8 ABE 9CM12C ABE 9XCA18pp With ABE 9C1281M 0.100

Without ABE 9C1280M 0.100
ABE 9C124pLpp ABE 9C128pLpp Separate components

Type No. of For use with splitter box Length Reference Weight
chan-
nels m kg
Terminal – ABE 9C124pM – ABE 9CM12C 0.040
108886
block ABE 9C128pM

connector (1)
Connectors 4 ABE 9C124pM 5 ABE 9XCA1405 1.060
with cable
108887
10 ABE 9XCA1410 2.080
8 ABE 9C128pM 5 ABE 9XCA1805 1.510

10 ABE 9XCA1810 2.240
Accessories
Description Composition Reference Weight
kg
Sealing plugs For M8 connector (lot of 10) FTX CM08B 0.100
ABE 9C128pM For M12 connector (lot of 10) FTX CM12B 0.100
ABE 9XCA1ppp
Y-connectors Connection of 2 x M8 connectors to M12 FTX CY1208 0.020
connector on splitter box
Connection of 2 x M12 connectors to M12 FTX CY1212 0.030
connector on splitter box
Marker labels Lot of 12 ABE 9XLA10 –
108768
(1) To be cabled by user.
FTX CY1208
Presentation: Description: Characteristics: Dimensions: Connections:

9/41
Dimensions, IP 67 passive splitter boxes 9
connections 9
Dimensions
ABE 9C124pC23 ABE 9C124pLpp
50,2 50,2
Ø4,5 Ø4,5
92,2
92,2
73
73
4,5
4,5
4,5
15,5 33
4,5
20,4 39
36,5
26,5 15,5 33
42 39
ABE 9C128pC23 ABE 9C128pLpp

50,2 50,2
2xØ4,5 2xØ4,5
34
34
149,2
149,2
73
73
4,5
4,5
15,5 33
4,5
4,5
20,4 39
36,5
26,5 15,5 33
42 39
FTX CY1208 FTX CY1212

45
45
15 33 15 35
Y-connector connection
9 FTX CY1208
M8 M8
FTX CY1212
M12 M12
female female female female
1 1 1 1
3 3 2 2
4 3 3
4 4 4
5 5
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5
M12 male M12 male
Presentation: Description: Characteristics: References: Connections:

9/42
ABE 9C124pC23
Item Contact
1…4/3
1…4/1
1…4/5
1/4
1/2
2/4
2/2
3/4
3/2
4/4
4/2
1/4 15
1/2 7
2/4 5
+
–
12
11 1
2/2 4
10 18 2
3/4 16 17 13
3/2 8 9 19 3
4/4 3 16 14
8 15 4
4/2 14 7
6
5
4 4 4 4 1 and 3/1 19
2 and 4/1 19
3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1
1 and 3/3 6 M23 connector
5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 2 and 4/3 6
1 2 3 4 1…4/5 12
ABE 9C128pC23
Item Contact
1…8/3
1…8/1
1…8/5
1/4 15
1/4
1/2
2/4
2/2
3/4
3/2
4/4
4/2
5/4
5/2
6/4
6/2
7/4
7/2
8/4
8/2
1/2 7
2/4 5 12
+
–
11 1
2/2 4 10 18 2
3/4 16 17 13
3/2 8 9 19 3
4/4 3 16 14
8 15 4
4/2 14 7 5
6
5/4 17
5/2 9
6/4 2 M23 connector
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
6/2 13
3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 7/4 11
5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 7/2 10
8/4 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8/2 18
1, 3, 5 & 7/1 19
2, 4, 6 & 8/1 19
1, 3, 5 & 7/3 6
2, 4, 6 & 8/3 6
1…8/5 12
ABE 9C124pLpp
Item Terml. Wire
– 1,3/3
– 2,4/3
1,3/1
2,4/1
2/4
1/4
1/2
2/4
2/2
2/2
4/4
4/2
(1) (1) 1/4 1 White

BR1 BR2 1/2 9 Grey/pink
+
2/4 2 Green 9 11 13 16 14 12 10
2/2 10 Red/blue
BR1 BR2
3/4 3 Yellow
-1 +1 1 3 PE 4 2 +2 -2
3/2 11 White/green
4/4 4 Grey
4/2 12 Brown/green 5 7 15 8 6
1 and 3/1 +1 Brown 1

2 and 4/1 +2 Brown 2
4 4 4 4 1 and 3/3 –1 Blue 1
3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 2 and 4/3 –2 Blue 2
1…4/5 PE Green/yellow
5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2
1 2 3 4
(1) BR1 and BR2: removable link.
ABE 9C128pLpp
Item Terml. Wire
2,4,6,8/3
1,3,5,7/1
1,3,5,7/3
2,4,6,8/1
1/4 1 White
1/2 9 Grey/pink
2/4
2/2
3/4
3/2
4/4
4/2
5/5
5/2
6/4
6/2
7/4
7/2
8/4
8/2
1/4
1/2
(1) (1)
BR1 BR2 2/4 2 Green 9 11 13 16 14 12 10
+
+
–
2/2 10 Red/blue
BR1 BR2
3/4 3 Yellow
-1 +1 1 3 PE 4 2 +2 -2
3/2 11 White/green
4/4 4 Grey
5 7 15 8 6
4/2 12 Brown/green
5/4 5 Pink
5/2 13 White/yellow
6/4
6/2
6
14
Red
Yellow/brown
9
7/4 7 Black
7/2 15 White/grey
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 8/4 8 Violet
3 1 3 1 3 13 1 3 13 13 1 3 1 8/2 16 Grey/brown
1, 3, 5 & 7/1 +1 Brown 1
5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2
2, 4, 6 & 8/1 +2 Brown 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1, 3, 5 & 7/3 –1 Blue 1
2, 4, 6 & 8/3 –2 Blue 2
1…8/5 PE Green/yellow
(1) BR1 and BR2: removable link.
Presentation: Description: Characteristics: References: Dimensions:

9/43
Selection of cabling Machine cabling accessories 9
accessories 9
Cabling system for sensors with connector
Photo-electric sensors
Sensor type Type of connection Suitable pre-wired Suitable connectors Suitable jumper cables
connectors
Reference Page Reference Page Reference Page
XUA pppppS M8, 3-pin XZ CP0166Lp 9/8 XZ CC8FDM30V 9/26 XZ CR1501040Gp 9/16
XZ CP0266Lp 9/8 XZ CC8FCM30V 9/26 XZ CR1502040Gp 9/16
XZ CP0566Lp 9/9 XZ CC8FDM30S 9/26
XZ CP0666Lp 9/9 XZ CC8FCM30S 9/26
XZ CP0366Lp (1) 9/8
XZ CP0766Lp (1) 9/9
XZ CP0466Lp (2) 9/8
XZ CP0866Lp (2) 9/9
XUD pppppM8 M8, 4-pin XZ CP0941Lp 9/9 XZ CC8FDM40V 9/27 XZ CR1509041Jp 9/17
XUM pppppM8 XZ CP1041Lp 9/9 XZ CC8FCM40V 9/27 XZ CR1510041Jp 9/17
XUV KpppppS
XZ CC8FDM40S 9/27
XUV FppM8
XZ CC8FCM40S 9/27
XUp pppppppD M12, 4-pin XZ CP1141Lp 9/10 XZ CC12FDM40B 9/28 XZ CR1511041Cp 9/20
XUp pppppM12 XZ CP1241Lp 9/10 XZ CC12FDP40B 9/28 XZ CR1512041Cp 9/20
XUR pppppD
XZ CC12FCM40B 9/28
XUV FpppM12
XZ CC12FCP40B 9/28
XZ CC12FDM40V 9/28
XUp ppppppppK 1/2" 20UNF, 3-pin XZ CP1865Lp 9/12 XZ CC20FDM30B 9/29 –

XZ CP1965Lp 9/12 XZ CC20FCM30B 9/29
Limit switches
Switch type Type of connection Suitable pre-wired Suitable connectors Suitable jumper cables
connectors
XCM DppppM12 M12, 4-pin (1 for earth wire) XZ CP1169Lp 9/11 XZ CC12FDM40B 9/28 XZ CR1511041Cp 9/20
ZCM DpppM12 XZ CC12FDP40B 9/28 XZ CR1512041Cp 9/20
XZ CC12FCM40B 9/28
XZ CC12FCP40B 9/28
XZ CC12FDM40V 9/28
XCK PppppM12 M12, 4-pin without earth XZ CP1141Lp 9/10 XZ CC12FDM40B 9/28 XZ CR1511041Cp 9/20
ZCP ppM12 XZ CP1241Lp 9/10 XZ CC12FDP40B 9/28 XZ CR1512041Cp 9/20
XZ CC12FCM40B 9/28
XZ CC12FCP40B 9/28
XZ CC12FDM40V 9/28
ZCM DppC12 M12, 5-pin XZ CP1164Lp 9/11 XZ CC12FDM50B 9/29 XZ CR1511064Dp 9/21
ZCM DppL08R12 XZ CP1264Lp 9/11 XZ CC12FCM50B 9/29 XZ CR1512064Dp 9/21
XCK DppppM12
ZCD ppM12
XCK JpppppD
ZCM DppL08U78 7/8" 16UN, 5-pin XZ CP1771Lp 9/13 – –
XCK JpppppA
Note: for sensors with relay output or contacts, check that they are compatible with the nominal voltage and nominal current of the cabling accessory.
(1) With LED for 3-wire c PNP.
(2) With LED for 3-wire c NPN.
9/44
Selection of cabling Machine cabling accessories 9
accessories (continued) 9
Cabling system for sensors with connector
Proximity sensors
Sensor type Type of connection Suitable pre-wired Suitable connectors Suitable jumper cables
connectors
XSp ppppppppS M8, 3-pin XZ CP0166Lp 9/8 XZ CC8FDM30V 9/26 XZ CR1501040Gp 9/16
XSp ppppppM8 XZ CP0266Lp 9/8 XZ CC8FCM30V 9/26 XZ CR1502040Gp 9/16
XSp ppppppL01M8
XZ CP0566Lp 9/9 XZ CC8FDM30S 9/26
XZ CP0666Lp 9/9 XZ CC8FCM30S 9/26
XZ CP0366Lp (1) 9/8
XZ CP0766Lp (1) 9/9
XZ CP0466Lp (2) 9/8
XZ CP0866Lp (2) 9/9
XSp ppppppppD M12, 3 or 4-pin XZ CP1141Lp 9/10 XZ CC12FDM40B 9/28 XZ CR1511041Cp 9/20
XSp ppppppM12 XZ CP1241Lp 9/10 XZ CC12FDP40B 9/28 XZ CR1512041Cp 9/20
XSp ppppppL01M12
XZ CP1340Lp (1) 9/10 XZ CC12FCM40B 9/28
XZ CP2540Lp (1) 9/10 XZ CC12FCP40B 9/28
XZ CP1440Lp (2) 9/10 XZ CC12FDM40V 9/28
XZ CC12FCP42B (1) 9/28
XSp ppppppU20 1/2" 20UNF, 3-pin XZ CP1865Lp 9/12 XZ CC20FDM30B 9/29

XSp ppppppppK XZ CP1965Lp 9/12 XZ CC20FCM30B 9/29
Pressure switches, vacuum switches and analogue pressure sensors

Sensor or switch type Type of connection Suitable pre-wired Suitable connectors Suitable jumper cables
connectors
XML ppppppC11 DIN 43650 A, 4-pin – XZ CC43FCP40B 9/33 XZ CR1523062Kp 9/19
XML EpppppC21
XML EpppppD21 M12, 5-pin XZ CP1164Lp 9/11 XZ CC12FDM50B 9/29 XZ CR1511064Dp 9/21
XZ CP1264Lp 9/11 XZ CC12FCM50B 9/29 XZ CR1512064Dp 9/21
XML FpppDpppp M12, 4-pin XZ CP1141Lp 9/10 XZ CC12FCp40B 9/28 XZ CR1511041Cp 9/21
XZ CP1241Lp 9/10 XZ CC12FDp40B 9/28 XZ CR1512041Cp 9/21
XZ CC12FDM40V 9/28
XML FpppEpppp 7/8" 16UN, 5-pin XZ CP1764Lp 9/13 – –
Note: for sensors with relay output or contacts, check that they are compatible with the nominal voltage and nominal current of the cabling accessory.
(1) With LED for 3-wire c PNP.
(2) With LED for 3-wire c NPN.
9/45
10/0
Contents 0
10 - Appendices
Index
b Product reference index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 10/2
Technical information
b Protective treatment of equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 10/8
b Product standards and certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 10/10
b Degrees of protection provided by enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 10/12
10
10/1
Product reference index 10
XCC 1514TSppp 7/14 XCK J161A 5/86 XCR Z0p 5/119, XE2S P3151 5/49
A 5/125
XCC 1514TSMppp 7/15 XCK J161D 5/84 XE3N P21pp 5/49,
AB1 FU10135U 1/111 and 5/74,
XCC 1912PSpppN 7/17 XCK J161H29 5/80
and 5/121 5/94
2/102 XCC 1930TSpppN 7/17 XCK J167A 5/86
XCR Z1p 5/119 and
AB1 R11 5/74 XCC 2506PS81ppp 7/21 XCK J167D 5/84
XCR Z42 5/121 5/113
ABE 9C1240ppp 9/40 XCC 2510PS81ppp 7/21 XCK J167H29 5/80
XCR Z90p 5/121 XE3S P21pp /49,
and XCC 2514TS81pp 7/21 XCK J50511H29 5/80 5/74,
XCS Appp 5/164
9/41 XCC 2912PS81ppp 7/23 XCK J50513H29 5/80 5/94
XCS Bppp 5/164
ABE 9C1241ppp 9/40 XCC 2930TS81ppp 7/23 XCK J50541H29 5/80 and
and XCS Cppp 5/164 5/113
XCC 3506PSppppp 7/27 XCK J50559H29 5/80
9/41 XCS DMC59pp 5/168 XEP3 S1W2 5/152
XCC 3510PSppppp 7/27 XCK J561H29 5/80
ABE 9C1280C23 9/40 and XCS DMC59pL01M8 5/169 XEP3 S1W2B524 5/152
XCK J567H29 5/80
and 7/44 XCS DMC79pp 5/168 XEP3 S1W2B529 5/152
XCK Lppp 5/66
9/41 XCC 3510PV84FB 7/48 XCS DMC79pL01M8 5/169
XCK M1ppppp 5/64 XEP3 S1W3 5/152
ABE 9CM12C 9/41 XCC 3514TSpppp 7/27 XCS DMP50pp 5/168
XCK M5ppppp 5/64 XEP3 S1W3B524 5/152
ABE 9XCA1ppp 9/41 XCC 3515CS84CB 7/44 XCS DMP50pL01M12 5/169
XCK ML1ppppp 5/68 XEP3 S1W3B529 5/152
ABE 9XLA10 9/41 XCC 3515CV84FB 7/48 XCS DMP59pp 5/168
XCK ML5ppppp 5/68 XEP3 S1W6 5/152
ABL7 CEM24006 8/11 XCC 3912PS84ppp 7/29 XCS DMP59pL01M12 5/169
XCK MR54ppppp 5/124 XEP3 S1W6B524 5/152
ABL7 RE2402 8/11 XCC 3930TS84ppp 7/29 XCS DMP70pp 5/168
XCK N21ppppp 5/52 XEP3 S1W6B529 5/152
ACW ppM129012 6/132 XCC PM231ppppp 7/36 and XCS DMP70pL01M12 5/169 XEP3 S2W2 5/152
and XCS DMP79pp 5/168
XCC R158RDApp 7/14, 5/53 XEP3 S2W2B524 5/152
6/133
7/15, XCK N25ppppp 5/52 XCS DMP79pL01M12 5/169 XEP3 S2W2B529 5/152
ADW ppM129012 6/134 7/21, and XCS DMR59pp 5/168 XEP3 S2W3 5/152
and 7/27 5/53 XCS DMR59pL01M12 5/169
6/135 and XEP3 S2W3B524 5/152
XCK P21pppppp 5/36 XCS DMR79pp 5/168
ADW 27S1M129012 6/135 7/37 XEP3 S2W3B529 5/152
to XCS DMR79pL01M12 5/169
ADW 7S1M129012 6/135 XCC R290RDPpp 7/17, 5/48 XEP3 S2W6 5/152
7/23 XCS E53pp 5/165 XEP3 S2W6B524 5/152
D XCK P25ppppp 5/36
and XCS E73ppp 5/165 XEP3 S2W6B529 5/152
to
DE9 PM120p 6/142 7/37 5/48 XCS E83ppp 5/165 XEP4 E1FD 5/150
and XCC R358RDLpp 7/44, XCS M37ppL1 5/158
XCK P25H2P16 5/37 XEP4 E1FDA326 5/150
6/162 7/48 XCS M39ppL1 5/ 158
5/48 XCK S1ppppp 5/108 XEP4 E1FDA454 5/150
DE9 RA1012 and XCS M41ppL1 5/158
DE9 RA13520 5/119 7/50 XCK S5ppppp 5/108 XEP4 E1W7 5/150
XCK T21ppppp 5/42, XCS PAppp 5/160 XEP4 E1W7A326 5/150
and XCC R390RDPpp 7/29
5/121 5/43 XCS PL5pp 5/162 XEP4 E1W7A454 5/150
and
DIA4ED3051001 8/9 7/37 and XCS PL7pp 5/162 XEP5 P1W2 5/150
5/48 XCS PRp52 5/162
XCC RAE0606 7/35 XEP5 P1W2Z55B 5/150
F XCK T2501ppp 5/48 XCS TAp92 5/160
XCC RARpppp 7/35 XES P10ppp 5141,
FSG 2 6/147 and XCK Z0p 5/74, XCS TE5ppp 5/161 5/146
FSG 2NE 6/148 7/50 5/141 XCS TE6ppp 5/161 and
6/147 to 5/149
FSG 9 XCC RASpppp 7/35 XCS TE7ppp 5/161
5/149
FTG 2 6/146 and XCS TL5pp 5/162 XES P20ppp 5/94,
7/50 XCM D21ppppp 5/10 5/102
FTG 9 6/146 to XCS TL7pp 5/162
FTX CM08B 9/41 XCC RBp 7/35 and
5/15, XCS TL8pp 5/162
XCC REppp 7/35 5/105
FTX CM12B 8/10, 5/23 XCS TRppp 5/162
9/40 XCC RF4 7/35 XES P3021 5/113
XCM D25ppL1 5/10 XCS Z0p 5/164
and XCC RF5B 7/50 and
XGC S4901201 8/8
XCS Z1pp 5/160
9/41 XCC RF5N 7/35 5/11, XGC S8901201 8/8
and
FTX CN32pp 7/44 XCC RF9 7/35 5/23 5/161 XGH Bpppppp 8/8
FTX CNTL12 8/10 XCC RGp 7/35 XCM N21ppL1 5/26 XCS Z2p 5/160 XGS TP4ppp 8/9
FTX CY1208 9/41 XCC RM23SUB37pp 7/36 and and XGS Z0pppp 8/10
FTX CY12pp 9/40 5/27 5/161 and
XCC RXpp 7/36
and XCM Z06 5/23 XCS Z91 5/160 8/11
XCDR 21ppP20 5/56
9/41 and XCS ZCp 5/170 XGS Z33ETH 8/9
XCDR 25ppP20 5/56 5/48
FTX DP12pp 8/10 XCS ZP1 5/170 XGS Z3P 8/11
XCK D21ppppp 5/30 XCPR 21ppP20 5/58
FYG p2 6/149 to XCS ZR1 5/170 XGS ZCNF01 8/9
XCPR 25ppP20 5/58 XMA Hppppp35 6/141
T 5/48 XCTR 2102P16 5/60
XCPR 29ppP20 5/58 XMA Vppppp35 6/141
XCK D25ppppp 5/30 XCTR 2110P16 5/60
TCS AMT31FP 8/9 XCR A11 5/118 XMA ZL001 6/142
to XCTR 2118P16 5/60
TCS CTN011M11F 8/10 5/48 XCR A12 5/118 and
XCTR 2121P16 5/60
TCS EAAF11F13F00 8/10 XCK J10511A 5/86 XCR A15 5/118 6/162
XCTR 2502P16 5/60
TCS ECL1M1Mpppp 8/10 XCK J10511D 5/84 XCR A51 5/118 XML A001ppppp 6/82
XCTR 2510P16 5/60
TCS ECL1M3Mpppp 8/10 XCK J10511H29 5/80 XCR A52 5/118 XML A002ppppp 6/86
XCTR 2518P16 5/60
TCS ESU051F0 8/10 XCK J10513A 5/86 XCR A55 5/118 XML A004ppppp 6/90
XCTR 2521P16 5/60
TCS MCN1Fpppp 8/10 XCK J10513D 5/84 XCR B11 5/118 XML A010ppppp 6/94
XE2N P21pp 5/49,
TCS MCN1M1Fpp 8/10 XCK J10513H29 5/80 XCR B12 5/118 XML A020ppppp 6/98
5/74,
TSX CAN CAp00 7/44 XCK J10541A 5/86 XCR B15 5/118 5/94 XML A035ppppp 6/102
TSX CSAp00 8/10 XCK J10541D 5/84 XCR B51 5/118 to XML A070ppppp 6/106
XCK J10541H29 5/80 XCR B52 5/118 5/113 XML A160ppppp 6/110
X
XCK J10559A 5/86 XCR B55 5/118 XE2N P31pp 5/49, XML A300ppppp 6/114
XAL Z09 5/48 5/74,
XCK J10559D 5/84 XCR E18 5/118 XML A500ppppp 6/118
XBT ZGM128 8/9 5/94
XCK J10559H29 5/80 XCR E58 5/118 XML AM01ppppp 6/70
XC 01pL2 5/154 to
XCK J110511H29 5/82 XCR F17 5/118 XML B001ppppp 6/83
XC1 AC1pp 5/128 5/113
10 XCC 1406PRppp
XCC 1406TRppp
7/11
7/11
XCK
XCK
J110513H29
J110541H29
5/82
5/82
XCR F57
XCR T115
5/118
5/120
XE2S P21pp 5/49,
5/74,
XML B002ppppp
XML B004ppppp
6/87
6/91
XCK J110559H29 5/82 XCR T215 5/120 5/94 XML B010ppppp 6/95
XCC 1506PSppp 7/13
XCK J1161H29 5/82 XCR T315 5/120 to XML B020ppppp 6/99
XCC 1510PSppp 7/13 5/113
XCK J1167H29 5/82 XML B035ppppp 6/103
XCC 1510PSMppp 7/15
10/2
XML B070ppppp 6/107 XML F010ppppp 6/42 XMP C12ppppp 6/156 XS2 12SAppppp 2/94 XS7 C1A1NBpppppp 2/34
XML B160ppppp 6/111 and and XS2 18AAppppp 2/98 XS7 C1A1PApppppp 2/34
XML B300ppppp 6/115 6/43 6/157 and XS7 C1A1PBpppppp 2/34
XML B500ppppp 6/119 XML F016ppppp 6/44 XMP C25B2131 6/158 2/100 XS7 C40DA210 2/82
and XMP C25C2131 6/159 XS2 18ALppppp 2/44
XML BL05ppppp 6/75 XS7 C40DP210 2/82
6/45 XMP D06ppppp 6/154 XS2 18BLppppp 2/47
XML BL35ppppp 6/78 XS7 C40FP260 2/84
XML F025ppppp 6/46 and XS2 18SAppppp 2/94
and XS7 C40KPM40 2/74
and 6/155 and
6/79 XS7 C40MP230 2/84
6/47 XMP D12ppppp 6/156 2/96
XML BM02ppppp 6/71 XS7 C40NC440 2/82
XML F040ppppp 6/48 and XS2 30AAppppp 2/98
XML BM03ppppp 6/74 and XS7 C40NC449 2/82
6/157 and
XML BM05ppppp 6/76 6/49 XS7 C40PC440 2/82
XMP E06ppppp 6/154 2/100
XML BS02B2S12 6/87 XML F070ppppp 6/50 and XS7 C40PC449 2/82
XS2 30ALppppp 2/44
XML BS04B2S12 6/91 and 6/155 XS7 D1A1CAM12 2/34
XS2 30BLppppp 2/47
XML BS10A2S12 6/95 6/51 XMP E12ppppp 6/156 XS2 30SAppppp 2/94 XS7 D1A1DAppp 2/34
XML BS20A2S12 6/99 XML F100ppppp 6/52 and and XS7 D1A1DBppp 2/34
XML BS35R2S12 6/78 and 6/157 2/96 XS7 D1A1NAppp 2/34
6/53 XMP MDR01 6/162
XML C00pppppp 6/84, XS2 L06pppppp 2/50 XS7 D1A1NBppp 2/34
6/88 XML F160ppppp 6/54 XMP R06ppppp 6/160
and XS2 L2SAppppp 2/94 XS7 D1A1PAppp 2/34
and and
6/55 XS2 M08pppppp 2/54 XS7 D1A1PBppp 2/34
6/92 6/161
XML F250ppppp 6/56 XS2 M12KP340p 2/56 XS7 D1A3CAM12DIN 2/88
XML C010p2S12 6/96 XMP R12ppppp 6/156,
and 6/160 XS2 M12MA250p 2/52 XS7 E1A1CALppppp 2/34
XML C020p2S12 6/100
6/57 and XS2 M12MB250 2/52 XS7 E1A1DALppppp 2/34
XML C035p2S12 6/104
XML F400ppppp 6/58 6/161 XS2 M12PAW01D 2/91 XS7 E1A1DAM8 2/34
XML C070p2S12 6/108 and XMP R25ppppp 6/158, XS2 M18KP340p 2/56 XS7 E1A1DBLppppp 2/34
XML C160p2S12 6/112 6/59 6/160 XS2 M18Mppppp 2/52 XS7 E1A1DBM8 2/34
XML C300p2S12 6/116 XML F600ppppp 6/60 and XS2 M30KP340p 2/56 XS7 E1A1NALppppp 2/34
XML C500p2S12 6/120 and 6/161
6/61 XS2 M30Mppppp 2/52 XS7 E1A1NAM8 2/34
XML CL35p2S12 6/80 XMP Zpp 6/142
XML FM01ppppp 6/36 XS2 N12pppppp 2/54 XS7 E1A1NBLppppp 2/34
XML CM02p2S12 6/72 and
and 6/162 XS2 N18pppppp 2/54 XS7 E1A1NBM8 2/34
XML CM05p2S12 6/77
6/37 XMX A06L2p35 6/140 XS2 N30pppppp 2/54 XS7 E1A1PALppppp 2/34
XML CS02B2S12 6/88
XML G001ppppp 6/12 XMX A12L2p35 6/140 XS4 P08pppppp 2/42 XS7 E1A1PAM8 2/34
XML CS04B2S12 6/92
and XS4 P12pppppp 2/42, XS7 E1A1PBLppppp 2/34
XML CS10A2S12 6/96 XMX A25L2p35 6/140
6/16 2/56
XML CS20A2S12 6/100 XS1 06BLppp 2/46 XS7 F1A1DALpppp 2/32
XML G010ppppp 6/13 and
XML CS35R2S12 6/80 XS1 08BLpppp 2/46 XS7 F1A1DBLpppp 2/32
and 2/65
XML D001p1S12 6/85 6/17 XS1 12BLppppp 2/46 XS7 F1A1NALpppp 2/32
XS4 P18pppppp 2/42,
XML D002p1S12 6/89 XML G025ppppp 6/13 XS1 18BLppppp 2/47 2/56 XS7 F1A1NBLpppp 2/32
XML D004p1S12 6/93 and XS1 30BLppppp 2/47 and XS7 F1A1PALpppp 2/32
XML D010p1S12 6/97 6/17 XS1 L04pppppp 2/50 2/66 XS7 F1A1PBLpppp 2/32
XML D020p1S12 6/101 XML G100ppppp 6/14 XS1 L06pppppp 2/50 XS4 P30pppppp 2/42, XS7 G12MA230 2/80
and XS1 M08pppppp 2/54 2/56 XS7 G12MB230 2/80
XML D035p1S12 6/105
6/18 and XS7 G12NA140p 2/78
XML D070p1S12 6/109 XS1 M12pppppp 2/52,
XML G250ppppp 6/14 2/67
XML D160p1S12 6/113 2/56 XS7 G12NC440 2/78
and and XS5 08B1pppppppp 2/40
XML D300p1S12 6/117 6/18
XS7 G12PA140p 2/78
2/65 and
XML D500p1S12 6/121 XML G400ppppp 6/15 2/38 XS7 G12PC440 2/78
XS1 M18KPppp 2/56 XS7 J1A1DALpppp 2/32
XML DL35p1S12 6/81 and and XS5 12B1pppppppp 2/38
XML DM02p1S12 6/73 6/19 and XS7 J1A1DBLpppp 2/32
2/72
XML E001U1ppp 6/24 XML GM01ppppp 6/12 2/40 XS7 J1A1NALpppp 2/32
XS1 M18MApppp 2/52
and and XS5 18B1pppppppp 2/38 XS7 J1A1NBLppppp 2/32
6/16
XS1 M18MBpppp 2/52
6/28 and XS7 J1A1PALpppp 2/32
XS1 M18PApppp 2/76, 2/40
XML E0101U1D21 6/25 XML GZ001 6/20 XS7 J1A1PBLpppp 2/32
2/77
XML E010U1ppp 6/25, XML Z600 6/32 XS5 30B1pppppppp 2/38 XS7 T4DA210 2/86
and
and XML ZAppp 6/122 and
2/90 XS7 T4DA214LDpp 2/86
6/29 6/122 2/40
XML ZBppp XS1 M30AB120 2/67 XS7 T4NC440pp 2/86
XML E025U1ppp 6/25 6/122 XS6 08B1ppppp 2/22
XML ZL001 XS1 M30KP340p 2/56 XS7 T4PC440pp 2/86
and XS6 12B1ppppp 2/24
XML ZLppp 6/62, XS1 M30KPM40p 2/73 XS8 C1A1MALppppp 2/30
6/29 6/122 XS6 12B2pppppppp 2/26
XS1 M30MA250p 2/52 and XS8 C1A1MBLppppp 2/30
XML E060U1ppp 6/26 and
and XS1 M30MB250p 2/52 2/58 XS8 C1A1NALppppp 2/30
6/142
6/30 XS1 M30PAW01D 2/91 XS6 12B4ppppp 2/26 XS8 C1A1NAM8 2/30
XML ZZppp 6/122
XML E100U1ppp 6/26 6/154 XS1 N05ppppp 2/50 XS6 18B1ppppp 2/22 XS8 C1A1NBLppppp 2/30
XMP A06ppppp
and and XS1 N08pppppp 2/36 and XS8 C1A1NBM8 2/30
6/30 6/155 XS1 N12Nppppp 2/36 2/24 XS8 C1A1PALppppp 2/30
XML E250U1ppp 6/27 XMP A12ppppp 6/156 XS1 N18pppppp 2/36 XS6 18B2pppppppp 2/26, XS8 C1A1PAM8 2/30
and and and 2/28 XS8 C1A1PBLppppp 2/30
6/31 6/157 2/54 and
XS8 C1A1PBM8 2/30
XML E600U1ppp 6/27 XMP A25B2131 6/158 XS1 N30pppppp 2/36 2/58
XS8 C40DA210 2/82
and and XS6 18B4ppppp 2/26
XMP A25C2131 6/159 XS8 C40DP210 2/82
6/31 2/54 and
XMP B06B2131 6/154 2/28 XS8 C40FP260 2/84
XML EM01U1ppp 6/42 XS2 08pppppp 2/44
and XMP B06B2242 6/155 XS6 30B1ppppp 2/22 XS8 C40MP230 2/84
and
6/28 XMP B12B2131 6/156 2/46 and XS8 C40NC440 2/82
XML EZppp 6/32 XMP B12B2242 6/157 XS2 08pppppp 2/44 2/24 XS8 C40NC449 2/82
XML F001ppppp 6/38 XMP B25B2131 6/158 and XS6 30B2pppppppp 2/58 XS8 C40PC440 2/82
and
6/39
XMP C06ppppp 6/154
and XS2 12Apppp
2/46
2/44
XS6 30B4ppppp
XS7 C1A1CAppppp
2/28
2/34
XS8 C40PC449
XS8 D1A1ppppp
2/82
2/30
10
XML F002ppppp 6/40 6/155 and XS7 C1A1DApppppp 2/34 XS8 E1A1pppppppp 2/30
and 2/98 XS7 C1A1DBpppppp 2/34 XS8 G12MA230 2/80
6/41 XS2 12BLppppp 2/46 XS7 C1A1NApppppp 2/34 XS8 G12MB230 2/80
10/3
XS8 G12NA140 2/78 XT4 P30pp372 3/11 XUB 1BNANM12 1/28 XUB TANSNL2 1/68 XUK 5APBNppp 1/36
XS8 G12NC440 2/78 XT7 C40FP262 3/12 XUB 1BNAWM12 1/28 XUB TANSNM12 1/68 XUK 5ARCNL2 1/36
XS8 G12PA140p 2/78 XT7 C40pp440 3/12 XUB 1BNBNM12 1/28 XUB TANSWL2 1/68 XUK 8AKSNppp 1/88
XS8 G12PC440 2/78 XTA Z30 2/102 XUB 1BNBWM12 1/28 XUB TANSWM12 1/68 XUK 9ANANppp 1/36
XS8 T4NC440pp 2/86 XU1 N18NP341pp 1/104 XUB 1BPANM12 1/28 XUB TAPSNL2 1/68 XUK 9ANBNppp 1/36
XS8 T4PC440pp 2/86 XU2 M18AP20D 1/94 XUB 1BPAWM12 1/28 XUB TAPSNM12 1/68 XUK 9APANppp 1/36
XS9 C111A1Lppppp 2/69 XU2 M18MA230pp 1/108 XUB 1BPBNM12 1/28 XUB TAPSWL2 1/68 XUK 9APBNppp 1/36
XS9 C111A2Lppppp 2/71 XU2 M18MB230pp 1/108 XUB 1BPBWM12 1/28 XUB TAPSWM12 1/68 XUK 9ARCNL2 1/36
XS9 C11RMBL01U20 2/63 XU2 N18NP341pp 1/104 XUB 2AKSNM12T 1/26 XUB TSNSNL2 1/68 XUK C1NSMM12 1/76
XS9 C11RPBL01M12 2/63 XU2 N18PP341pp 1/104 XUB 2AKSWM12T 1/26 XUB TSNSNM12 1/68 XUK C1PSMM12 1/76
XS9 D111A1ppp 2/69 XU2 P18PP340DL 1/96 XUB 2ANANM12R 1/26 XUB TSNSWL2 1/68 XUK R1NSMM12 1/80
XS9 D111A2ppp 2/71 XU5 M18AB20D 1/90 XUB 2ANAWM12R 1/26 XUB TSNSWM12 1/68 XUK R1PSMM12 1/80
XS9 E111A1Lppppp 2/69 XU5 M18MA230pp 1/108 XUB 2ANBNM12R 1/26 XUB TSPSNL2 1/68 XUK T1KSMppp 1/70
XS9 E111A2Lppppp 2/71 XU5 M18MB230pp 1/108 XUB 2ANBWM12R 1/26 XUB TSPSNM12 1/68 XUL A040119p 1/55
XS9 E11RMBL01U20 2/63 XU5 M18U1D 1/86 XUB 2APANM12R 1/26 XUB TSPSWL2 1/68 XUL A040219p 1/55
XS9 E11RPBL01M12 2/63 XU5 N18NP341pp 1/104 XUB 2APAWM12R 1/26 XUB TSPSWM12 1/68 XUL A06011p 1/55
XS9 F111A1Lpppp 2/69 XU5 N18PP341pp 1/104 XUB 2APBNM12R 1/26 XUC 2AKSAL2 1/60 XUL A06021p 1/55
XS9 F111A2Lpppp 2/71 XU8 M18MA230pp 1/108 XUB 2APBWM12R 1/26 XUC 2AKSAM12 1/60 XUL A700115p 1/55
XSA V1pppp 2/61 XU8 M18MB230pp 1/108 XUB 2BKSNM12T 1/28 XUC 2ARCTL2 1/62 XUL A700215p 1/55
XSA Z108 1/110 XU9 M18MA230pp 1/108 XUB 2BKSWM12T 1/28 XUC 2ARCTU78 1/62 XUL H043539p 1/54
XSA Z118 1/110 XU9 M18MB230pp 1/108 XUB 2BNANM12R 1/28 XUC 8AKSNppp 1/60 XUL H06353p 1/54
XSA Z145 1/110 XU9 N18NP341pp 1/104 XUB 2BNAWM12R 1/28 XUC 8ARCTppp 1/62 XUL H083534p 1/54
XSA Z155 1/110 XU9 N18PP341pp 1/104 XUB 2BNBNM12R 1/28 XUC 9AKSAppp 1/60 XUL H703535p 1/54
XSA Z185 1/110 XUA H0203p 1/64 XUB 2BNBWM12R 1/28 XUC 9ARCTppp 1/62 XUL J043539p 1/54
XSA Z318 1/110 XUA H0214p 1/64 XUB 2BPANM12R 1/28 XUD A1NSMpp 1/42 XUL J06353p 1/54
XSC Z01 2/102 XUA H0224p 1/64 XUB 2BPAWM12R 1/28 XUD A1PSMpp 1/42 XUL J083534p 1/54
XSLC 2/92 XUA H0515p 1/64 XUB 2BPBNM12R 1/28 XUD A2NSMpp 1/42 XUL J703535p 1/54
XSZ A0pp 2/102 XUA H0525p 1/64 XUB 2BPBWM12R 1/28 XUD A2PSMpp 1/42 XUL K0830p 1/54
XSZ B1pp 2/102 XUA J0214p 1/64 XUB 4ANANM12 1/26 XUF N01321 1/47 XUL M040319 1/58
XSZ B104 2/102 XUA J0224p 1/64 XUB 4ANAWM12 1/26 XUF N01331 1/47 XUL M0600 1/58
XSZ B105 2/102 XUA J0515p 1/64 XUB 4ANBNM12 1/26 XUF N02323 1/47 XUL M06031 1/58
XSZ B108 1/112, XUA J0525p 1/64 XUB 4ANBWM12 1/26 XUF N04331 1/47 XUL M06031H60 1/98
2/22 XUB 0AKSNL2T 1/24 XUB 4APANM12 1/26 XUF N05321pp 1/46 XUL M080314 1/58
to XUB 0AKSNM12T 1/24 XUB 4APAWM12 1/26 XUF N05323 1/46 XUL M300318 1/58
2/102
XUB 0AKSWL2T 1/24 XUB 4APBNM12 1/26 XUF N05331 1/46 XUL Z41 1/112
XSZ B112 2/22
XUB 0AKSWM12T 1/24 XUB 4APBWM12 1/26 XUF N10302 1/44 XUM 0AKSAppp 1/30
to
2/102, XUB 0ANSNL2 1/24 XUB 4BNANM12 1/28 XUF N12301pp 1/44 XUM 0ANSAppp 1/30
4/10 XUB 0ANSNM12 1/24 XUB 4BNAWM12 1/28 XUF N12311 1/44 XUM 0APSApp 1/30
XSZ B118 1/112, XUB 0ANSWL2 1/24 XUB 4BNBNM12 1/28 XUF N15322 1/46 XUM 1ANANpp 1/32
2/22 XUB 0ANSWM12 1/24 XUB 4BNBWM12 1/28 XUF N15332 1/46 XUM 1ANBNpp 1/32
to XUB 0APSNL2 1/24 XUB 4BPANM12 1/28 XUF N2L01Lpp 1/45 XUM 1APANpp 1/32
2/102, XUB 0APSNM12 1/24 XUB 4BPAWM12 1/28 XUF N2S01Lpp 1/45 XUM 1APBNpp 1/32
4/10
XUB 0APSWL2 1/24 XUB 4BPBNM12 1/28 XUF N35301 1/45 XUM 2AKSNppp 1/32
XSZ B130 2/22
XUB 0APSWM12 1/24 XUB 4BPBWM12 1/28 XUF N35311 1/45 XUM 2ANANppp 1/32
to
2/102, XUB 0BKSNL2T 1/24 XUB 5ANANM12 1/26 XUF N5L01L2 1/48 XUM 2ANBNppp 1/32
5/170 XUB 0BKSNM12T 1/24 XUB 5ANAWM12 1/26 XUF N5L02L2 1/48 XUM 2APANppp 1/32
XSZ B165 2/47 XUB 0BKSWL2T 1/24 XUB 5ANBNM12 1/26 XUF N5L03L2 1/48 XUM 2APBNppp 1/32
and XUB 0BKSWM12T 1/24 XUB 5ANBWM12 1/26 XUF N5P01L10 1/47 XUM 5ANBNpp 1/32
2/102 XUB 0BNSNL2 1/24 XUB 5APANM12 1/26 XUF N5P01L2 1/47 XUM 5APANpp 1/32
XSZ Bppp 2/102 XUB 0BNSNM12 1/24 XUB 5APAWM12 1/26 XUF N5S01L10 1/47 XUM 5APBNpp 1/32
and XUB 0BNSWL2 1/24 XUB 5APBNM12 1/26 XUF N5S01L2 1/47 XUM 6ANANpp 1/32
8/11
XUB 0BNSWM12 1/24 XUB 5APBWM12 1/26 XUF S0520 1/49 XUM 6ANBNpp 1/32
XSZ BPM12 2/58,
1/24 1/28 1/49 1/32
XUB 0BPSNL2 XUB 5BNANM12 XUF S2020 XUM 6APANpp
2/63
and XUB 0BPSNM12 1/24 XUB 5BNAWM12 1/28 XUF Zppp 1/51, XUM 6APBNpp 1/32
2/102 XUB 0BPSWL2 1/24 XUB 5BNBNM12 1/28 1/51 XUM 9ANANpp 1/32
XUB 0BPSWM12 1/24 XUB 5BNBWM12 1/28 and XUM 9ANBNpp 1/32
XSZ BSpp 2/94
1/113
and XUB 0SKSNL2T 1/102 XUB 5BPANM12 1/28 XUM 9APANpp 1/32
2/96 XUJ B06031H60 1/100
XUB 0SKSNM12T 1/102 XUB 5BPAWM12 1/28 XUM 9APBNpp 1/32
XSZ Eppp 1/106, XUJ K803538 1/92
XUB 0SKSWL2T 1/102 XUB 5BPBNM12 1/28 XUM W1KSNL2 1/72
2/102 XUJ Z01 1/113
XUB 0SKSWM12T 1/102 XUB 5BPBWM12 1/28 XUR C3NPML2 1/78
and XUK 0AKSAL2p 1/34
XUB 0SNSNL2 1/102 XUB 9ANANM12 1/26 XUR C3PPML2 1/78
2/112 XUK 0AKSAM12p 1/34
XUB 0SNSNM12 1/102 XUB 9ANAWM12 1/26 XUR C4NPML2 1/78
XSZ F10 2/102 XUK 0ARCTL2p 1/34
XUB 0SNSWL2 1/102 XUB 9ANBNM12 1/26 XUR C4PPML2 1/78
XSZ MCRpp 1/77 XUK 1ANANppp 1/36
XUB 0SNSWM12 1/102 XUB 9ANBWM12 1/26 XUR K0955D 1/82
XSZ Pppp 2/102 XUK 1ANBNppp 1/36
XUB 0SPSNL2 1/102 XUB 9APANM12 1/26 XUR K1KSMM12 1/82
XSZ VF0p 2/102 XUK 1APANppp 1/36
XUB 0SPSNM12 1/102 XUB 9APAWM12 1/26 XUR U1KSMM12 1/86
XT1 L32Fp262 3/9 XUK 1APBNppp 1/36
XUB 0SPSWL2 1/102 XUB 9APBNM12 1/26 XUR Z0p 1/113
XT1 M12pp372 3/8 XUK 1ARCNL2 1/36
XUB 0SPSWM12 1/102 XUB 9APBWM12 1/26 XUV F120M12 1/66
XT1 M18pp262 3/8 XUK 2AKSNppp 1/36
XUB 1ANANM12 1/26 XUB 9BNANM12 1/28 XUV F180M12 1/66
XT1 M18pp372 3/8 XUK 2ANANpppp 1/36
XUB 1ANAWM12 1/26 XUB 9BNAWM12 1/28 XUV F250M12 1/66
XT1 M30pp262 3/9 XUK 2ANBNpppp 1/36
XUB 1ANBNM12 1/26 XUB 9BNBNM12 1/28 XUV F30M8 1/66
10 XT1 M30pp372
XT4 L32pp262
3/9
3/11
XUB 1ANBWM12
XUB 1APANM12
1/26
1/26
XUB 9BNBWM12
XUB 9BPANM12
1/28
1/28
XUK 2APANpppp
XUK 2APBNpppp
1/36
1/36
XUV F60M8
XUV H0312
1/66
1/98
XT4 P18FA262 3/10 XUK 2ARCNL2p 1/36
XUB 1APAWM12 1/26 XUB 9BPAWM12 1/28 XUV J0312 1/98
XT4 P18pp372 3/10 XUK 5ANBNppp 1/36
XUB 1APBNM12 1/26 XUB 9BPBNM12 1/28 XUV K0252pp 1/74
XT4 P30pp262 3/11 XUK 5APANppp 1/36
XUB 1APBWM12 1/26 XUB 9BPBWM12 1/28 XUV Z02 1/113
10/4
XUX 0AKSAM12p 1/38 XZ CP1141L10 4/10 XZ CP1662Lp 9/13

XUX 0AKSAT16p 1/38 XUZ K2000 1/77 XZ CC12FDM40B 4/10 to XZ CP1670Lpp 9/13
XUX 0ARCTT16p 1/38 and to 4/18, XZ CP1764Lpp 6/62
1/81 4/18, 5/170, and
XUX 1ANANppp 1/40
XUZ K2003 1/34, 6/20 6/20, 9/13
XUX 1ANBNppp 1/40 6/62,
1/36 and
XUX 1APANppp 1/40 6/28 9/10
and XZ CP1764Lp 6/62
XUX 1APBNppp 1/40 1/112 XZ CC12FDM40V 6/20, XZ CP1141L2 4/10
and
XUX 2ANANppp 1/40 XUZ K2004 1/34, 6/62 to
9/13
XUX 2ANBNppp 1/40 1/36 and 4/18,
5/170, XZ CP1771Lpp 5/16,
XUX 2APANppp 1/40 and 9/28
6/20, 5/86
XUX 2APBNppp 1/40 1/112 XZ CC12FDM50B 7/44 and
1/30, and 6/62,
XUX 5ANANppp 1/40 XUZ M2003 9/13
1/32 9/29 9/10
XUX 5ANBNppp 1/40 4/10 XZ CP1865Lpp 9/12
and XZ CC12FDP40B 4/10 XZ CP1141L5
XUX 5APANppp 1/40 to XZ CP1965Lpp 9/12
1/112 to
XUX 5APBNppp 1/40 4/18, 4/18, XZ CP2540Lpp 9/10
XUZ M2004 1/30,
XUX 5ARCNT16 1/40 1/32 9/28 5/170, XZ CP2737Lpp 9/9
XUX 9ANANppp 1/40 and 9/30 6/20, XZ CP29P11Lpp 5/170
XZ CC12MCM40B
XUX 9ANANT16 1/40 1/112 6/62, XZ CPA0566Lpp 9/22
XZ CC12MCM50B 7/44 9/10
XUX 9ANBNppp 1/40 XUZ X2000 1/38, and XZ CPA0941Lpp 9/22
1/40 9/31
XZ CP1164L10 5/16,
XUX 9APANppp 1/40
5/84,
XZ CPA1141Lpp 9/22
XUX 9APBNppp 1/40 and XZ CC12MCP4p 9/30 XZ CPA1164Lpp 9/22
1/112 6/32
XUX 9ARCNT16 1/40 XZ CC12MDM40B 9/30 and XZ CPA1241Lpp 9/22
1/24
XUZ X2001 1/38 XZ CC12MDM50B 7/44 9/11 9/23
XUZ 2001 XZ CPA1662Lpp
and and
to XZ CP1164L2 5/16, XZ CPA1670Lpp 9/23
1/113 9/31
1/112, 5/84, XZ CPA1865Lpp 9/23
4/10 XUZ X2002 1/38 XZ CC12MDP40B 9/30 6/32 XZ CPA1965Lpp 9/23
4/14 and
XZ CC18FCP40B 9/32 and
1/113, XZ CR1501040Gp 9/16
XUZ 2003 1/24 XZ CC18FDP40B 9/32 9/11
to XUZ X2003 1/38, XZ CR1502040Gp 9/16
XZ CC20FCM30B 9/29 XZ CP1164L5 5/16,
1/112, 1/40 XZ CR1509040Hp 9/17
XZ CC20FDM30B 9/29 5/84,
4/10 and XZ CR1509041Jp 9/17
6/32
4/14 1/112 XZ CC20MCM30B 9/31
and XZ CR1510040Hp 9/17
XUZ A118 1/24 XUZ X2004 1/38, XZ CC20MDM30B 9/31 9/11 XZ CR1510041Jp 9/17
to 1/40 XZ CC23FCM190S 9/34 XZ CP1169L10 5/16 XZ CR1511040Ap 9/18
1/112, and XZ CC23FDM190S 9/34 and XZ CR1511040Ep 9/18
2/94, 1/112
XZ CC23MCM190S 9/35 9/11
2/96 XX5 12A1KAM8 4/10 XZ CR1511041Cp 6/62
XZ CC23MDM190S 9/35 XZ CP1169L2 5/16
4/10 XX5 12A2NAM8 4/10 XZ CR1511041Cp 6/62
XZ CC43FCP40B 6/32, and
XUZ A218 1/24 XX5 12A2PAM8 4/10 9/11 XZ CR1511062Bp 9/19
6/122
to XX5 18A1KAM12 4/10 and XZ CP1169L5 5/16 XZ CR1511062Fp 9/19
1/112 XX5 18A3NAM12 4/10 9/33 and XZ CR1511064D1 9/21
XUZ A318 1/112 XX6 30A1NCM12 4/10 XZ CC51FCP50B 9/33 9/11 XZ CR1512040Ap 9/18
XUZ A4p 1/112 XX6 30A1PCM12 4/10 XZ CC8FCMppp 4/10, XZ CP1241L10 4/10 XZ CR1512040Ep 9/18
XUZ A50 1/30, XX6 30A3NCM12 4/10 9/26 to XZ CR1512041Cp 6/62
1/132 and 4/18, and
XX6 30A3PCM12 4/10
and 9/27 5/170, 9/20
1/112 XX7 F1A2NAL01M12 4/18 6/20,
XZ CC8FDMppp 4/10, XZ CR1512062Bp 9/19
XUZ A51 1/34 XX7 F1A2PAL01M12 4/18 6/62,
9/26 XZ CR1512062Fp 9/19
1/36 XX7 K1A2NAM12 4/18 and 9/10
XZ CR1512064D1 9/21
and XX7 K1A2PAM12 4/18 9/27 XZ CP1241L2 4/10
to XZ CR1523062K1 6/32,
1/112 XX7 V1A1NAM12 4/18 XZ CC8MDM30V 9/27
4/18, 6/122
XUZ Bpp 1/113 XX7 V1A1PAM12 4/18 XZ CE03ppppp 9/36
5/170, and
XUZ B2003 1/24 XX9 30A1A1M12 4/14 XZ CE11P124M 9/36 9/19
to 6/20,
XX9 30A1A2M12 4/14 XZ CE13Mpppp 9/36 6/62, XZ CR2705037Rp 9/14
1/112, 4/14
XX9 30A3A1M12 XZ CE13P124M 9/36 9/10 XZ CR2709037Sp 9/14
4/10
XX9 30A3A2M12 4/14 XZ CG0223 9/37 XZ CP1241L5 4/10 XZ CR2711037Tp 9/15
XUZ B2005 1/102,
1/112 XXZ 12 4/10 XZ CP0166Lpp 4/10 to XZ CR2712037Sp 9/15
and XXZ 1933 4/18 and 4/18, XZ CRA150941Jp 9/24
2/94 XXZ 30 4/10 9/8 5/170, XZ CRA151140Ap 9/24
and XZ CP0266Lpp 4/10 6/20,
XUZ B20pp 4/10 XZ CRA151164Dp 9/25
4/14 and 6/62,
and XZ LG10p 9/37
XXZ 3074p 4/18 9/8 9/10
4/14 XZC C12FDM40B 8/10
XXZ PB100 4/10 XZ CP0366Lpp 9/8 XZ CP1264L10 5/16,
XUZ B32 2/102 XZC C23FDP120S 7/36
and 9/8 5/84
XUZ C100 1/113 XZ CP0466Lpp
4/18 6/32 XZC C23FDP160S 7/36
XUZ C16 1/113 XZ CP0566Lpp 9/9
and
XZ CB4Lpppp 9/37 XZC C23FMDP120S 7/36
XUZ C21 1/113 XZ CP0666Lpp 9/9 9/11
XZ CC12FCM40B 4/10 XZC CHFDM370S 7/36
XUZ C24 1/68 XZ CP0766Lpp 9/9 XZ CP1264L2 5/16,
to XZC PA1141Lpp 2/94
and XZ CP0866Lpp 9/9 5/84 and
1/113 4/18,
XZ CP0941Lpp 5/170 6/32 2/98
6/20,
XUZ C3p 1/113 and and
and XZC PA1865Lpp 2/96
XUZ C50 1/24 9/9 9/11
9/28 and
to XZ CP1041Lpp 5/170 XZ CP1264L5 5/16, 2/100
XZ CC12FCM50B 9/29,
1/168, and 5/84
and XZC PA1965Lpp 2/96
1/102, 9/9 6/32
7/44 and
1/113 and
XUZ C80
XUZ Dpp
1/113
1/113
XZ CC12FCP40B 4/10
to
XZ CP1340Lpp
9/11
9/10
2/100
10
4/18, XZC RA151140Ap 2/94
XUZ E0p 1/113 9/28 XZ CP1440Lpp 9/10 and
and XZ CC12FCP42B 9/28 XZ CP1541Lpp 9/11 2/98
2/102 XZ CP1564Lpp 9/11
10/5
ZC2 JY315 5/149 ZCE 24 5/10 ZCK E67 5/80 ZCK J4046H7 5/100
Z and
ZC2 JY51 5/134, ZCK E675 5/104 ZCK J404H29 5/91
ZC1 AC00p 5/130 5/140, 5/14 ZCK E676 5/101 ZCK J404H7 5/91
ZC1 AZ1p 5/130 5/146 ZCE 27 5/30, ZCK J01 5/91 ZCK J41 5/91
ZC1 AZ8 5/130 and 5/34, and
ZCK J0121 5/95
ZC2 JC1 5/134 5/149 5/36 5/100
and ZCK J0133 5/95
ZC2 JC15 5/147 ZCK J4104 5/91
5/40 ZCK J0134 5/95
ZC2 JC16 5/144 ZC2 JY61 5/140 ZCK J41045 5/103
and ZCE 28 5/30, ZCK J02 5/91
ZC2 JC18 5/137 ZCK J41045H29 5/103
5/146 5/34, ZCK J04 5/91
ZC2 JC2 5/137 5/36 5/90, ZCK J41045H7 5/103
ZC2 JY615 5/149 ZCK J1
ZC2 JC25 5/147 and 5/100 ZCK J41046 5/100
ZC2 JY71 5/140,
ZC2 JC26 5/144 5/40 and ZCK J41046H29 5/100
and
ZC2 JC28 5/137 5/146 ZCE F0 5/10 5/103 ZCK J41046H7 5/100
ZC2 JC4 5/137 ZC2 JY715 5/149 ZCE F0 5/10 ZCK J11 5/91 ZCK J4104H29 5/91
ZC2 JC45 5/147 ZCE F0 5/10 and ZCK J4104H7 5/91
ZC2 JY81 5/140,
ZC2 JC46 5/144 ZCE F0 5/10 5/100
and ZCK J415 5/103
ZC2 JC48 5/137 5/146 and ZCK J1121 5/92
ZCK J415H29 5/103
ZC2 JD1 5/137 ZC2 JY815 5/149 5/14 ZCK J1121H29 5/92
ZCK J415H7 5/103
ZC2 JD16 5/144 ZC2 JY91 5/140, ZCE F2 5/10 ZCK J1133 5/92
ZCK J41H29 5/91
and and ZCK J1133H29 5/92
ZC2 JD2 5/137 and
5/146 5/14 ZCK J1134 5/92
ZC2 JD26 5/144 5/100
ZC2 JY915 5/149 ZCE G1 5/10 ZCK J1134H29 5/92
ZC2 JD4 5/137 ZCK J41H7 5/91
and
ZC2 JD46 5/144 ZC2JY415 5/149 ZCK J115 5/103 and
5/14
ZCD 21 5/46 ZCK J115H29 5/103 5/100
ZC2 JE01 5/134 ZCE H0 5/31,
ZCD 25 5/46 ZCK J115H7 5/103 ZCK J45 5/103
and 5/37
5/139 ZCD 26 5/46 to ZCK J11H29 5/91 ZCK J45H29 5/103
ZC2 JE015 5/148 ZCD 27 5/30 5/43 and ZCK J45H7 5/103
and ZCE H2 5/31, 5/100 ZCK J4H29 5/90
ZC2 JE016 5/145
5/46 5/37 ZCK J11H7 5/91 and
ZC2 JE02 5/139
ZCD 28 5/46 to and 5/100
ZC2 JE025 5/148 5/100
ZCD 29 5/30 5/43 ZCK J4H7 5/90
ZC2 JE026 5/145 ZCK J120 5/92 and
and ZCK D02 5/64,
ZC2 JE03 5/139 5/46 5/766 ZCK J121 5/92 5/100
ZC2 JE035 5/148 ZCD 29M12 5/34 and ZCK J121H29 5/92 ZCK J5 5/90,
ZC2 JE036 5/145 and 5/108 ZCK J133 5/92 5/100
ZC2 JE04 5/139 5/35 ZCK D06 5/64 and
ZCK J133H29 5/92
ZC2 JE045 5/148 ZCD 31 5/46 and 5/103
ZCK J134 5/92
ZC2 JE046 5/145 ZCD 35 5/46 5/66 ZCK J520 5/92
ZCK J134H29 5/92
ZC2 JE05 5/134 ZCD 37 5/30, ZCK D10 5/64 ZCK J521 5/92
and ZCK J1D 5/93
and 5/31 ZCK J521H29 5/92
5/66 ZCK J1H29 5/90
5/139 and ZCK J533 5/92
5/46 ZCK D15 5/64 ZCK J1H29 5/91
ZC2 JE056 5/145 ZCK J533H29 5/92
and and
ZC2 JE06 5/139 ZCD 39 5/30 ZCK J534 5/92
5/66 5/100
ZC2 JE065 5/148 and ZCK J534H29 5/92
5/46 ZCK D21 5/64 ZCK J1H7 5/90,
ZC2 JE066 5/145 and 5/100 ZCK J5D 5/93
ZCD EP16 5/30
ZC2 JE70 5/139 5/66 and ZCK J5H29 5/90,
and
ZC2 JE705 5/148 ZCK D31 5/108 5/103 5/100
5/31
ZC2 JE706 5/145 ZCK J2 5/90 and
ZCE 01 5/11, ZCK D39 5/108
and 5/103
ZC2 JE81 5/138 5/15, ZCK D41 5/108
5/100
ZC2 JE815 5/147 5/31 ZCK D49 5/108
ZCK J21 5/91 ZCK J5H7 5/90,
ZC2 JE816 5/144 to ZCK D59 5/108 and 5/100
ZC2 JE82 5/138 5/43
ZCK E05 5/80 5/100 and
ZC2 JE825 5/147 ZCE 02 5/10, 5/103
ZCK E055 5/104 ZCK J215 5/103
5/14,
ZC2 JE826 5/144 ZCK E056 5/101 ZCK J215H29 5/103 ZCK J6 5/90,
5/30
ZC2 JE83 5/138 ZCK E065 5/104 5/100
to ZCK J215H7 5/103
ZC2 JE835 5/147 and
5/42 ZCK E066 5/101 ZCK J21H29 5/91 5/103
ZC2 JE836 5/144 ZCE 05 5/23 ZCK E085 5/104 and
ZCK J6D 5/93
ZC2 JE84 5/138 and ZCK E086 5/101 5/100
5/48 ZCK J6H29 5/90,
ZC2 JE845 5/147 ZCK E095 5/104 ZCK J21H7 5/91
5/100
ZC2 JE846 5/144 ZCE 06 5/11, ZCK E096 5/101 and
and
ZC2 JE85 5/138 54, 5/100
ZCK E215 5/104 5/103
5/10 ZCK J25 5/103
ZC2 JE855 5/147 ZCK E216 5/101 ZCK J6H7 5/90,
to ZCK J25H29 5/103
ZC2 JE856 5/144 5/42 ZCK E235 5/104 5/100
ZC2 JY11 5/134, ZCK J25H7 5/103 and
ZCE 10 5/10, ZCK E236 5/101
5/140 ZCK J2H29 5/90 5/103
5/14, ZCK E6 5/80
and and ZCK J7 5/90,
5/30 ZCK E61 5/80 5/100
5/149 to 5/100
ZCK E615 5/104 ZCK J2H7 5/90 and
ZC2 JY115 5/149 5/42
ZCK E616 5/101 and 5/103
ZC2 JY12 5/140 ZCE 11 5/10,
and ZCK E625 5/104 5/100 ZCK J7D 5/93
5/14,
5/146 5/30 ZCK E626 5/101 ZCK J4 5/90 ZCK J7H29 5/80
ZC2 JY13 5/140 ZCK E635 5/104 and ZCK J7H7 5/90,
to
and 5/42 ZCK E636 5/101 5/100 5/100
5/146 ZCK E645 5/104 ZCK J404 5/91 and
10 ZC2 JY215
ZC2 JY31
5/149
5/134,
ZCE 21 5/30,
5/34,
5/36
ZCK E646 5/101 ZCK J4045
ZCK J4045H29
5/103
5/103 ZCK J8
5/103
5/90,
ZCK E655 5/104
5/140 to ZCK J4045H7 5/103 5/100
ZCK E656 5/101
and 5/42 ZCK J4046 5/100 and
ZCK E665 5/104 5/103
5/146 ZCK J4046H29 5/100
10/6
ZCK J82A 5/95 ZCK M7H29 5/64 ZCK Y51 5/102 ZCP 37 5/36,
ZCK J8D 5/93 and and 5/37
ZCK J8H29 5/90, 5/72 5/105 and
5/100 ZCK M7H7 5/72 ZCK Y52 5/102 5/46
and ZCK M8 5/72 and ZCP 39 5/36,
5/103 ZCK M8H29 5/72 5/105 5/37
ZCK Y53 5/102 and
ZCK M8H7 5/72
and 5/46
ZCK M9 5/72
5/105 ZCP EP16 5/36
ZCK J8H7 5/90,
and
5/100 ZCK M9H29 5/64 5/37
and and
5/103 ZCK Y59 5/80 ZCP29 5/37
5/72
ZCK J9 5/90, and ZCT 21G11 5/47
ZCK MD31 5/73
5/100 5/102 ZCT 21N12 5/47
ZCK MD31H29 5/73
and ZCK Y61 5/102 ZCT 21P16 5/47
5/103 ZCK MD31H7 5/73
ZCK Y615 5/105 ZCT 25G11 5/47
ZCK J902 5/95 ZCK MD35 5/73
ZCK Y71 5/102 ZCT 25N12 5/47
ZCK J903 5/95 ZCK MD35H29 5/73
ZCK Y715 5/105 ZCT 25P1 5/42
ZCK J904 5/95 ZCK MD35H7 5/73
ZCK Y81 5/102 ZCT 25P16 5/42
ZCK J906 5/95 ZCK MD37 5/73 and
ZCK Y91 5/102
ZCK J9H29 5/90, ZCK MD37H29 5/64 5/47
ZCK Z020 5/95
5/100 and ZCT 26G11 5/47
5/73 ZCK Z021 5/95
and ZCT 26N12 5/47
ZCK MD37H7 5/73 ZCK Z033 5/95
5/103 ZCT 26P16 5/42
ZCK MD39 5/73 ZCK Z034 5/95
ZCK J9H7 5/90, and
5/100 ZCK MD39H29 5/64 ZCM C21E1 5/22
5/47
and and ZCM C21E10 5/22
ZCT 27G11 5/47
5/103 5/73 ZCM C21E2 5/22
ZCT 27N12 5/47
ZCK JD31 5/90 ZCK MD39H7 5/73 ZCM C21E3 5/22
ZCT 27P16 5/42,
ZCK JD31H29 5/90 ZCK S1 5/112 ZCM C21E5 5/22 5/43
ZCK JD31H7 5/90 ZCK S1H29 5/112 ZCM C21E7 5/22 and
ZCK JD35 5/90 ZCK S2 5/112 ZCM D21L08R12 5/14 5/47
ZCK JD35H29 5/90 ZCK S2H29 5/112 and ZCT 28G11 5/47
ZCK JD35H7 5/90 ZCK S404 5/112 5/15 ZCT 28N12 5/42,
ZCK JD37 5/90 ZCK S404H29 5/112 ZCM D21L08U78 5/14 5/43
and and
ZCK JD37H29 5/80 ZCK S5 5/112
5/15 5/47
and ZCK S5H29 5/112
5/90 ZCM D29C12 5/14 ZCY 15 5/11
ZCK S6 5/112 and
ZCK JD37H7 5/90 and
ZCK S6H29 5/112 5/15 5/15
ZCK JD39 5/90 ZCK S7 5/112 ZCY 16 5/11
ZCK JD39H29 5/80 ZCK S7H29 5/108 ZCM D29L1 5/10 and
and and and 5/15
5/90 5/112 5/11 ZCY 17 5/11
ZCK JD39H7 5/90 ZCK S8 5/112 ZCM D37L1 5/10 and
ZCK L1 5/72 ZCK S8H29 5/112 and 5/15
ZCK L1H7 5/72 ZCK S9 5/112 5/11 ZCY 18 5/31,
ZCK L5 5/72 ZCK S9H29 5/108 ZCM D39L1 5/10 to,
ZCK L5H7 5/72 and and 5/37,
ZCK L6 5/72 5/112 5/11 5/41
ZCK L6H7 5/72 ZCK SD31 5/112 ZCM D41L1 5/10 and
and 5/43
ZCK L7 5/66 ZCK SD31H29 5/112
5/11 ZCY 39 5/31,
and ZCK SD35 5/112
5/72 ZCM D61 5/22 to
ZCK SD35H29 5/112 5/37,
ZCK L7H7 5/72 ZCM D61C12 5/23
ZCK SD37 5/112 5/41
ZCK L8 5/72 ZCM D61M12 5/23
ZCK SD37H29 5/108 and
ZCK L8H7 5/72 ZCM D65 5/22
and 5/43
ZCK LD31 5/73 5/112 ZCM D69 5/22
ZCY 45 5/11
ZCK LD31H7 5/73 ZCK SD39 5/112 ZCM D69C12 5/23 to
ZCK LD35 5/73 ZCK SD39H29 5/108 ZCM D77 5/22 5/43
ZCK LD35H7 5/73 and ZCM D79 5/22 ZCY 49 5/31
ZCK LD37 5/66 5/112 ZCM D81L1 5/22 to
and ZCK Y11 5/80 ZCM D81L2 5/22 5/41
5/73 and ZCM D81L5 5/22 ZEP3 L524 5/152
ZCK LD37H7 5/73 5/102 ZCP 21 5/46 ZEP3 L529 5/152
ZCK LD39 5/66 ZCK Y115 5/105 ZCP 25 5/46 ZEP4 L326 5/150
and ZCK Y13 5/80, ZCP 26 5/46 ZEP4 L454 5/150
5/73 5/102
ZCP 27 5/36,
ZCK LD39H7 5/73 and
5/37
5/105
ZCK M1 5/72 and
ZCK Y14 5/102 5/46
ZCK M1H29 5/72
and
ZCK M1H7 5/72 ZCP 28 5/46
5/105
ZCK M5 5/72 ZCP 29 5/36,
ZCK Y41 5/80
ZCK M5H29 5/72 5/37
and
and
ZCK M5H7 5/72 5/102
5/46
ZCK M6
ZCK M6H29
5/72
5/72
ZCK Y415
ZCK Y43
5/105
5/102
ZCP 31
ZCP 35
5/46
5/46
10
ZCK M6H7 5/72 and
ZCK M7 5/72 5/105
10/7
General 1 0
Technical information 10
Protective treatment of equipment

according to climatic environment
Depending on the climatic and environmental conditions in which the equipment is

placed, Schneider Electric can offer specially adapted products to meet your
requirements.
In order to make the correct choice of protective finish, two points should be
remembered:
b the prevailing climate of the country is never the only criterion,
b only the atmosphere in the immediate vicinity of the equipment need be
considered.
All climates treatment “TC”

This is the standard treatment for Telemecanique brand equipment and is suitable
for the vast majority of applications. It is the equivalent of treatments described as
“Klimafest”, “Climateproof”.
In particular, it meets the requirements specified in the following publications:
b Publication UTE C 63-100 (method l), successive cycles of humid heat at:
+ 40 °C and 95 % relative humidity.
b DIN 50016 - Variations of ambient conditions within a climatic chamber:
+ 23 °C and 83 % relative humidity,
+ 40 °C and 92 % relative humidity.
It also meets the requirements of the following marine classification societies:

BV-LR-GL-DNV-RINA.
Characteristics
b Steel components are usually treated with zinc. When they have a mechanical
function, they may also be painted.
b Insulating materials are selected for their high electrical, dielectric and mechanical
characteristics.
b Metal enclosures have a stoved paint finish, applied over a primary phosphate
protective coat, or are galvanised (e.g. some prefabricated busbar trunking
components).
Limits for use of “TC” (All climates) treatment

b “TC” treatment is suitable for the following temperatures and humidity:
Temperature (°C) Relative humidity (%)
20 95
40 80
50 50
“TC” treatment is therefore suitable for all latitudes and in particular tropical and
equatorial regions where the equipment is mounted in normally ventilated industrial
premises. Being sheltered from external climatic conditions, temperature variations
are small, the risk of condensation is minimised and the risk of dripping water is
virtually non-existent.
Extension of use of “TC” (All climates) treatment

In cases where the humidity around the equipment exceeds the conditions described
above, or in equatorial regions if the equipment is mounted outdoors, or if it is placed
in a very humid location (laundries, sugar refineries, steam rooms, etc.), “TC”
treatment can still be used if the following precautions are taken:
b The enclosure in which the equipment is mounted must be protected with a “TH”
finish (see next page) and must be well ventilated to avoid condensation and dripping
water (e.g. enclosure base plate mounted on spacers).
b Components mounted inside the enclosure must have a “TC” finish.
b If the equipment is to be switched off for long periods, a heater must be provided
(0.2 to 0.5 kW per square decimetre of enclosure), that switches on automatically
when the equipment is turned off. This heater keeps the inside of the enclosure at a
temperature slightly higher than the outside surrounding temperature, thereby
avoiding any risk of condensation and dripping water (the heat produced by the
equipment itself during normal running is sufficient to provide this temperature
difference).
b Special considerations for "Operator dialog" and "Detection" products:
for certain pilot devices, the use of “TC” treatment can be extended to outdoor use
provided their enclosure is made of light alloys, zinc alloys or plastic material. In this
10 case, it is also essential to ensure that the degree of protection against penetration
of liquids and solid objects is suitable for the applications involved.
10/8
General 1 0
Protective treatment of equipment

according to climatic environment
“TH” treatment for hot and humid environments

This treatment is suitable for hot and humid atmospheres where installations are
regularly subject to condensation, dripping water and the risk of fungi.
In addition, plastic insulating components are resistant to attacks from insects such
as termites and cockroaches. These properties have often led to this treatment being
described as “Tropical Finish”, but this does not mean that all equipment installed in
tropical and equatorial regions must systematically have undergone “TH” treatment.
On the other hand, certain operating conditions in temperate climates may well
require the use of “TH” treated equipment (see limitations for use of “TC” treatment).
Special characteristics of “TH” treatment

b All insulating components are made of materials which are either resistant to fungi
or treated with a fungicide, and which have increased resistance to creepage
(Standards IEC 60112, NF C 26-220, DIN 5348).
b Metal enclosures receive a top-coat of stoved, fungicidal paint, applied over a rust
inhibiting undercoat. Components with “TH” treatment may be subject to a surcharge
(1). Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Protective treatment selection guide

Surrounding Duty cycle Internal Type of Protective
environment heating of climate treatment
enclosure of of
when not in equip- enclo-
use ment sure
Indoors
No dripping water Unimportant Not necessary Unimportant “TC” “TC”
or condensation
Presence of dripping Frequent No Temperate “TC” “TH”
water or condensation switching off for Equatorial “TH” “TH”
periods of more
Yes Unimportant “TC” “TH”
than 1 day
Continuous Not necessary Unimportant “TC” “TH”
Outdoors (sheltered)
No dripping water Unimportant Not necessary Temperate “TC” “TC”
or dew Equatorial “TH” “TH”
Exposed outdoors or near the sea
Frequent and regular Frequent No Temperate “TC” “TH”
presence of dripping switching off for Equatorial “TH” “TH”
water or dew periods of more
Yes Unimportant “TC” “TH”
than 1 day
Continuous Not necessary Unimportant “TC” “TH”
These treatments cover, in particular, the applications defined by methods I and II of

guide UTE C 63-100.
Special precautions for electronic equipment

Electronic products always meet the requirements of “TC” treatment. A number of
them are “TH” treated as standard.
Some electronic products (for example: programmable controllers, flush mountable

controllers CCX and flush mountable operator terminals XBT) require the use of an
enclosure providing a degree of protection to at least IP 54, as defined by standards
IEC 60664 and NF C 20 040, for use in industrial applications or in environmental
conditions requiring “TH” treatment.
These electronic products, including flush mountable products, must have a degree
of protection to at least IP 20 (provided either by their own enclosure or by their
installation method) for restricted access locations where the degree of pollution
does not exceed 2 (a test booth not containing machinery or other dust producing
activities, for example).
Special treatments
For particularly harsh industrial environments, Schneider Electric is able to offer
special protective treatments. Please consult your Regional Sales Office. 10
(1) A large number of the Telemecanique brand products are “TH” treated as standard and are,
therefore, not subject to a surcharge.
10/9
General 1 0
Product standards and certifications
Standardisation
Conformity to standards
Telemecanique brand products satisfy, in the majority of cases, national (for example: BS in
Great Britain, NF in France, DIN in Germany), European (for example: CENELEC) or
international (IEC) standards. These product standards precisely define the performance of the
designated products (such as IEC 60947 for low voltage equipment).
When used correctly, as designated by the manufacturer and in accordance with regulations and
correct practices, these products will allow users to build equipment, machine systems or
installations that conform to their appropriate standards (for example: IEC 60204-1, relating to
electrical equipment used on industrial machines).
Schneider Electric is able to provide proof of conformity of its production to the standards it has
chosen to comply with, through its quality assurance system.
On request, and depending on the situation, Schneider Electric can provide the following:
b a declaration of conformity,
b a certificate of conformity (ASEFA/LOVAG),
b a homologation certificate or approval, in the countries where this procedure is required or for
particular specifications, such as those existing in the merchant navy.
Code Certification authority Country

Name Abbreviation
ANSI American National Standards Institute ANSI USA
BS British Standards Institution BSI Great Britain
CEI Comitato Elettrotecnico Italiano CEI Italy
DIN/VDE Verband Deutscher Electrotechniker VDE Germany
EN Comité Européen de Normalisation Electrotechnique CENELEC Europe
GOST Gosudarstvenne Komitet Standartov GOST Russia
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Worldwide
JIS Japanese Industrial Standard JISC Japan
NBN Institut Belge de Normalisation IBN Belgium
NEN Nederlands Normalisatie Institut NNI Netherlands
NF Union Technique de l'Electricité UTE France
SAA Standards Association of Australia SAA Australia
UNE Asociacion Española de Normalizacion y Certificacion AENOR Spain
European EN standards
These are technical specifications established in conjunction with, and with approval of, the
relative bodies within the various CENELEC member countries (European Union, European Free
Trade Association and many central and eastern European countries having «member» or
«affiliated» status). Prepared in accordance with the principle of consensus, the European
standards are the result of a weighted majority vote. Such adopted standards are then integrated
into the national collection of standards, and contradictory national standards are withdrawn.
European standards incorporated within the French collection of standards carry the prefix
NF EN. At the 'Union Technique de l'Electricité' (Technical Union of Electricity) (UTE), the French
version of a corresponding European standard carries a dual number: European reference
(NF EN …) and classification index (C …).
Therefore, the standard NF EN 60947-4-1 relating to motor contactors and starters, effectively
constitutes the French version of the European standard EN 60947-4-1 and carries the UTE
classification C 63-110.
This standard is identical to the British standard BS EN 60947-4-1 or the German standard DIN
EN 60947-4-1.
Whenever reasonably practical, European standards reflect the international standards (IEC).
With regard to automation system components and distribution equipment, in addition to
complying with the requirements of French NF standards, Telemecanique brand components
conform to the standards of all other major industrial countries.
Regulations
European Directives
Opening up of European markets assumes harmonisation of the regulations pertaining to each
of the member countries of the European Union.
The purpose of the European Directive is to eliminate obstacles hindering the free circulation of
goods within the European Union, and it must be applied in all member countries. Member
countries are obliged to transcribe each Directive into their national legislation and to
simultaneously withdraw any contradictory regulations. The Directives, in particular those of a
technical nature which concern us, only establish the objectives to be achieved, referred to as
"essential requirements".
The manufacturer must take all the necessary measures to ensure that his products conform to
the requirements of each Directive applicable to his production.
As a general rule, the manufacturer certifies conformity to the essential requirements of the
Directive(s) for his product by affixing the e mark.
The e mark is affixed to Telemecanique brand products concerned, in order to comply with
French and European regulations.
Significance of the e mark

10 b The e mark affixed to a product signifies that the manufacturer certifies that the product
conforms to the relevant European Directive(s) which concern it; this condition must be met to
allow free distribution and circulation within the countries of the European Union of any product
subject to one or more of the E.U. Directives.
b The e mark is intended solely for national market control authorities.
b The e mark must not be confused with a conformity marking.
10/10
General 1 0
Product standards and certifications
European Directives (continued)

For electrical equipment, only conformity to standards signifies that the product is suitable for its
designated function, and only the guarantee of an established manufacturer can provide a high
level of quality assurance.
For Telemecanique brand products, one or several Directives are likely to be applicable,
depending on the product, and in particular:
b the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC amended by Directive 93/68/EEC: the e mark relating
to this Directive has been compulsory since 1st January 1997.
b the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC, amended by Directives 92/31/EEC
and 93/68/EEC: the e mark on products covered by this Directive has been compulsory since
1st January 1996
ASEFA-LOVAG certification
The function of ASEFA (Association des Stations d'Essais Française d'Appareils électriques -
Association of French Testing Stations for Low Voltage Industrial Electrical Equipment) is to carry
out tests of conformity to standards and to issue certificates of conformity and test reports.
ASEFA laboratories are authorised by the French authorisation committee (COFRAC).
ASEFA is now a member of the European agreement group LOVAG (Low Voltage Agreement
Group). This means that any certificates issued by LOVAG/ASEFA are recognised by all the
authorities which are members of the group and carry the same validity as those issued by any
of the member authorities.
Quality labels
When components can be used in domestic and similar applications, it is sometimes
recommended that a “Quality label” be obtained, which is a form of certification of conformity.
Code Quality label Country
CEBEC Comité Electrotechnique Belge Belgium
KEMA-KEUR Keuring van Electrotechnische Materialen Netherlands
NF Union Technique de l’Electricité France
ÖVE Österreichischer Verband für Electrotechnik Austria
SEMKO Svenska Electriska Materiel Kontrollanatalten Sweden
In some countries, the certification of certain electrical components is a legal requirement. In this
case, a certificate of conformity to the standard is issued by the official test authority.
Each certified device must bear the relevant certification symbols when these are mandatory:
Code Certification authority Country
CSA Canadian Standards Association Canada
UL Underwriters Laboratories USA
CCC China Compulsory Certification China
Note on certifications issued by the Underwriters Laboratories (UL). There are two levels of
approval:
“Recognized” ( ) The component is fully approved for inclusion in equipment built in a
workshop, where the operating limits are known by the equipment
manufacturer and where its use within such limits is acceptable by the
Underwriters Laboratories.
The component is not approved as a “Product for general use” because
its manufacturing characteristics are incomplete or its application
possibilities are limited.
A “Recognized” component does not necessarily carry the certification
symbol.
“Listed” (UL) The component conforms to all the requirements of the classification
applicable to it and may therefore be used both as a “Product for general
use” and as a component in assembled equipment. A “Listed” component
must carry the certification symbol.
Marine classification societies

Prior approval (= certification) by certain marine classification societies is generally required for
electrical equipment which is intended for use on board merchant vessels.
Code Classification authority Country
BV Bureau Veritas France
DNV Det Norske Veritas Norway
GL Germanischer Lloyd Germany
LR Lloyd's Register Great Britain
NKK Nippon Kaiji Kyokaï Japan
RINA Registro Italiano Navale Italy
RRS Register of Shipping Russia
Note
For further details on a specific product, please refer to the “Characteristics” pages in this
catalogue or consult your Regional Sales Office.
10
10/11
Presentation 1 0
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures

IP code
Degrees of protection against the penetration of solid The European standard EN 60529 dated October 1991, IEC publication 529
bodies, water and personnel access to live parts (2nd edition - November 1989), defines a coding system (IP code) for indicating the
degree of protection provided by electrical equipment enclosures against accidental
direct contact with live parts and against the ingress of solid foreign objects or water.
This standard does not apply to protection against the risk of explosion or conditions
such as humidity, corrosive gasses, fungi or vermin.
Certain equipment is designed to be mounted on an enclosure which will contribute
towards achieving the required degree of protection (example : control devices
mounted on an enclosure).
Different parts of an equipment can have different degrees of protection (example :
enclosure with an opening in the base).
Standard NF C 15-100 (May 1991 edition), section 512, table 51 A, provides a
cross-reference between the various degrees of protection and the environmental
conditions classification, relating to the selection of equipment according to external
factors.
Practical guide UTE C 15-103 shows, in the form of tables, the characteristics
required for electrical equipment (including minimum degrees of protection),
according to the locations in which they are installed.
IP ppp code
The IP code comprises 2 characteristic numerals (e.g. IP 55) and may include an additional letter when the actual protection of personnel
against direct contact with live parts is better than that indicated by the first numeral (e.g. IP 20C).
Any characteristic numeral which is unspecified is replaced by an X (e.g. IP XXB).
1st characteristic numeral: 2nd characteristic numeral: Additional letter:
corresponds to protection of the equipment against corresponds to protection of the equipment corresponds to protection of
penetration of solid objects and protection of personnel against penetration of water with harmful effects. personnel against direct contact
against direct contact with live parts. with live parts.
Protection of the equipment Protection of
personnel
0 Non-protected Non-protected 0 Non-protected A With the back of the hand.
1 Protected against Protected against 1 Protected against B With the finger.

the penetration of direct contact with vertical dripping water,
solid objects the back of the (condensation).
having a diameter hand (accidental
greater than or contacts).
equal to 50 mm
2 Protected against Protected against 2 Protected against C With a Ø 2.5 mm tool.
15˚
the penetration of direct finger dripping water at an
solid objects contact. angle of up to 15°.
having a diameter
greater than or
equal to 12.5 mm.
3 Protected against Protected against 3 ˚ Protected against rain at D With a Ø 1 mm wire.
the penetration of direct contact with 60 an angle of up to 60°.
solid objects a Ø 2.5 mm tool.
having a diameter
greater than or
equal to 2.5 mm.
4 Protected against Protected against 4 Protected against
the penetration of direct contact with splashing water in all
solid objects a Ø 1 mm wire. directions.
having a diameter
> 1 mm.
5 Dust protected Protected against 5 Protected against water
(no harmful direct contact with jets in all directions.
deposits). a Ø 1 mm wire.
6 Dust tight. Protected against 6 Protected against

direct contact with powerful jets of water
a Ø 1 mm wire. and waves.
7 15 cm Protected against the

1m
min
effects of temporary
immersion.
10 8
m
Protected against the
effects of prolonged
immersion under
specified conditions.
10/12
Presentation 1 0
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures

IK code
Degrees of protection against mechanical impact The European standard EN 50102 dated March 1995 defines a coding system
(IK code) for indicating the degree of protection provided by electrical equipment
enclosures against external mechanical impact.
Standard NF C 15-100 (May 1991 edition), section 512, table 51 A, provides a
cross-reference between the various degrees of protection and the environmental
conditions classification, relating to the selection of equipment according to external
factors.
Practical guide UTE C 15-103 shows, in the form of tables, the characteristics
required for electrical equipment (including minimum degrees of protection),
according to the locations in which they are installed.
IK pp code
The IK code comprises 2 characteristic numerals (e.g. IK 05).
2 characteristic numerals:
corresponding to a value of impact energy.
h (cm) Energy (J)

00 Non-protected
01 7.5 0.15
0,2 kg
02 h
10 0.2
03 17.5 0.35
04 25 0.5
05 35 0.7
06 20 1
0,5 kg
07 40 2
h
08 1,7 kg
30 5
09 5 kg 20 10
10 40 20
h
10
10/13
Essential guide to Telemecanique products,
the entire Automation and Control offering
in just 250 pages
Art. 960015 - DIA1ED2040506EN

This simplified selection guide enables you to quickly select the
products you need for all your applications.
Divided into sections covering key Automation functions, it provides
the basic product characteristics and references.
The efficiency of Telemecanique
branded solutions
Used in combination, Telemecanique products provide quality solutions,
meeting all your Automation & Control applications requirements.
A worldwide presence
Constantly available
1 More than 5 000 points of sale in 130 countries.
1 You can be sure to find the range of products that are right for you and which
complies fully with the standards in the country where they are used.
Technical assistance wherever you are

1 Our technicians are at your disposal to assist you in finding the optimum
solution for your particular needs.
1 Schneider Electric provides you with all necessary technical assistance,
throughout the world.
www.telemecanique.com
Simply Smart !
MKTED206101EN
Schneider Electric Industries SAS
Head Office Due to evolution of standards and equipment, the characteristics indicated in texts and images of this
89, bd Franklin Roosevelt document do not constitute a commitment on our part without confirmation.
92506 Rueil-Malmaison Cedex Design: Schneider Electric
France Photos: Schneider Electric
Printed by:
www.schneider-electric.com
ART. 821410 October 2006

Global Detection - Electronic and electromechanical sensors
2007
2006

Global Detection - Electronic and Electromechanical Sensors Catalogue 2006.10 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Global Detection - Electronic and Electromechanical Sensors Catalogue 2006.10 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

You will also find illustrated overviews, news to

Detection Automatisation Operator dialog Motion and Drives

p p p p p p p p all Automation & Control functions

This catalogue contains

Motor starter solutions

Safety solutions using Plug-in relays N° 809201 -

Switches, light curtains, mats

IP 20 distributed inputs/ Master modules for PLCs

ESC DEL MOD ENT

Information chain for an industrial process

The various detection functions

Additional sensor functions

Selection guide for the various technologies

Metal parts 60 mm All types Inductive Solid-state Robust, watertight,

All parts 300 mm Dust free Photo-electric Solid-state Long range

60 mm Dry Capacitive Solid-state Detection through all

15 m Without considerable Ultrasonic Solid-state Robust

2 – Inductive Proximity sensors

3 – Capacitive proximity sensors

6 – Sensors for pressure control

8 – RFID - radio frequency identification

9 – Machine cabling accessories

(1) Select the sensor according to your specific requirements

«Universal» series «Optimum» series «Application» series

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 1/2

b Osiconcept®: Offering Simplicity through Innovation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/10

Osiris® Universal, Osiconcept®

b Miniature design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/30

b Compact design, 50 x 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/34

b Compact design, 30 x 92 x 77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/38

v Plastic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/26

b Miniature design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/32

b Compact design, 50 x 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/36

b Compact design, 30 x 92 x 77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/40

Osiris® Universal and Optimum

Osiris® other formats, general use

v Solid-state output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/54

Osiris® Application, assembly series

b Dynamic detection of passage of objects, counting parts. . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/66

b For detection of transparent materials, with teach mode and automatic

b For detection of labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/74

b For colour detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/76

b For detection of contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/80

b Colour mark readers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/82

b Luminescence sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/84

Osiris® Application, materials handling series

b With analogue output signal 4…20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/88

b With analogue output signal 4…20 mA and 0…10 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/90

b Thru-beam system with high “excess gain” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/92

b Laser transmission. Plastic case, cylindrical, M18 x 1 threaded . . . . . . page 1/94

b Optical fork type with integral amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/96

Osiris® Application, tertiary sector series

b With integral buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/100

Osiris® Application, food and beverage processing

b Stainless steel case M18 x 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/104

Osiris® Application AC/DC

Osiris® Universel, Optimum and Application

b General, curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/116

b Substitution table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/128

Dimensions (w x h x d) in mm Ø 18, threaded M18 x 1

Maximum Without accessory (diffuse with 0.12 0.12

Type reference XUB 0A XUB 0B